standardize the use of unix eol; use svn properties to enforce native eol

author: ctrlaltca <> 2012-07-12 11:21:01 +0000
committer: ctrlaltca <> 2012-07-12 11:21:01 +0000
commit: 903ae8a581fac1e6917fc3e31d2ad8fb91df80c3 (patch)
tree: e08bf04f0823650a231227ac3499121270172a23 /framework/Web/UI/WebControls
parent: 3e4e6e66aeb3f8fea4e1eb4237498ef9d2358f63 (diff)
91 files changed, 31558 insertions, 31558 deletions
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TAccordion.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TAccordion.php
index 22ff6b71..bfe3451d 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TAccordion.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TAccordion.php
@@ -1,744 +1,744 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TAccordion class file.
- *
- * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.2
- */
-
-/**
- * Class TAccordion.
- *
- * TAccordion displays an accordion control. Users can click on the view headers to switch among
- * different accordion views. Each accordion view is an independent panel that can contain arbitrary content.
- *
- * A TAccordion control consists of one or several {@link TAccordionView} controls representing the possible
- * accordion views. At any time, only one accordion view is visible (active), which is specified by any of
- * the following properties:
- * - {@link setActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex} - the zero-based integer index of the view in the view collection.
- * - {@link setActiveViewID ActiveViewID} - the text ID of the visible view.
- * - {@link setActiveView ActiveView} - the visible view instance.
- * If both {@link setActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex} and {@link setActiveViewID ActiveViewID}
- * are set, the latter takes precedence.
- *
- * TAccordion uses CSS to specify the appearance of the accordion headers and panel. By default,
- * an embedded CSS file will be published which contains the default CSS for TTabPanel.
- * You may also use your own CSS file by specifying the {@link setCssUrl CssUrl} property.
- * The following properties specify the CSS classes used for elements in a TAccordion:
- * - {@link setCssClass CssClass} - the CSS class name for the outer-most div element (defaults to 'accordion');
- * - {@link setHeaderCssClass HeaderCssClass} - the CSS class name for nonactive accordion div elements (defaults to 'accordion-header');
- * - {@link setActiveHeaderCssClass ActiveHeaderCssClass} - the CSS class name for the active accordion div element (defaults to 'accordion-header-active');
- * - {@link setViewCssClass ViewCssClass} - the CSS class for the div element enclosing view content (defaults to 'accordion-view');
- *
- * When the user clicks on a view header, the switch between the old visible view and the clicked one is animated.
- * You can use the {@link setAnimationDuration AnimationDuration} property to set the animation length in seconds;
- * it defaults to 1 second, and when set to 0 it will produce an immediate switch with no animation.
- *
- * The TAccordion auto-sizes itself to the largest of all views, so it can encompass all of them without scrolling.
- * If you want to specify a fixed height (in pixels), use the {@link setViewHeight ViewHeight} property.
- * When a TAccordion is nested inside another, it's adviced to manually specify a {@link setViewHeight ViewHeight} for the internal TAccordion
- *
- * To use TAccordion, write a template like following:
- * <code>
- * <com:TAccordion>
- *   <com:TAccordionView Caption="View 1">
- *     content for view 1
- *   </com:TAccordionView>
- *   <com:TAccordionView Caption="View 2">
- *     content for view 2
- *   </com:TAccordionView>
- *   <com:TAccordionView Caption="View 3">
- *     content for view 3
- *   </com:TAccordionView>
- * </com:TAccordion>
- * </code>
- *
- * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.2
- */
-
-class TAccordion extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler
-{
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name for the control
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'div';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
-	 * This method adds only {@link TAccordionView} objects into the {@link getViews Views} collection.
-	 * All other objects are ignored.
-	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof TAccordionView)
-			$this->getControls()->add($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the index of the active accordion view.
-	 * Note, this property may not return the correct index.
-	 * To ensure the correctness, call {@link getActiveView()} first.
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the active accordion view. If -1, it means no active accordion view. Default is 0 (the first view is active).
-	 */
-	public function getActiveViewIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ActiveViewIndex',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current view in the view collection. -1 if no active view.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the view index is invalid
-	 */
-	public function setActiveViewIndex($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ActiveViewIndex',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the ID of the active accordion view.
-	 * Note, this property may not return the correct ID.
-	 * To ensure the correctness, call {@link getActiveView()} first.
-	 * @return string The ID of the active accordion view. Defaults to '', meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getActiveViewID()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ActiveViewID','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string The ID of the active accordion view.
-	 */
-	public function setActiveViewID($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ActiveViewID',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the currently active view.
-	 * This method will examin the ActiveViewID, ActiveViewIndex and Views collection to
-	 * determine which view is currently active. It will update ActiveViewID and ActiveViewIndex accordingly.
-	 * @return TAccordionView the currently active view, null if no active view
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the active view ID or index set previously is invalid
-	 */
-	public function getActiveView()
-	{
-		$activeView=null;
-		$views=$this->getViews();
-		if(($id=$this->getActiveViewID())!=='')
-		{
-			if(($index=$views->findIndexByID($id))>=0)
-				$activeView=$views->itemAt($index);
-			else
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tabpanel_activeviewid_invalid',$id);
-		}
-		else if(($index=$this->getActiveViewIndex())>=0)
-		{
-			if($index<$views->getCount())
-				$activeView=$views->itemAt($index);
-			else
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tabpanel_activeviewindex_invalid',$index);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			foreach($views as $index=>$view)
-			{
-				if($view->getActive())
-				{
-					$activeView=$view;
-					break;
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		if($activeView!==null)
-			$this->activateView($activeView);
-		return $activeView;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TAccordionView the view to be activated
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if the view is not in the view collection
-	 */
-	public function setActiveView($view)
-	{
-		if($this->getViews()->indexOf($view)>=0)
-			$this->activateView($view);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidOperationException('tabpanel_view_inexistent');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	* @return string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions. Defaults to ''.
-	*/
-	public function getCssUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CssUrl','default');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	* @param string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions.
-	*/
-	public function setCssUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CssUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-		* @return string CSS class for the whole accordion control div. 
-	*/
-	public function getCssClass()
-	{
-		$cssClass=parent::getCssClass();
-			return $cssClass===''?'accordion':$cssClass;
-	}
-
-	/**
-		* @return string CSS class for the currently displayed view div. Defaults to 'accordion-view'.
-	*/
-	public function getViewCssClass()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewStyle()->getCssClass();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	* @param string CSS class for the currently displayed view div.
-	*/
-	public function setViewCssClass($value)
-	{
-		$this->getViewStyle()->setCssClass($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-		* @return string CSS class for the currently displayed view div. Defaults to 'accordion-view'.
-	*/
-	public function getAnimationDuration()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AnimationDuration','1');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	* @param string CSS class for the currently displayed view div.
-	*/
-	public function setAnimationDuration($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AnimationDuration',$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style for all the view div
-	 */
-	public function getViewStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ViewStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$style->setCssClass('accordion-view');
-			$this->setViewState('ViewStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string CSS class for view headers. Defaults to 'accordion-header'.
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderCssClass()
-	{
-		return $this->getHeaderStyle()->getCssClass();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string CSS class for view headers.
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderCssClass($value)
-	{
-		$this->getHeaderStyle()->setCssClass($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style for all the inactive header div
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$style->setCssClass('accordion-header');
-			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string Extra CSS class for the active header. Defaults to 'accordion-header-active'.
-	 */
-	public function getActiveHeaderCssClass()
-	{
-		return $this->getActiveHeaderStyle()->getCssClass();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string Extra CSS class for the active header. Will be added to the normal header specified by HeaderCssClass.
-	 */
-	public function setActiveHeaderCssClass($value)
-	{
-		$this->getActiveHeaderStyle()->setCssClass($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style for the active header div
-	 */
-	public function getActiveHeaderStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ActiveHeaderStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$style->setCssClass('accordion-header-active');
-			$this->setViewState('ActiveHeaderStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer Maximum height for the accordion views. If non specified, the accordion will auto-sized to the largest of all views, so it can encompass all of them without scrolling
-	 */
-	public function getViewHeight()
-	{
-		return TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($this->getViewState('ViewHeight'));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer Maximum height for the accordion views. If any of the accordion's views' content is larger, those views will be made scrollable when activated
-	 */
-	public function setViewHeight($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ViewHeight', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Activates the specified view.
-	 * If there is any other view currently active, it will be deactivated.
-	 * @param TAccordionView the view to be activated. If null, all views will be deactivated.
-	 */
-	protected function activateView($view)
-	{
-		$this->setActiveViewIndex(-1);
-		$this->setActiveViewID('');
-		foreach($this->getViews() as $index=>$v)
-		{
-			if($view===$v)
-			{
-				$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
-				$this->setActiveViewID($view->getID(false));
-				$view->setActive(true);
-			}
-			else
-				$v->setActive(false);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		if(($index=$values[$this->getClientID().'_1'])!==null)
-		{
-			$index=(int)$index;
-			$currentIndex=$this->getActiveViewIndex();
-			if($currentIndex!==$index)
-			{
-				$this->setActiveViewID(''); // clear up view ID
-				$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
-				return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
-	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex} property
-	 * is changed on postback.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		// do nothing
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		$this->setCssClass($this->getCssClass());
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers CSS and JS.
-	 * This method is invoked right before the control rendering, if the control is visible.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		$this->getActiveView();  // determine the active view
-		$this->registerStyleSheet();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the CSS relevant to the TAccordion.
-	 * It will register the CSS file specified by {@link getCssUrl CssUrl}.
-	 * If that is not set, it will use the default CSS.
-	 */
-	protected function registerStyleSheet()
-	{
-		$url = $this->getCssUrl();
-		
-		if($url === '') {
-			return;
-		}
-		
-		if($url === 'default') {
-			$url = $this->getApplication()->getAssetManager()->publishFilePath(dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'accordion.css');
-		}
-		
-		if($url !== '') {
-			$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the relevant JavaScript.
-	 */
-	protected function registerClientScript()
-	{
-		$id=$this->getClientID();
-		$options=TJavaScript::encode($this->getClientOptions());
-		$className=$this->getClientClassName();
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$cs=$page->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPradoScript('accordion');
-		$code="new $className($options);";
-		$cs->registerEndScript("prado:$id", $code);
-		// ensure an item is always active and visible
-		$index = $this->getActiveViewIndex();
-		if(!$this->getViews()->itemAt($index)->Visible)
-			$index=0;
-		$cs->registerHiddenField($id.'_1', $index);
-		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this);
-		$page->registerRequiresPostData($id."_1");
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TAccordion';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array the options for JavaScript
-	 */
-	protected function getClientOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['ActiveHeaderCssClass'] = $this->getActiveHeaderCssClass();
-		$options['HeaderCssClass'] = $this->getHeaderCssClass();
-		$options['Duration'] = $this->getAnimationDuration();
-
-		if (($viewheight = $this->getViewHeight())>0)
-			$options['maxHeight'] = $viewheight;
-		$views = array();
-		foreach($this->getViews() as $view)
-			$views[$view->getClientID()] = $view->getVisible() ? '1': '0';
-		$options['Views'] = $views;
-
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
-	 * @return TAccordionViewCollection control collection
-	 */
-	protected function createControlCollection()
-	{
-		return new TAccordionViewCollection($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TAccordionViewCollection list of {@link TAccordionView} controls
-	 */
-	public function getViews()
-	{
-		return $this->getControls();
-	}
-
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$this->registerClientScript();
-		parent::render($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body contents of the accordion control.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		$views=$this->getViews();
-		if($views->getCount()>0)
-		{
-			$writer->writeLine();
-			foreach($views as $view)
-			{
-				$view->renderHeader($writer);
-				$view->renderControl($writer);
-				$writer->writeLine();
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-}
-
-/**
- * Class TAccordionView.
- *
- * TAccordionView represents a single view in a {@link TAccordion}.
- * 
- * TAccordionView is represented inside the {@link TAccordion} with an header label whose text is defined by
- * the {@link setCaption Caption} property; optionally the label can be an hyperlink: use the
- * {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} property to define the destination url.
- *
- * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.2
- */
-class TAccordionView extends TWebControl
-{
-	private $_active=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return the tag name for the view element
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'div';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if(!$this->getActive() && $this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-			$this->getStyle()->setStyleField('display','none');
-
-		$this->getStyle()->mergeWith($this->getParent()->getViewStyle());
-
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the caption displayed on this header. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getCaption()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Caption','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the caption displayed on this header
-	 */
-	public function setCaption($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Caption',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the target page. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigateUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL of the target page.
-	 * If not empty, clicking on this header will redirect the browser to the specified URL.
-	 * @param string the URL of the target page.
-	 */
-	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text content displayed on this view. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text content to be displayed on this view.
-	 * If this is not empty, the child content of the view will be ignored.
-	 * @param string the text content displayed on this view
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether this accordion view is active. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getActive()
-	{
-		return $this->_active;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether this accordion view is active.
-	 */
-	public function setActive($value)
-	{
-		$this->_active=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body contents of the accordion view.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-			$writer->write($text);
-		else if($this->getHasControls())
-			parent::renderContents($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the header associated with the accordion view.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function renderHeader($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getVisible(false) && $this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID().'_0');
-
-			$style=$this->getActive()?$this->getParent()->getActiveHeaderStyle():$this->getParent()->getHeaderStyle();
-			
-			$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-
-			$writer->renderBeginTag($this->getTagName());
-
-			$this->renderHeaderContent($writer);
-
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the content in the header.
-	 * By default, a hyperlink is displayed.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the HTML writer
-	 */
-	protected function renderHeaderContent($writer)
-	{
-		$url = $this->getNavigateUrl();
-		if(($caption=$this->getCaption())==='')
-			$caption='&nbsp;';
-			
-		if ($url!='')
-			$writer->write("<a href=\"{$url}\">");
-		$writer->write("{$caption}");
-		if ($url!='')
-			$writer->write("</a>");
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * Class TAccordionViewCollection.
- *
- * TAccordionViewCollection is a collection of {@link TAccordionView} to be used inside a {@link TAccordion}.
- * 
- * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.2
- */
-class TAccordionViewCollection extends TControlCollection
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing sanity check on the type of new item.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a {@link TAccordionView} object.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TAccordionView)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('tabviewcollection_tabview_required');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Finds the index of the accordion view whose ID is the same as the one being looked for.
-	 * @param string the explicit ID of the accordion view to be looked for
-	 * @return integer the index of the accordion view found, -1 if not found.
-	 */
-	public function findIndexByID($id)
-	{
-		foreach($this as $index=>$view)
-		{
-			if($view->getID(false)===$id)
-				return $index;
-		}
-		return -1;
-	}
-}
-
-?>
+<?php
+/**
+ * TAccordion class file.
+ *
+ * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.2
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Class TAccordion.
+ *
+ * TAccordion displays an accordion control. Users can click on the view headers to switch among
+ * different accordion views. Each accordion view is an independent panel that can contain arbitrary content.
+ *
+ * A TAccordion control consists of one or several {@link TAccordionView} controls representing the possible
+ * accordion views. At any time, only one accordion view is visible (active), which is specified by any of
+ * the following properties:
+ * - {@link setActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex} - the zero-based integer index of the view in the view collection.
+ * - {@link setActiveViewID ActiveViewID} - the text ID of the visible view.
+ * - {@link setActiveView ActiveView} - the visible view instance.
+ * If both {@link setActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex} and {@link setActiveViewID ActiveViewID}
+ * are set, the latter takes precedence.
+ *
+ * TAccordion uses CSS to specify the appearance of the accordion headers and panel. By default,
+ * an embedded CSS file will be published which contains the default CSS for TTabPanel.
+ * You may also use your own CSS file by specifying the {@link setCssUrl CssUrl} property.
+ * The following properties specify the CSS classes used for elements in a TAccordion:
+ * - {@link setCssClass CssClass} - the CSS class name for the outer-most div element (defaults to 'accordion');
+ * - {@link setHeaderCssClass HeaderCssClass} - the CSS class name for nonactive accordion div elements (defaults to 'accordion-header');
+ * - {@link setActiveHeaderCssClass ActiveHeaderCssClass} - the CSS class name for the active accordion div element (defaults to 'accordion-header-active');
+ * - {@link setViewCssClass ViewCssClass} - the CSS class for the div element enclosing view content (defaults to 'accordion-view');
+ *
+ * When the user clicks on a view header, the switch between the old visible view and the clicked one is animated.
+ * You can use the {@link setAnimationDuration AnimationDuration} property to set the animation length in seconds;
+ * it defaults to 1 second, and when set to 0 it will produce an immediate switch with no animation.
+ *
+ * The TAccordion auto-sizes itself to the largest of all views, so it can encompass all of them without scrolling.
+ * If you want to specify a fixed height (in pixels), use the {@link setViewHeight ViewHeight} property.
+ * When a TAccordion is nested inside another, it's adviced to manually specify a {@link setViewHeight ViewHeight} for the internal TAccordion
+ *
+ * To use TAccordion, write a template like following:
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TAccordion>
+ *   <com:TAccordionView Caption="View 1">
+ *     content for view 1
+ *   </com:TAccordionView>
+ *   <com:TAccordionView Caption="View 2">
+ *     content for view 2
+ *   </com:TAccordionView>
+ *   <com:TAccordionView Caption="View 3">
+ *     content for view 3
+ *   </com:TAccordionView>
+ * </com:TAccordion>
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.2
+ */
+
+class TAccordion extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler
+{
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name for the control
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'div';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
+	 * This method adds only {@link TAccordionView} objects into the {@link getViews Views} collection.
+	 * All other objects are ignored.
+	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof TAccordionView)
+			$this->getControls()->add($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the index of the active accordion view.
+	 * Note, this property may not return the correct index.
+	 * To ensure the correctness, call {@link getActiveView()} first.
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the active accordion view. If -1, it means no active accordion view. Default is 0 (the first view is active).
+	 */
+	public function getActiveViewIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ActiveViewIndex',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current view in the view collection. -1 if no active view.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the view index is invalid
+	 */
+	public function setActiveViewIndex($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ActiveViewIndex',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the ID of the active accordion view.
+	 * Note, this property may not return the correct ID.
+	 * To ensure the correctness, call {@link getActiveView()} first.
+	 * @return string The ID of the active accordion view. Defaults to '', meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getActiveViewID()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ActiveViewID','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string The ID of the active accordion view.
+	 */
+	public function setActiveViewID($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ActiveViewID',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the currently active view.
+	 * This method will examin the ActiveViewID, ActiveViewIndex and Views collection to
+	 * determine which view is currently active. It will update ActiveViewID and ActiveViewIndex accordingly.
+	 * @return TAccordionView the currently active view, null if no active view
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the active view ID or index set previously is invalid
+	 */
+	public function getActiveView()
+	{
+		$activeView=null;
+		$views=$this->getViews();
+		if(($id=$this->getActiveViewID())!=='')
+		{
+			if(($index=$views->findIndexByID($id))>=0)
+				$activeView=$views->itemAt($index);
+			else
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tabpanel_activeviewid_invalid',$id);
+		}
+		else if(($index=$this->getActiveViewIndex())>=0)
+		{
+			if($index<$views->getCount())
+				$activeView=$views->itemAt($index);
+			else
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tabpanel_activeviewindex_invalid',$index);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			foreach($views as $index=>$view)
+			{
+				if($view->getActive())
+				{
+					$activeView=$view;
+					break;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if($activeView!==null)
+			$this->activateView($activeView);
+		return $activeView;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TAccordionView the view to be activated
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if the view is not in the view collection
+	 */
+	public function setActiveView($view)
+	{
+		if($this->getViews()->indexOf($view)>=0)
+			$this->activateView($view);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidOperationException('tabpanel_view_inexistent');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	* @return string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions. Defaults to ''.
+	*/
+	public function getCssUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CssUrl','default');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	* @param string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions.
+	*/
+	public function setCssUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CssUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+		* @return string CSS class for the whole accordion control div. 
+	*/
+	public function getCssClass()
+	{
+		$cssClass=parent::getCssClass();
+			return $cssClass===''?'accordion':$cssClass;
+	}
+
+	/**
+		* @return string CSS class for the currently displayed view div. Defaults to 'accordion-view'.
+	*/
+	public function getViewCssClass()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewStyle()->getCssClass();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	* @param string CSS class for the currently displayed view div.
+	*/
+	public function setViewCssClass($value)
+	{
+		$this->getViewStyle()->setCssClass($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+		* @return string CSS class for the currently displayed view div. Defaults to 'accordion-view'.
+	*/
+	public function getAnimationDuration()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AnimationDuration','1');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	* @param string CSS class for the currently displayed view div.
+	*/
+	public function setAnimationDuration($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AnimationDuration',$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style for all the view div
+	 */
+	public function getViewStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ViewStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$style->setCssClass('accordion-view');
+			$this->setViewState('ViewStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string CSS class for view headers. Defaults to 'accordion-header'.
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderCssClass()
+	{
+		return $this->getHeaderStyle()->getCssClass();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string CSS class for view headers.
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderCssClass($value)
+	{
+		$this->getHeaderStyle()->setCssClass($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style for all the inactive header div
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$style->setCssClass('accordion-header');
+			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string Extra CSS class for the active header. Defaults to 'accordion-header-active'.
+	 */
+	public function getActiveHeaderCssClass()
+	{
+		return $this->getActiveHeaderStyle()->getCssClass();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string Extra CSS class for the active header. Will be added to the normal header specified by HeaderCssClass.
+	 */
+	public function setActiveHeaderCssClass($value)
+	{
+		$this->getActiveHeaderStyle()->setCssClass($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style for the active header div
+	 */
+	public function getActiveHeaderStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ActiveHeaderStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$style->setCssClass('accordion-header-active');
+			$this->setViewState('ActiveHeaderStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer Maximum height for the accordion views. If non specified, the accordion will auto-sized to the largest of all views, so it can encompass all of them without scrolling
+	 */
+	public function getViewHeight()
+	{
+		return TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($this->getViewState('ViewHeight'));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer Maximum height for the accordion views. If any of the accordion's views' content is larger, those views will be made scrollable when activated
+	 */
+	public function setViewHeight($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ViewHeight', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Activates the specified view.
+	 * If there is any other view currently active, it will be deactivated.
+	 * @param TAccordionView the view to be activated. If null, all views will be deactivated.
+	 */
+	protected function activateView($view)
+	{
+		$this->setActiveViewIndex(-1);
+		$this->setActiveViewID('');
+		foreach($this->getViews() as $index=>$v)
+		{
+			if($view===$v)
+			{
+				$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
+				$this->setActiveViewID($view->getID(false));
+				$view->setActive(true);
+			}
+			else
+				$v->setActive(false);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		if(($index=$values[$this->getClientID().'_1'])!==null)
+		{
+			$index=(int)$index;
+			$currentIndex=$this->getActiveViewIndex();
+			if($currentIndex!==$index)
+			{
+				$this->setActiveViewID(''); // clear up view ID
+				$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
+				return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
+	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex} property
+	 * is changed on postback.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		// do nothing
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		$this->setCssClass($this->getCssClass());
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers CSS and JS.
+	 * This method is invoked right before the control rendering, if the control is visible.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		$this->getActiveView();  // determine the active view
+		$this->registerStyleSheet();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the CSS relevant to the TAccordion.
+	 * It will register the CSS file specified by {@link getCssUrl CssUrl}.
+	 * If that is not set, it will use the default CSS.
+	 */
+	protected function registerStyleSheet()
+	{
+		$url = $this->getCssUrl();
+		
+		if($url === '') {
+			return;
+		}
+		
+		if($url === 'default') {
+			$url = $this->getApplication()->getAssetManager()->publishFilePath(dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'accordion.css');
+		}
+		
+		if($url !== '') {
+			$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the relevant JavaScript.
+	 */
+	protected function registerClientScript()
+	{
+		$id=$this->getClientID();
+		$options=TJavaScript::encode($this->getClientOptions());
+		$className=$this->getClientClassName();
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$cs=$page->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPradoScript('accordion');
+		$code="new $className($options);";
+		$cs->registerEndScript("prado:$id", $code);
+		// ensure an item is always active and visible
+		$index = $this->getActiveViewIndex();
+		if(!$this->getViews()->itemAt($index)->Visible)
+			$index=0;
+		$cs->registerHiddenField($id.'_1', $index);
+		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this);
+		$page->registerRequiresPostData($id."_1");
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TAccordion';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array the options for JavaScript
+	 */
+	protected function getClientOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['ActiveHeaderCssClass'] = $this->getActiveHeaderCssClass();
+		$options['HeaderCssClass'] = $this->getHeaderCssClass();
+		$options['Duration'] = $this->getAnimationDuration();
+
+		if (($viewheight = $this->getViewHeight())>0)
+			$options['maxHeight'] = $viewheight;
+		$views = array();
+		foreach($this->getViews() as $view)
+			$views[$view->getClientID()] = $view->getVisible() ? '1': '0';
+		$options['Views'] = $views;
+
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
+	 * @return TAccordionViewCollection control collection
+	 */
+	protected function createControlCollection()
+	{
+		return new TAccordionViewCollection($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TAccordionViewCollection list of {@link TAccordionView} controls
+	 */
+	public function getViews()
+	{
+		return $this->getControls();
+	}
+
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$this->registerClientScript();
+		parent::render($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body contents of the accordion control.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		$views=$this->getViews();
+		if($views->getCount()>0)
+		{
+			$writer->writeLine();
+			foreach($views as $view)
+			{
+				$view->renderHeader($writer);
+				$view->renderControl($writer);
+				$writer->writeLine();
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * Class TAccordionView.
+ *
+ * TAccordionView represents a single view in a {@link TAccordion}.
+ * 
+ * TAccordionView is represented inside the {@link TAccordion} with an header label whose text is defined by
+ * the {@link setCaption Caption} property; optionally the label can be an hyperlink: use the
+ * {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} property to define the destination url.
+ *
+ * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.2
+ */
+class TAccordionView extends TWebControl
+{
+	private $_active=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return the tag name for the view element
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'div';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if(!$this->getActive() && $this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+			$this->getStyle()->setStyleField('display','none');
+
+		$this->getStyle()->mergeWith($this->getParent()->getViewStyle());
+
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the caption displayed on this header. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getCaption()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Caption','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the caption displayed on this header
+	 */
+	public function setCaption($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Caption',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the target page. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigateUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL of the target page.
+	 * If not empty, clicking on this header will redirect the browser to the specified URL.
+	 * @param string the URL of the target page.
+	 */
+	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text content displayed on this view. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text content to be displayed on this view.
+	 * If this is not empty, the child content of the view will be ignored.
+	 * @param string the text content displayed on this view
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether this accordion view is active. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getActive()
+	{
+		return $this->_active;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether this accordion view is active.
+	 */
+	public function setActive($value)
+	{
+		$this->_active=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body contents of the accordion view.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+			$writer->write($text);
+		else if($this->getHasControls())
+			parent::renderContents($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the header associated with the accordion view.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function renderHeader($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getVisible(false) && $this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID().'_0');
+
+			$style=$this->getActive()?$this->getParent()->getActiveHeaderStyle():$this->getParent()->getHeaderStyle();
+			
+			$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+
+			$writer->renderBeginTag($this->getTagName());
+
+			$this->renderHeaderContent($writer);
+
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the content in the header.
+	 * By default, a hyperlink is displayed.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the HTML writer
+	 */
+	protected function renderHeaderContent($writer)
+	{
+		$url = $this->getNavigateUrl();
+		if(($caption=$this->getCaption())==='')
+			$caption='&nbsp;';
+			
+		if ($url!='')
+			$writer->write("<a href=\"{$url}\">");
+		$writer->write("{$caption}");
+		if ($url!='')
+			$writer->write("</a>");
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Class TAccordionViewCollection.
+ *
+ * TAccordionViewCollection is a collection of {@link TAccordionView} to be used inside a {@link TAccordion}.
+ * 
+ * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @version $Id: TAccordion.php 2915 2011-05-15 16:26:11Z ctrlaltca@gmail.com $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.2
+ */
+class TAccordionViewCollection extends TControlCollection
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing sanity check on the type of new item.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a {@link TAccordionView} object.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TAccordionView)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('tabviewcollection_tabview_required');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Finds the index of the accordion view whose ID is the same as the one being looked for.
+	 * @param string the explicit ID of the accordion view to be looked for
+	 * @return integer the index of the accordion view found, -1 if not found.
+	 */
+	public function findIndexByID($id)
+	{
+		foreach($this as $index=>$view)
+		{
+			if($view->getID(false)===$id)
+				return $index;
+		}
+		return -1;
+	}
+}
+
+?>
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBaseDataList.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBaseDataList.php
index bc591174..01e7dbcf 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBaseDataList.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBaseDataList.php
@@ -1,190 +1,190 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TBaseDataList class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TBaseDataList class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TDataBoundControl and TDataFieldAccessor classes
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
-Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
-
-/**
- * TBaseDataList class
- *
- * TBaseDataList is the base class for data listing controls, including
- * {@link TDataList} and {@link TDataGrid}.
- *
- * The key field in the data source is specified by {@link setKeyField KeyField},
- * while {@link getKeyValues KeyValues} stores the key values of each record in
- * a data listing control. You may use the list item index to obtain the corresponding
- * database key value.
- *
- * TBaseDataList also implements a few properties used for presentation based
- * on tabular layout. The {@link setCaption Caption}, whose alignment is
- * specified via {@link setCaptionAlign CaptionAlign}, is rendered as the table caption.
- * The table cellpadding and cellspacing are specified by
- * {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing}
- * properties, respectively. The {@link setGridLines GridLines} specifies how
- * the table should display its borders, and the horizontal alignment of the table
- * content can be specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-abstract class TBaseDataList extends TDataBoundControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object for the control.
-	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by the data list control.
-	 * @return TTableStyle control style to be used
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the cellspacing for the table layout. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellSpacing()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getCellSpacing();
-		else
-			return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the cellspacing for the table layout.
-	 */
-	public function setCellSpacing($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setCellSpacing($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the cellpadding for the table layout. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellPadding()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getCellPadding();
-		else
-			return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the cellpadding for the table layout
-	 */
-	public function setCellPadding($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setCellPadding($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content. Defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
-		else
-			return THorizontalAlign::NotSet;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content.
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table layout. Defaults to TTableGridLines::None.
-	 */
-	public function getGridLines()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getGridLines();
-		else
-			return TTableGridLines::None;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the grid line style of the table layout.
-	 * @param TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table
-	 */
-	public function setGridLines($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setGridLines($value);
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
-	 */
-	public function getDataKeyField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataKeyField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
-	 */
-	public function setDataKeyField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataKeyField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TList the keys used in the data listing control.
-	 */
-	public function getDataKeys()
-	{
-		if(($dataKeys=$this->getViewState('DataKeys',null))===null)
-		{
-			$dataKeys=new TList;
-			$this->setViewState('DataKeys',$dataKeys,null);
-		}
-		return $dataKeys;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value of the data at the specified field.
-	 * If data is an array, TMap or TList, the value will be returned at the index
-	 * of the specified field. If the data is a component with a property named
-	 * as the field name, the property value will be returned.
-	 * Otherwise, an exception will be raised.
-	 * @param mixed data item
-	 * @param mixed field name
-	 * @return mixed data value at the specified field
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the data is invalid
-	 */
-	protected function getDataFieldValue($data,$field)
-	{
-		return TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises OnSelectedIndexChanged event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a different item is selected
-	 * in a data listing control between posts to the server.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onSelectedIndexChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnSelectedIndexChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TDataBoundControl and TDataFieldAccessor classes
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
+Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
+
+/**
+ * TBaseDataList class
+ *
+ * TBaseDataList is the base class for data listing controls, including
+ * {@link TDataList} and {@link TDataGrid}.
+ *
+ * The key field in the data source is specified by {@link setKeyField KeyField},
+ * while {@link getKeyValues KeyValues} stores the key values of each record in
+ * a data listing control. You may use the list item index to obtain the corresponding
+ * database key value.
+ *
+ * TBaseDataList also implements a few properties used for presentation based
+ * on tabular layout. The {@link setCaption Caption}, whose alignment is
+ * specified via {@link setCaptionAlign CaptionAlign}, is rendered as the table caption.
+ * The table cellpadding and cellspacing are specified by
+ * {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing}
+ * properties, respectively. The {@link setGridLines GridLines} specifies how
+ * the table should display its borders, and the horizontal alignment of the table
+ * content can be specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+abstract class TBaseDataList extends TDataBoundControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object for the control.
+	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by the data list control.
+	 * @return TTableStyle control style to be used
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the cellspacing for the table layout. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellSpacing()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getCellSpacing();
+		else
+			return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the cellspacing for the table layout.
+	 */
+	public function setCellSpacing($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setCellSpacing($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the cellpadding for the table layout. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellPadding()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getCellPadding();
+		else
+			return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the cellpadding for the table layout
+	 */
+	public function setCellPadding($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setCellPadding($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content. Defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
+		else
+			return THorizontalAlign::NotSet;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content.
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table layout. Defaults to TTableGridLines::None.
+	 */
+	public function getGridLines()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getGridLines();
+		else
+			return TTableGridLines::None;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the grid line style of the table layout.
+	 * @param TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table
+	 */
+	public function setGridLines($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setGridLines($value);
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
+	 */
+	public function getDataKeyField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataKeyField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
+	 */
+	public function setDataKeyField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataKeyField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TList the keys used in the data listing control.
+	 */
+	public function getDataKeys()
+	{
+		if(($dataKeys=$this->getViewState('DataKeys',null))===null)
+		{
+			$dataKeys=new TList;
+			$this->setViewState('DataKeys',$dataKeys,null);
+		}
+		return $dataKeys;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value of the data at the specified field.
+	 * If data is an array, TMap or TList, the value will be returned at the index
+	 * of the specified field. If the data is a component with a property named
+	 * as the field name, the property value will be returned.
+	 * Otherwise, an exception will be raised.
+	 * @param mixed data item
+	 * @param mixed field name
+	 * @return mixed data value at the specified field
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the data is invalid
+	 */
+	protected function getDataFieldValue($data,$field)
+	{
+		return TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises OnSelectedIndexChanged event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a different item is selected
+	 * in a data listing control between posts to the server.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onSelectedIndexChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnSelectedIndexChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBoundColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBoundColumn.php
index 43ef28c2..b7bbc5da 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBoundColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBoundColumn.php
@@ -1,249 +1,249 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TBoundColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-
-/**
- * TBoundColumn class
- *
- * TBoundColumn represents a column that is bound to a field in a data source.
- * The cells in the column will be displayed using the data indexed by
- * {@link setDataField DataField}. You can customize the display by
- * setting {@link setDataFormatString DataFormatString}.
- *
- * If {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} is false, TBoundColumn will display cells in edit mode
- * with textboxes. Otherwise, a static text is displayed.
- *
- * When a datagrid row is in edit mode, the textbox control in the TBoundColumn
- * can be accessed by one of the following two methods:
- * <code>
- * $datagridItem->BoundColumnID->TextBox
- * $datagridItem->BoundColumnID->Controls[0]
- * </code>
- * The second method is possible because the textbox control created within the
- * datagrid cell is the first child.
- *
- * Since v3.1.0, TBoundColumn has introduced two new properties {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
- * and {@link setEditItemRenderer EditItemRenderer} which can be used to specify
- * the layout of the datagrid cells in browsing and editing mode.
- * A renderer refers to a control class that is to be instantiated as a control.
- * For more details, see {@link TRepeater} and {@link TDataList}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TBoundColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the item cell renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cells of the column.
-	 *
-	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
-	 * will be set as the data associated with the datagrid cell during databinding.
-	 * The data can be either the whole data row or a field of the row if
-	 * {@link getDataField DataField} is not empty. If {@link getDataFormatString DataFormatString}
-	 * is not empty, the data will be formatted first before passing to the renderer.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the edit item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EditItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the edit item cell renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cell that is in edit mode.
-	 *
-	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
-	 * will be set as the data associated with the datagrid cell during databinding.
-	 * The data can be either the whole data row or a field of the row if
-	 * {@link getDataField DataField} is not empty. If {@link getDataFormatString DataFormatString}
-	 * is not empty, the data will be formatted first before passing to the renderer.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setEditItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EditItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
-	 */
-	public function getDataField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
-	 */
-	public function setDataField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setDataFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getReadOnly()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
-	 */
-	public function setReadOnly($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * It creates a textbox for item in edit mode and the column is not read-only.
-	 * Otherwise it displays a static text.
-	 * The caption of the button and the static text are retrieved
-	 * from the datasource.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		$item=$cell->getParent();
-		switch($itemType)
-		{
-			case TListItemType::Item:
-			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
-			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
-				if(($classPath=$this->getItemRenderer())!=='')
-				{
-					$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-					if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-					{
-						$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
-						$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
-					}
-					$cell->getControls()->add($control);
-				}
-				else
-					$control=$cell;
-				$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::EditItem:
-				if(!$this->getReadOnly())
-				{
-					if(($classPath=$this->getEditItemRenderer())!=='')
-					{
-						$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-						if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-						{
-							$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
-							$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
-						}
-						$cell->getControls()->add($control);
-						$cell->registerObject('EditControl',$control);
-					}
-					else
-					{
-						$control=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTextBox');
-						$cell->getControls()->add($control);
-						$cell->registerObject('TextBox',$control);
-					}
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					if(($classPath=$this->getItemRenderer())!=='')
-					{
-						$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-						if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-						{
-							$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
-							$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
-						}
-						$cell->getControls()->add($control);
-					}
-					else
-						$control=$cell;
-				}
-				$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-				break;
-			default:
-				parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
-	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
-	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
-	 */
-	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
-		$data=$item->getData();
-		$formatString=$this->getDataFormatString();
-		if(($field=$this->getDataField())!=='')
-			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field));
-		else
-			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$data);
-		$sender->setData($value);
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TBoundColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+
+/**
+ * TBoundColumn class
+ *
+ * TBoundColumn represents a column that is bound to a field in a data source.
+ * The cells in the column will be displayed using the data indexed by
+ * {@link setDataField DataField}. You can customize the display by
+ * setting {@link setDataFormatString DataFormatString}.
+ *
+ * If {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} is false, TBoundColumn will display cells in edit mode
+ * with textboxes. Otherwise, a static text is displayed.
+ *
+ * When a datagrid row is in edit mode, the textbox control in the TBoundColumn
+ * can be accessed by one of the following two methods:
+ * <code>
+ * $datagridItem->BoundColumnID->TextBox
+ * $datagridItem->BoundColumnID->Controls[0]
+ * </code>
+ * The second method is possible because the textbox control created within the
+ * datagrid cell is the first child.
+ *
+ * Since v3.1.0, TBoundColumn has introduced two new properties {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
+ * and {@link setEditItemRenderer EditItemRenderer} which can be used to specify
+ * the layout of the datagrid cells in browsing and editing mode.
+ * A renderer refers to a control class that is to be instantiated as a control.
+ * For more details, see {@link TRepeater} and {@link TDataList}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TBoundColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the item cell renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cells of the column.
+	 *
+	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
+	 * will be set as the data associated with the datagrid cell during databinding.
+	 * The data can be either the whole data row or a field of the row if
+	 * {@link getDataField DataField} is not empty. If {@link getDataFormatString DataFormatString}
+	 * is not empty, the data will be formatted first before passing to the renderer.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the edit item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EditItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the edit item cell renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cell that is in edit mode.
+	 *
+	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
+	 * will be set as the data associated with the datagrid cell during databinding.
+	 * The data can be either the whole data row or a field of the row if
+	 * {@link getDataField DataField} is not empty. If {@link getDataFormatString DataFormatString}
+	 * is not empty, the data will be formatted first before passing to the renderer.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setEditItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EditItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
+	 */
+	public function getDataField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
+	 */
+	public function setDataField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setDataFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getReadOnly()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
+	 */
+	public function setReadOnly($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * It creates a textbox for item in edit mode and the column is not read-only.
+	 * Otherwise it displays a static text.
+	 * The caption of the button and the static text are retrieved
+	 * from the datasource.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		$item=$cell->getParent();
+		switch($itemType)
+		{
+			case TListItemType::Item:
+			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
+			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
+				if(($classPath=$this->getItemRenderer())!=='')
+				{
+					$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+					if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+					{
+						$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
+						$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
+					}
+					$cell->getControls()->add($control);
+				}
+				else
+					$control=$cell;
+				$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::EditItem:
+				if(!$this->getReadOnly())
+				{
+					if(($classPath=$this->getEditItemRenderer())!=='')
+					{
+						$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+						if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+						{
+							$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
+							$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
+						}
+						$cell->getControls()->add($control);
+						$cell->registerObject('EditControl',$control);
+					}
+					else
+					{
+						$control=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTextBox');
+						$cell->getControls()->add($control);
+						$cell->registerObject('TextBox',$control);
+					}
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					if(($classPath=$this->getItemRenderer())!=='')
+					{
+						$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+						if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+						{
+							$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
+							$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
+						}
+						$cell->getControls()->add($control);
+					}
+					else
+						$control=$cell;
+				}
+				$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+				break;
+			default:
+				parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
+	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
+	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
+	 */
+	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
+		$data=$item->getData();
+		$formatString=$this->getDataFormatString();
+		if(($field=$this->getDataField())!=='')
+			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field));
+		else
+			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$data);
+		$sender->setData($value);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBulletedList.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBulletedList.php
index 1b32059f..51982c3e 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBulletedList.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TBulletedList.php
@@ -1,492 +1,492 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TBulletedList class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TBulletedList class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TListControl class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
-
-/**
- * TBulletedList class
- *
- * TBulletedList displays items in a bullet format.
- * The bullet style is specified by {@link setBulletStyle BulletStyle}. When
- * the style is 'CustomImage', the {@link setBackImageUrl BulletImageUrl}
- * specifies the image used as bullets.
- *
- * TBulletedList displays the item texts in three different modes, specified
- * via {@link setDisplayMode DisplayMode}. When the mode is Text, the item texts
- * are displayed as static texts; When the mode is 'HyperLink', each item
- * is displayed as a hyperlink whose URL is given by the item value, and the
- * {@link setTarget Target} property can be used to specify the target browser window;
- * When the mode is 'LinkButton', each item is displayed as a link button which
- * posts back to the page if a user clicks on that and the event {@link onClick OnClick}
- * will be raised under such a circumstance.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TBulletedList extends TListControl implements IPostBackEventHandler
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean cached property value of Enabled
-	 */
-	private $_isEnabled;
-	/**
-	 * @var TPostBackOptions postback options
-	 */
-	private $_postBackOptions;
-
-	private $_currentRenderItemIndex;
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises the postback event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
-	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
-	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
-	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} events.
-	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
-	 */
-	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
-	{
-		if($this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onClick(new TBulletedListEventParameter((int)$param));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the bulleted list
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		switch($this->getBulletStyle())
-		{
-			case TBulletStyle::Numbered:
-			case TBulletStyle::LowerAlpha:
-			case TBulletStyle::UpperAlpha:
-			case TBulletStyle::LowerRoman:
-			case TBulletStyle::UpperRoman:
-				return 'ol';
-		}
-		return 'ul';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TBulletedList';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional bulleted list specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$needStart=false;
-		switch($this->getBulletStyle())
-		{
-			case TBulletStyle::None:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','none');
-				$needStart=true;
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::Numbered:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','decimal');
-				$needStart=true;
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::LowerAlpha:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','lower-alpha');
-				$needStart=true;
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::UpperAlpha:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','upper-alpha');
-				$needStart=true;
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::LowerRoman:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','lower-roman');
-				$needStart=true;
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::UpperRoman:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','upper-roman');
-				$needStart=true;
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::Disc:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','disc');
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::Circle:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','circle');
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::Square:
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','square');
-				break;
-			case TBulletStyle::CustomImage:
-				$url=$this->getBulletImageUrl();
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-image',"url($url)");
-				break;
-		}
-		if($needStart && ($start=$this->getFirstBulletNumber())!=1)
-			$writer->addAttribute('start',"$start");
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string image URL used for bullets when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is 'CustomImage'.
-	 */
-	public function getBulletImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('BulletImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string image URL used for bullets when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is 'CustomImage'.
-	 */
-	public function setBulletImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('BulletImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TBulletStyle style of bullets. Defaults to TBulletStyle::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getBulletStyle()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('BulletStyle',TBulletStyle::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TBulletStyle style of bullets.
-	 */
-	public function setBulletStyle($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('BulletStyle',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TBulletStyle'),TBulletStyle::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TBulletedListDisplayMode display mode of the list. Defaults to TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text.
-	 */
-	public function getDisplayMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DisplayMode',TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TBulletedListDisplayMode display mode of the list.
-	 */
-	public function setDisplayMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DisplayMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TBulletedListDisplayMode'),TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer starting index when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is one of
-	 * the following: 'Numbered', 'LowerAlpha', 'UpperAlpha', 'LowerRoman', 'UpperRoman'.
-	 * Defaults to 1.
-	 */
-	public function getFirstBulletNumber()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FirstBulletNumber',1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer starting index when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is one of
-	 * the following: 'Numbered', 'LowerAlpha', 'UpperAlpha', 'LowerRoman', 'UpperRoman'.
-	 */
-	public function setFirstBulletNumber($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FirstBulletNumber',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises 'OnClick' event.
-	 * This method is invoked when the {@link getDisplayMode DisplayMode} is 'LinkButton'
-	 * and end-users click on one of the buttons.
-	 * @param TBulletedListEventParameter event parameter.
-	 */
-	public function onClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the target window or frame to display the Web page content
-	 * linked to when {@link getDisplayMode DisplayMode} is 'HyperLink' and one of
-	 * the hyperlinks is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function getTarget()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the target window or frame to display the Web page content
-	 * linked to when {@link getDisplayMode DisplayMode} is 'HyperLink' and one of
-	 * the hyperlinks is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function setTarget($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Target',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the control.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getHasItems())
-			parent::render($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body contents.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		$this->_isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
-		$this->_postBackOptions=$this->getPostBackOptions();
-		$writer->writeLine();
-		foreach($this->getItems() as $index=>$item)
-		{
-			if($item->getHasAttributes())
-				$writer->addAttributes($item->getAttributes());
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('li');
-			$this->renderBulletText($writer,$item,$index);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-			$writer->writeLine();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders each item
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param TListItem item to be rendered
-	 * @param integer index of the item being rendered
-	 */
-	protected function renderBulletText($writer,$item,$index)
-	{
-		switch($this->getDisplayMode())
-		{
-			case TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text:
-				$this->renderTextItem($writer, $item, $index);
-				break;
-			case TBulletedListDisplayMode::HyperLink:
-				$this->renderHyperLinkItem($writer, $item, $index);
-				break;
-			case TBulletedListDisplayMode::LinkButton:
-				$this->renderLinkButtonItem($writer, $item, $index);
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	protected function renderTextItem($writer, $item, $index)
-	{
-		if($item->getEnabled())
-			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
-		else
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
-			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-	}
-
-	protected function renderHyperLinkItem($writer, $item, $index)
-	{
-		if(!$this->_isEnabled || !$item->getEnabled())
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-		else
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('href',$item->getValue());
-			if(($target=$this->getTarget())!=='')
-				$writer->addAttribute('target',$target);
-		}
-		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('a');
-		$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	protected function renderLinkButtonItem($writer, $item, $index)
-	{
-		if(!$this->_isEnabled || !$item->getEnabled())
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-		else
-		{
-			$this->_currentRenderItemIndex = $index;
-			$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().$index);
-			$writer->addAttribute('href', "javascript:;//".$this->getClientID().$index);
-			$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-			$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-		}
-		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('a');
-		$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array postback options used for linkbuttons.
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		$options['EventParameter'] = $this->_currentRenderItemIndex;
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID().$this->_currentRenderItemIndex;
-		$options['StopEvent'] = true;
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	protected function canCauseValidation()
-	{
-		$group = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$hasValidators = $this->getPage()->getValidators($group)->getCount()>0;
-		return $this->getCausesValidation() && $hasValidators;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_autopostback_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedIndex($index)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedindex_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedIndices($indices)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedindices_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedValue($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedvalue_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedValues($values)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedvalue_unsupported');
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TBulletedListEventParameter
- * Event parameter for {@link TBulletedList::onClick Click} event of the
- * bulleted list. The {@link getIndex Index} gives the zero-based index
- * of the item that is currently being clicked.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TBulletedListEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var integer index of the item clicked
-	 */
-	private $_index;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param integer index of the item clicked
-	 */
-	public function __construct($index)
-	{
-		$this->_index=$index;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item (rendered as a link button) that is clicked
-	 */
-	public function getIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_index;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TBulletStyle class.
- * TBulletStyle defines the enumerable type for the possible bullet styles that may be used
- * for a {@link TBulletedList} control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TBulletStyle extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NotSet='NotSet';
-	const None='None';
-	const Numbered='Numbered';
-	const LowerAlpha='LowerAlpha';
-	const UpperAlpha='UpperAlpha';
-	const LowerRoman='LowerRoman';
-	const UpperRoman='UpperRoman';
-	const Disc='Disc';
-	const Circle='Circle';
-	const Square='Square';
-	const CustomImage='CustomImage';
-}
-
-/**
- * TBulletedListDisplayMode class.
- * TBulletedListDisplayMode defines the enumerable type for the possible display mode
- * of a {@link TBulletedList} control.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Text: the bulleted list items are displayed as plain texts
- * - HyperLink: the bulleted list items are displayed as hyperlinks
- * - LinkButton: the bulleted list items are displayed as link buttons that can cause postbacks
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TBulletedListDisplayMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Text='Text';
-	const HyperLink='HyperLink';
-	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TListControl class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
+
+/**
+ * TBulletedList class
+ *
+ * TBulletedList displays items in a bullet format.
+ * The bullet style is specified by {@link setBulletStyle BulletStyle}. When
+ * the style is 'CustomImage', the {@link setBackImageUrl BulletImageUrl}
+ * specifies the image used as bullets.
+ *
+ * TBulletedList displays the item texts in three different modes, specified
+ * via {@link setDisplayMode DisplayMode}. When the mode is Text, the item texts
+ * are displayed as static texts; When the mode is 'HyperLink', each item
+ * is displayed as a hyperlink whose URL is given by the item value, and the
+ * {@link setTarget Target} property can be used to specify the target browser window;
+ * When the mode is 'LinkButton', each item is displayed as a link button which
+ * posts back to the page if a user clicks on that and the event {@link onClick OnClick}
+ * will be raised under such a circumstance.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TBulletedList extends TListControl implements IPostBackEventHandler
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean cached property value of Enabled
+	 */
+	private $_isEnabled;
+	/**
+	 * @var TPostBackOptions postback options
+	 */
+	private $_postBackOptions;
+
+	private $_currentRenderItemIndex;
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises the postback event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
+	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
+	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
+	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} events.
+	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
+	 */
+	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
+	{
+		if($this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onClick(new TBulletedListEventParameter((int)$param));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the bulleted list
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		switch($this->getBulletStyle())
+		{
+			case TBulletStyle::Numbered:
+			case TBulletStyle::LowerAlpha:
+			case TBulletStyle::UpperAlpha:
+			case TBulletStyle::LowerRoman:
+			case TBulletStyle::UpperRoman:
+				return 'ol';
+		}
+		return 'ul';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TBulletedList';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional bulleted list specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$needStart=false;
+		switch($this->getBulletStyle())
+		{
+			case TBulletStyle::None:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','none');
+				$needStart=true;
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::Numbered:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','decimal');
+				$needStart=true;
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::LowerAlpha:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','lower-alpha');
+				$needStart=true;
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::UpperAlpha:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','upper-alpha');
+				$needStart=true;
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::LowerRoman:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','lower-roman');
+				$needStart=true;
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::UpperRoman:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','upper-roman');
+				$needStart=true;
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::Disc:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','disc');
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::Circle:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','circle');
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::Square:
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-type','square');
+				break;
+			case TBulletStyle::CustomImage:
+				$url=$this->getBulletImageUrl();
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('list-style-image',"url($url)");
+				break;
+		}
+		if($needStart && ($start=$this->getFirstBulletNumber())!=1)
+			$writer->addAttribute('start',"$start");
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string image URL used for bullets when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is 'CustomImage'.
+	 */
+	public function getBulletImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('BulletImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string image URL used for bullets when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is 'CustomImage'.
+	 */
+	public function setBulletImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('BulletImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TBulletStyle style of bullets. Defaults to TBulletStyle::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getBulletStyle()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('BulletStyle',TBulletStyle::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TBulletStyle style of bullets.
+	 */
+	public function setBulletStyle($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('BulletStyle',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TBulletStyle'),TBulletStyle::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TBulletedListDisplayMode display mode of the list. Defaults to TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text.
+	 */
+	public function getDisplayMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DisplayMode',TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TBulletedListDisplayMode display mode of the list.
+	 */
+	public function setDisplayMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DisplayMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TBulletedListDisplayMode'),TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer starting index when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is one of
+	 * the following: 'Numbered', 'LowerAlpha', 'UpperAlpha', 'LowerRoman', 'UpperRoman'.
+	 * Defaults to 1.
+	 */
+	public function getFirstBulletNumber()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FirstBulletNumber',1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer starting index when {@link getBulletStyle BulletStyle} is one of
+	 * the following: 'Numbered', 'LowerAlpha', 'UpperAlpha', 'LowerRoman', 'UpperRoman'.
+	 */
+	public function setFirstBulletNumber($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FirstBulletNumber',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises 'OnClick' event.
+	 * This method is invoked when the {@link getDisplayMode DisplayMode} is 'LinkButton'
+	 * and end-users click on one of the buttons.
+	 * @param TBulletedListEventParameter event parameter.
+	 */
+	public function onClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the target window or frame to display the Web page content
+	 * linked to when {@link getDisplayMode DisplayMode} is 'HyperLink' and one of
+	 * the hyperlinks is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function getTarget()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the target window or frame to display the Web page content
+	 * linked to when {@link getDisplayMode DisplayMode} is 'HyperLink' and one of
+	 * the hyperlinks is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function setTarget($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Target',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the control.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getHasItems())
+			parent::render($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body contents.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		$this->_isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
+		$this->_postBackOptions=$this->getPostBackOptions();
+		$writer->writeLine();
+		foreach($this->getItems() as $index=>$item)
+		{
+			if($item->getHasAttributes())
+				$writer->addAttributes($item->getAttributes());
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('li');
+			$this->renderBulletText($writer,$item,$index);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+			$writer->writeLine();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders each item
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param TListItem item to be rendered
+	 * @param integer index of the item being rendered
+	 */
+	protected function renderBulletText($writer,$item,$index)
+	{
+		switch($this->getDisplayMode())
+		{
+			case TBulletedListDisplayMode::Text:
+				$this->renderTextItem($writer, $item, $index);
+				break;
+			case TBulletedListDisplayMode::HyperLink:
+				$this->renderHyperLinkItem($writer, $item, $index);
+				break;
+			case TBulletedListDisplayMode::LinkButton:
+				$this->renderLinkButtonItem($writer, $item, $index);
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	protected function renderTextItem($writer, $item, $index)
+	{
+		if($item->getEnabled())
+			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
+		else
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
+			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+	}
+
+	protected function renderHyperLinkItem($writer, $item, $index)
+	{
+		if(!$this->_isEnabled || !$item->getEnabled())
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+		else
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('href',$item->getValue());
+			if(($target=$this->getTarget())!=='')
+				$writer->addAttribute('target',$target);
+		}
+		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('a');
+		$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	protected function renderLinkButtonItem($writer, $item, $index)
+	{
+		if(!$this->_isEnabled || !$item->getEnabled())
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+		else
+		{
+			$this->_currentRenderItemIndex = $index;
+			$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().$index);
+			$writer->addAttribute('href', "javascript:;//".$this->getClientID().$index);
+			$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+			$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+		}
+		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('a');
+		$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array postback options used for linkbuttons.
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		$options['EventParameter'] = $this->_currentRenderItemIndex;
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID().$this->_currentRenderItemIndex;
+		$options['StopEvent'] = true;
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	protected function canCauseValidation()
+	{
+		$group = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$hasValidators = $this->getPage()->getValidators($group)->getCount()>0;
+		return $this->getCausesValidation() && $hasValidators;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_autopostback_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedIndex($index)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedindex_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedIndices($indices)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedindices_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedValue($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedvalue_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedValues($values)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('bulletedlist_selectedvalue_unsupported');
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TBulletedListEventParameter
+ * Event parameter for {@link TBulletedList::onClick Click} event of the
+ * bulleted list. The {@link getIndex Index} gives the zero-based index
+ * of the item that is currently being clicked.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TBulletedListEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var integer index of the item clicked
+	 */
+	private $_index;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param integer index of the item clicked
+	 */
+	public function __construct($index)
+	{
+		$this->_index=$index;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item (rendered as a link button) that is clicked
+	 */
+	public function getIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_index;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TBulletStyle class.
+ * TBulletStyle defines the enumerable type for the possible bullet styles that may be used
+ * for a {@link TBulletedList} control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TBulletStyle extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NotSet='NotSet';
+	const None='None';
+	const Numbered='Numbered';
+	const LowerAlpha='LowerAlpha';
+	const UpperAlpha='UpperAlpha';
+	const LowerRoman='LowerRoman';
+	const UpperRoman='UpperRoman';
+	const Disc='Disc';
+	const Circle='Circle';
+	const Square='Square';
+	const CustomImage='CustomImage';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TBulletedListDisplayMode class.
+ * TBulletedListDisplayMode defines the enumerable type for the possible display mode
+ * of a {@link TBulletedList} control.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Text: the bulleted list items are displayed as plain texts
+ * - HyperLink: the bulleted list items are displayed as hyperlinks
+ * - LinkButton: the bulleted list items are displayed as link buttons that can cause postbacks
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TBulletedListDisplayMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Text='Text';
+	const HyperLink='HyperLink';
+	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButton.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButton.php
index 71256a5b..caa0332c 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButton.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButton.php
@@ -1,368 +1,368 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TButton class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TButton class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TButton class
- *
- * TButton creates a click button on the page. It is mainly used to submit data to a page.
- *
- * TButton raises two server-side events, {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand},
- * when it is clicked on the client-side. The difference between these two events
- * is that the event {@link onCommand OnCommand} is bubbled up to the button's ancestor controls.
- * And within the event parameter for {@link onCommand OnCommand} contains the reference
- * to the {@link setCommandName CommandName} and {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter}
- * property values that are set for the button object. This allows you to create multiple TButton
- * components on a Web page and programmatically determine which one is clicked
- * with what parameter.
- *
- * Clicking on button can also trigger form validation, if
- * {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true.
- * The validation may be restricted within a certain group of validator
- * controls by setting {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup} property.
- * If validation is successful, the data will be post back to the same page.
- *
- * TButton displays the {@link setText Text} property as the button caption.
- *
- * TButton can be one of three {@link setButtonType ButtonType}: Submit, Button and Reset.
- * By default, it is a Submit button and the form submission uses the browser's
- * default submission capability. If it is Button or Reset, postback may occur
- * if one of the following conditions is met:
- * - an event handler is attached to {@link onClick OnClick} event;
- * - an event handler is attached to {@link onCommand OnCommand} event;
- * - the button is in a non-empty validation group.
- * In addition, clicking on a Reset button will clear up all input fields
- * if the button does not cause a postback.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TButton extends TWebControl implements IPostBackEventHandler, IButtonControl, IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the button
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'input';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional button specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-		$writer->addAttribute('type',strtolower($this->getButtonType()));
-		if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
-		$writer->addAttribute('value',$this->getText());
-		if($this->getEnabled(true))
-		{
-			if($this->getEnableClientScript() && $this->needPostBackScript())
-				$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-		}
-		else if($this->getEnabled()) // in this case, parent will not render 'disabled'
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the client-script code.
-	 */
-	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TButton';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to perform validation if the button is clicked
-	 */
-	protected function canCauseValidation()
-	{
-		if($this->getCausesValidation())
-		{
-			$group=$this->getValidationGroup();
-			return $this->getPage()->getValidators($group)->getCount()>0;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean set by a panel to register this button as the default button for the panel.
-	 */
-	public function setIsDefaultButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('IsDefaultButton', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean true if this button is registered as a default button for a panel.
-	 */
-	public function getIsDefaultButton()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('IsDefaultButton', false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the button needs javascript to do postback
-	 */
-	protected function needPostBackScript()
-	{
-		return $this->canCauseValidation() || ($this->getButtonType()!==TButtonType::Submit &&
-			($this->hasEventHandler('OnClick') || $this->hasEventHandler('OnCommand')))
-			|| $this->getIsDefaultButton();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns postback specifications for the button.
-	 * This method is used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @return array parameters about how the button defines its postback behavior.
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID']=$this->getClientID();
-		$options['CausesValidation']=$this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		$options['ValidationGroup']=$this->getValidationGroup();
-
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation with nothing to be rendered.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
-	 * The method raises 'OnClick' event to fire up the event handlers.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
-	 * The method raises 'OnCommand' event to fire up the event handlers.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
-	 * @param TCommandEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCommand',$this,$param);
-		$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises the postback event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
-	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
-	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
-	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand} events.
-	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
-	 */
-	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
-	{
-		if($this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onClick(null);
-		$this->onCommand(new TCommandEventParameter($this->getCommandName(),$this->getCommandParameter()));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string caption of the button
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string caption of the button
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the caption of the button.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
-	 * @return string caption of the button.
-	 * @see getText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the caption of the button.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
-	 * @param string caption of the button
-	 * @see setText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation, default is true
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandName()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function setCommandName($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event
-	 */
-	public function getCommandParameter()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CommandParameter','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function setCommandParameter($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CommandParameter',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TButtonType the type of the button. Defaults to TButtonType::Submit.
-	 */
-	public function getButtonType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TButtonType::Submit);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TButtonType the type of the button.
-	 */
-	public function setButtonType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TButtonType'),TButtonType::Submit);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TButtonType class.
- * TButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types that a {@link TButton} can take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Submit: a normal submit button
- * - Reset: a reset button
- * - Button: a client button (normally does not perform form submission)
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TButtonType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Submit='Submit';
-	const Reset='Reset';
-	const Button='Button';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TButton class
+ *
+ * TButton creates a click button on the page. It is mainly used to submit data to a page.
+ *
+ * TButton raises two server-side events, {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand},
+ * when it is clicked on the client-side. The difference between these two events
+ * is that the event {@link onCommand OnCommand} is bubbled up to the button's ancestor controls.
+ * And within the event parameter for {@link onCommand OnCommand} contains the reference
+ * to the {@link setCommandName CommandName} and {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter}
+ * property values that are set for the button object. This allows you to create multiple TButton
+ * components on a Web page and programmatically determine which one is clicked
+ * with what parameter.
+ *
+ * Clicking on button can also trigger form validation, if
+ * {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true.
+ * The validation may be restricted within a certain group of validator
+ * controls by setting {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup} property.
+ * If validation is successful, the data will be post back to the same page.
+ *
+ * TButton displays the {@link setText Text} property as the button caption.
+ *
+ * TButton can be one of three {@link setButtonType ButtonType}: Submit, Button and Reset.
+ * By default, it is a Submit button and the form submission uses the browser's
+ * default submission capability. If it is Button or Reset, postback may occur
+ * if one of the following conditions is met:
+ * - an event handler is attached to {@link onClick OnClick} event;
+ * - an event handler is attached to {@link onCommand OnCommand} event;
+ * - the button is in a non-empty validation group.
+ * In addition, clicking on a Reset button will clear up all input fields
+ * if the button does not cause a postback.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TButton extends TWebControl implements IPostBackEventHandler, IButtonControl, IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the button
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'input';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional button specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+		$writer->addAttribute('type',strtolower($this->getButtonType()));
+		if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
+		$writer->addAttribute('value',$this->getText());
+		if($this->getEnabled(true))
+		{
+			if($this->getEnableClientScript() && $this->needPostBackScript())
+				$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+		}
+		else if($this->getEnabled()) // in this case, parent will not render 'disabled'
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the client-script code.
+	 */
+	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TButton';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to perform validation if the button is clicked
+	 */
+	protected function canCauseValidation()
+	{
+		if($this->getCausesValidation())
+		{
+			$group=$this->getValidationGroup();
+			return $this->getPage()->getValidators($group)->getCount()>0;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean set by a panel to register this button as the default button for the panel.
+	 */
+	public function setIsDefaultButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('IsDefaultButton', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean true if this button is registered as a default button for a panel.
+	 */
+	public function getIsDefaultButton()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('IsDefaultButton', false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the button needs javascript to do postback
+	 */
+	protected function needPostBackScript()
+	{
+		return $this->canCauseValidation() || ($this->getButtonType()!==TButtonType::Submit &&
+			($this->hasEventHandler('OnClick') || $this->hasEventHandler('OnCommand')))
+			|| $this->getIsDefaultButton();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns postback specifications for the button.
+	 * This method is used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @return array parameters about how the button defines its postback behavior.
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID']=$this->getClientID();
+		$options['CausesValidation']=$this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		$options['ValidationGroup']=$this->getValidationGroup();
+
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation with nothing to be rendered.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
+	 * The method raises 'OnClick' event to fire up the event handlers.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
+	 * The method raises 'OnCommand' event to fire up the event handlers.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
+	 * @param TCommandEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCommand',$this,$param);
+		$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises the postback event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
+	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
+	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
+	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand} events.
+	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
+	 */
+	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
+	{
+		if($this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onClick(null);
+		$this->onCommand(new TCommandEventParameter($this->getCommandName(),$this->getCommandParameter()));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string caption of the button
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string caption of the button
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the caption of the button.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
+	 * @return string caption of the button.
+	 * @see getText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the caption of the button.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
+	 * @param string caption of the button
+	 * @see setText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation, default is true
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandName()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function setCommandName($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event
+	 */
+	public function getCommandParameter()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CommandParameter','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function setCommandParameter($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CommandParameter',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TButtonType the type of the button. Defaults to TButtonType::Submit.
+	 */
+	public function getButtonType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TButtonType::Submit);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TButtonType the type of the button.
+	 */
+	public function setButtonType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TButtonType'),TButtonType::Submit);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TButtonType class.
+ * TButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types that a {@link TButton} can take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Submit: a normal submit button
+ * - Reset: a reset button
+ * - Button: a client button (normally does not perform form submission)
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TButtonType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Submit='Submit';
+	const Reset='Reset';
+	const Button='Button';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButtonColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButtonColumn.php
index 9d754004..f0f387e7 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButtonColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TButtonColumn.php
@@ -1,278 +1,278 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TButtonColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TButtonColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TButton');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
-
-/**
- * TButtonColumn class
- *
- * TButtonColumn contains a user-defined command button, such as Add or Remove,
- * that corresponds with each row in the column.
- *
- * The caption of the buttons in the column is determined by {@link setText Text}
- * and {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} properties. If both are present,
- * the latter takes precedence. The {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} property
- * refers to the name of the field in datasource whose value will be used as the button caption.
- * If {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString} is not empty,
- * the value will be formatted before rendering.
- *
- * The buttons in the column can be set to display as hyperlinks or push buttons
- * by setting the {@link setButtonType ButtonType} property.
- * The {@link setCommandName CommandName} will assign its value to
- * all button's <b>CommandName</b> property. The datagrid will capture
- * the command event where you can write event handlers based on different command names.
- * The buttons' <b>CausesValidation</b> and <b>ValidationGroup</b> property values
- * are determined by the column's corresponding properties.
- *
- * The buttons in the column can be accessed by one of the following two methods:
- * <code>
- * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->Button
- * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->Controls[0]
- * </code>
- * The second method is possible because the button control created within the
- * datagrid cell is the first child.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TButtonColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text caption of the button
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text caption of the button.
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the button caption
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the button caption
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the button caption will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the button caption will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the image file for image buttons
-	 */
-	public function getImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL of the image file for image buttons
-	 */
-	public function setImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the button image url
-	 */
-	public function getDataImageUrlField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataImageUrlField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the button image url
-	 */
-	public function setDataImageUrlField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataImageUrlField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the button image url will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataImageUrlFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataImageUrlFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the button image url will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setDataImageUrlFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataImageUrlFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TButtonColumnType the type of command button. Defaults to TButtonColumnType::LinkButton.
-	 */
-	public function getButtonType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TButtonColumnType the type of command button
-	 */
-	public function setButtonType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TButtonColumnType'),TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the command name associated with the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandName()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the command name associated with the <b>Command</b> event.
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 */
-	public function setCommandName($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation, default is true
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * It creates a command button within the cell.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
-		{
-			$buttonType=$this->getButtonType();
-			if($buttonType===TButtonColumnType::LinkButton)
-				$button=new TLinkButton;
-			else if($buttonType===TButtonColumnType::PushButton)
-				$button=new TButton;
-			else // image button
-			{
-				$button=new TImageButton;
-				$button->setImageUrl($this->getImageUrl());
-			}
-			$button->setText($this->getText());
-			$button->setCommandName($this->getCommandName());
-			$button->setCausesValidation($this->getCausesValidation());
-			$button->setValidationGroup($this->getValidationGroup());
-			if($this->getDataTextField()!=='' || ($buttonType===TButtonColumnType::ImageButton && $this->getDataImageUrlField()!==''))
-				$button->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-			$cell->getControls()->add($button);
-			$cell->registerObject('Button',$button);
-		}
-		else
-			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
-	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
-	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
-	 */
-	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($sender instanceof IButtonControl)
-		{
-			if(($field=$this->getDataTextField())!=='')
-			{
-				$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($sender->getNamingContainer()->getData(),$field);
-				$text=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataTextFormatString(),$value);
-				$sender->setText($text);
-			}
-			if(($sender instanceof TImageButton) && ($field=$this->getDataImageUrlField())!=='')
-			{
-				$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($sender->getNamingContainer()->getData(),$field);
-				$url=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataImageUrlFormatString(),$value);
-				$sender->setImageUrl($url);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TButton');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
+
+/**
+ * TButtonColumn class
+ *
+ * TButtonColumn contains a user-defined command button, such as Add or Remove,
+ * that corresponds with each row in the column.
+ *
+ * The caption of the buttons in the column is determined by {@link setText Text}
+ * and {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} properties. If both are present,
+ * the latter takes precedence. The {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} property
+ * refers to the name of the field in datasource whose value will be used as the button caption.
+ * If {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString} is not empty,
+ * the value will be formatted before rendering.
+ *
+ * The buttons in the column can be set to display as hyperlinks or push buttons
+ * by setting the {@link setButtonType ButtonType} property.
+ * The {@link setCommandName CommandName} will assign its value to
+ * all button's <b>CommandName</b> property. The datagrid will capture
+ * the command event where you can write event handlers based on different command names.
+ * The buttons' <b>CausesValidation</b> and <b>ValidationGroup</b> property values
+ * are determined by the column's corresponding properties.
+ *
+ * The buttons in the column can be accessed by one of the following two methods:
+ * <code>
+ * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->Button
+ * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->Controls[0]
+ * </code>
+ * The second method is possible because the button control created within the
+ * datagrid cell is the first child.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TButtonColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text caption of the button
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text caption of the button.
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the button caption
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the button caption
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the button caption will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the button caption will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the image file for image buttons
+	 */
+	public function getImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL of the image file for image buttons
+	 */
+	public function setImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the button image url
+	 */
+	public function getDataImageUrlField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataImageUrlField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the button image url
+	 */
+	public function setDataImageUrlField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataImageUrlField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the button image url will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataImageUrlFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataImageUrlFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the button image url will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setDataImageUrlFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataImageUrlFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TButtonColumnType the type of command button. Defaults to TButtonColumnType::LinkButton.
+	 */
+	public function getButtonType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TButtonColumnType the type of command button
+	 */
+	public function setButtonType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TButtonColumnType'),TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the command name associated with the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandName()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the command name associated with the <b>Command</b> event.
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 */
+	public function setCommandName($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation, default is true
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * It creates a command button within the cell.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
+		{
+			$buttonType=$this->getButtonType();
+			if($buttonType===TButtonColumnType::LinkButton)
+				$button=new TLinkButton;
+			else if($buttonType===TButtonColumnType::PushButton)
+				$button=new TButton;
+			else // image button
+			{
+				$button=new TImageButton;
+				$button->setImageUrl($this->getImageUrl());
+			}
+			$button->setText($this->getText());
+			$button->setCommandName($this->getCommandName());
+			$button->setCausesValidation($this->getCausesValidation());
+			$button->setValidationGroup($this->getValidationGroup());
+			if($this->getDataTextField()!=='' || ($buttonType===TButtonColumnType::ImageButton && $this->getDataImageUrlField()!==''))
+				$button->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+			$cell->getControls()->add($button);
+			$cell->registerObject('Button',$button);
+		}
+		else
+			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
+	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
+	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
+	 */
+	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($sender instanceof IButtonControl)
+		{
+			if(($field=$this->getDataTextField())!=='')
+			{
+				$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($sender->getNamingContainer()->getData(),$field);
+				$text=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataTextFormatString(),$value);
+				$sender->setText($text);
+			}
+			if(($sender instanceof TImageButton) && ($field=$this->getDataImageUrlField())!=='')
+			{
+				$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($sender->getNamingContainer()->getData(),$field);
+				$url=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataImageUrlFormatString(),$value);
+				$sender->setImageUrl($url);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptcha.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptcha.php
index 7bcf5643..5ec870ce 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptcha.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptcha.php
@@ -1,495 +1,495 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TCaptcha class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
-
-/**
- * TCaptcha class.
- *
- * Notice: while this class is easy to use and implement, it does not provide full security.
- * In fact, it's easy to bypass the checks reusing old, already-validated tokens (reply attack).
- * A better alternative is provided by {@link TReCaptcha}.
- *
- * TCaptcha displays a CAPTCHA (a token displayed as an image) that can be used
- * to determine if the input is entered by a real user instead of some program.
- *
- * Unlike other CAPTCHA scripts, TCaptcha does not need session or cookie.
- *
- * The token (a string consisting of alphanumeric characters) displayed is automatically
- * generated and can be configured in several ways. To specify the length of characters
- * in the token, set {@link setMinTokenLength MinTokenLength} and {@link setMaxTokenLength MaxTokenLength}.
- * To use case-insensitive comparison and generate upper-case-only token, set {@link setCaseSensitive CaseSensitive}
- * to false. Advanced users can try to set {@link setTokenAlphabet TokenAlphabet}, which
- * specifies what characters can appear in tokens.
- *
- * The validation of the token is related with two properties: {@link setTestLimit TestLimit}
- * and {@link setTokenExpiry TokenExpiry}. The former specifies how many times a token can
- * be tested with on the server side, and the latter says when a generated token will expire.
- *
- * To specify the appearance of the generated token image, set {@link setTokenImageTheme TokenImageTheme}
- * to be an integer between 0 and 63. And to adjust the generated image size, set {@link setTokenFontSize TokenFontSize}
- * (you may also set {@link TWebControl::setWidth Width}, but the scaled image may not look good.)
- * By setting {@link setChangingTokenBackground ChangingTokenBackground} to true, the image background
- * of the token will be variating even though the token is the same during postbacks.
- *
- * Upon postback, user input can be validated by calling {@link validate()}.
- * The {@link TCaptchaValidator} control can also be used to do validation, which provides
- * client-side validation besides the server-side validation.  By default, the token will
- * remain the same during multiple postbacks. A new one can be generated by calling
- * {@link regenerateToken()} manually.
- *
- * The following template shows a typical use of TCaptcha control:
- * <code>
- * <com:TCaptcha ID="Captcha" />
- * <com:TTextBox ID="Input" />
- * <com:TCaptchaValidator CaptchaControl="Captcha"
- *                        ControlToValidate="Input"
- *                        ErrorMessage="You are challenged!" />
- * </code>
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-class TCaptcha extends TImage
-{
-	const MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH=2;
-	const MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH=40;
-	private $_privateKey;
-	private $_validated=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the theme of the token image. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getTokenImageTheme()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TokenImageTheme',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the theme of the token image.
-	 * You may test each theme to find out the one you like the most.
-	 * Below is the explanation of the theme value:
-	 * It is treated as a 5-bit integer. Each bit toggles a specific feature of the image.
-	 * Bit 0 (the least significant): whether the image is opaque (1) or transparent (0).
-	 * Bit 1: whether we should add white noise to the image (1) or not (0).
-	 * Bit 2: whether we should add a grid to  the image (1) or not (0).
-	 * Bit 3: whether we should add some scribbles to the image (1) or not (0).
-	 * Bit 4: whether the image background should be morphed (1) or not (0).
-	 * Bit 5: whether the token text should cast a shadow (1) or not (0).
-	 * @param integer the theme of the token image. It must be an integer between 0 and 63.
-	 */
-	public function setTokenImageTheme($value)
-	{
-		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-		if($value>=0 && $value<=63)
-			$this->setViewState('TokenImageTheme',$value,0);
-		else
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_tokenimagetheme_invalid',0,63);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the font size used for displaying the token in an image. Defaults to 30.
-	 */
-	public function getTokenFontSize()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TokenFontSize',30);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the font size used for displaying the token in an image.
-	 * This property affects the generated token image size.
-	 * The image width is proportional to this font size.
-	 * @param integer the font size used for displaying the token in an image. It must be an integer between 20 and 100.
-	 */
-	public function setTokenFontSize($value)
-	{
-		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-		if($value>=20 && $value<=100)
-			$this->setViewState('TokenFontSize',$value,30);
-		else
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_tokenfontsize_invalid',20,100);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the minimum length of the token. Defaults to 4.
-	 */
-	public function getMinTokenLength()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MinTokenLength',4);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the minimum length of the token. It must be between 2 and 40.
-	 */
-	public function setMinTokenLength($value)
-	{
-		$length=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-		if($length>=self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH && $length<=self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH)
-			$this->setViewState('MinTokenLength',$length,4);
-		else
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_mintokenlength_invalid',self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH,self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the maximum length of the token. Defaults to 6.
-	 */
-	public function getMaxTokenLength()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MaxTokenLength',6);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the maximum length of the token. It must be between 2 and 40.
-	 */
-	public function setMaxTokenLength($value)
-	{
-		$length=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-		if($length>=self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH && $length<=self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH)
-			$this->setViewState('MaxTokenLength',$length,6);
-		else
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_maxtokenlength_invalid',self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH,self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the token should be treated as case-sensitive. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getCaseSensitive()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CaseSensitive',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the token should be treated as case-sensitive. If false, only upper-case letters will appear in the token.
-	 */
-	public function setCaseSensitive($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CaseSensitive',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the characters that may appear in the token. Defaults to '234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT'.
-	 */
-	public function getTokenAlphabet()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TokenAlphabet','234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the characters that may appear in the token. At least 2 characters must be specified.
-	 */
-	public function setTokenAlphabet($value)
-	{
-		if(strlen($value)<2)
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_tokenalphabet_invalid');
-		$this->setViewState('TokenAlphabet',$value,'234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of seconds that a generated token will remain valid. Defaults to 600 seconds (10 minutes).
-	 */
-	public function getTokenExpiry()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TokenExpiry',600);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the number of seconds that a generated token will remain valid. A value smaller than 1 means the token will not expire.
-	 */
-	public function setTokenExpiry($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('TokenExpiry',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),600);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the background of the token image should be variated during postbacks. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getChangingTokenBackground()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ChangingTokenBackground',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the background of the token image should be variated during postbacks.
-	 */
-	public function setChangingTokenBackground($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ChangingTokenBackground',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer how many times a generated token can be tested. Defaults to 5.
-	 */
-	public function getTestLimit()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TestLimit',5);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer how many times a generated token can be tested. For unlimited tests, set it to 0.
-	 */
-	public function setTestLimit($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('TestLimit',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),5);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the currently generated token has expired.
-	 */
-	public function getIsTokenExpired()
-	{
-		if(($expiry=$this->getTokenExpiry())>0 && ($start=$this->getViewState('TokenGenerated',0))>0)
-			return $expiry+$start<time();
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the public key used for generating the token. A random one will be generated and returned if this is not set.
-	 */
-	public function getPublicKey()
-	{
-		if(($publicKey=$this->getViewState('PublicKey',''))==='')
-		{
-			$publicKey=$this->generateRandomKey();
-			$this->setPublicKey($publicKey);
-		}
-		return $publicKey;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the public key used for generating the token. A random one will be generated if this is not set.
-	 */
-	public function setPublicKey($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PublicKey',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the token that will be displayed
-	 */
-	public function getToken()
-	{
-		return $this->generateToken($this->getPublicKey(),$this->getPrivateKey(),$this->getTokenAlphabet(),$this->getTokenLength(),$this->getCaseSensitive());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the length of the token to be generated.
-	 */
-	protected function getTokenLength()
-	{
-		if(($tokenLength=$this->getViewState('TokenLength'))===null)
-		{
-			$minLength=$this->getMinTokenLength();
-			$maxLength=$this->getMaxTokenLength();
-			if($minLength>$maxLength)
-				$tokenLength=rand($maxLength,$minLength);
-			else if($minLength<$maxLength)
-				$tokenLength=rand($minLength,$maxLength);
-			else
-				$tokenLength=$minLength;
-			$this->setViewState('TokenLength',$tokenLength);
-		}
-		return $tokenLength;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the private key used for generating the token. This is randomly generated and kept in a file for persistency.
-	 */
-	public function getPrivateKey()
-	{
-		if($this->_privateKey===null)
-		{
-			$fileName=$this->generatePrivateKeyFile();
-			$content=file_get_contents($fileName);
-			$matches=array();
-			if(preg_match("/privateKey='(.*?)'/ms",$content,$matches)>0)
-				$this->_privateKey=$matches[1];
-			else
-				throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_privatekey_unknown');
-		}
-		return $this->_privateKey;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Validates a user input with the token.
-	 * @param string user input
-	 * @return boolean if the user input is not the same as the token.
-	 */
-	public function validate($input)
-	{
-		$number=$this->getViewState('TestNumber',0);
-		if(!$this->_validated)
-		{
-			$this->setViewState('TestNumber',++$number);
-			$this->_validated=true;
-		}
-		if($this->getIsTokenExpired() || (($limit=$this->getTestLimit())>0 && $number>$limit))
-		{
-			$this->regenerateToken();
-			return false;
-		}
-		return ($this->getToken()===($this->getCaseSensitive()?$input:strtoupper($input)));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Regenerates the token to be displayed.
-	 * By default, a token, once generated, will remain the same during the following page postbacks.
-	 * Calling this method will generate a new token.
-	 */
-	public function regenerateToken()
-	{
-		$this->clearViewState('TokenLength');
-		$this->setPublicKey('');
-		$this->clearViewState('TokenGenerated');
-		$this->clearViewState('RandomSeed');
-		$this->clearViewState('TestNumber',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Configures the image URL that shows the token.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		if(!self::checkRequirements())
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_imagettftext_required');
-		if(!$this->getViewState('TokenGenerated',0))
-		{
-			$manager=$this->getApplication()->getAssetManager();
-			$manager->publishFilePath($this->getFontFile());
-			$url=$manager->publishFilePath($this->getCaptchaScriptFile());
-			$url.='?options='.urlencode($this->getTokenImageOptions());
-			$this->setImageUrl($url);
-
-			$this->setViewState('TokenGenerated',time());
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the options to be passed to the token image generator
-	 */
-	protected function getTokenImageOptions()
-	{
-		$privateKey=$this->getPrivateKey();  // call this method to ensure private key is generated
-		$token=$this->getToken();
-		$options=array();
-		$options['publicKey']=$this->getPublicKey();
-		$options['tokenLength']=strlen($token);
-		$options['caseSensitive']=$this->getCaseSensitive();
-		$options['alphabet']=$this->getTokenAlphabet();
-		$options['fontSize']=$this->getTokenFontSize();
-		$options['theme']=$this->getTokenImageTheme();
-		if(($randomSeed=$this->getViewState('RandomSeed',0))===0)
-		{
-			$randomSeed=(int)(microtime()*1000000);
-			$this->setViewState('RandomSeed',$randomSeed);
-		}
-		$options['randomSeed']=$this->getChangingTokenBackground()?0:$randomSeed;
-		$str=serialize($options);
-		return base64_encode(md5($privateKey.$str).$str);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the file path of the PHP script generating the token image
-	 */
-	protected function getCaptchaScriptFile()
-	{
-		return dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'captcha.php';
-	}
-
-	protected function getFontFile()
-	{
-		return dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'verase.ttf';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Generates a file with a randomly generated private key.
-	 * @return string the path of the file keeping the private key
-	 */
-	protected function generatePrivateKeyFile()
-	{
-		$captchaScript=$this->getCaptchaScriptFile();
-		$path=dirname($this->getApplication()->getAssetManager()->getPublishedPath($captchaScript));
-		$fileName=$path.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'captcha_key.php';
-		if(!is_file($fileName))
-		{
-			@mkdir($path);
-			$key=$this->generateRandomKey();
-			$content="<?php
-\$privateKey='$key';
-?>";
-			file_put_contents($fileName,$content);
-		}
-		return $fileName;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string a randomly generated key
-	 */
-	protected function generateRandomKey()
-	{
-		return md5(rand().rand().rand().rand());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Generates the token.
-	 * @param string public key
-	 * @param string private key
-	 * @param integer the length of the token
-	 * @param boolean whether the token is case sensitive
-	 * @return string the token generated.
-	 */
-	protected function generateToken($publicKey,$privateKey,$alphabet,$tokenLength,$caseSensitive)
-	{
-		$token=substr($this->hash2string(md5($publicKey.$privateKey),$alphabet).$this->hash2string(md5($privateKey.$publicKey),$alphabet),0,$tokenLength);
-		return $caseSensitive?$token:strtoupper($token);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Converts a hash string into a string with characters consisting of alphanumeric characters.
-	 * @param string the hexadecimal representation of the hash string
-	 * @param string the alphabet used to represent the converted string. If empty, it means '234578adefhijmnrtwyABDEFGHIJLMNQRTWY', which excludes those confusing characters.
-	 * @return string the converted string
-	 */
-	protected function hash2string($hex,$alphabet='')
-	{
-		if(strlen($alphabet)<2)
-			$alphabet='234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNQRT';
-		$hexLength=strlen($hex);
-		$base=strlen($alphabet);
-		$result='';
-		for($i=0;$i<$hexLength;$i+=6)
-		{
-			$number=hexdec(substr($hex,$i,6));
-			while($number)
-			{
-				$result.=$alphabet[$number%$base];
-				$number=floor($number/$base);
-			}
-		}
-		return $result;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Checks the requirements needed for generating CAPTCHA images.
-	 * TCaptach requires GD2 with TrueType font support and PNG image support.
-	 * @return boolean whether the requirements are satisfied.
-	 */
-	public static function checkRequirements()
-	{
-		return extension_loaded('gd') && function_exists('imagettftext') && function_exists('imagepng');
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TCaptcha class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
+
+/**
+ * TCaptcha class.
+ *
+ * Notice: while this class is easy to use and implement, it does not provide full security.
+ * In fact, it's easy to bypass the checks reusing old, already-validated tokens (reply attack).
+ * A better alternative is provided by {@link TReCaptcha}.
+ *
+ * TCaptcha displays a CAPTCHA (a token displayed as an image) that can be used
+ * to determine if the input is entered by a real user instead of some program.
+ *
+ * Unlike other CAPTCHA scripts, TCaptcha does not need session or cookie.
+ *
+ * The token (a string consisting of alphanumeric characters) displayed is automatically
+ * generated and can be configured in several ways. To specify the length of characters
+ * in the token, set {@link setMinTokenLength MinTokenLength} and {@link setMaxTokenLength MaxTokenLength}.
+ * To use case-insensitive comparison and generate upper-case-only token, set {@link setCaseSensitive CaseSensitive}
+ * to false. Advanced users can try to set {@link setTokenAlphabet TokenAlphabet}, which
+ * specifies what characters can appear in tokens.
+ *
+ * The validation of the token is related with two properties: {@link setTestLimit TestLimit}
+ * and {@link setTokenExpiry TokenExpiry}. The former specifies how many times a token can
+ * be tested with on the server side, and the latter says when a generated token will expire.
+ *
+ * To specify the appearance of the generated token image, set {@link setTokenImageTheme TokenImageTheme}
+ * to be an integer between 0 and 63. And to adjust the generated image size, set {@link setTokenFontSize TokenFontSize}
+ * (you may also set {@link TWebControl::setWidth Width}, but the scaled image may not look good.)
+ * By setting {@link setChangingTokenBackground ChangingTokenBackground} to true, the image background
+ * of the token will be variating even though the token is the same during postbacks.
+ *
+ * Upon postback, user input can be validated by calling {@link validate()}.
+ * The {@link TCaptchaValidator} control can also be used to do validation, which provides
+ * client-side validation besides the server-side validation.  By default, the token will
+ * remain the same during multiple postbacks. A new one can be generated by calling
+ * {@link regenerateToken()} manually.
+ *
+ * The following template shows a typical use of TCaptcha control:
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TCaptcha ID="Captcha" />
+ * <com:TTextBox ID="Input" />
+ * <com:TCaptchaValidator CaptchaControl="Captcha"
+ *                        ControlToValidate="Input"
+ *                        ErrorMessage="You are challenged!" />
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+class TCaptcha extends TImage
+{
+	const MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH=2;
+	const MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH=40;
+	private $_privateKey;
+	private $_validated=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the theme of the token image. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getTokenImageTheme()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TokenImageTheme',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the theme of the token image.
+	 * You may test each theme to find out the one you like the most.
+	 * Below is the explanation of the theme value:
+	 * It is treated as a 5-bit integer. Each bit toggles a specific feature of the image.
+	 * Bit 0 (the least significant): whether the image is opaque (1) or transparent (0).
+	 * Bit 1: whether we should add white noise to the image (1) or not (0).
+	 * Bit 2: whether we should add a grid to  the image (1) or not (0).
+	 * Bit 3: whether we should add some scribbles to the image (1) or not (0).
+	 * Bit 4: whether the image background should be morphed (1) or not (0).
+	 * Bit 5: whether the token text should cast a shadow (1) or not (0).
+	 * @param integer the theme of the token image. It must be an integer between 0 and 63.
+	 */
+	public function setTokenImageTheme($value)
+	{
+		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+		if($value>=0 && $value<=63)
+			$this->setViewState('TokenImageTheme',$value,0);
+		else
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_tokenimagetheme_invalid',0,63);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the font size used for displaying the token in an image. Defaults to 30.
+	 */
+	public function getTokenFontSize()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TokenFontSize',30);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the font size used for displaying the token in an image.
+	 * This property affects the generated token image size.
+	 * The image width is proportional to this font size.
+	 * @param integer the font size used for displaying the token in an image. It must be an integer between 20 and 100.
+	 */
+	public function setTokenFontSize($value)
+	{
+		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+		if($value>=20 && $value<=100)
+			$this->setViewState('TokenFontSize',$value,30);
+		else
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_tokenfontsize_invalid',20,100);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the minimum length of the token. Defaults to 4.
+	 */
+	public function getMinTokenLength()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MinTokenLength',4);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the minimum length of the token. It must be between 2 and 40.
+	 */
+	public function setMinTokenLength($value)
+	{
+		$length=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+		if($length>=self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH && $length<=self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH)
+			$this->setViewState('MinTokenLength',$length,4);
+		else
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_mintokenlength_invalid',self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH,self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the maximum length of the token. Defaults to 6.
+	 */
+	public function getMaxTokenLength()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MaxTokenLength',6);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the maximum length of the token. It must be between 2 and 40.
+	 */
+	public function setMaxTokenLength($value)
+	{
+		$length=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+		if($length>=self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH && $length<=self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH)
+			$this->setViewState('MaxTokenLength',$length,6);
+		else
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_maxtokenlength_invalid',self::MIN_TOKEN_LENGTH,self::MAX_TOKEN_LENGTH);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the token should be treated as case-sensitive. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getCaseSensitive()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CaseSensitive',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the token should be treated as case-sensitive. If false, only upper-case letters will appear in the token.
+	 */
+	public function setCaseSensitive($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CaseSensitive',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the characters that may appear in the token. Defaults to '234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT'.
+	 */
+	public function getTokenAlphabet()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TokenAlphabet','234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the characters that may appear in the token. At least 2 characters must be specified.
+	 */
+	public function setTokenAlphabet($value)
+	{
+		if(strlen($value)<2)
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_tokenalphabet_invalid');
+		$this->setViewState('TokenAlphabet',$value,'234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of seconds that a generated token will remain valid. Defaults to 600 seconds (10 minutes).
+	 */
+	public function getTokenExpiry()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TokenExpiry',600);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the number of seconds that a generated token will remain valid. A value smaller than 1 means the token will not expire.
+	 */
+	public function setTokenExpiry($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('TokenExpiry',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),600);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the background of the token image should be variated during postbacks. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getChangingTokenBackground()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ChangingTokenBackground',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the background of the token image should be variated during postbacks.
+	 */
+	public function setChangingTokenBackground($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ChangingTokenBackground',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer how many times a generated token can be tested. Defaults to 5.
+	 */
+	public function getTestLimit()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TestLimit',5);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer how many times a generated token can be tested. For unlimited tests, set it to 0.
+	 */
+	public function setTestLimit($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('TestLimit',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),5);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the currently generated token has expired.
+	 */
+	public function getIsTokenExpired()
+	{
+		if(($expiry=$this->getTokenExpiry())>0 && ($start=$this->getViewState('TokenGenerated',0))>0)
+			return $expiry+$start<time();
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the public key used for generating the token. A random one will be generated and returned if this is not set.
+	 */
+	public function getPublicKey()
+	{
+		if(($publicKey=$this->getViewState('PublicKey',''))==='')
+		{
+			$publicKey=$this->generateRandomKey();
+			$this->setPublicKey($publicKey);
+		}
+		return $publicKey;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the public key used for generating the token. A random one will be generated if this is not set.
+	 */
+	public function setPublicKey($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PublicKey',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the token that will be displayed
+	 */
+	public function getToken()
+	{
+		return $this->generateToken($this->getPublicKey(),$this->getPrivateKey(),$this->getTokenAlphabet(),$this->getTokenLength(),$this->getCaseSensitive());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the length of the token to be generated.
+	 */
+	protected function getTokenLength()
+	{
+		if(($tokenLength=$this->getViewState('TokenLength'))===null)
+		{
+			$minLength=$this->getMinTokenLength();
+			$maxLength=$this->getMaxTokenLength();
+			if($minLength>$maxLength)
+				$tokenLength=rand($maxLength,$minLength);
+			else if($minLength<$maxLength)
+				$tokenLength=rand($minLength,$maxLength);
+			else
+				$tokenLength=$minLength;
+			$this->setViewState('TokenLength',$tokenLength);
+		}
+		return $tokenLength;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the private key used for generating the token. This is randomly generated and kept in a file for persistency.
+	 */
+	public function getPrivateKey()
+	{
+		if($this->_privateKey===null)
+		{
+			$fileName=$this->generatePrivateKeyFile();
+			$content=file_get_contents($fileName);
+			$matches=array();
+			if(preg_match("/privateKey='(.*?)'/ms",$content,$matches)>0)
+				$this->_privateKey=$matches[1];
+			else
+				throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_privatekey_unknown');
+		}
+		return $this->_privateKey;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Validates a user input with the token.
+	 * @param string user input
+	 * @return boolean if the user input is not the same as the token.
+	 */
+	public function validate($input)
+	{
+		$number=$this->getViewState('TestNumber',0);
+		if(!$this->_validated)
+		{
+			$this->setViewState('TestNumber',++$number);
+			$this->_validated=true;
+		}
+		if($this->getIsTokenExpired() || (($limit=$this->getTestLimit())>0 && $number>$limit))
+		{
+			$this->regenerateToken();
+			return false;
+		}
+		return ($this->getToken()===($this->getCaseSensitive()?$input:strtoupper($input)));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Regenerates the token to be displayed.
+	 * By default, a token, once generated, will remain the same during the following page postbacks.
+	 * Calling this method will generate a new token.
+	 */
+	public function regenerateToken()
+	{
+		$this->clearViewState('TokenLength');
+		$this->setPublicKey('');
+		$this->clearViewState('TokenGenerated');
+		$this->clearViewState('RandomSeed');
+		$this->clearViewState('TestNumber',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Configures the image URL that shows the token.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		if(!self::checkRequirements())
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captcha_imagettftext_required');
+		if(!$this->getViewState('TokenGenerated',0))
+		{
+			$manager=$this->getApplication()->getAssetManager();
+			$manager->publishFilePath($this->getFontFile());
+			$url=$manager->publishFilePath($this->getCaptchaScriptFile());
+			$url.='?options='.urlencode($this->getTokenImageOptions());
+			$this->setImageUrl($url);
+
+			$this->setViewState('TokenGenerated',time());
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the options to be passed to the token image generator
+	 */
+	protected function getTokenImageOptions()
+	{
+		$privateKey=$this->getPrivateKey();  // call this method to ensure private key is generated
+		$token=$this->getToken();
+		$options=array();
+		$options['publicKey']=$this->getPublicKey();
+		$options['tokenLength']=strlen($token);
+		$options['caseSensitive']=$this->getCaseSensitive();
+		$options['alphabet']=$this->getTokenAlphabet();
+		$options['fontSize']=$this->getTokenFontSize();
+		$options['theme']=$this->getTokenImageTheme();
+		if(($randomSeed=$this->getViewState('RandomSeed',0))===0)
+		{
+			$randomSeed=(int)(microtime()*1000000);
+			$this->setViewState('RandomSeed',$randomSeed);
+		}
+		$options['randomSeed']=$this->getChangingTokenBackground()?0:$randomSeed;
+		$str=serialize($options);
+		return base64_encode(md5($privateKey.$str).$str);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the file path of the PHP script generating the token image
+	 */
+	protected function getCaptchaScriptFile()
+	{
+		return dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'captcha.php';
+	}
+
+	protected function getFontFile()
+	{
+		return dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'verase.ttf';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Generates a file with a randomly generated private key.
+	 * @return string the path of the file keeping the private key
+	 */
+	protected function generatePrivateKeyFile()
+	{
+		$captchaScript=$this->getCaptchaScriptFile();
+		$path=dirname($this->getApplication()->getAssetManager()->getPublishedPath($captchaScript));
+		$fileName=$path.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'captcha_key.php';
+		if(!is_file($fileName))
+		{
+			@mkdir($path);
+			$key=$this->generateRandomKey();
+			$content="<?php
+\$privateKey='$key';
+?>";
+			file_put_contents($fileName,$content);
+		}
+		return $fileName;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string a randomly generated key
+	 */
+	protected function generateRandomKey()
+	{
+		return md5(rand().rand().rand().rand());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Generates the token.
+	 * @param string public key
+	 * @param string private key
+	 * @param integer the length of the token
+	 * @param boolean whether the token is case sensitive
+	 * @return string the token generated.
+	 */
+	protected function generateToken($publicKey,$privateKey,$alphabet,$tokenLength,$caseSensitive)
+	{
+		$token=substr($this->hash2string(md5($publicKey.$privateKey),$alphabet).$this->hash2string(md5($privateKey.$publicKey),$alphabet),0,$tokenLength);
+		return $caseSensitive?$token:strtoupper($token);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Converts a hash string into a string with characters consisting of alphanumeric characters.
+	 * @param string the hexadecimal representation of the hash string
+	 * @param string the alphabet used to represent the converted string. If empty, it means '234578adefhijmnrtwyABDEFGHIJLMNQRTWY', which excludes those confusing characters.
+	 * @return string the converted string
+	 */
+	protected function hash2string($hex,$alphabet='')
+	{
+		if(strlen($alphabet)<2)
+			$alphabet='234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNQRT';
+		$hexLength=strlen($hex);
+		$base=strlen($alphabet);
+		$result='';
+		for($i=0;$i<$hexLength;$i+=6)
+		{
+			$number=hexdec(substr($hex,$i,6));
+			while($number)
+			{
+				$result.=$alphabet[$number%$base];
+				$number=floor($number/$base);
+			}
+		}
+		return $result;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Checks the requirements needed for generating CAPTCHA images.
+	 * TCaptach requires GD2 with TrueType font support and PNG image support.
+	 * @return boolean whether the requirements are satisfied.
+	 */
+	public static function checkRequirements()
+	{
+		return extension_loaded('gd') && function_exists('imagettftext') && function_exists('imagepng');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptchaValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptchaValidator.php
index 9eca42fb..23943971 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptchaValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCaptchaValidator.php
@@ -1,127 +1,127 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TCaptchaValidator class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCaptcha');
-
-/**
- * TCaptchaValidator class
- *
- * Notice: while this class is easy to use and implement, it does not provide full security.
- * In fact, it's easy to bypass the checks reusing old, already-validated tokens (reply attack).
- * A better alternative is provided by {@link TReCaptchaValidator}.
- *
- * TCaptchaValidator validates user input against a CAPTCHA represented by
- * a {@link TCaptcha} control. The input control fails validation if its value
- * is not the same as the token displayed in CAPTCHA. Note, if the user does
- * not enter any thing, it is still considered as failing the validation.
- *
- * To use TCaptchaValidator, specify the {@link setControlToValidate ControlToValidate}
- * to be the ID path of the input control (usually a {@link TTextBox} control}.
- * Also specify the {@link setCaptchaControl CaptchaControl} to be the ID path of
- * the CAPTCHA control that the user input should be compared with.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-class TCaptchaValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCaptchaValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the ID path of the CAPTCHA control to validate
-	 */
-	public function getCaptchaControl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CaptchaControl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the ID path of the CAPTCHA control to validate.
-	 * The ID path is the dot-connected IDs of the controls reaching from
-	 * the validator's naming container to the target control.
-	 * @param string the ID path
-	 */
-	public function setCaptchaControl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CaptchaControl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input control has the same value
-	 * as the one displayed in the corresponding CAPTCHA control.
-	 *
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	protected function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		$value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget());
-		$control=$this->findCaptchaControl();
-		return $control->validate(trim($value));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TCaptchaControl the CAPTCHA control to be validated against
-	 * @throws TConfigurationException if the CAPTCHA cannot be found according to {@link setCaptchaControl CaptchaControl}
-	 */
-	protected function findCaptchaControl()
-	{
-		if(($id=$this->getCaptchaControl())==='')
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captchavalidator_captchacontrol_required');
-		else if(($control=$this->findControl($id))===null)
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captchavalidator_captchacontrol_inexistent',$id);
-		else if(!($control instanceof TCaptcha))
-			throw new TConfigurationException('captchavalidator_captchacontrol_invalid',$id);
-		else
-			return $control;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options=parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		$control=$this->findCaptchaControl();
-		if($control->getCaseSensitive())
-		{
-			$options['TokenHash']=$this->generateTokenHash($control->getToken());
-			$options['CaseSensitive']=true;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$options['TokenHash']=$this->generateTokenHash(strtoupper($control->getToken()));
-			$options['CaseSensitive']=false;
-		}
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	private function generateTokenHash($token)
-	{
-		for($h=0,$i=strlen($token)-1;$i>=0;--$i)
-			$h+=ord($token[$i]);
-		return $h;
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TCaptchaValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCaptcha');
+
+/**
+ * TCaptchaValidator class
+ *
+ * Notice: while this class is easy to use and implement, it does not provide full security.
+ * In fact, it's easy to bypass the checks reusing old, already-validated tokens (reply attack).
+ * A better alternative is provided by {@link TReCaptchaValidator}.
+ *
+ * TCaptchaValidator validates user input against a CAPTCHA represented by
+ * a {@link TCaptcha} control. The input control fails validation if its value
+ * is not the same as the token displayed in CAPTCHA. Note, if the user does
+ * not enter any thing, it is still considered as failing the validation.
+ *
+ * To use TCaptchaValidator, specify the {@link setControlToValidate ControlToValidate}
+ * to be the ID path of the input control (usually a {@link TTextBox} control}.
+ * Also specify the {@link setCaptchaControl CaptchaControl} to be the ID path of
+ * the CAPTCHA control that the user input should be compared with.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+class TCaptchaValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCaptchaValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the ID path of the CAPTCHA control to validate
+	 */
+	public function getCaptchaControl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CaptchaControl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the ID path of the CAPTCHA control to validate.
+	 * The ID path is the dot-connected IDs of the controls reaching from
+	 * the validator's naming container to the target control.
+	 * @param string the ID path
+	 */
+	public function setCaptchaControl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CaptchaControl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input control has the same value
+	 * as the one displayed in the corresponding CAPTCHA control.
+	 *
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	protected function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		$value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget());
+		$control=$this->findCaptchaControl();
+		return $control->validate(trim($value));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TCaptchaControl the CAPTCHA control to be validated against
+	 * @throws TConfigurationException if the CAPTCHA cannot be found according to {@link setCaptchaControl CaptchaControl}
+	 */
+	protected function findCaptchaControl()
+	{
+		if(($id=$this->getCaptchaControl())==='')
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captchavalidator_captchacontrol_required');
+		else if(($control=$this->findControl($id))===null)
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captchavalidator_captchacontrol_inexistent',$id);
+		else if(!($control instanceof TCaptcha))
+			throw new TConfigurationException('captchavalidator_captchacontrol_invalid',$id);
+		else
+			return $control;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options=parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		$control=$this->findCaptchaControl();
+		if($control->getCaseSensitive())
+		{
+			$options['TokenHash']=$this->generateTokenHash($control->getToken());
+			$options['CaseSensitive']=true;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$options['TokenHash']=$this->generateTokenHash(strtoupper($control->getToken()));
+			$options['CaseSensitive']=false;
+		}
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	private function generateTokenHash($token)
+	{
+		for($h=0,$i=strlen($token)-1;$i>=0;--$i)
+			$h+=ord($token[$i]);
+		return $h;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBox.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBox.php
index 641497ac..fe8bfbca 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBox.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBox.php
@@ -1,131 +1,131 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TCheckBox class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TCheckBox class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TCheckBox class
- *
- * TCheckBox displays a check box on the page.
- * You can specify the caption to display beside the check box by setting
- * the {@link setText Text} property.  The caption can appear either on the right
- * or left of the check box, which is determined by the {@link setTextAlign TextAlign}
- * property.
- *
- * To determine whether the TCheckBox component is checked, test the {@link getChecked Checked}
- * property. The {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event is raised when
- * the {@link getChecked Checked} state of the TCheckBox component changes
- * between posts to the server. You can provide an event handler for
- * the {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event to  to programmatically
- * control the actions performed when the state of the TCheckBox component changes
- * between posts to the server.
- *
- * If {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} is set true, changing the check box state
- * will cause postback action. And if {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation}
- * is true, validation will also be processed, which can be further restricted within
- * a {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}.
- *
- * Note, {@link setText Text} is rendered as is. Make sure it does not contain unwanted characters
- * that may bring security vulnerabilities.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TCheckBox extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable, IDataRenderer, ISurroundable
-{
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TCheckBox class
+ *
+ * TCheckBox displays a check box on the page.
+ * You can specify the caption to display beside the check box by setting
+ * the {@link setText Text} property.  The caption can appear either on the right
+ * or left of the check box, which is determined by the {@link setTextAlign TextAlign}
+ * property.
+ *
+ * To determine whether the TCheckBox component is checked, test the {@link getChecked Checked}
+ * property. The {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event is raised when
+ * the {@link getChecked Checked} state of the TCheckBox component changes
+ * between posts to the server. You can provide an event handler for
+ * the {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event to  to programmatically
+ * control the actions performed when the state of the TCheckBox component changes
+ * between posts to the server.
+ *
+ * If {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} is set true, changing the check box state
+ * will cause postback action. And if {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation}
+ * is true, validation will also be processed, which can be further restricted within
+ * a {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}.
+ *
+ * Note, {@link setText Text} is rendered as is. Make sure it does not contain unwanted characters
+ * that may bring security vulnerabilities.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TCheckBox extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable, IDataRenderer, ISurroundable
+{
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
 	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the button
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'input';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		$checked=$this->getChecked();
-		if($newChecked=isset($values[$key]))
-			$this->setValue($values[$key]);
-		$this->setChecked($newChecked);
-		return $this->_dataChanged=($newChecked!==$checked);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method raises {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onCheckedChanged(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnCheckedChanged</b> event when {@link getChecked Checked} changes value during postback.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event delegates can be invoked.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onCheckedChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCheckedChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the checkbox to receive postback data during postback.
-	 * This is necessary because a checkbox if unchecked, when postback,
-	 * does not have direct mapping between post data and the checkbox name.
-	 *
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked before render.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		if($this->getEnabled(true))
-			$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value of the property that needs validation.
-	 * @return mixed the property value to be validated
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getChecked();
-	}
-
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the button
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'input';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		$checked=$this->getChecked();
+		if($newChecked=isset($values[$key]))
+			$this->setValue($values[$key]);
+		$this->setChecked($newChecked);
+		return $this->_dataChanged=($newChecked!==$checked);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method raises {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onCheckedChanged(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnCheckedChanged</b> event when {@link getChecked Checked} changes value during postback.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event delegates can be invoked.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onCheckedChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCheckedChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the checkbox to receive postback data during postback.
+	 * This is necessary because a checkbox if unchecked, when postback,
+	 * does not have direct mapping between post data and the checkbox name.
+	 *
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked before render.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		if($this->getEnabled(true))
+			$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value of the property that needs validation.
+	 * @return mixed the property value to be validated
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getChecked();
+	}
+
 	/**
 	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
 	 * Defaults to true.
@@ -143,390 +143,390 @@ class TCheckBox extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatabl
 	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
 	}
 
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text caption of the checkbox
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text caption of the checkbox.
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the value of the checkbox. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Value','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the value of the checkbox
-	 */
-	public function setValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Value',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTextAlign the alignment (Left or Right) of the text caption, defaults to TTextAlign::Right.
-	 */
-	public function getTextAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TextAlign',TTextAlign::Right);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTextAlign the alignment of the text caption. Valid values include Left and Right.
-	 */
-	public function setTextAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('TextAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextAlign'),TTextAlign::Right);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the checkbox is checked
-	 */
-	public function getChecked()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Checked',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a value indicating whether the checkbox is to be checked or not.
-	 * @param boolean whether the checkbox is to be checked or not.
-	 */
-	public function setChecked($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Checked',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value indicating whether the checkbox is checked.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getChecked()}.
-	 * @return boolean whether the checkbox is checked.
-	 * @see getChecked
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getChecked();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether the checkbox is to be checked or not.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setChecked()}.
-	 * @param boolean whether the checkbox is to be checked
-	 * @see setChecked
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setChecked($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether clicking on the checkbox will post the page.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoPostBack()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a value indicating whether clicking on the checkbox will post the page.
-	 * @param boolean whether clicking on the checkbox will post the page.
-	 */
-	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event triggered by this checkbox will cause input validation, default is true.
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether postback event trigger by this checkbox will cause input validation.
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this checkbox will cause input validation.
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the checkbox causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the checkbox causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the id of the surrounding tag or this clientID if no such tag needed
-	 */
-	public function getSurroundingTagID()
-	{
-        return $this->getSpanNeeded() ? $this->getClientID().'_parent' : $this->getClientID();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the checkbox control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by rendering a checkbox input element
-	 * and a span element if needed.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$this->getPage()->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			$this->getStyle()->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if(($tooltip=$this->getToolTip())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('title',$tooltip);
-		if($this->getHasAttributes())
-		{
-			$attributes=$this->getAttributes();
-			$value=$attributes->remove('value');
-			// onclick js should only be added to input tag
-			if(($onclick=$attributes->remove('onclick'))===null)
-				$onclick='';
-			if($attributes->getCount())
-				$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
-			if($value!==null)
-				$attributes->add('value',$value);
-		}
-		else
-			$onclick='';
-        if($needspan=$this->getSpanNeeded())
-        {
-            $writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getSurroundingTagID());
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
-        }
-		$clientID=$this->getClientID();
-		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-		{
-			if($this->getTextAlign()===TTextAlign::Left)
-			{
-				$this->renderLabel($writer,$clientID,$text);
-				$this->renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$this->renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick);
-				$this->renderLabel($writer,$clientID,$text);
-			}
-		}
-		else
-			$this->renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick);
-		if($needspan)
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TMap list of attributes to be rendered for label beside the checkbox
-	 */
-	public function getLabelAttributes()
-	{
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('LabelAttributes',null))
-			return $attributes;
-		else
-		{
-			$attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
-			$this->setViewState('LabelAttributes',$attributes,null);
-			return $attributes;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TMap list of attributes to be rendered for the checkbox
-	 */
-	public function getInputAttributes()
-	{
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null))
-			return $attributes;
-		else
-		{
-			$attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
-			$this->setViewState('InputAttributes',$attributes,null);
-			return $attributes;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the value attribute to be rendered
-	 */
-	protected function getValueAttribute()
-	{
-		if(($value=$this->getValue())!=='')
-			return $value;
-		else
-		{
-			$attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null);
-			if($attributes && $attributes->contains('value'))
-				return $attributes->itemAt('value');
-			else if($this->hasAttribute('value'))
-				return $this->getAttribute('value');
-			else
-				return '';
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-    /**
-     * Check if we need a span tag to surround this control. The span tag will be created if
-     * the Text property is set for this control. 
-     *
-     * @return bool wether this control needs a surrounding span tag
-     */
-    protected function getSpanNeeded() {
-        return $this->getText()!=='';
-    }
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders a label beside the checkbox.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param string checkbox id
-	 * @param string label text
-	 */
-	protected function renderLabel($writer,$clientID,$text)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('for',$clientID);
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('LabelAttributes',null))
-			$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('label');
-		$writer->write($text);
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders a checkbox input element.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param string checkbox id
-	 * @param string onclick js
-	 */
-	protected function renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick)
-	{
-		if($clientID!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$clientID);
-		$writer->addAttribute('type','checkbox');
-		if(($value=$this->getValueAttribute())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('value',$value);
-		if(!empty($onclick))
-			$writer->addAttribute('onclick',$onclick);
-		if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
-		if($this->getChecked())
-			$writer->addAttribute('checked','checked');
-		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		if($this->getEnabled(true)
-			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
-			&& $this->getAutoPostBack()
-			&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-		{
-			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-		}
-
-		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
-		if(($tabindex=$this->getTabIndex())>0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('tabindex',"$tabindex");
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null))
-			$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the client-script code.
-	 */
-	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
-	{
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCheckBox';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the post back options for this checkbox.
-	 * @return array
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		return $options;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TTextAlign class.
- * TTextAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible text alignments
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Left: left aligned
- * - Right: right aligned
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TTextAlign extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Left='Left';
-	const Right='Right';
-}
-
-?>
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text caption of the checkbox
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text caption of the checkbox.
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the value of the checkbox. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Value','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the value of the checkbox
+	 */
+	public function setValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Value',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTextAlign the alignment (Left or Right) of the text caption, defaults to TTextAlign::Right.
+	 */
+	public function getTextAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TextAlign',TTextAlign::Right);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTextAlign the alignment of the text caption. Valid values include Left and Right.
+	 */
+	public function setTextAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('TextAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextAlign'),TTextAlign::Right);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the checkbox is checked
+	 */
+	public function getChecked()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Checked',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a value indicating whether the checkbox is to be checked or not.
+	 * @param boolean whether the checkbox is to be checked or not.
+	 */
+	public function setChecked($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Checked',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value indicating whether the checkbox is checked.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getChecked()}.
+	 * @return boolean whether the checkbox is checked.
+	 * @see getChecked
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getChecked();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether the checkbox is to be checked or not.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setChecked()}.
+	 * @param boolean whether the checkbox is to be checked
+	 * @see setChecked
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setChecked($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether clicking on the checkbox will post the page.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoPostBack()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a value indicating whether clicking on the checkbox will post the page.
+	 * @param boolean whether clicking on the checkbox will post the page.
+	 */
+	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event triggered by this checkbox will cause input validation, default is true.
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether postback event trigger by this checkbox will cause input validation.
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this checkbox will cause input validation.
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the checkbox causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the checkbox causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the id of the surrounding tag or this clientID if no such tag needed
+	 */
+	public function getSurroundingTagID()
+	{
+        return $this->getSpanNeeded() ? $this->getClientID().'_parent' : $this->getClientID();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the checkbox control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by rendering a checkbox input element
+	 * and a span element if needed.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$this->getPage()->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			$this->getStyle()->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if(($tooltip=$this->getToolTip())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('title',$tooltip);
+		if($this->getHasAttributes())
+		{
+			$attributes=$this->getAttributes();
+			$value=$attributes->remove('value');
+			// onclick js should only be added to input tag
+			if(($onclick=$attributes->remove('onclick'))===null)
+				$onclick='';
+			if($attributes->getCount())
+				$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
+			if($value!==null)
+				$attributes->add('value',$value);
+		}
+		else
+			$onclick='';
+        if($needspan=$this->getSpanNeeded())
+        {
+            $writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getSurroundingTagID());
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
+        }
+		$clientID=$this->getClientID();
+		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+		{
+			if($this->getTextAlign()===TTextAlign::Left)
+			{
+				$this->renderLabel($writer,$clientID,$text);
+				$this->renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$this->renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick);
+				$this->renderLabel($writer,$clientID,$text);
+			}
+		}
+		else
+			$this->renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick);
+		if($needspan)
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TMap list of attributes to be rendered for label beside the checkbox
+	 */
+	public function getLabelAttributes()
+	{
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('LabelAttributes',null))
+			return $attributes;
+		else
+		{
+			$attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
+			$this->setViewState('LabelAttributes',$attributes,null);
+			return $attributes;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TMap list of attributes to be rendered for the checkbox
+	 */
+	public function getInputAttributes()
+	{
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null))
+			return $attributes;
+		else
+		{
+			$attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
+			$this->setViewState('InputAttributes',$attributes,null);
+			return $attributes;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the value attribute to be rendered
+	 */
+	protected function getValueAttribute()
+	{
+		if(($value=$this->getValue())!=='')
+			return $value;
+		else
+		{
+			$attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null);
+			if($attributes && $attributes->contains('value'))
+				return $attributes->itemAt('value');
+			else if($this->hasAttribute('value'))
+				return $this->getAttribute('value');
+			else
+				return '';
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+    /**
+     * Check if we need a span tag to surround this control. The span tag will be created if
+     * the Text property is set for this control. 
+     *
+     * @return bool wether this control needs a surrounding span tag
+     */
+    protected function getSpanNeeded() {
+        return $this->getText()!=='';
+    }
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders a label beside the checkbox.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param string checkbox id
+	 * @param string label text
+	 */
+	protected function renderLabel($writer,$clientID,$text)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('for',$clientID);
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('LabelAttributes',null))
+			$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('label');
+		$writer->write($text);
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders a checkbox input element.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param string checkbox id
+	 * @param string onclick js
+	 */
+	protected function renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick)
+	{
+		if($clientID!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$clientID);
+		$writer->addAttribute('type','checkbox');
+		if(($value=$this->getValueAttribute())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('value',$value);
+		if(!empty($onclick))
+			$writer->addAttribute('onclick',$onclick);
+		if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
+		if($this->getChecked())
+			$writer->addAttribute('checked','checked');
+		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		if($this->getEnabled(true)
+			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
+			&& $this->getAutoPostBack()
+			&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+		{
+			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+		}
+
+		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
+		if(($tabindex=$this->getTabIndex())>0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('tabindex',"$tabindex");
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null))
+			$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the client-script code.
+	 */
+	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
+	{
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCheckBox';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the post back options for this checkbox.
+	 * @return array
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		return $options;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TTextAlign class.
+ * TTextAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible text alignments
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Left: left aligned
+ * - Right: right aligned
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TTextAlign extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Left='Left';
+	const Right='Right';
+}
+
+?>
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxColumn.php
index 9c1db114..e1a2e178 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxColumn.php
@@ -1,123 +1,123 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TCheckBoxColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TCheckBoxColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-/**
- * TCheckBox class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCheckBox');
-
-/**
- * TCheckBoxColumn class
- *
- * TCheckBoxColumn represents a checkbox column that is bound to a field in a data source.
- * The checked state of the checkboxes are determiend by the bound data at
- * {@link setDataField DataField}. If {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} is false,
- * TCheckBoxColumn will display an enabled checkbox provided the cells are
- * in edit mode. Otherwise, the checkboxes will be disabled to prevent from editting.
- *
- * The checkbox control in the TCheckBoxColumn can be accessed by one of
- * the following two methods:
- * <code>
- * $datagridItem->CheckBoxColumnID->CheckBox
- * $datagridItem->CheckBoxColumnID->Controls[0]
- * </code>
- * The second method is possible because the checkbox control created within the
- * datagrid cell is the first child.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TCheckBoxColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
-	 */
-	public function getDataField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
-	 */
-	public function setDataField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getReadOnly()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
-	 */
-	public function setReadOnly($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * It creates a checkbox inside the cell.
-	 * If the column is read-only or if the item is not in edit mode,
-	 * the checkbox will be set disabled.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
-		{
-			$checkBox=new TCheckBox;
-			if($this->getReadOnly() || $itemType!==TListItemType::EditItem)
-				$checkBox->setEnabled(false);
-			$cell->setHorizontalAlign('Center');
-			$cell->getControls()->add($checkBox);
-			$cell->registerObject('CheckBox',$checkBox);
-			if($this->getDataField()!=='')
-				$checkBox->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-		}
-		else
-			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
-	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
-	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
-	 */
-	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
-		$data=$item->getData();
-		if(($field=$this->getDataField())!=='')
-			$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field));
-		else
-			$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($data);
-		if($sender instanceof TCheckBox)
-			$sender->setChecked($value);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+/**
+ * TCheckBox class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCheckBox');
+
+/**
+ * TCheckBoxColumn class
+ *
+ * TCheckBoxColumn represents a checkbox column that is bound to a field in a data source.
+ * The checked state of the checkboxes are determiend by the bound data at
+ * {@link setDataField DataField}. If {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} is false,
+ * TCheckBoxColumn will display an enabled checkbox provided the cells are
+ * in edit mode. Otherwise, the checkboxes will be disabled to prevent from editting.
+ *
+ * The checkbox control in the TCheckBoxColumn can be accessed by one of
+ * the following two methods:
+ * <code>
+ * $datagridItem->CheckBoxColumnID->CheckBox
+ * $datagridItem->CheckBoxColumnID->Controls[0]
+ * </code>
+ * The second method is possible because the checkbox control created within the
+ * datagrid cell is the first child.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TCheckBoxColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
+	 */
+	public function getDataField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
+	 */
+	public function setDataField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getReadOnly()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
+	 */
+	public function setReadOnly($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * It creates a checkbox inside the cell.
+	 * If the column is read-only or if the item is not in edit mode,
+	 * the checkbox will be set disabled.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
+		{
+			$checkBox=new TCheckBox;
+			if($this->getReadOnly() || $itemType!==TListItemType::EditItem)
+				$checkBox->setEnabled(false);
+			$cell->setHorizontalAlign('Center');
+			$cell->getControls()->add($checkBox);
+			$cell->registerObject('CheckBox',$checkBox);
+			if($this->getDataField()!=='')
+				$checkBox->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+		}
+		else
+			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
+	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
+	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
+	 */
+	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
+		$data=$item->getData();
+		if(($field=$this->getDataField())!=='')
+			$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field));
+		else
+			$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($data);
+		if($sender instanceof TCheckBox)
+			$sender->setChecked($value);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxList.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxList.php
index 2f938174..3c298a02 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxList.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCheckBoxList.php
@@ -1,499 +1,499 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TCheckBoxList class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TListControl class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
-/**
- * Includes TRepeatInfo class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRepeatInfo');
-/**
- * Includes TCheckBox class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCheckBox');
-
-/**
- * TCheckBoxList class
- *
- * TCheckBoxList displays a list of checkboxes on a Web page.
- *
- * The layout of the checkbox list is specified via {@link setRepeatLayout RepeatLayout},
- * which can be either 'Table' (default) or 'Flow'.
- * A table layout uses HTML table cells to organize the checkboxes while
- * a flow layout uses line breaks to organize the checkboxes.
- * When the layout is using 'Table', {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and
- * {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing} can be used to adjust the cellpadding and
- * cellpadding of the table.
- *
- * The number of columns used to display the checkboxes is specified via
- * {@link setRepeatColumns RepeatColumns} property, while the {@link setRepeatDirection RepeatDirection}
- * governs the order of the items being rendered.
- *
- * The alignment of the text besides each checkbox can be specified via {@link setTextAlign TextAlign}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TCheckBoxList extends TListControl implements IRepeatInfoUser, INamingContainer, IPostBackDataHandler,  IValidatable
-{
-	private $_repeatedControl;
-	private $_isEnabled;
-	private $_changedEventRaised=false;
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
-	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * Remember to call parent implementation if you override this method
-	 */
-	public function __construct()
-	{
-		parent::__construct();
-		$this->_repeatedControl=$this->createRepeatedControl();
-		$this->_repeatedControl->setEnableViewState(false);
-		$this->_repeatedControl->setID('c0');
-		$this->getControls()->add($this->_repeatedControl);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a control used for repetition (used as a template).
-	 * @return TControl the control to be repeated
-	 */
-	protected function createRepeatedControl()
-	{
-		return new TCheckBox;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Finds a control by ID.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation so that it always returns
-	 * the checkbox list itself (because the checkbox list does not have child controls.)
-	 * @param string control ID
-	 * @return TControl control being found
-	 */
-	public function findControl($id)
-	{
-		return $this;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether this control supports multiple selection. Always true for checkbox list.
-	 */
-	protected function getIsMultiSelect()
-	{
-		return true;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object for the control.
-	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by checkbox list.
-	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTextAlign the alignment of the text caption, defaults to TTextAlign::Right.
-	 */
-	public function getTextAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TextAlign',TTextAlign::Right);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTextAlign the text alignment of the checkboxes
-	 */
-	public function setTextAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('TextAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextAlign'),TTextAlign::Right);
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRepeatInfo repeat information (primarily used by control developers)
-	 */
-	protected function getRepeatInfo()
-	{
-		if(($repeatInfo=$this->getViewState('RepeatInfo',null))===null)
-		{
-			$repeatInfo=new TRepeatInfo;
-			$this->setViewState('RepeatInfo',$repeatInfo,null);
-		}
-		return $repeatInfo;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with. Defaults to 0 meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatColumns()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatColumns();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with.
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatColumns($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatColumns($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the direction of traversing the list, defaults to 'Vertical'
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatDirection()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatDirection();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the direction (Vertical, Horizontal) of traversing the list
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatDirection($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatDirection($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks. Defaults to 'Table'.
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatLayout()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatLayout();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks (Table, Flow)
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatLayout($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the cellspacing for the table keeping the checkbox list. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellSpacing()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getCellSpacing();
-		else
-			return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the cellspacing for the table keeping the checkbox list.
-	 * @param integer the cellspacing for the table keeping the checkbox list.
-	 */
-	public function setCellSpacing($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setCellSpacing($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the cellpadding for the table keeping the checkbox list. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellPadding()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getCellPadding();
-		else
-			return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the cellpadding for the table keeping the checkbox list.
-	 * @param integer the cellpadding for the table keeping the checkbox list.
-	 */
-	public function setCellPadding($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setCellPadding($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains header item.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @return boolean always false.
-	 */
-	public function getHasHeader()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains footer item.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @return boolean always false.
-	 */
-	public function getHasFooter()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains separator items.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @return boolean always false.
-	 */
-	public function getHasSeparators()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the control is to be enabled.
-	 */
-	public function setEnabled($value)
-	{
-		parent::setEnabled($value);
-		$value = !TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-		// if this is an active control, 
-		// and it's a callback, 
-		// and we can update clientside,
-		// then update the 'disabled' attribute of the items.
-		if(($this instanceof IActiveControl) &&
-				$this->getPage()->getIsCallBack() &&
-				$this->getActiveControl()->canUpdateClientSide())
-		{
-			$items = $this->getItems();
-			$cs = $this->getPage()->getCallbackClient();
-			$baseClientID = $this->getClientID().'_c';
-			foreach($items as $index=>$item)
-			{
-				$cs->setAttribute($baseClientID.$index, 'disabled', $value);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a style used for rendering items.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
-	 * @param integer index of the item being rendered
-	 * @return null
-	 */
-	public function generateItemStyle($itemType,$index)
-	{
-		return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders an item in the list.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose
-	 * @param TRepeatInfo repeat information
-	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item in the item list
-	 */
-	public function renderItem($writer,$repeatInfo,$itemType,$index)
-	{
-		$repeatedControl=$this->_repeatedControl;
-		$item=$this->getItems()->itemAt($index);
-		if($item->getHasAttributes())
-			$repeatedControl->getAttributes()->copyFrom($item->getAttributes());
-		else if($repeatedControl->getHasAttributes())
-			$repeatedControl->getAttributes()->clear();
-		$repeatedControl->setID("c$index");
-		$repeatedControl->setText($item->getText());
-		$repeatedControl->setChecked($item->getSelected());
-		$repeatedControl->setAttribute('value',$item->getValue());
-		$repeatedControl->setEnabled($this->_isEnabled && $item->getEnabled());
-		$repeatedControl->setEnableClientScript(false);
-		$repeatedControl->renderControl($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		if($this->getEnabled(true))
-		{
-			$index=(int)substr($key,strlen($this->getUniqueID())+2);
-			$this->ensureDataBound();
-			if($index>=0 && $index<$this->getItemCount())
-			{
-				$item=$this->getItems()->itemAt($index);
-				if($item->getEnabled())
-				{
-					$checked=isset($values[$key]);
-					if($item->getSelected()!==$checked)
-					{
-						$item->setSelected($checked);
-						if(!$this->_changedEventRaised)
-						{
-							$this->_changedEventRaised=true;
-							return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-						}
-					}
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
-	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getSelectedIndices SelectedIndices} property
-	 * is changed on postback.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onSelectedIndexChanged(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers for post data on postback.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		$this->_repeatedControl->setAutoPostBack($this->getAutoPostBack());
-		$this->_repeatedControl->setCausesValidation($this->getCausesValidation());
-		$this->_repeatedControl->setValidationGroup($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$n=$this->getItemCount();
-		for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
-		{
-			$this->_repeatedControl->setID("c$i");
-			$page->registerRequiresPostData($this->_repeatedControl);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Wether the list should be rendered inside a span or not
-	 * 
-	 *@return boolean true if we need a span
-	 */
-	protected function getSpanNeeded ()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatLayout()===TRepeatLayout::Raw;
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * Renders the checkbox list control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getItemCount()>0)
-		{
-			if ($needSpan=$this->getSpanNeeded())
-			{
-				$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientId());
-				$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
-			}
-			$this->_isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
-			$repeatInfo=$this->getRepeatInfo();
-			$accessKey=$this->getAccessKey();
-			$tabIndex=$this->getTabIndex();
-			$this->_repeatedControl->setTextAlign($this->getTextAlign());
-			$this->_repeatedControl->setAccessKey($accessKey);
-			$this->_repeatedControl->setTabIndex($tabIndex);
-			$this->setAccessKey('');
-			$this->setTabIndex(0);
-			$repeatInfo->renderRepeater($writer,$this);
-			$this->setAccessKey($accessKey);
-			$this->setTabIndex($tabIndex);
-			if ($needSpan)
-				$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		//checkbox skipped the client control script in addAttributesToRender
-		if($this->getEnabled(true)
-			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
-			&& $this->getAutoPostBack()
-			&& $this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-		{
-			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value to be validated.
-	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
-	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getSelectedValue();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
-	 * Defaults to true.
-	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
-	 */
-	public function getIsValid()
-	{
-	    return $this->_isValid;
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
-	 */
-	public function setIsValid($value)
-	{
-	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCheckBoxList';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the post back options for this checkbox.
-	 * @return array
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ListID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['ListName'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		$options['ItemCount'] = $this->getItemCount();
-		return $options;
-	}
-	
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TCheckBoxList class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TListControl class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
+/**
+ * Includes TRepeatInfo class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRepeatInfo');
+/**
+ * Includes TCheckBox class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCheckBox');
+
+/**
+ * TCheckBoxList class
+ *
+ * TCheckBoxList displays a list of checkboxes on a Web page.
+ *
+ * The layout of the checkbox list is specified via {@link setRepeatLayout RepeatLayout},
+ * which can be either 'Table' (default) or 'Flow'.
+ * A table layout uses HTML table cells to organize the checkboxes while
+ * a flow layout uses line breaks to organize the checkboxes.
+ * When the layout is using 'Table', {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and
+ * {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing} can be used to adjust the cellpadding and
+ * cellpadding of the table.
+ *
+ * The number of columns used to display the checkboxes is specified via
+ * {@link setRepeatColumns RepeatColumns} property, while the {@link setRepeatDirection RepeatDirection}
+ * governs the order of the items being rendered.
+ *
+ * The alignment of the text besides each checkbox can be specified via {@link setTextAlign TextAlign}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TCheckBoxList extends TListControl implements IRepeatInfoUser, INamingContainer, IPostBackDataHandler,  IValidatable
+{
+	private $_repeatedControl;
+	private $_isEnabled;
+	private $_changedEventRaised=false;
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
+	private $_isValid=true;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * Remember to call parent implementation if you override this method
+	 */
+	public function __construct()
+	{
+		parent::__construct();
+		$this->_repeatedControl=$this->createRepeatedControl();
+		$this->_repeatedControl->setEnableViewState(false);
+		$this->_repeatedControl->setID('c0');
+		$this->getControls()->add($this->_repeatedControl);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a control used for repetition (used as a template).
+	 * @return TControl the control to be repeated
+	 */
+	protected function createRepeatedControl()
+	{
+		return new TCheckBox;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Finds a control by ID.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation so that it always returns
+	 * the checkbox list itself (because the checkbox list does not have child controls.)
+	 * @param string control ID
+	 * @return TControl control being found
+	 */
+	public function findControl($id)
+	{
+		return $this;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether this control supports multiple selection. Always true for checkbox list.
+	 */
+	protected function getIsMultiSelect()
+	{
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object for the control.
+	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by checkbox list.
+	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTextAlign the alignment of the text caption, defaults to TTextAlign::Right.
+	 */
+	public function getTextAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TextAlign',TTextAlign::Right);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTextAlign the text alignment of the checkboxes
+	 */
+	public function setTextAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('TextAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextAlign'),TTextAlign::Right);
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRepeatInfo repeat information (primarily used by control developers)
+	 */
+	protected function getRepeatInfo()
+	{
+		if(($repeatInfo=$this->getViewState('RepeatInfo',null))===null)
+		{
+			$repeatInfo=new TRepeatInfo;
+			$this->setViewState('RepeatInfo',$repeatInfo,null);
+		}
+		return $repeatInfo;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with. Defaults to 0 meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatColumns()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatColumns();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with.
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatColumns($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatColumns($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the direction of traversing the list, defaults to 'Vertical'
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatDirection()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatDirection();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the direction (Vertical, Horizontal) of traversing the list
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatDirection($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatDirection($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks. Defaults to 'Table'.
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatLayout()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatLayout();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks (Table, Flow)
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatLayout($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the cellspacing for the table keeping the checkbox list. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellSpacing()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getCellSpacing();
+		else
+			return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the cellspacing for the table keeping the checkbox list.
+	 * @param integer the cellspacing for the table keeping the checkbox list.
+	 */
+	public function setCellSpacing($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setCellSpacing($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the cellpadding for the table keeping the checkbox list. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellPadding()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getCellPadding();
+		else
+			return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the cellpadding for the table keeping the checkbox list.
+	 * @param integer the cellpadding for the table keeping the checkbox list.
+	 */
+	public function setCellPadding($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setCellPadding($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains header item.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @return boolean always false.
+	 */
+	public function getHasHeader()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains footer item.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @return boolean always false.
+	 */
+	public function getHasFooter()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains separator items.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @return boolean always false.
+	 */
+	public function getHasSeparators()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the control is to be enabled.
+	 */
+	public function setEnabled($value)
+	{
+		parent::setEnabled($value);
+		$value = !TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+		// if this is an active control, 
+		// and it's a callback, 
+		// and we can update clientside,
+		// then update the 'disabled' attribute of the items.
+		if(($this instanceof IActiveControl) &&
+				$this->getPage()->getIsCallBack() &&
+				$this->getActiveControl()->canUpdateClientSide())
+		{
+			$items = $this->getItems();
+			$cs = $this->getPage()->getCallbackClient();
+			$baseClientID = $this->getClientID().'_c';
+			foreach($items as $index=>$item)
+			{
+				$cs->setAttribute($baseClientID.$index, 'disabled', $value);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a style used for rendering items.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
+	 * @param integer index of the item being rendered
+	 * @return null
+	 */
+	public function generateItemStyle($itemType,$index)
+	{
+		return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders an item in the list.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose
+	 * @param TRepeatInfo repeat information
+	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item in the item list
+	 */
+	public function renderItem($writer,$repeatInfo,$itemType,$index)
+	{
+		$repeatedControl=$this->_repeatedControl;
+		$item=$this->getItems()->itemAt($index);
+		if($item->getHasAttributes())
+			$repeatedControl->getAttributes()->copyFrom($item->getAttributes());
+		else if($repeatedControl->getHasAttributes())
+			$repeatedControl->getAttributes()->clear();
+		$repeatedControl->setID("c$index");
+		$repeatedControl->setText($item->getText());
+		$repeatedControl->setChecked($item->getSelected());
+		$repeatedControl->setAttribute('value',$item->getValue());
+		$repeatedControl->setEnabled($this->_isEnabled && $item->getEnabled());
+		$repeatedControl->setEnableClientScript(false);
+		$repeatedControl->renderControl($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		if($this->getEnabled(true))
+		{
+			$index=(int)substr($key,strlen($this->getUniqueID())+2);
+			$this->ensureDataBound();
+			if($index>=0 && $index<$this->getItemCount())
+			{
+				$item=$this->getItems()->itemAt($index);
+				if($item->getEnabled())
+				{
+					$checked=isset($values[$key]);
+					if($item->getSelected()!==$checked)
+					{
+						$item->setSelected($checked);
+						if(!$this->_changedEventRaised)
+						{
+							$this->_changedEventRaised=true;
+							return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+						}
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
+	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getSelectedIndices SelectedIndices} property
+	 * is changed on postback.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onSelectedIndexChanged(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers for post data on postback.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		$this->_repeatedControl->setAutoPostBack($this->getAutoPostBack());
+		$this->_repeatedControl->setCausesValidation($this->getCausesValidation());
+		$this->_repeatedControl->setValidationGroup($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$n=$this->getItemCount();
+		for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
+		{
+			$this->_repeatedControl->setID("c$i");
+			$page->registerRequiresPostData($this->_repeatedControl);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Wether the list should be rendered inside a span or not
+	 * 
+	 *@return boolean true if we need a span
+	 */
+	protected function getSpanNeeded ()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatLayout()===TRepeatLayout::Raw;
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * Renders the checkbox list control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getItemCount()>0)
+		{
+			if ($needSpan=$this->getSpanNeeded())
+			{
+				$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientId());
+				$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
+			}
+			$this->_isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
+			$repeatInfo=$this->getRepeatInfo();
+			$accessKey=$this->getAccessKey();
+			$tabIndex=$this->getTabIndex();
+			$this->_repeatedControl->setTextAlign($this->getTextAlign());
+			$this->_repeatedControl->setAccessKey($accessKey);
+			$this->_repeatedControl->setTabIndex($tabIndex);
+			$this->setAccessKey('');
+			$this->setTabIndex(0);
+			$repeatInfo->renderRepeater($writer,$this);
+			$this->setAccessKey($accessKey);
+			$this->setTabIndex($tabIndex);
+			if ($needSpan)
+				$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		//checkbox skipped the client control script in addAttributesToRender
+		if($this->getEnabled(true)
+			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
+			&& $this->getAutoPostBack()
+			&& $this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+		{
+			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value to be validated.
+	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
+	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getSelectedValue();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
+	 * Defaults to true.
+	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
+	 */
+	public function getIsValid()
+	{
+	    return $this->_isValid;
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
+	 */
+	public function setIsValid($value)
+	{
+	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCheckBoxList';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the post back options for this checkbox.
+	 * @return array
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ListID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['ListName'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		$options['ItemCount'] = $this->getItemCount();
+		return $options;
+	}
+	
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TColorPicker.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TColorPicker.php
index e5b24bd0..365421a1 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TColorPicker.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TColorPicker.php
@@ -1,290 +1,290 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TColorPicker class file
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TColorPicker class.
- *
- * TColorPicker displays a text box for color input purpose.
- * Next to the textbox there's a button filled with the current chosen color.
- * Users can write a color name directly in the text box as an hex triplet (also known as HTML notation, eg: #FF00FF).
- * Alternatively, if the <b>ShowColorPicker</b> property is enabled (it is by default), users can click the button
- * to have a color picker UI appear. A color chan be chosen directly by clicking on the color picker.
- *
- * TColorPicker has three different color picker UI <b>Mode</b>s:
- *  # <b>Simple</b> - Grid with 12 simple colors.
- *  # <b>Basic</b> - Grid with the most common 70 colors. This is the default mode.
- *  # <b>Full</b> - Full-featured color picker.
- * 
- * The <b>CssClass</b> property can be used to override the CSS class name
- * for the color picker panel. The <b>ColorStyle</b> property sets the packages
- * styles available. E.g. <b>default</b>.
- * 
- * If the <b>Mode</b> property is set to <b>Full</b>, the color picker panel will
- * display an "Ok" and "Cancel" buttons. You can customize the button labels setting the <b>OKButtonText</b>
- * and <b>CancelButtonText</b> properties.
- * 
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TColorPicker extends TTextBox
-{
-	const SCRIPT_PATH = 'prado/colorpicker';
-
-	private $_clientSide;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the color picker should pop up when the button is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function getShowColorPicker()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowColorPicker',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets whether to pop up the color picker when the button is clicked.
-	 * @param boolean whether to show the color picker popup
-	 */
-	public function setShowColorPicker($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowColorPicker',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TColorPickerMode color picker UI mode
-	 */
-	public function setMode($value)
-	{
-	   $this->setViewState('Mode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TColorPickerMode'), TColorPickerMode::Basic);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TColorPickerMode current color picker UI mode. Defaults to TColorPickerMode::Basic.
-	 */
-	public function getMode()
-	{
-	   return $this->getViewState('Mode', TColorPickerMode::Basic);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string set the color picker style
-	 */
-	public function setColorPickerStyle($value)
-	{
-	   $this->setViewState('ColorStyle', $value, 'default');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string current color picker style
-	 */
-	public function getColorPickerStyle()
-	{
-	   return $this->getViewState('ColorStyle', 'default');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the color picker OK button. Default is "OK".
-	 */
-	public function getOKButtonText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('OKButtonText', 'OK');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the color picker OK button
-	 */
-	public function setOKButtonText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('OKButtonText', $value, 'OK');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the color picker Cancel button. Default is "Cancel".
-	 */
-	public function getCancelButtonText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CancelButtonText', 'Cancel');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the color picker Cancel button
-	 */
-	public function setCancelButtonText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CancelButtonText', $value, 'Cancel');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TColorPickerClientSide javascript event options.
-	 */
-	public function getClientSide()
-	{
-		if($this->_clientSide===null)
-			$this->_clientSide = $this->createClientSide();
-		return $this->_clientSide;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TColorPickerClientSide javascript validator event options.
-	 */
-	protected function createClientSide()
-	{
-		return new TColorPickerClientSide;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Get javascript color picker options.
-	 * @return array color picker client-side options
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options = parent::getPostBackOptions();
-		$options['ClassName'] = $this->getCssClass();
-		$options['ShowColorPicker'] = $this->getShowColorPicker();
-		if($options['ShowColorPicker'])
-		{
-			$mode = $this->getMode();
-			if($mode == TColorPickerMode::Full) $options['Mode'] = $mode;
-			else if($mode == TColorPickerMode::Simple) $options['Palette'] = 'Tiny';
-			$options['OKButtonText'] = $this->getOKButtonText();
-			$options['CancelButtonText'] = $this->getCancelButtonText();
-		}
-		$options = array_merge($options,$this->getClientSide()->getOptions()->toArray());
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string asset file in the self::SCRIPT_PATH directory.
-	 * @return string asset file url.
-	 */
-	protected function getAssetUrl($file='')
-	{
-		$base = $this->getPage()->getClientScript()->getPradoScriptAssetUrl();
-		return $base.'/'.self::SCRIPT_PATH.'/'.$file;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Publish the color picker Css asset files.
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		$this->publishColorPickerAssets();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Publish the color picker assets.
-	 */
-	protected function publishColorPickerAssets()
-	{
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$key = "prado:".get_class($this);
-		$imgs['button.gif'] = $this->getAssetUrl('button.gif');
-		$imgs['background.png'] = $this->getAssetUrl('background.png');
-		$options = TJavaScript::encode($imgs);
-		$code = "Prado.WebUI.TColorPicker.UIImages = {$options};";
-		$cs->registerEndScript($key, $code);
-		$cs->registerPradoScript("colorpicker");
-		$url = $this->getAssetUrl($this->getColorPickerStyle().'.css');
-		if(!$cs->isStyleSheetFileRegistered($url))
-			$cs->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders additional body content.
-	 * This method overrides parent implementation by adding
-	 * additional color picker button.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	public function renderEndTag($writer)
-	{
-		parent::renderEndTag($writer);
-
-		$color = $this->getText();
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'TColorPicker_button');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
-
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_button');
-		$writer->addAttribute('src', $this->getAssetUrl('button.gif'));
-		if($color !== '')
-			$writer->addAttribute('style', "background-color:{$color};");
-		$writer->addAttribute('width', '20');
-		$writer->addAttribute('height', '20');
-		$writer->addAttribute('alt', '');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('img');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TColorPicker';
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TColorPickerMode class.
- * TColorPickerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible UI mode
- * that a {@link TColorPicker} control can take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * # Simple - Grid with 12 simple colors.
- * # Basic - Grid with the most common 70 colors. This is the default mode.
- * # Full - Full-featured color picker.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TColorPickerMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Simple='Simple';
-	const Basic='Basic';
-	const Full='Full';
-}
-
-/**
- * TColorPickerClientSide class.
- *
- * Client-side javascript code options.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1
- */
-class TColorPickerClientSide extends TClientSideOptions
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string javascript code for when a color is selected.
-	 */
-	public function getOnColorSelected()
-	{
-		return $this->getOption('OnColorSelected');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string javascript code for when a color is selected.
-	 */
-	public function setOnColorSelected($javascript)
-	{
-		$this->setFunction('OnColorSelected', $javascript);
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TColorPicker class file
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TColorPicker class.
+ *
+ * TColorPicker displays a text box for color input purpose.
+ * Next to the textbox there's a button filled with the current chosen color.
+ * Users can write a color name directly in the text box as an hex triplet (also known as HTML notation, eg: #FF00FF).
+ * Alternatively, if the <b>ShowColorPicker</b> property is enabled (it is by default), users can click the button
+ * to have a color picker UI appear. A color chan be chosen directly by clicking on the color picker.
+ *
+ * TColorPicker has three different color picker UI <b>Mode</b>s:
+ *  # <b>Simple</b> - Grid with 12 simple colors.
+ *  # <b>Basic</b> - Grid with the most common 70 colors. This is the default mode.
+ *  # <b>Full</b> - Full-featured color picker.
+ * 
+ * The <b>CssClass</b> property can be used to override the CSS class name
+ * for the color picker panel. The <b>ColorStyle</b> property sets the packages
+ * styles available. E.g. <b>default</b>.
+ * 
+ * If the <b>Mode</b> property is set to <b>Full</b>, the color picker panel will
+ * display an "Ok" and "Cancel" buttons. You can customize the button labels setting the <b>OKButtonText</b>
+ * and <b>CancelButtonText</b> properties.
+ * 
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TColorPicker extends TTextBox
+{
+	const SCRIPT_PATH = 'prado/colorpicker';
+
+	private $_clientSide;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the color picker should pop up when the button is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function getShowColorPicker()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowColorPicker',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets whether to pop up the color picker when the button is clicked.
+	 * @param boolean whether to show the color picker popup
+	 */
+	public function setShowColorPicker($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowColorPicker',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TColorPickerMode color picker UI mode
+	 */
+	public function setMode($value)
+	{
+	   $this->setViewState('Mode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TColorPickerMode'), TColorPickerMode::Basic);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TColorPickerMode current color picker UI mode. Defaults to TColorPickerMode::Basic.
+	 */
+	public function getMode()
+	{
+	   return $this->getViewState('Mode', TColorPickerMode::Basic);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string set the color picker style
+	 */
+	public function setColorPickerStyle($value)
+	{
+	   $this->setViewState('ColorStyle', $value, 'default');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string current color picker style
+	 */
+	public function getColorPickerStyle()
+	{
+	   return $this->getViewState('ColorStyle', 'default');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the color picker OK button. Default is "OK".
+	 */
+	public function getOKButtonText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('OKButtonText', 'OK');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the color picker OK button
+	 */
+	public function setOKButtonText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('OKButtonText', $value, 'OK');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the color picker Cancel button. Default is "Cancel".
+	 */
+	public function getCancelButtonText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CancelButtonText', 'Cancel');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the color picker Cancel button
+	 */
+	public function setCancelButtonText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CancelButtonText', $value, 'Cancel');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TColorPickerClientSide javascript event options.
+	 */
+	public function getClientSide()
+	{
+		if($this->_clientSide===null)
+			$this->_clientSide = $this->createClientSide();
+		return $this->_clientSide;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TColorPickerClientSide javascript validator event options.
+	 */
+	protected function createClientSide()
+	{
+		return new TColorPickerClientSide;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Get javascript color picker options.
+	 * @return array color picker client-side options
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options = parent::getPostBackOptions();
+		$options['ClassName'] = $this->getCssClass();
+		$options['ShowColorPicker'] = $this->getShowColorPicker();
+		if($options['ShowColorPicker'])
+		{
+			$mode = $this->getMode();
+			if($mode == TColorPickerMode::Full) $options['Mode'] = $mode;
+			else if($mode == TColorPickerMode::Simple) $options['Palette'] = 'Tiny';
+			$options['OKButtonText'] = $this->getOKButtonText();
+			$options['CancelButtonText'] = $this->getCancelButtonText();
+		}
+		$options = array_merge($options,$this->getClientSide()->getOptions()->toArray());
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string asset file in the self::SCRIPT_PATH directory.
+	 * @return string asset file url.
+	 */
+	protected function getAssetUrl($file='')
+	{
+		$base = $this->getPage()->getClientScript()->getPradoScriptAssetUrl();
+		return $base.'/'.self::SCRIPT_PATH.'/'.$file;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Publish the color picker Css asset files.
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		$this->publishColorPickerAssets();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Publish the color picker assets.
+	 */
+	protected function publishColorPickerAssets()
+	{
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$key = "prado:".get_class($this);
+		$imgs['button.gif'] = $this->getAssetUrl('button.gif');
+		$imgs['background.png'] = $this->getAssetUrl('background.png');
+		$options = TJavaScript::encode($imgs);
+		$code = "Prado.WebUI.TColorPicker.UIImages = {$options};";
+		$cs->registerEndScript($key, $code);
+		$cs->registerPradoScript("colorpicker");
+		$url = $this->getAssetUrl($this->getColorPickerStyle().'.css');
+		if(!$cs->isStyleSheetFileRegistered($url))
+			$cs->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders additional body content.
+	 * This method overrides parent implementation by adding
+	 * additional color picker button.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	public function renderEndTag($writer)
+	{
+		parent::renderEndTag($writer);
+
+		$color = $this->getText();
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'TColorPicker_button');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
+
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_button');
+		$writer->addAttribute('src', $this->getAssetUrl('button.gif'));
+		if($color !== '')
+			$writer->addAttribute('style', "background-color:{$color};");
+		$writer->addAttribute('width', '20');
+		$writer->addAttribute('height', '20');
+		$writer->addAttribute('alt', '');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('img');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TColorPicker';
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TColorPickerMode class.
+ * TColorPickerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible UI mode
+ * that a {@link TColorPicker} control can take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * # Simple - Grid with 12 simple colors.
+ * # Basic - Grid with the most common 70 colors. This is the default mode.
+ * # Full - Full-featured color picker.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TColorPickerMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Simple='Simple';
+	const Basic='Basic';
+	const Full='Full';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TColorPickerClientSide class.
+ *
+ * Client-side javascript code options.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1
+ */
+class TColorPickerClientSide extends TClientSideOptions
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string javascript code for when a color is selected.
+	 */
+	public function getOnColorSelected()
+	{
+		return $this->getOption('OnColorSelected');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string javascript code for when a color is selected.
+	 */
+	public function setOnColorSelected($javascript)
+	{
+		$this->setFunction('OnColorSelected', $javascript);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCompareValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCompareValidator.php
index 57b42018..c936f140 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCompareValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCompareValidator.php
@@ -1,265 +1,265 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TCompareValidator class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TCompareValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TBaseValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-
-/**
- * TCompareValidator class
- *
- * TCompareValidator compares the value entered by the user into an input
- * control with the value entered into another input control or a constant value.
- * To compare the associated input control with another input control,
- * set the {@link setControlToCompare ControlToCompare} property to the ID path
- * of the control to compare with. To compare the associated input control with
- * a constant value, specify the constant value to compare with by setting the
- * {@link setValueToCompare ValueToCompare} property.
- *
- * The {@link setDataType DataType} property is used to specify the data type
- * of both comparison values. Both values are automatically converted to this data
- * type before the comparison operation is performed. The following value types are supported:
- * - <b>Integer</b> A 32-bit signed integer data type.
- * - <b>Float</b> A double-precision floating point number data type.
- * - <b>Date</b> A date data type. The format can be specified by the
- * {@link setDateFormat DateFormat} property
- * - <b>String</b> A string data type.
- *
- * Use the {@link setOperator Operator} property to specify the type of comparison
- * to perform. Valid operators include Equal, NotEqual, GreaterThan, GreaterThanEqual,
- * LessThan and LessThanEqual.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TCompareValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCompareValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TValidationDataType the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made. Defaults to TValidationDataType::String.
-	 */
-	public function getDataType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataType',TValidationDataType::String);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the data type that the values being
-	 * compared are converted to before the comparison is made.
-	 * @param TValidationDataType the data type
-	 */
-	public function setDataType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationDataType'),TValidationDataType::String);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the input component to compare with the input control being validated.
-	 */
-	public function getControlToCompare()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ControlToCompare','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the input component to compare with the input control being validated.
-	 * @param string the ID path of the component to compare with
-	 */
-	public function setControlToCompare($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ControlToCompare',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the constant value to compare with the value entered by the user into the input component being validated.
-	 */
-	public function getValueToCompare()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValueToCompare','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the constant value to compare with the value entered by the user into the input component being validated.
-	 * @param string the constant value
-	 */
-	public function setValueToCompare($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValueToCompare',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TValidationCompareOperator the comparison operation to perform. Defaults to TValidationCompareOperator::Equal.
-	 */
-	public function getOperator()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Operator',TValidationCompareOperator::Equal);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the comparison operation to perform
-	 * @param TValidationCompareOperator the comparison operation
-	 */
-	public function setOperator($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Operator',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationCompareOperator'),TValidationCompareOperator::Equal);
-	}
-
-	/**
-     * Sets the date format for a date validation
-     * @param string the date format value
-     */
-	public function setDateFormat($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DateFormat', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the date validation date format if any
-	 */
-	public function getDateFormat()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input data compares successfully.
-	 * The validation always succeeds if ControlToValidate is not specified
-	 * or the input data is empty.
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	public function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))==='')
-			return true;
-
-		if(($controlToCompare=$this->getControlToCompare())!=='')
-		{
-			if(($control2=$this->findControl($controlToCompare))===null)
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('comparevalidator_controltocompare_invalid');
-			if(($value2=$this->getValidationValue($control2))==='')
-				return false;
-		}
-		else
-			$value2=$this->getValueToCompare();
-
-		$values = $this->getComparisonValues($value, $value2);
-		switch($this->getOperator())
-		{
-			case TValidationCompareOperator::Equal:
-				return $values[0] == $values[1];
-			case TValidationCompareOperator::NotEqual:
-				return $values[0] != $values[1];
-			case TValidationCompareOperator::GreaterThan:
-				return $values[0] > $values[1];
-			case TValidationCompareOperator::GreaterThanEqual:
-				return $values[0] >= $values[1];
-			case TValidationCompareOperator::LessThan:
-				return $values[0] < $values[1];
-			case TValidationCompareOperator::LessThanEqual:
-				return $values[0] <= $values[1];
-		}
-
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Parse the pair of values into the appropriate value type.
-	 * @param string value one
-	 * @param string second value
-	 * @return array appropriate type of the value pair, array($value1, $value2);
-	 */
-	protected function getComparisonValues($value1, $value2)
-	{
-		switch($this->getDataType())
-		{
-			case TValidationDataType::Integer:
-				return array(intval($value1), intval($value2));
-			case TValidationDataType::Float:
-				return array(floatval($value1), floatval($value2));
-			case TValidationDataType::Date:
-				$dateFormat = $this->getDateFormat();
-				if($dateFormat!=='')
-				{
-					$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter', $dateFormat);
-					return array($formatter->parse($value1), $formatter->parse($value2));
-				}
-				else
-					return array(strtotime($value1), strtotime($value2));
-		}
-		return array($value1, $value2);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		if(($name=$this->getControlToCompare())!=='')
-		{
-			if(($control=$this->findControl($name))!==null)
-				$options['ControlToCompare']=$control->getClientID();
-		}
-		if(($value=$this->getValueToCompare())!=='')
-			$options['ValueToCompare']=$value;
-		if(($operator=$this->getOperator())!==TValidationCompareOperator::Equal)
-			$options['Operator']=$operator;
-		$options['DataType']=$this->getDataType();
-		if(($dateFormat=$this->getDateFormat())!=='')
-			$options['DateFormat']=$dateFormat;
-		return $options;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TValidationCompareOperator class.
- * TValidationCompareOperator defines the enumerable type for the comparison operations
- * that {@link TCompareValidator} can perform validation with.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Equal
- * - NotEqual
- * - GreaterThan
- * - GreaterThanEqual
- * - LessThan
- * - LessThanEqual
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TValidationCompareOperator extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Equal='Equal';
-	const NotEqual='NotEqual';
-	const GreaterThan='GreaterThan';
-	const GreaterThanEqual='GreaterThanEqual';
-	const LessThan='LessThan';
-	const LessThanEqual='LessThanEqual';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TBaseValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TCompareValidator class
+ *
+ * TCompareValidator compares the value entered by the user into an input
+ * control with the value entered into another input control or a constant value.
+ * To compare the associated input control with another input control,
+ * set the {@link setControlToCompare ControlToCompare} property to the ID path
+ * of the control to compare with. To compare the associated input control with
+ * a constant value, specify the constant value to compare with by setting the
+ * {@link setValueToCompare ValueToCompare} property.
+ *
+ * The {@link setDataType DataType} property is used to specify the data type
+ * of both comparison values. Both values are automatically converted to this data
+ * type before the comparison operation is performed. The following value types are supported:
+ * - <b>Integer</b> A 32-bit signed integer data type.
+ * - <b>Float</b> A double-precision floating point number data type.
+ * - <b>Date</b> A date data type. The format can be specified by the
+ * {@link setDateFormat DateFormat} property
+ * - <b>String</b> A string data type.
+ *
+ * Use the {@link setOperator Operator} property to specify the type of comparison
+ * to perform. Valid operators include Equal, NotEqual, GreaterThan, GreaterThanEqual,
+ * LessThan and LessThanEqual.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TCompareValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCompareValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TValidationDataType the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made. Defaults to TValidationDataType::String.
+	 */
+	public function getDataType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataType',TValidationDataType::String);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the data type that the values being
+	 * compared are converted to before the comparison is made.
+	 * @param TValidationDataType the data type
+	 */
+	public function setDataType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationDataType'),TValidationDataType::String);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the input component to compare with the input control being validated.
+	 */
+	public function getControlToCompare()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ControlToCompare','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the input component to compare with the input control being validated.
+	 * @param string the ID path of the component to compare with
+	 */
+	public function setControlToCompare($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ControlToCompare',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the constant value to compare with the value entered by the user into the input component being validated.
+	 */
+	public function getValueToCompare()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValueToCompare','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the constant value to compare with the value entered by the user into the input component being validated.
+	 * @param string the constant value
+	 */
+	public function setValueToCompare($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValueToCompare',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TValidationCompareOperator the comparison operation to perform. Defaults to TValidationCompareOperator::Equal.
+	 */
+	public function getOperator()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Operator',TValidationCompareOperator::Equal);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the comparison operation to perform
+	 * @param TValidationCompareOperator the comparison operation
+	 */
+	public function setOperator($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Operator',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationCompareOperator'),TValidationCompareOperator::Equal);
+	}
+
+	/**
+     * Sets the date format for a date validation
+     * @param string the date format value
+     */
+	public function setDateFormat($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DateFormat', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the date validation date format if any
+	 */
+	public function getDateFormat()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input data compares successfully.
+	 * The validation always succeeds if ControlToValidate is not specified
+	 * or the input data is empty.
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	public function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))==='')
+			return true;
+
+		if(($controlToCompare=$this->getControlToCompare())!=='')
+		{
+			if(($control2=$this->findControl($controlToCompare))===null)
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('comparevalidator_controltocompare_invalid');
+			if(($value2=$this->getValidationValue($control2))==='')
+				return false;
+		}
+		else
+			$value2=$this->getValueToCompare();
+
+		$values = $this->getComparisonValues($value, $value2);
+		switch($this->getOperator())
+		{
+			case TValidationCompareOperator::Equal:
+				return $values[0] == $values[1];
+			case TValidationCompareOperator::NotEqual:
+				return $values[0] != $values[1];
+			case TValidationCompareOperator::GreaterThan:
+				return $values[0] > $values[1];
+			case TValidationCompareOperator::GreaterThanEqual:
+				return $values[0] >= $values[1];
+			case TValidationCompareOperator::LessThan:
+				return $values[0] < $values[1];
+			case TValidationCompareOperator::LessThanEqual:
+				return $values[0] <= $values[1];
+		}
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Parse the pair of values into the appropriate value type.
+	 * @param string value one
+	 * @param string second value
+	 * @return array appropriate type of the value pair, array($value1, $value2);
+	 */
+	protected function getComparisonValues($value1, $value2)
+	{
+		switch($this->getDataType())
+		{
+			case TValidationDataType::Integer:
+				return array(intval($value1), intval($value2));
+			case TValidationDataType::Float:
+				return array(floatval($value1), floatval($value2));
+			case TValidationDataType::Date:
+				$dateFormat = $this->getDateFormat();
+				if($dateFormat!=='')
+				{
+					$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter', $dateFormat);
+					return array($formatter->parse($value1), $formatter->parse($value2));
+				}
+				else
+					return array(strtotime($value1), strtotime($value2));
+		}
+		return array($value1, $value2);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		if(($name=$this->getControlToCompare())!=='')
+		{
+			if(($control=$this->findControl($name))!==null)
+				$options['ControlToCompare']=$control->getClientID();
+		}
+		if(($value=$this->getValueToCompare())!=='')
+			$options['ValueToCompare']=$value;
+		if(($operator=$this->getOperator())!==TValidationCompareOperator::Equal)
+			$options['Operator']=$operator;
+		$options['DataType']=$this->getDataType();
+		if(($dateFormat=$this->getDateFormat())!=='')
+			$options['DateFormat']=$dateFormat;
+		return $options;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TValidationCompareOperator class.
+ * TValidationCompareOperator defines the enumerable type for the comparison operations
+ * that {@link TCompareValidator} can perform validation with.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Equal
+ * - NotEqual
+ * - GreaterThan
+ * - GreaterThanEqual
+ * - LessThan
+ * - LessThanEqual
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TValidationCompareOperator extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Equal='Equal';
+	const NotEqual='NotEqual';
+	const GreaterThan='GreaterThan';
+	const GreaterThanEqual='GreaterThanEqual';
+	const LessThan='LessThan';
+	const LessThanEqual='LessThanEqual';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TConditional.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TConditional.php
index d04324f0..28af2305 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TConditional.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TConditional.php
@@ -1,143 +1,143 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TConditional class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TConditional class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TConditional class.
- *
- * TConditional displays appropriate content based on the evaluation result
- * of a PHP expression specified via {@link setCondition Condition}.
- * If the result is true, it instantiates the template {@link getTrueTemplate TrueTemplate};
- * otherwise, the template {@link getFalseTemplate FalseTemplate} is instantiated.
- * The PHP expression is evaluated right before {@link onInit} stage of the control lifecycle.
- *
- * Since {@link setCondition Condition} is evaluated at a very early stage, it is recommended
- * you set {@link setCondition Condition} in template and the expression should not refer to
- * objects that are available on or after {@link onInit} lifecycle.
- *
- * A typical usage of TConditional is shown as following:
- * <code>
- * <com:TConditional Condition="$this->User->IsGuest">
- *   <prop:TrueTemplate>
- *     <a href="path/to/login">Login</a>
- *   </prop:TrueTemplate>
- *   <prop:FalseTemplate>
- *     <a href="path/to/logout">Logout</a>
- *   </prop:FalseTemplate>
- * </com:TConditional>
- * </code>
- *
- * TConditional is very light. It instantiates either {@link getTrueTemplate TrueTemplate}
- * or {@link getFalseTemplate FalseTemplate}, but never both. And the condition is evaluated only once.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-class TConditional extends TControl
-{
-	private $_condition='true';
-	private $_trueTemplate;
-	private $_falseTemplate;
-	private $_creatingChildren=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by removing
-	 * all contents enclosed in the template tag.
-	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
-	 * @see createdOnTemplate
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($this->_creatingChildren)
-			parent::addParsedObject($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates child controls.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation. It evaluates {@link getCondition Condition}
-	 * and instantiate the corresponding template.
-	 */
-	public function createChildControls()
-	{
-		$this->_creatingChildren=true;
-		$result=true;
-		try
-		{
-			$result=$this->getTemplateControl()->evaluateExpression($this->_condition);
-		}
-		catch(Exception $e)
-		{
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('conditional_condition_invalid',$this->_condition,$e->getMessage());
-		}
-		if($result)
-		{
-			if($this->_trueTemplate)
-				$this->_trueTemplate->instantiateIn($this->getTemplateControl(),$this);
-		}
-		else if($this->_falseTemplate)
-			$this->_falseTemplate->instantiateIn($this->getTemplateControl(),$this);
-		$this->_creatingChildren=false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the PHP expression used for determining which template to use. Defaults to 'true', meaning using TrueTemplate.
-	 */
-	public function getCondition()
-	{
-		return $this->_condition;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the PHP expression to be evaluated for conditionally displaying content.
-	 * The context of the expression is the template control containing TConditional.
-	 * @param string the PHP expression used for determining which template to use.
-	 */
-	public function setCondition($value)
-	{
-		$this->_condition=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is true.
-	 */
-	public function getTrueTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_trueTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is true.
-	 */
-	public function setTrueTemplate(ITemplate $value)
-	{
-		$this->_trueTemplate=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is false.
-	 */
-	public function getFalseTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_falseTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is false.
-	 */
-	public function setFalseTemplate(ITemplate $value)
-	{
-		$this->_falseTemplate=$value;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TConditional class.
+ *
+ * TConditional displays appropriate content based on the evaluation result
+ * of a PHP expression specified via {@link setCondition Condition}.
+ * If the result is true, it instantiates the template {@link getTrueTemplate TrueTemplate};
+ * otherwise, the template {@link getFalseTemplate FalseTemplate} is instantiated.
+ * The PHP expression is evaluated right before {@link onInit} stage of the control lifecycle.
+ *
+ * Since {@link setCondition Condition} is evaluated at a very early stage, it is recommended
+ * you set {@link setCondition Condition} in template and the expression should not refer to
+ * objects that are available on or after {@link onInit} lifecycle.
+ *
+ * A typical usage of TConditional is shown as following:
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TConditional Condition="$this->User->IsGuest">
+ *   <prop:TrueTemplate>
+ *     <a href="path/to/login">Login</a>
+ *   </prop:TrueTemplate>
+ *   <prop:FalseTemplate>
+ *     <a href="path/to/logout">Logout</a>
+ *   </prop:FalseTemplate>
+ * </com:TConditional>
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * TConditional is very light. It instantiates either {@link getTrueTemplate TrueTemplate}
+ * or {@link getFalseTemplate FalseTemplate}, but never both. And the condition is evaluated only once.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+class TConditional extends TControl
+{
+	private $_condition='true';
+	private $_trueTemplate;
+	private $_falseTemplate;
+	private $_creatingChildren=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by removing
+	 * all contents enclosed in the template tag.
+	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
+	 * @see createdOnTemplate
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($this->_creatingChildren)
+			parent::addParsedObject($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates child controls.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation. It evaluates {@link getCondition Condition}
+	 * and instantiate the corresponding template.
+	 */
+	public function createChildControls()
+	{
+		$this->_creatingChildren=true;
+		$result=true;
+		try
+		{
+			$result=$this->getTemplateControl()->evaluateExpression($this->_condition);
+		}
+		catch(Exception $e)
+		{
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('conditional_condition_invalid',$this->_condition,$e->getMessage());
+		}
+		if($result)
+		{
+			if($this->_trueTemplate)
+				$this->_trueTemplate->instantiateIn($this->getTemplateControl(),$this);
+		}
+		else if($this->_falseTemplate)
+			$this->_falseTemplate->instantiateIn($this->getTemplateControl(),$this);
+		$this->_creatingChildren=false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the PHP expression used for determining which template to use. Defaults to 'true', meaning using TrueTemplate.
+	 */
+	public function getCondition()
+	{
+		return $this->_condition;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the PHP expression to be evaluated for conditionally displaying content.
+	 * The context of the expression is the template control containing TConditional.
+	 * @param string the PHP expression used for determining which template to use.
+	 */
+	public function setCondition($value)
+	{
+		$this->_condition=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is true.
+	 */
+	public function getTrueTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_trueTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is true.
+	 */
+	public function setTrueTemplate(ITemplate $value)
+	{
+		$this->_trueTemplate=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is false.
+	 */
+	public function getFalseTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_falseTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when {@link getCondition Condition} is false.
+	 */
+	public function setFalseTemplate(ITemplate $value)
+	{
+		$this->_falseTemplate=$value;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContent.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContent.php
index 3b17c2cc..60a8e0b6 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContent.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContent.php
@@ -1,47 +1,47 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TContent class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TContent class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TContent class
- *
- * TContent specifies a block of content on a control's template
- * that will be injected at somewhere of the master control's template.
- * TContentPlaceHolder and {@link TContent} together implement a decoration
- * pattern for prado templated controls. A template control
- * (called content control) can specify a master control
- * whose template contains some TContentPlaceHolder controls.
- * {@link TContent} controls on the content control's template will replace the corresponding
- * {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls on the master control's template.
- * This is called content injection. It is done by matching the IDs of
- * {@link TContent} and {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TContent extends TControl implements INamingContainer
-{
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked after the control is instantiated on a template.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by registering the content control
-	 * to the template owner control.
-	 * @param TControl potential parent of this control
-	 */
-	public function createdOnTemplate($parent)
-	{
-		if(($id=$this->getID())==='')
-			throw new TConfigurationException('content_id_required');
-		$this->getTemplateControl()->registerContent($id,$this);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TContent class
+ *
+ * TContent specifies a block of content on a control's template
+ * that will be injected at somewhere of the master control's template.
+ * TContentPlaceHolder and {@link TContent} together implement a decoration
+ * pattern for prado templated controls. A template control
+ * (called content control) can specify a master control
+ * whose template contains some TContentPlaceHolder controls.
+ * {@link TContent} controls on the content control's template will replace the corresponding
+ * {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls on the master control's template.
+ * This is called content injection. It is done by matching the IDs of
+ * {@link TContent} and {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TContent extends TControl implements INamingContainer
+{
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked after the control is instantiated on a template.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by registering the content control
+	 * to the template owner control.
+	 * @param TControl potential parent of this control
+	 */
+	public function createdOnTemplate($parent)
+	{
+		if(($id=$this->getID())==='')
+			throw new TConfigurationException('content_id_required');
+		$this->getTemplateControl()->registerContent($id,$this);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContentPlaceHolder.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContentPlaceHolder.php
index ddd2b610..55ed461d 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContentPlaceHolder.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TContentPlaceHolder.php
@@ -1,48 +1,48 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TContentPlaceHolder class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TContentPlaceHolder class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TContentPlaceHolder class
- *
- * TContentPlaceHolder reserves a place on a template where a {@link TContent}
- * control can inject itself and its children in. TContentPlaceHolder and {@link TContent}
- * together implement a decoration pattern for prado templated controls.
- * A template control (called content control) can specify a master control
- * whose template contains some TContentPlaceHolder controls.
- * {@link TContent} controls on the content control's template will replace the corresponding
- * {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls on the master control's template.
- * This is called content injection. It is done by matching the IDs of
- * {@link TContent} and {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TContentPlaceHolder extends TControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked after the control is instantiated on a template.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by registering the content placeholder
-	 * control to the template owner control. The placeholder control will NOT
-	 * be added to the potential parent control!
-	 * @param TControl potential parent of this control
-	 */
-	public function createdOnTemplate($parent)
-	{
-		if(($id=$this->getID())==='')
-			throw new TConfigurationException('contentplaceholder_id_required');
-		$this->getTemplateControl()->registerContentPlaceHolder($id,$this);
-		$parent->getControls()->add($this);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TContentPlaceHolder class
+ *
+ * TContentPlaceHolder reserves a place on a template where a {@link TContent}
+ * control can inject itself and its children in. TContentPlaceHolder and {@link TContent}
+ * together implement a decoration pattern for prado templated controls.
+ * A template control (called content control) can specify a master control
+ * whose template contains some TContentPlaceHolder controls.
+ * {@link TContent} controls on the content control's template will replace the corresponding
+ * {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls on the master control's template.
+ * This is called content injection. It is done by matching the IDs of
+ * {@link TContent} and {@link TContentPlaceHolder} controls.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TContentPlaceHolder extends TControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked after the control is instantiated on a template.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by registering the content placeholder
+	 * control to the template owner control. The placeholder control will NOT
+	 * be added to the potential parent control!
+	 * @param TControl potential parent of this control
+	 */
+	public function createdOnTemplate($parent)
+	{
+		if(($id=$this->getID())==='')
+			throw new TConfigurationException('contentplaceholder_id_required');
+		$this->getTemplateControl()->registerContentPlaceHolder($id,$this);
+		$parent->getControls()->add($this);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCustomValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCustomValidator.php
index 9ab75258..dcfadacd 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCustomValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TCustomValidator.php
@@ -1,207 +1,207 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TCustomValidator class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TBaseValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-
-/**
- * TCustomValidator class
- *
- * TCustomValidator performs user-defined validation (either
- * server-side or client-side or both) on an input component.
- *
- * To create a server-side validation function, provide a handler for
- * the {@link onServerValidate OnServerValidate} event that performs the validation.
- * The data string of the input control to validate can be accessed
- * by {@link TServerValidateEventParameter::getValue Value} of the event parameter.
- * The result of the validation should be stored in the
- * {@link TServerValidateEventParameter::getIsValid IsValid} property of the event
- * parameter.
- *
- * To create a client-side validation function, add the client-side
- * validation javascript function to the page template.
- * The function should have the following signature:
- * <code>
- * <script type="text/javascript"><!--
- * function ValidationFunctionName(sender, parameter)
- * {
- *    // if(parameter == ...)
- *    //    return true;
- *    // else
- *    //    return false;
- * }
- * --></script>
- * </code>
- * Use the {@link setClientValidationFunction ClientValidationFunction} property
- * to specify the name of the client-side validation script function associated
- * with the TCustomValidator.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TCustomValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCustomValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the name of the custom client-side script function used for validation.
-	 */
-	public function getClientValidationFunction()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ClientValidationFunction','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the name of the custom client-side script function used for validation.
-	 * @param string the script function name
-	 */
-	public function setClientValidationFunction($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ClientValidationFunction',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if {@link onServerValidate} returns true.
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	public function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		$value = '';
-		if($this->getValidationTarget()!==null)
-			$value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget());
-		return $this->onServerValidate($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the server side validation happens.
-	 * It will raise the <b>OnServerValidate</b> event.
-	 * The method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate.
-	 * <b>Note</b> The derived classes should call parent implementation
-	 * to ensure the <b>OnServerValidate</b> event is raised.
-	 * @param string the value to be validated
-	 * @return boolean whether the value is valid
-	 */
-	public function onServerValidate($value)
-	{
-		$param=new TServerValidateEventParameter($value,true);
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnServerValidate',$this,$param);
-		return $param->getIsValid();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl control to be validated. Null if no control is found.
-	 */
-	public function getValidationTarget()
-	{
-		if(($id=$this->getControlToValidate())!=='' && ($control=$this->findControl($id))!==null)
-			return $control;
-		else if(($id=$this->getControlToValidate())!=='')
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('basevalidator_validatable_required',get_class($this));
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options=parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		if(($clientJs=$this->getClientValidationFunction())!=='')
-			$options['ClientValidationFunction']=$clientJs;
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Only register the client-side validator if
-	 * {@link setClientValidationFunction ClientValidationFunction} is set.
-	 */
-	protected function registerClientScriptValidator()
-	{
-		if($this->getClientValidationFunction()!=='')
-			parent::registerClientScriptValidator();
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TServerValidateEventParameter class
- *
- * TServerValidateEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * <b>OnServerValidate</b> event of TCustomValidator components.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TServerValidateEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * the value to be validated
-	 * @var string
-	 */
-	private $_value='';
-	/**
-	 * whether the value is valid
-	 * @var boolean
-	 */
-	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param string property value to be validated
-	 * @param boolean whether the value is valid
-	 */
-	public function __construct($value,$isValid)
-	{
-		$this->_value=$value;
-		$this->setIsValid($isValid);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string value to be validated
-	 */
-	public function getValue()
-	{
-		return $this->_value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the value is valid
-	 */
-	public function getIsValid()
-	{
-		return $this->_isValid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the value is valid
-	 */
-	public function setIsValid($value)
-	{
-		$this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-}
+<?php
+/**
+ * TCustomValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TBaseValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TCustomValidator class
+ *
+ * TCustomValidator performs user-defined validation (either
+ * server-side or client-side or both) on an input component.
+ *
+ * To create a server-side validation function, provide a handler for
+ * the {@link onServerValidate OnServerValidate} event that performs the validation.
+ * The data string of the input control to validate can be accessed
+ * by {@link TServerValidateEventParameter::getValue Value} of the event parameter.
+ * The result of the validation should be stored in the
+ * {@link TServerValidateEventParameter::getIsValid IsValid} property of the event
+ * parameter.
+ *
+ * To create a client-side validation function, add the client-side
+ * validation javascript function to the page template.
+ * The function should have the following signature:
+ * <code>
+ * <script type="text/javascript"><!--
+ * function ValidationFunctionName(sender, parameter)
+ * {
+ *    // if(parameter == ...)
+ *    //    return true;
+ *    // else
+ *    //    return false;
+ * }
+ * --></script>
+ * </code>
+ * Use the {@link setClientValidationFunction ClientValidationFunction} property
+ * to specify the name of the client-side validation script function associated
+ * with the TCustomValidator.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TCustomValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TCustomValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the name of the custom client-side script function used for validation.
+	 */
+	public function getClientValidationFunction()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ClientValidationFunction','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the name of the custom client-side script function used for validation.
+	 * @param string the script function name
+	 */
+	public function setClientValidationFunction($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ClientValidationFunction',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if {@link onServerValidate} returns true.
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	public function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		$value = '';
+		if($this->getValidationTarget()!==null)
+			$value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget());
+		return $this->onServerValidate($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the server side validation happens.
+	 * It will raise the <b>OnServerValidate</b> event.
+	 * The method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate.
+	 * <b>Note</b> The derived classes should call parent implementation
+	 * to ensure the <b>OnServerValidate</b> event is raised.
+	 * @param string the value to be validated
+	 * @return boolean whether the value is valid
+	 */
+	public function onServerValidate($value)
+	{
+		$param=new TServerValidateEventParameter($value,true);
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnServerValidate',$this,$param);
+		return $param->getIsValid();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl control to be validated. Null if no control is found.
+	 */
+	public function getValidationTarget()
+	{
+		if(($id=$this->getControlToValidate())!=='' && ($control=$this->findControl($id))!==null)
+			return $control;
+		else if(($id=$this->getControlToValidate())!=='')
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('basevalidator_validatable_required',get_class($this));
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options=parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		if(($clientJs=$this->getClientValidationFunction())!=='')
+			$options['ClientValidationFunction']=$clientJs;
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Only register the client-side validator if
+	 * {@link setClientValidationFunction ClientValidationFunction} is set.
+	 */
+	protected function registerClientScriptValidator()
+	{
+		if($this->getClientValidationFunction()!=='')
+			parent::registerClientScriptValidator();
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TServerValidateEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TServerValidateEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * <b>OnServerValidate</b> event of TCustomValidator components.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TServerValidateEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * the value to be validated
+	 * @var string
+	 */
+	private $_value='';
+	/**
+	 * whether the value is valid
+	 * @var boolean
+	 */
+	private $_isValid=true;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param string property value to be validated
+	 * @param boolean whether the value is valid
+	 */
+	public function __construct($value,$isValid)
+	{
+		$this->_value=$value;
+		$this->setIsValid($isValid);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string value to be validated
+	 */
+	public function getValue()
+	{
+		return $this->_value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the value is valid
+	 */
+	public function getIsValid()
+	{
+		return $this->_isValid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the value is valid
+	 */
+	public function setIsValid($value)
+	{
+		$this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataBoundControl.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataBoundControl.php
index 294dd416..076179fb 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataBoundControl.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataBoundControl.php
@@ -1,587 +1,587 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataBoundControl class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataSourceControl');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataSourceView');
-Prado::using('System.Collections.TPagedDataSource');
-
-/**
- * TDataBoundControl class.
- *
- * TDataBoundControl is the based class for controls that need to populate
- * data from data sources. It provides basic properties and methods that allow
- * the derived controls to associate with data sources and retrieve data from them.
- *
- * TBC....
- *
- * TDataBoundControl is equipped with paging capabilities. By setting
- * {@link setAllowPaging AllowPaging} to true, the input data will be paged
- * and only one page of data is actually populated into the data-bound control.
- * This saves a lot of memory when dealing with larget datasets.
- *
- * To specify the number of data items displayed on each page, set
- * the {@link setPageSize PageSize} property, and to specify which
- * page of data to be displayed, set {@link setCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex}.
- *
- * When the size of the original data is too big to be loaded all in the memory,
- * one can enable custom paging. In custom paging, the total number of data items
- * is specified manually via {@link setVirtualItemCount VirtualItemCount},
- * and the data source only needs to contain the current page of data. To enable
- * custom paging, set {@link setAllowCustomPaging AllowCustomPaging} to true.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-abstract class TDataBoundControl extends TWebControl
-{
-	private $_initialized=false;
-	private $_dataSource=null;
-	private $_requiresBindToNull=false;
-	private $_requiresDataBinding=false;
-	private $_prerendered=false;
-	private $_currentView=null;
-	private $_currentDataSource=null;
-	private $_currentViewValid=false;
-	private $_currentDataSourceValid=false;
-	private $_currentViewIsFromDataSourceID=false;
-	private $_parameters=null;
-	private $_isDataBound=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return Traversable data source object, defaults to null.
-	 */
-	public function getDataSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataSource;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the data source object associated with the databound control.
-	 * The data source must implement Traversable interface.
-	 * If an array is given, it will be converted to xxx.
-	 * If a string is given, it will be converted to xxx.
-	 * @param Traversable|array|string data source object
-	 */
-	public function setDataSource($value)
-	{
-		$this->_dataSource=$this->validateDataSource($value);
-		$this->onDataSourceChanged();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string ID path to the data source control. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getDataSourceID()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataSourceID','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string ID path to the data source control. The data source
-	 * control must be locatable via {@link TControl::findControl} call.
-	 */
-	public function setDataSourceID($value)
-	{
-		$dsid=$this->getViewState('DataSourceID','');
-		if($dsid!=='' && $value==='')
-			$this->_requiresBindToNull=true;
-		$this->setViewState('DataSourceID',$value,'');
-		$this->onDataSourceChanged();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean if the databound control uses the data source specified
-	 * by {@link setDataSourceID}, or it uses the data source object specified
-	 * by {@link setDataSource}.
-	 */
-	protected function getUsingDataSourceID()
-	{
-		return $this->getDataSourceID()!=='';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets {@link setRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding} as true if the control is initialized.
-	 * This method is invoked when either {@link setDataSource} or {@link setDataSourceID} is changed.
-	 */
-	public function onDataSourceChanged()
-	{
-		$this->_currentViewValid=false;
-		$this->_currentDataSourceValid=false;
-		if($this->getInitialized())
-			$this->setRequiresDataBinding(true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the databound control has been initialized.
-	 * By default, the control is initialized after its viewstate has been restored.
-	 */
-	protected function getInitialized()
-	{
-		return $this->_initialized;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a value indicating whether the databound control is initialized.
-	 * If initialized, any modification to {@link setDataSource DataSource} or
-	 * {@link setDataSourceID DataSourceID} will set {@link setRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding}
-	 * as true.
-	 * @param boolean a value indicating whether the databound control is initialized.
-	 */
-	protected function setInitialized($value)
-	{
-		$this->_initialized=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether databind has been invoked in the previous page request
-	 */
-	protected function getIsDataBound()
-	{
-		return $this->_isDataBound;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean if databind has been invoked in this page request
-	 */
-	protected function setIsDataBound($value)
-	{
-		$this->_isDataBound=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether a databind call is required (by the data bound control)
-	 */
-	protected function getRequiresDataBinding()
-	{
-		return $this->_requiresDataBinding;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether paging is enabled. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAllowPaging()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AllowPaging',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether paging is enabled
-	 */
-	public function setAllowPaging($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AllowPaging',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the custom paging is enabled. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAllowCustomPaging()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AllowCustomPaging',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a value indicating whether the custom paging should be enabled.
-	 * When the pager is in custom paging mode, the {@link setVirtualItemCount VirtualItemCount}
-	 * property is used to determine the paging, and the data items in the
-	 * {@link setDataSource DataSource} are considered to be in the current page.
-	 * @param boolean whether the custom paging is enabled
-	 */
-	public function setAllowCustomPaging($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AllowCustomPaging',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the current page. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getCurrentPageIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CurrentPageIndex',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current page
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
-	 */
-	public function setCurrentPageIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=0;
-		$this->setViewState('CurrentPageIndex',$value,0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of data items on each page. Defaults to 10.
-	 */
-	public function getPageSize()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PageSize',10);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the number of data items on each page.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 1
-	 */
-	public function setPageSize($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<1)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_pagesize_invalid',get_class($this));
-		$this->setViewState('PageSize',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),10);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer number of pages of data items available
-	 */
-	public function getPageCount()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PageCount',1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer virtual number of data items in the data source. Defaults to 0.
-	 * @see setAllowCustomPaging
-	 */
-	public function getVirtualItemCount()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('VirtualItemCount',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer virtual number of data items in the data source.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
-	 * @see setAllowCustomPaging
-	 */
-	public function setVirtualItemCount($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_virtualitemcount_invalid',get_class($this));
-		$this->setViewState('VirtualItemCount',$value,0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a value indicating whether a databind call is required by the data bound control.
-	 * If true and the control has been prerendered while it uses the data source
-	 * specified by {@link setDataSourceID}, a databind call will be called by this method.
-	 * @param boolean whether a databind call is required.
-	 */
-	protected function setRequiresDataBinding($value)
-	{
-		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-		if($value && $this->_prerendered)
-		{
-			$this->_requiresDataBinding=true;
-			$this->ensureDataBound();
-		}
-		else
-			$this->_requiresDataBinding=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Ensures any pending {@link dataBind} is called.
-	 * This method calls {@link dataBind} if the data source is specified
-	 * by {@link setDataSourceID} or if {@link getRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding}
-	 * is true.
-	 */
-	protected function ensureDataBound()
-	{
-		if($this->_requiresDataBinding && ($this->getUsingDataSourceID() || $this->_requiresBindToNull))
-		{
-			$this->dataBind();
-			$this->_requiresBindToNull=false;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPagedDataSource creates a paged data source
-	 */
-	protected function createPagedDataSource()
-	{
-		$ds=new TPagedDataSource;
-		$ds->setCurrentPageIndex($this->getCurrentPageIndex());
-		$ds->setPageSize($this->getPageSize());
-		$ds->setAllowPaging($this->getAllowPaging());
-		$ds->setAllowCustomPaging($this->getAllowCustomPaging());
-		$ds->setVirtualItemCount($this->getVirtualItemCount());
-		return $ds;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs databinding.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by calling
-	 * {@link performSelect} which fetches data from data source and does
-	 * the actual binding work.
-	 */
-	public function dataBind()
-	{
-		$this->setRequiresDataBinding(false);
-		$this->dataBindProperties();
-		$this->onDataBinding(null);
-
-		if(($view=$this->getDataSourceView())!==null)
-			$data=$view->select($this->getSelectParameters());
-		else
-			$data=null;
-
-		if($data instanceof Traversable)
-		{
-			if($this->getAllowPaging())
-			{
-				$ds=$this->createPagedDataSource();
-				$ds->setDataSource($data);
-				$this->setViewState('PageCount',$ds->getPageCount());
-				if($ds->getCurrentPageIndex()>=$ds->getPageCount())
-				{
-					$ds->setCurrentPageIndex($ds->getPageCount()-1);
-					$this->setCurrentPageIndex($ds->getCurrentPageIndex());
-				}
-				$this->performDataBinding($ds);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$this->clearViewState('PageCount');
-				$this->performDataBinding($data);
-			}
-		}
-		$this->setIsDataBound(true);
-		$this->onDataBound(null);
-	}
-
-	public function dataSourceViewChanged($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if(!$this->_ignoreDataSourceViewChanged)
-			$this->setRequiresDataBinding(true);
-	}
-
-	protected function getDataSourceView()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_currentViewValid)
-		{
-			if($this->_currentView && $this->_currentViewIsFromDataSourceID)
-				$this->_currentView->detachEventHandler('DataSourceViewChanged',array($this,'dataSourceViewChanged'));
-			if(($dataSource=$this->determineDataSource())!==null)
-			{
-				if(($view=$dataSource->getView($this->getDataMember()))===null)
-					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_datamember_invalid',$this->getDataMember());
-				if($this->_currentViewIsFromDataSourceID=$this->getUsingDataSourceID())
-					$view->attachEventHandler('OnDataSourceViewChanged',array($this,'dataSourceViewChanged'));
-				$this->_currentView=$view;
-			}
-			else
-				$this->_currentView=null;
-			$this->_currentViewValid=true;
-		}
-		return $this->_currentView;
-	}
-
-	protected function determineDataSource()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_currentDataSourceValid)
-		{
-			if(($dsid=$this->getDataSourceID())!=='')
-			{
-				if(($dataSource=$this->getNamingContainer()->findControl($dsid))===null)
-					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_datasourceid_inexistent',$dsid);
-				else if(!($dataSource instanceof IDataSource))
-					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_datasourceid_invalid',$dsid);
-				else
-					$this->_currentDataSource=$dataSource;
-			}
-			else if(($dataSource=$this->getDataSource())!==null)
-				$this->_currentDataSource=new TReadOnlyDataSource($dataSource,$this->getDataMember());
-			else
-				$this->_currentDataSource=null;
-			$this->_currentDataSourceValid=true;
-		}
-		return $this->_currentDataSource;
-	}
-
-	abstract protected function performDataBinding($data);
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnDataBound</b> event.
-	 * This method should be invoked after a databind is performed.
-	 * It is mainly used by framework and component developers.
-	 */
-	public function onDataBound($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnDataBound',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets page's <b>OnPreLoad</b> event handler as {@link pagePreLoad}.
-	 * If viewstate is disabled and the current request is a postback,
-	 * {@link setRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding} will be set true.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onInit($param)
-	{
-		parent::onInit($param);
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$page->attachEventHandler('OnPreLoad',array($this,'pagePreLoad'));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets {@link getInitialized} as true.
-	 * This method is invoked when page raises <b>PreLoad</b> event.
-	 * @param mixed event sender
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function pagePreLoad($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$this->_initialized=true;
-		$isPostBack=$this->getPage()->getIsPostBack();
-		if(!$isPostBack || ($isPostBack && (!$this->getEnableViewState(true) || !$this->getIsDataBound())))
-			$this->setRequiresDataBinding(true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Ensures any pending databind is performed.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		$this->_prerendered=true;
-		$this->ensureDataBound();
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Validates if the parameter is a valid data source.
-	 * If it is a string or an array, it will be converted as a TList object.
-	 * @param Traversable|array|string data source to be validated
-	 * @return Traversable the data that is traversable
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the data is neither null nor Traversable
-	 */
-	protected function validateDataSource($value)
-	{
-		if(is_string($value))
-		{
-			$list=new TList;
-			foreach(TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value) as $key=>$value)
-			{
-				if(is_array($value))
-					$list->add($value);
-				else
-					$list->add(array($value,is_string($key)?$key:$value));
-			}
-			return $list;
-		}
-		else if(is_array($value))
-			return new TMap($value);
-		else if($value instanceof TDbDataReader) {
-			// read array from TDbDataReader since it's forward-only stream and can only be traversed once
-			return $value->readAll();
-		}
-		else if(($value instanceof Traversable) || $value===null)
-			return $value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('databoundcontrol_datasource_invalid',get_class($this));
-	}
-
-	public function getDataMember()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataMember','');
-	}
-
-	public function setDataMember($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataMember',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	public function getSelectParameters()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_parameters)
-			$this->_parameters=new TDataSourceSelectParameters;
-		return $this->_parameters;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TListItemType class.
- * TListItemType defines the enumerable type for the possible types
- * that databound list items could take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Header: header item
- * - Footer: footer item
- * - Item: content item (neither header nor footer)
- * - Separator: separator between items
- * - AlternatingItem: alternating content item
- * - EditItem: content item in edit mode
- * - SelectedItem: selected content item
- * - Pager: pager
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TListItemType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Header='Header';
-	const Footer='Footer';
-	const Item='Item';
-	const Separator='Separator';
-	const AlternatingItem='AlternatingItem';
-	const EditItem='EditItem';
-	const SelectedItem='SelectedItem';
-	const Pager='Pager';
-}
-
-
-/**
- * IItemDataRenderer interface.
- *
- * IItemDataRenderer defines the interface that an item renderer
- * needs to implement. Besides the {@link getData Data} property, a list item
- * renderer also needs to provide {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex} and
- * {@link getItemType ItemType} property.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.0
- */
-interface IItemDataRenderer extends IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating the zero-based index of the item in the corresponding data control's item collection.
-	 * If the item is not in the collection (e.g. it is a header item), it returns -1.
-	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item.
-	 */
-	public function getItemIndex();
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
-	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
-	 */
-	public function setItemIndex($value);
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListItemType the item type.
-	 */
-	public function getItemType();
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListItemType the item type.
-	 */
-	public function setItemType($value);
-}
-
-?>
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataBoundControl class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataSourceControl');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataSourceView');
+Prado::using('System.Collections.TPagedDataSource');
+
+/**
+ * TDataBoundControl class.
+ *
+ * TDataBoundControl is the based class for controls that need to populate
+ * data from data sources. It provides basic properties and methods that allow
+ * the derived controls to associate with data sources and retrieve data from them.
+ *
+ * TBC....
+ *
+ * TDataBoundControl is equipped with paging capabilities. By setting
+ * {@link setAllowPaging AllowPaging} to true, the input data will be paged
+ * and only one page of data is actually populated into the data-bound control.
+ * This saves a lot of memory when dealing with larget datasets.
+ *
+ * To specify the number of data items displayed on each page, set
+ * the {@link setPageSize PageSize} property, and to specify which
+ * page of data to be displayed, set {@link setCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex}.
+ *
+ * When the size of the original data is too big to be loaded all in the memory,
+ * one can enable custom paging. In custom paging, the total number of data items
+ * is specified manually via {@link setVirtualItemCount VirtualItemCount},
+ * and the data source only needs to contain the current page of data. To enable
+ * custom paging, set {@link setAllowCustomPaging AllowCustomPaging} to true.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+abstract class TDataBoundControl extends TWebControl
+{
+	private $_initialized=false;
+	private $_dataSource=null;
+	private $_requiresBindToNull=false;
+	private $_requiresDataBinding=false;
+	private $_prerendered=false;
+	private $_currentView=null;
+	private $_currentDataSource=null;
+	private $_currentViewValid=false;
+	private $_currentDataSourceValid=false;
+	private $_currentViewIsFromDataSourceID=false;
+	private $_parameters=null;
+	private $_isDataBound=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return Traversable data source object, defaults to null.
+	 */
+	public function getDataSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataSource;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the data source object associated with the databound control.
+	 * The data source must implement Traversable interface.
+	 * If an array is given, it will be converted to xxx.
+	 * If a string is given, it will be converted to xxx.
+	 * @param Traversable|array|string data source object
+	 */
+	public function setDataSource($value)
+	{
+		$this->_dataSource=$this->validateDataSource($value);
+		$this->onDataSourceChanged();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string ID path to the data source control. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getDataSourceID()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataSourceID','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string ID path to the data source control. The data source
+	 * control must be locatable via {@link TControl::findControl} call.
+	 */
+	public function setDataSourceID($value)
+	{
+		$dsid=$this->getViewState('DataSourceID','');
+		if($dsid!=='' && $value==='')
+			$this->_requiresBindToNull=true;
+		$this->setViewState('DataSourceID',$value,'');
+		$this->onDataSourceChanged();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean if the databound control uses the data source specified
+	 * by {@link setDataSourceID}, or it uses the data source object specified
+	 * by {@link setDataSource}.
+	 */
+	protected function getUsingDataSourceID()
+	{
+		return $this->getDataSourceID()!=='';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets {@link setRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding} as true if the control is initialized.
+	 * This method is invoked when either {@link setDataSource} or {@link setDataSourceID} is changed.
+	 */
+	public function onDataSourceChanged()
+	{
+		$this->_currentViewValid=false;
+		$this->_currentDataSourceValid=false;
+		if($this->getInitialized())
+			$this->setRequiresDataBinding(true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the databound control has been initialized.
+	 * By default, the control is initialized after its viewstate has been restored.
+	 */
+	protected function getInitialized()
+	{
+		return $this->_initialized;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a value indicating whether the databound control is initialized.
+	 * If initialized, any modification to {@link setDataSource DataSource} or
+	 * {@link setDataSourceID DataSourceID} will set {@link setRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding}
+	 * as true.
+	 * @param boolean a value indicating whether the databound control is initialized.
+	 */
+	protected function setInitialized($value)
+	{
+		$this->_initialized=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether databind has been invoked in the previous page request
+	 */
+	protected function getIsDataBound()
+	{
+		return $this->_isDataBound;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean if databind has been invoked in this page request
+	 */
+	protected function setIsDataBound($value)
+	{
+		$this->_isDataBound=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether a databind call is required (by the data bound control)
+	 */
+	protected function getRequiresDataBinding()
+	{
+		return $this->_requiresDataBinding;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether paging is enabled. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAllowPaging()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AllowPaging',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether paging is enabled
+	 */
+	public function setAllowPaging($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AllowPaging',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the custom paging is enabled. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAllowCustomPaging()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AllowCustomPaging',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a value indicating whether the custom paging should be enabled.
+	 * When the pager is in custom paging mode, the {@link setVirtualItemCount VirtualItemCount}
+	 * property is used to determine the paging, and the data items in the
+	 * {@link setDataSource DataSource} are considered to be in the current page.
+	 * @param boolean whether the custom paging is enabled
+	 */
+	public function setAllowCustomPaging($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AllowCustomPaging',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the current page. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getCurrentPageIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CurrentPageIndex',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current page
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
+	 */
+	public function setCurrentPageIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=0;
+		$this->setViewState('CurrentPageIndex',$value,0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of data items on each page. Defaults to 10.
+	 */
+	public function getPageSize()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PageSize',10);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the number of data items on each page.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 1
+	 */
+	public function setPageSize($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<1)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_pagesize_invalid',get_class($this));
+		$this->setViewState('PageSize',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),10);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer number of pages of data items available
+	 */
+	public function getPageCount()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PageCount',1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer virtual number of data items in the data source. Defaults to 0.
+	 * @see setAllowCustomPaging
+	 */
+	public function getVirtualItemCount()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('VirtualItemCount',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer virtual number of data items in the data source.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
+	 * @see setAllowCustomPaging
+	 */
+	public function setVirtualItemCount($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_virtualitemcount_invalid',get_class($this));
+		$this->setViewState('VirtualItemCount',$value,0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a value indicating whether a databind call is required by the data bound control.
+	 * If true and the control has been prerendered while it uses the data source
+	 * specified by {@link setDataSourceID}, a databind call will be called by this method.
+	 * @param boolean whether a databind call is required.
+	 */
+	protected function setRequiresDataBinding($value)
+	{
+		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+		if($value && $this->_prerendered)
+		{
+			$this->_requiresDataBinding=true;
+			$this->ensureDataBound();
+		}
+		else
+			$this->_requiresDataBinding=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Ensures any pending {@link dataBind} is called.
+	 * This method calls {@link dataBind} if the data source is specified
+	 * by {@link setDataSourceID} or if {@link getRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding}
+	 * is true.
+	 */
+	protected function ensureDataBound()
+	{
+		if($this->_requiresDataBinding && ($this->getUsingDataSourceID() || $this->_requiresBindToNull))
+		{
+			$this->dataBind();
+			$this->_requiresBindToNull=false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPagedDataSource creates a paged data source
+	 */
+	protected function createPagedDataSource()
+	{
+		$ds=new TPagedDataSource;
+		$ds->setCurrentPageIndex($this->getCurrentPageIndex());
+		$ds->setPageSize($this->getPageSize());
+		$ds->setAllowPaging($this->getAllowPaging());
+		$ds->setAllowCustomPaging($this->getAllowCustomPaging());
+		$ds->setVirtualItemCount($this->getVirtualItemCount());
+		return $ds;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs databinding.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by calling
+	 * {@link performSelect} which fetches data from data source and does
+	 * the actual binding work.
+	 */
+	public function dataBind()
+	{
+		$this->setRequiresDataBinding(false);
+		$this->dataBindProperties();
+		$this->onDataBinding(null);
+
+		if(($view=$this->getDataSourceView())!==null)
+			$data=$view->select($this->getSelectParameters());
+		else
+			$data=null;
+
+		if($data instanceof Traversable)
+		{
+			if($this->getAllowPaging())
+			{
+				$ds=$this->createPagedDataSource();
+				$ds->setDataSource($data);
+				$this->setViewState('PageCount',$ds->getPageCount());
+				if($ds->getCurrentPageIndex()>=$ds->getPageCount())
+				{
+					$ds->setCurrentPageIndex($ds->getPageCount()-1);
+					$this->setCurrentPageIndex($ds->getCurrentPageIndex());
+				}
+				$this->performDataBinding($ds);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$this->clearViewState('PageCount');
+				$this->performDataBinding($data);
+			}
+		}
+		$this->setIsDataBound(true);
+		$this->onDataBound(null);
+	}
+
+	public function dataSourceViewChanged($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if(!$this->_ignoreDataSourceViewChanged)
+			$this->setRequiresDataBinding(true);
+	}
+
+	protected function getDataSourceView()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_currentViewValid)
+		{
+			if($this->_currentView && $this->_currentViewIsFromDataSourceID)
+				$this->_currentView->detachEventHandler('DataSourceViewChanged',array($this,'dataSourceViewChanged'));
+			if(($dataSource=$this->determineDataSource())!==null)
+			{
+				if(($view=$dataSource->getView($this->getDataMember()))===null)
+					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_datamember_invalid',$this->getDataMember());
+				if($this->_currentViewIsFromDataSourceID=$this->getUsingDataSourceID())
+					$view->attachEventHandler('OnDataSourceViewChanged',array($this,'dataSourceViewChanged'));
+				$this->_currentView=$view;
+			}
+			else
+				$this->_currentView=null;
+			$this->_currentViewValid=true;
+		}
+		return $this->_currentView;
+	}
+
+	protected function determineDataSource()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_currentDataSourceValid)
+		{
+			if(($dsid=$this->getDataSourceID())!=='')
+			{
+				if(($dataSource=$this->getNamingContainer()->findControl($dsid))===null)
+					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_datasourceid_inexistent',$dsid);
+				else if(!($dataSource instanceof IDataSource))
+					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('databoundcontrol_datasourceid_invalid',$dsid);
+				else
+					$this->_currentDataSource=$dataSource;
+			}
+			else if(($dataSource=$this->getDataSource())!==null)
+				$this->_currentDataSource=new TReadOnlyDataSource($dataSource,$this->getDataMember());
+			else
+				$this->_currentDataSource=null;
+			$this->_currentDataSourceValid=true;
+		}
+		return $this->_currentDataSource;
+	}
+
+	abstract protected function performDataBinding($data);
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnDataBound</b> event.
+	 * This method should be invoked after a databind is performed.
+	 * It is mainly used by framework and component developers.
+	 */
+	public function onDataBound($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnDataBound',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets page's <b>OnPreLoad</b> event handler as {@link pagePreLoad}.
+	 * If viewstate is disabled and the current request is a postback,
+	 * {@link setRequiresDataBinding RequiresDataBinding} will be set true.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onInit($param)
+	{
+		parent::onInit($param);
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$page->attachEventHandler('OnPreLoad',array($this,'pagePreLoad'));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets {@link getInitialized} as true.
+	 * This method is invoked when page raises <b>PreLoad</b> event.
+	 * @param mixed event sender
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function pagePreLoad($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$this->_initialized=true;
+		$isPostBack=$this->getPage()->getIsPostBack();
+		if(!$isPostBack || ($isPostBack && (!$this->getEnableViewState(true) || !$this->getIsDataBound())))
+			$this->setRequiresDataBinding(true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Ensures any pending databind is performed.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		$this->_prerendered=true;
+		$this->ensureDataBound();
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Validates if the parameter is a valid data source.
+	 * If it is a string or an array, it will be converted as a TList object.
+	 * @param Traversable|array|string data source to be validated
+	 * @return Traversable the data that is traversable
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the data is neither null nor Traversable
+	 */
+	protected function validateDataSource($value)
+	{
+		if(is_string($value))
+		{
+			$list=new TList;
+			foreach(TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value) as $key=>$value)
+			{
+				if(is_array($value))
+					$list->add($value);
+				else
+					$list->add(array($value,is_string($key)?$key:$value));
+			}
+			return $list;
+		}
+		else if(is_array($value))
+			return new TMap($value);
+		else if($value instanceof TDbDataReader) {
+			// read array from TDbDataReader since it's forward-only stream and can only be traversed once
+			return $value->readAll();
+		}
+		else if(($value instanceof Traversable) || $value===null)
+			return $value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('databoundcontrol_datasource_invalid',get_class($this));
+	}
+
+	public function getDataMember()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataMember','');
+	}
+
+	public function setDataMember($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataMember',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	public function getSelectParameters()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_parameters)
+			$this->_parameters=new TDataSourceSelectParameters;
+		return $this->_parameters;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TListItemType class.
+ * TListItemType defines the enumerable type for the possible types
+ * that databound list items could take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Header: header item
+ * - Footer: footer item
+ * - Item: content item (neither header nor footer)
+ * - Separator: separator between items
+ * - AlternatingItem: alternating content item
+ * - EditItem: content item in edit mode
+ * - SelectedItem: selected content item
+ * - Pager: pager
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TListItemType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Header='Header';
+	const Footer='Footer';
+	const Item='Item';
+	const Separator='Separator';
+	const AlternatingItem='AlternatingItem';
+	const EditItem='EditItem';
+	const SelectedItem='SelectedItem';
+	const Pager='Pager';
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * IItemDataRenderer interface.
+ *
+ * IItemDataRenderer defines the interface that an item renderer
+ * needs to implement. Besides the {@link getData Data} property, a list item
+ * renderer also needs to provide {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex} and
+ * {@link getItemType ItemType} property.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.0
+ */
+interface IItemDataRenderer extends IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating the zero-based index of the item in the corresponding data control's item collection.
+	 * If the item is not in the collection (e.g. it is a header item), it returns -1.
+	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item.
+	 */
+	public function getItemIndex();
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
+	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
+	 */
+	public function setItemIndex($value);
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListItemType the item type.
+	 */
+	public function getItemType();
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListItemType the item type.
+	 */
+	public function setItemType($value);
+}
+
+?>
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGrid.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGrid.php
index 2af66b33..2e2c5252 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGrid.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGrid.php
@@ -1,2258 +1,2258 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataGrid related class files.
- * This file contains the definition of the following classes:
- * TDataGrid, TDataGridItem, TDataGridItemCollection, TDataGridColumnCollection,
- * TDataGridPagerStyle, TDataGridItemEventParameter,
- * TDataGridCommandEventParameter, TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter,
- * TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TBaseList, TPagedDataSource, TDummyDataSource and TTable classes
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseDataList');
-Prado::using('System.Collections.TPagedDataSource');
-Prado::using('System.Collections.TDummyDataSource');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTable');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TPanel');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridPagerStyle');
-
-/**
- * TDataGrid class
- *
- * TDataGrid represents a data bound and updatable grid control.
- *
- * To populate data into the datagrid, sets its {@link setDataSource DataSource}
- * to a tabular data source and call {@link dataBind()}.
- * Each row of data will be represented by an item in the {@link getItems Items}
- * collection of the datagrid.
- *
- * An item can be at one of three states: browsing, selected and edit.
- * The state determines how the item will be displayed. For example, if an item
- * is in edit state, it may be displayed as a table row with input text boxes
- * if the columns are of type {@link TBoundColumn}; and if in browsing state,
- * they are displayed as static text.
- *
- * To change the state of an item, set {@link setEditItemIndex EditItemIndex}
- * or {@link setSelectedItemIndex SelectedItemIndex} property.
- *
- * Each datagrid item has a {@link TDataGridItem::getItemType type}
- * which tells the position and state of the item in the datalist. An item in the header
- * of the repeater is of type Header. A body item may be of either
- * Item, AlternatingItem, SelectedItem or EditItem, depending whether the item
- * index is odd or even, whether it is being selected or edited.
- *
- * A datagrid is specified with a list of columns. Each column specifies how the corresponding
- * table column will be displayed. For example, the header/footer text of that column,
- * the cells in that column, and so on. The following column types are currently
- * provided by the framework,
- * - {@link TBoundColumn}, associated with a specific field in datasource and displays the corresponding data.
- * - {@link TEditCommandColumn}, displaying edit/update/cancel command buttons
- * - {@link TButtonColumn}, displaying generic command buttons that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
- * - {@link TDropDownListColumn}, displaying a dropdown list when the item is in edit state
- * - {@link THyperLinkColumn}, displaying a hyperlink that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
- * - {@link TCheckBoxColumn}, displaying a checkbox that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
- * - {@link TTemplateColumn}, displaying content based on templates.
- *
- * There are three ways to specify columns for a datagrid.
- * <ul>
- *  <li>Automatically generated based on data source.
- *  By setting {@link setAutoGenerateColumns AutoGenerateColumns} to true,
- *  a list of columns will be automatically generated based on the schema of the data source.
- *  Each column corresponds to a column of the data.</li>
- *  <li>Specified in template. For example,
- *    <code>
- *     <com:TDataGrid ...>
- *        <com:TBoundColumn .../>
- *        <com:TEditCommandColumn .../>
- *     </com:TDataGrid>
- *    </code>
- *  </li>
- *  <li>Manually created in code. Columns can be manipulated via
- *  the {@link setColumns Columns} property of the datagrid. For example,
- *  <code>
- *    $column=new TBoundColumn;
- *    $datagrid->Columns[]=$column;
- *  </code>
- *  </li>
- * </ul>
- * Note, automatically generated columns cannot be accessed via
- * the {@link getColumns Columns} property.
- *
- * TDataGrid supports sorting. If the {@link setAllowSorting AllowSorting}
- * is set to true, a column with nonempty {@link setSortExpression SortExpression}
- * will have its header text displayed as a clickable link button.
- * Clicking on the link button will raise {@link onSortCommand OnSortCommand}
- * event. You can respond to this event, sort the data source according
- * to the event parameter, and then invoke {@link databind()} on the datagrid
- * to show to end users the sorted data.
- *
- * TDataGrid supports paging. If the {@link setAllowPaging AllowPaging}
- * is set to true, a pager will be displayed on top and/or bottom of the table.
- * How the pager will be displayed is determined by the {@link getPagerStyle PagerStyle}
- * property. Clicking on a pager button will raise an {@link onPageIndexChanged OnPageIndexChanged}
- * event. You can respond to this event, specify the page to be displayed by
- * setting {@link setCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex}</b> property,
- * and then invoke {@link databind()} on the datagrid to show to end users
- * a new page of data.
- *
- * TDataGrid supports two kinds of paging. The first one is based on the number of data items in
- * datasource. The number of pages {@link getPageCount PageCount} is calculated based
- * the item number and the {@link setPageSize PageSize} property.
- * The datagrid will manage which section of the data source to be displayed
- * based on the {@link setCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex} property.
- * The second approach calculates the page number based on the
- * {@link setVirtualItemCount VirtualItemCount} property and
- * the {@link setPageSize PageSize} property. The datagrid will always
- * display from the beginning of the datasource up to the number of
- * {@link setPageSize PageSize} data items. This approach is especially
- * useful when the datasource may contain too many data items to be managed by
- * the datagrid efficiently.
- *
- * When the datagrid contains a button control that raises an {@link onCommand OnCommand}
- * event, the event will be bubbled up to the datagrid control.
- * If the event's command name is recognizable by the datagrid control,
- * a corresponding item event will be raised. The following item events will be
- * raised upon a specific command:
- * - OnEditCommand, if CommandName=edit
- * - OnCancelCommand, if CommandName=cancel
- * - OnSelectCommand, if CommandName=select
- * - OnDeleteCommand, if CommandName=delete
- * - OnUpdateCommand, if CommandName=update
- * - onPageIndexChanged, if CommandName=page
- * - OnSortCommand, if CommandName=sort
- * Note, an {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event is raised in addition to
- * the above specific command events.
- *
- * TDataGrid also raises an {@link onItemCreated OnItemCreated} event for
- * every newly created datagrid item. You can respond to this event to customize
- * the content or style of the newly created item.
- *
- * Note, the data bound to the datagrid are reset to null after databinding.
- * There are several ways to access the data associated with a datagrid row:
- * - Access the data in {@link onItemDataBound OnItemDataBound} event
- * - Use {@link getDataKeys DataKeys} to obtain the data key associated with
- * the specified datagrid row and use the key to fetch the corresponding data
- * from some persistent storage such as DB.
- * - Save the data in viewstate and get it back during postbacks.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGrid extends TBaseDataList implements INamingContainer
-{
-	/**
-	 * datagrid item types
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.0.4. Use TListItemType constants instead.
-	 */
-	const IT_HEADER='Header';
-	const IT_FOOTER='Footer';
-	const IT_ITEM='Item';
-	const IT_SEPARATOR='Separator';
-	const IT_ALTERNATINGITEM='AlternatingItem';
-	const IT_EDITITEM='EditItem';
-	const IT_SELECTEDITEM='SelectedItem';
-	const IT_PAGER='Pager';
-
-	/**
-	 * Command name that TDataGrid understands.
-	 */
-	const CMD_SELECT='Select';
-	const CMD_EDIT='Edit';
-	const CMD_UPDATE='Update';
-	const CMD_DELETE='Delete';
-	const CMD_CANCEL='Cancel';
-	const CMD_SORT='Sort';
-	const CMD_PAGE='Page';
-	const CMD_PAGE_NEXT='Next';
-	const CMD_PAGE_PREV='Previous';
-	const CMD_PAGE_FIRST='First';
-	const CMD_PAGE_LAST='Last';
-
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataGridColumnCollection manually created column collection
-	 */
-	private $_columns=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataGridColumnCollection automatically created column collection
-	 */
-	private $_autoColumns=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TList all columns including both manually and automatically created columns
-	 */
-	private $_allColumns=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataGridItemCollection datagrid item collection
-	 */
-	private $_items=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataGridItem header item
-	 */
-	private $_header=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataGridItem footer item
-	 */
-	private $_footer=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TPagedDataSource paged data source object
-	 */
-	private $_pagedDataSource=null;
-	private $_topPager=null;
-	private $_bottomPager=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate template used when empty data is bounded
-	 */
-	private $_emptyTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether empty template is effective
-	 */
-	private $_useEmptyTemplate=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name (table) of the datagrid
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'table';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string Name of the class used in AutoGenerateColumns mode
-	 */
-	protected function getAutoGenerateColumnName()
-	{
-		return 'TBoundColumn';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds objects parsed in template to datagrid.
-	 * Datagrid columns are added into {@link getColumns Columns} collection.
-	 * @param mixed object parsed in template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof TDataGridColumn)
-			$this->getColumns()->add($object);
-		else
-			parent::addParsedObject($object);  // this is needed by EmptyTemplate
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridColumnCollection manually specified datagrid columns
-	 */
-	public function getColumns()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_columns)
-			$this->_columns=new TDataGridColumnCollection($this);
-		return $this->_columns;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridColumnCollection automatically generated datagrid columns
-	 */
-	public function getAutoColumns()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_autoColumns)
-			$this->_autoColumns=new TDataGridColumnCollection($this);
-		return $this->_autoColumns;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridItemCollection datagrid item collection
-	 */
-	public function getItems()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_items)
-			$this->_items=new TDataGridItemCollection;
-		return $this->_items;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer number of items
-	 */
-	public function getItemCount()
-	{
-		return $this->_items?$this->_items->getCount():0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object for the control.
-	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by datagrid.
-	 * @return TTableStyle control style to be used
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the datagrid
-	 */
-	public function getBackImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getStyle()->getBackImageUrl();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL of the background image for the datagrid
-	 */
-	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setBackImageUrl($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for every item
-	 */
-	public function getItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('ItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for each alternating item
-	 */
-	public function getAlternatingItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for selected item
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for edit item
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('EditItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for header
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for footer
-	 */
-	public function getFooterStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('FooterStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridPagerStyle the style for pager
-	 */
-	public function getPagerStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('PagerStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TDataGridPagerStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('PagerStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style for thead element, if any
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getTableHeadStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('TableHeadStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('TableHeadStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style for tbody element, if any
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getTableBodyStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('TableBodyStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('TableBodyStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style for tfoot element, if any
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getTableFootStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('TableFootStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('TableFootStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string caption for the datagrid
-	 */
-	public function getCaption()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Caption','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string caption for the datagrid
-	 */
-	public function setCaption($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Caption',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign datagrid caption alignment. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getCaptionAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CaptionAlign',TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTableCaptionAlign datagrid caption alignment. Valid values include
-	 */
-	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CaptionAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableCaptionAlign'),TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridItem the header item
-	 */
-	public function getHeader()
-	{
-		return $this->_header;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridItem the footer item
-	 */
-	public function getFooter()
-	{
-		return $this->_footer;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridPager the pager displayed at the top of datagrid. It could be null if paging is disabled.
-	 */
-	public function getTopPager()
-	{
-		return $this->_topPager;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridPager the pager displayed at the bottom of datagrid. It could be null if paging is disabled.
-	 */
-	public function getBottomPager()
-	{
-		return $this->_bottomPager;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridItem the selected item, null if no item is selected.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItem()
-	{
-		$index=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
-			return $items->itemAt($index);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the selected item in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * A value -1 means no item selected.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('SelectedItemIndex',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Selects an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * Previously selected item will be un-selected.
-	 * If the item to be selected is already in edit mode, it will remain in edit mode.
-	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing selection will be cleared up.
-	 * @param integer the selected item index
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedItemIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=-1;
-		if(($current=$this->getSelectedItemIndex())!==$value)
-		{
-			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemIndex',$value,-1);
-			$items=$this->getItems();
-			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
-			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
-			{
-				$item=$items->itemAt($current);
-				if($item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
-					$item->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem:TListItemType::Item);
-			}
-			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
-			{
-				$item=$items->itemAt($value);
-				if($item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
-					$item->setItemType(TListItemType::SelectedItem);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridItem the edit item
-	 */
-	public function getEditItem()
-	{
-		$index=$this->getEditItemIndex();
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
-			return $items->itemAt($index);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the edit item in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * A value -1 means no item is in edit mode.
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EditItemIndex',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Edits an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * Previously editting item will change to normal item state.
-	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing edit item will be cleared up.
-	 * @param integer the edit item index
-	 */
-	public function setEditItemIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=-1;
-		if(($current=$this->getEditItemIndex())!==$value)
-		{
-			$this->setViewState('EditItemIndex',$value,-1);
-			$items=$this->getItems();
-			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
-			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
-				$items->itemAt($current)->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem:TListItemType::Item);
-			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
-				$items->itemAt($value)->setItemType(TListItemType::EditItem);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether sorting is enabled. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAllowSorting()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AllowSorting',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether sorting is enabled
-	 */
-	public function setAllowSorting($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AllowSorting',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether datagrid columns should be automatically generated. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoGenerateColumns()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoGenerateColumns',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether datagrid columns should be automatically generated
-	 */
-	public function setAutoGenerateColumns($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoGenerateColumns',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the header should be displayed. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getShowHeader()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowHeader',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the header should be displayed
-	 */
-	public function setShowHeader($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowHeader',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the footer should be displayed. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getShowFooter()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowFooter',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the footer should be displayed
-	 */
-	public function setShowFooter($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowFooter',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datagrid
-	 */
-	public function getEmptyTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_emptyTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datagrid
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setEmptyTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_emptyTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datagrid_template_required','EmptyTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation to handle
-	 * {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event which is bubbled from
-	 * {@link TDataGridItem} child controls.
-	 * If the event parameter is {@link TDataGridCommandEventParameter} and
-	 * the command name is a recognized one, which includes 'select', 'edit',
-	 * 'delete', 'update', and 'cancel' (case-insensitive), then a
-	 * corresponding command event is also raised (such as {@link onEditCommand OnEditCommand}).
-	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TDataGridCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->onItemCommand($param);
-			$command=$param->getCommandName();
-			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_SELECT)===0)
-			{
-				$this->setSelectedItemIndex($param->getItem()->getItemIndex());
-				$this->onSelectedIndexChanged($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_EDIT)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onEditCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_DELETE)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onDeleteCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_UPDATE)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onUpdateCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_CANCEL)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onCancelCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_SORT)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onSortCommand(new TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter($sender,$param));
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE)===0)
-			{
-				$p=$param->getCommandParameter();
-				if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT)===0)
-					$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
-				else if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_PREV)===0)
-					$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()-1;
-				else if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST)===0)
-					$pageIndex=0;
-				else if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST)===0)
-					$pageIndex=$this->getPageCount()-1;
-				else
-					$pageIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($p)-1;
-				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
-				return true;
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnCancelCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
-	 * with <b>cancel</b> command name.
-	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onCancelCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCancelCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnDeleteCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
-	 * with <b>delete</b> command name.
-	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onDeleteCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnDeleteCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnEditCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
-	 * with <b>edit</b> command name.
-	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onEditCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnEditCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnSortCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
-	 * with <b>sort</b> command name.
-	 * @param TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onSortCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnSortCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnUpdateCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
-	 * with <b>update</b> command name.
-	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onUpdateCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnUpdateCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemCreated</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked right after a datagrid item is created and before
-	 * added to page hierarchy.
-	 * @param TDataGridItemEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemCreated($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCreated',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnPagerCreated</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked right after a datagrid pager is created and before
-	 * added to page hierarchy.
-	 * @param TDataGridPagerEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPagerCreated($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnPagerCreated',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemDataBound</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked for each datagrid item after it performs
-	 * databinding.
-	 * @param TDataGridItemEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemDataBound($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemDataBound',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnPageIndexChanged</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when current page is changed.
-	 * @param TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPageIndexChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnPageIndexChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves item count in viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
-	 */
-	public function saveState()
-	{
-		parent::saveState();
-		if(!$this->getEnableViewState(true))
-			return;
-		if($this->_items)
-			$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$this->_items->getCount(),0);
-		else
-			$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
-		if($this->_autoColumns)
-		{
-			$state=array();
-			foreach($this->_autoColumns as $column)
-				$state[]=$column->saveState();
-			$this->setViewState('AutoColumns',$state,array());
-		}
-		else
-			$this->clearViewState('AutoColumns');
-		if($this->_columns)
-		{
-			$state=array();
-			foreach($this->_columns as $column)
-				$state[]=$column->saveState();
-			$this->setViewState('Columns',$state,array());
-		}
-		else
-			$this->clearViewState('Columns');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads item count information from viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
-	 */
-	public function loadState()
-	{
-		parent::loadState();
-		if(!$this->getEnableViewState(true))
-			return;
-		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
-		{
-			$state=$this->getViewState('AutoColumns',array());
-			if(!empty($state))
-			{
-				$this->_autoColumns=new TDataGridColumnCollection($this);
-				foreach($state as $st)
-				{
-					$column=new $this->AutoGenerateColumnName;
-					$column->loadState($st);
-					$this->_autoColumns->add($column);
-				}
-			}
-			else
-				$this->_autoColumns=null;
-			$state=$this->getViewState('Columns',array());
-			if($this->_columns && $this->_columns->getCount()===count($state))
-			{
-				$i=0;
-				foreach($this->_columns as $column)
-				{
-					$column->loadState($state[$i]);
-					$i++;
-				}
-			}
-			$this->restoreGridFromViewState();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Clears up all items in the datagrid.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		$this->getControls()->clear();
-		$this->getItems()->clear();
-		$this->_header=null;
-		$this->_footer=null;
-		$this->_topPager=null;
-		$this->_bottomPager=null;
-		$this->_useEmptyTemplate=false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Restores datagrid content from viewstate.
-	 */
-	protected function restoreGridFromViewState()
-	{
-		$this->reset();
-
-		$allowPaging=$this->getAllowPaging();
-
-		$itemCount=$this->getViewState('ItemCount',0);
-		$dsIndex=$this->getViewState('DataSourceIndex',0);
-
-		$columns=new TList($this->getColumns());
-		$columns->mergeWith($this->_autoColumns);
-		$this->_allColumns=$columns;
-
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-
-		if($columns->getCount())
-		{
-			foreach($columns as $column)
-				$column->initialize();
-			$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-			$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
-			for($index=0;$index<$itemCount;++$index)
-			{
-				if($index===0)
-				{
-					if($allowPaging)
-						$this->_topPager=$this->createPager();
-					$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Header,false,null,$columns);
-				}
-				if($index===$editIndex)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
-				else if($index===$selectedIndex)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
-				else if($index % 2)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
-				else
-					$itemType=TListItemType::Item;
-				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($index,$dsIndex,$itemType,false,null,$columns));
-				$dsIndex++;
-			}
-			if($index>0)
-			{
-				$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Footer,false,null,$columns);
-				if($allowPaging)
-					$this->_bottomPager=$this->createPager();
-			}
-		}
-		if(!$dsIndex && $this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
-		{
-			$this->_useEmptyTemplate=true;
-			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs databinding to populate datagrid items from data source.
-	 * This method is invoked by {@link dataBind()}.
-	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
-	 * @param Traversable the bound data
-	 */
-	protected function performDataBinding($data)
-	{
-		$this->reset();
-		$keys=$this->getDataKeys();
-		$keys->clear();
-		$keyField=$this->getDataKeyField();
-
-		// get all columns
-		if($this->getAutoGenerateColumns())
-		{
-			$columns=new TList($this->getColumns());
-			$autoColumns=$this->createAutoColumns($data);
-			$columns->mergeWith($autoColumns);
-		}
-		else
-			$columns=$this->getColumns();
-		$this->_allColumns=$columns;
-
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-
-		$index=0;
-		$allowPaging=$this->getAllowPaging() && ($data instanceof TPagedDataSource);
-		$dsIndex=$allowPaging?$data->getFirstIndexInPage():0;
-		$this->setViewState('DataSourceIndex',$dsIndex,0);
-		if($columns->getCount())
-		{
-			foreach($columns as $column)
-				$column->initialize();
-
-			$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-			$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
-			foreach($data as $key=>$row)
-			{
-				if($keyField!=='')
-					$keys->add($this->getDataFieldValue($row,$keyField));
-				else
-					$keys->add($key);
-				if($index===0)
-				{
-					if($allowPaging)
-						$this->_topPager=$this->createPager();
-					$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Header,true,null,$columns);
-				}
-				if($index===$editIndex)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
-				else if($index===$selectedIndex)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
-				else if($index % 2)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
-				else
-					$itemType=TListItemType::Item;
-				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($index,$dsIndex,$itemType,true,$row,$columns));
-				$index++;
-				$dsIndex++;
-			}
-			if($index>0)
-			{
-				$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Footer,true,null,$columns);
-				if($allowPaging)
-					$this->_bottomPager=$this->createPager();
-			}
-		}
-		$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$index,0);
-		if(!$dsIndex && $this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
-		{
-			$this->_useEmptyTemplate=true;
-			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
-			$this->dataBindChildren();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges consecutive cells who have the same text.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	private function groupCells()
-	{
-		if(($columns=$this->_allColumns)===null)
-			return;
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		foreach($columns as $id=>$column)
-		{
-			if(!$column->getEnableCellGrouping())
-				continue;
-			$prevCell=null;
-			$prevCellText=null;
-			foreach($items as $item)
-			{
-				$itemType=$item->getItemType();
-				$cell=$item->getCells()->itemAt($id);
-				if(!$cell->getVisible())
-					continue;
-				if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem)
-				{
-					if(($cellText=$this->getCellText($cell))==='')
-					{
-						$prevCell=null;
-						$prevCellText=null;
-						continue;
-					}
-					if($prevCell===null || $prevCellText!==$cellText)
-					{
-						$prevCell=$cell;
-						$prevCellText=$cellText;
-					}
-					else
-					{
-						if(($rowSpan=$prevCell->getRowSpan())===0)
-							$rowSpan=1;
-						$prevCell->setRowSpan($rowSpan+1);
-						$cell->setVisible(false);
-					}
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	private function getCellText($cell)
-	{
-		if(($data=$cell->getText())==='' && $cell->getHasControls())
-		{
-			$controls=$cell->getControls();
-			foreach($controls as $control)
-			{
-				if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
-					return $control->getData();
-			}
-		}
-		return $data;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a datagrid item instance based on the item type and index.
-	 * @param integer zero-based item index
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @return TDataGridItem created data list item
-	 */
-	protected function createItem($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		return new TDataGridItem($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType);
-	}
-
-	private function createItemInternal($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType,$dataBind,$dataItem,$columns)
-	{
-		$item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType);
-		$this->initializeItem($item,$columns);
-		$param=new TDataGridItemEventParameter($item);
-		if($dataBind)
-		{
-			$item->setDataItem($dataItem);
-			$this->onItemCreated($param);
-			$this->getControls()->add($item);
-			$item->dataBind();
-			$this->onItemDataBound($param);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$this->onItemCreated($param);
-			$this->getControls()->add($item);
-		}
-		return $item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes a datagrid item and cells inside it
-	 * @param TDataGrid datagrid item to be initialized
-	 * @param TDataGridColumnCollection datagrid columns to be used to initialize the cells in the item
-	 */
-	protected function initializeItem($item,$columns)
-	{
-		$cells=$item->getCells();
-		$itemType=$item->getItemType();
-		$index=0;
-		foreach($columns as $column)
-		{
-			if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
-				$cell=new TTableHeaderCell;
-			else
-				$cell=new TTableCell;
-			if(($id=$column->getID())!=='')
-				$item->registerObject($id,$cell);
-			$cells->add($cell);
-			$column->initializeCell($cell,$index,$itemType);
-			$index++;
-		}
-	}
-
-	protected function createPager()
-	{
-		$pager=new TDataGridPager($this);
-		$this->buildPager($pager);
-		$this->onPagerCreated(new TDataGridPagerEventParameter($pager));
-		$this->getControls()->add($pager);
-		return $pager;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Builds the pager content based on pager style.
-	 * @param TDataGridPager the container for the pager
-	 */
-	protected function buildPager($pager)
-	{
-		switch($this->getPagerStyle()->getMode())
-		{
-			case TDataGridPagerMode::NextPrev:
-				$this->buildNextPrevPager($pager);
-				break;
-			case TDataGridPagerMode::Numeric:
-				$this->buildNumericPager($pager);
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a pager button.
-	 * Depending on the button type, a TLinkButton or a TButton may be created.
-	 * If it is enabled (clickable), its command name and parameter will also be set.
-	 * Derived classes may override this method to create additional types of buttons, such as TImageButton.
-	 * @param mixed the container pager instance of TActiveDatagridPager 
-	 * @param string button type, either LinkButton or PushButton
-	 * @param boolean whether the button should be enabled
-	 * @param string caption of the button
-	 * @param string CommandName corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button
-	 * @param string CommandParameter corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button
-	 * @return mixed the button instance
-	 */
-	protected function createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,$enabled,$text,$commandName,$commandParameter)
-	{
-		if($buttonType===TDataGridPagerButtonType::LinkButton)
-		{
-			if($enabled)
-				$button=new TLinkButton;
-			else
-			{
-				$button=new TLabel;
-				$button->setText($text);
-				return $button;
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$button=new TButton;
-			if(!$enabled)
-				$button->setEnabled(false);
-		}
-		$button->setText($text);
-		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
-		$button->setCommandParameter($commandParameter);
-		$button->setCausesValidation(false);
-		return $button;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Builds a next-prev pager
-	 * @param TDataGridPager the container for the pager
-	 */
-	protected function buildNextPrevPager($pager)
-	{
-		$style=$this->getPagerStyle();
-		$buttonType=$style->getButtonType();
-		$controls=$pager->getControls();
-		$currentPageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex();
-		if($currentPageIndex===0)
-		{
-			if(($text=$style->getFirstPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$text,'','');
-				$controls->add($label);
-				$controls->add("\n");
-			}
-
-			$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$style->getPrevPageText(),'','');
-			$controls->add($label);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if(($text=$style->getFirstPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST);
-				$controls->add($button);
-				$controls->add("\n");
-			}
-
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_PREV);
-			$controls->add($button);
-		}
-		$controls->add("\n");
-		if($currentPageIndex===$this->getPageCount()-1)
-		{
-			$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$style->getNextPageText(),'','');
-			$controls->add($label);
-			if(($text=$style->getLastPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$controls->add("\n");
-				$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$text,'','');
-				$controls->add($label);
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT);
-			$controls->add($button);
-			if(($text=$style->getLastPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$controls->add("\n");
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST);
-				$controls->add($button);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Builds a numeric pager
-	 * @param TDataGridPager the container for the pager
-	 */
-	protected function buildNumericPager($pager)
-	{
-		$style=$this->getPagerStyle();
-		$buttonType=$style->getButtonType();
-		$controls=$pager->getControls();
-		$pageCount=$this->getPageCount();
-		$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
-		$maxButtonCount=$style->getPageButtonCount();
-		$buttonCount=$maxButtonCount>$pageCount?$pageCount:$maxButtonCount;
-		$startPageIndex=1;
-		$endPageIndex=$buttonCount;
-		if($pageIndex>$endPageIndex)
-		{
-			$startPageIndex=((int)(($pageIndex-1)/$maxButtonCount))*$maxButtonCount+1;
-			if(($endPageIndex=$startPageIndex+$maxButtonCount-1)>$pageCount)
-				$endPageIndex=$pageCount;
-			if($endPageIndex-$startPageIndex+1<$maxButtonCount)
-			{
-				if(($startPageIndex=$endPageIndex-$maxButtonCount+1)<1)
-					$startPageIndex=1;
-			}
-		}
-
-		if($startPageIndex>1)
-		{
-			if(($text=$style->getFirstPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST);
-				$controls->add($button);
-				$controls->add("\n");
-			}
-			$prevPageIndex=$startPageIndex-1;
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$prevPageIndex");
-			$controls->add($button);
-			$controls->add("\n");
-		}
-
-		for($i=$startPageIndex;$i<=$endPageIndex;++$i)
-		{
-			if($i===$pageIndex)
-			{
-				$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,"$i",'','');
-				$controls->add($label);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,"$i",self::CMD_PAGE,"$i");
-				$controls->add($button);
-			}
-			if($i<$endPageIndex)
-				$controls->add("\n");
-		}
-
-		if($pageCount>$endPageIndex)
-		{
-			$controls->add("\n");
-			$nextPageIndex=$endPageIndex+1;
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$nextPageIndex");
-			$controls->add($button);
-			if(($text=$style->getLastPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$controls->add("\n");
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST);
-				$controls->add($button);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Automatically generates datagrid columns based on datasource schema
-	 * @param Traversable data source bound to the datagrid
-	 * @return TDataGridColumnCollection
-	 */
-	protected function createAutoColumns($dataSource)
-	{
-		if(!$dataSource)
-			return null;
-		$autoColumns=$this->getAutoColumns();
-		$autoColumns->clear();
-		foreach($dataSource as $row)
-		{
-			foreach($row as $key=>$value)
-			{
-				$column=new $this->AutoGenerateColumnName;
-				if(is_string($key))
-				{
-					$column->setHeaderText($key);
-					$column->setDataField($key);
-					$column->setSortExpression($key);
-					$autoColumns->add($column);
-				}
-				else
-				{
-					$column->setHeaderText(TListItemType::Item);
-					$column->setDataField($key);
-					$column->setSortExpression(TListItemType::Item);
-					$autoColumns->add($column);
-				}
-			}
-			break;
-		}
-		return $autoColumns;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Applies styles to items, header, footer and separators.
-	 * Item styles are applied in a hierarchical way. Style in higher hierarchy
-	 * will inherit from styles in lower hierarchy.
-	 * Starting from the lowest hierarchy, the item styles include
-	 * item's own style, {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle}, {@link getAlternatingItemStyle AlternatingItemStyle},
-	 * {@link getSelectedItemStyle SelectedItemStyle}, and {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle}.
-	 * Therefore, if background color is set as red in {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle},
-	 * {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle} will also have red background color
-	 * unless it is set to a different value explicitly.
-	 */
-	protected function applyItemStyles()
-	{
-		$itemStyle=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null);
-
-		$alternatingItemStyle=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null);
-		if($itemStyle!==null)
-		{
-			if($alternatingItemStyle===null)
-				$alternatingItemStyle=$itemStyle;
-			else
-				$alternatingItemStyle->mergeWith($itemStyle);
-		}
-
-		$selectedItemStyle=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null);
-
-		$editItemStyle=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null);
-		if($selectedItemStyle!==null)
-		{
-			if($editItemStyle===null)
-				$editItemStyle=$selectedItemStyle;
-			else
-				$editItemStyle->mergeWith($selectedItemStyle);
-		}
-
-		$headerStyle=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null);
-		$footerStyle=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null);
-		$pagerStyle=$this->getViewState('PagerStyle',null);
-		$separatorStyle=$this->getViewState('SeparatorStyle',null);
-
-		foreach($this->getControls() as $index=>$item)
-		{
-			if(!($item instanceof TDataGridItem) && !($item instanceof TDataGridPager))
-				continue;
-			$itemType=$item->getItemType();
-			switch($itemType)
-			{
-				case TListItemType::Header:
-					if($headerStyle)
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($headerStyle);
-					if(!$this->getShowHeader())
-						$item->setVisible(false);
-					break;
-				case TListItemType::Footer:
-					if($footerStyle)
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($footerStyle);
-					if(!$this->getShowFooter())
-						$item->setVisible(false);
-					break;
-				case TListItemType::Separator:
-					if($separatorStyle)
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($separatorStyle);
-					break;
-				case TListItemType::Item:
-					if($itemStyle)
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($itemStyle);
-					break;
-				case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
-					if($alternatingItemStyle)
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($alternatingItemStyle);
-					break;
-				case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
-					if($selectedItemStyle)
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($selectedItemStyle);
-					if($index % 2==1)
-					{
-						if($itemStyle)
-							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($itemStyle);
-					}
-					else
-					{
-						if($alternatingItemStyle)
-							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($alternatingItemStyle);
-					}
-					break;
-				case TListItemType::EditItem:
-					if($editItemStyle)
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($editItemStyle);
-					if($index % 2==1)
-					{
-						if($itemStyle)
-							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($itemStyle);
-					}
-					else
-					{
-						if($alternatingItemStyle)
-							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($alternatingItemStyle);
-					}
-					break;
-				case TListItemType::Pager:
-					if($pagerStyle)
-					{
-						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($pagerStyle);
-						if($index===0)
-						{
-							if($pagerStyle->getPosition()===TDataGridPagerPosition::Bottom || !$pagerStyle->getVisible())
-								$item->setVisible(false);
-						}
-						else
-						{
-							if($pagerStyle->getPosition()===TDataGridPagerPosition::Top || !$pagerStyle->getVisible())
-								$item->setVisible(false);
-						}
-					}
-					break;
-				default:
-					break;
-			}
-			if($this->_columns && $itemType!==TListItemType::Pager)
-			{
-				$n=$this->_columns->getCount();
-				$cells=$item->getCells();
-				for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
-				{
-					$cell=$cells->itemAt($i);
-					$column=$this->_columns->itemAt($i);
-					if(!$column->getVisible())
-						$cell->setVisible(false);
-					else
-					{
-						if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
-							$style=$column->getHeaderStyle(false);
-						else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
-							$style=$column->getFooterStyle(false);
-						else
-							$style=$column->getItemStyle(false);
-						if($style!==null)
-							$cell->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
-					}
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the openning tag for the datagrid control which will render table caption if present.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
-	{
-		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
-		if(($caption=$this->getCaption())!=='')
-		{
-			if(($align=$this->getCaptionAlign())!==TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet)
-				$writer->addAttribute('align',strtolower($align));
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('caption');
-			$writer->write($caption);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the datagrid.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getHasControls())
-		{
-			$this->groupCells();
-			if($this->_useEmptyTemplate)
-			{
-				$control=new TWebControl;
-				$control->setID($this->getClientID());
-				$control->copyBaseAttributes($this);
-				if($this->getHasStyle())
-					$control->getStyle()->copyFrom($this->getStyle());
-				$control->renderBeginTag($writer);
-				$this->renderContents($writer);
-				$control->renderEndTag($writer);
-			}
-			else if($this->getViewState('ItemCount',0)>0)
-			{
-				$this->applyItemStyles();
-				if($this->_topPager)
-				{
-					$this->_topPager->renderControl($writer);
-					$writer->writeLine();
-				}
-				$this->renderTable($writer);
-				if($this->_bottomPager)
-				{
-					$writer->writeLine();
-					$this->_bottomPager->renderControl($writer);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the tabular data.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	protected function renderTable($writer)
-	{
-		$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
-		if($this->_header && $this->_header->getVisible())
-		{
-			$writer->writeLine();
-			if($style=$this->getViewState('TableHeadStyle',null))
-				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('thead');
-			$this->_header->render($writer);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		$writer->writeLine();
-		if($style=$this->getViewState('TableBodyStyle',null))
-			$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
-		foreach($this->getItems() as $item)
-			$item->renderControl($writer);
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-
-		if($this->_footer && $this->_footer->getVisible())
-		{
-			$writer->writeLine();
-			if($style=$this->getViewState('TableFootStyle',null))
-				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
-			$this->_footer->render($writer);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-
-		$writer->writeLine();
-		$this->renderEndTag($writer);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridItemEventParameter class
- *
- * TDataGridItemEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TDataGrid::onItemCreated OnItemCreated} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
- * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the datagrid item related with the event.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridItemEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * The TDataGridItem control responsible for the event.
-	 * @var TDataGridItem
-	 */
-	private $_item=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TDataGridItem datagrid item related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function __construct(TDataGridItem $item)
-	{
-		$this->_item=$item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridItem datagrid item related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function getItem()
-	{
-		return $this->_item;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridPagerEventParameter class
- *
- * TDataGridPagerEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TDataGrid::onPagerCreated OnPagerCreated} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
- * The {@link getPager Pager} property indicates the datagrid pager related with the event.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridPagerEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * The TDataGridPager control responsible for the event.
-	 * @var TDataGridPager
-	 */
-	protected $_pager=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TDataGridPager datagrid pager related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function __construct(TDataGridPager $pager)
-	{
-		$this->_pager=$pager;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridPager datagrid pager related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function getPager()
-	{
-		return $this->_pager;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridCommandEventParameter class
- *
- * TDataGridCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TDataGrid::onItemCommand ItemCommand} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
- *
- * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the datagrid item related with the event.
- * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} refers to the control that originally
- * raises the Command event.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridCommandEventParameter extends TCommandEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataGridItem the TDataGridItem control responsible for the event.
-	 */
-	private $_item=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl the control originally raises the <b>Command</b> event.
-	 */
-	private $_source=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TDataGridItem datagrid item responsible for the event
-	 * @param TControl original event sender
-	 * @param TCommandEventParameter original event parameter
-	 */
-	public function __construct($item,$source,TCommandEventParameter $param)
-	{
-		$this->_item=$item;
-		$this->_source=$source;
-		parent::__construct($param->getCommandName(),$param->getCommandParameter());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridItem the TDataGridItem control responsible for the event.
-	 */
-	public function getItem()
-	{
-		return $this->_item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>Command</b> event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_source;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter class
- *
- * TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TDataGrid::onSortCommand SortCommand} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
- *
- * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} property refers to the control
- * that originally raises the OnCommand event, while {@link getSortExpression SortExpression}
- * gives the sort expression carried with the sort command.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string sort expression
-	 */
-	private $_sortExpression='';
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl original event sender
-	 */
-	private $_source=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter command event parameter
-	 */
-	public function __construct($source,TDataGridCommandEventParameter $param)
-	{
-		$this->_source=$source;
-		$this->_sortExpression=$param->getCommandParameter();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_source;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string sort expression
-	 */
-	public function getSortExpression()
-	{
-		return $this->_sortExpression;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter class
- *
- * TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TDataGrid::onPageIndexChanged PageIndexChanged} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
- *
- * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} property refers to the control
- * that originally raises the OnCommand event, while {@link getNewPageIndex NewPageIndex}
- * returns the new page index carried with the page command.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var integer new page index
-	 */
-	private $_newIndex;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl original event sender
-	 */
-	private $_source=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 * @param integer new page index
-	 */
-	public function __construct($source,$newPageIndex)
-	{
-		$this->_source=$source;
-		$this->_newIndex=$newPageIndex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_source;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer new page index
-	 */
-	public function getNewPageIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_newIndex;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridItem class
- *
- * A TDataGridItem control represents an item in the {@link TDataGrid} control,
- * such as heading section, footer section, or a data item.
- * The index and data value of the item can be accessed via {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}>
- * and {@link getDataItem DataItem} properties, respectively. The type of the item
- * is given by {@link getItemType ItemType} property. Property {@link getDataSourceIndex DataSourceIndex}
- * gives the index of the item from the bound data source.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridItem extends TTableRow implements INamingContainer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var integer index of the data item in the Items collection of datagrid
-	 */
-	private $_itemIndex='';
-	/**
-	 * @var integer index of the item from the bound data source
-	 */
-	private $_dataSourceIndex=0;
-	/**
-	 * type of the TDataGridItem
-	 * @var string
-	 */
-	private $_itemType='';
-	/**
-	 * value of the data item
-	 * @var mixed
-	 */
-	private $_data=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item in the item collection of datagrid
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 */
-	public function __construct($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		$this->_itemIndex=$itemIndex;
-		$this->_dataSourceIndex=$dataSourceIndex;
-		$this->setItemType($itemType);
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
-			$this->setTableSection(TTableRowSection::Header);
-		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
-			$this->setTableSection(TTableRowSection::Footer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListItemType item type.
-	 */
-	public function getItemType()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemType;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 */
-	public function setItemType($value)
-	{
-		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item in the item collection of datagrid
-	 */
-	public function getItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemIndex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the index of the datagrid item from the bound data source
-	 */
-	public function getDataSourceIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataSourceIndex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->_data;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->_data=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
-	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since v3.1.0. Use {@link getData} instead.
-	 */
-	public function getDataItem()
-	{
-		return $this->getData();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.1.0. Use {@link setData} instead.
-	 */
-	public function setDataItem($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setData($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
-	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataGridCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TDataGridPager class.
- *
- * TDataGridPager represents a datagrid pager.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridPager extends TPanel implements INamingContainer
-{
-	private $_dataGrid;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TDataGrid datagrid object
-	 */
-	public function __construct($dataGrid)
-	{
-		$this->_dataGrid=$dataGrid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
-	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataGridCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGrid the datagrid owning this pager
-	 */
-	public function getDataGrid()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataGrid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string item type.
-	 */
-	public function getItemType()
-	{
-		return TListItemType::Pager;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TDataGridItemCollection class.
- *
- * TDataGridItemCollection represents a collection of data grid items.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridItemCollection extends TList
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only TDataGridItem.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TDataGridItem.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TDataGridItem)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datagriditemcollection_datagriditem_required');
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumnCollection class.
- *
- * TDataGridColumnCollection represents a collection of data grid columns.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridColumnCollection extends TList
-{
-	/**
-	 * the control that owns this collection.
-	 * @var TControl
-	 */
-	private $_o;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TDataGrid the control that owns this collection.
-	 */
-	public function __construct(TDataGrid $owner)
-	{
-		$this->_o=$owner;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGrid the control that owns this collection.
-	 */
-	protected function getOwner()
-	{
-		return $this->_o;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only TDataGridColumn.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TDataGridColumn.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TDataGridColumn)
-		{
-			$item->setOwner($this->_o);
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		}
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datagridcolumncollection_datagridcolumn_required');
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataGridPagerMode class.
- * TDataGridPagerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible modes that a datagrid pager can take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NextPrev: pager buttons are displayed as next and previous pages
- * - Numeric: pager buttons are displayed as numeric page numbers
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TDataGridPagerMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NextPrev='NextPrev';
-	const Numeric='Numeric';
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TDataGridPagerButtonType class.
- * TDataGridPagerButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of datagrid pager buttons.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - LinkButton: link buttons
- * - PushButton: form submit buttons
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TDataGridPagerButtonType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
-	const PushButton='PushButton';
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TDataGridPagerPosition class.
- * TDataGridPagerPosition defines the enumerable type for the possible positions that a datagrid pager can be located at.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Bottom: pager appears only at the bottom of the data grid.
- * - Top: pager appears only at the top of the data grid.
- * - TopAndBottom: pager appears on both top and bottom of the data grid.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TDataGridPagerPosition extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Bottom='Bottom';
-	const Top='Top';
-	const TopAndBottom='TopAndBottom';
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataGrid related class files.
+ * This file contains the definition of the following classes:
+ * TDataGrid, TDataGridItem, TDataGridItemCollection, TDataGridColumnCollection,
+ * TDataGridPagerStyle, TDataGridItemEventParameter,
+ * TDataGridCommandEventParameter, TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter,
+ * TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TBaseList, TPagedDataSource, TDummyDataSource and TTable classes
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseDataList');
+Prado::using('System.Collections.TPagedDataSource');
+Prado::using('System.Collections.TDummyDataSource');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTable');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TPanel');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridPagerStyle');
+
+/**
+ * TDataGrid class
+ *
+ * TDataGrid represents a data bound and updatable grid control.
+ *
+ * To populate data into the datagrid, sets its {@link setDataSource DataSource}
+ * to a tabular data source and call {@link dataBind()}.
+ * Each row of data will be represented by an item in the {@link getItems Items}
+ * collection of the datagrid.
+ *
+ * An item can be at one of three states: browsing, selected and edit.
+ * The state determines how the item will be displayed. For example, if an item
+ * is in edit state, it may be displayed as a table row with input text boxes
+ * if the columns are of type {@link TBoundColumn}; and if in browsing state,
+ * they are displayed as static text.
+ *
+ * To change the state of an item, set {@link setEditItemIndex EditItemIndex}
+ * or {@link setSelectedItemIndex SelectedItemIndex} property.
+ *
+ * Each datagrid item has a {@link TDataGridItem::getItemType type}
+ * which tells the position and state of the item in the datalist. An item in the header
+ * of the repeater is of type Header. A body item may be of either
+ * Item, AlternatingItem, SelectedItem or EditItem, depending whether the item
+ * index is odd or even, whether it is being selected or edited.
+ *
+ * A datagrid is specified with a list of columns. Each column specifies how the corresponding
+ * table column will be displayed. For example, the header/footer text of that column,
+ * the cells in that column, and so on. The following column types are currently
+ * provided by the framework,
+ * - {@link TBoundColumn}, associated with a specific field in datasource and displays the corresponding data.
+ * - {@link TEditCommandColumn}, displaying edit/update/cancel command buttons
+ * - {@link TButtonColumn}, displaying generic command buttons that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
+ * - {@link TDropDownListColumn}, displaying a dropdown list when the item is in edit state
+ * - {@link THyperLinkColumn}, displaying a hyperlink that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
+ * - {@link TCheckBoxColumn}, displaying a checkbox that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
+ * - {@link TTemplateColumn}, displaying content based on templates.
+ *
+ * There are three ways to specify columns for a datagrid.
+ * <ul>
+ *  <li>Automatically generated based on data source.
+ *  By setting {@link setAutoGenerateColumns AutoGenerateColumns} to true,
+ *  a list of columns will be automatically generated based on the schema of the data source.
+ *  Each column corresponds to a column of the data.</li>
+ *  <li>Specified in template. For example,
+ *    <code>
+ *     <com:TDataGrid ...>
+ *        <com:TBoundColumn .../>
+ *        <com:TEditCommandColumn .../>
+ *     </com:TDataGrid>
+ *    </code>
+ *  </li>
+ *  <li>Manually created in code. Columns can be manipulated via
+ *  the {@link setColumns Columns} property of the datagrid. For example,
+ *  <code>
+ *    $column=new TBoundColumn;
+ *    $datagrid->Columns[]=$column;
+ *  </code>
+ *  </li>
+ * </ul>
+ * Note, automatically generated columns cannot be accessed via
+ * the {@link getColumns Columns} property.
+ *
+ * TDataGrid supports sorting. If the {@link setAllowSorting AllowSorting}
+ * is set to true, a column with nonempty {@link setSortExpression SortExpression}
+ * will have its header text displayed as a clickable link button.
+ * Clicking on the link button will raise {@link onSortCommand OnSortCommand}
+ * event. You can respond to this event, sort the data source according
+ * to the event parameter, and then invoke {@link databind()} on the datagrid
+ * to show to end users the sorted data.
+ *
+ * TDataGrid supports paging. If the {@link setAllowPaging AllowPaging}
+ * is set to true, a pager will be displayed on top and/or bottom of the table.
+ * How the pager will be displayed is determined by the {@link getPagerStyle PagerStyle}
+ * property. Clicking on a pager button will raise an {@link onPageIndexChanged OnPageIndexChanged}
+ * event. You can respond to this event, specify the page to be displayed by
+ * setting {@link setCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex}</b> property,
+ * and then invoke {@link databind()} on the datagrid to show to end users
+ * a new page of data.
+ *
+ * TDataGrid supports two kinds of paging. The first one is based on the number of data items in
+ * datasource. The number of pages {@link getPageCount PageCount} is calculated based
+ * the item number and the {@link setPageSize PageSize} property.
+ * The datagrid will manage which section of the data source to be displayed
+ * based on the {@link setCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex} property.
+ * The second approach calculates the page number based on the
+ * {@link setVirtualItemCount VirtualItemCount} property and
+ * the {@link setPageSize PageSize} property. The datagrid will always
+ * display from the beginning of the datasource up to the number of
+ * {@link setPageSize PageSize} data items. This approach is especially
+ * useful when the datasource may contain too many data items to be managed by
+ * the datagrid efficiently.
+ *
+ * When the datagrid contains a button control that raises an {@link onCommand OnCommand}
+ * event, the event will be bubbled up to the datagrid control.
+ * If the event's command name is recognizable by the datagrid control,
+ * a corresponding item event will be raised. The following item events will be
+ * raised upon a specific command:
+ * - OnEditCommand, if CommandName=edit
+ * - OnCancelCommand, if CommandName=cancel
+ * - OnSelectCommand, if CommandName=select
+ * - OnDeleteCommand, if CommandName=delete
+ * - OnUpdateCommand, if CommandName=update
+ * - onPageIndexChanged, if CommandName=page
+ * - OnSortCommand, if CommandName=sort
+ * Note, an {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event is raised in addition to
+ * the above specific command events.
+ *
+ * TDataGrid also raises an {@link onItemCreated OnItemCreated} event for
+ * every newly created datagrid item. You can respond to this event to customize
+ * the content or style of the newly created item.
+ *
+ * Note, the data bound to the datagrid are reset to null after databinding.
+ * There are several ways to access the data associated with a datagrid row:
+ * - Access the data in {@link onItemDataBound OnItemDataBound} event
+ * - Use {@link getDataKeys DataKeys} to obtain the data key associated with
+ * the specified datagrid row and use the key to fetch the corresponding data
+ * from some persistent storage such as DB.
+ * - Save the data in viewstate and get it back during postbacks.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGrid extends TBaseDataList implements INamingContainer
+{
+	/**
+	 * datagrid item types
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.0.4. Use TListItemType constants instead.
+	 */
+	const IT_HEADER='Header';
+	const IT_FOOTER='Footer';
+	const IT_ITEM='Item';
+	const IT_SEPARATOR='Separator';
+	const IT_ALTERNATINGITEM='AlternatingItem';
+	const IT_EDITITEM='EditItem';
+	const IT_SELECTEDITEM='SelectedItem';
+	const IT_PAGER='Pager';
+
+	/**
+	 * Command name that TDataGrid understands.
+	 */
+	const CMD_SELECT='Select';
+	const CMD_EDIT='Edit';
+	const CMD_UPDATE='Update';
+	const CMD_DELETE='Delete';
+	const CMD_CANCEL='Cancel';
+	const CMD_SORT='Sort';
+	const CMD_PAGE='Page';
+	const CMD_PAGE_NEXT='Next';
+	const CMD_PAGE_PREV='Previous';
+	const CMD_PAGE_FIRST='First';
+	const CMD_PAGE_LAST='Last';
+
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataGridColumnCollection manually created column collection
+	 */
+	private $_columns=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataGridColumnCollection automatically created column collection
+	 */
+	private $_autoColumns=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TList all columns including both manually and automatically created columns
+	 */
+	private $_allColumns=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataGridItemCollection datagrid item collection
+	 */
+	private $_items=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataGridItem header item
+	 */
+	private $_header=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataGridItem footer item
+	 */
+	private $_footer=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TPagedDataSource paged data source object
+	 */
+	private $_pagedDataSource=null;
+	private $_topPager=null;
+	private $_bottomPager=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate template used when empty data is bounded
+	 */
+	private $_emptyTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether empty template is effective
+	 */
+	private $_useEmptyTemplate=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name (table) of the datagrid
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'table';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string Name of the class used in AutoGenerateColumns mode
+	 */
+	protected function getAutoGenerateColumnName()
+	{
+		return 'TBoundColumn';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds objects parsed in template to datagrid.
+	 * Datagrid columns are added into {@link getColumns Columns} collection.
+	 * @param mixed object parsed in template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof TDataGridColumn)
+			$this->getColumns()->add($object);
+		else
+			parent::addParsedObject($object);  // this is needed by EmptyTemplate
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridColumnCollection manually specified datagrid columns
+	 */
+	public function getColumns()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_columns)
+			$this->_columns=new TDataGridColumnCollection($this);
+		return $this->_columns;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridColumnCollection automatically generated datagrid columns
+	 */
+	public function getAutoColumns()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_autoColumns)
+			$this->_autoColumns=new TDataGridColumnCollection($this);
+		return $this->_autoColumns;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridItemCollection datagrid item collection
+	 */
+	public function getItems()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_items)
+			$this->_items=new TDataGridItemCollection;
+		return $this->_items;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer number of items
+	 */
+	public function getItemCount()
+	{
+		return $this->_items?$this->_items->getCount():0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object for the control.
+	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by datagrid.
+	 * @return TTableStyle control style to be used
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the datagrid
+	 */
+	public function getBackImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getStyle()->getBackImageUrl();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL of the background image for the datagrid
+	 */
+	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setBackImageUrl($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for every item
+	 */
+	public function getItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('ItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for each alternating item
+	 */
+	public function getAlternatingItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for selected item
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for edit item
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('EditItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for header
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for footer
+	 */
+	public function getFooterStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('FooterStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridPagerStyle the style for pager
+	 */
+	public function getPagerStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('PagerStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TDataGridPagerStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('PagerStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style for thead element, if any
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getTableHeadStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('TableHeadStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('TableHeadStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style for tbody element, if any
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getTableBodyStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('TableBodyStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('TableBodyStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style for tfoot element, if any
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getTableFootStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('TableFootStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('TableFootStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string caption for the datagrid
+	 */
+	public function getCaption()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Caption','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string caption for the datagrid
+	 */
+	public function setCaption($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Caption',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign datagrid caption alignment. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getCaptionAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CaptionAlign',TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTableCaptionAlign datagrid caption alignment. Valid values include
+	 */
+	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CaptionAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableCaptionAlign'),TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridItem the header item
+	 */
+	public function getHeader()
+	{
+		return $this->_header;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridItem the footer item
+	 */
+	public function getFooter()
+	{
+		return $this->_footer;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridPager the pager displayed at the top of datagrid. It could be null if paging is disabled.
+	 */
+	public function getTopPager()
+	{
+		return $this->_topPager;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridPager the pager displayed at the bottom of datagrid. It could be null if paging is disabled.
+	 */
+	public function getBottomPager()
+	{
+		return $this->_bottomPager;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridItem the selected item, null if no item is selected.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItem()
+	{
+		$index=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
+			return $items->itemAt($index);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the selected item in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * A value -1 means no item selected.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('SelectedItemIndex',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Selects an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * Previously selected item will be un-selected.
+	 * If the item to be selected is already in edit mode, it will remain in edit mode.
+	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing selection will be cleared up.
+	 * @param integer the selected item index
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedItemIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=-1;
+		if(($current=$this->getSelectedItemIndex())!==$value)
+		{
+			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemIndex',$value,-1);
+			$items=$this->getItems();
+			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
+			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
+			{
+				$item=$items->itemAt($current);
+				if($item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
+					$item->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem:TListItemType::Item);
+			}
+			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
+			{
+				$item=$items->itemAt($value);
+				if($item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
+					$item->setItemType(TListItemType::SelectedItem);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridItem the edit item
+	 */
+	public function getEditItem()
+	{
+		$index=$this->getEditItemIndex();
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
+			return $items->itemAt($index);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the edit item in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * A value -1 means no item is in edit mode.
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EditItemIndex',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Edits an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * Previously editting item will change to normal item state.
+	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing edit item will be cleared up.
+	 * @param integer the edit item index
+	 */
+	public function setEditItemIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=-1;
+		if(($current=$this->getEditItemIndex())!==$value)
+		{
+			$this->setViewState('EditItemIndex',$value,-1);
+			$items=$this->getItems();
+			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
+			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
+				$items->itemAt($current)->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem:TListItemType::Item);
+			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
+				$items->itemAt($value)->setItemType(TListItemType::EditItem);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether sorting is enabled. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAllowSorting()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AllowSorting',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether sorting is enabled
+	 */
+	public function setAllowSorting($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AllowSorting',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether datagrid columns should be automatically generated. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoGenerateColumns()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoGenerateColumns',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether datagrid columns should be automatically generated
+	 */
+	public function setAutoGenerateColumns($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoGenerateColumns',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the header should be displayed. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getShowHeader()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowHeader',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the header should be displayed
+	 */
+	public function setShowHeader($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowHeader',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the footer should be displayed. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getShowFooter()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowFooter',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the footer should be displayed
+	 */
+	public function setShowFooter($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowFooter',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datagrid
+	 */
+	public function getEmptyTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_emptyTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datagrid
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setEmptyTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_emptyTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datagrid_template_required','EmptyTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation to handle
+	 * {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event which is bubbled from
+	 * {@link TDataGridItem} child controls.
+	 * If the event parameter is {@link TDataGridCommandEventParameter} and
+	 * the command name is a recognized one, which includes 'select', 'edit',
+	 * 'delete', 'update', and 'cancel' (case-insensitive), then a
+	 * corresponding command event is also raised (such as {@link onEditCommand OnEditCommand}).
+	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TDataGridCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->onItemCommand($param);
+			$command=$param->getCommandName();
+			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_SELECT)===0)
+			{
+				$this->setSelectedItemIndex($param->getItem()->getItemIndex());
+				$this->onSelectedIndexChanged($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_EDIT)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onEditCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_DELETE)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onDeleteCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_UPDATE)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onUpdateCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_CANCEL)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onCancelCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_SORT)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onSortCommand(new TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter($sender,$param));
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE)===0)
+			{
+				$p=$param->getCommandParameter();
+				if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT)===0)
+					$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
+				else if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_PREV)===0)
+					$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()-1;
+				else if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST)===0)
+					$pageIndex=0;
+				else if(strcasecmp($p,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST)===0)
+					$pageIndex=$this->getPageCount()-1;
+				else
+					$pageIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($p)-1;
+				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnCancelCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
+	 * with <b>cancel</b> command name.
+	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onCancelCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCancelCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnDeleteCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
+	 * with <b>delete</b> command name.
+	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onDeleteCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnDeleteCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnEditCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
+	 * with <b>edit</b> command name.
+	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onEditCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnEditCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnSortCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
+	 * with <b>sort</b> command name.
+	 * @param TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onSortCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnSortCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnUpdateCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a button control raises <b>OnCommand</b> event
+	 * with <b>update</b> command name.
+	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onUpdateCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnUpdateCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemCreated</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked right after a datagrid item is created and before
+	 * added to page hierarchy.
+	 * @param TDataGridItemEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemCreated($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCreated',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnPagerCreated</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked right after a datagrid pager is created and before
+	 * added to page hierarchy.
+	 * @param TDataGridPagerEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPagerCreated($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnPagerCreated',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemDataBound</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked for each datagrid item after it performs
+	 * databinding.
+	 * @param TDataGridItemEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemDataBound($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemDataBound',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnPageIndexChanged</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when current page is changed.
+	 * @param TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPageIndexChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnPageIndexChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves item count in viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
+	 */
+	public function saveState()
+	{
+		parent::saveState();
+		if(!$this->getEnableViewState(true))
+			return;
+		if($this->_items)
+			$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$this->_items->getCount(),0);
+		else
+			$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
+		if($this->_autoColumns)
+		{
+			$state=array();
+			foreach($this->_autoColumns as $column)
+				$state[]=$column->saveState();
+			$this->setViewState('AutoColumns',$state,array());
+		}
+		else
+			$this->clearViewState('AutoColumns');
+		if($this->_columns)
+		{
+			$state=array();
+			foreach($this->_columns as $column)
+				$state[]=$column->saveState();
+			$this->setViewState('Columns',$state,array());
+		}
+		else
+			$this->clearViewState('Columns');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads item count information from viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
+	 */
+	public function loadState()
+	{
+		parent::loadState();
+		if(!$this->getEnableViewState(true))
+			return;
+		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
+		{
+			$state=$this->getViewState('AutoColumns',array());
+			if(!empty($state))
+			{
+				$this->_autoColumns=new TDataGridColumnCollection($this);
+				foreach($state as $st)
+				{
+					$column=new $this->AutoGenerateColumnName;
+					$column->loadState($st);
+					$this->_autoColumns->add($column);
+				}
+			}
+			else
+				$this->_autoColumns=null;
+			$state=$this->getViewState('Columns',array());
+			if($this->_columns && $this->_columns->getCount()===count($state))
+			{
+				$i=0;
+				foreach($this->_columns as $column)
+				{
+					$column->loadState($state[$i]);
+					$i++;
+				}
+			}
+			$this->restoreGridFromViewState();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Clears up all items in the datagrid.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		$this->getControls()->clear();
+		$this->getItems()->clear();
+		$this->_header=null;
+		$this->_footer=null;
+		$this->_topPager=null;
+		$this->_bottomPager=null;
+		$this->_useEmptyTemplate=false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Restores datagrid content from viewstate.
+	 */
+	protected function restoreGridFromViewState()
+	{
+		$this->reset();
+
+		$allowPaging=$this->getAllowPaging();
+
+		$itemCount=$this->getViewState('ItemCount',0);
+		$dsIndex=$this->getViewState('DataSourceIndex',0);
+
+		$columns=new TList($this->getColumns());
+		$columns->mergeWith($this->_autoColumns);
+		$this->_allColumns=$columns;
+
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+
+		if($columns->getCount())
+		{
+			foreach($columns as $column)
+				$column->initialize();
+			$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+			$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
+			for($index=0;$index<$itemCount;++$index)
+			{
+				if($index===0)
+				{
+					if($allowPaging)
+						$this->_topPager=$this->createPager();
+					$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Header,false,null,$columns);
+				}
+				if($index===$editIndex)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
+				else if($index===$selectedIndex)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
+				else if($index % 2)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
+				else
+					$itemType=TListItemType::Item;
+				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($index,$dsIndex,$itemType,false,null,$columns));
+				$dsIndex++;
+			}
+			if($index>0)
+			{
+				$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Footer,false,null,$columns);
+				if($allowPaging)
+					$this->_bottomPager=$this->createPager();
+			}
+		}
+		if(!$dsIndex && $this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
+		{
+			$this->_useEmptyTemplate=true;
+			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs databinding to populate datagrid items from data source.
+	 * This method is invoked by {@link dataBind()}.
+	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
+	 * @param Traversable the bound data
+	 */
+	protected function performDataBinding($data)
+	{
+		$this->reset();
+		$keys=$this->getDataKeys();
+		$keys->clear();
+		$keyField=$this->getDataKeyField();
+
+		// get all columns
+		if($this->getAutoGenerateColumns())
+		{
+			$columns=new TList($this->getColumns());
+			$autoColumns=$this->createAutoColumns($data);
+			$columns->mergeWith($autoColumns);
+		}
+		else
+			$columns=$this->getColumns();
+		$this->_allColumns=$columns;
+
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+
+		$index=0;
+		$allowPaging=$this->getAllowPaging() && ($data instanceof TPagedDataSource);
+		$dsIndex=$allowPaging?$data->getFirstIndexInPage():0;
+		$this->setViewState('DataSourceIndex',$dsIndex,0);
+		if($columns->getCount())
+		{
+			foreach($columns as $column)
+				$column->initialize();
+
+			$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+			$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
+			foreach($data as $key=>$row)
+			{
+				if($keyField!=='')
+					$keys->add($this->getDataFieldValue($row,$keyField));
+				else
+					$keys->add($key);
+				if($index===0)
+				{
+					if($allowPaging)
+						$this->_topPager=$this->createPager();
+					$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Header,true,null,$columns);
+				}
+				if($index===$editIndex)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
+				else if($index===$selectedIndex)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
+				else if($index % 2)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
+				else
+					$itemType=TListItemType::Item;
+				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($index,$dsIndex,$itemType,true,$row,$columns));
+				$index++;
+				$dsIndex++;
+			}
+			if($index>0)
+			{
+				$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,-1,TListItemType::Footer,true,null,$columns);
+				if($allowPaging)
+					$this->_bottomPager=$this->createPager();
+			}
+		}
+		$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$index,0);
+		if(!$dsIndex && $this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
+		{
+			$this->_useEmptyTemplate=true;
+			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
+			$this->dataBindChildren();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges consecutive cells who have the same text.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	private function groupCells()
+	{
+		if(($columns=$this->_allColumns)===null)
+			return;
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		foreach($columns as $id=>$column)
+		{
+			if(!$column->getEnableCellGrouping())
+				continue;
+			$prevCell=null;
+			$prevCellText=null;
+			foreach($items as $item)
+			{
+				$itemType=$item->getItemType();
+				$cell=$item->getCells()->itemAt($id);
+				if(!$cell->getVisible())
+					continue;
+				if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem)
+				{
+					if(($cellText=$this->getCellText($cell))==='')
+					{
+						$prevCell=null;
+						$prevCellText=null;
+						continue;
+					}
+					if($prevCell===null || $prevCellText!==$cellText)
+					{
+						$prevCell=$cell;
+						$prevCellText=$cellText;
+					}
+					else
+					{
+						if(($rowSpan=$prevCell->getRowSpan())===0)
+							$rowSpan=1;
+						$prevCell->setRowSpan($rowSpan+1);
+						$cell->setVisible(false);
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	private function getCellText($cell)
+	{
+		if(($data=$cell->getText())==='' && $cell->getHasControls())
+		{
+			$controls=$cell->getControls();
+			foreach($controls as $control)
+			{
+				if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
+					return $control->getData();
+			}
+		}
+		return $data;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a datagrid item instance based on the item type and index.
+	 * @param integer zero-based item index
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @return TDataGridItem created data list item
+	 */
+	protected function createItem($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		return new TDataGridItem($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType);
+	}
+
+	private function createItemInternal($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType,$dataBind,$dataItem,$columns)
+	{
+		$item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType);
+		$this->initializeItem($item,$columns);
+		$param=new TDataGridItemEventParameter($item);
+		if($dataBind)
+		{
+			$item->setDataItem($dataItem);
+			$this->onItemCreated($param);
+			$this->getControls()->add($item);
+			$item->dataBind();
+			$this->onItemDataBound($param);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$this->onItemCreated($param);
+			$this->getControls()->add($item);
+		}
+		return $item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes a datagrid item and cells inside it
+	 * @param TDataGrid datagrid item to be initialized
+	 * @param TDataGridColumnCollection datagrid columns to be used to initialize the cells in the item
+	 */
+	protected function initializeItem($item,$columns)
+	{
+		$cells=$item->getCells();
+		$itemType=$item->getItemType();
+		$index=0;
+		foreach($columns as $column)
+		{
+			if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
+				$cell=new TTableHeaderCell;
+			else
+				$cell=new TTableCell;
+			if(($id=$column->getID())!=='')
+				$item->registerObject($id,$cell);
+			$cells->add($cell);
+			$column->initializeCell($cell,$index,$itemType);
+			$index++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	protected function createPager()
+	{
+		$pager=new TDataGridPager($this);
+		$this->buildPager($pager);
+		$this->onPagerCreated(new TDataGridPagerEventParameter($pager));
+		$this->getControls()->add($pager);
+		return $pager;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Builds the pager content based on pager style.
+	 * @param TDataGridPager the container for the pager
+	 */
+	protected function buildPager($pager)
+	{
+		switch($this->getPagerStyle()->getMode())
+		{
+			case TDataGridPagerMode::NextPrev:
+				$this->buildNextPrevPager($pager);
+				break;
+			case TDataGridPagerMode::Numeric:
+				$this->buildNumericPager($pager);
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a pager button.
+	 * Depending on the button type, a TLinkButton or a TButton may be created.
+	 * If it is enabled (clickable), its command name and parameter will also be set.
+	 * Derived classes may override this method to create additional types of buttons, such as TImageButton.
+	 * @param mixed the container pager instance of TActiveDatagridPager 
+	 * @param string button type, either LinkButton or PushButton
+	 * @param boolean whether the button should be enabled
+	 * @param string caption of the button
+	 * @param string CommandName corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button
+	 * @param string CommandParameter corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button
+	 * @return mixed the button instance
+	 */
+	protected function createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,$enabled,$text,$commandName,$commandParameter)
+	{
+		if($buttonType===TDataGridPagerButtonType::LinkButton)
+		{
+			if($enabled)
+				$button=new TLinkButton;
+			else
+			{
+				$button=new TLabel;
+				$button->setText($text);
+				return $button;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$button=new TButton;
+			if(!$enabled)
+				$button->setEnabled(false);
+		}
+		$button->setText($text);
+		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
+		$button->setCommandParameter($commandParameter);
+		$button->setCausesValidation(false);
+		return $button;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Builds a next-prev pager
+	 * @param TDataGridPager the container for the pager
+	 */
+	protected function buildNextPrevPager($pager)
+	{
+		$style=$this->getPagerStyle();
+		$buttonType=$style->getButtonType();
+		$controls=$pager->getControls();
+		$currentPageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex();
+		if($currentPageIndex===0)
+		{
+			if(($text=$style->getFirstPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$text,'','');
+				$controls->add($label);
+				$controls->add("\n");
+			}
+
+			$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$style->getPrevPageText(),'','');
+			$controls->add($label);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if(($text=$style->getFirstPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST);
+				$controls->add($button);
+				$controls->add("\n");
+			}
+
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_PREV);
+			$controls->add($button);
+		}
+		$controls->add("\n");
+		if($currentPageIndex===$this->getPageCount()-1)
+		{
+			$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$style->getNextPageText(),'','');
+			$controls->add($label);
+			if(($text=$style->getLastPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$controls->add("\n");
+				$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,$text,'','');
+				$controls->add($label);
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT);
+			$controls->add($button);
+			if(($text=$style->getLastPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$controls->add("\n");
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST);
+				$controls->add($button);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Builds a numeric pager
+	 * @param TDataGridPager the container for the pager
+	 */
+	protected function buildNumericPager($pager)
+	{
+		$style=$this->getPagerStyle();
+		$buttonType=$style->getButtonType();
+		$controls=$pager->getControls();
+		$pageCount=$this->getPageCount();
+		$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
+		$maxButtonCount=$style->getPageButtonCount();
+		$buttonCount=$maxButtonCount>$pageCount?$pageCount:$maxButtonCount;
+		$startPageIndex=1;
+		$endPageIndex=$buttonCount;
+		if($pageIndex>$endPageIndex)
+		{
+			$startPageIndex=((int)(($pageIndex-1)/$maxButtonCount))*$maxButtonCount+1;
+			if(($endPageIndex=$startPageIndex+$maxButtonCount-1)>$pageCount)
+				$endPageIndex=$pageCount;
+			if($endPageIndex-$startPageIndex+1<$maxButtonCount)
+			{
+				if(($startPageIndex=$endPageIndex-$maxButtonCount+1)<1)
+					$startPageIndex=1;
+			}
+		}
+
+		if($startPageIndex>1)
+		{
+			if(($text=$style->getFirstPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST);
+				$controls->add($button);
+				$controls->add("\n");
+			}
+			$prevPageIndex=$startPageIndex-1;
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$prevPageIndex");
+			$controls->add($button);
+			$controls->add("\n");
+		}
+
+		for($i=$startPageIndex;$i<=$endPageIndex;++$i)
+		{
+			if($i===$pageIndex)
+			{
+				$label=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,false,"$i",'','');
+				$controls->add($label);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,"$i",self::CMD_PAGE,"$i");
+				$controls->add($button);
+			}
+			if($i<$endPageIndex)
+				$controls->add("\n");
+		}
+
+		if($pageCount>$endPageIndex)
+		{
+			$controls->add("\n");
+			$nextPageIndex=$endPageIndex+1;
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$style->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$nextPageIndex");
+			$controls->add($button);
+			if(($text=$style->getLastPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$controls->add("\n");
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($pager,$buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST);
+				$controls->add($button);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Automatically generates datagrid columns based on datasource schema
+	 * @param Traversable data source bound to the datagrid
+	 * @return TDataGridColumnCollection
+	 */
+	protected function createAutoColumns($dataSource)
+	{
+		if(!$dataSource)
+			return null;
+		$autoColumns=$this->getAutoColumns();
+		$autoColumns->clear();
+		foreach($dataSource as $row)
+		{
+			foreach($row as $key=>$value)
+			{
+				$column=new $this->AutoGenerateColumnName;
+				if(is_string($key))
+				{
+					$column->setHeaderText($key);
+					$column->setDataField($key);
+					$column->setSortExpression($key);
+					$autoColumns->add($column);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					$column->setHeaderText(TListItemType::Item);
+					$column->setDataField($key);
+					$column->setSortExpression(TListItemType::Item);
+					$autoColumns->add($column);
+				}
+			}
+			break;
+		}
+		return $autoColumns;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Applies styles to items, header, footer and separators.
+	 * Item styles are applied in a hierarchical way. Style in higher hierarchy
+	 * will inherit from styles in lower hierarchy.
+	 * Starting from the lowest hierarchy, the item styles include
+	 * item's own style, {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle}, {@link getAlternatingItemStyle AlternatingItemStyle},
+	 * {@link getSelectedItemStyle SelectedItemStyle}, and {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle}.
+	 * Therefore, if background color is set as red in {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle},
+	 * {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle} will also have red background color
+	 * unless it is set to a different value explicitly.
+	 */
+	protected function applyItemStyles()
+	{
+		$itemStyle=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null);
+
+		$alternatingItemStyle=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null);
+		if($itemStyle!==null)
+		{
+			if($alternatingItemStyle===null)
+				$alternatingItemStyle=$itemStyle;
+			else
+				$alternatingItemStyle->mergeWith($itemStyle);
+		}
+
+		$selectedItemStyle=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null);
+
+		$editItemStyle=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null);
+		if($selectedItemStyle!==null)
+		{
+			if($editItemStyle===null)
+				$editItemStyle=$selectedItemStyle;
+			else
+				$editItemStyle->mergeWith($selectedItemStyle);
+		}
+
+		$headerStyle=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null);
+		$footerStyle=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null);
+		$pagerStyle=$this->getViewState('PagerStyle',null);
+		$separatorStyle=$this->getViewState('SeparatorStyle',null);
+
+		foreach($this->getControls() as $index=>$item)
+		{
+			if(!($item instanceof TDataGridItem) && !($item instanceof TDataGridPager))
+				continue;
+			$itemType=$item->getItemType();
+			switch($itemType)
+			{
+				case TListItemType::Header:
+					if($headerStyle)
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($headerStyle);
+					if(!$this->getShowHeader())
+						$item->setVisible(false);
+					break;
+				case TListItemType::Footer:
+					if($footerStyle)
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($footerStyle);
+					if(!$this->getShowFooter())
+						$item->setVisible(false);
+					break;
+				case TListItemType::Separator:
+					if($separatorStyle)
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($separatorStyle);
+					break;
+				case TListItemType::Item:
+					if($itemStyle)
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($itemStyle);
+					break;
+				case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
+					if($alternatingItemStyle)
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($alternatingItemStyle);
+					break;
+				case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
+					if($selectedItemStyle)
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($selectedItemStyle);
+					if($index % 2==1)
+					{
+						if($itemStyle)
+							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($itemStyle);
+					}
+					else
+					{
+						if($alternatingItemStyle)
+							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($alternatingItemStyle);
+					}
+					break;
+				case TListItemType::EditItem:
+					if($editItemStyle)
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($editItemStyle);
+					if($index % 2==1)
+					{
+						if($itemStyle)
+							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($itemStyle);
+					}
+					else
+					{
+						if($alternatingItemStyle)
+							$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($alternatingItemStyle);
+					}
+					break;
+				case TListItemType::Pager:
+					if($pagerStyle)
+					{
+						$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($pagerStyle);
+						if($index===0)
+						{
+							if($pagerStyle->getPosition()===TDataGridPagerPosition::Bottom || !$pagerStyle->getVisible())
+								$item->setVisible(false);
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							if($pagerStyle->getPosition()===TDataGridPagerPosition::Top || !$pagerStyle->getVisible())
+								$item->setVisible(false);
+						}
+					}
+					break;
+				default:
+					break;
+			}
+			if($this->_columns && $itemType!==TListItemType::Pager)
+			{
+				$n=$this->_columns->getCount();
+				$cells=$item->getCells();
+				for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
+				{
+					$cell=$cells->itemAt($i);
+					$column=$this->_columns->itemAt($i);
+					if(!$column->getVisible())
+						$cell->setVisible(false);
+					else
+					{
+						if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
+							$style=$column->getHeaderStyle(false);
+						else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
+							$style=$column->getFooterStyle(false);
+						else
+							$style=$column->getItemStyle(false);
+						if($style!==null)
+							$cell->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the openning tag for the datagrid control which will render table caption if present.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
+	{
+		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
+		if(($caption=$this->getCaption())!=='')
+		{
+			if(($align=$this->getCaptionAlign())!==TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet)
+				$writer->addAttribute('align',strtolower($align));
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('caption');
+			$writer->write($caption);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the datagrid.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getHasControls())
+		{
+			$this->groupCells();
+			if($this->_useEmptyTemplate)
+			{
+				$control=new TWebControl;
+				$control->setID($this->getClientID());
+				$control->copyBaseAttributes($this);
+				if($this->getHasStyle())
+					$control->getStyle()->copyFrom($this->getStyle());
+				$control->renderBeginTag($writer);
+				$this->renderContents($writer);
+				$control->renderEndTag($writer);
+			}
+			else if($this->getViewState('ItemCount',0)>0)
+			{
+				$this->applyItemStyles();
+				if($this->_topPager)
+				{
+					$this->_topPager->renderControl($writer);
+					$writer->writeLine();
+				}
+				$this->renderTable($writer);
+				if($this->_bottomPager)
+				{
+					$writer->writeLine();
+					$this->_bottomPager->renderControl($writer);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the tabular data.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	protected function renderTable($writer)
+	{
+		$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
+		if($this->_header && $this->_header->getVisible())
+		{
+			$writer->writeLine();
+			if($style=$this->getViewState('TableHeadStyle',null))
+				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('thead');
+			$this->_header->render($writer);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		$writer->writeLine();
+		if($style=$this->getViewState('TableBodyStyle',null))
+			$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
+		foreach($this->getItems() as $item)
+			$item->renderControl($writer);
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+
+		if($this->_footer && $this->_footer->getVisible())
+		{
+			$writer->writeLine();
+			if($style=$this->getViewState('TableFootStyle',null))
+				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
+			$this->_footer->render($writer);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+
+		$writer->writeLine();
+		$this->renderEndTag($writer);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridItemEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TDataGridItemEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TDataGrid::onItemCreated OnItemCreated} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
+ * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the datagrid item related with the event.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridItemEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * The TDataGridItem control responsible for the event.
+	 * @var TDataGridItem
+	 */
+	private $_item=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TDataGridItem datagrid item related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function __construct(TDataGridItem $item)
+	{
+		$this->_item=$item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridItem datagrid item related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function getItem()
+	{
+		return $this->_item;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridPagerEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TDataGridPagerEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TDataGrid::onPagerCreated OnPagerCreated} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
+ * The {@link getPager Pager} property indicates the datagrid pager related with the event.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridPagerEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * The TDataGridPager control responsible for the event.
+	 * @var TDataGridPager
+	 */
+	protected $_pager=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TDataGridPager datagrid pager related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function __construct(TDataGridPager $pager)
+	{
+		$this->_pager=$pager;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridPager datagrid pager related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function getPager()
+	{
+		return $this->_pager;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridCommandEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TDataGridCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TDataGrid::onItemCommand ItemCommand} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
+ *
+ * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the datagrid item related with the event.
+ * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} refers to the control that originally
+ * raises the Command event.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridCommandEventParameter extends TCommandEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataGridItem the TDataGridItem control responsible for the event.
+	 */
+	private $_item=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl the control originally raises the <b>Command</b> event.
+	 */
+	private $_source=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TDataGridItem datagrid item responsible for the event
+	 * @param TControl original event sender
+	 * @param TCommandEventParameter original event parameter
+	 */
+	public function __construct($item,$source,TCommandEventParameter $param)
+	{
+		$this->_item=$item;
+		$this->_source=$source;
+		parent::__construct($param->getCommandName(),$param->getCommandParameter());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridItem the TDataGridItem control responsible for the event.
+	 */
+	public function getItem()
+	{
+		return $this->_item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>Command</b> event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_source;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TDataGrid::onSortCommand SortCommand} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
+ *
+ * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} property refers to the control
+ * that originally raises the OnCommand event, while {@link getSortExpression SortExpression}
+ * gives the sort expression carried with the sort command.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridSortCommandEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string sort expression
+	 */
+	private $_sortExpression='';
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl original event sender
+	 */
+	private $_source=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 * @param TDataGridCommandEventParameter command event parameter
+	 */
+	public function __construct($source,TDataGridCommandEventParameter $param)
+	{
+		$this->_source=$source;
+		$this->_sortExpression=$param->getCommandParameter();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_source;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string sort expression
+	 */
+	public function getSortExpression()
+	{
+		return $this->_sortExpression;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TDataGrid::onPageIndexChanged PageIndexChanged} event of {@link TDataGrid} controls.
+ *
+ * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} property refers to the control
+ * that originally raises the OnCommand event, while {@link getNewPageIndex NewPageIndex}
+ * returns the new page index carried with the page command.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridPageChangedEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var integer new page index
+	 */
+	private $_newIndex;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl original event sender
+	 */
+	private $_source=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 * @param integer new page index
+	 */
+	public function __construct($source,$newPageIndex)
+	{
+		$this->_source=$source;
+		$this->_newIndex=$newPageIndex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_source;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer new page index
+	 */
+	public function getNewPageIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_newIndex;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridItem class
+ *
+ * A TDataGridItem control represents an item in the {@link TDataGrid} control,
+ * such as heading section, footer section, or a data item.
+ * The index and data value of the item can be accessed via {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}>
+ * and {@link getDataItem DataItem} properties, respectively. The type of the item
+ * is given by {@link getItemType ItemType} property. Property {@link getDataSourceIndex DataSourceIndex}
+ * gives the index of the item from the bound data source.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridItem extends TTableRow implements INamingContainer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var integer index of the data item in the Items collection of datagrid
+	 */
+	private $_itemIndex='';
+	/**
+	 * @var integer index of the item from the bound data source
+	 */
+	private $_dataSourceIndex=0;
+	/**
+	 * type of the TDataGridItem
+	 * @var string
+	 */
+	private $_itemType='';
+	/**
+	 * value of the data item
+	 * @var mixed
+	 */
+	private $_data=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item in the item collection of datagrid
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 */
+	public function __construct($itemIndex,$dataSourceIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		$this->_itemIndex=$itemIndex;
+		$this->_dataSourceIndex=$dataSourceIndex;
+		$this->setItemType($itemType);
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
+			$this->setTableSection(TTableRowSection::Header);
+		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
+			$this->setTableSection(TTableRowSection::Footer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListItemType item type.
+	 */
+	public function getItemType()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemType;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 */
+	public function setItemType($value)
+	{
+		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item in the item collection of datagrid
+	 */
+	public function getItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemIndex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the index of the datagrid item from the bound data source
+	 */
+	public function getDataSourceIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataSourceIndex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->_data;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->_data=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
+	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since v3.1.0. Use {@link getData} instead.
+	 */
+	public function getDataItem()
+	{
+		return $this->getData();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.1.0. Use {@link setData} instead.
+	 */
+	public function setDataItem($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setData($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
+	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataGridCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridPager class.
+ *
+ * TDataGridPager represents a datagrid pager.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridPager extends TPanel implements INamingContainer
+{
+	private $_dataGrid;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TDataGrid datagrid object
+	 */
+	public function __construct($dataGrid)
+	{
+		$this->_dataGrid=$dataGrid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
+	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataGridCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGrid the datagrid owning this pager
+	 */
+	public function getDataGrid()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataGrid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string item type.
+	 */
+	public function getItemType()
+	{
+		return TListItemType::Pager;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridItemCollection class.
+ *
+ * TDataGridItemCollection represents a collection of data grid items.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridItemCollection extends TList
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only TDataGridItem.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TDataGridItem.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TDataGridItem)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datagriditemcollection_datagriditem_required');
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumnCollection class.
+ *
+ * TDataGridColumnCollection represents a collection of data grid columns.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridColumnCollection extends TList
+{
+	/**
+	 * the control that owns this collection.
+	 * @var TControl
+	 */
+	private $_o;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TDataGrid the control that owns this collection.
+	 */
+	public function __construct(TDataGrid $owner)
+	{
+		$this->_o=$owner;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGrid the control that owns this collection.
+	 */
+	protected function getOwner()
+	{
+		return $this->_o;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only TDataGridColumn.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TDataGridColumn.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TDataGridColumn)
+		{
+			$item->setOwner($this->_o);
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		}
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datagridcolumncollection_datagridcolumn_required');
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridPagerMode class.
+ * TDataGridPagerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible modes that a datagrid pager can take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NextPrev: pager buttons are displayed as next and previous pages
+ * - Numeric: pager buttons are displayed as numeric page numbers
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TDataGridPagerMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NextPrev='NextPrev';
+	const Numeric='Numeric';
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridPagerButtonType class.
+ * TDataGridPagerButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of datagrid pager buttons.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - LinkButton: link buttons
+ * - PushButton: form submit buttons
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TDataGridPagerButtonType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
+	const PushButton='PushButton';
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridPagerPosition class.
+ * TDataGridPagerPosition defines the enumerable type for the possible positions that a datagrid pager can be located at.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Bottom: pager appears only at the bottom of the data grid.
+ * - Top: pager appears only at the top of the data grid.
+ * - TopAndBottom: pager appears on both top and bottom of the data grid.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TDataGridPagerPosition extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Bottom='Bottom';
+	const Top='Top';
+	const TopAndBottom='TopAndBottom';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridColumn.php
index d37fbc40..4794fbf8 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridColumn.php
@@ -1,567 +1,567 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGrid');
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class
- *
- * TDataGridColumn serves as the base class for the different column types of
- * the {@link TDataGrid} control.
- * TDataGridColumn defines the properties and methods that are common among
- * all datagrid column types. In particular, it initializes header and footer
- * cells according to {@link setHeaderText HeaderText} and {@link getHeaderStyle HeaderStyle}
- * {@link setFooterText FooterText} and {@link getFooterStyle FooterStyle} properties.
- * If {@link setHeaderImageUrl HeaderImageUrl} is specified, the image
- * will be displayed instead in the header cell.
- * The {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle} is applied to cells that belong to
- * non-header and -footer datagrid items.
- *
- * When the datagrid enables sorting, if the {@link setSortExpression SortExpression}
- * is not empty, the header cell will display a button (linkbutton or imagebutton)
- * that will bubble the sort command event to the datagrid.
- *
- * Since v3.1.0, TDataGridColumn has introduced two new properties {@link setHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer}
- * and {@link setFooterRenderer FooterRenderer} which can be used to specify
- * the layout of header and footer column cells.
- * A renderer refers to a control class that is to be instantiated as a control.
- * For more details, see {@link TRepeater} and {@link TDataList}.
- *
- * Since v3.1.1, TDataGridColumn has introduced {@link setEnableCellGrouping EnableCellGrouping}.
- * If a column has this property set true, consecutive cells having the same content in this
- * column will be grouped into one cell.
- * Note, there are some limitations to cell grouping. We determine the cell content according to
- * the cell's {@link TTableCell::getText Text} property. If the text is empty and the cell has
- * some child controls, we will pick up the first control who implements {@link IDataRenderer}
- * and obtain its {@link IDataRenderer::getData Data} property.
- *
- * The following datagrid column types are provided by the framework currently,
- * - {@link TBoundColumn}, associated with a specific field in datasource and displays the corresponding data.
- * - {@link TEditCommandColumn}, displaying edit/update/cancel command buttons
- * - {@link TDropDownListColumn}, displaying a dropdown list when the item is in edit state
- * - {@link TButtonColumn}, displaying generic command buttons that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
- * - {@link THyperLinkColumn}, displaying a hyperlink that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
- * - {@link TCheckBoxColumn}, displaying a checkbox that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
- * - {@link TTemplateColumn}, displaying content based on templates.
- *
- * To create your own column class, simply override {@link initializeCell()} method,
- * which is the major logic for managing the data and presentation of cells in the column.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-abstract class TDataGridColumn extends TApplicationComponent
-{
-	private $_id='';
-	private $_owner=null;
-	private $_viewState=array();
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the ID of the column.
-	 */
-	public function getID()
-	{
-		return $this->_id;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the ID of the column.
-	 * By explicitly specifying the column ID, one can access the column
-	 * by $templateControl->ColumnID.
-	 * @param string the ID of the column.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the ID is of bad format
-	 */
-	public function setID($value)
-	{
-		if(!preg_match(TControl::ID_FORMAT,$value))
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datagridcolumn_id_invalid',get_class($this),$value);
-		$this->_id=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text to be displayed in the header of this column
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HeaderText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text to be displayed in the header of this column
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HeaderText',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the url of the image to be displayed in header
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HeaderImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the url of the image to be displayed in header
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HeaderImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the column header cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HeaderRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the column header cell renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the column header cell.
-	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
-	 * will be set as the {@link getFooterText FooterText}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HeaderRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to create a style if previously not existing
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for header
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderStyle($createStyle=true)
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null && $createStyle)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text to be displayed in the footer of this column
-	 */
-	public function getFooterText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FooterText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text to be displayed in the footer of this column
-	 */
-	public function setFooterText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FooterText',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the column footer cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getFooterRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FooterRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the column footer cell renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the column footer cell.
-	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
-	 * will be set as the {@link getFooterText FooterText}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setFooterRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FooterRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to create a style if previously not existing
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for footer
-	 */
-	public function getFooterStyle($createStyle=true)
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))===null && $createStyle)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('FooterStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to create a style if previously not existing
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for item
-	 */
-	public function getItemStyle($createStyle=true)
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null))===null && $createStyle)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('ItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the name of the field or expression for sorting
-	 */
-	public function getSortExpression()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('SortExpression','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the name of the field or expression for sorting
-	 */
-	public function setSortExpression($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('SortExpression',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether cells having the same content should be grouped together. Defaults to false.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getEnableCellGrouping()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableCellGrouping',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether cells having the same content should be grouped together.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setEnableCellGrouping($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableCellGrouping',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the column is visible. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getVisible($checkParents=true)
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Visible',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the column is visible
-	 */
-	public function setVisible($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Visible',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a viewstate value.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value to be returned
-	 * @param mixed the default value. If $key is not found in viewstate, $defaultValue will be returned
-	 * @return mixed the viewstate value corresponding to $key
-	 */
-	protected function getViewState($key,$defaultValue=null)
-	{
-		return isset($this->_viewState[$key])?$this->_viewState[$key]:$defaultValue;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a viewstate value.
-	 *
-	 * Make sure that the viewstate value must be serializable and unserializable.
-	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value
-	 * @param mixed the viewstate value to be set
-	 * @param mixed default value. If $value===$defaultValue, the item will be cleared from the viewstate.
-	 */
-	protected function setViewState($key,$value,$defaultValue=null)
-	{
-		if($value===$defaultValue)
-			unset($this->_viewState[$key]);
-		else
-			$this->_viewState[$key]=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads persistent state values.
-	 * @param mixed state values
-	 */
-	public function loadState($state)
-	{
-		$this->_viewState=$state;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves persistent state values.
-	 * @return mixed values to be saved
-	 */
-	public function saveState()
-	{
-		return $this->_viewState;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGrid datagrid that owns this column
-	 */
-	public function getOwner()
-	{
-		return $this->_owner;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TDataGrid datagrid object that owns this column
-	 */
-	public function setOwner(TDataGrid $value)
-	{
-		$this->_owner=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the column.
-	 * This method is invoked by {@link TDataGrid} when the column
-	 * is about to be used to initialize datagrid items.
-	 * Derived classes may override this method to do additional initialization.
-	 */
-	public function initialize()
-	{
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Fetches the value of the data at the specified field.
-	 * If the data is an array, the field is used as an array key.
-	 * If the data is an of {@link TMap}, {@link TList} or their derived class,
-	 * the field is used as a key value.
-	 * If the data is a component, the field is used as the name of a property.
-	 * @param mixed data containing the field of value
-	 * @param string the data field
-	 * @return mixed data value at the specified field
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the data or the field is invalid.
-	 */
-	protected function getDataFieldValue($data,$field)
-	{
-		return TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * The default implementation sets the content of header and footer cells.
-	 * If sorting is enabled by the grid and sort expression is specified in the column,
-	 * the header cell will show a link/image button. Otherwise, the header/footer cell
-	 * will only show static text/image.
-	 * This method can be overriden to provide customized intialization to column cells.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
-			$this->initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex);
-		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
-			$this->initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether this column allows sorting.
-	 * The column allows sorting only when {@link getSortExpression SortExpression}
-	 * is not empty and the datagrid allows sorting.
-	 * @return boolean whether this column allows sorting
-	 */
-	public function getAllowSorting()
-	{
-		return $this->getSortExpression()!=='' && (!$this->_owner || $this->_owner->getAllowSorting());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the header cell.
-	 *
-	 * This method attempts to use {@link getHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer} to
-	 * instantiate the header cell. If that is not available, it will populate
-	 * the cell with an image or a text string, depending on {@link getHeaderImageUrl HeaderImageUrl}
-	 * and {@link getHeaderText HeaderText} property values.
-	 *
-	 * If the column allows sorting, image or text will be created as
-	 * a button which issues <b>Sort</b> command upon user click.
-	 *
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 */
-	protected function initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex)
-	{
-		$text=$this->getHeaderText();
-
-		if(($classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer())!=='')
-		{
-			$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-			$cell->getControls()->add($control);
-			if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
-			{
-				if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-				{
-					$item=$cell->getParent();
-					$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
-					$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
-				}
-				$control->setData($text);
-			}
-		}
-		else if($this->getAllowSorting())
-		{
-			$sortExpression=$this->getSortExpression();
-			if(($url=$this->getHeaderImageUrl())!=='')
-			{
-				$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
-				$button->setImageUrl($url);
-				$button->setCommandName(TDataGrid::CMD_SORT);
-				$button->setCommandParameter($sortExpression);
-				if($text!=='')
-					$button->setAlternateText($text);
-				$button->setCausesValidation(false);
-				$cell->getControls()->add($button);
-			}
-			else if($text!=='')
-			{
-				$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
-				$button->setText($text);
-				$button->setCommandName(TDataGrid::CMD_SORT);
-				$button->setCommandParameter($sortExpression);
-				$button->setCausesValidation(false);
-				$cell->getControls()->add($button);
-			}
-			else
-				$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if(($url=$this->getHeaderImageUrl())!=='')
-			{
-				$image=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
-				$image->setImageUrl($url);
-				if($text!=='')
-					$image->setAlternateText($text);
-				$cell->getControls()->add($image);
-			}
-			else if($text!=='')
-				$cell->setText($text);
-			else
-				$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the footer cell.
-	 *
-	 * This method attempts to use {@link getFooterRenderer FooterRenderer} to
-	 * instantiate the footer cell. If that is not available, it will populate
-	 * the cell with a text string specified by {@link getFooterImageUrl FooterImageUrl}
-	 *
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 */
-	protected function initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex)
-	{
-		$text=$this->getFooterText();
-		if(($classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer())!=='')
-		{
-			$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-			$cell->getControls()->add($control);
-			if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
-			{
-				if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-				{
-					$item=$cell->getParent();
-					$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
-					$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
-				}
-				$control->setData($text);
-			}
-		}
-		else if($text!=='')
-			$cell->setText($text);
-		else
-			$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Formats the text value according to a format string.
-	 * If the format string is empty, the original value is converted into
-	 * a string and returned.
-	 * If the format string starts with '#', the string is treated as a PHP expression
-	 * within which the token '{0}' is translated with the data value to be formated.
-	 * Otherwise, the format string and the data value are passed
-	 * as the first and second parameters in {@link sprintf}.
-	 * @param string format string
-	 * @param mixed the data to be formatted
-	 * @return string the formatted result
-	 */
-	protected function formatDataValue($formatString,$value)
-	{
-		if($formatString==='')
-			return TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
-		else if($formatString[0]==='#')
-		{
-			$expression=strtr(substr($formatString,1),array('{0}'=>'$value'));
-			try
-			{
-				if(eval("\$result=$expression;")===false)
-					throw new Exception('');
-				return $result;
-			}
-			catch(Exception $e)
-			{
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datagridcolumn_expression_invalid',get_class($this),$expression,$e->getMessage());
-			}
-		}
-		else
-			return sprintf($formatString,$value);
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TButtonColumnType class.
- * TButtonColumnType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of buttons
- * that can be used in a {@link TButtonColumn}.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - LinkButton: link buttons
- * - PushButton: form buttons
- * - ImageButton: image buttons
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TButtonColumnType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
-	const PushButton='PushButton';
-	const ImageButton='ImageButton';
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGrid');
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class
+ *
+ * TDataGridColumn serves as the base class for the different column types of
+ * the {@link TDataGrid} control.
+ * TDataGridColumn defines the properties and methods that are common among
+ * all datagrid column types. In particular, it initializes header and footer
+ * cells according to {@link setHeaderText HeaderText} and {@link getHeaderStyle HeaderStyle}
+ * {@link setFooterText FooterText} and {@link getFooterStyle FooterStyle} properties.
+ * If {@link setHeaderImageUrl HeaderImageUrl} is specified, the image
+ * will be displayed instead in the header cell.
+ * The {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle} is applied to cells that belong to
+ * non-header and -footer datagrid items.
+ *
+ * When the datagrid enables sorting, if the {@link setSortExpression SortExpression}
+ * is not empty, the header cell will display a button (linkbutton or imagebutton)
+ * that will bubble the sort command event to the datagrid.
+ *
+ * Since v3.1.0, TDataGridColumn has introduced two new properties {@link setHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer}
+ * and {@link setFooterRenderer FooterRenderer} which can be used to specify
+ * the layout of header and footer column cells.
+ * A renderer refers to a control class that is to be instantiated as a control.
+ * For more details, see {@link TRepeater} and {@link TDataList}.
+ *
+ * Since v3.1.1, TDataGridColumn has introduced {@link setEnableCellGrouping EnableCellGrouping}.
+ * If a column has this property set true, consecutive cells having the same content in this
+ * column will be grouped into one cell.
+ * Note, there are some limitations to cell grouping. We determine the cell content according to
+ * the cell's {@link TTableCell::getText Text} property. If the text is empty and the cell has
+ * some child controls, we will pick up the first control who implements {@link IDataRenderer}
+ * and obtain its {@link IDataRenderer::getData Data} property.
+ *
+ * The following datagrid column types are provided by the framework currently,
+ * - {@link TBoundColumn}, associated with a specific field in datasource and displays the corresponding data.
+ * - {@link TEditCommandColumn}, displaying edit/update/cancel command buttons
+ * - {@link TDropDownListColumn}, displaying a dropdown list when the item is in edit state
+ * - {@link TButtonColumn}, displaying generic command buttons that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
+ * - {@link THyperLinkColumn}, displaying a hyperlink that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
+ * - {@link TCheckBoxColumn}, displaying a checkbox that may be bound to specific field in datasource.
+ * - {@link TTemplateColumn}, displaying content based on templates.
+ *
+ * To create your own column class, simply override {@link initializeCell()} method,
+ * which is the major logic for managing the data and presentation of cells in the column.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+abstract class TDataGridColumn extends TApplicationComponent
+{
+	private $_id='';
+	private $_owner=null;
+	private $_viewState=array();
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the ID of the column.
+	 */
+	public function getID()
+	{
+		return $this->_id;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the ID of the column.
+	 * By explicitly specifying the column ID, one can access the column
+	 * by $templateControl->ColumnID.
+	 * @param string the ID of the column.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the ID is of bad format
+	 */
+	public function setID($value)
+	{
+		if(!preg_match(TControl::ID_FORMAT,$value))
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datagridcolumn_id_invalid',get_class($this),$value);
+		$this->_id=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text to be displayed in the header of this column
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HeaderText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text to be displayed in the header of this column
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HeaderText',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the url of the image to be displayed in header
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HeaderImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the url of the image to be displayed in header
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HeaderImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the column header cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HeaderRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the column header cell renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the column header cell.
+	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
+	 * will be set as the {@link getFooterText FooterText}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HeaderRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to create a style if previously not existing
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for header
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderStyle($createStyle=true)
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null && $createStyle)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text to be displayed in the footer of this column
+	 */
+	public function getFooterText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FooterText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text to be displayed in the footer of this column
+	 */
+	public function setFooterText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FooterText',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the column footer cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getFooterRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FooterRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the column footer cell renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the column footer cell.
+	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
+	 * will be set as the {@link getFooterText FooterText}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setFooterRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FooterRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to create a style if previously not existing
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for footer
+	 */
+	public function getFooterStyle($createStyle=true)
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))===null && $createStyle)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('FooterStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to create a style if previously not existing
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for item
+	 */
+	public function getItemStyle($createStyle=true)
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null))===null && $createStyle)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('ItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the name of the field or expression for sorting
+	 */
+	public function getSortExpression()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('SortExpression','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the name of the field or expression for sorting
+	 */
+	public function setSortExpression($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('SortExpression',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether cells having the same content should be grouped together. Defaults to false.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getEnableCellGrouping()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableCellGrouping',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether cells having the same content should be grouped together.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setEnableCellGrouping($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableCellGrouping',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the column is visible. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getVisible($checkParents=true)
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Visible',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the column is visible
+	 */
+	public function setVisible($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Visible',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a viewstate value.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value to be returned
+	 * @param mixed the default value. If $key is not found in viewstate, $defaultValue will be returned
+	 * @return mixed the viewstate value corresponding to $key
+	 */
+	protected function getViewState($key,$defaultValue=null)
+	{
+		return isset($this->_viewState[$key])?$this->_viewState[$key]:$defaultValue;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a viewstate value.
+	 *
+	 * Make sure that the viewstate value must be serializable and unserializable.
+	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value
+	 * @param mixed the viewstate value to be set
+	 * @param mixed default value. If $value===$defaultValue, the item will be cleared from the viewstate.
+	 */
+	protected function setViewState($key,$value,$defaultValue=null)
+	{
+		if($value===$defaultValue)
+			unset($this->_viewState[$key]);
+		else
+			$this->_viewState[$key]=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads persistent state values.
+	 * @param mixed state values
+	 */
+	public function loadState($state)
+	{
+		$this->_viewState=$state;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves persistent state values.
+	 * @return mixed values to be saved
+	 */
+	public function saveState()
+	{
+		return $this->_viewState;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGrid datagrid that owns this column
+	 */
+	public function getOwner()
+	{
+		return $this->_owner;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TDataGrid datagrid object that owns this column
+	 */
+	public function setOwner(TDataGrid $value)
+	{
+		$this->_owner=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the column.
+	 * This method is invoked by {@link TDataGrid} when the column
+	 * is about to be used to initialize datagrid items.
+	 * Derived classes may override this method to do additional initialization.
+	 */
+	public function initialize()
+	{
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Fetches the value of the data at the specified field.
+	 * If the data is an array, the field is used as an array key.
+	 * If the data is an of {@link TMap}, {@link TList} or their derived class,
+	 * the field is used as a key value.
+	 * If the data is a component, the field is used as the name of a property.
+	 * @param mixed data containing the field of value
+	 * @param string the data field
+	 * @return mixed data value at the specified field
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the data or the field is invalid.
+	 */
+	protected function getDataFieldValue($data,$field)
+	{
+		return TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * The default implementation sets the content of header and footer cells.
+	 * If sorting is enabled by the grid and sort expression is specified in the column,
+	 * the header cell will show a link/image button. Otherwise, the header/footer cell
+	 * will only show static text/image.
+	 * This method can be overriden to provide customized intialization to column cells.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
+			$this->initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex);
+		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
+			$this->initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether this column allows sorting.
+	 * The column allows sorting only when {@link getSortExpression SortExpression}
+	 * is not empty and the datagrid allows sorting.
+	 * @return boolean whether this column allows sorting
+	 */
+	public function getAllowSorting()
+	{
+		return $this->getSortExpression()!=='' && (!$this->_owner || $this->_owner->getAllowSorting());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the header cell.
+	 *
+	 * This method attempts to use {@link getHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer} to
+	 * instantiate the header cell. If that is not available, it will populate
+	 * the cell with an image or a text string, depending on {@link getHeaderImageUrl HeaderImageUrl}
+	 * and {@link getHeaderText HeaderText} property values.
+	 *
+	 * If the column allows sorting, image or text will be created as
+	 * a button which issues <b>Sort</b> command upon user click.
+	 *
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 */
+	protected function initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex)
+	{
+		$text=$this->getHeaderText();
+
+		if(($classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer())!=='')
+		{
+			$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+			$cell->getControls()->add($control);
+			if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
+			{
+				if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+				{
+					$item=$cell->getParent();
+					$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
+					$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
+				}
+				$control->setData($text);
+			}
+		}
+		else if($this->getAllowSorting())
+		{
+			$sortExpression=$this->getSortExpression();
+			if(($url=$this->getHeaderImageUrl())!=='')
+			{
+				$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
+				$button->setImageUrl($url);
+				$button->setCommandName(TDataGrid::CMD_SORT);
+				$button->setCommandParameter($sortExpression);
+				if($text!=='')
+					$button->setAlternateText($text);
+				$button->setCausesValidation(false);
+				$cell->getControls()->add($button);
+			}
+			else if($text!=='')
+			{
+				$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
+				$button->setText($text);
+				$button->setCommandName(TDataGrid::CMD_SORT);
+				$button->setCommandParameter($sortExpression);
+				$button->setCausesValidation(false);
+				$cell->getControls()->add($button);
+			}
+			else
+				$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if(($url=$this->getHeaderImageUrl())!=='')
+			{
+				$image=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
+				$image->setImageUrl($url);
+				if($text!=='')
+					$image->setAlternateText($text);
+				$cell->getControls()->add($image);
+			}
+			else if($text!=='')
+				$cell->setText($text);
+			else
+				$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the footer cell.
+	 *
+	 * This method attempts to use {@link getFooterRenderer FooterRenderer} to
+	 * instantiate the footer cell. If that is not available, it will populate
+	 * the cell with a text string specified by {@link getFooterImageUrl FooterImageUrl}
+	 *
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 */
+	protected function initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex)
+	{
+		$text=$this->getFooterText();
+		if(($classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer())!=='')
+		{
+			$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+			$cell->getControls()->add($control);
+			if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
+			{
+				if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+				{
+					$item=$cell->getParent();
+					$control->setItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
+					$control->setItemType($item->getItemType());
+				}
+				$control->setData($text);
+			}
+		}
+		else if($text!=='')
+			$cell->setText($text);
+		else
+			$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Formats the text value according to a format string.
+	 * If the format string is empty, the original value is converted into
+	 * a string and returned.
+	 * If the format string starts with '#', the string is treated as a PHP expression
+	 * within which the token '{0}' is translated with the data value to be formated.
+	 * Otherwise, the format string and the data value are passed
+	 * as the first and second parameters in {@link sprintf}.
+	 * @param string format string
+	 * @param mixed the data to be formatted
+	 * @return string the formatted result
+	 */
+	protected function formatDataValue($formatString,$value)
+	{
+		if($formatString==='')
+			return TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
+		else if($formatString[0]==='#')
+		{
+			$expression=strtr(substr($formatString,1),array('{0}'=>'$value'));
+			try
+			{
+				if(eval("\$result=$expression;")===false)
+					throw new Exception('');
+				return $result;
+			}
+			catch(Exception $e)
+			{
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datagridcolumn_expression_invalid',get_class($this),$expression,$e->getMessage());
+			}
+		}
+		else
+			return sprintf($formatString,$value);
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TButtonColumnType class.
+ * TButtonColumnType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of buttons
+ * that can be used in a {@link TButtonColumn}.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - LinkButton: link buttons
+ * - PushButton: form buttons
+ * - ImageButton: image buttons
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TButtonColumnType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
+	const PushButton='PushButton';
+	const ImageButton='ImageButton';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridItemRenderer.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridItemRenderer.php
index 0e30a062..dbbbec11 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridItemRenderer.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridItemRenderer.php
@@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataGridItemRenderer class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataGridItemRenderer class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGrid');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TItemDataRenderer');
-
-/**
- * TDataGridItemRenderer class
- *
- * TDataGridItemRenderer can be used as a convenient base class to
- * define an item renderer class specific for {@link TDataGrid}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.0
- */
-class TDataGridItemRenderer extends TItemDataRenderer
-{
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGrid');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TItemDataRenderer');
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridItemRenderer class
+ *
+ * TDataGridItemRenderer can be used as a convenient base class to
+ * define an item renderer class specific for {@link TDataGrid}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.0
+ */
+class TDataGridItemRenderer extends TItemDataRenderer
+{
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridPagerStyle.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridPagerStyle.php
index 12346c06..2464291a 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridPagerStyle.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataGridPagerStyle.php
@@ -1,255 +1,255 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataGridPagerStyle class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGrid');
-
-/**
- * TDataGridPagerStyle class.
- *
- * TDataGridPagerStyle specifies the styles available for a datagrid pager.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataGridPagerStyle extends TPanelStyle
-{
-	private $_mode=null;
-	private $_nextText=null;
-	private $_prevText=null;
-	private $_firstText=null;
-	private $_lastText=null;
-	private $_buttonCount=null;
-	private $_position=null;
-	private $_visible=null;
-	private $_buttonType=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridPagerMode pager mode. Defaults to TDataGridPagerMode::NextPrev.
-	 */
-	public function getMode()
-	{
-		return $this->_mode===null?TDataGridPagerMode::NextPrev : $this->_mode;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TDataGridPagerMode pager mode.
-	 */
-	public function setMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->_mode=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TDataGridPagerMode');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridPagerButtonType the type of command button. Defaults to TDataGridPagerButtonType::LinkButton.
-	 */
-	public function getButtonType()
-	{
-		return $this->_buttonType===null?TDataGridPagerButtonType::LinkButton:$this->_buttonType;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TDataGridPagerButtonType the type of command button
-	 */
-	public function setButtonType($value)
-	{
-		$this->_buttonType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TDataGridPagerButtonType');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the next page button. Defaults to '>'.
-	 */
-	public function getNextPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->_nextText===null?'>':$this->_nextText;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the next page button.
-	 */
-	public function setNextPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->_nextText=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the previous page button. Defaults to '<'.
-	 */
-	public function getPrevPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->_prevText===null?'<':$this->_prevText;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the previous page button.
-	 */
-	public function setPrevPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->_prevText=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the first page button. Defaults to '<<'.
-	 */
-	public function getFirstPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->_firstText===null?'<<':$this->_firstText;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the first page button.
-	 */
-	public function setFirstPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->_firstText=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the last page button. Defaults to '>>'.
-	 */
-	public function getLastPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->_lastText===null?'>>':$this->_lastText;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the last page button.
-	 */
-	public function setLastPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->_lastText=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed. Defaults to 10.
-	 */
-	public function getPageButtonCount()
-	{
-		return $this->_buttonCount===null?10:$this->_buttonCount;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 1.
-	 */
-	public function setPageButtonCount($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<1)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datagridpagerstyle_pagebuttoncount_invalid');
-		$this->_buttonCount=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataGridPagerPosition where the pager is to be displayed. Defaults to TDataGridPagerPosition::Bottom.
-	 */
-	public function getPosition()
-	{
-		return $this->_position===null?TDataGridPagerPosition::Bottom:$this->_position;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TDataGridPagerPosition where the pager is to be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setPosition($value)
-	{
-		$this->_position=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TDataGridPagerPosition');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the pager is visible. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getVisible()
-	{
-		return $this->_visible===null?true:$this->_visible;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the pager is visible.
-	 */
-	public function setVisible($value)
-	{
-		$this->_visible=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Resets the style to the original empty state.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		parent::reset();
-		$this->_visible=null;
-		$this->_position=null;
-		$this->_buttonCount=null;
-		$this->_prevText=null;
-		$this->_nextText=null;
-		$this->_mode=null;
-		$this->_buttonType=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
-	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
-	 * in this style will be overwritten.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function copyFrom($style)
-	{
-		parent::copyFrom($style);
-		if($style instanceof TDataGridPagerStyle)
-		{
-			if($style->_visible!==null)
-				$this->_visible=$style->_visible;
-			if($style->_position!==null)
-				$this->_position=$style->_position;
-			if($style->_buttonCount!==null)
-				$this->_buttonCount=$style->_buttonCount;
-			if($style->_prevText!==null)
-				$this->_prevText=$style->_prevText;
-			if($style->_nextText!==null)
-				$this->_nextText=$style->_nextText;
-			if($style->_mode!==null)
-				$this->_mode=$style->_mode;
-			if($style->_buttonType!==null)
-				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges the style with a new one.
-	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
-	 * the new one.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function mergeWith($style)
-	{
-		parent::mergeWith($style);
-		if($style instanceof TDataGridPagerStyle)
-		{
-			if($this->_visible===null)
-				$this->_visible=$style->_visible;
-			if($this->_position===null)
-				$this->_position=$style->_position;
-			if($this->_buttonCount===null)
-				$this->_buttonCount=$style->_buttonCount;
-			if($this->_prevText===null)
-				$this->_prevText=$style->_prevText;
-			if($this->_nextText===null)
-				$this->_nextText=$style->_nextText;
-			if($this->_mode===null)
-				$this->_mode=$style->_mode;
-			if($this->_buttonType===null)
-				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataGridPagerStyle class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGrid');
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridPagerStyle class.
+ *
+ * TDataGridPagerStyle specifies the styles available for a datagrid pager.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataGridPagerStyle extends TPanelStyle
+{
+	private $_mode=null;
+	private $_nextText=null;
+	private $_prevText=null;
+	private $_firstText=null;
+	private $_lastText=null;
+	private $_buttonCount=null;
+	private $_position=null;
+	private $_visible=null;
+	private $_buttonType=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridPagerMode pager mode. Defaults to TDataGridPagerMode::NextPrev.
+	 */
+	public function getMode()
+	{
+		return $this->_mode===null?TDataGridPagerMode::NextPrev : $this->_mode;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TDataGridPagerMode pager mode.
+	 */
+	public function setMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->_mode=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TDataGridPagerMode');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridPagerButtonType the type of command button. Defaults to TDataGridPagerButtonType::LinkButton.
+	 */
+	public function getButtonType()
+	{
+		return $this->_buttonType===null?TDataGridPagerButtonType::LinkButton:$this->_buttonType;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TDataGridPagerButtonType the type of command button
+	 */
+	public function setButtonType($value)
+	{
+		$this->_buttonType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TDataGridPagerButtonType');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the next page button. Defaults to '>'.
+	 */
+	public function getNextPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->_nextText===null?'>':$this->_nextText;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the next page button.
+	 */
+	public function setNextPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->_nextText=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the previous page button. Defaults to '<'.
+	 */
+	public function getPrevPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->_prevText===null?'<':$this->_prevText;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the previous page button.
+	 */
+	public function setPrevPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->_prevText=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the first page button. Defaults to '<<'.
+	 */
+	public function getFirstPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->_firstText===null?'<<':$this->_firstText;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the first page button.
+	 */
+	public function setFirstPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->_firstText=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the last page button. Defaults to '>>'.
+	 */
+	public function getLastPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->_lastText===null?'>>':$this->_lastText;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the last page button.
+	 */
+	public function setLastPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->_lastText=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed. Defaults to 10.
+	 */
+	public function getPageButtonCount()
+	{
+		return $this->_buttonCount===null?10:$this->_buttonCount;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 1.
+	 */
+	public function setPageButtonCount($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<1)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datagridpagerstyle_pagebuttoncount_invalid');
+		$this->_buttonCount=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataGridPagerPosition where the pager is to be displayed. Defaults to TDataGridPagerPosition::Bottom.
+	 */
+	public function getPosition()
+	{
+		return $this->_position===null?TDataGridPagerPosition::Bottom:$this->_position;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TDataGridPagerPosition where the pager is to be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setPosition($value)
+	{
+		$this->_position=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TDataGridPagerPosition');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the pager is visible. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getVisible()
+	{
+		return $this->_visible===null?true:$this->_visible;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the pager is visible.
+	 */
+	public function setVisible($value)
+	{
+		$this->_visible=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Resets the style to the original empty state.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		parent::reset();
+		$this->_visible=null;
+		$this->_position=null;
+		$this->_buttonCount=null;
+		$this->_prevText=null;
+		$this->_nextText=null;
+		$this->_mode=null;
+		$this->_buttonType=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
+	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
+	 * in this style will be overwritten.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function copyFrom($style)
+	{
+		parent::copyFrom($style);
+		if($style instanceof TDataGridPagerStyle)
+		{
+			if($style->_visible!==null)
+				$this->_visible=$style->_visible;
+			if($style->_position!==null)
+				$this->_position=$style->_position;
+			if($style->_buttonCount!==null)
+				$this->_buttonCount=$style->_buttonCount;
+			if($style->_prevText!==null)
+				$this->_prevText=$style->_prevText;
+			if($style->_nextText!==null)
+				$this->_nextText=$style->_nextText;
+			if($style->_mode!==null)
+				$this->_mode=$style->_mode;
+			if($style->_buttonType!==null)
+				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges the style with a new one.
+	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
+	 * the new one.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function mergeWith($style)
+	{
+		parent::mergeWith($style);
+		if($style instanceof TDataGridPagerStyle)
+		{
+			if($this->_visible===null)
+				$this->_visible=$style->_visible;
+			if($this->_position===null)
+				$this->_position=$style->_position;
+			if($this->_buttonCount===null)
+				$this->_buttonCount=$style->_buttonCount;
+			if($this->_prevText===null)
+				$this->_prevText=$style->_prevText;
+			if($this->_nextText===null)
+				$this->_nextText=$style->_nextText;
+			if($this->_mode===null)
+				$this->_mode=$style->_mode;
+			if($this->_buttonType===null)
+				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataList.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataList.php
index 43980c0c..49e9c749 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataList.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataList.php
@@ -1,1766 +1,1766 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataList class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataList class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TBaseDataList class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseDataList');
-/**
- * Includes TRepeatInfo class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRepeatInfo');
-
-/**
- * TDataList class
- *
- * TDataList represents a data bound and updatable list control.
- *
- * Like {@link TRepeater}, TDataList displays its content repeatedly based on
- * the data fetched from {@link setDataSource DataSource}.
- * The repeated contents in TDataList are called items, which are controls and
- * can be accessed through {@link getItems Items}. When {@link dataBind()} is
- * invoked, TDataList creates an item for each row of data and binds the data
- * row to the item. Optionally, a TDataList can have a header, a footer and/or
- * separators between items.
- *
- * TDataList differs from {@link TRepeater} in that it supports tiling the items
- * in different manners and it maintains status of items to handle data update.
- *
- * The layout of the repeated contents are specified by inline templates.
- * TDataList items, header, footer, etc. are being instantiated with the corresponding
- * templates when data is being bound to the repeater.
- *
- * Since v3.1.0, the layout can also be by renderers. A renderer is a control class
- * that can be instantiated as datalist items, header, etc. A renderer can thus be viewed
- * as an external template (in fact, it can also be non-templated controls).
- *
- * A renderer can be any control class.
- * - If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b>
- * property will be set as the data row during databinding. Many PRADO controls
- * implement this interface, such as {@link TLabel}, {@link TTextBox}, etc.
- * - If the class implements {@link IItemDataRenderer}, the <b>ItemIndex</b> property will be set
- * as the zero-based index of the item in the datalist item collection, and
- * the <b>ItemType</b> property as the item's type (such as TListItemType::Item).
- * {@link TDataListItemRenderer} may be used as the convenient base class which
- * already implements {@link IDataItemRenderer}.
- *
- * The following properties are used to specify different types of template and renderer
- * for a datalist:
- * - {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate}, {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}:
- * for each repeated row of data
- * - {@link setAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}, {@link setAlternatingItemRenderer AlternatingItemRenderer}:
- * for each alternating row of data. If not set, {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate} or {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
- * will be used instead.
- * - {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}, {@link setHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer}:
- * for the datalist header.
- * - {@link setFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}, {@link setFooterRenderer FooterRenderer}:
- * for the datalist footer.
- * - {@link setSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}, {@link setSeparatorRenderer SeparatorRenderer}:
- * for content to be displayed between items.
- * - {@link setEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}, {@link setEmptyRenderer EmptyRenderer}:
- * used when data bound to the datalist is empty.
- * - {@link setEditItemTemplate EditItemTemplate}, {@link setEditItemRenderer EditItemRenderer}:
- * for the row being editted.
- * - {@link setSelectedItemTemplate SelectedItemTemplate}, {@link setSelectedItemRenderer SelectedItemRenderer}:
- * for the row being selected.
- *
- * If a content type is defined with both a template and a renderer, the latter takes precedence.
- *
- * When {@link dataBind()} is being called, TDataList undergoes the following lifecycles for each row of data:
- * - create item based on templates or renderers
- * - set the row of data to the item
- * - raise {@link onItemCreated OnItemCreated}:
- * - add the item as a child control
- * - call dataBind() of the item
- * - raise {@link onItemDataBound OnItemDataBound}:
- *
- * TDataList raises an {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} whenever a button control
- * within some datalist item raises a <b>OnCommand</b> event. Therefore,
- * you can handle all sorts of <b>OnCommand</b> event in a central place by
- * writing an event handler for {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand}.
- *
- * An additional event is raised if the <b>OnCommand</b> event has one of the following
- * command names:
- * - edit: user wants to edit an item. <b>OnEditCommand</b> event will be raised.
- * - update: user wants to save the change to an item. <b>OnUpdateCommand</b> event will be raised.
- * - select: user selects an item. <b>OnSelectedIndexChanged</b> event will be raised.
- * - delete: user deletes an item. <b>OnDeleteCommand</b> event will be raised.
- * - cancel: user cancels previously editting action. <b>OnCancelCommand</b> event will be raised.
- *
- * TDataList provides a few properties to support tiling the items.
- * The number of columns used to display the data items is specified via
- * {@link setRepeatColumns RepeatColumns} property, while the {@link setRepeatDirection RepeatDirection}
- * governs the order of the items being rendered.
- * The layout of the data items in the list is specified via {@link setRepeatLayout RepeatLayout},
- * which can take one of the following values:
- * - Table (default): items are organized using HTML table and cells.
- * When using this layout, one can set {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and
- * {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing} to adjust the cellpadding and cellpadding
- * of the table, and {@link setCaption Caption} and {@link setCaptionAlign CaptionAlign}
- * to add a table caption with the specified alignment.
- * - Flow: items are organized using HTML spans and breaks.
- * - Raw: TDataList does not generate any HTML tags to do the tiling.
- *
- * Items in TDataList can be in one of the three status: normal browsing,
- * being editted and being selected. To change the status of a particular
- * item, set {@link setSelectedItemIndex SelectedItemIndex} or
- * {@link setEditItemIndex EditItemIndex}. The former will change
- * the indicated item to selected mode, which will cause the item to
- * use {@link setSelectedItemTemplate SelectedItemTemplate} or
- * {@link setSelectedItemRenderer SelectedItemRenderer} for presentation.
- * The latter will change the indicated item to edit mode and to use corresponding
- * template or renderer.
- * Note, if an item is in edit mode, then selecting this item will have no effect.
- *
- * Different styles may be applied to items in different status. The style
- * application is performed in a hierarchical way: Style in higher hierarchy
- * will inherit from styles in lower hierarchy.
- * Starting from the lowest hierarchy, the item styles include
- * - item's own style
- * - {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle}
- * - {@link getAlternatingItemStyle AlternatingItemStyle}
- * - {@link getSelectedItemStyle SelectedItemStyle}
- * - {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle}.
- * Therefore, if background color is set as red in {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle},
- * {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle} will also have red background color
- * unless it is set to a different value explicitly.
- *
- * When a page containing a datalist is post back, the datalist will restore automatically
- * all its contents, including items, header, footer and separators.
- * However, the data row associated with each item will not be recovered and become null.
- * To access the data, use one of the following ways:
- * - Use {@link getDataKeys DataKeys} to obtain the data key associated with
- * the specified datalist item and use the key to fetch the corresponding data
- * from some persistent storage such as DB.
- * - Save the whole dataset in viewstate, which will restore the dataset automatically upon postback.
- * Be aware though, if the size of your dataset is big, your page size will become big. Some
- * complex data may also have serializing problem if saved in viewstate.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataList extends TBaseDataList implements INamingContainer, IRepeatInfoUser
-{
-	/**
-	 * Command name that TDataList understands. They are case-insensitive.
-	 */
-	const CMD_SELECT='Select';
-	const CMD_EDIT='Edit';
-	const CMD_UPDATE='Update';
-	const CMD_DELETE='Delete';
-	const CMD_CANCEL='Cancel';
-
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataListItemCollection item list
-	 */
-	private $_items=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var Itemplate various item templates
-	 */
-	private $_itemTemplate=null;
-	private $_emptyTemplate=null;
-	private $_alternatingItemTemplate=null;
-	private $_selectedItemTemplate=null;
-	private $_editItemTemplate=null;
-	private $_headerTemplate=null;
-	private $_footerTemplate=null;
-	private $_separatorTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl header item
-	 */
-	private $_header=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl footer item
-	 */
-	private $_footer=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDataListItemCollection item list
-	 */
-	public function getItems()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_items)
-			$this->_items=new TDataListItemCollection;
-		return $this->_items;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer number of items
-	 */
-	public function getItemCount()
-	{
-		return $this->_items?$this->_items->getCount():0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for datalist items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the item renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist items.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getItemTemplate ItemTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setItemTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for alternative datalist items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getAlternatingItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the alternative item renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as alternative datalist items.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setAlternatingItemTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setAlternatingItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the datalist item being editted. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EditItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the renderer class for the datalist item being editted.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as the datalist item.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getEditItemTemplate EditItemTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setEditItemTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setEditItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EditItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the datalist item being selected. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('SelectedItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the renderer class for the datalist item being selected.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as the datalist item.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getSelectedItemTemplate SelectedItemTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setSelectedItemTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('SelectedItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for datalist item separators. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getSeparatorRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('SeparatorRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the datalist item separator renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist item separators.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setSeparatorTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setSeparatorRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('SeparatorRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for datalist header item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HeaderRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the datalist header renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist header item.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setHeaderTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HeaderRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for datalist footer item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getFooterRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FooterRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the datalist footer renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist footer item.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setFooterTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setFooterRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FooterRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for empty datalist item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getEmptyRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EmptyRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the datalist empty renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * The empty renderer is created as the child of the datalist
-	 * if data bound to the datalist is empty.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setEmptyTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setEmptyRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EmptyRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template for item
-	 */
-	public function getItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template for item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_itemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','ItemTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for item
-	 */
-	public function getItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('ItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template for each alternating item
-	 */
-	public function getAlternatingItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_alternatingItemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template for each alternating item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setAlternatingItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_alternatingItemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','AlternatingItemType');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for each alternating item
-	 */
-	public function getAlternatingItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the selected item template
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_selectedItemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the selected item template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_selectedItemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','SelectedItemTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for selected item
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the edit item template
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_editItemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the edit item template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setEditItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_editItemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','EditItemTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for edit item
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('EditItemStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the header template
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_headerTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the header template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','HeaderTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for header
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the header item
-	 */
-	public function getHeader()
-	{
-		return $this->_header;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the footer template
-	 */
-	public function getFooterTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_footerTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the footer template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setFooterTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_footerTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','FooterTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for footer
-	 */
-	public function getFooterStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('FooterStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the footer item
-	 */
-	public function getFooter()
-	{
-		return $this->_footer;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datalist
-	 */
-	public function getEmptyTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_emptyTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datalist
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setEmptyTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_emptyTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','EmptyTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the separator template
-	 */
-	public function getSeparatorTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_separatorTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the separator template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setSeparatorTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_separatorTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','SeparatorTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for separator
-	 */
-	public function getSeparatorStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SeparatorStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('SeparatorStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the selected item in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * A value -1 means no item selected.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('SelectedItemIndex',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Selects an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * Previously selected item will be un-selected.
-	 * If the item to be selected is already in edit mode, it will remain in edit mode.
-	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing selection will be cleared up.
-	 * @param integer the selected item index
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedItemIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=-1;
-		if(($current=$this->getSelectedItemIndex())!==$value)
-		{
-			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemIndex',$value,-1);
-			$items=$this->getItems();
-			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
-			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
-			{
-				$item=$items->itemAt($current);
-				if(($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer) && $item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
-					$item->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item);
-			}
-			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
-			{
-				$item=$items->itemAt($value);
-				if(($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer) && $item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
-					$item->setItemType(TListItemType::SelectedItem);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the selected item, null if no item is selected.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItem()
-	{
-		$index=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
-			return $items->itemAt($index);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed the key value of the currently selected item
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if {@link getDataKeyField DataKeyField} is empty.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedDataKey()
-	{
-		if($this->getDataKeyField()==='')
-			throw new TInvalidOperationException('datalist_datakeyfield_required');
-		$index=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-		$dataKeys=$this->getDataKeys();
-		if($index>=0 && $index<$dataKeys->getCount())
-			return $dataKeys->itemAt($index);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the edit item in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * A value -1 means no item is in edit mode.
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EditItemIndex',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Edits an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
-	 * Previously editting item will change to normal item state.
-	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing edit item will be cleared up.
-	 * @param integer the edit item index
-	 */
-	public function setEditItemIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=-1;
-		if(($current=$this->getEditItemIndex())!==$value)
-		{
-			$this->setViewState('EditItemIndex',$value,-1);
-			$items=$this->getItems();
-			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
-			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
-				$items->itemAt($current)->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item);
-			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
-				$items->itemAt($value)->setItemType(TListItemType::EditItem);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the edit item
-	 */
-	public function getEditItem()
-	{
-		$index=$this->getEditItemIndex();
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
-			return $items->itemAt($index);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the header should be shown. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getShowHeader()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowHeader',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to show header
-	 */
-	public function setShowHeader($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowHeader',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the footer should be shown. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getShowFooter()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowFooter',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to show footer
-	 */
-	public function setShowFooter($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowFooter',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRepeatInfo repeat information (primarily used by control developers)
-	 */
-	protected function getRepeatInfo()
-	{
-		if(($repeatInfo=$this->getViewState('RepeatInfo',null))===null)
-		{
-			$repeatInfo=new TRepeatInfo;
-			$this->setViewState('RepeatInfo',$repeatInfo,null);
-		}
-		return $repeatInfo;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string caption of the table layout
-	 */
-	public function getCaption()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getCaption();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string caption of the table layout
-	 */
-	public function setCaption($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setCaption($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getCaptionAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getCaptionAlign();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout.
-	 */
-	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setCaptionAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with. Defaults to 0 meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatColumns()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatColumns();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with.
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatColumns($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatColumns($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the list, defaults to TRepeatDirection::Vertical
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatDirection()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatDirection();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the list
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatDirection($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatDirection($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRepeatLayout how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks. Defaults to TRepeatLayout::Table.
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatLayout()
-	{
-		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatLayout();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TRepeatLayout how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
-	{
-		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatLayout($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation to handle
-	 * {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event which is bubbled from
-	 * datalist items and their child controls.
-	 * If the event parameter is {@link TDataListCommandEventParameter} and
-	 * the command name is a recognized one, which includes 'select', 'edit',
-	 * 'delete', 'update', and 'cancel' (case-insensitive), then a
-	 * corresponding command event is also raised (such as {@link onEditCommand OnEditCommand}).
-	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TDataListCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->onItemCommand($param);
-			$command=$param->getCommandName();
-			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_SELECT)===0)
-			{
-				if(($item=$param->getItem()) instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-					$this->setSelectedItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
-				$this->onSelectedIndexChanged($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_EDIT)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onEditCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_DELETE)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onDeleteCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_UPDATE)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onUpdateCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_CANCEL)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onCancelCommand($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemCreated</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked after a data list item is created and instantiated with
-	 * template, but before added to the page hierarchy.
-	 * The datalist item control responsible for the event
-	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
-	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
-	 * @param TDataListItemEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemCreated($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCreated',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemDataBound</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked right after an item is data bound.
-	 * The datalist item control responsible for the event
-	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
-	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
-	 * @param TDataListItemEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemDataBound($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemDataBound',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
-	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnEditCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
-	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'edit' (case-insensitive).
-	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onEditCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnEditCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnDeleteCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
-	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'delete' (case-insensitive).
-	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onDeleteCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnDeleteCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnUpdateCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
-	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'update' (case-insensitive).
-	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onUpdateCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnUpdateCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnCancelCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
-	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'cancel' (case-insensitive).
-	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onCancelCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCancelCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains header item.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether the datalist has header
-	 */
-	public function getHasHeader()
-	{
-		return ($this->getShowHeader() && ($this->_headerTemplate!==null || $this->getHeaderRenderer()!==''));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains footer item.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether the datalist has footer
-	 */
-	public function getHasFooter()
-	{
-		return ($this->getShowFooter() && ($this->_footerTemplate!==null || $this->getFooterRenderer()!==''));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains separator items.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @return boolean always false.
-	 */
-	public function getHasSeparators()
-	{
-		return $this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a style used for rendering items.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
-	 * @param integer index of the item being rendered
-	 * @return TStyle item style
-	 */
-	public function generateItemStyle($itemType,$index)
-	{
-		if(($item=$this->getItem($itemType,$index))!==null && ($item instanceof IStyleable) && $item->getHasStyle())
-		{
-			$style=$item->getStyle();
-			$item->clearStyle();
-			return $style;
-		}
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders an item in the list.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose
-	 * @param TRepeatInfo repeat information
-	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item in the item list
-	 */
-	public function renderItem($writer,$repeatInfo,$itemType,$index)
-	{
-		$item=$this->getItem($itemType,$index);
-		if($repeatInfo->getRepeatLayout()===TRepeatLayout::Raw && get_class($item)==='TDataListItem')
-			$item->setTagName('div');
-		$item->renderControl($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @param integer item index
-	 * @return TControl data list item with the specified item type and index
-	 */
-	private function getItem($itemType,$index)
-	{
-		switch($itemType)
-		{
-			case TListItemType::Item:
-			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
-			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
-			case TListItemType::EditItem:
-				return $this->getItems()->itemAt($index);
-			case TListItemType::Header:
-				return $this->getControls()->itemAt(0);
-			case TListItemType::Footer:
-				return $this->getControls()->itemAt($this->getControls()->getCount()-1);
-			case TListItemType::Separator:
-				$i=$index+$index+1;
-				if($this->_headerTemplate!==null || $this->getHeaderRenderer()!=='')
-					$i++;
-				return $this->getControls()->itemAt($i);
-		}
-		return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a datalist item.
-	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new datalist item.
-	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
-	 */
-	private function createItemInternal($itemIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
-		{
-			$param=new TDataListItemEventParameter($item);
-			$this->onItemCreated($param);
-			$this->getControls()->add($item);
-			return $item;
-		}
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a datalist item and performs databinding.
-	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new datalist item.
-	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
-	 */
-	private function createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem)
-	{
-		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
-		{
-			$param=new TDataListItemEventParameter($item);
-			if($item instanceof IDataRenderer)
-				$item->setData($dataItem);
-			$this->onItemCreated($param);
-			$this->getControls()->add($item);
-			$item->dataBind();
-			$this->onItemDataBound($param);
-			return $item;
-		}
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	private function getAlternatingItemDisplay()
-	{
-		if(($classPath=$this->getAlternatingItemRenderer())==='' && $this->_alternatingItemTemplate===null)
-			return array($this->getItemRenderer(),$this->_itemTemplate);
-		else
-			return array($classPath,$this->_alternatingItemTemplate);
-	}
-
-	private function getSelectedItemDisplay($itemIndex)
-	{
-		if(($classPath=$this->getSelectedItemRenderer())==='' && $this->_selectedItemTemplate===null)
-		{
-			if($itemIndex%2===0)
-				return array($this->getItemRenderer(),$this->_itemTemplate);
-			else
-				return $this->getAlternatingItemDisplay();
-		}
-		else
-			return array($classPath,$this->_selectedItemTemplate);
-	}
-
-	private function getEditItemDisplay($itemIndex)
-	{
-		if(($classPath=$this->getEditItemRenderer())==='' && $this->_editItemTemplate===null)
-			return $this->getSelectedItemDisplay($itemIndex);
-		else
-			return array($classPath,$this->_editItemTemplate);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a datalist item instance based on the item type and index.
-	 * @param integer zero-based item index
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @return TControl created datalist item
-	 */
-	protected function createItem($itemIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		$template=null;
-		$classPath=null;
-		switch($itemType)
-		{
-			case TListItemType::Item :
-				$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem :
-				list($classPath,$template)=$this->getAlternatingItemDisplay();
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
-				list($classPath,$template)=$this->getSelectedItemDisplay($itemIndex);
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::EditItem:
-				list($classPath,$template)=$this->getEditItemDisplay($itemIndex);
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::Header :
-				$classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_headerTemplate;
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::Footer :
-				$classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_footerTemplate;
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::Separator :
-				$classPath=$this->getSeparatorRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_separatorTemplate;
-				break;
-			default:
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datalist_itemtype_unknown',$itemType);
-		}
-		if($classPath!=='')
-		{
-			$item=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-			if($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-			{
-				$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
-				$item->setItemType($itemType);
-			}
-		}
-		else if($template!==null)
-		{
-			$item=new TDataListItem;
-			$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
-			$item->setItemType($itemType);
-			$template->instantiateIn($item);
-		}
-		else
-			$item=null;
-
-		return $item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates empty datalist content.
-	 */
-	protected function createEmptyContent()
-	{
-		if(($classPath=$this->getEmptyRenderer())!=='')
-			$this->getControls()->add(Prado::createComponent($classPath));
-		else if($this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
-			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Applies styles to items, header, footer and separators.
-	 * Item styles are applied in a hierarchical way. Style in higher hierarchy
-	 * will inherit from styles in lower hierarchy.
-	 * Starting from the lowest hierarchy, the item styles include
-	 * item's own style, {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle}, {@link getAlternatingItemStyle AlternatingItemStyle},
-	 * {@link getSelectedItemStyle SelectedItemStyle}, and {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle}.
-	 * Therefore, if background color is set as red in {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle},
-	 * {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle} will also have red background color
-	 * unless it is set to a different value explicitly.
-	 */
-	protected function applyItemStyles()
-	{
-		$itemStyle=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null);
-
-		$alternatingItemStyle=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null);
-		if($itemStyle!==null)
-		{
-			if($alternatingItemStyle===null)
-				$alternatingItemStyle=$itemStyle;
-			else
-				$alternatingItemStyle->mergeWith($itemStyle);
-		}
-
-		$selectedItemStyle=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null);
-
-		$editItemStyle=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null);
-		if($selectedItemStyle!==null)
-		{
-			if($editItemStyle===null)
-				$editItemStyle=$selectedItemStyle;
-			else
-				$editItemStyle->mergeWith($selectedItemStyle);
-		}
-
-		// apply header style if any
-		if($this->_header!==null && $this->_header instanceof IStyleable)
-		{
-			if($headerStyle=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))
-				$this->_header->getStyle()->mergeWith($headerStyle);
-		}
-
-		// apply footer style if any
-		if($this->_footer!==null && $this->_footer instanceof IStyleable)
-		{
-			if($footerStyle=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))
-				$this->_footer->getStyle()->mergeWith($footerStyle);
-		}
-
-		$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-		$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
-
-		// apply item styles if any
-		foreach($this->getItems() as $index=>$item)
-		{
-			if($index===$editIndex)
-				$style=$editItemStyle;
-			else if($index===$selectedIndex)
-				$style=$selectedItemStyle;
-			else if($index%2===0)
-				$style=$itemStyle;
-			else
-				$style=$alternatingItemStyle;
-			if($style && $item instanceof IStyleable)
-				$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
-		}
-
-		// apply separator style if any
-		if(($separatorStyle=$this->getViewState('SeparatorStyle',null))!==null && $this->getHasSeparators())
-		{
-			$controls=$this->getControls();
-			$count=$controls->getCount();
-			for($i=$this->_header?2:1;$i<$count;$i+=2)
-			{
-				if(($separator=$controls->itemAt($i)) instanceof IStyleable)
-					$separator->getStyle()->mergeWith($separatorStyle);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves item count in viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
-	 */
-	public function saveState()
-	{
-		parent::saveState();
-		if($this->_items)
-			$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$this->_items->getCount(),0);
-		else
-			$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads item count information from viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
-	 */
-	public function loadState()
-	{
-		parent::loadState();
-		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
-			$this->restoreItemsFromViewState();
-		$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Clears up all items in the data list.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		$this->getControls()->clear();
-		$this->getItems()->clear();
-		$this->_header=null;
-		$this->_footer=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates data list items based on viewstate information.
-	 */
-	protected function restoreItemsFromViewState()
-	{
-		$this->reset();
-		if(($itemCount=$this->getViewState('ItemCount',0))>0)
-		{
-			$items=$this->getItems();
-			$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-			$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
-			$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
-			$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header);
-			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
-			{
-				if($hasSeparator && $i>0)
-					$this->createItemInternal($i-1,TListItemType::Separator);
-				if($i===$editIndex)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
-				else if($i===$selectedIndex)
-					$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
-				else
-					$itemType=$i%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item;
-				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($i,$itemType));
-			}
-			$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer);
-		}
-		else
-			$this->createEmptyContent();
-		$this->clearChildState();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs databinding to populate data list items from data source.
-	 * This method is invoked by dataBind().
-	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
-	 * @param Traversable the data
-	 */
-	protected function performDataBinding($data)
-	{
-		$this->reset();
-		$keys=$this->getDataKeys();
-		$keys->clear();
-		$keyField=$this->getDataKeyField();
-		$itemIndex=0;
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
-		$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
-		$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
-		foreach($data as $key=>$dataItem)
-		{
-			if($keyField!=='')
-				$keys->add($this->getDataFieldValue($dataItem,$keyField));
-			else
-				$keys->add($key);
-			if($itemIndex===0)
-				$this->_header=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header,null);
-			if($hasSeparator && $itemIndex>0)
-				$this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex-1,TListItemType::Separator,null);
-			if($itemIndex===$editIndex)
-				$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
-			else if($itemIndex===$selectedIndex)
-				$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
-			else
-				$itemType=$itemIndex%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item;
-			$items->add($this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem));
-			$itemIndex++;
-		}
-		if($itemIndex>0)
-			$this->_footer=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer,null);
-		else
-		{
-			$this->createEmptyContent();
-			$this->dataBindChildren();
-		}
-		$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$itemIndex,0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the data list control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getHasControls())
-		{
-			if($this->getItemCount()>0)
-			{
-				$this->applyItemStyles();
-				$repeatInfo=$this->getRepeatInfo();
-				$repeatInfo->renderRepeater($writer,$this);
-			}
-			else if($this->_emptyTemplate!==null || $this->getEmptyRenderer()!=='')
-				parent::render($writer);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TDataListItemEventParameter class
- *
- * TDataListItemEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TDataList::onItemCreated ItemCreated} event of {@link TDataList} controls.
- * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the DataList item related with the event.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataListItemEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * The datalist item control responsible for the event.
-	 * @var TControl
-	 */
-	private $_item=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TControl DataList item related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function __construct($item)
-	{
-		$this->_item=$item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl datalist item related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function getItem()
-	{
-		return $this->_item;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataListCommandEventParameter class
- *
- * TDataListCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TDataList::onItemCommand ItemCommand} event of {@link TDataList} controls.
- *
- * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the DataList item related with the event.
- * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} refers to the control that originally
- * raises the Command event.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataListCommandEventParameter extends TCommandEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl the datalist item control responsible for the event.
-	 */
-	private $_item=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	private $_source=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TControl datalist item responsible for the event
-	 * @param TControl original event sender
-	 * @param TCommandEventParameter original event parameter
-	 */
-	public function __construct($item,$source,TCommandEventParameter $param)
-	{
-		$this->_item=$item;
-		$this->_source=$source;
-		parent::__construct($param->getCommandName(),$param->getCommandParameter());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the datalist item control responsible for the event.
-	 */
-	public function getItem()
-	{
-		return $this->_item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_source;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataListItem class
- *
- * A TDataListItem control represents an item in the {@link TDataList} control,
- * such as heading section, footer section, or a data item.
- * The index and data value of the item can be accessed via {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}>
- * and {@link getDataItem DataItem} properties, respectively. The type of the item
- * is given by {@link getItemType ItemType} property.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataListItem extends TWebControl implements INamingContainer, IItemDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * index of the data item in the Items collection of DataList
-	 */
-	private $_itemIndex;
-	/**
-	 * type of the TDataListItem
-	 * @var TListItemType
-	 */
-	private $_itemType;
-	/**
-	 * value of the data associated with this item
-	 * @var mixed
-	 */
-	private $_data;
-
-	private $_tagName='span';
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the tag name used for this control.
-	 * @return string tag name of the control to be rendered
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return $this->_tagName;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string tag name of the control to be rendered
-	 */
-	public function setTagName($value)
-	{
-		$this->_tagName=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object for the control.
-	 * This method creates a {@link TTableItemStyle} to be used by a datalist item.
-	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableItemStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListItemType item type
-	 */
-	public function getItemType()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemType;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListItemType item type.
-	 */
-	public function setItemType($value)
-	{
-		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item in the item collection of datalist
-	 */
-	public function getItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemIndex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
-	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
-	 */
-	public function setItemIndex($value)
-	{
-		$this->_itemIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->_data;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->_data=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
-	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since v3.1.0. Use {@link getData} instead.
-	 */
-	public function getDataItem()
-	{
-		return $this->getData();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.1.0. Use {@link setData} instead.
-	 */
-	public function setDataItem($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setData($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
-	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataListCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataListItemCollection class.
- *
- * TDataListItemCollection represents a collection of data list items.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataListItemCollection extends TList
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only TControl descendants.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TControl descendant.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TControl)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalistitemcollection_datalistitem_required');
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TBaseDataList class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseDataList');
+/**
+ * Includes TRepeatInfo class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRepeatInfo');
+
+/**
+ * TDataList class
+ *
+ * TDataList represents a data bound and updatable list control.
+ *
+ * Like {@link TRepeater}, TDataList displays its content repeatedly based on
+ * the data fetched from {@link setDataSource DataSource}.
+ * The repeated contents in TDataList are called items, which are controls and
+ * can be accessed through {@link getItems Items}. When {@link dataBind()} is
+ * invoked, TDataList creates an item for each row of data and binds the data
+ * row to the item. Optionally, a TDataList can have a header, a footer and/or
+ * separators between items.
+ *
+ * TDataList differs from {@link TRepeater} in that it supports tiling the items
+ * in different manners and it maintains status of items to handle data update.
+ *
+ * The layout of the repeated contents are specified by inline templates.
+ * TDataList items, header, footer, etc. are being instantiated with the corresponding
+ * templates when data is being bound to the repeater.
+ *
+ * Since v3.1.0, the layout can also be by renderers. A renderer is a control class
+ * that can be instantiated as datalist items, header, etc. A renderer can thus be viewed
+ * as an external template (in fact, it can also be non-templated controls).
+ *
+ * A renderer can be any control class.
+ * - If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b>
+ * property will be set as the data row during databinding. Many PRADO controls
+ * implement this interface, such as {@link TLabel}, {@link TTextBox}, etc.
+ * - If the class implements {@link IItemDataRenderer}, the <b>ItemIndex</b> property will be set
+ * as the zero-based index of the item in the datalist item collection, and
+ * the <b>ItemType</b> property as the item's type (such as TListItemType::Item).
+ * {@link TDataListItemRenderer} may be used as the convenient base class which
+ * already implements {@link IDataItemRenderer}.
+ *
+ * The following properties are used to specify different types of template and renderer
+ * for a datalist:
+ * - {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate}, {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}:
+ * for each repeated row of data
+ * - {@link setAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}, {@link setAlternatingItemRenderer AlternatingItemRenderer}:
+ * for each alternating row of data. If not set, {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate} or {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
+ * will be used instead.
+ * - {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}, {@link setHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer}:
+ * for the datalist header.
+ * - {@link setFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}, {@link setFooterRenderer FooterRenderer}:
+ * for the datalist footer.
+ * - {@link setSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}, {@link setSeparatorRenderer SeparatorRenderer}:
+ * for content to be displayed between items.
+ * - {@link setEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}, {@link setEmptyRenderer EmptyRenderer}:
+ * used when data bound to the datalist is empty.
+ * - {@link setEditItemTemplate EditItemTemplate}, {@link setEditItemRenderer EditItemRenderer}:
+ * for the row being editted.
+ * - {@link setSelectedItemTemplate SelectedItemTemplate}, {@link setSelectedItemRenderer SelectedItemRenderer}:
+ * for the row being selected.
+ *
+ * If a content type is defined with both a template and a renderer, the latter takes precedence.
+ *
+ * When {@link dataBind()} is being called, TDataList undergoes the following lifecycles for each row of data:
+ * - create item based on templates or renderers
+ * - set the row of data to the item
+ * - raise {@link onItemCreated OnItemCreated}:
+ * - add the item as a child control
+ * - call dataBind() of the item
+ * - raise {@link onItemDataBound OnItemDataBound}:
+ *
+ * TDataList raises an {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} whenever a button control
+ * within some datalist item raises a <b>OnCommand</b> event. Therefore,
+ * you can handle all sorts of <b>OnCommand</b> event in a central place by
+ * writing an event handler for {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand}.
+ *
+ * An additional event is raised if the <b>OnCommand</b> event has one of the following
+ * command names:
+ * - edit: user wants to edit an item. <b>OnEditCommand</b> event will be raised.
+ * - update: user wants to save the change to an item. <b>OnUpdateCommand</b> event will be raised.
+ * - select: user selects an item. <b>OnSelectedIndexChanged</b> event will be raised.
+ * - delete: user deletes an item. <b>OnDeleteCommand</b> event will be raised.
+ * - cancel: user cancels previously editting action. <b>OnCancelCommand</b> event will be raised.
+ *
+ * TDataList provides a few properties to support tiling the items.
+ * The number of columns used to display the data items is specified via
+ * {@link setRepeatColumns RepeatColumns} property, while the {@link setRepeatDirection RepeatDirection}
+ * governs the order of the items being rendered.
+ * The layout of the data items in the list is specified via {@link setRepeatLayout RepeatLayout},
+ * which can take one of the following values:
+ * - Table (default): items are organized using HTML table and cells.
+ * When using this layout, one can set {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and
+ * {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing} to adjust the cellpadding and cellpadding
+ * of the table, and {@link setCaption Caption} and {@link setCaptionAlign CaptionAlign}
+ * to add a table caption with the specified alignment.
+ * - Flow: items are organized using HTML spans and breaks.
+ * - Raw: TDataList does not generate any HTML tags to do the tiling.
+ *
+ * Items in TDataList can be in one of the three status: normal browsing,
+ * being editted and being selected. To change the status of a particular
+ * item, set {@link setSelectedItemIndex SelectedItemIndex} or
+ * {@link setEditItemIndex EditItemIndex}. The former will change
+ * the indicated item to selected mode, which will cause the item to
+ * use {@link setSelectedItemTemplate SelectedItemTemplate} or
+ * {@link setSelectedItemRenderer SelectedItemRenderer} for presentation.
+ * The latter will change the indicated item to edit mode and to use corresponding
+ * template or renderer.
+ * Note, if an item is in edit mode, then selecting this item will have no effect.
+ *
+ * Different styles may be applied to items in different status. The style
+ * application is performed in a hierarchical way: Style in higher hierarchy
+ * will inherit from styles in lower hierarchy.
+ * Starting from the lowest hierarchy, the item styles include
+ * - item's own style
+ * - {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle}
+ * - {@link getAlternatingItemStyle AlternatingItemStyle}
+ * - {@link getSelectedItemStyle SelectedItemStyle}
+ * - {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle}.
+ * Therefore, if background color is set as red in {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle},
+ * {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle} will also have red background color
+ * unless it is set to a different value explicitly.
+ *
+ * When a page containing a datalist is post back, the datalist will restore automatically
+ * all its contents, including items, header, footer and separators.
+ * However, the data row associated with each item will not be recovered and become null.
+ * To access the data, use one of the following ways:
+ * - Use {@link getDataKeys DataKeys} to obtain the data key associated with
+ * the specified datalist item and use the key to fetch the corresponding data
+ * from some persistent storage such as DB.
+ * - Save the whole dataset in viewstate, which will restore the dataset automatically upon postback.
+ * Be aware though, if the size of your dataset is big, your page size will become big. Some
+ * complex data may also have serializing problem if saved in viewstate.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataList extends TBaseDataList implements INamingContainer, IRepeatInfoUser
+{
+	/**
+	 * Command name that TDataList understands. They are case-insensitive.
+	 */
+	const CMD_SELECT='Select';
+	const CMD_EDIT='Edit';
+	const CMD_UPDATE='Update';
+	const CMD_DELETE='Delete';
+	const CMD_CANCEL='Cancel';
+
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataListItemCollection item list
+	 */
+	private $_items=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var Itemplate various item templates
+	 */
+	private $_itemTemplate=null;
+	private $_emptyTemplate=null;
+	private $_alternatingItemTemplate=null;
+	private $_selectedItemTemplate=null;
+	private $_editItemTemplate=null;
+	private $_headerTemplate=null;
+	private $_footerTemplate=null;
+	private $_separatorTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl header item
+	 */
+	private $_header=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl footer item
+	 */
+	private $_footer=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDataListItemCollection item list
+	 */
+	public function getItems()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_items)
+			$this->_items=new TDataListItemCollection;
+		return $this->_items;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer number of items
+	 */
+	public function getItemCount()
+	{
+		return $this->_items?$this->_items->getCount():0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for datalist items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the item renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist items.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getItemTemplate ItemTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setItemTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for alternative datalist items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getAlternatingItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the alternative item renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as alternative datalist items.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setAlternatingItemTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setAlternatingItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the datalist item being editted. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EditItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the renderer class for the datalist item being editted.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as the datalist item.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getEditItemTemplate EditItemTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setEditItemTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setEditItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EditItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the datalist item being selected. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('SelectedItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the renderer class for the datalist item being selected.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as the datalist item.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getSelectedItemTemplate SelectedItemTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setSelectedItemTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('SelectedItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for datalist item separators. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getSeparatorRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('SeparatorRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the datalist item separator renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist item separators.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setSeparatorTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setSeparatorRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('SeparatorRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for datalist header item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HeaderRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the datalist header renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist header item.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setHeaderTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HeaderRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for datalist footer item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getFooterRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FooterRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the datalist footer renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as datalist footer item.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setFooterTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setFooterRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FooterRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for empty datalist item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getEmptyRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EmptyRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the datalist empty renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * The empty renderer is created as the child of the datalist
+	 * if data bound to the datalist is empty.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setEmptyTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setEmptyRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EmptyRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template for item
+	 */
+	public function getItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template for item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_itemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','ItemTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for item
+	 */
+	public function getItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('ItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template for each alternating item
+	 */
+	public function getAlternatingItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_alternatingItemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template for each alternating item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setAlternatingItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_alternatingItemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','AlternatingItemType');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for each alternating item
+	 */
+	public function getAlternatingItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the selected item template
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_selectedItemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the selected item template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_selectedItemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','SelectedItemTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for selected item
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the edit item template
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_editItemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the edit item template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setEditItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_editItemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','EditItemTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for edit item
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('EditItemStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the header template
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_headerTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the header template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','HeaderTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for header
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the header item
+	 */
+	public function getHeader()
+	{
+		return $this->_header;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the footer template
+	 */
+	public function getFooterTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_footerTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the footer template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setFooterTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_footerTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','FooterTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for footer
+	 */
+	public function getFooterStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('FooterStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the footer item
+	 */
+	public function getFooter()
+	{
+		return $this->_footer;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datalist
+	 */
+	public function getEmptyTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_emptyTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the datalist
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setEmptyTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_emptyTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','EmptyTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the separator template
+	 */
+	public function getSeparatorTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_separatorTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the separator template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setSeparatorTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_separatorTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalist_template_required','SeparatorTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableItemStyle the style for separator
+	 */
+	public function getSeparatorStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SeparatorStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TTableItemStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('SeparatorStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the selected item in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * A value -1 means no item selected.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('SelectedItemIndex',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Selects an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * Previously selected item will be un-selected.
+	 * If the item to be selected is already in edit mode, it will remain in edit mode.
+	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing selection will be cleared up.
+	 * @param integer the selected item index
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedItemIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=-1;
+		if(($current=$this->getSelectedItemIndex())!==$value)
+		{
+			$this->setViewState('SelectedItemIndex',$value,-1);
+			$items=$this->getItems();
+			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
+			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
+			{
+				$item=$items->itemAt($current);
+				if(($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer) && $item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
+					$item->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item);
+			}
+			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
+			{
+				$item=$items->itemAt($value);
+				if(($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer) && $item->getItemType()!==TListItemType::EditItem)
+					$item->setItemType(TListItemType::SelectedItem);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the selected item, null if no item is selected.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItem()
+	{
+		$index=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
+			return $items->itemAt($index);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed the key value of the currently selected item
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if {@link getDataKeyField DataKeyField} is empty.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedDataKey()
+	{
+		if($this->getDataKeyField()==='')
+			throw new TInvalidOperationException('datalist_datakeyfield_required');
+		$index=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+		$dataKeys=$this->getDataKeys();
+		if($index>=0 && $index<$dataKeys->getCount())
+			return $dataKeys->itemAt($index);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the edit item in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * A value -1 means no item is in edit mode.
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EditItemIndex',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Edits an item by its index in {@link getItems Items}.
+	 * Previously editting item will change to normal item state.
+	 * If the index is less than 0, any existing edit item will be cleared up.
+	 * @param integer the edit item index
+	 */
+	public function setEditItemIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=-1;
+		if(($current=$this->getEditItemIndex())!==$value)
+		{
+			$this->setViewState('EditItemIndex',$value,-1);
+			$items=$this->getItems();
+			$itemCount=$items->getCount();
+			if($current>=0 && $current<$itemCount)
+				$items->itemAt($current)->setItemType($current%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item);
+			if($value>=0 && $value<$itemCount)
+				$items->itemAt($value)->setItemType(TListItemType::EditItem);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the edit item
+	 */
+	public function getEditItem()
+	{
+		$index=$this->getEditItemIndex();
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		if($index>=0 && $index<$items->getCount())
+			return $items->itemAt($index);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the header should be shown. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getShowHeader()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowHeader',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to show header
+	 */
+	public function setShowHeader($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowHeader',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the footer should be shown. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getShowFooter()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowFooter',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to show footer
+	 */
+	public function setShowFooter($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowFooter',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRepeatInfo repeat information (primarily used by control developers)
+	 */
+	protected function getRepeatInfo()
+	{
+		if(($repeatInfo=$this->getViewState('RepeatInfo',null))===null)
+		{
+			$repeatInfo=new TRepeatInfo;
+			$this->setViewState('RepeatInfo',$repeatInfo,null);
+		}
+		return $repeatInfo;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string caption of the table layout
+	 */
+	public function getCaption()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getCaption();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string caption of the table layout
+	 */
+	public function setCaption($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setCaption($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getCaptionAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getCaptionAlign();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout.
+	 */
+	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setCaptionAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with. Defaults to 0 meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatColumns()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatColumns();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the number of columns that the list should be displayed with.
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatColumns($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatColumns($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the list, defaults to TRepeatDirection::Vertical
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatDirection()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatDirection();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the list
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatDirection($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatDirection($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRepeatLayout how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks. Defaults to TRepeatLayout::Table.
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatLayout()
+	{
+		return $this->getRepeatInfo()->getRepeatLayout();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TRepeatLayout how the list should be displayed, using table or using line breaks
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
+	{
+		$this->getRepeatInfo()->setRepeatLayout($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation to handle
+	 * {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event which is bubbled from
+	 * datalist items and their child controls.
+	 * If the event parameter is {@link TDataListCommandEventParameter} and
+	 * the command name is a recognized one, which includes 'select', 'edit',
+	 * 'delete', 'update', and 'cancel' (case-insensitive), then a
+	 * corresponding command event is also raised (such as {@link onEditCommand OnEditCommand}).
+	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TDataListCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->onItemCommand($param);
+			$command=$param->getCommandName();
+			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_SELECT)===0)
+			{
+				if(($item=$param->getItem()) instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+					$this->setSelectedItemIndex($item->getItemIndex());
+				$this->onSelectedIndexChanged($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_EDIT)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onEditCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_DELETE)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onDeleteCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_UPDATE)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onUpdateCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_CANCEL)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onCancelCommand($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemCreated</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked after a data list item is created and instantiated with
+	 * template, but before added to the page hierarchy.
+	 * The datalist item control responsible for the event
+	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
+	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
+	 * @param TDataListItemEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemCreated($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCreated',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemDataBound</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked right after an item is data bound.
+	 * The datalist item control responsible for the event
+	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
+	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
+	 * @param TDataListItemEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemDataBound($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemDataBound',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
+	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnEditCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
+	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'edit' (case-insensitive).
+	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onEditCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnEditCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnDeleteCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
+	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'delete' (case-insensitive).
+	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onDeleteCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnDeleteCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnUpdateCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
+	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'update' (case-insensitive).
+	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onUpdateCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnUpdateCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnCancelCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a child control of the data list
+	 * raises an <b>OnCommand</b> event and the command name is 'cancel' (case-insensitive).
+	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onCancelCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCancelCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains header item.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether the datalist has header
+	 */
+	public function getHasHeader()
+	{
+		return ($this->getShowHeader() && ($this->_headerTemplate!==null || $this->getHeaderRenderer()!==''));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains footer item.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether the datalist has footer
+	 */
+	public function getHasFooter()
+	{
+		return ($this->getShowFooter() && ($this->_footerTemplate!==null || $this->getFooterRenderer()!==''));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether this control contains separator items.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @return boolean always false.
+	 */
+	public function getHasSeparators()
+	{
+		return $this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a style used for rendering items.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
+	 * @param integer index of the item being rendered
+	 * @return TStyle item style
+	 */
+	public function generateItemStyle($itemType,$index)
+	{
+		if(($item=$this->getItem($itemType,$index))!==null && ($item instanceof IStyleable) && $item->getHasStyle())
+		{
+			$style=$item->getStyle();
+			$item->clearStyle();
+			return $style;
+		}
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders an item in the list.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IRepeatInfoUser} interface.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose
+	 * @param TRepeatInfo repeat information
+	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item in the item list
+	 */
+	public function renderItem($writer,$repeatInfo,$itemType,$index)
+	{
+		$item=$this->getItem($itemType,$index);
+		if($repeatInfo->getRepeatLayout()===TRepeatLayout::Raw && get_class($item)==='TDataListItem')
+			$item->setTagName('div');
+		$item->renderControl($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @param integer item index
+	 * @return TControl data list item with the specified item type and index
+	 */
+	private function getItem($itemType,$index)
+	{
+		switch($itemType)
+		{
+			case TListItemType::Item:
+			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
+			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
+			case TListItemType::EditItem:
+				return $this->getItems()->itemAt($index);
+			case TListItemType::Header:
+				return $this->getControls()->itemAt(0);
+			case TListItemType::Footer:
+				return $this->getControls()->itemAt($this->getControls()->getCount()-1);
+			case TListItemType::Separator:
+				$i=$index+$index+1;
+				if($this->_headerTemplate!==null || $this->getHeaderRenderer()!=='')
+					$i++;
+				return $this->getControls()->itemAt($i);
+		}
+		return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a datalist item.
+	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new datalist item.
+	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
+	 */
+	private function createItemInternal($itemIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
+		{
+			$param=new TDataListItemEventParameter($item);
+			$this->onItemCreated($param);
+			$this->getControls()->add($item);
+			return $item;
+		}
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a datalist item and performs databinding.
+	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new datalist item.
+	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
+	 */
+	private function createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem)
+	{
+		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
+		{
+			$param=new TDataListItemEventParameter($item);
+			if($item instanceof IDataRenderer)
+				$item->setData($dataItem);
+			$this->onItemCreated($param);
+			$this->getControls()->add($item);
+			$item->dataBind();
+			$this->onItemDataBound($param);
+			return $item;
+		}
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	private function getAlternatingItemDisplay()
+	{
+		if(($classPath=$this->getAlternatingItemRenderer())==='' && $this->_alternatingItemTemplate===null)
+			return array($this->getItemRenderer(),$this->_itemTemplate);
+		else
+			return array($classPath,$this->_alternatingItemTemplate);
+	}
+
+	private function getSelectedItemDisplay($itemIndex)
+	{
+		if(($classPath=$this->getSelectedItemRenderer())==='' && $this->_selectedItemTemplate===null)
+		{
+			if($itemIndex%2===0)
+				return array($this->getItemRenderer(),$this->_itemTemplate);
+			else
+				return $this->getAlternatingItemDisplay();
+		}
+		else
+			return array($classPath,$this->_selectedItemTemplate);
+	}
+
+	private function getEditItemDisplay($itemIndex)
+	{
+		if(($classPath=$this->getEditItemRenderer())==='' && $this->_editItemTemplate===null)
+			return $this->getSelectedItemDisplay($itemIndex);
+		else
+			return array($classPath,$this->_editItemTemplate);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a datalist item instance based on the item type and index.
+	 * @param integer zero-based item index
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @return TControl created datalist item
+	 */
+	protected function createItem($itemIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		$template=null;
+		$classPath=null;
+		switch($itemType)
+		{
+			case TListItemType::Item :
+				$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem :
+				list($classPath,$template)=$this->getAlternatingItemDisplay();
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
+				list($classPath,$template)=$this->getSelectedItemDisplay($itemIndex);
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::EditItem:
+				list($classPath,$template)=$this->getEditItemDisplay($itemIndex);
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::Header :
+				$classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_headerTemplate;
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::Footer :
+				$classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_footerTemplate;
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::Separator :
+				$classPath=$this->getSeparatorRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_separatorTemplate;
+				break;
+			default:
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('datalist_itemtype_unknown',$itemType);
+		}
+		if($classPath!=='')
+		{
+			$item=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+			if($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+			{
+				$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
+				$item->setItemType($itemType);
+			}
+		}
+		else if($template!==null)
+		{
+			$item=new TDataListItem;
+			$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
+			$item->setItemType($itemType);
+			$template->instantiateIn($item);
+		}
+		else
+			$item=null;
+
+		return $item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates empty datalist content.
+	 */
+	protected function createEmptyContent()
+	{
+		if(($classPath=$this->getEmptyRenderer())!=='')
+			$this->getControls()->add(Prado::createComponent($classPath));
+		else if($this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
+			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Applies styles to items, header, footer and separators.
+	 * Item styles are applied in a hierarchical way. Style in higher hierarchy
+	 * will inherit from styles in lower hierarchy.
+	 * Starting from the lowest hierarchy, the item styles include
+	 * item's own style, {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle}, {@link getAlternatingItemStyle AlternatingItemStyle},
+	 * {@link getSelectedItemStyle SelectedItemStyle}, and {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle}.
+	 * Therefore, if background color is set as red in {@link getItemStyle ItemStyle},
+	 * {@link getEditItemStyle EditItemStyle} will also have red background color
+	 * unless it is set to a different value explicitly.
+	 */
+	protected function applyItemStyles()
+	{
+		$itemStyle=$this->getViewState('ItemStyle',null);
+
+		$alternatingItemStyle=$this->getViewState('AlternatingItemStyle',null);
+		if($itemStyle!==null)
+		{
+			if($alternatingItemStyle===null)
+				$alternatingItemStyle=$itemStyle;
+			else
+				$alternatingItemStyle->mergeWith($itemStyle);
+		}
+
+		$selectedItemStyle=$this->getViewState('SelectedItemStyle',null);
+
+		$editItemStyle=$this->getViewState('EditItemStyle',null);
+		if($selectedItemStyle!==null)
+		{
+			if($editItemStyle===null)
+				$editItemStyle=$selectedItemStyle;
+			else
+				$editItemStyle->mergeWith($selectedItemStyle);
+		}
+
+		// apply header style if any
+		if($this->_header!==null && $this->_header instanceof IStyleable)
+		{
+			if($headerStyle=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))
+				$this->_header->getStyle()->mergeWith($headerStyle);
+		}
+
+		// apply footer style if any
+		if($this->_footer!==null && $this->_footer instanceof IStyleable)
+		{
+			if($footerStyle=$this->getViewState('FooterStyle',null))
+				$this->_footer->getStyle()->mergeWith($footerStyle);
+		}
+
+		$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+		$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
+
+		// apply item styles if any
+		foreach($this->getItems() as $index=>$item)
+		{
+			if($index===$editIndex)
+				$style=$editItemStyle;
+			else if($index===$selectedIndex)
+				$style=$selectedItemStyle;
+			else if($index%2===0)
+				$style=$itemStyle;
+			else
+				$style=$alternatingItemStyle;
+			if($style && $item instanceof IStyleable)
+				$item->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
+		}
+
+		// apply separator style if any
+		if(($separatorStyle=$this->getViewState('SeparatorStyle',null))!==null && $this->getHasSeparators())
+		{
+			$controls=$this->getControls();
+			$count=$controls->getCount();
+			for($i=$this->_header?2:1;$i<$count;$i+=2)
+			{
+				if(($separator=$controls->itemAt($i)) instanceof IStyleable)
+					$separator->getStyle()->mergeWith($separatorStyle);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves item count in viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
+	 */
+	public function saveState()
+	{
+		parent::saveState();
+		if($this->_items)
+			$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$this->_items->getCount(),0);
+		else
+			$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads item count information from viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
+	 */
+	public function loadState()
+	{
+		parent::loadState();
+		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
+			$this->restoreItemsFromViewState();
+		$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Clears up all items in the data list.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		$this->getControls()->clear();
+		$this->getItems()->clear();
+		$this->_header=null;
+		$this->_footer=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates data list items based on viewstate information.
+	 */
+	protected function restoreItemsFromViewState()
+	{
+		$this->reset();
+		if(($itemCount=$this->getViewState('ItemCount',0))>0)
+		{
+			$items=$this->getItems();
+			$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+			$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
+			$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
+			$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header);
+			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
+			{
+				if($hasSeparator && $i>0)
+					$this->createItemInternal($i-1,TListItemType::Separator);
+				if($i===$editIndex)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
+				else if($i===$selectedIndex)
+					$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
+				else
+					$itemType=$i%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item;
+				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($i,$itemType));
+			}
+			$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer);
+		}
+		else
+			$this->createEmptyContent();
+		$this->clearChildState();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs databinding to populate data list items from data source.
+	 * This method is invoked by dataBind().
+	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
+	 * @param Traversable the data
+	 */
+	protected function performDataBinding($data)
+	{
+		$this->reset();
+		$keys=$this->getDataKeys();
+		$keys->clear();
+		$keyField=$this->getDataKeyField();
+		$itemIndex=0;
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
+		$selectedIndex=$this->getSelectedItemIndex();
+		$editIndex=$this->getEditItemIndex();
+		foreach($data as $key=>$dataItem)
+		{
+			if($keyField!=='')
+				$keys->add($this->getDataFieldValue($dataItem,$keyField));
+			else
+				$keys->add($key);
+			if($itemIndex===0)
+				$this->_header=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header,null);
+			if($hasSeparator && $itemIndex>0)
+				$this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex-1,TListItemType::Separator,null);
+			if($itemIndex===$editIndex)
+				$itemType=TListItemType::EditItem;
+			else if($itemIndex===$selectedIndex)
+				$itemType=TListItemType::SelectedItem;
+			else
+				$itemType=$itemIndex%2?TListItemType::AlternatingItem : TListItemType::Item;
+			$items->add($this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem));
+			$itemIndex++;
+		}
+		if($itemIndex>0)
+			$this->_footer=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer,null);
+		else
+		{
+			$this->createEmptyContent();
+			$this->dataBindChildren();
+		}
+		$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$itemIndex,0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the data list control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getHasControls())
+		{
+			if($this->getItemCount()>0)
+			{
+				$this->applyItemStyles();
+				$repeatInfo=$this->getRepeatInfo();
+				$repeatInfo->renderRepeater($writer,$this);
+			}
+			else if($this->_emptyTemplate!==null || $this->getEmptyRenderer()!=='')
+				parent::render($writer);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TDataListItemEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TDataListItemEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TDataList::onItemCreated ItemCreated} event of {@link TDataList} controls.
+ * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the DataList item related with the event.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataListItemEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * The datalist item control responsible for the event.
+	 * @var TControl
+	 */
+	private $_item=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TControl DataList item related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function __construct($item)
+	{
+		$this->_item=$item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl datalist item related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function getItem()
+	{
+		return $this->_item;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataListCommandEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TDataListCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TDataList::onItemCommand ItemCommand} event of {@link TDataList} controls.
+ *
+ * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the DataList item related with the event.
+ * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} refers to the control that originally
+ * raises the Command event.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataListCommandEventParameter extends TCommandEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl the datalist item control responsible for the event.
+	 */
+	private $_item=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	private $_source=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TControl datalist item responsible for the event
+	 * @param TControl original event sender
+	 * @param TCommandEventParameter original event parameter
+	 */
+	public function __construct($item,$source,TCommandEventParameter $param)
+	{
+		$this->_item=$item;
+		$this->_source=$source;
+		parent::__construct($param->getCommandName(),$param->getCommandParameter());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the datalist item control responsible for the event.
+	 */
+	public function getItem()
+	{
+		return $this->_item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_source;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataListItem class
+ *
+ * A TDataListItem control represents an item in the {@link TDataList} control,
+ * such as heading section, footer section, or a data item.
+ * The index and data value of the item can be accessed via {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}>
+ * and {@link getDataItem DataItem} properties, respectively. The type of the item
+ * is given by {@link getItemType ItemType} property.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataListItem extends TWebControl implements INamingContainer, IItemDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * index of the data item in the Items collection of DataList
+	 */
+	private $_itemIndex;
+	/**
+	 * type of the TDataListItem
+	 * @var TListItemType
+	 */
+	private $_itemType;
+	/**
+	 * value of the data associated with this item
+	 * @var mixed
+	 */
+	private $_data;
+
+	private $_tagName='span';
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the tag name used for this control.
+	 * @return string tag name of the control to be rendered
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return $this->_tagName;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string tag name of the control to be rendered
+	 */
+	public function setTagName($value)
+	{
+		$this->_tagName=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object for the control.
+	 * This method creates a {@link TTableItemStyle} to be used by a datalist item.
+	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableItemStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListItemType item type
+	 */
+	public function getItemType()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemType;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListItemType item type.
+	 */
+	public function setItemType($value)
+	{
+		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item in the item collection of datalist
+	 */
+	public function getItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemIndex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
+	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
+	 */
+	public function setItemIndex($value)
+	{
+		$this->_itemIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->_data;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->_data=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
+	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since v3.1.0. Use {@link getData} instead.
+	 */
+	public function getDataItem()
+	{
+		return $this->getData();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.1.0. Use {@link setData} instead.
+	 */
+	public function setDataItem($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setData($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
+	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataListCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataListItemCollection class.
+ *
+ * TDataListItemCollection represents a collection of data list items.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataListItemCollection extends TList
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only TControl descendants.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TControl descendant.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TControl)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('datalistitemcollection_datalistitem_required');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataListItemRenderer.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataListItemRenderer.php
index 7065dc09..53c48b6e 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataListItemRenderer.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataListItemRenderer.php
@@ -1,172 +1,172 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataListItemRenderer class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataListItemRenderer class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataList');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TItemDataRenderer');
-
-/**
- * TDataListItemRenderer class
- *
- * TDataListItemRenderer can be used as a convenient base class to
- * define an item renderer class specific for {@link TDataList}.
- *
- * TDataListItemRenderer extends {@link TItemDataRenderer} and implements
- * the bubbling scheme for the OnCommand event of data list items.
- *
- * TDataListItemRenderer also implements the {@link IStyleable} interface,
- * which allows TDataList to apply CSS styles to the renders.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.0
- */
-class TDataListItemRenderer extends TItemDataRenderer implements IStyleable
-{
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object to be used by the control.
-	 * This method may be overriden by controls to provide customized style.
-	 * @return TStyle
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableItemStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the control has defined any style information
-	 */
-	public function getHasStyle()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Style',null)!==null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the object representing the css style of the control
-	 */
-	public function getStyle()
-	{
-		if($style=$this->getViewState('Style',null))
-			return $style;
-		else
-		{
-			$style=$this->createStyle();
-			$this->setViewState('Style',$style,null);
-			return $style;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Removes all style data.
-	 */
-	public function clearStyle()
-	{
-		$this->clearViewState('Style');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
-	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataListCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the tag name used for this control.
-	 * By default, the tag name is 'span'.
-	 * You can override this method to provide customized tag names.
-	 * If the tag name is empty, the opening and closing tag will NOT be rendered.
-	 * @return string tag name of the control to be rendered
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'span';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * By default, this method renders the style string.
-	 * The method can be overriden to provide customized attribute rendering.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if($style=$this->getViewState('Style',null))
-			$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by replacing it with
-	 * the following sequence:
-	 * - {@link renderBeginTag}
-	 * - {@link renderContents}
-	 * - {@link renderEndTag}
-	 * If the {@link getTagName TagName} is empty, only {@link renderContents} is invoked.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getTagName()!=='')
-		{
-			$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
-			$this->renderContents($writer);
-			$this->renderEndTag($writer);
-		}
-		else
-			$this->renderContents($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the openning tag for the control (including attributes)
-	 * This method is invoked when {@link getTagName TagName} is not empty.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
-	{
-		$this->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag($this->getTagName());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
-	 * By default, child controls and text strings will be rendered.
-	 * You can override this method to provide customized content rendering.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		parent::renderChildren($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the closing tag for the control
-	 * This method is invoked when {@link getTagName TagName} is not empty.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderEndTag($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataList');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TItemDataRenderer');
+
+/**
+ * TDataListItemRenderer class
+ *
+ * TDataListItemRenderer can be used as a convenient base class to
+ * define an item renderer class specific for {@link TDataList}.
+ *
+ * TDataListItemRenderer extends {@link TItemDataRenderer} and implements
+ * the bubbling scheme for the OnCommand event of data list items.
+ *
+ * TDataListItemRenderer also implements the {@link IStyleable} interface,
+ * which allows TDataList to apply CSS styles to the renders.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.0
+ */
+class TDataListItemRenderer extends TItemDataRenderer implements IStyleable
+{
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object to be used by the control.
+	 * This method may be overriden by controls to provide customized style.
+	 * @return TStyle
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableItemStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the control has defined any style information
+	 */
+	public function getHasStyle()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Style',null)!==null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the object representing the css style of the control
+	 */
+	public function getStyle()
+	{
+		if($style=$this->getViewState('Style',null))
+			return $style;
+		else
+		{
+			$style=$this->createStyle();
+			$this->setViewState('Style',$style,null);
+			return $style;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Removes all style data.
+	 */
+	public function clearStyle()
+	{
+		$this->clearViewState('Style');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
+	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TDataListCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the tag name used for this control.
+	 * By default, the tag name is 'span'.
+	 * You can override this method to provide customized tag names.
+	 * If the tag name is empty, the opening and closing tag will NOT be rendered.
+	 * @return string tag name of the control to be rendered
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'span';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * By default, this method renders the style string.
+	 * The method can be overriden to provide customized attribute rendering.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if($style=$this->getViewState('Style',null))
+			$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by replacing it with
+	 * the following sequence:
+	 * - {@link renderBeginTag}
+	 * - {@link renderContents}
+	 * - {@link renderEndTag}
+	 * If the {@link getTagName TagName} is empty, only {@link renderContents} is invoked.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getTagName()!=='')
+		{
+			$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
+			$this->renderContents($writer);
+			$this->renderEndTag($writer);
+		}
+		else
+			$this->renderContents($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the openning tag for the control (including attributes)
+	 * This method is invoked when {@link getTagName TagName} is not empty.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
+	{
+		$this->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag($this->getTagName());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
+	 * By default, child controls and text strings will be rendered.
+	 * You can override this method to provide customized content rendering.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		parent::renderChildren($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the closing tag for the control
+	 * This method is invoked when {@link getTagName TagName} is not empty.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderEndTag($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataRenderer.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataRenderer.php
index ece9d974..44ab0b1d 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataRenderer.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataRenderer.php
@@ -1,52 +1,52 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataRenderer class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataRenderer class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.2
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataRenderer class
- *
- * TDataRenderer is the convenient base class for template-based renderer controls.
- * It extends {@link TTemplateControl} and implements the methods required
- * by the {@link IDataRenderer} interface.
- *
- * The following property is provided by TDataRenderer:
- * - {@link getData Data}: data associated with this renderer.
-
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.2
- */
-abstract class TDataRenderer extends TTemplateControl implements IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed data associated with this renderer
-	 */
-	private $_data;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->_data;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->_data=$value;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.2
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataRenderer class
+ *
+ * TDataRenderer is the convenient base class for template-based renderer controls.
+ * It extends {@link TTemplateControl} and implements the methods required
+ * by the {@link IDataRenderer} interface.
+ *
+ * The following property is provided by TDataRenderer:
+ * - {@link getData Data}: data associated with this renderer.
+
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.2
+ */
+abstract class TDataRenderer extends TTemplateControl implements IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed data associated with this renderer
+	 */
+	private $_data;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->_data;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->_data=$value;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceControl.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceControl.php
index 0b07810a..f7a224af 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceControl.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceControl.php
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * IDataSource, TDataSourceControl, TReadOnlyDataSource class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * IDataSource, TDataSourceControl, TReadOnlyDataSource class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * IDataSource class
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-interface IDataSource
-{
-	public function getView($viewName);
-	public function getViewNames();
-	public function onDataSourceChanged($param);
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataSourceControl class
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-abstract class TDataSourceControl extends TControl implements IDataSource
-{
-	public function getView($viewName)
-	{
-		return null;
-	}
-
-	public function getViewNames()
-	{
-		return array();
-	}
-
-	public function onDataSourceChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnDataSourceChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	public function focus()
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_focus_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	public function getEnableTheming()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function setEnableTheming($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_enabletheming_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	public function getSkinID()
-	{
-		return '';
-	}
-
-	public function setSkinID($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_skinid_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	public function getVisible($checkParents=true)
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function setVisible($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_visible_unsupported');
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataSourceControl class
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TReadOnlyDataSource extends TDataSourceControl
-{
-	private $_dataSource;
-	private $_dataMember;
-
-	public function __construct($dataSource,$dataMember)
-	{
-		if(!is_array($dataSource) && !($dataSource instanceof IDataSource) && !($dataSource instanceof Traversable))
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('readonlydatasource_datasource_invalid');
-		$this->_dataSource=$dataSource;
-		$this->_dataMember=$dataMember;
-	}
-
-	public function getView($viewName)
-	{
-		if($this->_dataSource instanceof IDataSource)
-			return $this->_dataSource->getView($viewName);
-		else
-			return new TReadOnlyDataSourceView($this,$this->_dataMember,$this->_dataSource);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * IDataSource class
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+interface IDataSource
+{
+	public function getView($viewName);
+	public function getViewNames();
+	public function onDataSourceChanged($param);
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataSourceControl class
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+abstract class TDataSourceControl extends TControl implements IDataSource
+{
+	public function getView($viewName)
+	{
+		return null;
+	}
+
+	public function getViewNames()
+	{
+		return array();
+	}
+
+	public function onDataSourceChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnDataSourceChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	public function focus()
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_focus_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	public function getEnableTheming()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function setEnableTheming($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_enabletheming_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	public function getSkinID()
+	{
+		return '';
+	}
+
+	public function setSkinID($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_skinid_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	public function getVisible($checkParents=true)
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function setVisible($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourcecontrol_visible_unsupported');
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataSourceControl class
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TReadOnlyDataSource extends TDataSourceControl
+{
+	private $_dataSource;
+	private $_dataMember;
+
+	public function __construct($dataSource,$dataMember)
+	{
+		if(!is_array($dataSource) && !($dataSource instanceof IDataSource) && !($dataSource instanceof Traversable))
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('readonlydatasource_datasource_invalid');
+		$this->_dataSource=$dataSource;
+		$this->_dataMember=$dataMember;
+	}
+
+	public function getView($viewName)
+	{
+		if($this->_dataSource instanceof IDataSource)
+			return $this->_dataSource->getView($viewName);
+		else
+			return new TReadOnlyDataSourceView($this,$this->_dataMember,$this->_dataSource);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceView.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceView.php
index 9e7c0128..af817a32 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceView.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataSourceView.php
@@ -1,206 +1,206 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataSourceSelectParameters, TDataSourceView, TReadOnlyDataSourceView class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataSourceSelectParameters, TDataSourceView, TReadOnlyDataSourceView class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataSourceSelectParameters class
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataSourceSelectParameters extends TComponent
-{
-	private $_retrieveTotalRowCount=false;
-	private $_startRowIndex=0;
-	private $_totalRowCount=0;
-	private $_maximumRows=0;
-
-	public function getStartRowIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_startRowIndex;
-	}
-
-	public function setStartRowIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=0;
-		$this->_startRowIndex=$value;
-	}
-
-	public function getMaximumRows()
-	{
-		return $this->_maximumRows;
-	}
-
-	public function setMaximumRows($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=0;
-		$this->_maximumRows=$value;
-	}
-
-	public function getRetrieveTotalRowCount()
-	{
-		return $this->_retrieveTotalRowCount;
-	}
-
-	public function setRetrieveTotalRowCount($value)
-	{
-		$this->_retrieveTotalRowCount=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	public function getTotalRowCount()
-	{
-		return $this->_totalRowCount;
-	}
-
-	public function setTotalRowCount($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=0;
-		$this->_totalRowCount=$value;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDataSourceView class
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-abstract class TDataSourceView extends TComponent
-{
-	private $_owner;
-	private $_name;
-
-	public function __construct(IDataSource $owner,$viewName)
-	{
-		$this->_owner=$owner;
-		$this->_name=$viewName;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs DB selection based on specified parameters.
-	 * @param ???
-	 * @return Traversable
-	 */
-	abstract public function select($parameters);
-
-	/**
-	 * Inserts a DB record.
-	 * @param array|TMap
-	 * @return integer affected rows
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($values)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourceview_insert_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Updates DB record(s) with the specified keys and new values
-	 * @param array|TMap keys for specifying the records to be updated
-	 * @param array|TMap new values
-	 * @return integer affected rows
-	 */
-	public function update($keys,$values)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourceview_update_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Deletes DB row(s) with the specified keys.
-	 * @param array|TMap keys for specifying the rows to be deleted
-	 * @return integer affected rows
-	 */
-	public function delete($keys)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourceview_delete_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	public function getCanDelete()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function getCanInsert()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function getCanPage()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function getCanGetRowCount()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function getCanSort()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function getCanUpdate()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	public function getName()
-	{
-		return $this->_name;
-	}
-
-	public function getDataSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_owner;
-	}
-
-	public function onDataSourceViewChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnDataSourceViewChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TReadOnlyDataSourceView class
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TReadOnlyDataSourceView extends TDataSourceView
-{
-	private $_dataSource=null;
-
-	public function __construct(IDataSource $owner,$viewName,$dataSource)
-	{
-		parent::__construct($owner,$viewName);
-		if($dataSource===null || is_array($dataSource))
-			$this->_dataSource=new TMap($dataSource);
-		else if($dataSource instanceof Traversable)
-			$this->_dataSource=$dataSource;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('readonlydatasourceview_datasource_invalid');
-	}
-
-	public function select($parameters)
-	{
-		return $this->_dataSource;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataSourceSelectParameters class
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataSourceSelectParameters extends TComponent
+{
+	private $_retrieveTotalRowCount=false;
+	private $_startRowIndex=0;
+	private $_totalRowCount=0;
+	private $_maximumRows=0;
+
+	public function getStartRowIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_startRowIndex;
+	}
+
+	public function setStartRowIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=0;
+		$this->_startRowIndex=$value;
+	}
+
+	public function getMaximumRows()
+	{
+		return $this->_maximumRows;
+	}
+
+	public function setMaximumRows($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=0;
+		$this->_maximumRows=$value;
+	}
+
+	public function getRetrieveTotalRowCount()
+	{
+		return $this->_retrieveTotalRowCount;
+	}
+
+	public function setRetrieveTotalRowCount($value)
+	{
+		$this->_retrieveTotalRowCount=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	public function getTotalRowCount()
+	{
+		return $this->_totalRowCount;
+	}
+
+	public function setTotalRowCount($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=0;
+		$this->_totalRowCount=$value;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDataSourceView class
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+abstract class TDataSourceView extends TComponent
+{
+	private $_owner;
+	private $_name;
+
+	public function __construct(IDataSource $owner,$viewName)
+	{
+		$this->_owner=$owner;
+		$this->_name=$viewName;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs DB selection based on specified parameters.
+	 * @param ???
+	 * @return Traversable
+	 */
+	abstract public function select($parameters);
+
+	/**
+	 * Inserts a DB record.
+	 * @param array|TMap
+	 * @return integer affected rows
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($values)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourceview_insert_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Updates DB record(s) with the specified keys and new values
+	 * @param array|TMap keys for specifying the records to be updated
+	 * @param array|TMap new values
+	 * @return integer affected rows
+	 */
+	public function update($keys,$values)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourceview_update_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Deletes DB row(s) with the specified keys.
+	 * @param array|TMap keys for specifying the rows to be deleted
+	 * @return integer affected rows
+	 */
+	public function delete($keys)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('datasourceview_delete_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	public function getCanDelete()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function getCanInsert()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function getCanPage()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function getCanGetRowCount()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function getCanSort()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function getCanUpdate()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	public function getName()
+	{
+		return $this->_name;
+	}
+
+	public function getDataSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_owner;
+	}
+
+	public function onDataSourceViewChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnDataSourceViewChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TReadOnlyDataSourceView class
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TReadOnlyDataSourceView extends TDataSourceView
+{
+	private $_dataSource=null;
+
+	public function __construct(IDataSource $owner,$viewName,$dataSource)
+	{
+		parent::__construct($owner,$viewName);
+		if($dataSource===null || is_array($dataSource))
+			$this->_dataSource=new TMap($dataSource);
+		else if($dataSource instanceof Traversable)
+			$this->_dataSource=$dataSource;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('readonlydatasourceview_datasource_invalid');
+	}
+
+	public function select($parameters)
+	{
+		return $this->_dataSource;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataTypeValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataTypeValidator.php
index 24372565..0e412e24 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataTypeValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDataTypeValidator.php
@@ -1,141 +1,141 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDataTypeValidator class.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDataTypeValidator class.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TBaseValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-
-/**
- * TDataTypeValidator class
- *
- * TDataTypeValidator verifies if the input data is of the type specified
- * by {@link setDataType DataType}.
- * The following data types are supported:
- * - <b>Integer</b> A 32-bit signed integer data type.
- * - <b>Float</b> A double-precision floating point number data type.
- * - <b>Date</b> A date data type.
- * - <b>String</b> A string data type.
- * For <b>Date</b> type, the property {@link setDateFormat DateFormat}
- * will be used to determine how to parse the date string. If it is not
- * provided, the string will be assumed to be in GNU datetime format.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDataTypeValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TDataTypeValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TValidationDataType the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made. Defaults to TValidationDataType::String.
-	 */
-	public function getDataType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataType','String');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made.
-	 * @param TValidationDataType the data type
-	 */
-	public function setDataType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationDataType'),TValidationDataType::String);
-	}
-
-	/**
-     * Sets the date format for a date validation
-     * @param string the date format value
-     */
-	public function setDateFormat($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DateFormat', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the date validation date format if any
-	 */
-	public function getDateFormat()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat', '');
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * Determine if the given value is of a particular type using RegExp.
-	 * @param string value to check
-	 * @return boolean true if value fits the type expression.
-	 */
-	protected function evaluateDataTypeCheck($value)
-	{
-		if($value=='')
-			return true;
-
-		switch($this->getDataType())
-		{
-			case TValidationDataType::Integer:
-				return preg_match('/^[-+]?[0-9]+$/',trim($value));
-			case TValidationDataType::Float:
-				return preg_match('/^[-+]?([0-9]*\.)?[0-9]+([eE][-+]?[0-9]+)?$/',trim($value));
-			case TValidationDataType::Date:
-				$dateFormat = $this->getDateFormat();
-				if(strlen($dateFormat))
-				{
-					$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',$dateFormat);
-					return $formatter->isValidDate($value);
-				}
-				else
-					return strtotime($value) > 0;
-		}
-		return true;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		$options['DataType']=$this->getDataType();
-		if(($dateFormat=$this->getDateFormat())!=='')
-			$options['DateFormat']=$dateFormat;
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input data is of valid type.
-	 * The validation always succeeds if ControlToValidate is not specified
-	 * or the input data is empty.
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	public function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))==='')
-			return true;
-
-		return $this->evaluateDataTypeCheck($value);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TBaseValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TDataTypeValidator class
+ *
+ * TDataTypeValidator verifies if the input data is of the type specified
+ * by {@link setDataType DataType}.
+ * The following data types are supported:
+ * - <b>Integer</b> A 32-bit signed integer data type.
+ * - <b>Float</b> A double-precision floating point number data type.
+ * - <b>Date</b> A date data type.
+ * - <b>String</b> A string data type.
+ * For <b>Date</b> type, the property {@link setDateFormat DateFormat}
+ * will be used to determine how to parse the date string. If it is not
+ * provided, the string will be assumed to be in GNU datetime format.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDataTypeValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TDataTypeValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TValidationDataType the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made. Defaults to TValidationDataType::String.
+	 */
+	public function getDataType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataType','String');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made.
+	 * @param TValidationDataType the data type
+	 */
+	public function setDataType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationDataType'),TValidationDataType::String);
+	}
+
+	/**
+     * Sets the date format for a date validation
+     * @param string the date format value
+     */
+	public function setDateFormat($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DateFormat', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the date validation date format if any
+	 */
+	public function getDateFormat()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat', '');
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * Determine if the given value is of a particular type using RegExp.
+	 * @param string value to check
+	 * @return boolean true if value fits the type expression.
+	 */
+	protected function evaluateDataTypeCheck($value)
+	{
+		if($value=='')
+			return true;
+
+		switch($this->getDataType())
+		{
+			case TValidationDataType::Integer:
+				return preg_match('/^[-+]?[0-9]+$/',trim($value));
+			case TValidationDataType::Float:
+				return preg_match('/^[-+]?([0-9]*\.)?[0-9]+([eE][-+]?[0-9]+)?$/',trim($value));
+			case TValidationDataType::Date:
+				$dateFormat = $this->getDateFormat();
+				if(strlen($dateFormat))
+				{
+					$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',$dateFormat);
+					return $formatter->isValidDate($value);
+				}
+				else
+					return strtotime($value) > 0;
+		}
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		$options['DataType']=$this->getDataType();
+		if(($dateFormat=$this->getDateFormat())!=='')
+			$options['DateFormat']=$dateFormat;
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input data is of valid type.
+	 * The validation always succeeds if ControlToValidate is not specified
+	 * or the input data is empty.
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	public function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))==='')
+			return true;
+
+		return $this->evaluateDataTypeCheck($value);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDatePicker.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDatePicker.php
index 8d1a811c..866bc585 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDatePicker.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDatePicker.php
@@ -1,993 +1,993 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDatePicker class file.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TTextBox class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTextBox');
-
-/**
- *
- * TDatePicker class.
- *
- * TDatePicker displays a text box for date input purpose.
- * When the text box receives focus, a calendar will pop up and users can
- * pick up from it a date that will be automatically entered into the text box.
- * The format of the date string displayed in the text box is determined by
- * the <b>DateFormat</b> property. Valid formats are the combination of the
- * following tokens,
- *
- * <code>
- *  Character Format Pattern (en-US)
- *  -----------------------------------------
- *  d          day digit
- *  dd         padded day digit e.g. 01, 02
- *  M          month digit
- *  MM         padded month digit
- *  MMMM       localized month name, e.g. March, April
- *  yy         2 digit year
- *  yyyy       4 digit year
- *  -----------------------------------------
- * </code>
- *
- * TDatePicker has four <b>Mode</b> to show the date picker popup.
- *
- *  # <b>Basic</b> -- Only shows a text input, focusing on the input shows the
- *                    date picker. This way you can access the popup using only
- *                    the keyboard. Note that because of this, TAB-bing through
- *                    this control will automatically select the current date if
- *                    no previous date was selected. If you close the popup (eg.
- *                    pressing the ESC key) you'll need to un-focus and re-focus
- *                    the control again for the popup to reappear.
- *  # <b>Clickable</b> -- Only shows a text input, clicking on the input shows the
- *                    date picker. This mode solves the two small problems of the
- *                    Basic mode. It was first introduced in Prado 3.2.
- *  # <b>Button</b> -- Shows a button next to the text input, clicking on the
- *                     button shows the date, button text can be by the
- *                     <b>ButtonText</b> property
- *  # <b>ImageButton</b> -- Shows an image next to the text input, clicking on
- *                          the image shows the date picker, image source can be
- *                          change through the <b>ButtonImageUrl</b> property.
- *
- * The <b>CssClass</b> property can be used to override the css class name
- * for the date picker panel. <b>CalendarStyle</b> property sets the packages
- * styles available. E.g. <b>default</b>.
- *
- * The <b>InputMode</b> property can be set to "TextBox" or "DropDownList" with
- * default as "TextBox".
- * In <b>DropDownList</b> mode, in addition to the popup date picker, three
- * drop down list (day, month and year) are presented to select the date .
- *
- * The <b>PositionMode</b> property can be set to "Top" or "Bottom" with default
- * as "Bottom". It specifies the position of the calendar popup, relative to the
- * input field.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @author Carl G. Mathisen <carlgmathisen@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDatePicker extends TTextBox
-{
-	/**
-	 * Script path relative to the TClientScriptManager::SCRIPT_PATH
-	 */
-	const SCRIPT_PATH = 'prado/datepicker';
-
-	/**
-	 * @var TDatePickerClientScript validator client-script options.
-	 */
-	private $_clientScript;
-	/**
-	 * AutoPostBack is not supported.
-	 */
-	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('tdatepicker_autopostback_unsupported',
-			get_class($this));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the format of the date string
-	 */
-	public function getDateFormat()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat','dd-MM-yyyy');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the format of the date string.
-	 * @param string the format of the date string
-	 */
-	public function setDateFormat($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DateFormat',$value,'dd-MM-yyyy');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the calendar window should pop up when the control receives focus
-	 */
-	public function getShowCalendar()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowCalendar',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets whether to pop up the calendar window when the control receives focus
-	 * @param boolean whether to show the calendar window
-	 */
-	public function setShowCalendar($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowCalendar',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the current culture.
-	 * @return string current culture, e.g. en_AU.
-	 */
-	public function getCulture()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Culture', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the culture/language for the date picker.
-	 * @param string a culture string, e.g. en_AU.
-	 */
-	public function setCulture($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Culture', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TDatePickerInputMode input method of date values
-	 */
-	public function setInputMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('InputMode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDatePickerInputMode'), TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDatePickerInputMode input method of date values. Defaults to TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox.
-	 */
-	public function getInputMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('InputMode', TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TDatePickerMode calendar UI mode
-	 */
-	public function setMode($value)
-	{
-	   $this->setViewState('Mode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDatePickerMode'), TDatePickerMode::Basic);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDatePickerMode current calendar UI mode.
-	 */
-	public function getMode()
-	{
-	   return $this->getViewState('Mode', TDatePickerMode::Basic);
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @param string the image url for "Image" UI mode.
-	 */
-	public function setButtonImageUrl($value)
-	{
-	   $this->setViewState('ImageUrl', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the image url for "Image" UI mode.
-	 */
-	public function getButtonImageUrl()
-	{
-	   return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string set the calendar style
-	 */
-	public function setCalendarStyle($value)
-	{
-	   $this->setViewState('CalendarStyle', $value, 'default');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string current calendar style
-	 */
-	public function getCalendarStyle()
-	{
-	   return $this->getViewState('CalendarStyle', 'default');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Set the first day of week, with 0 as Sunday, 1 as Monday, etc.
-	 * @param integer 0 for Sunday, 1 for Monday, 2 for Tuesday, etc.
-	 */
-	public function setFirstDayOfWeek($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FirstDayOfWeek', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), 1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer first day of the week
-	 */
-	public function getFirstDayOfWeek()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FirstDayOfWeek', 1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the date picker button. Default is "...".
-	 */
-	public function getButtonText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ButtonText', '...');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the date picker button
-	 */
-	public function setButtonText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ButtonText', $value, '...');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer date picker starting year, default is 2000.
-	 */
-	public function setFromYear($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FromYear', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), intval(@date('Y'))-5);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer date picker starting year, default is -5 years
-	 */
-	public function getFromYear()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FromYear', intval(@date('Y'))-5);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer date picker ending year, default +10 years
-	 */
-	public function setUpToYear($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('UpToYear', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), intval(@date('Y'))+10);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer date picker ending year, default +10 years
-	 */
-	public function getUpToYear()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('UpToYear', intval(@date('Y'))+10);
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @param TDatePickerPositionMode calendar UI position
-	 */
-	public function setPositionMode($value)
-	{
-	   $this->setViewState('PositionMode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDatePickerPositionMode'), TDatePickerPositionMode::Bottom);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDatePickerPositionMode current calendar UI position.
-	 */
-	public function getPositionMode()
-	{
-	   return $this->getViewState('PositionMode', TDatePickerPositionMode::Bottom);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer current selected date from the date picker as timestamp, NULL if timestamp is not set previously.
-	 */
-	public function getTimeStamp()
-	{
-		if(trim($this->getText())==='')
-			return null;
-		else
-			return $this->getTimeStampFromText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the date for the date picker using timestamp.
-	 * @param float time stamp for the date picker
-	 */
-	public function setTimeStamp($value)
-	{
-		if($value===null || (is_string($value) && trim($value)===''))
-			$this->setText('');
-		else
-		{
-			$date = TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value);
-			$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',$this->getDateFormat());
-			$this->setText($formatter->format($date));
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the timestamp selected by the user.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getTimeStamp()}.
-	 * @return integer the timestamp of the TDatePicker control.
-	 * @see getTimeStamp
-	 * @since 3.1.2
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getTimeStamp();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the timestamp represented by this control.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setTimeStamp()}.
-	 * @param integer the timestamp of the TDatePicker control.
-	 * @see setTimeStamp
-	 * @since 3.1.2
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setTimeStamp($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the date string.
-	 */
-	public function getDate()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string date string
-	 */
-	public function setDate($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the TDatePickerClientScript to set the TDatePicker event handlers.
-	 *
-	 * The date picker on the client-side supports the following events.
-	 * # <tt>OnDateChanged</tt> -- raised when the date is changed.
-	 *
-	 * You can attach custom javascript code to each of these events
-	 *
-	 * @return TDatePickerClientScript javascript validator event options.
-	 */
-	public function getClientSide()
-	{
-		if($this->_clientScript===null)
-			$this->_clientScript = $this->createClientScript();
-		return $this->_clientScript;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDatePickerClientScript javascript validator event options.
-	 */
-	protected function createClientScript()
-	{
-		return new TDatePickerClientScript;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value to be validated.
-	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
-	 * @return integer the interger timestamp if valid, otherwise the original text.
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		if(($text = $this->getText()) === '')
-			return '';
-		$date = $this->getTimeStamp();
-		return $date == null ? $text : $date;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Publish the date picker Css asset files.
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		if($this->getInputMode() === TDatePickerInputMode::DropDownList)
-		{
-			$page = $this->getPage();
-			$uniqueID = $this->getUniqueID();
-			$page->registerPostDataLoader($uniqueID.TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'day');
-			$page->registerPostDataLoader($uniqueID.TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'month');
-			$page->registerPostDataLoader($uniqueID.TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'year');
-		}
-		$this->publishCalendarStyle();
-		$this->registerCalendarClientScriptPre();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body content.
-	 * This method overrides parent implementation by adding
-	 * additional date picker button if Mode is Button or ImageButton.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getInputMode() == TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox)
-		{
-			parent::render($writer);
-			$this->renderDatePickerButtons($writer);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$this->renderDropDownListCalendar($writer);
-			if($this->hasDayPattern())
-			{
-				$this->registerCalendarClientScriptPost();
-				$this->renderDatePickerButtons($writer);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the date picker popup buttons.
-	 */
-	protected function renderDatePickerButtons($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getShowCalendar())
-		{
-			switch ($this->getMode())
-			{
-				case TDatePickerMode::Button:
-					$this->renderButtonDatePicker($writer);
-					break;
-				case TDatePickerMode::ImageButton :
-					$this->renderImageButtonDatePicker($writer);
-					break;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data. Override parent implementation, when InputMode
-	 * is DropDownList call getDateFromPostData to get date data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		if($this->getInputMode() == TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox)
-			return parent::loadPostData($key, $values);
-		$value = $this->getDateFromPostData($key, $values);
-		if(!$this->getReadOnly() && $this->getText()!==$value)
-		{
-			$this->setText($value);
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads date from drop down list data.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return array the date selected
-	 */
-	protected function getDateFromPostData($key, $values)
-	{
-		$date = @getdate();
-
-		if(isset($values[$key.'$day']))
-			$day = intval($values[$key.'$day']);
-		else
-			$day = $date['mday'];
-
-		if(isset($values[$key.'$month']))
-			$month = intval($values[$key.'$month']) + 1;
-		else
-			$month = $date['mon'];
-
-		if(isset($values[$key.'$year']))
-			$year = intval($values[$key.'$year']);
-		else
-			$year = $date['year'];
-
-		$s = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TDateTimeStamp');
-		$date = $s->getTimeStamp(0, 0, 0, $month, $day, $year);
-		//$date = @mktime(0, 0, 0, $month, $day, $year);
-
-		$pattern = $this->getDateFormat();
-		$pattern = str_replace(array('MMMM', 'MMM'), array('MM','MM'), $pattern);
-		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter', $pattern);
-		return $formatter->format($date);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Get javascript date picker options.
-	 * @return array date picker client-side options
-	 */
-	protected function getDatePickerOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['InputMode'] = $this->getInputMode();
-		$options['Format'] = $this->getDateFormat();
-		$options['FirstDayOfWeek'] = $this->getFirstDayOfWeek();
-		if(($cssClass=$this->getCssClass())!=='')
-			$options['ClassName'] = $cssClass;
-		$options['CalendarStyle'] = $this->getCalendarStyle();
-		$options['FromYear'] = $this->getFromYear();
-		$options['UpToYear'] = $this->getUpToYear();
-		switch($this->getMode())
-		{
-			case TDatePickerMode::Basic:
-				break;
-			case TDatePickerMode::Clickable:
-				$options['TriggerEvent'] = "click";
-				break;
-			default:
-				$options['Trigger'] = $this->getDatePickerButtonID();
-				break;
-		}
-		$options['PositionMode'] = $this->getPositionMode();
-
-		$options = array_merge($options, $this->getCulturalOptions());
-		if($this->_clientScript!==null)
-			$options = array_merge($options,
-				$this->_clientScript->getOptions()->toArray());
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Get javascript localization options, e.g. month and weekday names.
-	 * @return array localization options.
-	 */
-	protected function getCulturalOptions()
-	{
-		if($this->getCurrentCulture() == 'en')
-			return array();
-
-		$date = $this->getLocalizedCalendarInfo();
-		$options['MonthNames'] = $date->getMonthNames();
-		$options['AbbreviatedMonthNames'] = $date->getAbbreviatedMonthNames();
-		$options['ShortWeekDayNames'] = $date->getAbbreviatedDayNames();
-
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the current culture, falls back to application if culture is not set.
-	 */
-	protected function getCurrentCulture()
-	{
-		$app = $this->getApplication()->getGlobalization(false);
-		return $this->getCulture() == '' ?
-				($app ? $app->getCulture() : 'en') : $this->getCulture();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return DateTimeFormatInfo date time format information for the current culture.
-	 */
-	protected function getLocalizedCalendarInfo()
-	{
-		//expensive operations
-		$culture = $this->getCurrentCulture();
-		Prado::using('System.I18N.core.DateTimeFormatInfo');
-		$info = Prado::createComponent('System.I18N.core.CultureInfo', $culture);
-		return $info->getDateTimeFormat();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the drop down list date picker.
-	 */
-	protected function renderDropDownListCalendar($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getMode() == TDatePickerMode::Basic)
-			$this->setMode(TDatePickerMode::ImageButton);
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$writer->removeAttribute('name');
-		$writer->removeAttribute('type');
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID());
-
-		if(strlen($class = $this->getCssClass()) > 0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('class', $class);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
-
-		$s = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TDateTimeStamp');
-		$date = $s->getDate($this->getTimeStampFromText());
-		//$date = @getdate($this->getTimeStampFromText());
-
-		$this->renderCalendarSelections($writer, $date);
-
-		//render a hidden input field
-		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID());
-		$writer->addAttribute('type', 'hidden');
-		$writer->addAttribute('value', $this->getText());
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
-
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	protected function hasDayPattern()
-	{
-		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
-						$this->getDateFormat());
-		return ($formatter->getDayPattern()!==null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the calendar drop down list depending on the DateFormat pattern.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the Html writer to render the drop down lists.
-	 * @param array the current selected date
-	 */
-	protected function renderCalendarSelections($writer, $date)
-	{
-		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
-						$this->getDateFormat());
-
-		foreach($formatter->getDayMonthYearOrdering() as $type)
-		{
-			if($type == 'day')
-				$this->renderCalendarDayOptions($writer,$date['mday']);
-			elseif($type == 'month')
-				$this->renderCalendarMonthOptions($writer,$date['mon']);
-			elseif($type == 'year')
-				$this->renderCalendarYearOptions($writer,$date['year']);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the date from the text input using TSimpleDateFormatter
-	 * @return integer current selected date timestamp
-	 */
-	protected function getTimeStampFromText()
-	{
-		$pattern = $this->getDateFormat();
-		$pattern = str_replace(array('MMMM', 'MMM'), array('MM','MM'), $pattern);
-		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',$pattern);
-		return $formatter->parse($this->getText());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders a drop down lists.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param array list of selection options
-	 * @param mixed selected key.
-	 */
-	private function renderDropDownListOptions($writer,$options,$selected=null)
-	{
-		foreach($options as $k => $v)
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('value', $k);
-			if($k == $selected)
-				$writer->addAttribute('selected', 'selected');
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('option');
-			$writer->write($v);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the day drop down list options.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param mixed selected day.
-	 */
-	protected function renderCalendarDayOptions($writer, $selected=null)
-	{
-		$days = $this->getDropDownDayOptions();
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().TControl::CLIENT_ID_SEPARATOR.'day');
-		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID().TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'day');
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'datepicker_day_options');
-		if($this->getReadOnly() || !$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('select');
-		$this->renderDropDownListOptions($writer, $days, $selected);
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array list of day options for a drop down list.
-	 */
-	protected function getDropDownDayOptions()
-	{
-		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
-						$this->getDateFormat());
-		$days = array();
-		$requiresPadding = $formatter->getDayPattern() === 'dd';
-		for($i=1;$i<=31;$i++)
-		{
-			$days[$i] = $requiresPadding ? str_pad($i, 2, '0', STR_PAD_LEFT) : $i;
-		}
-		return $days;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the month drop down list options.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param mixed selected month.
-	 */
-	protected function renderCalendarMonthOptions($writer, $selected=null)
-	{
-		$info = $this->getLocalizedCalendarInfo();
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().TControl::CLIENT_ID_SEPARATOR.'month');
-		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID().TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'month');
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'datepicker_month_options');
-		if($this->getReadOnly() || !$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('select');
-		$this->renderDropDownListOptions($writer,
-					$this->getLocalizedMonthNames($info), $selected-1);
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the localized month names that depends on the month format pattern.
-	 * "MMMM" will return the month names, "MM" or "MMM" return abbr. month names
-	 * and "M" return month digits.
-	 * @param DateTimeFormatInfo localized date format information.
-	 * @return array localized month names.
-	 */
-	protected function getLocalizedMonthNames($info)
-	{
-		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
-						$this->getDateFormat());
-		switch($formatter->getMonthPattern())
-		{
-			case 'MMM': return $info->getAbbreviatedMonthNames();
-			case 'MM':
-				$array = array();
-				for($i=1;$i<=12;$i++)
-						$array[$i-1] = $i < 10 ? '0'.$i : $i;
-				return $array;
-			case 'M':
-				$array = array(); for($i=1;$i<=12;$i++) $array[$i-1] = $i;
-				return $array;
-			default :	return $info->getMonthNames();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the year drop down list options.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param mixed selected year.
-	 */
-	protected function renderCalendarYearOptions($writer, $selected=null)
-	{
-		$years = array();
-		for($i = $this->getFromYear(); $i <= $this->getUpToYear(); $i++)
-			$years[$i] = $i;
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().TControl::CLIENT_ID_SEPARATOR.'year');
-		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID().TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'year');
-		if($this->getReadOnly() || !$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('select');
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'datepicker_year_options');
-		$this->renderDropDownListOptions($writer, $years, $selected);
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the ID for the date picker trigger button.
-	 * @return string unique button ID
-	 */
-	protected function getDatePickerButtonID()
-	{
-		return $this->getClientID().'button';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds an additional button such that when clicked it shows the date picker.
-	 * @return THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	protected function renderButtonDatePicker($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getDatePickerButtonID());
-		$writer->addAttribute('type', 'button');
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', $this->getCssClass().' TDatePickerButton');
-		$writer->addAttribute('value',$this->getButtonText());
-		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag("input");
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds an additional image button such that when clicked it shows the date picker.
-	 * @return THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	 protected function renderImageButtonDatePicker($writer)
-	{
-		$url = $this->getButtonImageUrl();
-		$url = empty($url) ? $this->getAssetUrl('calendar.png') : $url;
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getDatePickerButtonID());
-		$writer->addAttribute('src', $url);
-		$writer->addAttribute('alt', ' ');
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', $this->getCssClass().' TDatePickerImageButton');
-		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
-		$writer->addAttribute('type', 'image');
-		$writer->addAttribute('onclick', 'return false;');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string date picker asset file in the self::SCRIPT_PATH directory.
-	 * @return string date picker asset url.
-	 */
-	protected function getAssetUrl($file='')
-	{
-		$base = $this->getPage()->getClientScript()->getPradoScriptAssetUrl();
-		return $base.'/'.self::SCRIPT_PATH.'/'.$file;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Publish the calendar style Css asset file.
-	 * @return string Css file url.
-	 */
-	protected function publishCalendarStyle()
-	{
-		$url = $this->getAssetUrl($this->getCalendarStyle().'.css');
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		if(!$cs->isStyleSheetFileRegistered($url))
-			$cs->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
-		return $url;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Add the client id to the input textbox, and register the client scripts.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		$this->registerCalendarClientScriptPost();
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the javascript code to initialize the date picker.
-	 */
-	protected function registerCalendarClientScriptPre()
-	{
-		if($this->getShowCalendar())
-		{
-			$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-			$cs->registerPradoScript("datepicker");
-		}
-	}
-
-	protected function registerCalendarClientScriptPost()
-	{
-		if($this->getShowCalendar())
-		{
-			$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-			if(!$cs->isEndScriptRegistered('TDatePicker.spacer'))
-			{
-				$spacer = $this->getAssetUrl('spacer.gif');
-				$code = "Prado.WebUI.TDatePicker.spacer = '$spacer';";
-				$cs->registerEndScript('TDatePicker.spacer', $code);
-			}
-
-			$options = TJavaScript::encode($this->getDatePickerOptions());
-			$code = "new Prado.WebUI.TDatePicker($options);";
-			$cs->registerEndScript("prado:".$this->getClientID(), $code);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDatePickerClientScript class.
- *
- * Client-side date picker event {@link setOnDateChanged OnDateChanged}
- * can be modified through the {@link TDatePicker::getClientSide ClientSide}
- * property of a date picker.
- *
- * The <tt>OnDateChanged</tt> event is raise when the date picker's date
- * is changed.
- * The formatted date according to {@link TDatePicker::getDateFormat DateFormat} is sent
- * as parameter to this event
- * 
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TDatePickerClientScript extends TClientSideOptions
-{
-	/**
-	 * Javascript code to execute when the date picker's date is changed.
-	 * @param string javascript code
-	 */
-	public function setOnDateChanged($javascript)
-	{
-		$this->setFunction('OnDateChanged', $javascript);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string javascript code to execute when the date picker's date is changed.
-	 */
-	public function getOnDateChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->getOption('OnDateChanged');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TDatePickerInputMode class.
- * TDatePickerInputMode defines the enumerable type for the possible datepicker input methods.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - TextBox: text boxes are used to input date values
- * - DropDownList: dropdown lists are used to pick up date values
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TDatePickerInputMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const TextBox='TextBox';
-	const DropDownList='DropDownList';
-}
-
-/**
- * TDatePickerMode class.
- * TDatePickerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible UI mode
- * that a {@link TDatePicker} control can take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Basic: Only shows a text input, focusing on the input shows the date picker
- * - Clickable: Only shows a text input, clicking on the input shows the date picker (since 3.2)
- * - Button: Shows a button next to the text input, clicking on the button shows the date, button text can be by the
- * - ImageButton: Shows an image next to the text input, clicking on the image shows the date picker,
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TDatePickerMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Basic='Basic';
-	const Clickable='Clickable';
-	const Button='Button';
-	const ImageButton='ImageButton';
-}
-
-/**
- * TDatePickerPositionMode class.
- * TDatePickerPositionMode defines the positions available for the calendar popup, relative to the corresponding input.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Top: the date picker is placed above the input field
- * - Bottom: the date picker is placed below the input field
- *
- * @author Carl G. Mathisen <carlgmathisen@gmail.com>
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.4
- */
-class TDatePickerPositionMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Top='Top';
-	const Bottom='Bottom';
-}
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDatePicker class file.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TTextBox class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTextBox');
+
+/**
+ *
+ * TDatePicker class.
+ *
+ * TDatePicker displays a text box for date input purpose.
+ * When the text box receives focus, a calendar will pop up and users can
+ * pick up from it a date that will be automatically entered into the text box.
+ * The format of the date string displayed in the text box is determined by
+ * the <b>DateFormat</b> property. Valid formats are the combination of the
+ * following tokens,
+ *
+ * <code>
+ *  Character Format Pattern (en-US)
+ *  -----------------------------------------
+ *  d          day digit
+ *  dd         padded day digit e.g. 01, 02
+ *  M          month digit
+ *  MM         padded month digit
+ *  MMMM       localized month name, e.g. March, April
+ *  yy         2 digit year
+ *  yyyy       4 digit year
+ *  -----------------------------------------
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * TDatePicker has four <b>Mode</b> to show the date picker popup.
+ *
+ *  # <b>Basic</b> -- Only shows a text input, focusing on the input shows the
+ *                    date picker. This way you can access the popup using only
+ *                    the keyboard. Note that because of this, TAB-bing through
+ *                    this control will automatically select the current date if
+ *                    no previous date was selected. If you close the popup (eg.
+ *                    pressing the ESC key) you'll need to un-focus and re-focus
+ *                    the control again for the popup to reappear.
+ *  # <b>Clickable</b> -- Only shows a text input, clicking on the input shows the
+ *                    date picker. This mode solves the two small problems of the
+ *                    Basic mode. It was first introduced in Prado 3.2.
+ *  # <b>Button</b> -- Shows a button next to the text input, clicking on the
+ *                     button shows the date, button text can be by the
+ *                     <b>ButtonText</b> property
+ *  # <b>ImageButton</b> -- Shows an image next to the text input, clicking on
+ *                          the image shows the date picker, image source can be
+ *                          change through the <b>ButtonImageUrl</b> property.
+ *
+ * The <b>CssClass</b> property can be used to override the css class name
+ * for the date picker panel. <b>CalendarStyle</b> property sets the packages
+ * styles available. E.g. <b>default</b>.
+ *
+ * The <b>InputMode</b> property can be set to "TextBox" or "DropDownList" with
+ * default as "TextBox".
+ * In <b>DropDownList</b> mode, in addition to the popup date picker, three
+ * drop down list (day, month and year) are presented to select the date .
+ *
+ * The <b>PositionMode</b> property can be set to "Top" or "Bottom" with default
+ * as "Bottom". It specifies the position of the calendar popup, relative to the
+ * input field.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @author Carl G. Mathisen <carlgmathisen@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDatePicker extends TTextBox
+{
+	/**
+	 * Script path relative to the TClientScriptManager::SCRIPT_PATH
+	 */
+	const SCRIPT_PATH = 'prado/datepicker';
+
+	/**
+	 * @var TDatePickerClientScript validator client-script options.
+	 */
+	private $_clientScript;
+	/**
+	 * AutoPostBack is not supported.
+	 */
+	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('tdatepicker_autopostback_unsupported',
+			get_class($this));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the format of the date string
+	 */
+	public function getDateFormat()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat','dd-MM-yyyy');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the format of the date string.
+	 * @param string the format of the date string
+	 */
+	public function setDateFormat($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DateFormat',$value,'dd-MM-yyyy');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the calendar window should pop up when the control receives focus
+	 */
+	public function getShowCalendar()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowCalendar',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets whether to pop up the calendar window when the control receives focus
+	 * @param boolean whether to show the calendar window
+	 */
+	public function setShowCalendar($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowCalendar',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the current culture.
+	 * @return string current culture, e.g. en_AU.
+	 */
+	public function getCulture()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Culture', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the culture/language for the date picker.
+	 * @param string a culture string, e.g. en_AU.
+	 */
+	public function setCulture($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Culture', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TDatePickerInputMode input method of date values
+	 */
+	public function setInputMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('InputMode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDatePickerInputMode'), TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDatePickerInputMode input method of date values. Defaults to TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox.
+	 */
+	public function getInputMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('InputMode', TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TDatePickerMode calendar UI mode
+	 */
+	public function setMode($value)
+	{
+	   $this->setViewState('Mode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDatePickerMode'), TDatePickerMode::Basic);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDatePickerMode current calendar UI mode.
+	 */
+	public function getMode()
+	{
+	   return $this->getViewState('Mode', TDatePickerMode::Basic);
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @param string the image url for "Image" UI mode.
+	 */
+	public function setButtonImageUrl($value)
+	{
+	   $this->setViewState('ImageUrl', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the image url for "Image" UI mode.
+	 */
+	public function getButtonImageUrl()
+	{
+	   return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string set the calendar style
+	 */
+	public function setCalendarStyle($value)
+	{
+	   $this->setViewState('CalendarStyle', $value, 'default');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string current calendar style
+	 */
+	public function getCalendarStyle()
+	{
+	   return $this->getViewState('CalendarStyle', 'default');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Set the first day of week, with 0 as Sunday, 1 as Monday, etc.
+	 * @param integer 0 for Sunday, 1 for Monday, 2 for Tuesday, etc.
+	 */
+	public function setFirstDayOfWeek($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FirstDayOfWeek', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), 1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer first day of the week
+	 */
+	public function getFirstDayOfWeek()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FirstDayOfWeek', 1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the date picker button. Default is "...".
+	 */
+	public function getButtonText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ButtonText', '...');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the date picker button
+	 */
+	public function setButtonText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ButtonText', $value, '...');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer date picker starting year, default is 2000.
+	 */
+	public function setFromYear($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FromYear', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), intval(@date('Y'))-5);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer date picker starting year, default is -5 years
+	 */
+	public function getFromYear()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FromYear', intval(@date('Y'))-5);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer date picker ending year, default +10 years
+	 */
+	public function setUpToYear($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('UpToYear', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), intval(@date('Y'))+10);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer date picker ending year, default +10 years
+	 */
+	public function getUpToYear()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('UpToYear', intval(@date('Y'))+10);
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @param TDatePickerPositionMode calendar UI position
+	 */
+	public function setPositionMode($value)
+	{
+	   $this->setViewState('PositionMode', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDatePickerPositionMode'), TDatePickerPositionMode::Bottom);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDatePickerPositionMode current calendar UI position.
+	 */
+	public function getPositionMode()
+	{
+	   return $this->getViewState('PositionMode', TDatePickerPositionMode::Bottom);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer current selected date from the date picker as timestamp, NULL if timestamp is not set previously.
+	 */
+	public function getTimeStamp()
+	{
+		if(trim($this->getText())==='')
+			return null;
+		else
+			return $this->getTimeStampFromText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the date for the date picker using timestamp.
+	 * @param float time stamp for the date picker
+	 */
+	public function setTimeStamp($value)
+	{
+		if($value===null || (is_string($value) && trim($value)===''))
+			$this->setText('');
+		else
+		{
+			$date = TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value);
+			$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',$this->getDateFormat());
+			$this->setText($formatter->format($date));
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the timestamp selected by the user.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getTimeStamp()}.
+	 * @return integer the timestamp of the TDatePicker control.
+	 * @see getTimeStamp
+	 * @since 3.1.2
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getTimeStamp();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the timestamp represented by this control.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setTimeStamp()}.
+	 * @param integer the timestamp of the TDatePicker control.
+	 * @see setTimeStamp
+	 * @since 3.1.2
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setTimeStamp($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the date string.
+	 */
+	public function getDate()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string date string
+	 */
+	public function setDate($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the TDatePickerClientScript to set the TDatePicker event handlers.
+	 *
+	 * The date picker on the client-side supports the following events.
+	 * # <tt>OnDateChanged</tt> -- raised when the date is changed.
+	 *
+	 * You can attach custom javascript code to each of these events
+	 *
+	 * @return TDatePickerClientScript javascript validator event options.
+	 */
+	public function getClientSide()
+	{
+		if($this->_clientScript===null)
+			$this->_clientScript = $this->createClientScript();
+		return $this->_clientScript;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDatePickerClientScript javascript validator event options.
+	 */
+	protected function createClientScript()
+	{
+		return new TDatePickerClientScript;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value to be validated.
+	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
+	 * @return integer the interger timestamp if valid, otherwise the original text.
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		if(($text = $this->getText()) === '')
+			return '';
+		$date = $this->getTimeStamp();
+		return $date == null ? $text : $date;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Publish the date picker Css asset files.
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		if($this->getInputMode() === TDatePickerInputMode::DropDownList)
+		{
+			$page = $this->getPage();
+			$uniqueID = $this->getUniqueID();
+			$page->registerPostDataLoader($uniqueID.TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'day');
+			$page->registerPostDataLoader($uniqueID.TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'month');
+			$page->registerPostDataLoader($uniqueID.TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'year');
+		}
+		$this->publishCalendarStyle();
+		$this->registerCalendarClientScriptPre();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body content.
+	 * This method overrides parent implementation by adding
+	 * additional date picker button if Mode is Button or ImageButton.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getInputMode() == TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox)
+		{
+			parent::render($writer);
+			$this->renderDatePickerButtons($writer);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$this->renderDropDownListCalendar($writer);
+			if($this->hasDayPattern())
+			{
+				$this->registerCalendarClientScriptPost();
+				$this->renderDatePickerButtons($writer);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the date picker popup buttons.
+	 */
+	protected function renderDatePickerButtons($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getShowCalendar())
+		{
+			switch ($this->getMode())
+			{
+				case TDatePickerMode::Button:
+					$this->renderButtonDatePicker($writer);
+					break;
+				case TDatePickerMode::ImageButton :
+					$this->renderImageButtonDatePicker($writer);
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data. Override parent implementation, when InputMode
+	 * is DropDownList call getDateFromPostData to get date data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		if($this->getInputMode() == TDatePickerInputMode::TextBox)
+			return parent::loadPostData($key, $values);
+		$value = $this->getDateFromPostData($key, $values);
+		if(!$this->getReadOnly() && $this->getText()!==$value)
+		{
+			$this->setText($value);
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads date from drop down list data.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return array the date selected
+	 */
+	protected function getDateFromPostData($key, $values)
+	{
+		$date = @getdate();
+
+		if(isset($values[$key.'$day']))
+			$day = intval($values[$key.'$day']);
+		else
+			$day = $date['mday'];
+
+		if(isset($values[$key.'$month']))
+			$month = intval($values[$key.'$month']) + 1;
+		else
+			$month = $date['mon'];
+
+		if(isset($values[$key.'$year']))
+			$year = intval($values[$key.'$year']);
+		else
+			$year = $date['year'];
+
+		$s = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TDateTimeStamp');
+		$date = $s->getTimeStamp(0, 0, 0, $month, $day, $year);
+		//$date = @mktime(0, 0, 0, $month, $day, $year);
+
+		$pattern = $this->getDateFormat();
+		$pattern = str_replace(array('MMMM', 'MMM'), array('MM','MM'), $pattern);
+		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter', $pattern);
+		return $formatter->format($date);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Get javascript date picker options.
+	 * @return array date picker client-side options
+	 */
+	protected function getDatePickerOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['InputMode'] = $this->getInputMode();
+		$options['Format'] = $this->getDateFormat();
+		$options['FirstDayOfWeek'] = $this->getFirstDayOfWeek();
+		if(($cssClass=$this->getCssClass())!=='')
+			$options['ClassName'] = $cssClass;
+		$options['CalendarStyle'] = $this->getCalendarStyle();
+		$options['FromYear'] = $this->getFromYear();
+		$options['UpToYear'] = $this->getUpToYear();
+		switch($this->getMode())
+		{
+			case TDatePickerMode::Basic:
+				break;
+			case TDatePickerMode::Clickable:
+				$options['TriggerEvent'] = "click";
+				break;
+			default:
+				$options['Trigger'] = $this->getDatePickerButtonID();
+				break;
+		}
+		$options['PositionMode'] = $this->getPositionMode();
+
+		$options = array_merge($options, $this->getCulturalOptions());
+		if($this->_clientScript!==null)
+			$options = array_merge($options,
+				$this->_clientScript->getOptions()->toArray());
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Get javascript localization options, e.g. month and weekday names.
+	 * @return array localization options.
+	 */
+	protected function getCulturalOptions()
+	{
+		if($this->getCurrentCulture() == 'en')
+			return array();
+
+		$date = $this->getLocalizedCalendarInfo();
+		$options['MonthNames'] = $date->getMonthNames();
+		$options['AbbreviatedMonthNames'] = $date->getAbbreviatedMonthNames();
+		$options['ShortWeekDayNames'] = $date->getAbbreviatedDayNames();
+
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the current culture, falls back to application if culture is not set.
+	 */
+	protected function getCurrentCulture()
+	{
+		$app = $this->getApplication()->getGlobalization(false);
+		return $this->getCulture() == '' ?
+				($app ? $app->getCulture() : 'en') : $this->getCulture();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return DateTimeFormatInfo date time format information for the current culture.
+	 */
+	protected function getLocalizedCalendarInfo()
+	{
+		//expensive operations
+		$culture = $this->getCurrentCulture();
+		Prado::using('System.I18N.core.DateTimeFormatInfo');
+		$info = Prado::createComponent('System.I18N.core.CultureInfo', $culture);
+		return $info->getDateTimeFormat();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the drop down list date picker.
+	 */
+	protected function renderDropDownListCalendar($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getMode() == TDatePickerMode::Basic)
+			$this->setMode(TDatePickerMode::ImageButton);
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$writer->removeAttribute('name');
+		$writer->removeAttribute('type');
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID());
+
+		if(strlen($class = $this->getCssClass()) > 0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('class', $class);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('span');
+
+		$s = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TDateTimeStamp');
+		$date = $s->getDate($this->getTimeStampFromText());
+		//$date = @getdate($this->getTimeStampFromText());
+
+		$this->renderCalendarSelections($writer, $date);
+
+		//render a hidden input field
+		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID());
+		$writer->addAttribute('type', 'hidden');
+		$writer->addAttribute('value', $this->getText());
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
+
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	protected function hasDayPattern()
+	{
+		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
+						$this->getDateFormat());
+		return ($formatter->getDayPattern()!==null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the calendar drop down list depending on the DateFormat pattern.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the Html writer to render the drop down lists.
+	 * @param array the current selected date
+	 */
+	protected function renderCalendarSelections($writer, $date)
+	{
+		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
+						$this->getDateFormat());
+
+		foreach($formatter->getDayMonthYearOrdering() as $type)
+		{
+			if($type == 'day')
+				$this->renderCalendarDayOptions($writer,$date['mday']);
+			elseif($type == 'month')
+				$this->renderCalendarMonthOptions($writer,$date['mon']);
+			elseif($type == 'year')
+				$this->renderCalendarYearOptions($writer,$date['year']);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the date from the text input using TSimpleDateFormatter
+	 * @return integer current selected date timestamp
+	 */
+	protected function getTimeStampFromText()
+	{
+		$pattern = $this->getDateFormat();
+		$pattern = str_replace(array('MMMM', 'MMM'), array('MM','MM'), $pattern);
+		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',$pattern);
+		return $formatter->parse($this->getText());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders a drop down lists.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param array list of selection options
+	 * @param mixed selected key.
+	 */
+	private function renderDropDownListOptions($writer,$options,$selected=null)
+	{
+		foreach($options as $k => $v)
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('value', $k);
+			if($k == $selected)
+				$writer->addAttribute('selected', 'selected');
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('option');
+			$writer->write($v);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the day drop down list options.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param mixed selected day.
+	 */
+	protected function renderCalendarDayOptions($writer, $selected=null)
+	{
+		$days = $this->getDropDownDayOptions();
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().TControl::CLIENT_ID_SEPARATOR.'day');
+		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID().TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'day');
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'datepicker_day_options');
+		if($this->getReadOnly() || !$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('select');
+		$this->renderDropDownListOptions($writer, $days, $selected);
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array list of day options for a drop down list.
+	 */
+	protected function getDropDownDayOptions()
+	{
+		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
+						$this->getDateFormat());
+		$days = array();
+		$requiresPadding = $formatter->getDayPattern() === 'dd';
+		for($i=1;$i<=31;$i++)
+		{
+			$days[$i] = $requiresPadding ? str_pad($i, 2, '0', STR_PAD_LEFT) : $i;
+		}
+		return $days;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the month drop down list options.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param mixed selected month.
+	 */
+	protected function renderCalendarMonthOptions($writer, $selected=null)
+	{
+		$info = $this->getLocalizedCalendarInfo();
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().TControl::CLIENT_ID_SEPARATOR.'month');
+		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID().TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'month');
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'datepicker_month_options');
+		if($this->getReadOnly() || !$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('select');
+		$this->renderDropDownListOptions($writer,
+					$this->getLocalizedMonthNames($info), $selected-1);
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the localized month names that depends on the month format pattern.
+	 * "MMMM" will return the month names, "MM" or "MMM" return abbr. month names
+	 * and "M" return month digits.
+	 * @param DateTimeFormatInfo localized date format information.
+	 * @return array localized month names.
+	 */
+	protected function getLocalizedMonthNames($info)
+	{
+		$formatter = Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter',
+						$this->getDateFormat());
+		switch($formatter->getMonthPattern())
+		{
+			case 'MMM': return $info->getAbbreviatedMonthNames();
+			case 'MM':
+				$array = array();
+				for($i=1;$i<=12;$i++)
+						$array[$i-1] = $i < 10 ? '0'.$i : $i;
+				return $array;
+			case 'M':
+				$array = array(); for($i=1;$i<=12;$i++) $array[$i-1] = $i;
+				return $array;
+			default :	return $info->getMonthNames();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the year drop down list options.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param mixed selected year.
+	 */
+	protected function renderCalendarYearOptions($writer, $selected=null)
+	{
+		$years = array();
+		for($i = $this->getFromYear(); $i <= $this->getUpToYear(); $i++)
+			$years[$i] = $i;
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().TControl::CLIENT_ID_SEPARATOR.'year');
+		$writer->addAttribute('name', $this->getUniqueID().TControl::ID_SEPARATOR.'year');
+		if($this->getReadOnly() || !$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('select');
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'datepicker_year_options');
+		$this->renderDropDownListOptions($writer, $years, $selected);
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the ID for the date picker trigger button.
+	 * @return string unique button ID
+	 */
+	protected function getDatePickerButtonID()
+	{
+		return $this->getClientID().'button';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds an additional button such that when clicked it shows the date picker.
+	 * @return THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	protected function renderButtonDatePicker($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getDatePickerButtonID());
+		$writer->addAttribute('type', 'button');
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', $this->getCssClass().' TDatePickerButton');
+		$writer->addAttribute('value',$this->getButtonText());
+		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag("input");
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds an additional image button such that when clicked it shows the date picker.
+	 * @return THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	 protected function renderImageButtonDatePicker($writer)
+	{
+		$url = $this->getButtonImageUrl();
+		$url = empty($url) ? $this->getAssetUrl('calendar.png') : $url;
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getDatePickerButtonID());
+		$writer->addAttribute('src', $url);
+		$writer->addAttribute('alt', ' ');
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', $this->getCssClass().' TDatePickerImageButton');
+		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled', 'disabled');
+		$writer->addAttribute('type', 'image');
+		$writer->addAttribute('onclick', 'return false;');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string date picker asset file in the self::SCRIPT_PATH directory.
+	 * @return string date picker asset url.
+	 */
+	protected function getAssetUrl($file='')
+	{
+		$base = $this->getPage()->getClientScript()->getPradoScriptAssetUrl();
+		return $base.'/'.self::SCRIPT_PATH.'/'.$file;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Publish the calendar style Css asset file.
+	 * @return string Css file url.
+	 */
+	protected function publishCalendarStyle()
+	{
+		$url = $this->getAssetUrl($this->getCalendarStyle().'.css');
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		if(!$cs->isStyleSheetFileRegistered($url))
+			$cs->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
+		return $url;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Add the client id to the input textbox, and register the client scripts.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		$this->registerCalendarClientScriptPost();
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the javascript code to initialize the date picker.
+	 */
+	protected function registerCalendarClientScriptPre()
+	{
+		if($this->getShowCalendar())
+		{
+			$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+			$cs->registerPradoScript("datepicker");
+		}
+	}
+
+	protected function registerCalendarClientScriptPost()
+	{
+		if($this->getShowCalendar())
+		{
+			$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+			if(!$cs->isEndScriptRegistered('TDatePicker.spacer'))
+			{
+				$spacer = $this->getAssetUrl('spacer.gif');
+				$code = "Prado.WebUI.TDatePicker.spacer = '$spacer';";
+				$cs->registerEndScript('TDatePicker.spacer', $code);
+			}
+
+			$options = TJavaScript::encode($this->getDatePickerOptions());
+			$code = "new Prado.WebUI.TDatePicker($options);";
+			$cs->registerEndScript("prado:".$this->getClientID(), $code);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDatePickerClientScript class.
+ *
+ * Client-side date picker event {@link setOnDateChanged OnDateChanged}
+ * can be modified through the {@link TDatePicker::getClientSide ClientSide}
+ * property of a date picker.
+ *
+ * The <tt>OnDateChanged</tt> event is raise when the date picker's date
+ * is changed.
+ * The formatted date according to {@link TDatePicker::getDateFormat DateFormat} is sent
+ * as parameter to this event
+ * 
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TDatePickerClientScript extends TClientSideOptions
+{
+	/**
+	 * Javascript code to execute when the date picker's date is changed.
+	 * @param string javascript code
+	 */
+	public function setOnDateChanged($javascript)
+	{
+		$this->setFunction('OnDateChanged', $javascript);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string javascript code to execute when the date picker's date is changed.
+	 */
+	public function getOnDateChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->getOption('OnDateChanged');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TDatePickerInputMode class.
+ * TDatePickerInputMode defines the enumerable type for the possible datepicker input methods.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - TextBox: text boxes are used to input date values
+ * - DropDownList: dropdown lists are used to pick up date values
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TDatePickerInputMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const TextBox='TextBox';
+	const DropDownList='DropDownList';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDatePickerMode class.
+ * TDatePickerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible UI mode
+ * that a {@link TDatePicker} control can take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Basic: Only shows a text input, focusing on the input shows the date picker
+ * - Clickable: Only shows a text input, clicking on the input shows the date picker (since 3.2)
+ * - Button: Shows a button next to the text input, clicking on the button shows the date, button text can be by the
+ * - ImageButton: Shows an image next to the text input, clicking on the image shows the date picker,
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TDatePickerMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Basic='Basic';
+	const Clickable='Clickable';
+	const Button='Button';
+	const ImageButton='ImageButton';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDatePickerPositionMode class.
+ * TDatePickerPositionMode defines the positions available for the calendar popup, relative to the corresponding input.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Top: the date picker is placed above the input field
+ * - Bottom: the date picker is placed below the input field
+ *
+ * @author Carl G. Mathisen <carlgmathisen@gmail.com>
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.4
+ */
+class TDatePickerPositionMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Top='Top';
+	const Bottom='Bottom';
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownList.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownList.php
index 0eba6285..57f1f165 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownList.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownList.php
@@ -1,154 +1,154 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDropDownList class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TListControl class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
-
-/**
- * TDropDownList class
- *
- * TDropDownList displays a dropdown list on a Web page.
- * It inherits all properties and events from {@link TListControl}.
- *
- * Since v3.0.3, TDropDownList starts to support optgroup. To specify an option group for
- * a list item, set a Group attribute with it,
- * <code>
- *  $listitem->Attributes->Group="Group Name";
- *  // or <com:TListItem Attributes.Group="Group Name" .../> in template
- * </code>
- *
- * Since v3.1.1, TDropDownList starts to support prompt text. That is, a prompt item can be
- * displayed as the first list item by specifying either {@link setPromptText PromptText} or
- * {@link setPromptValue PromptValue}, or both. Choosing the prompt item will unselect the TDropDownList.
- *
- * When a prompt item is set, its index in the list is set to -1. So, the {@link getSelectedIndex SelectedIndex}
- * property is not affected by a prompt item: the items list will still be zero-based.
- *
- * The {@link clearSelection clearSelection} method will select the prompt item if existing, otherway the first
- * available item in the dropdown list will be selected.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TDropDownList extends TListControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable
-{
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
-	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID());
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TDropDownList';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
-			return false;
-		$this->ensureDataBound();
-		$selection=isset($values[$key])?$values[$key]:null;
-		if($selection!==null)
-		{
-			$index=$this->getItems()->findIndexByValue($selection,false);
-			if($this->getSelectedIndex()!==$index)
-			{
-				$this->setSelectedIndex($index);
-				return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
-	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getSelectedIndex SelectedIndex} property
-	 * is changed on postback.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onSelectedIndexChanged(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedIndices($indices)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('dropdownlist_selectedindices_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value to be validated.
-	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
-	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getSelectedValue();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
-	 * Defaults to true.
-	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
-	 */
-	public function getIsValid()
-	{
-	    return $this->_isValid;
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
-	 */
-	public function setIsValid($value)
-	{
-	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-}
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDropDownList class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TListControl class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
+
+/**
+ * TDropDownList class
+ *
+ * TDropDownList displays a dropdown list on a Web page.
+ * It inherits all properties and events from {@link TListControl}.
+ *
+ * Since v3.0.3, TDropDownList starts to support optgroup. To specify an option group for
+ * a list item, set a Group attribute with it,
+ * <code>
+ *  $listitem->Attributes->Group="Group Name";
+ *  // or <com:TListItem Attributes.Group="Group Name" .../> in template
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * Since v3.1.1, TDropDownList starts to support prompt text. That is, a prompt item can be
+ * displayed as the first list item by specifying either {@link setPromptText PromptText} or
+ * {@link setPromptValue PromptValue}, or both. Choosing the prompt item will unselect the TDropDownList.
+ *
+ * When a prompt item is set, its index in the list is set to -1. So, the {@link getSelectedIndex SelectedIndex}
+ * property is not affected by a prompt item: the items list will still be zero-based.
+ *
+ * The {@link clearSelection clearSelection} method will select the prompt item if existing, otherway the first
+ * available item in the dropdown list will be selected.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TDropDownList extends TListControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable
+{
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
+	private $_isValid=true;
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID());
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TDropDownList';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
+			return false;
+		$this->ensureDataBound();
+		$selection=isset($values[$key])?$values[$key]:null;
+		if($selection!==null)
+		{
+			$index=$this->getItems()->findIndexByValue($selection,false);
+			if($this->getSelectedIndex()!==$index)
+			{
+				$this->setSelectedIndex($index);
+				return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
+	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getSelectedIndex SelectedIndex} property
+	 * is changed on postback.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onSelectedIndexChanged(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedIndices($indices)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('dropdownlist_selectedindices_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value to be validated.
+	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
+	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getSelectedValue();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
+	 * Defaults to true.
+	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
+	 */
+	public function getIsValid()
+	{
+	    return $this->_isValid;
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
+	 */
+	public function setIsValid($value)
+	{
+	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownListColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownListColumn.php
index ffbe8f70..941a9be1 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownListColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TDropDownListColumn.php
@@ -1,321 +1,321 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TDropDownListColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TDropDownListColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDropDownList');
-
-/**
- * TDropDownListColumn class
- *
- * TDropDownListColumn represents a column that is bound to a field in a data source.
- * The cells in the column will be displayed using the data indexed by
- * {@link setDataTextField DataTextField}. You can customize the display by
- * setting {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString}.
- *
- * If {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} is false, TDropDownListColumn will display cells in edit mode
- * with dropdown lists. Otherwise, a static text is displayed.
- * The currently selected dropndown list item is specified by the data indexed with
- * {@link setDataValueField DataValueField}.
- *
- * There are two approaches to specify the list items available for selection.
- * The first approach uses template syntax as follows,
- * <code>
- *   <com:TDropDownListColumn ....>
- *     <com:TListItem Value="1" Text="first item" />
- *     <com:TListItem Value="2" Text="second item" />
- *     <com:TListItem Value="3" Text="third item" />
- *   </com:TDropDownListColumn>
- * </code>
- * The second approach specifies a data source to be bound to the dropdown lists
- * by setting {@link setListDataSource ListDataSource}. Like generic list controls,
- * you may also want to specify which data fields are used for item values and texts
- * by setting {@link setListValueField ListValueField} and
- * {@link setListTextField ListTextField}, respectively.
- * Furthermore, the item texts may be formatted by using {@link setListTextFormatString ListTextFormatString}.
- * Note, if you specify {@link setListDataSource ListDataSource}, do it before
- * calling the datagrid's dataBind().
- *
- * The dropdown list control in the TDropDownListColumn can be accessed by one of
- * the following two methods:
- * <code>
- * $datagridItem->DropDownListColumnID->DropDownList
- * $datagridItem->DropDownListColumnID->Controls[0]
- * </code>
- * The second method is possible because the dropdown list control created within the
- * datagrid cell is the first child.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TDropDownListColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	private $_stateLoaded=false;
-	private $_dataBound=false;
-	private $_listControl=null;
-
-	public function __construct()
-	{
-		$this->_listControl=new TDropDownList;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads items from viewstate.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by loading list items
-	 * @param mixed state values
-	 */
-	public function loadState($state)
-	{
-		parent::loadState($state);
-		$this->_stateLoaded=true;
-		if(!$this->_dataBound)
-			$this->_listControl->getItems()->loadState($this->getViewState('Items',null));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves items into viewstate.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by saving list items
-	 */
-	public function saveState()
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Items',$this->_listControl->getItems()->saveState(),null);
-		return parent::saveState();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
-	 * This method adds only {@link TListItem} objects into the {@link getItems Items} collection.
-	 * All other objects are ignored.
-	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		// Do not add items from template if items are loaded from viewstate
-		if(!$this->_stateLoaded && ($object instanceof TListItem))
-		{
-			$object->setSelected(false);
-			$index=$this->_listControl->getItems()->add($object);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the column.
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the field of the data source that provides the text content of the column.
-	 * If this is not set, the data specified via {@link getDataValueField DataValueField}
-	 * will be displayed in the column.
-	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the column.
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the key selecting an item in dropdown list.
-	 */
-	public function getDataValueField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataValueField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the field of the data source that provides the key selecting an item in dropdown list.
-	 * If this is not present, the data specified via {@link getDataTextField DataTextField} (without
-	 * applying the formatting string) will be used for selection, instead.
-	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the key selecting an item in dropdown list.
-	 */
-	public function setDataValueField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataValueField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getReadOnly()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
-	 */
-	public function setReadOnly($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return Traversable data source to be bound to the dropdown list boxes.
-	 */
-	public function getListDataSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_listControl->getDataSource();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param Traversable|array|string data source to be bound to the dropdown list boxes.
-	 */
-	public function setListDataSource($value)
-	{
-		$this->_listControl->setDataSource($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the data field used to populate the values of the dropdown list items. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getListValueField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ListValueField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the data field used to populate the values of the dropdown list items
-	 */
-	public function setListValueField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ListValueField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the data field used to populate the texts of the dropdown list items. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getListTextField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ListTextField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the data field used to populate the texts of the dropdown list items
-	 */
-	public function setListTextField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ListTextField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the list item texts will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getListTextFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ListTextFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the list item texts will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setListTextFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ListTextFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * It creates a textbox for item in edit mode and the column is not read-only.
-	 * Otherwise it displays a static text.
-	 * The caption of the button and the static text are retrieved
-	 * from the datasource.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if(!$this->_dataBound && $this->_listControl->getDataSource()!==null)
-		{
-			$this->_listControl->setDataTextField($this->getListTextField());
-			$this->_listControl->setDataValueField($this->getListValueField());
-			$this->_listControl->setDataTextFormatString($this->getListTextFormatString());
-			$this->_listControl->dataBind();
-			$this->_dataBound=true;
-		}
-		switch($itemType)
-		{
-			case TListItemType::EditItem:
-				if(!$this->getReadOnly())
-				{
-					$listControl=clone $this->_listControl;
-					$cell->getControls()->add($listControl);
-					$cell->registerObject('DropDownList',$listControl);
-					$control=$listControl;
-				}
-				else
-					$control=$cell;
-				$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::Item:
-			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
-			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
-				if($this->getDataTextField()!=='' || $this->getDataValueField()!=='')
-					$cell->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-				break;
-			default:
-				parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
-	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
-	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
-	 */
-	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
-		$data=$item->getData();
-		if(($valueField=$this->getDataValueField())!=='')
-			$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$valueField);
-		else
-			$value='';
-		if(($textField=$this->getDataTextField())!=='')
-		{
-			$text=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$textField);
-			if($valueField==='')
-				$value=$text;
-			$formatString=$this->getDataTextFormatString();
-			$text=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$text);
-		}
-		else
-			$text=$value;
-		if($sender instanceof TTableCell)
-			$sender->setText($text);
-		else if($sender instanceof TDropDownList)
-			$sender->setSelectedValue($value);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDropDownList');
+
+/**
+ * TDropDownListColumn class
+ *
+ * TDropDownListColumn represents a column that is bound to a field in a data source.
+ * The cells in the column will be displayed using the data indexed by
+ * {@link setDataTextField DataTextField}. You can customize the display by
+ * setting {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString}.
+ *
+ * If {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} is false, TDropDownListColumn will display cells in edit mode
+ * with dropdown lists. Otherwise, a static text is displayed.
+ * The currently selected dropndown list item is specified by the data indexed with
+ * {@link setDataValueField DataValueField}.
+ *
+ * There are two approaches to specify the list items available for selection.
+ * The first approach uses template syntax as follows,
+ * <code>
+ *   <com:TDropDownListColumn ....>
+ *     <com:TListItem Value="1" Text="first item" />
+ *     <com:TListItem Value="2" Text="second item" />
+ *     <com:TListItem Value="3" Text="third item" />
+ *   </com:TDropDownListColumn>
+ * </code>
+ * The second approach specifies a data source to be bound to the dropdown lists
+ * by setting {@link setListDataSource ListDataSource}. Like generic list controls,
+ * you may also want to specify which data fields are used for item values and texts
+ * by setting {@link setListValueField ListValueField} and
+ * {@link setListTextField ListTextField}, respectively.
+ * Furthermore, the item texts may be formatted by using {@link setListTextFormatString ListTextFormatString}.
+ * Note, if you specify {@link setListDataSource ListDataSource}, do it before
+ * calling the datagrid's dataBind().
+ *
+ * The dropdown list control in the TDropDownListColumn can be accessed by one of
+ * the following two methods:
+ * <code>
+ * $datagridItem->DropDownListColumnID->DropDownList
+ * $datagridItem->DropDownListColumnID->Controls[0]
+ * </code>
+ * The second method is possible because the dropdown list control created within the
+ * datagrid cell is the first child.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TDropDownListColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	private $_stateLoaded=false;
+	private $_dataBound=false;
+	private $_listControl=null;
+
+	public function __construct()
+	{
+		$this->_listControl=new TDropDownList;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads items from viewstate.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by loading list items
+	 * @param mixed state values
+	 */
+	public function loadState($state)
+	{
+		parent::loadState($state);
+		$this->_stateLoaded=true;
+		if(!$this->_dataBound)
+			$this->_listControl->getItems()->loadState($this->getViewState('Items',null));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves items into viewstate.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by saving list items
+	 */
+	public function saveState()
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Items',$this->_listControl->getItems()->saveState(),null);
+		return parent::saveState();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
+	 * This method adds only {@link TListItem} objects into the {@link getItems Items} collection.
+	 * All other objects are ignored.
+	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		// Do not add items from template if items are loaded from viewstate
+		if(!$this->_stateLoaded && ($object instanceof TListItem))
+		{
+			$object->setSelected(false);
+			$index=$this->_listControl->getItems()->add($object);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the column.
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the field of the data source that provides the text content of the column.
+	 * If this is not set, the data specified via {@link getDataValueField DataValueField}
+	 * will be displayed in the column.
+	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the column.
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the key selecting an item in dropdown list.
+	 */
+	public function getDataValueField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataValueField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the field of the data source that provides the key selecting an item in dropdown list.
+	 * If this is not present, the data specified via {@link getDataTextField DataTextField} (without
+	 * applying the formatting string) will be used for selection, instead.
+	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the key selecting an item in dropdown list.
+	 */
+	public function setDataValueField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataValueField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getReadOnly()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
+	 */
+	public function setReadOnly($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return Traversable data source to be bound to the dropdown list boxes.
+	 */
+	public function getListDataSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_listControl->getDataSource();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param Traversable|array|string data source to be bound to the dropdown list boxes.
+	 */
+	public function setListDataSource($value)
+	{
+		$this->_listControl->setDataSource($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the data field used to populate the values of the dropdown list items. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getListValueField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ListValueField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the data field used to populate the values of the dropdown list items
+	 */
+	public function setListValueField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ListValueField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the data field used to populate the texts of the dropdown list items. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getListTextField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ListTextField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the data field used to populate the texts of the dropdown list items
+	 */
+	public function setListTextField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ListTextField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the list item texts will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getListTextFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ListTextFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the list item texts will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setListTextFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ListTextFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * It creates a textbox for item in edit mode and the column is not read-only.
+	 * Otherwise it displays a static text.
+	 * The caption of the button and the static text are retrieved
+	 * from the datasource.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if(!$this->_dataBound && $this->_listControl->getDataSource()!==null)
+		{
+			$this->_listControl->setDataTextField($this->getListTextField());
+			$this->_listControl->setDataValueField($this->getListValueField());
+			$this->_listControl->setDataTextFormatString($this->getListTextFormatString());
+			$this->_listControl->dataBind();
+			$this->_dataBound=true;
+		}
+		switch($itemType)
+		{
+			case TListItemType::EditItem:
+				if(!$this->getReadOnly())
+				{
+					$listControl=clone $this->_listControl;
+					$cell->getControls()->add($listControl);
+					$cell->registerObject('DropDownList',$listControl);
+					$control=$listControl;
+				}
+				else
+					$control=$cell;
+				$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::Item:
+			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem:
+			case TListItemType::SelectedItem:
+				if($this->getDataTextField()!=='' || $this->getDataValueField()!=='')
+					$cell->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+				break;
+			default:
+				parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
+	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
+	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
+	 */
+	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
+		$data=$item->getData();
+		if(($valueField=$this->getDataValueField())!=='')
+			$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$valueField);
+		else
+			$value='';
+		if(($textField=$this->getDataTextField())!=='')
+		{
+			$text=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$textField);
+			if($valueField==='')
+				$value=$text;
+			$formatString=$this->getDataTextFormatString();
+			$text=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$text);
+		}
+		else
+			$text=$value;
+		if($sender instanceof TTableCell)
+			$sender->setText($text);
+		else if($sender instanceof TDropDownList)
+			$sender->setSelectedValue($value);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEditCommandColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEditCommandColumn.php
index 44004807..b10c6880 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEditCommandColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEditCommandColumn.php
@@ -1,265 +1,265 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TEditCommandColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TEditCommandColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-
-/**
- * TEditCommandColumn class
- *
- * TEditCommandColumn contains the Edit command buttons for editing data items in each row.
- *
- * TEditCommandColumn will create an edit button if a cell is not in edit mode.
- * Otherwise an update button and a cancel button will be created within the cell.
- * The button captions are specified using {@link setEditText EditText},
- * {@link setUpdateText UpdateText}, and {@link setCancelText CancelText}.
- *
- * The buttons in the column can be set to display as hyperlinks, push or image buttons
- * by setting the {@link setButtonType ButtonType} property.
- *
- * When an edit button is clicked, the datagrid will generate an
- * {@link onEditCommand OnEditCommand} event. When an update/cancel button
- * is clicked, the datagrid will generate an
- * {@link onUpdateCommand OnUpdateCommand} or an {@link onCancelCommand OnCancelCommand}
- * You can write these event handlers to change the state of specific datagrid item.
- *
- * The {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} and {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}
- * properties affect the corresponding properties of the edit and update buttons.
- * The cancel button does not cause validation by default.
- *
- * The command buttons in the column can be accessed by one of the following methods:
- * <code>
- * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->EditButton (or UpdateButton, CancelButton)
- * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->Controls[0]
- * </code>
- * The second method is possible because the button control created within the
- * datagrid cell is the first child.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TEditCommandColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return TButtonColumnType the type of command button. Defaults to TButtonColumnType::LinkButton.
-	 */
-	public function getButtonType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TButtonColumnType the type of command button.
-	 */
-	public function setButtonType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TButtonColumnType'),TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the caption of the edit button. Defaults to 'Edit'.
-	 */
-	public function getEditText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EditText','Edit');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the caption of the edit button
-	 */
-	public function setEditText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EditText',$value,'Edit');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the image file for edit image buttons
-	 */
-	public function getEditImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EditImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL of the image file for edit image buttons
-	 */
-	public function setEditImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EditImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the caption of the update button. Defaults to 'Update'.
-	 */
-	public function getUpdateText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('UpdateText','Update');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the caption of the update button
-	 */
-	public function setUpdateText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('UpdateText',$value,'Update');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the image file for update image buttons
-	 */
-	public function getUpdateImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('UpdateImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL of the image file for update image buttons
-	 */
-	public function setUpdateImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('UpdateImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the caption of the cancel button. Defaults to 'Cancel'.
-	 */
-	public function getCancelText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CancelText','Cancel');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the caption of the cancel button
-	 */
-	public function setCancelText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CancelText',$value,'Cancel');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the image file for cancel image buttons
-	 */
-	public function getCancelImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CancelImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL of the image file for cancel image buttons
-	 */
-	public function setCancelImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CancelImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by edit or update button will cause input validation, default is true
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by edit or update button will cause input validation
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the edit or update button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the edit or update button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * It creates an update and a cancel button for cell in edit mode.
-	 * Otherwise it creates an edit button.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem)
-		{
-			$button=$this->createButton('Edit',$this->getEditText(),false,'');
-			$cell->getControls()->add($button);
-			$cell->registerObject('EditButton',$button);
-		}
-		else if($itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
-		{
-			$controls=$cell->getControls();
-			$button=$this->createButton('Update',$this->getUpdateText(),$this->getCausesValidation(),$this->getValidationGroup());
-			$controls->add($button);
-			$cell->registerObject('UpdateButton',$button);
-			$controls->add('&nbsp;');
-			$button=$this->createButton('Cancel',$this->getCancelText(),false,'');
-			$controls->add($button);
-			$cell->registerObject('CancelButton',$button);
-		}
-		else
-			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a button and initializes its properties.
-	 * The button type is determined by {@link getButtonType ButtonType}.
-	 * @param string command name associated with the button
-	 * @param string button caption
-	 * @param boolean whether the button should cause validation
-	 * @param string the validation group that the button belongs to
-	 * @return mixed the newly created button.
-	 */
-	protected function createButton($commandName,$text,$causesValidation,$validationGroup)
-	{
-		if($this->getButtonType()===TButtonColumnType::LinkButton)
-			$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
-		else if($this->getButtonType()===TButtonColumnType::PushButton)
-			$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TButton');
-		else	// image buttons
-		{
-			$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
-			if(strcasecmp($commandName,'Update')===0)
-				$url=$this->getUpdateImageUrl();
-			else if(strcasecmp($commandName,'Cancel')===0)
-				$url=$this->getCancelImageUrl();
-			else
-				$url=$this->getEditImageUrl();
-			$button->setImageUrl($url);
-		}
-		$button->setText($text);
-		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
-		$button->setCausesValidation($causesValidation);
-		$button->setValidationGroup($validationGroup);
-		return $button;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+
+/**
+ * TEditCommandColumn class
+ *
+ * TEditCommandColumn contains the Edit command buttons for editing data items in each row.
+ *
+ * TEditCommandColumn will create an edit button if a cell is not in edit mode.
+ * Otherwise an update button and a cancel button will be created within the cell.
+ * The button captions are specified using {@link setEditText EditText},
+ * {@link setUpdateText UpdateText}, and {@link setCancelText CancelText}.
+ *
+ * The buttons in the column can be set to display as hyperlinks, push or image buttons
+ * by setting the {@link setButtonType ButtonType} property.
+ *
+ * When an edit button is clicked, the datagrid will generate an
+ * {@link onEditCommand OnEditCommand} event. When an update/cancel button
+ * is clicked, the datagrid will generate an
+ * {@link onUpdateCommand OnUpdateCommand} or an {@link onCancelCommand OnCancelCommand}
+ * You can write these event handlers to change the state of specific datagrid item.
+ *
+ * The {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} and {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}
+ * properties affect the corresponding properties of the edit and update buttons.
+ * The cancel button does not cause validation by default.
+ *
+ * The command buttons in the column can be accessed by one of the following methods:
+ * <code>
+ * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->EditButton (or UpdateButton, CancelButton)
+ * $datagridItem->ButtonColumnID->Controls[0]
+ * </code>
+ * The second method is possible because the button control created within the
+ * datagrid cell is the first child.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TEditCommandColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return TButtonColumnType the type of command button. Defaults to TButtonColumnType::LinkButton.
+	 */
+	public function getButtonType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TButtonColumnType the type of command button.
+	 */
+	public function setButtonType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TButtonColumnType'),TButtonColumnType::LinkButton);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the caption of the edit button. Defaults to 'Edit'.
+	 */
+	public function getEditText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EditText','Edit');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the caption of the edit button
+	 */
+	public function setEditText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EditText',$value,'Edit');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the image file for edit image buttons
+	 */
+	public function getEditImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EditImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL of the image file for edit image buttons
+	 */
+	public function setEditImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EditImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the caption of the update button. Defaults to 'Update'.
+	 */
+	public function getUpdateText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('UpdateText','Update');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the caption of the update button
+	 */
+	public function setUpdateText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('UpdateText',$value,'Update');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the image file for update image buttons
+	 */
+	public function getUpdateImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('UpdateImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL of the image file for update image buttons
+	 */
+	public function setUpdateImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('UpdateImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the caption of the cancel button. Defaults to 'Cancel'.
+	 */
+	public function getCancelText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CancelText','Cancel');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the caption of the cancel button
+	 */
+	public function setCancelText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CancelText',$value,'Cancel');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the image file for cancel image buttons
+	 */
+	public function getCancelImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CancelImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL of the image file for cancel image buttons
+	 */
+	public function setCancelImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CancelImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by edit or update button will cause input validation, default is true
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by edit or update button will cause input validation
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the edit or update button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the edit or update button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * It creates an update and a cancel button for cell in edit mode.
+	 * Otherwise it creates an edit button.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem)
+		{
+			$button=$this->createButton('Edit',$this->getEditText(),false,'');
+			$cell->getControls()->add($button);
+			$cell->registerObject('EditButton',$button);
+		}
+		else if($itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
+		{
+			$controls=$cell->getControls();
+			$button=$this->createButton('Update',$this->getUpdateText(),$this->getCausesValidation(),$this->getValidationGroup());
+			$controls->add($button);
+			$cell->registerObject('UpdateButton',$button);
+			$controls->add('&nbsp;');
+			$button=$this->createButton('Cancel',$this->getCancelText(),false,'');
+			$controls->add($button);
+			$cell->registerObject('CancelButton',$button);
+		}
+		else
+			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a button and initializes its properties.
+	 * The button type is determined by {@link getButtonType ButtonType}.
+	 * @param string command name associated with the button
+	 * @param string button caption
+	 * @param boolean whether the button should cause validation
+	 * @param string the validation group that the button belongs to
+	 * @return mixed the newly created button.
+	 */
+	protected function createButton($commandName,$text,$causesValidation,$validationGroup)
+	{
+		if($this->getButtonType()===TButtonColumnType::LinkButton)
+			$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
+		else if($this->getButtonType()===TButtonColumnType::PushButton)
+			$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TButton');
+		else	// image buttons
+		{
+			$button=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
+			if(strcasecmp($commandName,'Update')===0)
+				$url=$this->getUpdateImageUrl();
+			else if(strcasecmp($commandName,'Cancel')===0)
+				$url=$this->getCancelImageUrl();
+			else
+				$url=$this->getEditImageUrl();
+			$button->setImageUrl($url);
+		}
+		$button->setText($text);
+		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
+		$button->setCausesValidation($causesValidation);
+		$button->setValidationGroup($validationGroup);
+		return $button;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEmailAddressValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEmailAddressValidator.php
index a198ffc4..b0b51208 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEmailAddressValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TEmailAddressValidator.php
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TEmailAddressValidator class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TEmailAddressValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TRegularExpressionValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRegularExpressionValidator');
-
-/**
- * TEmailAddressValidator class
- *
- * TEmailAddressValidator validates whether the value of an associated
- * input component is a valid email address. If {@link getCheckMXRecord CheckMXRecord}
- * is true, it will check MX record for the email adress, provided
- * checkdnsrr() is available in the installed PHP.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TEmailAddressValidator extends TRegularExpressionValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Regular expression used to validate the email address
-	 */
-	const EMAIL_REGEXP="\\w+([-+.]\\w+)*@\\w+([-.]\\w+)*\\.\\w+([-.]\\w+)*";
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TEmailAddressValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the regular expression that determines the pattern used to validate a field.
-	 */
-	public function getRegularExpression()
-	{
-		$regex=parent::getRegularExpression();
-		return $regex===''?self::EMAIL_REGEXP:$regex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	public function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		$valid=parent::evaluateIsValid();
-		if($valid && $this->getCheckMXRecord() && function_exists('checkdnsrr'))
-		{
-			if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))!=='')
-			{
-				if(($pos=strpos($value,'@'))!==false)
-				{
-					$domain=substr($value,$pos+1);
-					return $domain===''?false:checkdnsrr($domain,'MX');
-				}
-				else
-					return false;
-			}
-		}
-		return $valid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to check MX record for the email address being validated. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getCheckMXRecord()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CheckMXRecord',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to check MX record for the email address being validated.
-	 * Note, if {@link checkdnsrr} is not available, this check will not be performed.
-	 */
-	public function setCheckMXRecord($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CheckMXRecord',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TRegularExpressionValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRegularExpressionValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TEmailAddressValidator class
+ *
+ * TEmailAddressValidator validates whether the value of an associated
+ * input component is a valid email address. If {@link getCheckMXRecord CheckMXRecord}
+ * is true, it will check MX record for the email adress, provided
+ * checkdnsrr() is available in the installed PHP.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TEmailAddressValidator extends TRegularExpressionValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Regular expression used to validate the email address
+	 */
+	const EMAIL_REGEXP="\\w+([-+.]\\w+)*@\\w+([-.]\\w+)*\\.\\w+([-.]\\w+)*";
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TEmailAddressValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the regular expression that determines the pattern used to validate a field.
+	 */
+	public function getRegularExpression()
+	{
+		$regex=parent::getRegularExpression();
+		return $regex===''?self::EMAIL_REGEXP:$regex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	public function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		$valid=parent::evaluateIsValid();
+		if($valid && $this->getCheckMXRecord() && function_exists('checkdnsrr'))
+		{
+			if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))!=='')
+			{
+				if(($pos=strpos($value,'@'))!==false)
+				{
+					$domain=substr($value,$pos+1);
+					return $domain===''?false:checkdnsrr($domain,'MX');
+				}
+				else
+					return false;
+			}
+		}
+		return $valid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to check MX record for the email address being validated. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getCheckMXRecord()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CheckMXRecord',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to check MX record for the email address being validated.
+	 * Note, if {@link checkdnsrr} is not available, this check will not be performed.
+	 */
+	public function setCheckMXRecord($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CheckMXRecord',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TExpression.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TExpression.php
index 9b8eb7e7..cf38df70 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TExpression.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TExpression.php
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TExpression class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TExpression class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TExpression class
- *
- * TExpression evaluates a PHP expression and renders the result.
- * The expression is evaluated during the rendering stage. The expression being
- * evaluated can be set via the property {@link setExpression Expression}.
- * The context of the expression evaluated is the TExpression object itself.
- *
- * Note, since TExpression allows evaluation of arbitrary PHP expression,
- * make sure {@link setExpression Expression} does not come directly from user input.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TExpression extends TControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string PHP expression to be evaluated
-	 */
-	private $_e='';
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the expression to be evaluated
-	 */
-	public function getExpression()
-	{
-		return $this->_e;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the expression to be evaluated
-	 */
-	public function setExpression($value)
-	{
-		$this->_e=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the evaluation result of the expression.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_e!=='')
-			$writer->write($this->evaluateExpression($this->_e));
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TExpression class
+ *
+ * TExpression evaluates a PHP expression and renders the result.
+ * The expression is evaluated during the rendering stage. The expression being
+ * evaluated can be set via the property {@link setExpression Expression}.
+ * The context of the expression evaluated is the TExpression object itself.
+ *
+ * Note, since TExpression allows evaluation of arbitrary PHP expression,
+ * make sure {@link setExpression Expression} does not come directly from user input.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TExpression extends TControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string PHP expression to be evaluated
+	 */
+	private $_e='';
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the expression to be evaluated
+	 */
+	public function getExpression()
+	{
+		return $this->_e;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the expression to be evaluated
+	 */
+	public function setExpression($value)
+	{
+		$this->_e=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the evaluation result of the expression.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_e!=='')
+			$writer->write($this->evaluateExpression($this->_e));
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFileUpload.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFileUpload.php
index 0f7d226d..051e3e0b 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFileUpload.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFileUpload.php
@@ -1,281 +1,281 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TFileUpload class file
- *
- * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net>, Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TFileUpload class
- *
- * TFileUpload displays a file upload field on a page. Upon postback,
- * the text entered into the field will be treated as the name of the file
- * that will be uploaded to the server. The property {@link getHasFile HasFile}
- * indicates whether the file upload is successful. If successful, the file
- * may be obtained by calling {@link saveAs} to save it at a specified place.
- * You can use {@link getFileName FileName}, {@link getFileType FileType},
- * {@link getFileSize FileSize} to get the original client-side file name,
- * the file mime type, and the file size information. If the upload is not
- * successful, {@link getErrorCode ErrorCode} contains the error code
- * describing the cause of failure.
- *
- * TFileUpload raises {@link onFileUpload OnFileUpload} event if a file is uploaded
- * (whether it succeeds or not).
- *
- * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net>, Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TFileUpload extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable
-{
-	/**
-	 * Maximum file size (in bytes) allowed to be uploaded, defaults to 1MB.
-	 */
-	const MAX_FILE_SIZE=1048576;
-	/**
-	 * @var integer the size of the uploaded file (in bytes)
-	 */
-	private $_fileSize=0;
-	/**
-	 * @var string The original name of the file on the client machine
-	 */
-	private $_fileName='';
-	/**
-	 * @var string the name of the temporary file storing the uploaded file
-	 */
-	private $_localName='';
-	/**
-	 * @var string the uploaded file mime type
-	 */
-	private $_fileType='';
-	/**
-	 * @var integer error code of the current file upload
-	 */
-	protected $_errorCode=UPLOAD_ERR_NO_FILE;
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
-	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the file upload control
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'input';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets name attribute to the unique ID of the control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional file update control specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$this->getPage()->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$writer->addAttribute('type','file');
-		$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID());
-		$isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
-		if(!$isEnabled && $this->getEnabled())  // in this case parent will not render 'disabled'
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets Enctype of the form on the page.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked before render.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		if(($form=$this->getPage()->getForm())!==null)
-			$form->setEnctype('multipart/form-data');
-		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerHiddenField('MAX_FILE_SIZE',$this->getMaxFileSize());
-		if($this->getEnabled(true))
-			$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the maximum file size, defaults to 1MB (1048576 bytes).
-	 * @see setMaxFileSize
-	 */
-	public function getMaxFileSize()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MaxFileSize',self::MAX_FILE_SIZE);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the maximum size that a file can be uploaded.
-	 * Note, this is an advisory value to the browser. Sets this property with
-	 * a reasonably large size to save users the trouble of waiting
-	 * for a big file being transferred only to find that it was too big
-	 * and the transfer failed.
-	 * @param int the maximum upload size allowed for a file.
-	 */
-	public function setMaxFileSize($size)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('MaxFileSize',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($size),self::MAX_FILE_SIZE);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the original full path name of the file on the client machine
-	 */
-	public function getFileName()
-	{
-		return $this->_fileName;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the actual size of the uploaded file in bytes
-	 */
-	public function getFileSize()
-	{
-		return $this->_fileSize;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the MIME-type of the uploaded file (such as "image/gif").
-	 * This mime type is not checked on the server side and do not take its value for granted.
-	 */
-	public function getFileType()
-	{
-		return $this->_fileType;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the local name of the file (where it is after being uploaded).
-	 * Note, PHP will delete this file automatically after finishing this round of request.
-	 */
-	public function getLocalName()
-	{
-		return $this->_localName;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an error code describing the status of this file uploading.
-	 * @return integer the error code
-	 * @see http://www.php.net/manual/en/features.file-upload.errors.php
-	 */
-	public function getErrorCode()
-	{
-		return $this->_errorCode;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the file is uploaded successfully
-	 */
-	public function getHasFile()
-	{
-		return $this->_errorCode===UPLOAD_ERR_OK;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves the uploaded file.
-	 * @param string the file name used to save the uploaded file
-	 * @param boolean whether to delete the temporary file after saving.
-	 * If true, you will not be able to save the uploaded file again.
-	 * @return boolean true if the file saving is successful
-	 */
-	public function saveAs($fileName,$deleteTempFile=true)
-	{
-		if($this->_errorCode===UPLOAD_ERR_OK)
-		{
-			if($deleteTempFile)
-				return move_uploaded_file($this->_localName,$fileName);
-			else if(is_uploaded_file($this->_localName))
-				return file_put_contents($fileName,file_get_contents($this->_localName))!==false;
-			else
-				return false;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		if(isset($_FILES[$key]))
-		{
-			$this->_fileName=$_FILES[$key]['name'];
-			$this->_fileSize=$_FILES[$key]['size'];
-			$this->_fileType=$_FILES[$key]['type'];
-			$this->_errorCode=$_FILES[$key]['error'];
-			$this->_localName=$_FILES[$key]['tmp_name'];
-			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method calls {@link onFileUpload} method.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		$this->onFileUpload(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when a file is uploaded during a postback.
-	 * The method raises <b>OnFileUpload</b> event to fire up the event handler.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event delegates can be invoked.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onFileUpload($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnFileUpload',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the original file name as the property value to be validated.
-	 * This method is required by IValidatable property.
-	 * @return mixed the property value to be validated
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getFileName();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
-	 * Defaults to true.
-	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
-	 */
-	public function getIsValid()
-	{
-	    return $this->_isValid;
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
-	 */
-	public function setIsValid($value)
-	{
-	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TFileUpload class file
+ *
+ * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net>, Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TFileUpload class
+ *
+ * TFileUpload displays a file upload field on a page. Upon postback,
+ * the text entered into the field will be treated as the name of the file
+ * that will be uploaded to the server. The property {@link getHasFile HasFile}
+ * indicates whether the file upload is successful. If successful, the file
+ * may be obtained by calling {@link saveAs} to save it at a specified place.
+ * You can use {@link getFileName FileName}, {@link getFileType FileType},
+ * {@link getFileSize FileSize} to get the original client-side file name,
+ * the file mime type, and the file size information. If the upload is not
+ * successful, {@link getErrorCode ErrorCode} contains the error code
+ * describing the cause of failure.
+ *
+ * TFileUpload raises {@link onFileUpload OnFileUpload} event if a file is uploaded
+ * (whether it succeeds or not).
+ *
+ * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net>, Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TFileUpload extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable
+{
+	/**
+	 * Maximum file size (in bytes) allowed to be uploaded, defaults to 1MB.
+	 */
+	const MAX_FILE_SIZE=1048576;
+	/**
+	 * @var integer the size of the uploaded file (in bytes)
+	 */
+	private $_fileSize=0;
+	/**
+	 * @var string The original name of the file on the client machine
+	 */
+	private $_fileName='';
+	/**
+	 * @var string the name of the temporary file storing the uploaded file
+	 */
+	private $_localName='';
+	/**
+	 * @var string the uploaded file mime type
+	 */
+	private $_fileType='';
+	/**
+	 * @var integer error code of the current file upload
+	 */
+	protected $_errorCode=UPLOAD_ERR_NO_FILE;
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
+	private $_isValid=true;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the file upload control
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'input';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets name attribute to the unique ID of the control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional file update control specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$this->getPage()->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$writer->addAttribute('type','file');
+		$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID());
+		$isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
+		if(!$isEnabled && $this->getEnabled())  // in this case parent will not render 'disabled'
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets Enctype of the form on the page.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked before render.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		if(($form=$this->getPage()->getForm())!==null)
+			$form->setEnctype('multipart/form-data');
+		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerHiddenField('MAX_FILE_SIZE',$this->getMaxFileSize());
+		if($this->getEnabled(true))
+			$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the maximum file size, defaults to 1MB (1048576 bytes).
+	 * @see setMaxFileSize
+	 */
+	public function getMaxFileSize()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MaxFileSize',self::MAX_FILE_SIZE);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the maximum size that a file can be uploaded.
+	 * Note, this is an advisory value to the browser. Sets this property with
+	 * a reasonably large size to save users the trouble of waiting
+	 * for a big file being transferred only to find that it was too big
+	 * and the transfer failed.
+	 * @param int the maximum upload size allowed for a file.
+	 */
+	public function setMaxFileSize($size)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('MaxFileSize',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($size),self::MAX_FILE_SIZE);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the original full path name of the file on the client machine
+	 */
+	public function getFileName()
+	{
+		return $this->_fileName;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the actual size of the uploaded file in bytes
+	 */
+	public function getFileSize()
+	{
+		return $this->_fileSize;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the MIME-type of the uploaded file (such as "image/gif").
+	 * This mime type is not checked on the server side and do not take its value for granted.
+	 */
+	public function getFileType()
+	{
+		return $this->_fileType;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the local name of the file (where it is after being uploaded).
+	 * Note, PHP will delete this file automatically after finishing this round of request.
+	 */
+	public function getLocalName()
+	{
+		return $this->_localName;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an error code describing the status of this file uploading.
+	 * @return integer the error code
+	 * @see http://www.php.net/manual/en/features.file-upload.errors.php
+	 */
+	public function getErrorCode()
+	{
+		return $this->_errorCode;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the file is uploaded successfully
+	 */
+	public function getHasFile()
+	{
+		return $this->_errorCode===UPLOAD_ERR_OK;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves the uploaded file.
+	 * @param string the file name used to save the uploaded file
+	 * @param boolean whether to delete the temporary file after saving.
+	 * If true, you will not be able to save the uploaded file again.
+	 * @return boolean true if the file saving is successful
+	 */
+	public function saveAs($fileName,$deleteTempFile=true)
+	{
+		if($this->_errorCode===UPLOAD_ERR_OK)
+		{
+			if($deleteTempFile)
+				return move_uploaded_file($this->_localName,$fileName);
+			else if(is_uploaded_file($this->_localName))
+				return file_put_contents($fileName,file_get_contents($this->_localName))!==false;
+			else
+				return false;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		if(isset($_FILES[$key]))
+		{
+			$this->_fileName=$_FILES[$key]['name'];
+			$this->_fileSize=$_FILES[$key]['size'];
+			$this->_fileType=$_FILES[$key]['type'];
+			$this->_errorCode=$_FILES[$key]['error'];
+			$this->_localName=$_FILES[$key]['tmp_name'];
+			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method calls {@link onFileUpload} method.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		$this->onFileUpload(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when a file is uploaded during a postback.
+	 * The method raises <b>OnFileUpload</b> event to fire up the event handler.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event delegates can be invoked.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onFileUpload($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnFileUpload',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the original file name as the property value to be validated.
+	 * This method is required by IValidatable property.
+	 * @return mixed the property value to be validated
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getFileName();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
+	 * Defaults to true.
+	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
+	 */
+	public function getIsValid()
+	{
+	    return $this->_isValid;
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
+	 */
+	public function setIsValid($value)
+	{
+	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFlushOutput.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFlushOutput.php
index cc55646d..0ea9b389 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFlushOutput.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFlushOutput.php
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TFlushOutput class file
- *
- * @author Berczi Gabor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id: TFlushOutput.php $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TFlushOutput class.
- *
- * TFlushOutput enables forced flushing of the current output buffer
- * at (a) certain point(s) in the page, after rendering of all previous
- * controls has been completed.
- *
- * To use TFlushOutput, simply place it in a template where you want
- * the have the output buffered between the start of the page or the
- * last TFlushOutput to be sent to the client immediately
- * <code>
- * <com:TFlushOutput />
- * </code>
- *
- * You can specify whether you want to keep buffering of the output 
- * (if it was enabled) till the next occourence of a <com: TFlushOutput />
- * or the end of the page rendering, or stop buffering, by using the 
- * {@link setContinueBuffering ContinueBuffering}.
- *
- * @author Berczi Gabor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @version $Id: TFlushOutput.php  $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1
- */
-class TFlushOutput extends TControl 
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether to continue buffering of output
-	 */
-	private $_continueBuffering=true;
-
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 */
-	public function __construct()
-	{
-		parent::__construct();
-		$this->EnableViewState = false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return Tells whether buffering of output can continue after this point
-	 */
-	public function getContinueBuffering()
-	{
-		return $this->_continueBuffering;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean sets whether buffering of output can continue after this point
-	 */
-	public function setContinueBuffering($value)
-	{
-		$this->_continueBuffering = TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Flushes the output of all completely rendered controls to the client.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-//$writer->write('<!-- flush -->');
-		// ajax responses can't be parsed by the client side before loaded and returned completely, 
-		// so don't bother with flushing output somewhere mid-page if refreshing in a callback
-		if (!$this->Page->IsCallback)
-		{
-			$this->Page->flushWriter();
-//			$this->Application->flushOutput($this->ContinueBuffering);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TFlushOutput class file
+ *
+ * @author Berczi Gabor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id: TFlushOutput.php $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TFlushOutput class.
+ *
+ * TFlushOutput enables forced flushing of the current output buffer
+ * at (a) certain point(s) in the page, after rendering of all previous
+ * controls has been completed.
+ *
+ * To use TFlushOutput, simply place it in a template where you want
+ * the have the output buffered between the start of the page or the
+ * last TFlushOutput to be sent to the client immediately
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TFlushOutput />
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * You can specify whether you want to keep buffering of the output 
+ * (if it was enabled) till the next occourence of a <com: TFlushOutput />
+ * or the end of the page rendering, or stop buffering, by using the 
+ * {@link setContinueBuffering ContinueBuffering}.
+ *
+ * @author Berczi Gabor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @version $Id: TFlushOutput.php  $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1
+ */
+class TFlushOutput extends TControl 
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether to continue buffering of output
+	 */
+	private $_continueBuffering=true;
+
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 */
+	public function __construct()
+	{
+		parent::__construct();
+		$this->EnableViewState = false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return Tells whether buffering of output can continue after this point
+	 */
+	public function getContinueBuffering()
+	{
+		return $this->_continueBuffering;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean sets whether buffering of output can continue after this point
+	 */
+	public function setContinueBuffering($value)
+	{
+		$this->_continueBuffering = TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Flushes the output of all completely rendered controls to the client.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+//$writer->write('<!-- flush -->');
+		// ajax responses can't be parsed by the client side before loaded and returned completely, 
+		// so don't bother with flushing output somewhere mid-page if refreshing in a callback
+		if (!$this->Page->IsCallback)
+		{
+			$this->Page->flushWriter();
+//			$this->Application->flushOutput($this->ContinueBuffering);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
 ?>
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFont.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFont.php
index 4da42508..771b6a4e 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFont.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TFont.php
@@ -1,318 +1,318 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TFont class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TFont class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TFont class
- *
- * TFont encapsulates the CSS style fields related with font settings.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TFont extends TComponent
-{
-	/**
-	 * Bits indicating the font states.
-	 */
-	const IS_BOLD=0x01;
-	const IS_ITALIC=0x02;
-	const IS_OVERLINE=0x04;
-	const IS_STRIKEOUT=0x08;
-	const IS_UNDERLINE=0x10;
-
-	/**
-	 * Bits indicating whether particular font states are changed.
-	 */
-	const IS_SET_BOLD=0x01000;
-	const IS_SET_ITALIC=0x02000;
-	const IS_SET_OVERLINE=0x04000;
-	const IS_SET_STRIKEOUT=0x08000;
-	const IS_SET_UNDERLINE=0x10000;
-	const IS_SET_SIZE=0x20000;
-	const IS_SET_NAME=0x40000;
-
-	/**
-	 * @var integer bits representing various states
-	 */
-	private $_flags=0;
-	/**
-	 * @var string font name
-	 */
-	private $_name='';
-	/**
-	 * @var string font size
-	 */
-	private $_size='';
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the font is in bold face. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getBold()
-	{
-		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_BOLD)!==0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the font is in bold face
-	 */
-	public function setBold($value)
-	{
-		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_BOLD;
-		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
-			$this->_flags |= self::IS_BOLD;
-		else
-			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_BOLD;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the font is in italic face. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getItalic()
-	{
-		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_ITALIC)!==0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the font is italic
-	 */
-	public function setItalic($value)
-	{
-		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_ITALIC;
-		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
-			$this->_flags |= self::IS_ITALIC;
-		else
-			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_ITALIC;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the font is overlined. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getOverline()
-	{
-		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_OVERLINE)!==0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the font is overlined
-	 */
-	public function setOverline($value)
-	{
-		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_OVERLINE;
-		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
-			$this->_flags |= self::IS_OVERLINE;
-		else
-			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_OVERLINE;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the font size
-	 */
-	public function getSize()
-	{
-		return $this->_size;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the font size
-	 */
-	public function setSize($value)
-	{
-		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_SIZE;
-		$this->_size=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the font is strikeout. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getStrikeout()
-	{
-		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_STRIKEOUT)!==0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the font is strikeout
-	 */
-	public function setStrikeout($value)
-	{
-		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT;
-		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
-			$this->_flags |= self::IS_STRIKEOUT;
-		else
-			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_STRIKEOUT;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the font is underlined. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getUnderline()
-	{
-		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_UNDERLINE)!==0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the font is underlined
-	 */
-	public function setUnderline($value)
-	{
-		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE;
-		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
-			$this->_flags |= self::IS_UNDERLINE;
-		else
-			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_UNDERLINE;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the font name (family)
-	 */
-	public function getName()
-	{
-		return $this->_name;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the font name (family)
-	 */
-	public function setName($value)
-	{
-		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_NAME;
-		$this->_name=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the font is empty
-	 */
-	public function getIsEmpty()
-	{
-		return !$this->_flags;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Clears up the font.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		$this->_flags=0;
-		$this->_name='';
-		$this->_size='';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges the font with a new one.
-	 * If a font field is not set in the font, it will be overwritten with
-	 * the new one.
-	 * @param TFont the new font
-	 */
-	public function mergeWith($font)
-	{
-		if($font===null || $font->_flags===0)
-			return;
-		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD))
-			$this->setBold($font->getBold());
-		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC))
-			$this->setItalic($font->getItalic());
-		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_OVERLINE) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_OVERLINE))
-			$this->setOverline($font->getOverline());
-		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT))
-			$this->setStrikeout($font->getStrikeout());
-		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE))
-			$this->setUnderline($font->getUnderline());
-		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_SIZE) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_SIZE))
-			$this->setSize($font->getSize());
-		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_NAME) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_NAME))
-			$this->setName($font->getName());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Copies the fields in a new font to this font.
-	 * If a font field is set in the new font, the corresponding field
-	 * in this font will be overwritten.
-	 * @param TFont the new font
-	 */
-	public function copyFrom($font)
-	{
-		if($font===null || $font->_flags===0)
-			return;
-		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD)
-			$this->setBold($font->getBold());
-		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC)
-			$this->setItalic($font->getItalic());
-		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_OVERLINE)
-			$this->setOverline($font->getOverline());
-		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT)
-			$this->setStrikeout($font->getStrikeout());
-		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE)
-			$this->setUnderline($font->getUnderline());
-		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_SIZE)
-			$this->setSize($font->getSize());
-		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_NAME)
-			$this->setName($font->getName());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the font in a css style string representation.
-	 */
-	public function toString()
-	{
-		if($this->_flags===0)
-			return '';
-		$str='';
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD)
-			$str.='font-weight:'.(($this->_flags & self::IS_BOLD)?'bold;':'normal;');
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC)
-			$str.='font-style:'.(($this->_flags & self::IS_ITALIC)?'italic;':'normal;');
-		$textDec='';
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_UNDERLINE)
-			$textDec.='underline';
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_OVERLINE)
-			$textDec.=' overline';
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_STRIKEOUT)
-			$textDec.=' line-through';
-		$textDec=ltrim($textDec);
-		if($textDec!=='')
-			$str.='text-decoration:'.$textDec.';';
-		if($this->_size!=='')
-			$str.='font-size:'.$this->_size.';';
-		if($this->_name!=='')
-			$str.='font-family:'.$this->_name.';';
-		return $str;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_flags===0)
-			return;
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD)
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-weight',(($this->_flags & self::IS_BOLD)?'bold':'normal'));
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC)
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-style',(($this->_flags & self::IS_ITALIC)?'italic':'normal'));
-		$textDec='';
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_UNDERLINE)
-			$textDec.='underline';
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_OVERLINE)
-			$textDec.=' overline';
-		if($this->_flags & self::IS_STRIKEOUT)
-			$textDec.=' line-through';
-		$textDec=ltrim($textDec);
-		if($textDec!=='')
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('text-decoration',$textDec);
-		if($this->_size!=='')
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-size',$this->_size);
-		if($this->_name!=='')
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-family',$this->_name);
-	}
-}
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TFont class
+ *
+ * TFont encapsulates the CSS style fields related with font settings.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TFont extends TComponent
+{
+	/**
+	 * Bits indicating the font states.
+	 */
+	const IS_BOLD=0x01;
+	const IS_ITALIC=0x02;
+	const IS_OVERLINE=0x04;
+	const IS_STRIKEOUT=0x08;
+	const IS_UNDERLINE=0x10;
+
+	/**
+	 * Bits indicating whether particular font states are changed.
+	 */
+	const IS_SET_BOLD=0x01000;
+	const IS_SET_ITALIC=0x02000;
+	const IS_SET_OVERLINE=0x04000;
+	const IS_SET_STRIKEOUT=0x08000;
+	const IS_SET_UNDERLINE=0x10000;
+	const IS_SET_SIZE=0x20000;
+	const IS_SET_NAME=0x40000;
+
+	/**
+	 * @var integer bits representing various states
+	 */
+	private $_flags=0;
+	/**
+	 * @var string font name
+	 */
+	private $_name='';
+	/**
+	 * @var string font size
+	 */
+	private $_size='';
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the font is in bold face. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getBold()
+	{
+		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_BOLD)!==0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the font is in bold face
+	 */
+	public function setBold($value)
+	{
+		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_BOLD;
+		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
+			$this->_flags |= self::IS_BOLD;
+		else
+			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_BOLD;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the font is in italic face. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getItalic()
+	{
+		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_ITALIC)!==0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the font is italic
+	 */
+	public function setItalic($value)
+	{
+		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_ITALIC;
+		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
+			$this->_flags |= self::IS_ITALIC;
+		else
+			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_ITALIC;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the font is overlined. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getOverline()
+	{
+		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_OVERLINE)!==0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the font is overlined
+	 */
+	public function setOverline($value)
+	{
+		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_OVERLINE;
+		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
+			$this->_flags |= self::IS_OVERLINE;
+		else
+			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_OVERLINE;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the font size
+	 */
+	public function getSize()
+	{
+		return $this->_size;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the font size
+	 */
+	public function setSize($value)
+	{
+		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_SIZE;
+		$this->_size=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the font is strikeout. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getStrikeout()
+	{
+		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_STRIKEOUT)!==0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the font is strikeout
+	 */
+	public function setStrikeout($value)
+	{
+		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT;
+		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
+			$this->_flags |= self::IS_STRIKEOUT;
+		else
+			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_STRIKEOUT;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the font is underlined. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getUnderline()
+	{
+		return ($this->_flags & self::IS_UNDERLINE)!==0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the font is underlined
+	 */
+	public function setUnderline($value)
+	{
+		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE;
+		if(TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value))
+			$this->_flags |= self::IS_UNDERLINE;
+		else
+			$this->_flags &= ~self::IS_UNDERLINE;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the font name (family)
+	 */
+	public function getName()
+	{
+		return $this->_name;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the font name (family)
+	 */
+	public function setName($value)
+	{
+		$this->_flags |= self::IS_SET_NAME;
+		$this->_name=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the font is empty
+	 */
+	public function getIsEmpty()
+	{
+		return !$this->_flags;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Clears up the font.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		$this->_flags=0;
+		$this->_name='';
+		$this->_size='';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges the font with a new one.
+	 * If a font field is not set in the font, it will be overwritten with
+	 * the new one.
+	 * @param TFont the new font
+	 */
+	public function mergeWith($font)
+	{
+		if($font===null || $font->_flags===0)
+			return;
+		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD))
+			$this->setBold($font->getBold());
+		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC))
+			$this->setItalic($font->getItalic());
+		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_OVERLINE) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_OVERLINE))
+			$this->setOverline($font->getOverline());
+		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT))
+			$this->setStrikeout($font->getStrikeout());
+		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE))
+			$this->setUnderline($font->getUnderline());
+		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_SIZE) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_SIZE))
+			$this->setSize($font->getSize());
+		if(!($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_NAME) && ($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_NAME))
+			$this->setName($font->getName());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Copies the fields in a new font to this font.
+	 * If a font field is set in the new font, the corresponding field
+	 * in this font will be overwritten.
+	 * @param TFont the new font
+	 */
+	public function copyFrom($font)
+	{
+		if($font===null || $font->_flags===0)
+			return;
+		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD)
+			$this->setBold($font->getBold());
+		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC)
+			$this->setItalic($font->getItalic());
+		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_OVERLINE)
+			$this->setOverline($font->getOverline());
+		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_STRIKEOUT)
+			$this->setStrikeout($font->getStrikeout());
+		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_UNDERLINE)
+			$this->setUnderline($font->getUnderline());
+		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_SIZE)
+			$this->setSize($font->getSize());
+		if($font->_flags & self::IS_SET_NAME)
+			$this->setName($font->getName());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the font in a css style string representation.
+	 */
+	public function toString()
+	{
+		if($this->_flags===0)
+			return '';
+		$str='';
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD)
+			$str.='font-weight:'.(($this->_flags & self::IS_BOLD)?'bold;':'normal;');
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC)
+			$str.='font-style:'.(($this->_flags & self::IS_ITALIC)?'italic;':'normal;');
+		$textDec='';
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_UNDERLINE)
+			$textDec.='underline';
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_OVERLINE)
+			$textDec.=' overline';
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_STRIKEOUT)
+			$textDec.=' line-through';
+		$textDec=ltrim($textDec);
+		if($textDec!=='')
+			$str.='text-decoration:'.$textDec.';';
+		if($this->_size!=='')
+			$str.='font-size:'.$this->_size.';';
+		if($this->_name!=='')
+			$str.='font-family:'.$this->_name.';';
+		return $str;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_flags===0)
+			return;
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_BOLD)
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-weight',(($this->_flags & self::IS_BOLD)?'bold':'normal'));
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_SET_ITALIC)
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-style',(($this->_flags & self::IS_ITALIC)?'italic':'normal'));
+		$textDec='';
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_UNDERLINE)
+			$textDec.='underline';
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_OVERLINE)
+			$textDec.=' overline';
+		if($this->_flags & self::IS_STRIKEOUT)
+			$textDec.=' line-through';
+		$textDec=ltrim($textDec);
+		if($textDec!=='')
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('text-decoration',$textDec);
+		if($this->_size!=='')
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-size',$this->_size);
+		if($this->_name!=='')
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('font-family',$this->_name);
+	}
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THead.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THead.php
index c0042c22..7966f2d3 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THead.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THead.php
@@ -1,377 +1,377 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * THead class file
- *
- * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI
- */
-
-/**
- * THead class
- *
- * THead displays a head element on a page. It displays the content
- * enclosed in its body and the page title set by the
- * {@link setTitle Title} property. In addition, stylesheets and JavaScripts registered via
- * {@link TClientScriptManager::registerStyleSheet}, {@link TClientScriptManager::registerStyleSheetFile}
- * {@link TClientScriptManager::registerHeadJavaScript}, and
- * {@link TClientScriptManager::registerHeadJavaScriptFile} will also be displayed
- * in the head.
- * THead also manages and displays meta tags through its {@link getMetaTags MetaTags}
- * property. You can add a meta object to the collection in code dynamically,
- * or add it in template using the following syntax,
- * <code>
- * <com:THead>
- *   <com:TMetaTag HttpEquiv="Pragma" Content="no-cache" />
- *   <com:TMetaTag Name="keywords" Content="Prado" />
- * </com:THead>
- * </code>
- *
- * Note, {@link TPage} has a property {@link TPage::getHead Head} that refers to
- * the THead control currently on the page. A page can have at most one THead
- * control. Although not required, it is recommended to place a THead on your page.
- * Without a THead on the page, stylesheets and javascripts in the current page
- * theme will not be rendered.
- *
- * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class THead extends TControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TList list of meta name tags to be loaded by {@link THead}
-	 */
-	private $_metaTags=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the head control with the current page.
-	 * This method is invoked when the control enters 'Init' stage.
-	 * The method raises 'Init' event.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onInit($param)
-	{
-		parent::onInit($param);
-		$this->getPage()->setHead($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
-	 * This method adds TMetaTag components into the {@link getMetaTags MetaTags}
-	 * collection of the head control.
-	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
-	 * @see createdOnTemplate
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof TMetaTag)
-			$this->getMetaTags()->add($object);
-		else
-			parent::addParsedObject($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the page title.
-	 */
-	public function getTitle()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Title','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the page title.
-	 * This title will be rendered only if the {@link TPage::getTitle Title} property
-	 * of the page is empty.
-	 * @param string the page title.
-	 */
-	public function setTitle($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Title',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string base URL of the page. This URL is rendered as the 'href' attribute of <base> tag. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getBaseUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('BaseUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string base URL of the page. This URL is rendered as the 'href' attribute of <base> tag.
-	 */
-	public function setBaseUrl($url)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('BaseUrl',$url,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL for the shortcut icon of the page. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getShortcutIcon()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShortcutIcon','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL for the shortcut icon of the page.
-	 */
-	public function setShortcutIcon($url)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShortcutIcon',$url,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TMetaTagCollection meta tag collection
-	 */
-	public function getMetaTags()
-	{
-		if(($metaTags=$this->getViewState('MetaTags',null))===null)
-		{
-			$metaTags=new TMetaTagCollection;
-			$this->setViewState('MetaTags',$metaTags,null);
-		}
-		return $metaTags;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the head control.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$title=$this->getTitle();
-		$writer->write("<head>\n<title>".THttpUtility::htmlEncode($title)."</title>\n");
-		if(($baseUrl=$this->getBaseUrl())!=='')
-			$writer->write('<base href="'.$baseUrl."\" />\n");
-		if(($icon=$this->getShortcutIcon())!=='')
-			$writer->write('<link rel="shortcut icon" href="'.$icon."\" />\n");
-
-		if(($metaTags=$this->getMetaTags())!==null)
-		{
-			foreach($metaTags as $metaTag)
-			{
-				$metaTag->render($writer);
-				$writer->writeLine();
-			}
-		}
-		$cs=$page->getClientScript();
-		$cs->renderStyleSheetFiles($writer);
-		$cs->renderStyleSheets($writer);
-		if($page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-		{
-			$cs->renderHeadScriptFiles($writer);
-			$cs->renderHeadScripts($writer);
-		}
-		parent::render($writer);
-		$writer->write("</head>\n");
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TMetaTag class.
- *
- * TMetaTag represents a meta tag appearing in a page head section.
- * You can set its {@link setID ID}, {@link setHttpEquiv HttpEquiv},
- * {@link setName Name}, {@link setContent Content}, {@link setScheme Scheme}
- * properties, which correspond to id, http-equiv, name, content, and scheme
- * attributes for a meta tag, respectively.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TMetaTag extends TComponent
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string id of the meta tag
-	 */
-	private $_id='';
-	/**
-	 * @var string http-equiv attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	private $_httpEquiv='';
-	/**
-	 * @var string name attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	private $_name='';
-	/**
-	 * @var string content attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	private $_content='';
-	/**
-	 * @var string scheme attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	private $_scheme='';
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string id of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function getID()
-	{
-		return $this->_id;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string id of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function setID($value)
-	{
-		$this->_id=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string http-equiv attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function getHttpEquiv()
-	{
-		return $this->_httpEquiv;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string http-equiv attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function setHttpEquiv($value)
-	{
-		$this->_httpEquiv=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string name attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function getName()
-	{
-		return $this->_name;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string name attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function setName($value)
-	{
-		$this->_name=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string content attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function getContent()
-	{
-		return $this->_content;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string content attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function setContent($value)
-	{
-		$this->_content=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string scheme attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function getScheme()
-	{
-		return $this->_scheme;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string scheme attribute of the meta tag
-	 */
-	public function setScheme($value)
-	{
-		$this->_scheme=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the meta tag.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_id!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->_id);
-		if($this->_name!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->_name);
-		if($this->_httpEquiv!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('http-equiv',$this->_httpEquiv);
-		if($this->_scheme!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('scheme',$this->_scheme);
-		$writer->addAttribute('content',$this->_content);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('meta');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TMetaTagCollection class
- *
- * TMetaTagCollection represents a collection of meta tags
- * contained in a {@link THead} control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TMetaTagCollection extends TList
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing type
-	 * check on the item being added.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a {@link TMetaTag}
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TMetaTag)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('metatagcollection_metatag_invalid');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Finds the lowest cardinal index of the meta tag whose id is the one being looked for.
-	 * @param string the ID of the meta tag to be looked for
-	 * @return integer the index of the meta tag found, -1 if not found.
-	 */
-	public function findIndexByID($id)
-	{
-		$index=0;
-		foreach($this as $item)
-		{
-			if($item->getID()===$id)
-				return $index;
-			$index++;
-		}
-		return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Finds the item whose value is the one being looked for.
-	 * @param string the id of the meta tag to be looked for
-	 * @return TMetaTag the meta tag found, null if not found.
-	 */
-	public function findMetaTagByID($id)
-	{
-		if(($index=$this->findIndexByID($id))>=0)
-			return $this->itemAt($index);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-}
-
-?>
+<?php
+/**
+ * THead class file
+ *
+ * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI
+ */
+
+/**
+ * THead class
+ *
+ * THead displays a head element on a page. It displays the content
+ * enclosed in its body and the page title set by the
+ * {@link setTitle Title} property. In addition, stylesheets and JavaScripts registered via
+ * {@link TClientScriptManager::registerStyleSheet}, {@link TClientScriptManager::registerStyleSheetFile}
+ * {@link TClientScriptManager::registerHeadJavaScript}, and
+ * {@link TClientScriptManager::registerHeadJavaScriptFile} will also be displayed
+ * in the head.
+ * THead also manages and displays meta tags through its {@link getMetaTags MetaTags}
+ * property. You can add a meta object to the collection in code dynamically,
+ * or add it in template using the following syntax,
+ * <code>
+ * <com:THead>
+ *   <com:TMetaTag HttpEquiv="Pragma" Content="no-cache" />
+ *   <com:TMetaTag Name="keywords" Content="Prado" />
+ * </com:THead>
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * Note, {@link TPage} has a property {@link TPage::getHead Head} that refers to
+ * the THead control currently on the page. A page can have at most one THead
+ * control. Although not required, it is recommended to place a THead on your page.
+ * Without a THead on the page, stylesheets and javascripts in the current page
+ * theme will not be rendered.
+ *
+ * @author Marcus Nyeholt <tanus@users.sourceforge.net> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class THead extends TControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TList list of meta name tags to be loaded by {@link THead}
+	 */
+	private $_metaTags=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the head control with the current page.
+	 * This method is invoked when the control enters 'Init' stage.
+	 * The method raises 'Init' event.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onInit($param)
+	{
+		parent::onInit($param);
+		$this->getPage()->setHead($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
+	 * This method adds TMetaTag components into the {@link getMetaTags MetaTags}
+	 * collection of the head control.
+	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
+	 * @see createdOnTemplate
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof TMetaTag)
+			$this->getMetaTags()->add($object);
+		else
+			parent::addParsedObject($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the page title.
+	 */
+	public function getTitle()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Title','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the page title.
+	 * This title will be rendered only if the {@link TPage::getTitle Title} property
+	 * of the page is empty.
+	 * @param string the page title.
+	 */
+	public function setTitle($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Title',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string base URL of the page. This URL is rendered as the 'href' attribute of <base> tag. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getBaseUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('BaseUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string base URL of the page. This URL is rendered as the 'href' attribute of <base> tag.
+	 */
+	public function setBaseUrl($url)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('BaseUrl',$url,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL for the shortcut icon of the page. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getShortcutIcon()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShortcutIcon','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL for the shortcut icon of the page.
+	 */
+	public function setShortcutIcon($url)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShortcutIcon',$url,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TMetaTagCollection meta tag collection
+	 */
+	public function getMetaTags()
+	{
+		if(($metaTags=$this->getViewState('MetaTags',null))===null)
+		{
+			$metaTags=new TMetaTagCollection;
+			$this->setViewState('MetaTags',$metaTags,null);
+		}
+		return $metaTags;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the head control.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$title=$this->getTitle();
+		$writer->write("<head>\n<title>".THttpUtility::htmlEncode($title)."</title>\n");
+		if(($baseUrl=$this->getBaseUrl())!=='')
+			$writer->write('<base href="'.$baseUrl."\" />\n");
+		if(($icon=$this->getShortcutIcon())!=='')
+			$writer->write('<link rel="shortcut icon" href="'.$icon."\" />\n");
+
+		if(($metaTags=$this->getMetaTags())!==null)
+		{
+			foreach($metaTags as $metaTag)
+			{
+				$metaTag->render($writer);
+				$writer->writeLine();
+			}
+		}
+		$cs=$page->getClientScript();
+		$cs->renderStyleSheetFiles($writer);
+		$cs->renderStyleSheets($writer);
+		if($page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+		{
+			$cs->renderHeadScriptFiles($writer);
+			$cs->renderHeadScripts($writer);
+		}
+		parent::render($writer);
+		$writer->write("</head>\n");
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TMetaTag class.
+ *
+ * TMetaTag represents a meta tag appearing in a page head section.
+ * You can set its {@link setID ID}, {@link setHttpEquiv HttpEquiv},
+ * {@link setName Name}, {@link setContent Content}, {@link setScheme Scheme}
+ * properties, which correspond to id, http-equiv, name, content, and scheme
+ * attributes for a meta tag, respectively.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TMetaTag extends TComponent
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string id of the meta tag
+	 */
+	private $_id='';
+	/**
+	 * @var string http-equiv attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	private $_httpEquiv='';
+	/**
+	 * @var string name attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	private $_name='';
+	/**
+	 * @var string content attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	private $_content='';
+	/**
+	 * @var string scheme attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	private $_scheme='';
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string id of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function getID()
+	{
+		return $this->_id;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string id of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function setID($value)
+	{
+		$this->_id=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string http-equiv attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function getHttpEquiv()
+	{
+		return $this->_httpEquiv;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string http-equiv attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function setHttpEquiv($value)
+	{
+		$this->_httpEquiv=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string name attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function getName()
+	{
+		return $this->_name;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string name attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function setName($value)
+	{
+		$this->_name=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string content attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function getContent()
+	{
+		return $this->_content;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string content attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function setContent($value)
+	{
+		$this->_content=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string scheme attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function getScheme()
+	{
+		return $this->_scheme;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string scheme attribute of the meta tag
+	 */
+	public function setScheme($value)
+	{
+		$this->_scheme=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the meta tag.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_id!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->_id);
+		if($this->_name!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->_name);
+		if($this->_httpEquiv!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('http-equiv',$this->_httpEquiv);
+		if($this->_scheme!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('scheme',$this->_scheme);
+		$writer->addAttribute('content',$this->_content);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('meta');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TMetaTagCollection class
+ *
+ * TMetaTagCollection represents a collection of meta tags
+ * contained in a {@link THead} control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TMetaTagCollection extends TList
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing type
+	 * check on the item being added.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a {@link TMetaTag}
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TMetaTag)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('metatagcollection_metatag_invalid');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Finds the lowest cardinal index of the meta tag whose id is the one being looked for.
+	 * @param string the ID of the meta tag to be looked for
+	 * @return integer the index of the meta tag found, -1 if not found.
+	 */
+	public function findIndexByID($id)
+	{
+		$index=0;
+		foreach($this as $item)
+		{
+			if($item->getID()===$id)
+				return $index;
+			$index++;
+		}
+		return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Finds the item whose value is the one being looked for.
+	 * @param string the id of the meta tag to be looked for
+	 * @return TMetaTag the meta tag found, null if not found.
+	 */
+	public function findMetaTagByID($id)
+	{
+		if(($index=$this->findIndexByID($id))>=0)
+			return $this->itemAt($index);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+}
+
+?>
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THiddenField.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THiddenField.php
index ac8ddfff..ec330d54 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THiddenField.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THiddenField.php
@@ -1,117 +1,117 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * THiddenField class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.xisc.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * THiddenField class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.xisc.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php BSD License
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * THiddenField class
- *
- * THiddenField displays a hidden input field on a Web page.
- * The value of the input field can be accessed via {@link getValue Value} property.
- * If upon postback the value is changed, a {@link onValueChanged OnValueChanged}
- * event will be raised.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class THiddenField extends TControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable, IDataRenderer
-{
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
+ * @license http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php BSD License
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * THiddenField class
+ *
+ * THiddenField displays a hidden input field on a Web page.
+ * The value of the input field can be accessed via {@link getValue Value} property.
+ * If upon postback the value is changed, a {@link onValueChanged OnValueChanged}
+ * event will be raised.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class THiddenField extends TControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable, IDataRenderer
+{
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
 	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the hidden field.
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'input';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets focus to this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by forbidding setting focus to this control.
-	 */
-	public function focus()
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('hiddenfield_focus_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by rendering
-	 * the hidden field input element.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID();
-		$this->getPage()->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-		$writer->addAttribute('type','hidden');
-		if($uniqueID!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
-		if($this->getID()!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		if(($value=$this->getValue())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('value',$value);
-
-		if($this->getHasAttributes())
-		{
-			foreach($this->getAttributes() as $name=>$value)
-				$writer->addAttribute($name,$value);
-		}
-
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads hidden field data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		$value=$values[$key];
-		if($value===$this->getValue())
-			return false;
-		else
-		{
-			$this->setValue($value);
-			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value to be validated.
-	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
-	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getValue();
-	}
-
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the hidden field.
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'input';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets focus to this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by forbidding setting focus to this control.
+	 */
+	public function focus()
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('hiddenfield_focus_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by rendering
+	 * the hidden field input element.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID();
+		$this->getPage()->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+		$writer->addAttribute('type','hidden');
+		if($uniqueID!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
+		if($this->getID()!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		if(($value=$this->getValue())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('value',$value);
+
+		if($this->getHasAttributes())
+		{
+			foreach($this->getAttributes() as $name=>$value)
+				$writer->addAttribute($name,$value);
+		}
+
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads hidden field data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		$value=$values[$key];
+		if($value===$this->getValue())
+			return false;
+		else
+		{
+			$this->setValue($value);
+			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value to be validated.
+	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
+	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getValue();
+	}
+
 	/**
 	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
 	 * Defaults to true.
@@ -129,96 +129,96 @@ class THiddenField extends TControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatabl
 	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
 	}
 
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method calls {@link onValueChanged} method.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		$this->onValueChanged(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the value of the {@link getValue Value} property changes between posts to the server.
-	 * The method raises 'OnValueChanged' event to fire up the event delegates.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the attached event handlers can be invoked.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onValueChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnValueChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the value of the THiddenField
-	 */
-	public function getValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Value','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value of the THiddenField
-	 * @param string the value to be set
-	 */
-	public function setValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Value',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value of the hidden field.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getValue()}.
-	 * @return string value of the hidden field
-	 * @see getValue
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getValue();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value of the hidden field.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setValue()}.
-	 * @param string value of the hidden field
-	 * @see setValue
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setValue($value);
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether theming is enabled for this control. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableTheming()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether theming is enabled for this control.
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException This method is always thrown when calling this method.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableTheming($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('hiddenfield_theming_unsupported');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string Skin ID
-	 * @throws TNotSupportedException This method is always thrown when calling this method.
-	 */
-	public function setSkinID($value)
-	{
-		throw new TNotSupportedException('hiddenfield_skinid_unsupported');
-	}
-}
-
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method calls {@link onValueChanged} method.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		$this->onValueChanged(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the value of the {@link getValue Value} property changes between posts to the server.
+	 * The method raises 'OnValueChanged' event to fire up the event delegates.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the attached event handlers can be invoked.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onValueChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnValueChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the value of the THiddenField
+	 */
+	public function getValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Value','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value of the THiddenField
+	 * @param string the value to be set
+	 */
+	public function setValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Value',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value of the hidden field.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getValue()}.
+	 * @return string value of the hidden field
+	 * @see getValue
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getValue();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value of the hidden field.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setValue()}.
+	 * @param string value of the hidden field
+	 * @see setValue
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setValue($value);
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether theming is enabled for this control. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableTheming()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether theming is enabled for this control.
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException This method is always thrown when calling this method.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableTheming($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('hiddenfield_theming_unsupported');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string Skin ID
+	 * @throws TNotSupportedException This method is always thrown when calling this method.
+	 */
+	public function setSkinID($value)
+	{
+		throw new TNotSupportedException('hiddenfield_skinid_unsupported');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THtmlElement.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THtmlElement.php
index 3889ee50..29cd0057 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THtmlElement.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THtmlElement.php
@@ -1,68 +1,68 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * THtmlElement class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TWebControl');
-
-/**
- * THtmlElement class.
- *
- * THtmlElement represents a generic HTML element whose tag name is specified
- * via {@link setTagName TagName} property. Because THtmlElement extends from
- * {@link TWebControl}, it enjoys all its functionalities.
- *
- * To change the default tag your subclass should override {@link getDefaultTagName}
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @author Brad Anderson <javalizard@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.2
- */
-class THtmlElement extends TWebControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var the tag of this element
-	 */
-	private $_tagName=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the tag name of this control. Defaults to 'span'.
-	 */
-	public function getTagName()
-	{
-		return ($this->_tagName !== null) ? $this->_tagName : ($this->_tagName = $this->getDefaultTagName());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the tag name of this control.
-	 */
-	public function setTagName($value)
-	{
-		$this->_tagName=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 *	This is the default tag when no other is specified
-	 * @return string the default tag 
-	 */
-	public function getDefaultTagName() {
-		return 'span';
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * This tells you if this TagName has deviated from the original
-	 * @return boolean true if TagName has deviated from the default. 
-	 */
-	public function getIsMutated() {
-		return $this->_tagName !== null && $this->_tagName != $this->getDefaultTagName();
-	}
-}
+<?php
+/**
+ * THtmlElement class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TWebControl');
+
+/**
+ * THtmlElement class.
+ *
+ * THtmlElement represents a generic HTML element whose tag name is specified
+ * via {@link setTagName TagName} property. Because THtmlElement extends from
+ * {@link TWebControl}, it enjoys all its functionalities.
+ *
+ * To change the default tag your subclass should override {@link getDefaultTagName}
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @author Brad Anderson <javalizard@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.2
+ */
+class THtmlElement extends TWebControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var the tag of this element
+	 */
+	private $_tagName=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the tag name of this control. Defaults to 'span'.
+	 */
+	public function getTagName()
+	{
+		return ($this->_tagName !== null) ? $this->_tagName : ($this->_tagName = $this->getDefaultTagName());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the tag name of this control.
+	 */
+	public function setTagName($value)
+	{
+		$this->_tagName=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 *	This is the default tag when no other is specified
+	 * @return string the default tag 
+	 */
+	public function getDefaultTagName() {
+		return 'span';
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * This tells you if this TagName has deviated from the original
+	 * @return boolean true if TagName has deviated from the default. 
+	 */
+	public function getIsMutated() {
+		return $this->_tagName !== null && $this->_tagName != $this->getDefaultTagName();
+	}
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLink.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLink.php
index 1e32d6c9..b745f7b0 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLink.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLink.php
@@ -1,227 +1,227 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * THyperLink class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.xisc.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php BSD License
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * THyperLink class
- *
- * THyperLink displays a hyperlink on a page. The hyperlink URL is specified
- * via the {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} property, and link text is via
- * the {@link setText Text} property. It is also possible to display an image
- * by setting the {@link setImageUrl ImageUrl} property. In this case,
- * {@link getText Text} is displayed as the alternate text of the image.
- * The link target is specified via the {@link setTarget Target} property.
- * If both {@link getImageUrl ImageUrl} and {@link getText Text} are empty,
- * the content enclosed within the control tag will be rendered.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class THyperLink extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the hyperlink
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'a';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes related to a hyperlink element to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
-		if($this->getEnabled() && !$isEnabled)
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if(($url=$this->getNavigateUrl())!=='' && $isEnabled)
-			$writer->addAttribute('href',$url);
-		if(($target=$this->getTarget())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('target',$target);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content of the hyperlink.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if(($imageUrl=$this->getImageUrl())==='')
-		{
-			if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-				$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text));
-			else if($this->getHasControls())
-				parent::renderContents($writer);
-			else
-				$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($this->getNavigateUrl()));
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$this->createImage($imageUrl)->renderControl($writer);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the TImage for rendering the ImageUrl property. This is not for
-	 * creating dynamic images.
-	 * @param string image url.
-	 * @return TImage image control for rendering.
-	 */
-	protected function createImage($imageUrl)
-	{
-		$image=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
-		$image->setImageUrl($imageUrl);
-		if(($width=$this->getImageWidth())!=='')
-			$image->setWidth($width);
-		if(($height=$this->getImageHeight())!=='')
-			$image->setHeight($height);
-		if(($toolTip=$this->getToolTip())!=='')
-			$image->setToolTip($toolTip);
-		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-			$image->setAlternateText($text);
-		$image->setBorderWidth('0');
-		return $image;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text caption of the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text caption of the THyperLink.
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string height of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function getImageHeight()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageHeight','');
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * Sets the height of the image in the THyperLink
-	 * @param string height of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function setImageHeight($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewSTate('ImageHeight',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the location of the image file for the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function getImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the location of image file of the THyperLink.
-	 * @param string the image file location
-	 */
-	public function setImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @return string width of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function getImageWidth()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageWidth','');
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * Sets the width of the image in the THyperLink
-	 * @param string width of the image
-	 */
-	public function setImageWidth($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageWidth',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigateUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
-	 * @param string the URL
-	 */
-	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
-	 * @return string the text caption
-	 * @see getText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 * @see setText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function getTarget()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
-	 * @param string the target window, valid values include '_blank', '_parent', '_self', '_top' and empty string.
-	 */
-	public function setTarget($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Target',$value,'');
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * THyperLink class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.xisc.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php BSD License
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * THyperLink class
+ *
+ * THyperLink displays a hyperlink on a page. The hyperlink URL is specified
+ * via the {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} property, and link text is via
+ * the {@link setText Text} property. It is also possible to display an image
+ * by setting the {@link setImageUrl ImageUrl} property. In this case,
+ * {@link getText Text} is displayed as the alternate text of the image.
+ * The link target is specified via the {@link setTarget Target} property.
+ * If both {@link getImageUrl ImageUrl} and {@link getText Text} are empty,
+ * the content enclosed within the control tag will be rendered.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class THyperLink extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the hyperlink
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'a';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes related to a hyperlink element to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
+		if($this->getEnabled() && !$isEnabled)
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if(($url=$this->getNavigateUrl())!=='' && $isEnabled)
+			$writer->addAttribute('href',$url);
+		if(($target=$this->getTarget())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('target',$target);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content of the hyperlink.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if(($imageUrl=$this->getImageUrl())==='')
+		{
+			if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+				$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text));
+			else if($this->getHasControls())
+				parent::renderContents($writer);
+			else
+				$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($this->getNavigateUrl()));
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$this->createImage($imageUrl)->renderControl($writer);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the TImage for rendering the ImageUrl property. This is not for
+	 * creating dynamic images.
+	 * @param string image url.
+	 * @return TImage image control for rendering.
+	 */
+	protected function createImage($imageUrl)
+	{
+		$image=Prado::createComponent('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
+		$image->setImageUrl($imageUrl);
+		if(($width=$this->getImageWidth())!=='')
+			$image->setWidth($width);
+		if(($height=$this->getImageHeight())!=='')
+			$image->setHeight($height);
+		if(($toolTip=$this->getToolTip())!=='')
+			$image->setToolTip($toolTip);
+		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+			$image->setAlternateText($text);
+		$image->setBorderWidth('0');
+		return $image;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text caption of the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text caption of the THyperLink.
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string height of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function getImageHeight()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageHeight','');
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * Sets the height of the image in the THyperLink
+	 * @param string height of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function setImageHeight($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewSTate('ImageHeight',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the location of the image file for the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function getImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the location of image file of the THyperLink.
+	 * @param string the image file location
+	 */
+	public function setImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @return string width of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function getImageWidth()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageWidth','');
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * Sets the width of the image in the THyperLink
+	 * @param string width of the image
+	 */
+	public function setImageWidth($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageWidth',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigateUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
+	 * @param string the URL
+	 */
+	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
+	 * @return string the text caption
+	 * @see getText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL to link to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 * @see setText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function getTarget()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the THyperLink component is clicked.
+	 * @param string the target window, valid values include '_blank', '_parent', '_self', '_top' and empty string.
+	 */
+	public function setTarget($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Target',$value,'');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLinkColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLinkColumn.php
index a73880f1..faa4ce42 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLinkColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/THyperLinkColumn.php
@@ -1,273 +1,273 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * THyperLinkColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-/**
- * THyperLink class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.THyperLink');
-
-/**
- * THyperLinkColumn class
- *
- * THyperLinkColumn contains a hyperlink for each item in the column.
- * You can set the text and the url of the hyperlink by {@link setText Text}
- * and {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} properties, respectively.
- * You can also bind the text and url to specific data field in datasource
- * by setting {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} and
- * {@link setDataNavigateUrlField DataNavigateUrlField}.
- * Both can be formatted before rendering according to the
- * {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString} and
- * and {@link setDataNavigateUrlFormatString DataNavigateUrlFormatString}
- * properties, respectively. If both {@link setText Text} and {@link setDataTextField DataTextField}
- * are present, the latter takes precedence.
- * The same rule applies to {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} and
- * {@link setDataNavigateUrlField DataNavigateUrlField} properties.
- *
- * The hyperlinks in the column can be accessed by one of the following two methods:
- * <code>
- * $datagridItem->HyperLinkColumnID->HyperLink
- * $datagridItem->HyperLinkColumnID->Controls[0]
- * </code>
- * The second method is possible because the hyperlink control created within the
- * datagrid cell is the first child.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class THyperLinkColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text caption of the hyperlink
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text caption of the hyperlink.
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the hyperlink caption
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the hyperlink caption
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the hyperlink caption will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the hyperlink caption will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string height of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function getImageHeight()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageHeight','');
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @param string height of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function setImageHeight($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageHeight',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string url of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function getImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @param string url of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function setImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @return string width of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function getImageWidth()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageWidth','');
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @param string width of the image in the THyperLink
-	 */
-	public function setImageWidth($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageWidth',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL to link to when the hyperlink is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigateUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL to link to when the hyperlink is clicked.
-	 * @param string the URL
-	 */
-	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the navigate url of hyperlink
-	 */
-	public function getDataNavigateUrlField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataNavigateUrlField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the navigate url of hyperlink
-	 */
-	public function setDataNavigateUrlField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataNavigateUrlField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the navigate url of hyperlink will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataNavigateUrlFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataNavigateUrlFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the navigate url of hyperlink will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setDataNavigateUrlFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataNavigateUrlFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the hyperlink is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function getTarget()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the hyperlink is clicked.
-	 * @param string the target window, valid values include '_blank', '_parent', '_self', '_top' and empty string.
-	 */
-	public function setTarget($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Target',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * It creates a hyperlink within the cell.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
-		{
-			$link=new THyperLink;
-			if(($url = $this->getImageUrl())!=='')
-			{
-				$link->setImageUrl($url);
-				if(($width=$this->getImageWidth())!=='')
-					$link->setImageWidth($width);
-				if(($height=$this->getImageHeight())!=='')
-					$link->setImageHeight($height);
-			}
-			$link->setText($this->getText());
-			$link->setNavigateUrl($this->getNavigateUrl());
-			$link->setTarget($this->getTarget());
-			if($this->getDataTextField()!=='' || $this->getDataNavigateUrlField()!=='')
-				$link->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-			$cell->getControls()->add($link);
-			$cell->registerObject('HyperLink',$link);
-		}
-		else
-			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
-	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
-	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
-	 */
-	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
-		$data=$item->getData();
-		if(($field=$this->getDataTextField())!=='')
-		{
-			$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
-			$text=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataTextFormatString(),$value);
-			$sender->setText($text);
-		}
-		if(($field=$this->getDataNavigateUrlField())!=='')
-		{
-			$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
-			$url=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataNavigateUrlFormatString(),$value);
-			$sender->setNavigateUrl($url);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * THyperLinkColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+/**
+ * THyperLink class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.THyperLink');
+
+/**
+ * THyperLinkColumn class
+ *
+ * THyperLinkColumn contains a hyperlink for each item in the column.
+ * You can set the text and the url of the hyperlink by {@link setText Text}
+ * and {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} properties, respectively.
+ * You can also bind the text and url to specific data field in datasource
+ * by setting {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} and
+ * {@link setDataNavigateUrlField DataNavigateUrlField}.
+ * Both can be formatted before rendering according to the
+ * {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString} and
+ * and {@link setDataNavigateUrlFormatString DataNavigateUrlFormatString}
+ * properties, respectively. If both {@link setText Text} and {@link setDataTextField DataTextField}
+ * are present, the latter takes precedence.
+ * The same rule applies to {@link setNavigateUrl NavigateUrl} and
+ * {@link setDataNavigateUrlField DataNavigateUrlField} properties.
+ *
+ * The hyperlinks in the column can be accessed by one of the following two methods:
+ * <code>
+ * $datagridItem->HyperLinkColumnID->HyperLink
+ * $datagridItem->HyperLinkColumnID->Controls[0]
+ * </code>
+ * The second method is possible because the hyperlink control created within the
+ * datagrid cell is the first child.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class THyperLinkColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text caption of the hyperlink
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text caption of the hyperlink.
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the hyperlink caption
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the hyperlink caption
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the hyperlink caption will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the hyperlink caption will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string height of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function getImageHeight()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageHeight','');
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @param string height of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function setImageHeight($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageHeight',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string url of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function getImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @param string url of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function setImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @return string width of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function getImageWidth()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageWidth','');
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @param string width of the image in the THyperLink
+	 */
+	public function setImageWidth($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageWidth',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL to link to when the hyperlink is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigateUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL to link to when the hyperlink is clicked.
+	 * @param string the URL
+	 */
+	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the navigate url of hyperlink
+	 */
+	public function getDataNavigateUrlField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataNavigateUrlField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the navigate url of hyperlink
+	 */
+	public function setDataNavigateUrlField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataNavigateUrlField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the navigate url of hyperlink will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataNavigateUrlFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataNavigateUrlFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the navigate url of hyperlink will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setDataNavigateUrlFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataNavigateUrlFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the hyperlink is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function getTarget()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the hyperlink is clicked.
+	 * @param string the target window, valid values include '_blank', '_parent', '_self', '_top' and empty string.
+	 */
+	public function setTarget($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Target',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * It creates a hyperlink within the cell.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
+		{
+			$link=new THyperLink;
+			if(($url = $this->getImageUrl())!=='')
+			{
+				$link->setImageUrl($url);
+				if(($width=$this->getImageWidth())!=='')
+					$link->setImageWidth($width);
+				if(($height=$this->getImageHeight())!=='')
+					$link->setImageHeight($height);
+			}
+			$link->setText($this->getText());
+			$link->setNavigateUrl($this->getNavigateUrl());
+			$link->setTarget($this->getTarget());
+			if($this->getDataTextField()!=='' || $this->getDataNavigateUrlField()!=='')
+				$link->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+			$cell->getControls()->add($link);
+			$cell->registerObject('HyperLink',$link);
+		}
+		else
+			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
+	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
+	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
+	 */
+	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
+		$data=$item->getData();
+		if(($field=$this->getDataTextField())!=='')
+		{
+			$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
+			$text=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataTextFormatString(),$value);
+			$sender->setText($text);
+		}
+		if(($field=$this->getDataNavigateUrlField())!=='')
+		{
+			$value=$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
+			$url=$this->formatDataValue($this->getDataNavigateUrlFormatString(),$value);
+			$sender->setNavigateUrl($url);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImage.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImage.php
index 37f9a050..c8dde281 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImage.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImage.php
@@ -1,157 +1,157 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TImage class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TImage class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TImage class
- *
- * TImage displays an image on a page. The image is specified via the
- * {@link setImageUrl ImageUrl} property which takes a relative or absolute
- * URL to the image file. The alignment of the image displayed is set by
- * the {@link setImageAlign ImageAlign} property. To set alternative texts
- * or long description of the image, use {@link setAlternateText AlternateText}
- * or {@link setDescriptionUrl DescriptionUrl} property, respectively.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TImage extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of image control
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'img';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes related to an HTML image element to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('src',$this->getImageUrl());
-		$writer->addAttribute('alt',$this->getAlternateText());
-		if(($desc=$this->getDescriptionUrl())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('longdesc',$desc);
-		if(($align=$this->getImageAlign())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('align',$align);
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content of the image.
-	 * Nothing to be rendered within image tags.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the alternative text displayed in the TImage component when the image is unavailable.
-	 */
-	public function getAlternateText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AlternateText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the alternative text to be displayed in the TImage when the image is unavailable.
-	 * @param string the alternative text
-	 */
-	public function setAlternateText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AlternateText',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the alignment of the image with respective to other elements on the page, defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getImageAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageAlign','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the alignment of the image with respective to other elements on the page.
-	 * Possible values include: absbottom, absmiddle, baseline, bottom, left,
-	 * middle, right, texttop, and top. If an empty string is passed in,
-	 * imagealign attribute will not be rendered.
-	 * @param string the alignment of the image
-	 */
-	public function setImageAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageAlign',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the image file
-	 */
-	public function getImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL of the image file
-	 */
-	public function setImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the URL of the image file.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getImageUrl()}.
-	 * @return string the URL of the image file.
-	 * @see getImageUrl
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getImageUrl();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL of the image.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setImageUrl()}.
-	 * @param string the URL of the image file.
-	 * @see setImageUrl
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setImageUrl($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL to long description
-	 */
-	public function getDescriptionUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DescriptionUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL to the long description of the image.
-	 */
-	public function setDescriptionUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DescriptionUrl',$value,'');
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TImage class
+ *
+ * TImage displays an image on a page. The image is specified via the
+ * {@link setImageUrl ImageUrl} property which takes a relative or absolute
+ * URL to the image file. The alignment of the image displayed is set by
+ * the {@link setImageAlign ImageAlign} property. To set alternative texts
+ * or long description of the image, use {@link setAlternateText AlternateText}
+ * or {@link setDescriptionUrl DescriptionUrl} property, respectively.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TImage extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of image control
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'img';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes related to an HTML image element to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('src',$this->getImageUrl());
+		$writer->addAttribute('alt',$this->getAlternateText());
+		if(($desc=$this->getDescriptionUrl())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('longdesc',$desc);
+		if(($align=$this->getImageAlign())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('align',$align);
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content of the image.
+	 * Nothing to be rendered within image tags.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the alternative text displayed in the TImage component when the image is unavailable.
+	 */
+	public function getAlternateText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AlternateText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the alternative text to be displayed in the TImage when the image is unavailable.
+	 * @param string the alternative text
+	 */
+	public function setAlternateText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AlternateText',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the alignment of the image with respective to other elements on the page, defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getImageAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageAlign','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the alignment of the image with respective to other elements on the page.
+	 * Possible values include: absbottom, absmiddle, baseline, bottom, left,
+	 * middle, right, texttop, and top. If an empty string is passed in,
+	 * imagealign attribute will not be rendered.
+	 * @param string the alignment of the image
+	 */
+	public function setImageAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageAlign',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the image file
+	 */
+	public function getImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL of the image file
+	 */
+	public function setImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ImageUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the URL of the image file.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getImageUrl()}.
+	 * @return string the URL of the image file.
+	 * @see getImageUrl
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getImageUrl();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL of the image.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setImageUrl()}.
+	 * @param string the URL of the image file.
+	 * @see setImageUrl
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setImageUrl($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL to long description
+	 */
+	public function getDescriptionUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DescriptionUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL to the long description of the image.
+	 */
+	public function setDescriptionUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DescriptionUrl',$value,'');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageButton.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageButton.php
index 350c84d4..a92a9df8 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageButton.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageButton.php
@@ -1,442 +1,442 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TImageButton class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TImageButton class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TImage class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
-
-/**
- * TImageButton class
- *
- * TImageButton creates an image button on the page. It is used to submit data to a page.
- * You can create either a <b>submit</b> button or a <b>command</b> button.
- *
- * A <b>command</b> button has a command name (specified by
- * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property) and and a command parameter
- * (specified by {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property)
- * associated with the button. This allows you to create multiple TLinkButton
- * components on a Web page and programmatically determine which one is clicked
- * with what parameter. You can provide an event handler for
- * {@link onCommand OnCommand} event to programmatically control the actions performed
- * when the command button is clicked. In the event handler, you can determine
- * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property value and
- * the {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property value
- * through the {@link TCommandParameter::getName Name} and
- * {@link TCommandParameter::getParameter Parameter} properties of the event
- * parameter which is of type {@link TCommandEventParameter}.
- *
- * A <b>submit</b> button does not have a command name associated with the button
- * and clicking on it simply posts the Web page back to the server.
- * By default, a TImageButton control is a submit button.
- * You can provide an event handler for the {@link onClick OnClick} event
- * to programmatically control the actions performed when the submit button is clicked.
- * The coordinates of the clicking point can be obtained from the {@link onClick OnClick}
- * event parameter, which is of type {@link TImageClickEventParameter}.
- *
- * Clicking on button can trigger form validation, if
- * {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true.
- * And the validation may be restricted within a certain group of validator
- * controls by setting {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup} property.
- * If validation is successful, the data will be post back to the same page.
- *
- * TImageButton displays the {@link setText Text} property as the hint text to the displayed image.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TImageButton extends TImage implements IPostBackDataHandler, IPostBackEventHandler, IButtonControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var integer x coordinate that the image is being clicked at
-	 */
-	private $_x=0;
-	/**
-	 * @var integer y coordinate that the image is being clicked at
-	 */
-	private $_y=0;
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the button
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'input';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional button specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-		$writer->addAttribute('type','image');
-		if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
-		if($this->getEnabled(true))
-		{
-			if($this->getEnableClientScript() && $this->needPostBackScript())
-				$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-		}
-		else if($this->getEnabled()) // in this case, parent will not render 'disabled'
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the client-script code.
-	 */
-	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TImageButton';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to perform validation if the button is clicked
-	 */
-	protected function canCauseValidation()
-	{
-		if($this->getCausesValidation())
-		{
-			$group=$this->getValidationGroup();
-			return $this->getPage()->getValidators($group)->getCount()>0;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean set by a panel to register this button as the default button for the panel.
-	 */
-	public function setIsDefaultButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('IsDefaultButton', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean true if this button is registered as a default button for a panel.
-	 */
-	public function getIsDefaultButton()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('IsDefaultButton', false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the button needs javascript to do postback
-	 */
-	protected function needPostBackScript()
-	{
-		return $this->canCauseValidation() || $this->getIsDefaultButton();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns postback specifications for the button.
-	 * This method is used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @return array parameters about how the button defines its postback behavior.
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method checks if the TImageButton is clicked and loads the coordinates of the clicking position.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		$uid=$this->getUniqueID();
-		if(isset($values["{$uid}_x"]) && isset($values["{$uid}_y"]))
-		{
-			$this->_x=intval($values["{$uid}_x"]);
-			$this->_y=intval($values["{$uid}_y"]);
-			if($this->getPage()->getPostBackEventTarget()===null)
-				$this->getPage()->setPostBackEventTarget($this);
-			$this->_dataChanged=true;
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * A dummy implementation for the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		// no post data to handle
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
-	 * The method raises 'OnClick' event to fire up the event handlers.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
-	 * @param TImageClickEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
-	 * The method raises 'OnCommand' event to fire up the event handlers.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
-	 * @param TCommandEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCommand',$this,$param);
-		$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises the postback event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
-	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
-	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
-	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand} events.
-	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
-	 */
-	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
-	{
-		if($this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onClick(new TImageClickEventParameter($this->_x,$this->_y));
-		$this->onCommand(new TCommandEventParameter($this->getCommandName(),$this->getCommandParameter()));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation, default is true
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandName()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function setCommandName($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event
-	 */
-	public function getCommandParameter()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CommandParameter','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function setCommandParameter($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CommandParameter',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string caption of the button
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getAlternateText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string caption of the button
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setAlternateText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the image button to receive postback data during postback.
-	 * This is necessary because an image button, when postback, does not have
-	 * direct mapping between post data and the image button name.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked before render.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation with nothing to be rendered.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TImageClickEventParameter class
- *
- * TImageClickEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TImageButton::onClick Click} event of {@link TImageButton} controls.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TImageClickEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * the X coordinate of the clicking point
-	 * @var integer
-	 */
-	private $_x=0;
-	/**
-	 * the Y coordinate of the clicking point
-	 * @var integer
-	 */
-	private $_y=0;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param integer X coordinate of the clicking point
-	 * @param integer Y coordinate of the clicking point
-	 */
-	public function __construct($x,$y)
-	{
-		$this->_x=$x;
-		$this->_y=$y;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer X coordinate of the clicking point, defaults to 0
-	 */
-	public function getX()
-	{
-		return $this->_x;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer X coordinate of the clicking point
-	 */
-	public function setX($value)
-	{
-		$this->_x=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer Y coordinate of the clicking point, defaults to 0
-	 */
-	public function getY()
-	{
-		return $this->_y;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer Y coordinate of the clicking point
-	 */
-	public function setY($value)
-	{
-		$this->_y=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-	}
-}
-
-?>
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TImage class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
+
+/**
+ * TImageButton class
+ *
+ * TImageButton creates an image button on the page. It is used to submit data to a page.
+ * You can create either a <b>submit</b> button or a <b>command</b> button.
+ *
+ * A <b>command</b> button has a command name (specified by
+ * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property) and and a command parameter
+ * (specified by {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property)
+ * associated with the button. This allows you to create multiple TLinkButton
+ * components on a Web page and programmatically determine which one is clicked
+ * with what parameter. You can provide an event handler for
+ * {@link onCommand OnCommand} event to programmatically control the actions performed
+ * when the command button is clicked. In the event handler, you can determine
+ * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property value and
+ * the {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property value
+ * through the {@link TCommandParameter::getName Name} and
+ * {@link TCommandParameter::getParameter Parameter} properties of the event
+ * parameter which is of type {@link TCommandEventParameter}.
+ *
+ * A <b>submit</b> button does not have a command name associated with the button
+ * and clicking on it simply posts the Web page back to the server.
+ * By default, a TImageButton control is a submit button.
+ * You can provide an event handler for the {@link onClick OnClick} event
+ * to programmatically control the actions performed when the submit button is clicked.
+ * The coordinates of the clicking point can be obtained from the {@link onClick OnClick}
+ * event parameter, which is of type {@link TImageClickEventParameter}.
+ *
+ * Clicking on button can trigger form validation, if
+ * {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true.
+ * And the validation may be restricted within a certain group of validator
+ * controls by setting {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup} property.
+ * If validation is successful, the data will be post back to the same page.
+ *
+ * TImageButton displays the {@link setText Text} property as the hint text to the displayed image.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TImageButton extends TImage implements IPostBackDataHandler, IPostBackEventHandler, IButtonControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var integer x coordinate that the image is being clicked at
+	 */
+	private $_x=0;
+	/**
+	 * @var integer y coordinate that the image is being clicked at
+	 */
+	private $_y=0;
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the button
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'input';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional button specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+		$writer->addAttribute('type','image');
+		if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uniqueID);
+		if($this->getEnabled(true))
+		{
+			if($this->getEnableClientScript() && $this->needPostBackScript())
+				$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+		}
+		else if($this->getEnabled()) // in this case, parent will not render 'disabled'
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the client-script code.
+	 */
+	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TImageButton';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to perform validation if the button is clicked
+	 */
+	protected function canCauseValidation()
+	{
+		if($this->getCausesValidation())
+		{
+			$group=$this->getValidationGroup();
+			return $this->getPage()->getValidators($group)->getCount()>0;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean set by a panel to register this button as the default button for the panel.
+	 */
+	public function setIsDefaultButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('IsDefaultButton', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean true if this button is registered as a default button for a panel.
+	 */
+	public function getIsDefaultButton()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('IsDefaultButton', false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the button needs javascript to do postback
+	 */
+	protected function needPostBackScript()
+	{
+		return $this->canCauseValidation() || $this->getIsDefaultButton();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns postback specifications for the button.
+	 * This method is used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @return array parameters about how the button defines its postback behavior.
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method checks if the TImageButton is clicked and loads the coordinates of the clicking position.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		$uid=$this->getUniqueID();
+		if(isset($values["{$uid}_x"]) && isset($values["{$uid}_y"]))
+		{
+			$this->_x=intval($values["{$uid}_x"]);
+			$this->_y=intval($values["{$uid}_y"]);
+			if($this->getPage()->getPostBackEventTarget()===null)
+				$this->getPage()->setPostBackEventTarget($this);
+			$this->_dataChanged=true;
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * A dummy implementation for the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		// no post data to handle
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
+	 * The method raises 'OnClick' event to fire up the event handlers.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
+	 * @param TImageClickEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
+	 * The method raises 'OnCommand' event to fire up the event handlers.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
+	 * @param TCommandEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCommand',$this,$param);
+		$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises the postback event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
+	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
+	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
+	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand} events.
+	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
+	 */
+	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
+	{
+		if($this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onClick(new TImageClickEventParameter($this->_x,$this->_y));
+		$this->onCommand(new TCommandEventParameter($this->getCommandName(),$this->getCommandParameter()));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation, default is true
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandName()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function setCommandName($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event
+	 */
+	public function getCommandParameter()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CommandParameter','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function setCommandParameter($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CommandParameter',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string caption of the button
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getAlternateText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string caption of the button
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setAlternateText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the image button to receive postback data during postback.
+	 * This is necessary because an image button, when postback, does not have
+	 * direct mapping between post data and the image button name.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked before render.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation with nothing to be rendered.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TImageClickEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TImageClickEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TImageButton::onClick Click} event of {@link TImageButton} controls.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TImageClickEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * the X coordinate of the clicking point
+	 * @var integer
+	 */
+	private $_x=0;
+	/**
+	 * the Y coordinate of the clicking point
+	 * @var integer
+	 */
+	private $_y=0;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param integer X coordinate of the clicking point
+	 * @param integer Y coordinate of the clicking point
+	 */
+	public function __construct($x,$y)
+	{
+		$this->_x=$x;
+		$this->_y=$y;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer X coordinate of the clicking point, defaults to 0
+	 */
+	public function getX()
+	{
+		return $this->_x;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer X coordinate of the clicking point
+	 */
+	public function setX($value)
+	{
+		$this->_x=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer Y coordinate of the clicking point, defaults to 0
+	 */
+	public function getY()
+	{
+		return $this->_y;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer Y coordinate of the clicking point
+	 */
+	public function setY($value)
+	{
+		$this->_y=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+	}
+}
+
+?>
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageMap.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageMap.php
index 5907d03d..718a3414 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageMap.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TImageMap.php
@@ -1,837 +1,837 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TImageMap and related class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TImageMap and related class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TImage class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
-
-/**
- * TImageMap class
- *
- * TImageMap represents an image on a page. Hotspot regions can be defined
- * within the image. Depending on the {@link setHotSpotMode HotSpotMode},
- * clicking on the hotspots may trigger a postback or navigate to a specified
- * URL. The hotspots defined may be accessed via {@link getHotSpots HotSpots}.
- * Each hotspot is described as a {@link THotSpot}, which can be a circle,
- * rectangle, polygon, etc. To add hotspot in a template, use the following,
- * <code>
- *  <com:TImageMap>
- *    <com:TCircleHotSpot ... />
- *    <com:TRectangleHotSpot ... />
- *    <com:TPolygonHotSpot ... />
- *  </com:TImageMap>
- * </code>
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TImageMap extends TImage implements IPostBackEventHandler
-{
-	const MAP_NAME_PREFIX='ImageMap';
-
-	/**
-	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
-	 * This method adds {@link THotSpot} objects into the hotspot collection
-	 * of the imagemap.
-	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof THotSpot)
-			$this->getHotSpots()->add($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional imagemap specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if($this->getHotSpots()->getCount()>0)
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('usemap','#'.self::MAP_NAME_PREFIX.$this->getClientID());
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getUniqueID());
-		}
-		if($this->getEnabled() && !$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders this imagemap.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		parent::render($writer);
-
-		$hotspots=$this->getHotSpots();
-
-		if($hotspots->getCount()>0)
-		{
-			$clientID=$this->getClientID();
-			$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-			$writer->writeLine();
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',self::MAP_NAME_PREFIX.$clientID);
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('map');
-			$writer->writeLine();
-			if(($mode=$this->getHotSpotMode())===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
-				$mode=THotSpotMode::Navigate;
-			$target=$this->getTarget();
-			$i=0;
-			$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-			$options['StopEvent'] = true;
-			$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-			foreach($hotspots as $hotspot)
-			{
-				if($hotspot->getHotSpotMode()===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
-					$hotspot->setHotSpotMode($mode);
-				if($target!=='' && $hotspot->getTarget()==='')
-					$hotspot->setTarget($target);
-				if($hotspot->getHotSpotMode()===THotSpotMode::PostBack)
-				{
-					$id=$clientID.'_'.$i;
-					$writer->addAttribute('id',$id);
-					$writer->addAttribute('href','#'.$id); //create unique no-op url references
-					$options['ID']=$id;
-					$options['EventParameter']="$i";
-					$options['CausesValidation']=$hotspot->getCausesValidation();
-					$options['ValidationGroup']=$hotspot->getValidationGroup();
-					$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$options);
-				}
-				$hotspot->render($writer);
-				$writer->writeLine();
-				$i++;
-			}
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TImageMap';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises the postback event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
-	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
-	 */
-	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
-	{
-		$postBackValue=null;
-		if($param!=='')
-		{
-			$index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param);
-			$hotspots=$this->getHotSpots();
-			if($index>=0 && $index<$hotspots->getCount())
-			{
-				$hotspot=$hotspots->itemAt($index);
-				if(($mode=$hotspot->getHotSpotMode())===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
-					$mode=$this->getHotSpotMode();
-				if($mode===THotSpotMode::PostBack)
-				{
-					$postBackValue=$hotspot->getPostBackValue();
-					if($hotspot->getCausesValidation())
-						$this->getPage()->validate($hotspot->getValidationGroup());
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		if($postBackValue!==null)
-			$this->onClick(new TImageMapEventParameter($postBackValue));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THotSpotMode the behavior of hotspot regions in this imagemap when they are clicked. Defaults to THotSpotMode::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getHotSpotMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HotSpotMode',THotSpotMode::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the behavior of hotspot regions in this imagemap when they are clicked.
-	 * If an individual hotspot has a mode other than 'NotSet', the mode set in this
-	 * imagemap will be ignored. By default, 'NotSet' is equivalent to 'Navigate'.
-	 * @param THotSpotMode the behavior of hotspot regions in this imagemap when they are clicked.
-	 */
-	public function setHotSpotMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HotSpotMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THotSpotMode'),THotSpotMode::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THotSpotCollection collection of hotspots defined in this imagemap.
-	 */
-	public function getHotSpots()
-	{
-		if(($hotspots=$this->getViewState('HotSpots',null))===null)
-		{
-			$hotspots=new THotSpotCollection;
-			$this->setViewState('HotSpots',$hotspots);
-		}
-		return $hotspots;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string  the target window or frame to display the new page when a hotspot region is clicked within the imagemap. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getTarget()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string  the target window or frame to display the new page when a hotspot region is clicked within the imagemap.
-	 */
-	public function setTarget($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Target',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnClick</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when a hotspot region is clicked within the imagemap.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
-	 * @param TImageMapEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TImageMapEventParameter class.
- *
- * TImageMapEventParameter represents a postback event parameter
- * when a hotspot is clicked and posts back in a {@link TImageMap}.
- * To retrieve the post back value associated with the hotspot being clicked,
- * access {@link getPostBackValue PostBackValue}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TImageMapEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	private $_postBackValue;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param string post back value associated with the hotspot clicked
-	 */
-	public function __construct($postBackValue)
-	{
-		$this->_postBackValue=$postBackValue;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string post back value associated with the hotspot clicked
-	 */
-	public function getPostBackValue()
-	{
-		return $this->_postBackValue;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * THotSpotCollection class.
- *
- * THotSpotCollection represents a collection of hotspots in an imagemap.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class THotSpotCollection extends TList
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only {@link THotSpot}.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a THotSpot.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof THotSpot)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('hotspotcollection_hotspot_required');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * THotSpot class.
- *
- * THotSpot implements the basic functionality common to all hot spot shapes.
- * Derived classes include {@link TCircleHotSpot}, {@link TPolygonHotSpot}
- * and {@link TRectangleHotSpot}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-abstract class THotSpot extends TComponent
-{
-	private $_viewState=array();
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a viewstate value.
-	 *
-	 * This function is very useful in defining getter functions for component properties
-	 * that must be kept in viewstate.
-	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value to be returned
-	 * @param mixed the default value. If $key is not found in viewstate, $defaultValue will be returned
-	 * @return mixed the viewstate value corresponding to $key
-	 */
-	protected function getViewState($key,$defaultValue=null)
-	{
-		return isset($this->_viewState[$key])?$this->_viewState[$key]:$defaultValue;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a viewstate value.
-	 *
-	 * This function is very useful in defining setter functions for control properties
-	 * that must be kept in viewstate.
-	 * Make sure that the viewstate value must be serializable and unserializable.
-	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value
-	 * @param mixed the viewstate value to be set
-	 * @param mixed default value. If $value===$defaultValue, the item will be cleared from the viewstate.
-	 */
-	protected function setViewState($key,$value,$defaultValue=null)
-	{
-		if($value===$defaultValue)
-			unset($this->_viewState[$key]);
-		else
-			$this->_viewState[$key]=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string shape of the hotspot, can be 'circle', 'rect', 'poly', etc.
-	 */
-	abstract public function getShape();
-	/**
-	 * @return string coordinates defining the hotspot shape.
-	 */
-	abstract public function getCoordinates();
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the access key that allows you to quickly navigate to the HotSpot region. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getAccessKey()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AccessKey','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the access key that allows you to quickly navigate to the HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setAccessKey($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AccessKey',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the alternate text to display for a HotSpot object. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getAlternateText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AlternateText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the alternate text to display for a HotSpot object.
-	 */
-	public function setAlternateText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AlternateText',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THotSpotMode the behavior of a HotSpot object when it is clicked. Defaults to THotSpotMode::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getHotSpotMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HotSpotMode',THotSpotMode::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param THotSpotMode the behavior of a HotSpot object when it is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function setHotSpotMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HotSpotMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THotSpotMode'),THotSpotMode::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL to navigate to when a HotSpot object is clicked. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigateUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL to navigate to when a HotSpot object is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string a value that is post back when the HotSpot is clicked. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getPostBackValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PostBackValue','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string a value that is post back when the HotSpot is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function setPostBackValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PostBackValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the tab index of the HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getTabIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TabIndex',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the tab index of the HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setTabIndex($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('TabIndex',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this hotspot will cause input validation, default is true
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this hotspot will cause input validation
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the hotspot causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the hotspot causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string  the target window or frame to display the new page when the HotSpot region
-	 * is clicked. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getTarget()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string  the target window or frame to display the new page when the HotSpot region
-	 * is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function setTarget($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Target',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the hotspot has custom attributes
-	 */
-	public function getHasAttributes()
-	{
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
-			return $attributes->getCount()>0;
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the list of custom attributes.
-	 * Custom attributes are name-value pairs that may be rendered
-	 * as HTML tags' attributes.
-	 * @return TAttributeCollection the list of custom attributes
-	 */
-	public function getAttributes()
-	{
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
-			return $attributes;
-		else
-		{
-			$attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
-			$this->setViewState('Attributes',$attributes,null);
-			return $attributes;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the named attribute exists
-	 */
-	public function hasAttribute($name)
-	{
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
-			return $attributes->contains($name);
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string attribute value, null if attribute does not exist
-	 */
-	public function getAttribute($name)
-	{
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
-			return $attributes->itemAt($name);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a custom hotspot attribute.
-	 * @param string attribute name
-	 * @param string value of the attribute
-	 */
-	public function setAttribute($name,$value)
-	{
-		$this->getAttributes()->add($name,$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Removes the named attribute.
-	 * @param string the name of the attribute to be removed.
-	 * @return string attribute value removed, null if attribute does not exist.
-	 */
-	public function removeAttribute($name)
-	{
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
-			return $attributes->remove($name);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders this hotspot.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('shape',$this->getShape());
-		$writer->addAttribute('coords',$this->getCoordinates());
-		if(($mode=$this->getHotSpotMode())===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
-			$mode=THotSpotMode::Navigate;
-		if($mode===THotSpotMode::Navigate)
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('href',$this->getNavigateUrl());
-			if(($target=$this->getTarget())!=='')
-				$writer->addAttribute('target',$target);
-		}
-		else if($mode===THotSpotMode::Inactive)
-			$writer->addAttribute('nohref','true');
-		$text=$this->getAlternateText();
-		$writer->addAttribute('title',$text);
-		$writer->addAttribute('alt',$text);
-		if(($accessKey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accessKey);
-		if(($tabIndex=$this->getTabIndex())!==0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('tabindex',"$tabIndex");
-		if($this->getHasAttributes())
-		{
-			foreach($this->getAttributes() as $name=>$value)
-				$writer->addAttribute($name,$value);
-		}
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('area');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * Class TCircleHotSpot.
- *
- * TCircleHotSpot defines a circular hot spot region in a {@link TImageMap}
- * control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TCircleHotSpot extends THotSpot
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string shape of this hotspot.
-	 */
-	public function getShape()
-	{
-		return 'circle';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string coordinates defining this hotspot shape
-	 */
-	public function getCoordinates()
-	{
-		return $this->getX().','.$this->getY().','.$this->getRadius();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer radius of the circular HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getRadius()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Radius',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer radius of the circular HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setRadius($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Radius',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the X coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getX()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('X',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the X coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setX($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('X',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the Y coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getY()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Y',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the Y coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setY($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Y',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * Class TRectangleHotSpot.
- *
- * TRectangleHotSpot defines a rectangle hot spot region in a {@link
- * TImageMap} control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRectangleHotSpot extends THotSpot
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string shape of this hotspot.
-	 */
-	public function getShape()
-	{
-		return 'rect';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string coordinates defining this hotspot shape
-	 */
-	public function getCoordinates()
-	{
-		return $this->getLeft().','.$this->getTop().','.$this->getRight().','.$this->getBottom();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the Y coordinate of the bottom side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getBottom()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Bottom',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the Y coordinate of the bottom side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setBottom($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Bottom',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getLeft()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Left',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setLeft($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Left',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getRight()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Right',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setRight($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Right',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the Y coordinate of the top side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getTop()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Top',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the Y coordinate of the top side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
-	 */
-	public function setTop($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Top',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * Class TPolygonHotSpot.
- *
- * TPolygonHotSpot defines a polygon hot spot region in a {@link
- * TImageMap} control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TPolygonHotSpot extends THotSpot
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string shape of this hotspot.
-	 */
-	public function getShape()
-	{
-		return 'poly';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string coordinates of the vertices defining the polygon.
-	 * Coordinates are concatenated together with comma ','. Each pair
-	 * represents (x,y) of a vertex.
-	 */
-	public function getCoordinates()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Coordinates','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string coordinates of the vertices defining the polygon.
-	 * Coordinates are concatenated together with comma ','. Each pair
-	 * represents (x,y) of a vertex.
-	 */
-	public function setCoordinates($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Coordinates',$value,'');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * THotSpotMode class.
- * THotSpotMode defines the enumerable type for the possible hot spot modes.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NotSet: the mode is not specified
- * - Navigate: clicking on the hotspot will redirect the browser to a different page
- * - PostBack: clicking on the hotspot will cause a postback
- * - Inactive: the hotspot is inactive (not clickable)
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class THotSpotMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NotSet='NotSet';
-	const Navigate='Navigate';
-	const PostBack='PostBack';
-	const Inactive='Inactive';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TImage class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImage');
+
+/**
+ * TImageMap class
+ *
+ * TImageMap represents an image on a page. Hotspot regions can be defined
+ * within the image. Depending on the {@link setHotSpotMode HotSpotMode},
+ * clicking on the hotspots may trigger a postback or navigate to a specified
+ * URL. The hotspots defined may be accessed via {@link getHotSpots HotSpots}.
+ * Each hotspot is described as a {@link THotSpot}, which can be a circle,
+ * rectangle, polygon, etc. To add hotspot in a template, use the following,
+ * <code>
+ *  <com:TImageMap>
+ *    <com:TCircleHotSpot ... />
+ *    <com:TRectangleHotSpot ... />
+ *    <com:TPolygonHotSpot ... />
+ *  </com:TImageMap>
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TImageMap extends TImage implements IPostBackEventHandler
+{
+	const MAP_NAME_PREFIX='ImageMap';
+
+	/**
+	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
+	 * This method adds {@link THotSpot} objects into the hotspot collection
+	 * of the imagemap.
+	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof THotSpot)
+			$this->getHotSpots()->add($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional imagemap specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if($this->getHotSpots()->getCount()>0)
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('usemap','#'.self::MAP_NAME_PREFIX.$this->getClientID());
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getUniqueID());
+		}
+		if($this->getEnabled() && !$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders this imagemap.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		parent::render($writer);
+
+		$hotspots=$this->getHotSpots();
+
+		if($hotspots->getCount()>0)
+		{
+			$clientID=$this->getClientID();
+			$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+			$writer->writeLine();
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',self::MAP_NAME_PREFIX.$clientID);
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('map');
+			$writer->writeLine();
+			if(($mode=$this->getHotSpotMode())===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
+				$mode=THotSpotMode::Navigate;
+			$target=$this->getTarget();
+			$i=0;
+			$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+			$options['StopEvent'] = true;
+			$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+			foreach($hotspots as $hotspot)
+			{
+				if($hotspot->getHotSpotMode()===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
+					$hotspot->setHotSpotMode($mode);
+				if($target!=='' && $hotspot->getTarget()==='')
+					$hotspot->setTarget($target);
+				if($hotspot->getHotSpotMode()===THotSpotMode::PostBack)
+				{
+					$id=$clientID.'_'.$i;
+					$writer->addAttribute('id',$id);
+					$writer->addAttribute('href','#'.$id); //create unique no-op url references
+					$options['ID']=$id;
+					$options['EventParameter']="$i";
+					$options['CausesValidation']=$hotspot->getCausesValidation();
+					$options['ValidationGroup']=$hotspot->getValidationGroup();
+					$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$options);
+				}
+				$hotspot->render($writer);
+				$writer->writeLine();
+				$i++;
+			}
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TImageMap';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises the postback event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
+	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
+	 */
+	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
+	{
+		$postBackValue=null;
+		if($param!=='')
+		{
+			$index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param);
+			$hotspots=$this->getHotSpots();
+			if($index>=0 && $index<$hotspots->getCount())
+			{
+				$hotspot=$hotspots->itemAt($index);
+				if(($mode=$hotspot->getHotSpotMode())===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
+					$mode=$this->getHotSpotMode();
+				if($mode===THotSpotMode::PostBack)
+				{
+					$postBackValue=$hotspot->getPostBackValue();
+					if($hotspot->getCausesValidation())
+						$this->getPage()->validate($hotspot->getValidationGroup());
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if($postBackValue!==null)
+			$this->onClick(new TImageMapEventParameter($postBackValue));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THotSpotMode the behavior of hotspot regions in this imagemap when they are clicked. Defaults to THotSpotMode::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getHotSpotMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HotSpotMode',THotSpotMode::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the behavior of hotspot regions in this imagemap when they are clicked.
+	 * If an individual hotspot has a mode other than 'NotSet', the mode set in this
+	 * imagemap will be ignored. By default, 'NotSet' is equivalent to 'Navigate'.
+	 * @param THotSpotMode the behavior of hotspot regions in this imagemap when they are clicked.
+	 */
+	public function setHotSpotMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HotSpotMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THotSpotMode'),THotSpotMode::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THotSpotCollection collection of hotspots defined in this imagemap.
+	 */
+	public function getHotSpots()
+	{
+		if(($hotspots=$this->getViewState('HotSpots',null))===null)
+		{
+			$hotspots=new THotSpotCollection;
+			$this->setViewState('HotSpots',$hotspots);
+		}
+		return $hotspots;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string  the target window or frame to display the new page when a hotspot region is clicked within the imagemap. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getTarget()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string  the target window or frame to display the new page when a hotspot region is clicked within the imagemap.
+	 */
+	public function setTarget($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Target',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnClick</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when a hotspot region is clicked within the imagemap.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
+	 * @param TImageMapEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TImageMapEventParameter class.
+ *
+ * TImageMapEventParameter represents a postback event parameter
+ * when a hotspot is clicked and posts back in a {@link TImageMap}.
+ * To retrieve the post back value associated with the hotspot being clicked,
+ * access {@link getPostBackValue PostBackValue}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TImageMapEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	private $_postBackValue;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param string post back value associated with the hotspot clicked
+	 */
+	public function __construct($postBackValue)
+	{
+		$this->_postBackValue=$postBackValue;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string post back value associated with the hotspot clicked
+	 */
+	public function getPostBackValue()
+	{
+		return $this->_postBackValue;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * THotSpotCollection class.
+ *
+ * THotSpotCollection represents a collection of hotspots in an imagemap.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class THotSpotCollection extends TList
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only {@link THotSpot}.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a THotSpot.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof THotSpot)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('hotspotcollection_hotspot_required');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * THotSpot class.
+ *
+ * THotSpot implements the basic functionality common to all hot spot shapes.
+ * Derived classes include {@link TCircleHotSpot}, {@link TPolygonHotSpot}
+ * and {@link TRectangleHotSpot}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+abstract class THotSpot extends TComponent
+{
+	private $_viewState=array();
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a viewstate value.
+	 *
+	 * This function is very useful in defining getter functions for component properties
+	 * that must be kept in viewstate.
+	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value to be returned
+	 * @param mixed the default value. If $key is not found in viewstate, $defaultValue will be returned
+	 * @return mixed the viewstate value corresponding to $key
+	 */
+	protected function getViewState($key,$defaultValue=null)
+	{
+		return isset($this->_viewState[$key])?$this->_viewState[$key]:$defaultValue;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a viewstate value.
+	 *
+	 * This function is very useful in defining setter functions for control properties
+	 * that must be kept in viewstate.
+	 * Make sure that the viewstate value must be serializable and unserializable.
+	 * @param string the name of the viewstate value
+	 * @param mixed the viewstate value to be set
+	 * @param mixed default value. If $value===$defaultValue, the item will be cleared from the viewstate.
+	 */
+	protected function setViewState($key,$value,$defaultValue=null)
+	{
+		if($value===$defaultValue)
+			unset($this->_viewState[$key]);
+		else
+			$this->_viewState[$key]=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string shape of the hotspot, can be 'circle', 'rect', 'poly', etc.
+	 */
+	abstract public function getShape();
+	/**
+	 * @return string coordinates defining the hotspot shape.
+	 */
+	abstract public function getCoordinates();
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the access key that allows you to quickly navigate to the HotSpot region. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getAccessKey()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AccessKey','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the access key that allows you to quickly navigate to the HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setAccessKey($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AccessKey',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the alternate text to display for a HotSpot object. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getAlternateText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AlternateText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the alternate text to display for a HotSpot object.
+	 */
+	public function setAlternateText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AlternateText',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THotSpotMode the behavior of a HotSpot object when it is clicked. Defaults to THotSpotMode::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getHotSpotMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HotSpotMode',THotSpotMode::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param THotSpotMode the behavior of a HotSpot object when it is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function setHotSpotMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HotSpotMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THotSpotMode'),THotSpotMode::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL to navigate to when a HotSpot object is clicked. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigateUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('NavigateUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL to navigate to when a HotSpot object is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function setNavigateUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('NavigateUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string a value that is post back when the HotSpot is clicked. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getPostBackValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PostBackValue','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string a value that is post back when the HotSpot is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function setPostBackValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PostBackValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the tab index of the HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getTabIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TabIndex',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the tab index of the HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setTabIndex($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('TabIndex',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this hotspot will cause input validation, default is true
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this hotspot will cause input validation
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the hotspot causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the hotspot causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string  the target window or frame to display the new page when the HotSpot region
+	 * is clicked. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getTarget()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Target','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string  the target window or frame to display the new page when the HotSpot region
+	 * is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function setTarget($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Target',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the hotspot has custom attributes
+	 */
+	public function getHasAttributes()
+	{
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
+			return $attributes->getCount()>0;
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the list of custom attributes.
+	 * Custom attributes are name-value pairs that may be rendered
+	 * as HTML tags' attributes.
+	 * @return TAttributeCollection the list of custom attributes
+	 */
+	public function getAttributes()
+	{
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
+			return $attributes;
+		else
+		{
+			$attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
+			$this->setViewState('Attributes',$attributes,null);
+			return $attributes;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the named attribute exists
+	 */
+	public function hasAttribute($name)
+	{
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
+			return $attributes->contains($name);
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string attribute value, null if attribute does not exist
+	 */
+	public function getAttribute($name)
+	{
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
+			return $attributes->itemAt($name);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a custom hotspot attribute.
+	 * @param string attribute name
+	 * @param string value of the attribute
+	 */
+	public function setAttribute($name,$value)
+	{
+		$this->getAttributes()->add($name,$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Removes the named attribute.
+	 * @param string the name of the attribute to be removed.
+	 * @return string attribute value removed, null if attribute does not exist.
+	 */
+	public function removeAttribute($name)
+	{
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('Attributes',null))
+			return $attributes->remove($name);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders this hotspot.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('shape',$this->getShape());
+		$writer->addAttribute('coords',$this->getCoordinates());
+		if(($mode=$this->getHotSpotMode())===THotSpotMode::NotSet)
+			$mode=THotSpotMode::Navigate;
+		if($mode===THotSpotMode::Navigate)
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('href',$this->getNavigateUrl());
+			if(($target=$this->getTarget())!=='')
+				$writer->addAttribute('target',$target);
+		}
+		else if($mode===THotSpotMode::Inactive)
+			$writer->addAttribute('nohref','true');
+		$text=$this->getAlternateText();
+		$writer->addAttribute('title',$text);
+		$writer->addAttribute('alt',$text);
+		if(($accessKey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accessKey);
+		if(($tabIndex=$this->getTabIndex())!==0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('tabindex',"$tabIndex");
+		if($this->getHasAttributes())
+		{
+			foreach($this->getAttributes() as $name=>$value)
+				$writer->addAttribute($name,$value);
+		}
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('area');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Class TCircleHotSpot.
+ *
+ * TCircleHotSpot defines a circular hot spot region in a {@link TImageMap}
+ * control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TCircleHotSpot extends THotSpot
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string shape of this hotspot.
+	 */
+	public function getShape()
+	{
+		return 'circle';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string coordinates defining this hotspot shape
+	 */
+	public function getCoordinates()
+	{
+		return $this->getX().','.$this->getY().','.$this->getRadius();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer radius of the circular HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getRadius()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Radius',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer radius of the circular HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setRadius($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Radius',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the X coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getX()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('X',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the X coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setX($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('X',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the Y coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getY()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Y',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the Y coordinate of the center of the circular HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setY($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Y',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Class TRectangleHotSpot.
+ *
+ * TRectangleHotSpot defines a rectangle hot spot region in a {@link
+ * TImageMap} control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRectangleHotSpot extends THotSpot
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string shape of this hotspot.
+	 */
+	public function getShape()
+	{
+		return 'rect';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string coordinates defining this hotspot shape
+	 */
+	public function getCoordinates()
+	{
+		return $this->getLeft().','.$this->getTop().','.$this->getRight().','.$this->getBottom();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the Y coordinate of the bottom side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getBottom()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Bottom',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the Y coordinate of the bottom side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setBottom($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Bottom',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getLeft()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Left',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setLeft($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Left',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getRight()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Right',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the X coordinate of the right side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setRight($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Right',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the Y coordinate of the top side of the rectangle HotSpot region. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getTop()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Top',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the Y coordinate of the top side of the rectangle HotSpot region.
+	 */
+	public function setTop($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Top',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Class TPolygonHotSpot.
+ *
+ * TPolygonHotSpot defines a polygon hot spot region in a {@link
+ * TImageMap} control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TPolygonHotSpot extends THotSpot
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string shape of this hotspot.
+	 */
+	public function getShape()
+	{
+		return 'poly';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string coordinates of the vertices defining the polygon.
+	 * Coordinates are concatenated together with comma ','. Each pair
+	 * represents (x,y) of a vertex.
+	 */
+	public function getCoordinates()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Coordinates','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string coordinates of the vertices defining the polygon.
+	 * Coordinates are concatenated together with comma ','. Each pair
+	 * represents (x,y) of a vertex.
+	 */
+	public function setCoordinates($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Coordinates',$value,'');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * THotSpotMode class.
+ * THotSpotMode defines the enumerable type for the possible hot spot modes.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NotSet: the mode is not specified
+ * - Navigate: clicking on the hotspot will redirect the browser to a different page
+ * - PostBack: clicking on the hotspot will cause a postback
+ * - Inactive: the hotspot is inactive (not clickable)
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class THotSpotMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NotSet='NotSet';
+	const Navigate='Navigate';
+	const PostBack='PostBack';
+	const Inactive='Inactive';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TItemDataRenderer.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TItemDataRenderer.php
index 60b34873..80d7f418 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TItemDataRenderer.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TItemDataRenderer.php
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TItemDataRenderer class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TItemDataRenderer class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.2
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataRenderer');
-
-/**
- * TItemDataRenderer class
- *
- * TItemDataRenderer is the convient base class for template-based item data renderers.
- * It implements the {@link IItemDataRenderer} interface, and because
- * TItemDataRenderer extends from {@link TTemplateControl}, derived child
- * classes can have templates to define their presentational layout.
- *
- * The following properties are provided by TItemDataRenderer:
- * - {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}: zero-based index of this renderer in the item list collection.
- * - {@link getItemType ItemType}: item type of this renderer, such as TListItemType::AlternatingItem
- * - {@link getData Data}: data associated with this renderer
-
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.2
- */
-abstract class TItemDataRenderer extends TDataRenderer implements IItemDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * index of the data item in the Items collection of repeater
-	 */
-	private $_itemIndex;
-	/**
-	 * type of the TRepeaterItem
-	 * @var TListItemType
-	 */
-	private $_itemType;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListItemType item type
-	 */
-	public function getItemType()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemType;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListItemType item type.
-	 */
-	public function setItemType($value)
-	{
-		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating the zero-based index of the item in the corresponding data control's item collection.
-	 * If the item is not in the collection (e.g. it is a header item), it returns -1.
-	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item.
-	 */
-	public function getItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemIndex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
-	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
-	 */
-	public function setItemIndex($value)
-	{
-		$this->_itemIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.2
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataRenderer');
+
+/**
+ * TItemDataRenderer class
+ *
+ * TItemDataRenderer is the convient base class for template-based item data renderers.
+ * It implements the {@link IItemDataRenderer} interface, and because
+ * TItemDataRenderer extends from {@link TTemplateControl}, derived child
+ * classes can have templates to define their presentational layout.
+ *
+ * The following properties are provided by TItemDataRenderer:
+ * - {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}: zero-based index of this renderer in the item list collection.
+ * - {@link getItemType ItemType}: item type of this renderer, such as TListItemType::AlternatingItem
+ * - {@link getData Data}: data associated with this renderer
+
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.2
+ */
+abstract class TItemDataRenderer extends TDataRenderer implements IItemDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * index of the data item in the Items collection of repeater
+	 */
+	private $_itemIndex;
+	/**
+	 * type of the TRepeaterItem
+	 * @var TListItemType
+	 */
+	private $_itemType;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListItemType item type
+	 */
+	public function getItemType()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemType;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListItemType item type.
+	 */
+	public function setItemType($value)
+	{
+		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating the zero-based index of the item in the corresponding data control's item collection.
+	 * If the item is not in the collection (e.g. it is a header item), it returns -1.
+	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item.
+	 */
+	public function getItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemIndex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
+	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
+	 */
+	public function setItemIndex($value)
+	{
+		$this->_itemIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TJavascriptLogger.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TJavascriptLogger.php
index e0d695f4..3b430357 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TJavascriptLogger.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TJavascriptLogger.php
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TJavascriptLogger class file.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TJavascriptLogger class.
- *
- * Provides logging for client-side javascript. Example: template code
- * <code><com:TJavascriptLogger /></code>
- *
- * Client-side javascript code to log info, error, warn, debug
- * <code>Logger.warn('A warning');
- * Logger.info('something happend');
- * </code>
- *
- * To see the logger and console, press ALT-D (or CTRL-D on OS X).
- * More information on the logger can be found at
- * http://web.archive.org/web/20060512041505/gleepglop.com/javascripts/logger/
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo<weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TJavascriptLogger extends TWebControl
-{
-	private static $_keyCodes = array(
-		'0'=>48, '1'=>49, '2'=>50, '3'=>51, '4'=>52, '5'=>53, '6'=>54, '7'=>55, '8'=>56, '9'=>57, 
-		'a'=>65, 'b'=>66, 'c'=>67, 'd'=>68, 'e'=>69, 'f'=>70, 'g'=>71, 'h'=>72,
-		'i'=>73, 'j'=>74, 'k'=>75, 'l'=>76, 'm'=>77, 'n'=>78, 'o'=>79, 'p'=>80,
-		'q'=>81, 'r'=>82, 's'=>83, 't'=>84, 'u'=>85, 'v'=>86, 'w'=>87, 'x'=>88, 'y'=>89, 'z'=>90);
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the panel
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'div';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string keyboard key for toggling the console, default is J.
-	 */
-	public function setToggleKey($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ToggleKey', $value, 'j');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string keyboard key for toggling the console.
-	 */
-	public function getToggleKey()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ToggleKey', 'j');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the required logger javascript.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		$key = strtolower($this->getToggleKey());
-		$code = isset(self::$_keyCodes[$key]) ? self::$_keyCodes[$key] : 74;
-		$js = "var logConsole; Event.OnLoad(function() { logConsole = new LogConsole($code)}); ";
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerBeginScript($this->getClientID(),$js);
-		$cs->registerPradoScript('logger');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Register the required javascript libraries and
-	 * display some general usage information.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		$code = strtoupper($this->getToggleKey());
-		$info = '(<a href="http://web.archive.org/web/20060512041505/gleepglop.com/javascripts/logger/" target="_blank">more info</a>).';
-		$link = '<a href="javascript:if(logConsole)logConsole.toggle()">toggle the javascript log console.</a>';
-		$usage = 'Press ALT-'.$code.' (Or CTRL-'.$code.' on OS X) to';
-		$writer->write("{$usage} {$link} {$info}");
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TJavascriptLogger class file.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TJavascriptLogger class.
+ *
+ * Provides logging for client-side javascript. Example: template code
+ * <code><com:TJavascriptLogger /></code>
+ *
+ * Client-side javascript code to log info, error, warn, debug
+ * <code>Logger.warn('A warning');
+ * Logger.info('something happend');
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * To see the logger and console, press ALT-D (or CTRL-D on OS X).
+ * More information on the logger can be found at
+ * http://web.archive.org/web/20060512041505/gleepglop.com/javascripts/logger/
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo<weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TJavascriptLogger extends TWebControl
+{
+	private static $_keyCodes = array(
+		'0'=>48, '1'=>49, '2'=>50, '3'=>51, '4'=>52, '5'=>53, '6'=>54, '7'=>55, '8'=>56, '9'=>57, 
+		'a'=>65, 'b'=>66, 'c'=>67, 'd'=>68, 'e'=>69, 'f'=>70, 'g'=>71, 'h'=>72,
+		'i'=>73, 'j'=>74, 'k'=>75, 'l'=>76, 'm'=>77, 'n'=>78, 'o'=>79, 'p'=>80,
+		'q'=>81, 'r'=>82, 's'=>83, 't'=>84, 'u'=>85, 'v'=>86, 'w'=>87, 'x'=>88, 'y'=>89, 'z'=>90);
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the panel
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'div';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string keyboard key for toggling the console, default is J.
+	 */
+	public function setToggleKey($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ToggleKey', $value, 'j');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string keyboard key for toggling the console.
+	 */
+	public function getToggleKey()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ToggleKey', 'j');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the required logger javascript.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		$key = strtolower($this->getToggleKey());
+		$code = isset(self::$_keyCodes[$key]) ? self::$_keyCodes[$key] : 74;
+		$js = "var logConsole; Event.OnLoad(function() { logConsole = new LogConsole($code)}); ";
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerBeginScript($this->getClientID(),$js);
+		$cs->registerPradoScript('logger');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Register the required javascript libraries and
+	 * display some general usage information.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		$code = strtoupper($this->getToggleKey());
+		$info = '(<a href="http://web.archive.org/web/20060512041505/gleepglop.com/javascripts/logger/" target="_blank">more info</a>).';
+		$link = '<a href="javascript:if(logConsole)logConsole.toggle()">toggle the javascript log console.</a>';
+		$usage = 'Press ALT-'.$code.' (Or CTRL-'.$code.' on OS X) to';
+		$writer->write("{$usage} {$link} {$info}");
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TKeyboard.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TKeyboard.php
index 27cb55c5..58c80e26 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TKeyboard.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TKeyboard.php
@@ -1,189 +1,189 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TKeyboard class file.
- *
- * @author Sergey Morkovkin <sergeymorkovkin@mail.ru> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-
-/**
- * Class TKeyboard.
- *
- * TKeyboard displays a virtual keyboard that users can click on to enter input in
- * an associated text box. It helps to reduce the keyboard recording hacking.
- *
- * To use TKeyboard, write a template like following:
- * <code>
- * <com:TTextBox ID="PasswordInput" />
- * <com:TKeyboard ForControl="PasswordInput" />
- * </code>
- *
- * A TKeyboard control is associated with a {@link TTextBox} control by specifying {@link setForControl ForControl}
- * to be the ID of that control. When the textbox is in focus, a virtual keyboard will pop up; and when
- * the text box is losing focus, the keyboard will hide automatically. Set {@link setAutoHide AutoHide} to
- * false to keep the keyboard showing all the time.
- *
- * The appearance of the keyboard can also be changed by specifying a customized CSS file via
- * {@link setCssUrl CssUrl}. By default, the CSS class name for the keyboard is 'Keyboard'. This may
- * also be changed by specifying {@link setKeyboardCssClass KeyboardCssClass}.
- *
- * @author Sergey Morkovkin <sergeymorkovkin@mail.ru> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-class TKeyboard extends TWebControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string the ID path of the {@link TTextBox} control
-	 */
-	public function getForControl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ForControl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the ID path of the {@link TTextBox} control.
-	 * The ID path is the dot-connected IDs of the controls reaching from
-	 * the keyboard's naming container to the target control.
-	 * @param string the ID path
-	 */
-	public function setForControl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ForControl', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the keyboard should be hidden when the textbox is not in focus. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoHide()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoHide', true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the keyboard should be hidden when the textbox is not in focus.
-	 */
-	public function setAutoHide($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoHide', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value), true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the CSS class name for the keyboard <div> element. Defaults to 'Keyboard'.
-	 */
-	public function getKeyboardCssClass()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('KeyboardCssClass', 'Keyboard');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a value indicating the CSS class name for the keyboard <div> element.
-	 * Note, if you change this property, make sure you also supply a customized CSS file
-	 * by specifying {@link setCssUrl CssUrl} which uses the new CSS class name for styling.
-	 * @param string the CSS class name for the keyboard <div> element.
-	 */
-	public function setKeyboardCssClass($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('KeyboardCssClass', $value, 'Keyboard');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL for the CSS file to customize the appearance of the keyboard.
-	 */
-	public function getCssUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CssUrl', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL for the CSS file to customize the appearance of the keyboard.
-	 */
-	public function setCssUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CssUrl', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers CSS and JS.
-	 * This method is invoked right before the control rendering, if the control is visible.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		if($this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-		{
-			$this->registerStyleSheet();
-			$this->registerClientScript();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional TKeyboard specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if($this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the CSS relevant to the TKeyboard.
-	 * It will register the CSS file specified by {@link getCssUrl CssUrl}.
-	 * If that is not set, it will use the default CSS.
-	 */
-	protected function registerStyleSheet()
-	{
-		if(($url=$this->getCssUrl())==='')
-			$url=$this->getApplication()->getAssetManager()->publishFilePath(dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'keyboard.css');
-		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerStyleSheetFile($url,$url);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the relevant JavaScript.
-	 */
-	protected function registerClientScript()
-	{
-		$options=TJavaScript::encode($this->getClientOptions());
-		$className=$this->getClientClassName();
-		$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPradoScript('keyboard');
-		$cs->registerEndScript('prado:'.$this->getClientID(), "new $className($options);");
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the Javascript class name for this control
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TKeyboard';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array the JavaScript options for this control
-	 */
-	protected function getClientOptions()
-	{
-		if(($forControl=$this->getForControl())==='')
-			throw new TConfigurationException('keyboard_forcontrol_required');
-	    if(($target=$this->findControl($forControl))===null)
-	        throw new TConfigurationException('keyboard_forcontrol_invalid',$forControl);
-
-	    $options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-	    $options['ForControl'] = $target->getClientID();
-	    $options['AutoHide'] = $this->getAutoHide();
-	    $options['CssClass'] = $this->getKeyboardCssClass();
-
-	    return $options;
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TKeyboard class file.
+ *
+ * @author Sergey Morkovkin <sergeymorkovkin@mail.ru> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Class TKeyboard.
+ *
+ * TKeyboard displays a virtual keyboard that users can click on to enter input in
+ * an associated text box. It helps to reduce the keyboard recording hacking.
+ *
+ * To use TKeyboard, write a template like following:
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TTextBox ID="PasswordInput" />
+ * <com:TKeyboard ForControl="PasswordInput" />
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * A TKeyboard control is associated with a {@link TTextBox} control by specifying {@link setForControl ForControl}
+ * to be the ID of that control. When the textbox is in focus, a virtual keyboard will pop up; and when
+ * the text box is losing focus, the keyboard will hide automatically. Set {@link setAutoHide AutoHide} to
+ * false to keep the keyboard showing all the time.
+ *
+ * The appearance of the keyboard can also be changed by specifying a customized CSS file via
+ * {@link setCssUrl CssUrl}. By default, the CSS class name for the keyboard is 'Keyboard'. This may
+ * also be changed by specifying {@link setKeyboardCssClass KeyboardCssClass}.
+ *
+ * @author Sergey Morkovkin <sergeymorkovkin@mail.ru> and Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+class TKeyboard extends TWebControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string the ID path of the {@link TTextBox} control
+	 */
+	public function getForControl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ForControl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the ID path of the {@link TTextBox} control.
+	 * The ID path is the dot-connected IDs of the controls reaching from
+	 * the keyboard's naming container to the target control.
+	 * @param string the ID path
+	 */
+	public function setForControl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ForControl', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the keyboard should be hidden when the textbox is not in focus. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoHide()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoHide', true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the keyboard should be hidden when the textbox is not in focus.
+	 */
+	public function setAutoHide($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoHide', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value), true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the CSS class name for the keyboard <div> element. Defaults to 'Keyboard'.
+	 */
+	public function getKeyboardCssClass()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('KeyboardCssClass', 'Keyboard');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a value indicating the CSS class name for the keyboard <div> element.
+	 * Note, if you change this property, make sure you also supply a customized CSS file
+	 * by specifying {@link setCssUrl CssUrl} which uses the new CSS class name for styling.
+	 * @param string the CSS class name for the keyboard <div> element.
+	 */
+	public function setKeyboardCssClass($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('KeyboardCssClass', $value, 'Keyboard');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL for the CSS file to customize the appearance of the keyboard.
+	 */
+	public function getCssUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CssUrl', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL for the CSS file to customize the appearance of the keyboard.
+	 */
+	public function setCssUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CssUrl', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers CSS and JS.
+	 * This method is invoked right before the control rendering, if the control is visible.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		if($this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+		{
+			$this->registerStyleSheet();
+			$this->registerClientScript();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional TKeyboard specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if($this->getPage()->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the CSS relevant to the TKeyboard.
+	 * It will register the CSS file specified by {@link getCssUrl CssUrl}.
+	 * If that is not set, it will use the default CSS.
+	 */
+	protected function registerStyleSheet()
+	{
+		if(($url=$this->getCssUrl())==='')
+			$url=$this->getApplication()->getAssetManager()->publishFilePath(dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'keyboard.css');
+		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerStyleSheetFile($url,$url);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the relevant JavaScript.
+	 */
+	protected function registerClientScript()
+	{
+		$options=TJavaScript::encode($this->getClientOptions());
+		$className=$this->getClientClassName();
+		$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPradoScript('keyboard');
+		$cs->registerEndScript('prado:'.$this->getClientID(), "new $className($options);");
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the Javascript class name for this control
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TKeyboard';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array the JavaScript options for this control
+	 */
+	protected function getClientOptions()
+	{
+		if(($forControl=$this->getForControl())==='')
+			throw new TConfigurationException('keyboard_forcontrol_required');
+	    if(($target=$this->findControl($forControl))===null)
+	        throw new TConfigurationException('keyboard_forcontrol_invalid',$forControl);
+
+	    $options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+	    $options['ForControl'] = $target->getClientID();
+	    $options['AutoHide'] = $this->getAutoHide();
+	    $options['CssClass'] = $this->getKeyboardCssClass();
+
+	    return $options;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLabel.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLabel.php
index 31e424e5..7228d588 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLabel.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLabel.php
@@ -1,154 +1,154 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TLabel class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TLabel class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TLabel class
- *
- * TLabel displays a piece of text on a Web page.
- * Use {@link setText Text} property to set the text to be displayed.
- * TLabel will render the contents enclosed within its component tag
- * if {@link setText Text} is empty.
- * To use TLabel as a form label, associate it with a control by setting the
- * {@link setForControl ForControl} property.
- * The associated control must be locatable within the label's naming container.
- * If the associated control is not visible, the label will not be rendered, either.
- *
- * Note, {@link setText Text} will NOT be encoded for rendering.
- * Make sure it does not contain dangerous characters that you want to avoid.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TLabel extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
-{
-	private $_forControl='';
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the label, returns 'label' if there is an associated control, 'span' otherwise.
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return ($this->getForControl()==='')?'span':'label';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if associated control cannot be found using the ID
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_forControl!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('for',$this->_forControl);
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the label.
-	 * It overrides the parent implementation by checking if an associated
-	 * control is visible or not. If not, the label will not be rendered.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if(($aid=$this->getForControl())!=='')
-		{
-			if($control=$this->findControl($aid))
-			{
-				if($control->getVisible(true))
-				{
-					$this->_forControl=$control->getClientID();
-					parent::render($writer);
-				}
-			}
-			else
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('label_associatedcontrol_invalid',$aid);
-		}
-		else
-			parent::render($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content of the label.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if(($text=$this->getText())==='')
-			parent::renderContents($writer);
-		else
-			$writer->write($text);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text value of the label
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the text value of the label
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the text value of the label.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
-	 * @return string the text value of the label
-	 * @see getText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text value of the label.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
-	 * @param string the text value of the label
-	 * @see setText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the associated control ID
-	 */
-	public function getForControl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ForControl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the ID of the control that the label is associated with.
-	 * The control must be locatable via {@link TControl::findControl} using the ID.
-	 * @param string the associated control ID
-	 */
-	public function setForControl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ForControl',$value,'');
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TLabel class
+ *
+ * TLabel displays a piece of text on a Web page.
+ * Use {@link setText Text} property to set the text to be displayed.
+ * TLabel will render the contents enclosed within its component tag
+ * if {@link setText Text} is empty.
+ * To use TLabel as a form label, associate it with a control by setting the
+ * {@link setForControl ForControl} property.
+ * The associated control must be locatable within the label's naming container.
+ * If the associated control is not visible, the label will not be rendered, either.
+ *
+ * Note, {@link setText Text} will NOT be encoded for rendering.
+ * Make sure it does not contain dangerous characters that you want to avoid.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TLabel extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
+{
+	private $_forControl='';
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the label, returns 'label' if there is an associated control, 'span' otherwise.
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return ($this->getForControl()==='')?'span':'label';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if associated control cannot be found using the ID
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_forControl!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('for',$this->_forControl);
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the label.
+	 * It overrides the parent implementation by checking if an associated
+	 * control is visible or not. If not, the label will not be rendered.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if(($aid=$this->getForControl())!=='')
+		{
+			if($control=$this->findControl($aid))
+			{
+				if($control->getVisible(true))
+				{
+					$this->_forControl=$control->getClientID();
+					parent::render($writer);
+				}
+			}
+			else
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('label_associatedcontrol_invalid',$aid);
+		}
+		else
+			parent::render($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content of the label.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if(($text=$this->getText())==='')
+			parent::renderContents($writer);
+		else
+			$writer->write($text);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text value of the label
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the text value of the label
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the text value of the label.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
+	 * @return string the text value of the label
+	 * @see getText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text value of the label.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
+	 * @param string the text value of the label
+	 * @see setText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the associated control ID
+	 */
+	public function getForControl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ForControl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the ID of the control that the label is associated with.
+	 * The control must be locatable via {@link TControl::findControl} using the ID.
+	 * @param string the associated control ID
+	 */
+	public function setForControl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ForControl',$value,'');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLinkButton.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLinkButton.php
index 9da5ec59..f03f9098 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLinkButton.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLinkButton.php
@@ -1,334 +1,334 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TLinkButton class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TLinkButton class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TLinkButton class
- *
- * TLinkButton creates a hyperlink style button on the page.
- * TLinkButton has the same appearance as a hyperlink. However, it is mainly
- * used to submit data to a page. Like {@link TButton}, you can create either
- * a <b>submit</b> button or a <b>command</b> button.
- *
- * A <b>command</b> button has a command name (specified by
- * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property) and and a command parameter
- * (specified by {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property)
- * associated with the button. This allows you to create multiple TLinkButton
- * components on a Web page and programmatically determine which one is clicked
- * with what parameter. You can provide an event handler for
- * {@link onCommand OnCommand} event to programmatically control the actions performed
- * when the command button is clicked. In the event handler, you can determine
- * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property value and
- * the {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property value
- * through the {@link TCommandParameter::getName Name} and
- * {@link TCommandParameter::getParameter Parameter} properties of the event
- * parameter which is of type {@link TCommandEventParameter}.
- *
- * A <b>submit</b> button does not have a command name associated with the button
- * and clicking on it simply posts the Web page back to the server.
- * By default, a TLinkButton component is a submit button.
- * You can provide an event handler for the {@link onClick OnClick} event
- * to programmatically control the actions performed when the submit button is clicked.
- *
- * Clicking on button can trigger form validation, if
- * {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true.
- * And the validation may be restricted within a certain group of validator
- * controls by setting {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup} property.
- * If validation is successful, the data will be post back to the same page.
- *
- * TLinkButton will display the {@link setText Text} property value
- * as the hyperlink text. If {@link setText Text} is empty, the body content
- * of TLinkButton will be displayed. Therefore, you can use TLinkButton
- * as an image button by enclosing an &lt;img&gt; tag as the body of TLinkButton.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TLinkButton extends TWebControl implements IPostBackEventHandler, IButtonControl, IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the button
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'a';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional button specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-
-		// We call parent implementation here because some attributes
-		// may be overwritten in the following
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-
-		if($this->getEnabled(true) && $this->getEnableClientScript())
-		{
-			$this->renderLinkButtonHref($writer);
-			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-		}
-		else if($this->getEnabled()) // in this case, parent will not render 'disabled'
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the client-script code.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter renderer
-	 */
-	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
-	{
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean set by a panel to register this button as the default button for the panel.
-	 */
-	public function setIsDefaultButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('IsDefaultButton', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean true if this button is registered as a default button for a panel.
-	 */
-	public function getIsDefaultButton()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('IsDefaultButton', false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the Href for link button.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter renderer
-	 */
-	protected function renderLinkButtonHref($writer)
-	{
-		//create unique no-op url references
-		$nop = "javascript:;//".$this->getClientID();
-		$writer->addAttribute('href', $nop);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TLinkButton';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns postback specifications for the button.
-	 * This method is used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @return array parameters about how the button defines its postback behavior.
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['StopEvent'] = true;
-
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
-	 * If {@link getText Text} is not empty, it will be rendered. Otherwise,
-	 * the body content enclosed in the control tag will be rendered.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if(($text=$this->getText())==='')
-			parent::renderContents($writer);
-		else
-			$writer->write($text);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text caption of the button
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the caption of the button.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
-	 * @return string caption of the button.
-	 * @see getText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the caption of the button.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
-	 * @param string caption of the button
-	 * @see setText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandName()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function setCommandName($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event
-	 */
-	public function getCommandParameter()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CommandParameter','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
-	 */
-	public function setCommandParameter($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CommandParameter',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation.
-	 * @param string the text caption to be set
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises the postback event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
-	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
-	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
-	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand} events.
-	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
-	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
-	 */
-	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
-	{
-		if($this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onClick(null);
-		$this->onCommand(new TCommandEventParameter($this->getCommandName(),$this->getCommandParameter()));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
-	 * The method raises 'OnClick' event to fire up the event handlers.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
-	 * The method raises 'OnCommand' event to fire up the event handlers.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
-	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
-	 * @param TCommandEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCommand',$this,$param);
-		$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,$param);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TLinkButton class
+ *
+ * TLinkButton creates a hyperlink style button on the page.
+ * TLinkButton has the same appearance as a hyperlink. However, it is mainly
+ * used to submit data to a page. Like {@link TButton}, you can create either
+ * a <b>submit</b> button or a <b>command</b> button.
+ *
+ * A <b>command</b> button has a command name (specified by
+ * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property) and and a command parameter
+ * (specified by {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property)
+ * associated with the button. This allows you to create multiple TLinkButton
+ * components on a Web page and programmatically determine which one is clicked
+ * with what parameter. You can provide an event handler for
+ * {@link onCommand OnCommand} event to programmatically control the actions performed
+ * when the command button is clicked. In the event handler, you can determine
+ * the {@link setCommandName CommandName} property value and
+ * the {@link setCommandParameter CommandParameter} property value
+ * through the {@link TCommandParameter::getName Name} and
+ * {@link TCommandParameter::getParameter Parameter} properties of the event
+ * parameter which is of type {@link TCommandEventParameter}.
+ *
+ * A <b>submit</b> button does not have a command name associated with the button
+ * and clicking on it simply posts the Web page back to the server.
+ * By default, a TLinkButton component is a submit button.
+ * You can provide an event handler for the {@link onClick OnClick} event
+ * to programmatically control the actions performed when the submit button is clicked.
+ *
+ * Clicking on button can trigger form validation, if
+ * {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true.
+ * And the validation may be restricted within a certain group of validator
+ * controls by setting {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup} property.
+ * If validation is successful, the data will be post back to the same page.
+ *
+ * TLinkButton will display the {@link setText Text} property value
+ * as the hyperlink text. If {@link setText Text} is empty, the body content
+ * of TLinkButton will be displayed. Therefore, you can use TLinkButton
+ * as an image button by enclosing an &lt;img&gt; tag as the body of TLinkButton.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TLinkButton extends TWebControl implements IPostBackEventHandler, IButtonControl, IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the button
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'a';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation with additional button specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+
+		// We call parent implementation here because some attributes
+		// may be overwritten in the following
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+
+		if($this->getEnabled(true) && $this->getEnableClientScript())
+		{
+			$this->renderLinkButtonHref($writer);
+			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+		}
+		else if($this->getEnabled()) // in this case, parent will not render 'disabled'
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the client-script code.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter renderer
+	 */
+	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
+	{
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean set by a panel to register this button as the default button for the panel.
+	 */
+	public function setIsDefaultButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('IsDefaultButton', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean true if this button is registered as a default button for a panel.
+	 */
+	public function getIsDefaultButton()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('IsDefaultButton', false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the Href for link button.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter renderer
+	 */
+	protected function renderLinkButtonHref($writer)
+	{
+		//create unique no-op url references
+		$nop = "javascript:;//".$this->getClientID();
+		$writer->addAttribute('href', $nop);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TLinkButton';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns postback specifications for the button.
+	 * This method is used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @return array parameters about how the button defines its postback behavior.
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['StopEvent'] = true;
+
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content enclosed between the control tag.
+	 * If {@link getText Text} is not empty, it will be rendered. Otherwise,
+	 * the body content enclosed in the control tag will be rendered.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if(($text=$this->getText())==='')
+			parent::renderContents($writer);
+		else
+			$writer->write($text);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text caption of the button
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the caption of the button.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
+	 * @return string caption of the button.
+	 * @see getText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the caption of the button.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
+	 * @param string caption of the button
+	 * @see setText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandName()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CommandName','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the command name associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function setCommandName($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CommandName',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event
+	 */
+	public function getCommandParameter()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CommandParameter','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the parameter associated with the {@link onCommand OnCommand} event.
+	 */
+	public function setCommandParameter($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CommandParameter',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether postback event trigger by this button will cause input validation.
+	 * @param string the text caption to be set
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the button causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises the postback event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackEventHandler} interface.
+	 * If {@link getCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, it will
+	 * invoke the page's {@link TPage::validate validate} method first.
+	 * It will raise {@link onClick OnClick} and {@link onCommand OnCommand} events.
+	 * This method is mainly used by framework and control developers.
+	 * @param TEventParameter the event parameter
+	 */
+	public function raisePostBackEvent($param)
+	{
+		if($this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onClick(null);
+		$this->onCommand(new TCommandEventParameter($this->getCommandName(),$this->getCommandParameter()));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
+	 * The method raises 'OnClick' event to fire up the event handlers.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handler can be invoked.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method is invoked when the button is clicked.
+	 * The method raises 'OnCommand' event to fire up the event handlers.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation
+	 * so that the event handlers can be invoked.
+	 * @param TCommandEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCommand',$this,$param);
+		$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,$param);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListBox.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListBox.php
index 8e996b6e..f7ab4791 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListBox.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListBox.php
@@ -1,226 +1,226 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TListBox class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TListBox class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TListControl class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
-
-/**
- * TListBox class
- *
- * TListBox displays a list box on a Web page that allows single or multiple selection.
- * The list box allows multiple selections if {@link setSelectionMode SelectionMode}
- * is TListSelectionMode::Multiple. It takes single selection only if Single.
- * The property {@link setRows Rows} specifies how many rows of options are visible
- * at a time. See {@link TListControl} for inherited properties.
- *
- * Since v3.0.3, TListBox starts to support optgroup. To specify an option group for
- * a list item, set a Group attribute with it,
- * <code>
- *  $listitem->Attributes->Group="Group Name";
- *  // or <com:TListItem Attributes.Group="Group Name" .../> in template
- * </code>
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TListBox extends TListControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable
-{
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TListControl class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListControl');
+
+/**
+ * TListBox class
+ *
+ * TListBox displays a list box on a Web page that allows single or multiple selection.
+ * The list box allows multiple selections if {@link setSelectionMode SelectionMode}
+ * is TListSelectionMode::Multiple. It takes single selection only if Single.
+ * The property {@link setRows Rows} specifies how many rows of options are visible
+ * at a time. See {@link TListControl} for inherited properties.
+ *
+ * Since v3.0.3, TListBox starts to support optgroup. To specify an option group for
+ * a list item, set a Group attribute with it,
+ * <code>
+ *  $listitem->Attributes->Group="Group Name";
+ *  // or <com:TListItem Attributes.Group="Group Name" .../> in template
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TListBox extends TListControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable
+{
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
 	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional list box specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$rows=$this->getRows();
-		$writer->addAttribute('size',"$rows");
-		if($this->getSelectionMode()===TListSelectionMode::Multiple)
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID().'[]');
-		else
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID());
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TListBox';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the list control to load post data on postback.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		if($this->getEnabled(true))
-			$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
-			return false;
-		$this->ensureDataBound();
-		$selections=isset($values[$key])?$values[$key]:null;
-		if($selections!==null)
-		{
-			$items=$this->getItems();
-			if($this->getSelectionMode()===TListSelectionMode::Single)
-			{
-				$selection=is_array($selections)?$selections[0]:$selections;
-				$index=$items->findIndexByValue($selection,false);
-				if($this->getSelectedIndex()!==$index)
-				{
-					$this->setSelectedIndex($index);
-					return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-				}
-				else
-					return false;
-			}
-			if(!is_array($selections))
-				$selections=array($selections);
-			$list=array();
-			foreach($selections as $selection)
-				$list[]=$items->findIndexByValue($selection,false);
-			$list2=$this->getSelectedIndices();
-			$n=count($list);
-			$flag=false;
-			if($n===count($list2))
-			{
-				sort($list,SORT_NUMERIC);
-				for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
-				{
-					if($list[$i]!==$list2[$i])
-					{
-						$flag=true;
-						break;
-					}
-				}
-			}
-			else
-				$flag=true;
-			if($flag)
-			{
-				$this->setSelectedIndices($list);
-				$this->_dataChanged=true;
-			}
-			return $flag;
-		}
-		else if($this->getSelectedIndex()!==-1)
-		{
-			$this->clearSelection();
-			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
-	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getSelectedIndices SelectedIndices} property
-	 * is changed on postback.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onSelectedIndexChanged(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether this control allows multiple selection
-	 */
-	protected function getIsMultiSelect()
-	{
-		return $this->getSelectionMode()===TListSelectionMode::Multiple;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of rows to be displayed in the list control
-	 */
-	public function getRows()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Rows', 4);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the number of rows to be displayed in the list control
-	 */
-	public function setRows($value)
-	{
-		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-		if($value<=0)
-			$value=4;
-		$this->setViewState('Rows', $value, 4);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListSelectionMode the selection mode (Single, Multiple). Defaults to TListSelectionMode::Single.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectionMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('SelectionMode', TListSelectionMode::Single);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListSelectionMode the selection mode
-	 */
-	public function setSelectionMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('SelectionMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListSelectionMode'),TListSelectionMode::Single);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value to be validated.
-	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
-	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getSelectedValue();
-	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional list box specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$rows=$this->getRows();
+		$writer->addAttribute('size',"$rows");
+		if($this->getSelectionMode()===TListSelectionMode::Multiple)
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID().'[]');
+		else
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueID());
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TListBox';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the list control to load post data on postback.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		if($this->getEnabled(true))
+			$this->getPage()->registerRequiresPostData($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
+			return false;
+		$this->ensureDataBound();
+		$selections=isset($values[$key])?$values[$key]:null;
+		if($selections!==null)
+		{
+			$items=$this->getItems();
+			if($this->getSelectionMode()===TListSelectionMode::Single)
+			{
+				$selection=is_array($selections)?$selections[0]:$selections;
+				$index=$items->findIndexByValue($selection,false);
+				if($this->getSelectedIndex()!==$index)
+				{
+					$this->setSelectedIndex($index);
+					return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+				}
+				else
+					return false;
+			}
+			if(!is_array($selections))
+				$selections=array($selections);
+			$list=array();
+			foreach($selections as $selection)
+				$list[]=$items->findIndexByValue($selection,false);
+			$list2=$this->getSelectedIndices();
+			$n=count($list);
+			$flag=false;
+			if($n===count($list2))
+			{
+				sort($list,SORT_NUMERIC);
+				for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
+				{
+					if($list[$i]!==$list2[$i])
+					{
+						$flag=true;
+						break;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+			else
+				$flag=true;
+			if($flag)
+			{
+				$this->setSelectedIndices($list);
+				$this->_dataChanged=true;
+			}
+			return $flag;
+		}
+		else if($this->getSelectedIndex()!==-1)
+		{
+			$this->clearSelection();
+			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
+	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getSelectedIndices SelectedIndices} property
+	 * is changed on postback.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onSelectedIndexChanged(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether this control allows multiple selection
+	 */
+	protected function getIsMultiSelect()
+	{
+		return $this->getSelectionMode()===TListSelectionMode::Multiple;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of rows to be displayed in the list control
+	 */
+	public function getRows()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Rows', 4);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the number of rows to be displayed in the list control
+	 */
+	public function setRows($value)
+	{
+		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+		if($value<=0)
+			$value=4;
+		$this->setViewState('Rows', $value, 4);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListSelectionMode the selection mode (Single, Multiple). Defaults to TListSelectionMode::Single.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectionMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('SelectionMode', TListSelectionMode::Single);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListSelectionMode the selection mode
+	 */
+	public function setSelectionMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('SelectionMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListSelectionMode'),TListSelectionMode::Single);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value to be validated.
+	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
+	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getSelectedValue();
+	}
 
 	/**
 	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
@@ -238,25 +238,25 @@ class TListBox extends TListControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatabl
 	{
 	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
 	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TListSelectionMode class.
- * TListSelectionMode defines the enumerable type for the possible selection modes of a {@link TListBox}.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Single: single selection
- * - Multiple: allow multiple selection
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TListSelectionMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Single='Single';
-	const Multiple='Multiple';
-}
-
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TListSelectionMode class.
+ * TListSelectionMode defines the enumerable type for the possible selection modes of a {@link TListBox}.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Single: single selection
+ * - Multiple: allow multiple selection
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TListSelectionMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Single='Single';
+	const Multiple='Multiple';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControl.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControl.php
index 1a07a292..4d388d45 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControl.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControl.php
@@ -1,923 +1,923 @@
-<?php
-
-/**
- * TListControl class file
- *
- * @author Robin J. Rogge <rojaro@gmail.com>
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes the supporting classes
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListItem');
-Prado::using('System.Collections.TListItemCollection');
-Prado::using('System.Collections.TAttributeCollection');
-Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
-
-/**
- * TListControl class
- *
- * TListControl is a base class for list controls, such as {@link TListBox},
- * {@link TDropDownList}, {@link TCheckBoxList}, etc.
- * It manages the items and their status in a list control.
- * It also implements how the items can be populated from template and
- * data source.
- *
- * The property {@link getItems} returns a list of the items in the control.
- * To specify or determine which item is selected, use the
- * {@link getSelectedIndex SelectedIndex} property that indicates the zero-based
- * index of the selected item in the item list. You may also use
- * {@link getSelectedItem SelectedItem} and {@link getSelectedValue SelectedValue}
- * to get the selected item and its value. For multiple selection lists
- * (such as {@link TCheckBoxList} and {@link TListBox}), property
- * {@link getSelectedIndices SelectedIndices} is useful.
- *
- * TListControl implements {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} which allows
- * a list control to postback the page if the selections of the list items are changed.
- * The {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} and {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}
- * properties may be used to specify that validation be performed when auto postback occurs.
- *
- * There are three ways to populate the items in a list control: from template,
- * using {@link setDataSource DataSource} and using {@link setDataSourceID DataSourceID}.
- * The latter two are covered in {@link TDataBoundControl}. To specify items via
- * template, using the following template syntax:
- * <code>
- * <com:TListControl>
- *   <com:TListItem Value="xxx" Text="yyy" >
- *   <com:TListItem Value="xxx" Text="yyy" Selected="true" >
- *   <com:TListItem Value="xxx" Text="yyy" >
- * </com:TListControl>
- * </code>
- *
- * When {@link setDataSource DataSource} or {@link setDataSourceID DataSourceID}
- * is used to populate list items, the {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} and
- * {@link setDataValueField DataValueField} properties are used to specify which
- * columns of the data will be used to populate the text and value of the items.
- * For example, if a data source is as follows,
- * <code>
- * $dataSource=array(
- *    array('name'=>'John', 'age'=>31),
- *    array('name'=>'Cary', 'age'=>28),
- *    array('name'=>'Rose', 'age'=>35),
- * );
- * </code>
- * setting {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} and {@link setDataValueField DataValueField}
- * to 'name' and 'age' will make the first item's text be 'John', value be 31,
- * the second item's text be 'Cary', value be 28, and so on.
- * The {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString} property may be further
- * used to format how the item should be displayed. See {@link formatDataValue()}
- * for an explanation of the format string.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-abstract class TListControl extends TDataBoundControl implements IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TListItemCollection item list
-	 */
-	private $_items=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether items are restored from viewstate
-	 */
-	private $_stateLoaded=false;
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed the following selection variables are used
-	 * to keep selections when Items are not available
-	 */
-	private $_cachedSelectedIndex=-1;
-	private $_cachedSelectedValue=null;
-	private $_cachedSelectedIndices=null;
-	private $_cachedSelectedValues=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the list control
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'select';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-		if($this->getIsMultiSelect())
-			$writer->addAttribute('multiple','multiple');
-		if($this->getEnabled(true))
-		{
-			if($this->getAutoPostBack()
-				&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
-				&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-			{
-				$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-			}
-		}
-		else if($this->getEnabled())
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the javascript for list control.
-	 */
-	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * Derived classes may override this method and return customized js class names.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TListControl';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array postback options for JS postback code
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
-	 * This method adds only {@link TListItem} objects into the {@link getItems Items} collection.
-	 * All other objects are ignored.
-	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		// Do not add items from template if items are loaded from viewstate
-		if(!$this->_stateLoaded && ($object instanceof TListItem))
-		{
-			$index=$this->getItems()->add($object);
-			if(($this->_cachedSelectedValue!==null && $this->_cachedSelectedValue===$object->getValue()) || ($this->_cachedSelectedIndex===$index))
-			{
-				$object->setSelected(true);
-				$this->_cachedSelectedValue=null;
-				$this->_cachedSelectedIndex=-1;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs databinding to populate list items from data source.
-	 * This method is invoked by dataBind().
-	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
-	 * @param Traversable the data
-	 */
-	protected function performDataBinding($data)
-	{
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		if(!$this->getAppendDataBoundItems())
-			$items->clear();
-		$textField=$this->getDataTextField();
-		if($textField==='')
-			$textField=0;
-		$valueField=$this->getDataValueField();
-		if($valueField==='')
-			$valueField=1;
-		$textFormat=$this->getDataTextFormatString();
-		$groupField=$this->getDataGroupField();
-		foreach($data as $key=>$object)
-		{
-			$item=$items->createListItem();
-			if(is_array($object) || is_object($object))
-			{
-				$text=TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($object,$textField);
-				$value=TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($object,$valueField);
-				$item->setValue($value);
-				if($groupField!=='')
-					$item->setAttribute('Group',TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($object,$groupField));
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$text=$object;
-				$item->setValue("$key");
-			}
-			$item->setText($this->formatDataValue($textFormat,$text));
-		}
-		// SelectedValue or SelectedIndex may be set before databinding
-		// so we make them be effective now
-		if($this->_cachedSelectedValue!==null)
-		{
-			$this->setSelectedValue($this->_cachedSelectedValue);
-			$this->resetCachedSelections();
-		}
-		else if($this->_cachedSelectedIndex!==-1)
-		{
-			$this->setSelectedIndex($this->_cachedSelectedIndex);
-			$this->resetCachedSelections();
-		}
-		else if($this->_cachedSelectedValues!==null)
-		{
-			$this->setSelectedValues($this->_cachedSelectedValues);
-			$this->resetCachedSelections();
-		}
-		else if($this->_cachedSelectedIndices!==null)
-		{
-			$this->setSelectedIndices($this->_cachedSelectedIndices);
-			$this->resetCachedSelections();
-		}
-	}
-
-	private function resetCachedSelections()
-	{
-		$this->_cachedSelectedValue=null;
-		$this->_cachedSelectedIndex=-1;
-		$this->_cachedSelectedValues=null;
-		$this->_cachedSelectedIndices=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a collection object to hold list items.
-	 * This method may be overriden to create a customized collection.
-	 * @return TListItemCollection the collection object
-	 */
-	protected function createListItemCollection()
-	{
-		return new TListItemCollection;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves items into viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
-	 */
-	public function saveState()
-	{
-		parent::saveState();
-		if($this->_items)
-			$this->setViewState('Items',$this->_items->saveState(),null);
-		else
-			$this->clearViewState('Items');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads items from viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
-	 */
-	public function loadState()
-	{
-		parent::loadState();
-		$this->_stateLoaded=true;
-		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
-		{
-			$this->_items=$this->createListItemCollection();
-			$this->_items->loadState($this->getViewState('Items',null));
-		}
-		$this->clearViewState('Items');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether this is a multiselect control. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	protected function getIsMultiSelect()
-	{
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether performing databind should append items or clear the existing ones. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAppendDataBoundItems()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AppendDataBoundItems',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether performing databind should append items or clear the existing ones.
-	 */
-	public function setAppendDataBoundItems($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AppendDataBoundItems',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether an automatic postback to the server
-     * will occur whenever the user makes change to the list control and then tabs out of it.
-     * Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoPostBack()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating if postback automatically.
-	 * An automatic postback to the server will occur whenever the user
-	 * makes change to the list control and then tabs out of it.
-	 * @param boolean the value indicating if postback automatically
-	 */
-	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this list control will cause input validation, default is true.
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this list control will cause input validation.
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the list items.
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the list items.
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how data bound to the list control is displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataTextFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets data text format string.
-	 * The format string is used in {@link TDataValueFormatter::format()} to format the Text property value
-	 * of each item in the list control.
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how data bound to the list control is displayed.
-	 * @see TDataValueFormatter::format()
-	 */
-	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the value of each list item.
-	 */
-	public function getDataValueField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataValueField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the value of each list item.
-	 */
-	public function setDataValueField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataValueField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the label of the list item groups
-	 */
-	public function getDataGroupField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataGroupField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the label of the list item groups
-	 */
-	public function setDataGroupField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataGroupField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of items in the list control
-	 */
-	public function getItemCount()
-	{
-		return $this->_items?$this->_items->getCount():0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the list control contains any items.
-	 */
-	public function getHasItems()
-	{
-		return ($this->_items && $this->_items->getCount()>0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListItemCollection the item collection
-	 */
-	public function getItems()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_items)
-			$this->_items=$this->createListItemCollection();
-		return $this->_items;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the index (zero-based) of the item being selected, -1 if no item is selected.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedIndex()
-	{
-		if($this->_items)
-		{
-			$n=$this->_items->getCount();
-			for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
-				if($this->_items->itemAt($i)->getSelected())
-					return $i;
-		}
-		return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the index (zero-based) of the item to be selected
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedIndex($index)
-	{
-		if(($index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($index))<0)
-			$index=-1;
-		if($this->_items)
-		{
-			$this->clearSelection();
-			if($index>=0 && $index<$this->_items->getCount())
-				$this->_items->itemAt($index)->setSelected(true);
-		}
-		$this->_cachedSelectedIndex=$index;
-		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
-			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedIndex($index);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array list of index of items that are selected
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedIndices()
-	{
-		$selections=array();
-		if($this->_items)
-		{
-			$n=$this->_items->getCount();
-			for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
-				if($this->_items->itemAt($i)->getSelected())
-					$selections[]=$i;
-		}
-		return $selections;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param array list of index of items to be selected
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedIndices($indices)
-	{
-		if($this->getIsMultiSelect())
-		{
-			if($this->_items)
-			{
-				$this->clearSelection();
-				$n=$this->_items->getCount();
-				foreach($indices as $index)
-				{
-					if($index>=0 && $index<$n)
-						$this->_items->itemAt($index)->setSelected(true);
-				}
-			}
-			$this->_cachedSelectedIndices=$indices;
-		}
-		else
-			throw new TNotSupportedException('listcontrol_multiselect_unsupported',get_class($this));
-
-		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
-			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedIndices($indices);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListItem|null the selected item with the lowest cardinal index, null if no item is selected.
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedItem()
-	{
-		if(($index=$this->getSelectedIndex())>=0)
-			return $this->_items->itemAt($index);
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value of the selected item with the lowest cardinal index.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getSelectedValue()}.
-	 * @return string the value of the selected item with the lowest cardinal index, empty if no selection.
-	 * @see getSelectedValue
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getSelectedValue();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Selects an item by the specified value.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setSelectedValue()}.
-	 * @param string the value of the item to be selected.
-	 * @see setSelectedValue
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setSelectedValue($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the value of the selected item with the lowest cardinal index, empty if no selection
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedValue()
-	{
-		$index=$this->getSelectedIndex();
-		return $index>=0?$this->getItems()->itemAt($index)->getValue():'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets selection by item value.
-	 * Existing selections will be cleared if the item value is found in the item collection.
-	 * Note, if the value is null, existing selections will also be cleared.
-	 * @param string the value of the item to be selected.
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedValue($value)
-    {
-	    if($this->_items)
-	    {
-		    if($value===null)
-		    	$this->clearSelection();
-		    else if(($item=$this->_items->findItemByValue($value))!==null)
-	    	{
-		    	$this->clearSelection();
-		    	$item->setSelected(true);
-	    	}
-	    	else
-				$this->clearSelection();
-    	}
-    	$this->_cachedSelectedValue=$value;
-		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
-			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedValue($value);
-    }
-
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array list of the selected item values (strings)
-	 */
-	public function getSelectedValues()
-	{
-		$values=array();
-		if($this->_items)
-		{
-			foreach($this->_items as $item)
-			{
-				if($item->getSelected())
-					$values[]=$item->getValue();
-			}
-		}
-		return $values;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param array list of the selected item values
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedValues($values)
-	{
-		if($this->getIsMultiSelect())
-		{
-			if($this->_items)
-			{
-				$this->clearSelection();
-				$lookup=array();
-				foreach($this->_items as $item)
-					$lookup[$item->getValue()]=$item;
-				foreach($values as $value)
-				{
-					if(isset($lookup["$value"]))
-						$lookup["$value"]->setSelected(true);
-				}
-			}
-			$this->_cachedSelectedValues=$values;
-		}
-		else
-			throw new TNotSupportedException('listcontrol_multiselect_unsupported',get_class($this));
-
-		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
-			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedValues($values);
-	}
-
-    /**
-     * @return string selected value
-     */
-    public function getText()
-    {
-	    return $this->getSelectedValue();
-    }
-
-    /**
-     * @param string value to be selected
-     */
-    public function setText($value)
-    {
-	    $this->setSelectedValue($value);
-    }
-
-    /**
-     * Clears all existing selections.
-     */
-    public function clearSelection()
-    {
-	    if($this->_items)
-	    {
-		    foreach($this->_items as $item)
-		    	$item->setSelected(false);
-	    }
-
-		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
-			$this->getAdapter()->clearSelection();
-    }
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the list control causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the list control causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the prompt text which is to be displayed as the first list item.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getPromptText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PromptText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the prompt text which is to be displayed as the first list item.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setPromptText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PromptText',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the prompt selection value.
-	 * @see getPromptText
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getPromptValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PromptValue','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the prompt selection value. If empty, {@link getPromptText PromptText} will be used as the value.
-	 * @see setPromptText
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setPromptValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PromptValue',(string)$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises OnSelectedIndexChanged event when selection is changed.
-	 * This method is invoked when the list control has its selection changed
-	 * by end-users.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onSelectedIndexChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnSelectedIndexChanged',$this,$param);
-		$this->onTextChanged($param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises OnTextChanged event when selection is changed.
-	 * This method is invoked when the list control has its selection changed
-	 * by end-users.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onTextChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnTextChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the prompt text, if any.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	protected function renderPrompt($writer)
-	{
-		$text=$this->getPromptText();
-		$value=$this->getPromptValue();
-		if($value==='')
-			$value=$text;
-		if($value!=='')
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('value',$value);
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('option');
-			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text));
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-			$writer->writeLine();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body content of the list control.
-	 * This method renders items contained in the list control as the body content.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		$this->renderPrompt($writer);
-		
-		if($this->_items)
-		{
-			$writer->writeLine();
-			$previousGroup=null;
-			foreach($this->_items as $item)
-			{
-				if($item->getEnabled())
-				{
-					if($item->getHasAttributes())
-					{
-						$group=$item->getAttributes()->remove('Group');
-						if($group!==$previousGroup)
-						{
-							if($previousGroup!==null)
-							{
-								$writer->renderEndTag();
-								$writer->writeLine();
-								$previousGroup=null;
-							}
-							if($group!==null)
-							{
-								$writer->addAttribute('label',$group);
-								$writer->renderBeginTag('optgroup');
-								$writer->writeLine();
-								$previousGroup=$group;
-							}
-						}
-						foreach($item->getAttributes() as $name=>$value)
-							$writer->addAttribute($name,$value);
-					}
-					else if($previousGroup!==null)
-					{
-						$writer->renderEndTag();
-						$writer->writeLine();
-						$previousGroup=null;
-					}
-					if($item->getSelected())
-						$writer->addAttribute('selected','selected');
-					$writer->addAttribute('value',$item->getValue());
-					$writer->renderBeginTag('option');
-					$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
-					$writer->renderEndTag();
-					$writer->writeLine();
-				}
-			}
-			if($previousGroup!==null)
-			{
-				$writer->renderEndTag();
-				$writer->writeLine();
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Formats the text value according to a format string.
-	 * If the format string is empty, the original value is converted into
-	 * a string and returned.
-	 * If the format string starts with '#', the string is treated as a PHP expression
-	 * within which the token '{0}' is translated with the data value to be formated.
-	 * Otherwise, the format string and the data value are passed
-	 * as the first and second parameters in {@link sprintf}.
-	 * @param string format string
-	 * @param mixed the data to be formatted
-	 * @return string the formatted result
-	 */
-	protected function formatDataValue($formatString,$value)
-	{
-		if($formatString==='')
-			return TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
-		else if($formatString[0]==='#')
-		{
-			$expression=strtr(substr($formatString,1),array('{0}'=>'$value'));
-			try
-			{
-				if(eval("\$result=$expression;")===false)
-					throw new Exception('');
-				return $result;
-			}
-			catch(Exception $e)
-			{
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('listcontrol_expression_invalid',get_class($this),$expression,$e->getMessage());
-			}
-		}
-		else
-			return sprintf($formatString,$value);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * IListControlAdapter interface
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Revision: $  Sun Jun 25 04:53:43 EST 2006 $
- * @package System.Web.UI.ActiveControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-interface IListControlAdapter
-{
-	/**
-	 * Selects an item based on zero-base index on the client side.
-	 * @param integer the index (zero-based) of the item to be selected
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedIndex($index);
-	/**
-	 * Selects a list of item based on zero-base indices on the client side.
-	 * @param array list of index of items to be selected
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedIndices($indices);
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets selection by item value on the client side.
-	 * @param string the value of the item to be selected.
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedValue($value);
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets selection by a list of item values on the client side.
-	 * @param array list of the selected item values
-	 */
-	public function setSelectedValues($values);
-
-    /**
-     * Clears all existing selections on the client side.
-     */
-    public function clearSelection();
-}
-
-
-?>
+<?php
+
+/**
+ * TListControl class file
+ *
+ * @author Robin J. Rogge <rojaro@gmail.com>
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes the supporting classes
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TListItem');
+Prado::using('System.Collections.TListItemCollection');
+Prado::using('System.Collections.TAttributeCollection');
+Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
+
+/**
+ * TListControl class
+ *
+ * TListControl is a base class for list controls, such as {@link TListBox},
+ * {@link TDropDownList}, {@link TCheckBoxList}, etc.
+ * It manages the items and their status in a list control.
+ * It also implements how the items can be populated from template and
+ * data source.
+ *
+ * The property {@link getItems} returns a list of the items in the control.
+ * To specify or determine which item is selected, use the
+ * {@link getSelectedIndex SelectedIndex} property that indicates the zero-based
+ * index of the selected item in the item list. You may also use
+ * {@link getSelectedItem SelectedItem} and {@link getSelectedValue SelectedValue}
+ * to get the selected item and its value. For multiple selection lists
+ * (such as {@link TCheckBoxList} and {@link TListBox}), property
+ * {@link getSelectedIndices SelectedIndices} is useful.
+ *
+ * TListControl implements {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} which allows
+ * a list control to postback the page if the selections of the list items are changed.
+ * The {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} and {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}
+ * properties may be used to specify that validation be performed when auto postback occurs.
+ *
+ * There are three ways to populate the items in a list control: from template,
+ * using {@link setDataSource DataSource} and using {@link setDataSourceID DataSourceID}.
+ * The latter two are covered in {@link TDataBoundControl}. To specify items via
+ * template, using the following template syntax:
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TListControl>
+ *   <com:TListItem Value="xxx" Text="yyy" >
+ *   <com:TListItem Value="xxx" Text="yyy" Selected="true" >
+ *   <com:TListItem Value="xxx" Text="yyy" >
+ * </com:TListControl>
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * When {@link setDataSource DataSource} or {@link setDataSourceID DataSourceID}
+ * is used to populate list items, the {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} and
+ * {@link setDataValueField DataValueField} properties are used to specify which
+ * columns of the data will be used to populate the text and value of the items.
+ * For example, if a data source is as follows,
+ * <code>
+ * $dataSource=array(
+ *    array('name'=>'John', 'age'=>31),
+ *    array('name'=>'Cary', 'age'=>28),
+ *    array('name'=>'Rose', 'age'=>35),
+ * );
+ * </code>
+ * setting {@link setDataTextField DataTextField} and {@link setDataValueField DataValueField}
+ * to 'name' and 'age' will make the first item's text be 'John', value be 31,
+ * the second item's text be 'Cary', value be 28, and so on.
+ * The {@link setDataTextFormatString DataTextFormatString} property may be further
+ * used to format how the item should be displayed. See {@link formatDataValue()}
+ * for an explanation of the format string.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+abstract class TListControl extends TDataBoundControl implements IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TListItemCollection item list
+	 */
+	private $_items=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether items are restored from viewstate
+	 */
+	private $_stateLoaded=false;
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed the following selection variables are used
+	 * to keep selections when Items are not available
+	 */
+	private $_cachedSelectedIndex=-1;
+	private $_cachedSelectedValue=null;
+	private $_cachedSelectedIndices=null;
+	private $_cachedSelectedValues=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the list control
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'select';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+		if($this->getIsMultiSelect())
+			$writer->addAttribute('multiple','multiple');
+		if($this->getEnabled(true))
+		{
+			if($this->getAutoPostBack()
+				&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
+				&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+			{
+				$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+			}
+		}
+		else if($this->getEnabled())
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the javascript for list control.
+	 */
+	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * Derived classes may override this method and return customized js class names.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TListControl';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array postback options for JS postback code
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
+	 * This method adds only {@link TListItem} objects into the {@link getItems Items} collection.
+	 * All other objects are ignored.
+	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		// Do not add items from template if items are loaded from viewstate
+		if(!$this->_stateLoaded && ($object instanceof TListItem))
+		{
+			$index=$this->getItems()->add($object);
+			if(($this->_cachedSelectedValue!==null && $this->_cachedSelectedValue===$object->getValue()) || ($this->_cachedSelectedIndex===$index))
+			{
+				$object->setSelected(true);
+				$this->_cachedSelectedValue=null;
+				$this->_cachedSelectedIndex=-1;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs databinding to populate list items from data source.
+	 * This method is invoked by dataBind().
+	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
+	 * @param Traversable the data
+	 */
+	protected function performDataBinding($data)
+	{
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		if(!$this->getAppendDataBoundItems())
+			$items->clear();
+		$textField=$this->getDataTextField();
+		if($textField==='')
+			$textField=0;
+		$valueField=$this->getDataValueField();
+		if($valueField==='')
+			$valueField=1;
+		$textFormat=$this->getDataTextFormatString();
+		$groupField=$this->getDataGroupField();
+		foreach($data as $key=>$object)
+		{
+			$item=$items->createListItem();
+			if(is_array($object) || is_object($object))
+			{
+				$text=TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($object,$textField);
+				$value=TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($object,$valueField);
+				$item->setValue($value);
+				if($groupField!=='')
+					$item->setAttribute('Group',TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($object,$groupField));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$text=$object;
+				$item->setValue("$key");
+			}
+			$item->setText($this->formatDataValue($textFormat,$text));
+		}
+		// SelectedValue or SelectedIndex may be set before databinding
+		// so we make them be effective now
+		if($this->_cachedSelectedValue!==null)
+		{
+			$this->setSelectedValue($this->_cachedSelectedValue);
+			$this->resetCachedSelections();
+		}
+		else if($this->_cachedSelectedIndex!==-1)
+		{
+			$this->setSelectedIndex($this->_cachedSelectedIndex);
+			$this->resetCachedSelections();
+		}
+		else if($this->_cachedSelectedValues!==null)
+		{
+			$this->setSelectedValues($this->_cachedSelectedValues);
+			$this->resetCachedSelections();
+		}
+		else if($this->_cachedSelectedIndices!==null)
+		{
+			$this->setSelectedIndices($this->_cachedSelectedIndices);
+			$this->resetCachedSelections();
+		}
+	}
+
+	private function resetCachedSelections()
+	{
+		$this->_cachedSelectedValue=null;
+		$this->_cachedSelectedIndex=-1;
+		$this->_cachedSelectedValues=null;
+		$this->_cachedSelectedIndices=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a collection object to hold list items.
+	 * This method may be overriden to create a customized collection.
+	 * @return TListItemCollection the collection object
+	 */
+	protected function createListItemCollection()
+	{
+		return new TListItemCollection;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves items into viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
+	 */
+	public function saveState()
+	{
+		parent::saveState();
+		if($this->_items)
+			$this->setViewState('Items',$this->_items->saveState(),null);
+		else
+			$this->clearViewState('Items');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads items from viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
+	 */
+	public function loadState()
+	{
+		parent::loadState();
+		$this->_stateLoaded=true;
+		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
+		{
+			$this->_items=$this->createListItemCollection();
+			$this->_items->loadState($this->getViewState('Items',null));
+		}
+		$this->clearViewState('Items');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether this is a multiselect control. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	protected function getIsMultiSelect()
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether performing databind should append items or clear the existing ones. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAppendDataBoundItems()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AppendDataBoundItems',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether performing databind should append items or clear the existing ones.
+	 */
+	public function setAppendDataBoundItems($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AppendDataBoundItems',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether an automatic postback to the server
+     * will occur whenever the user makes change to the list control and then tabs out of it.
+     * Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoPostBack()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating if postback automatically.
+	 * An automatic postback to the server will occur whenever the user
+	 * makes change to the list control and then tabs out of it.
+	 * @param boolean the value indicating if postback automatically
+	 */
+	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this list control will cause input validation, default is true.
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this list control will cause input validation.
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the list items.
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the text content of the list items.
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how data bound to the list control is displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataTextFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataTextFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets data text format string.
+	 * The format string is used in {@link TDataValueFormatter::format()} to format the Text property value
+	 * of each item in the list control.
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how data bound to the list control is displayed.
+	 * @see TDataValueFormatter::format()
+	 */
+	public function setDataTextFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataTextFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the value of each list item.
+	 */
+	public function getDataValueField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataValueField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the value of each list item.
+	 */
+	public function setDataValueField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataValueField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the label of the list item groups
+	 */
+	public function getDataGroupField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataGroupField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the label of the list item groups
+	 */
+	public function setDataGroupField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataGroupField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of items in the list control
+	 */
+	public function getItemCount()
+	{
+		return $this->_items?$this->_items->getCount():0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the list control contains any items.
+	 */
+	public function getHasItems()
+	{
+		return ($this->_items && $this->_items->getCount()>0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListItemCollection the item collection
+	 */
+	public function getItems()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_items)
+			$this->_items=$this->createListItemCollection();
+		return $this->_items;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the index (zero-based) of the item being selected, -1 if no item is selected.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedIndex()
+	{
+		if($this->_items)
+		{
+			$n=$this->_items->getCount();
+			for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
+				if($this->_items->itemAt($i)->getSelected())
+					return $i;
+		}
+		return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the index (zero-based) of the item to be selected
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedIndex($index)
+	{
+		if(($index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($index))<0)
+			$index=-1;
+		if($this->_items)
+		{
+			$this->clearSelection();
+			if($index>=0 && $index<$this->_items->getCount())
+				$this->_items->itemAt($index)->setSelected(true);
+		}
+		$this->_cachedSelectedIndex=$index;
+		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
+			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedIndex($index);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array list of index of items that are selected
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedIndices()
+	{
+		$selections=array();
+		if($this->_items)
+		{
+			$n=$this->_items->getCount();
+			for($i=0;$i<$n;++$i)
+				if($this->_items->itemAt($i)->getSelected())
+					$selections[]=$i;
+		}
+		return $selections;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param array list of index of items to be selected
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedIndices($indices)
+	{
+		if($this->getIsMultiSelect())
+		{
+			if($this->_items)
+			{
+				$this->clearSelection();
+				$n=$this->_items->getCount();
+				foreach($indices as $index)
+				{
+					if($index>=0 && $index<$n)
+						$this->_items->itemAt($index)->setSelected(true);
+				}
+			}
+			$this->_cachedSelectedIndices=$indices;
+		}
+		else
+			throw new TNotSupportedException('listcontrol_multiselect_unsupported',get_class($this));
+
+		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
+			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedIndices($indices);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListItem|null the selected item with the lowest cardinal index, null if no item is selected.
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedItem()
+	{
+		if(($index=$this->getSelectedIndex())>=0)
+			return $this->_items->itemAt($index);
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value of the selected item with the lowest cardinal index.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getSelectedValue()}.
+	 * @return string the value of the selected item with the lowest cardinal index, empty if no selection.
+	 * @see getSelectedValue
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getSelectedValue();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Selects an item by the specified value.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setSelectedValue()}.
+	 * @param string the value of the item to be selected.
+	 * @see setSelectedValue
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setSelectedValue($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the value of the selected item with the lowest cardinal index, empty if no selection
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedValue()
+	{
+		$index=$this->getSelectedIndex();
+		return $index>=0?$this->getItems()->itemAt($index)->getValue():'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets selection by item value.
+	 * Existing selections will be cleared if the item value is found in the item collection.
+	 * Note, if the value is null, existing selections will also be cleared.
+	 * @param string the value of the item to be selected.
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedValue($value)
+    {
+	    if($this->_items)
+	    {
+		    if($value===null)
+		    	$this->clearSelection();
+		    else if(($item=$this->_items->findItemByValue($value))!==null)
+	    	{
+		    	$this->clearSelection();
+		    	$item->setSelected(true);
+	    	}
+	    	else
+				$this->clearSelection();
+    	}
+    	$this->_cachedSelectedValue=$value;
+		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
+			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedValue($value);
+    }
+
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array list of the selected item values (strings)
+	 */
+	public function getSelectedValues()
+	{
+		$values=array();
+		if($this->_items)
+		{
+			foreach($this->_items as $item)
+			{
+				if($item->getSelected())
+					$values[]=$item->getValue();
+			}
+		}
+		return $values;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param array list of the selected item values
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedValues($values)
+	{
+		if($this->getIsMultiSelect())
+		{
+			if($this->_items)
+			{
+				$this->clearSelection();
+				$lookup=array();
+				foreach($this->_items as $item)
+					$lookup[$item->getValue()]=$item;
+				foreach($values as $value)
+				{
+					if(isset($lookup["$value"]))
+						$lookup["$value"]->setSelected(true);
+				}
+			}
+			$this->_cachedSelectedValues=$values;
+		}
+		else
+			throw new TNotSupportedException('listcontrol_multiselect_unsupported',get_class($this));
+
+		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
+			$this->getAdapter()->setSelectedValues($values);
+	}
+
+    /**
+     * @return string selected value
+     */
+    public function getText()
+    {
+	    return $this->getSelectedValue();
+    }
+
+    /**
+     * @param string value to be selected
+     */
+    public function setText($value)
+    {
+	    $this->setSelectedValue($value);
+    }
+
+    /**
+     * Clears all existing selections.
+     */
+    public function clearSelection()
+    {
+	    if($this->_items)
+	    {
+		    foreach($this->_items as $item)
+		    	$item->setSelected(false);
+	    }
+
+		if($this->getAdapter() instanceof IListControlAdapter)
+			$this->getAdapter()->clearSelection();
+    }
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the list control causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the list control causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the prompt text which is to be displayed as the first list item.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getPromptText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PromptText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the prompt text which is to be displayed as the first list item.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setPromptText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PromptText',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the prompt selection value.
+	 * @see getPromptText
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getPromptValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PromptValue','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the prompt selection value. If empty, {@link getPromptText PromptText} will be used as the value.
+	 * @see setPromptText
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setPromptValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PromptValue',(string)$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises OnSelectedIndexChanged event when selection is changed.
+	 * This method is invoked when the list control has its selection changed
+	 * by end-users.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onSelectedIndexChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnSelectedIndexChanged',$this,$param);
+		$this->onTextChanged($param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises OnTextChanged event when selection is changed.
+	 * This method is invoked when the list control has its selection changed
+	 * by end-users.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onTextChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnTextChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the prompt text, if any.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	protected function renderPrompt($writer)
+	{
+		$text=$this->getPromptText();
+		$value=$this->getPromptValue();
+		if($value==='')
+			$value=$text;
+		if($value!=='')
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('value',$value);
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('option');
+			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text));
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+			$writer->writeLine();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body content of the list control.
+	 * This method renders items contained in the list control as the body content.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		$this->renderPrompt($writer);
+		
+		if($this->_items)
+		{
+			$writer->writeLine();
+			$previousGroup=null;
+			foreach($this->_items as $item)
+			{
+				if($item->getEnabled())
+				{
+					if($item->getHasAttributes())
+					{
+						$group=$item->getAttributes()->remove('Group');
+						if($group!==$previousGroup)
+						{
+							if($previousGroup!==null)
+							{
+								$writer->renderEndTag();
+								$writer->writeLine();
+								$previousGroup=null;
+							}
+							if($group!==null)
+							{
+								$writer->addAttribute('label',$group);
+								$writer->renderBeginTag('optgroup');
+								$writer->writeLine();
+								$previousGroup=$group;
+							}
+						}
+						foreach($item->getAttributes() as $name=>$value)
+							$writer->addAttribute($name,$value);
+					}
+					else if($previousGroup!==null)
+					{
+						$writer->renderEndTag();
+						$writer->writeLine();
+						$previousGroup=null;
+					}
+					if($item->getSelected())
+						$writer->addAttribute('selected','selected');
+					$writer->addAttribute('value',$item->getValue());
+					$writer->renderBeginTag('option');
+					$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($item->getText()));
+					$writer->renderEndTag();
+					$writer->writeLine();
+				}
+			}
+			if($previousGroup!==null)
+			{
+				$writer->renderEndTag();
+				$writer->writeLine();
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Formats the text value according to a format string.
+	 * If the format string is empty, the original value is converted into
+	 * a string and returned.
+	 * If the format string starts with '#', the string is treated as a PHP expression
+	 * within which the token '{0}' is translated with the data value to be formated.
+	 * Otherwise, the format string and the data value are passed
+	 * as the first and second parameters in {@link sprintf}.
+	 * @param string format string
+	 * @param mixed the data to be formatted
+	 * @return string the formatted result
+	 */
+	protected function formatDataValue($formatString,$value)
+	{
+		if($formatString==='')
+			return TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
+		else if($formatString[0]==='#')
+		{
+			$expression=strtr(substr($formatString,1),array('{0}'=>'$value'));
+			try
+			{
+				if(eval("\$result=$expression;")===false)
+					throw new Exception('');
+				return $result;
+			}
+			catch(Exception $e)
+			{
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('listcontrol_expression_invalid',get_class($this),$expression,$e->getMessage());
+			}
+		}
+		else
+			return sprintf($formatString,$value);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * IListControlAdapter interface
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Revision: $  Sun Jun 25 04:53:43 EST 2006 $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.ActiveControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+interface IListControlAdapter
+{
+	/**
+	 * Selects an item based on zero-base index on the client side.
+	 * @param integer the index (zero-based) of the item to be selected
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedIndex($index);
+	/**
+	 * Selects a list of item based on zero-base indices on the client side.
+	 * @param array list of index of items to be selected
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedIndices($indices);
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets selection by item value on the client side.
+	 * @param string the value of the item to be selected.
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedValue($value);
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets selection by a list of item values on the client side.
+	 * @param array list of the selected item values
+	 */
+	public function setSelectedValues($values);
+
+    /**
+     * Clears all existing selections on the client side.
+     */
+    public function clearSelection();
+}
+
+
+?>
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControlValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControlValidator.php
index a5be67b3..75a0510c 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControlValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListControlValidator.php
@@ -1,225 +1,225 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TListControlValidator class file
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TListControlValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TBaseValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-
-/**
- * TListControlValidator class.
- *
- * TListControlValidator checks the number of selection and their values
- * for a <b>TListControl that allows multiple selection</b>.
- *
- * You can specify the minimum or maximum (or both) number of selections
- * required using the {@link setMinSelection MinSelection} and
- * {@link setMaxSelection MaxSelection} properties, respectively. In addition,
- * you can specify a comma separated list of required selected values via the
- * {@link setRequiredSelections RequiredSelections} property.
- *
- * Examples
- * - At least two selections
- * <code>
- *	<com:TListBox ID="listbox" SelectionMode="Multiple">
- *		<com:TListItem Text="item1" Value="value1" />
- *		<com:TListItem Text="item2" Value="value2" />
- *		<com:TListItem Text="item3" Value="value3" />
- *	</com:TListBox>
- *
- *	<com:TListControlValidator
- *		ControlToValidate="listbox"
- *		MinSelection="2"
- *		ErrorMessage="Please select at least 2" />
- * </code>
- * - "value1" must be selected <b>and</b> at least 1 other
- * <code>
- *	<com:TCheckBoxList ID="checkboxes">
- *		<com:TListItem Text="item1" Value="value1" />
- *		<com:TListItem Text="item2" Value="value2" />
- *		<com:TListItem Text="item3" Value="value3" />
- *	</com:TCheckBoxList>
- *
- *	<com:TListControlValidator
- *		ControlToValidate="checkboxes"
- *		RequiredSelections="value1"
- *		MinSelection="2"
- *		ErrorMessage="Please select 'item1' and at least 1 other" />
- * </code>
- *
- * @author Xiang Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TListControlValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TListControlValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer min number of selections. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getMinSelection()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MinSelection',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer minimum number of selections.
-	 */
-	public function setMinSelection($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=-1;
-		$this->setViewState('MinSelection',$value,-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer max number of selections.  Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getMaxSelection()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MaxSelection',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer max number of selections.
-	 */
-	public function setMaxSelection($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$value=-1;
-		$this->setViewState('MaxSelection',$value,-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Get a comma separated list of required selected values.
-	 * @return string comma separated list of required values.
-	 */
-	public function getRequiredSelections()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('RequiredSelections','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Set the list of required values, using aa comma separated list.
-	 * @param string comma separated list of required values.
-	 */
-	public function setRequiredSelections($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('RequiredSelections',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input component changes its data
-	 * from the InitialValue or the input component is not given.
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	protected function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		$control=$this->getValidationTarget();
-
-		$exists = true;
-		$values = $this->getSelection($control);
-		$count = count($values);
-		$required = $this->getRequiredValues();
-
-		//if required, check the values
-		if(!empty($required))
-		{
-			if($count < count($required) )
-				return false;
-			foreach($required as $require)
-				$exists = $exists && in_array($require, $values);
-		}
-
-		$min = $this->getMinSelection();
-		$max = $this->getMaxSelection();
-
-		if($min !== -1 && $max !== -1)
-			return $exists && $count >= $min && $count <= $max;
-		else if($min === -1 && $max !== -1)
-			return $exists && $count <= $max;
-		else if($min !== -1 && $max === -1)
-			return $exists && $count >= $min;
-		else
-			return $exists;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListControl control to validate
-	 * @return array number of selected values and its values.
-	 */
-	protected function getSelection($control)
-	{
-		$values = array();
-
-		//get the data
-		foreach($control->getItems() as $item)
-		{
-			if($item->getSelected())
-				$values[] = $item->getValue();
-		}
-		return $values;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array list of required values.
-	 */
-	protected function getRequiredValues()
-	{
-		$required = array();
-		$string = $this->getRequiredSelections();
-		if(!empty($string))
-			$required = preg_split('/,\s*/', $string);
-		return $required;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
-
-		if(!$control instanceof TListControl)
-		{
-			throw new TConfigurationException(
-				'listcontrolvalidator_invalid_control',
-				$this->getID(),$this->getControlToValidate(), get_class($control));
-		}
-
-		$min = $this->getMinSelection();
-		$max = $this->getMaxSelection();
-		if($min !== -1)
-			$options['Min']= $min;
-		if($max !== -1)
-			$options['Max']= $max;
-		$required = $this->getRequiredSelections();
-		if(strlen($required) > 0)
-			$options['Required']= $required;
-		$options['TotalItems'] = $control->getItemCount();
-
-		return $options;
-	}
-}
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TBaseValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TListControlValidator class.
+ *
+ * TListControlValidator checks the number of selection and their values
+ * for a <b>TListControl that allows multiple selection</b>.
+ *
+ * You can specify the minimum or maximum (or both) number of selections
+ * required using the {@link setMinSelection MinSelection} and
+ * {@link setMaxSelection MaxSelection} properties, respectively. In addition,
+ * you can specify a comma separated list of required selected values via the
+ * {@link setRequiredSelections RequiredSelections} property.
+ *
+ * Examples
+ * - At least two selections
+ * <code>
+ *	<com:TListBox ID="listbox" SelectionMode="Multiple">
+ *		<com:TListItem Text="item1" Value="value1" />
+ *		<com:TListItem Text="item2" Value="value2" />
+ *		<com:TListItem Text="item3" Value="value3" />
+ *	</com:TListBox>
+ *
+ *	<com:TListControlValidator
+ *		ControlToValidate="listbox"
+ *		MinSelection="2"
+ *		ErrorMessage="Please select at least 2" />
+ * </code>
+ * - "value1" must be selected <b>and</b> at least 1 other
+ * <code>
+ *	<com:TCheckBoxList ID="checkboxes">
+ *		<com:TListItem Text="item1" Value="value1" />
+ *		<com:TListItem Text="item2" Value="value2" />
+ *		<com:TListItem Text="item3" Value="value3" />
+ *	</com:TCheckBoxList>
+ *
+ *	<com:TListControlValidator
+ *		ControlToValidate="checkboxes"
+ *		RequiredSelections="value1"
+ *		MinSelection="2"
+ *		ErrorMessage="Please select 'item1' and at least 1 other" />
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * @author Xiang Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TListControlValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TListControlValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer min number of selections. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getMinSelection()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MinSelection',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer minimum number of selections.
+	 */
+	public function setMinSelection($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=-1;
+		$this->setViewState('MinSelection',$value,-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer max number of selections.  Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getMaxSelection()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MaxSelection',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer max number of selections.
+	 */
+	public function setMaxSelection($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$value=-1;
+		$this->setViewState('MaxSelection',$value,-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Get a comma separated list of required selected values.
+	 * @return string comma separated list of required values.
+	 */
+	public function getRequiredSelections()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('RequiredSelections','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Set the list of required values, using aa comma separated list.
+	 * @param string comma separated list of required values.
+	 */
+	public function setRequiredSelections($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('RequiredSelections',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input component changes its data
+	 * from the InitialValue or the input component is not given.
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	protected function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		$control=$this->getValidationTarget();
+
+		$exists = true;
+		$values = $this->getSelection($control);
+		$count = count($values);
+		$required = $this->getRequiredValues();
+
+		//if required, check the values
+		if(!empty($required))
+		{
+			if($count < count($required) )
+				return false;
+			foreach($required as $require)
+				$exists = $exists && in_array($require, $values);
+		}
+
+		$min = $this->getMinSelection();
+		$max = $this->getMaxSelection();
+
+		if($min !== -1 && $max !== -1)
+			return $exists && $count >= $min && $count <= $max;
+		else if($min === -1 && $max !== -1)
+			return $exists && $count <= $max;
+		else if($min !== -1 && $max === -1)
+			return $exists && $count >= $min;
+		else
+			return $exists;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListControl control to validate
+	 * @return array number of selected values and its values.
+	 */
+	protected function getSelection($control)
+	{
+		$values = array();
+
+		//get the data
+		foreach($control->getItems() as $item)
+		{
+			if($item->getSelected())
+				$values[] = $item->getValue();
+		}
+		return $values;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array list of required values.
+	 */
+	protected function getRequiredValues()
+	{
+		$required = array();
+		$string = $this->getRequiredSelections();
+		if(!empty($string))
+			$required = preg_split('/,\s*/', $string);
+		return $required;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
+
+		if(!$control instanceof TListControl)
+		{
+			throw new TConfigurationException(
+				'listcontrolvalidator_invalid_control',
+				$this->getID(),$this->getControlToValidate(), get_class($control));
+		}
+
+		$min = $this->getMinSelection();
+		$max = $this->getMaxSelection();
+		if($min !== -1)
+			$options['Min']= $min;
+		if($max !== -1)
+			$options['Max']= $max;
+		$required = $this->getRequiredSelections();
+		if(strlen($required) > 0)
+			$options['Required']= $required;
+		$options['TotalItems'] = $control->getItemCount();
+
+		return $options;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListItem.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListItem.php
index 354aa62a..e80bcafd 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListItem.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TListItem.php
@@ -1,184 +1,184 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TListItem class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TListItem class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TListItem class.
- *
- * TListItem represents an item in a list control. Each item has a {@link setText Text}
- * property and a {@link setValue Value} property. If either one of them is not set,
- * it will take the value of the other property.
- * An item can be {@link setSelected Selected} or {@link setEnabled Enabled},
- * and it can have additional {@link getAttributes Attributes} which may be rendered
- * if the list control supports so.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TListItem extends TComponent
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TMap list of custom attributes
-	 */
-	private $_attributes=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string text of the item
-	 */
-	private $_text;
-	/**
-	 * @var string value of the item
-	 */
-	private $_value;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether the item is enabled
-	 */
-	private $_enabled;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether the item is selected
-	 */
-	private $_selected;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param string text of the item
-	 * @param string value of the item
-	 * @param boolean whether the item is enabled
-	 * @param boolean whether the item is selected
-	 */
-	public function __construct($text='',$value='',$enabled=true,$selected=false)
-	{
-		$this->setText($text);
-		$this->setValue($value);
-		$this->setEnabled($enabled);
-		$this->setSelected($selected);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the item is enabled
-	 */
-	public function getEnabled()
-	{
-		return $this->_enabled;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the item is enabled
-	 */
-	public function setEnabled($value)
-	{
-		$this->_enabled=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the item is selected
-	 */
-	public function getSelected()
-	{
-		return $this->_selected;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the item is selected
-	 */
-	public function setSelected($value)
-	{
-		$this->_selected=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text of the item
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->_text===''?$this->_value:$this->_text;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text of the item
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->_text=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string value of the item
-	 */
-	public function getValue()
-	{
-		return $this->_value===''?$this->_text:$this->_value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string value of the item
-	 */
-	public function setValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->_value=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TAttributeCollection custom attributes
-	 */
-	public function getAttributes()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_attributes)
-			$this->_attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
-		return $this->_attributes;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the item has any custom attribute
-	 */
-	public function getHasAttributes()
-	{
-		return $this->_attributes && $this->_attributes->getCount()>0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string name of the attribute
-	 * @return boolean whether the named attribute exists
-	 */
-	public function hasAttribute($name)
-	{
-		return $this->_attributes?$this->_attributes->contains($name):false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the named attribute value, null if attribute does not exist
-	 */
-	public function getAttribute($name)
-	{
-		return $this->_attributes?$this->_attributes->itemAt($name):null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string attribute name
-	 * @param string value of the attribute
-	 */
-	public function setAttribute($name,$value)
-	{
-		$this->getAttributes()->add($name,$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Removes the named attribute.
-	 * @param string the name of the attribute to be removed.
-	 * @return string attribute value removed, empty string if attribute does not exist.
-	 */
-	public function removeAttribute($name)
-	{
-		return $this->_attributes?$this->_attributes->remove($name):null;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TListItem class.
+ *
+ * TListItem represents an item in a list control. Each item has a {@link setText Text}
+ * property and a {@link setValue Value} property. If either one of them is not set,
+ * it will take the value of the other property.
+ * An item can be {@link setSelected Selected} or {@link setEnabled Enabled},
+ * and it can have additional {@link getAttributes Attributes} which may be rendered
+ * if the list control supports so.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TListItem extends TComponent
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TMap list of custom attributes
+	 */
+	private $_attributes=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string text of the item
+	 */
+	private $_text;
+	/**
+	 * @var string value of the item
+	 */
+	private $_value;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether the item is enabled
+	 */
+	private $_enabled;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether the item is selected
+	 */
+	private $_selected;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param string text of the item
+	 * @param string value of the item
+	 * @param boolean whether the item is enabled
+	 * @param boolean whether the item is selected
+	 */
+	public function __construct($text='',$value='',$enabled=true,$selected=false)
+	{
+		$this->setText($text);
+		$this->setValue($value);
+		$this->setEnabled($enabled);
+		$this->setSelected($selected);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the item is enabled
+	 */
+	public function getEnabled()
+	{
+		return $this->_enabled;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the item is enabled
+	 */
+	public function setEnabled($value)
+	{
+		$this->_enabled=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the item is selected
+	 */
+	public function getSelected()
+	{
+		return $this->_selected;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the item is selected
+	 */
+	public function setSelected($value)
+	{
+		$this->_selected=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text of the item
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->_text===''?$this->_value:$this->_text;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text of the item
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->_text=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string value of the item
+	 */
+	public function getValue()
+	{
+		return $this->_value===''?$this->_text:$this->_value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string value of the item
+	 */
+	public function setValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->_value=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TAttributeCollection custom attributes
+	 */
+	public function getAttributes()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_attributes)
+			$this->_attributes=new TAttributeCollection;
+		return $this->_attributes;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the item has any custom attribute
+	 */
+	public function getHasAttributes()
+	{
+		return $this->_attributes && $this->_attributes->getCount()>0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string name of the attribute
+	 * @return boolean whether the named attribute exists
+	 */
+	public function hasAttribute($name)
+	{
+		return $this->_attributes?$this->_attributes->contains($name):false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the named attribute value, null if attribute does not exist
+	 */
+	public function getAttribute($name)
+	{
+		return $this->_attributes?$this->_attributes->itemAt($name):null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string attribute name
+	 * @param string value of the attribute
+	 */
+	public function setAttribute($name,$value)
+	{
+		$this->getAttributes()->add($name,$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Removes the named attribute.
+	 * @param string the name of the attribute to be removed.
+	 * @return string attribute value removed, empty string if attribute does not exist.
+	 */
+	public function removeAttribute($name)
+	{
+		return $this->_attributes?$this->_attributes->remove($name):null;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteral.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteral.php
index 423e2d8e..e98d56bb 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteral.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteral.php
@@ -1,112 +1,112 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TLiteral class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TLiteral class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TLiteral class
- *
- * TLiteral displays a static text on the Web page.
- * TLiteral is similar to the TLabel control, except that the TLiteral
- * control does not have style properties (e.g. BackColor, Font, etc.)
- * You can programmatically control the text displayed in the control by setting
- * the {@link setText Text} property. The text displayed may be HTML-encoded
- * if the {@link setEncode Encode} property is set true (defaults to false).
- *
- * TLiteral will render the contents enclosed within its component tag
- * if {@link setText Text} is empty.
- *
- * Note, if {@link setEncode Encode} is false, make sure {@link setText Text}
- * does not contain unwanted characters that may bring security vulnerabilities.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TLiteral extends TControl implements IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string the static text of the TLiteral
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the static text of the TLiteral
-	 * @param string the text to be set
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the static text of the TLiteral.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
-	 * @return string the static text of the TLiteral
-	 * @see getText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the static text of the TLiteral.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
-	 * @param string the static text of the TLiteral
-	 * @see setText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getEncode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Encode',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean  whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded.
-	 */
-	public function setEncode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Encode',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the literal control.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-		{
-			if($this->getEncode())
-				$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text));
-			else
-				$writer->write($text);
-		}
-		else
-			parent::render($writer);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TLiteral class
+ *
+ * TLiteral displays a static text on the Web page.
+ * TLiteral is similar to the TLabel control, except that the TLiteral
+ * control does not have style properties (e.g. BackColor, Font, etc.)
+ * You can programmatically control the text displayed in the control by setting
+ * the {@link setText Text} property. The text displayed may be HTML-encoded
+ * if the {@link setEncode Encode} property is set true (defaults to false).
+ *
+ * TLiteral will render the contents enclosed within its component tag
+ * if {@link setText Text} is empty.
+ *
+ * Note, if {@link setEncode Encode} is false, make sure {@link setText Text}
+ * does not contain unwanted characters that may bring security vulnerabilities.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TLiteral extends TControl implements IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string the static text of the TLiteral
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the static text of the TLiteral
+	 * @param string the text to be set
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the static text of the TLiteral.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
+	 * @return string the static text of the TLiteral
+	 * @see getText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the static text of the TLiteral.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
+	 * @param string the static text of the TLiteral
+	 * @see setText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getEncode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Encode',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean  whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded.
+	 */
+	public function setEncode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Encode',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the literal control.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+		{
+			if($this->getEncode())
+				$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text));
+			else
+				$writer->write($text);
+		}
+		else
+			parent::render($writer);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteralColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteralColumn.php
index 5b1353fc..48cbe013 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteralColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TLiteralColumn.php
@@ -1,154 +1,154 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TLiteralColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TLiteralColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id: TLiteralColumn.php 1397 2006-09-07 07:55:53Z wei $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-
-/**
- * TLiteralColumn class
- *
- * TLiteralColumn represents a static text column that is bound to a field in a data source.
- * The cells in the column will be displayed with static texts using the data indexed by
- * {@link setDataField DataField}. You can customize the display by
- * setting {@link setDataFormatString DataFormatString}.
- *
- * If {@link setDataField DataField} is not specified, the cells will be filled
- * with {@link setText Text}.
- *
- * If {@link setEncode Encode} is true, the static texts will be HTML-encoded.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id: TLiteralColumn.php 1397 2006-09-07 07:55:53Z wei $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.5
- */
-class TLiteralColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
-	 */
-	public function getDataField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
-	 */
-	public function setDataField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function getDataFormatString()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataFormatString','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
-	 */
-	public function setDataFormatString($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataFormatString',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string static text to be displayed in the column. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string static text to be displayed in the column.
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getEncode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Encode',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean  whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded.
-	 */
-	public function setEncode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Encode',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem)
-		{
-			if($this->getDataField()!=='')
-				$cell->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-			else
-			{
-				if(($dataField=$this->getDataField())!=='')
-					$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-				else
-				{
-					$text=$this->getText();
-					if($this->getEncode())
-						$text=THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text);
-					$cell->setText($text);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		else
-			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
-	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
-	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
-	 */
-	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
-		$data=$item->getData();
-		$formatString=$this->getDataFormatString();
-		if(($field=$this->getDataField())!=='')
-			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field));
-		else
-			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$data);
-		if($sender instanceof TTableCell)
-		{
-			if($this->getEncode())
-				$value=THttpUtility::htmlEncode($value);
-			$sender->setText($value);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id: TLiteralColumn.php 1397 2006-09-07 07:55:53Z wei $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+
+/**
+ * TLiteralColumn class
+ *
+ * TLiteralColumn represents a static text column that is bound to a field in a data source.
+ * The cells in the column will be displayed with static texts using the data indexed by
+ * {@link setDataField DataField}. You can customize the display by
+ * setting {@link setDataFormatString DataFormatString}.
+ *
+ * If {@link setDataField DataField} is not specified, the cells will be filled
+ * with {@link setText Text}.
+ *
+ * If {@link setEncode Encode} is true, the static texts will be HTML-encoded.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id: TLiteralColumn.php 1397 2006-09-07 07:55:53Z wei $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.5
+ */
+class TLiteralColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
+	 */
+	public function getDataField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field name from the data source to bind to the column
+	 */
+	public function setDataField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function getDataFormatString()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataFormatString','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the formatting string used to control how the bound data will be displayed.
+	 */
+	public function setDataFormatString($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataFormatString',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string static text to be displayed in the column. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string static text to be displayed in the column.
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getEncode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Encode',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean  whether the rendered text should be HTML-encoded.
+	 */
+	public function setEncode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Encode',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem)
+		{
+			if($this->getDataField()!=='')
+				$cell->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+			else
+			{
+				if(($dataField=$this->getDataField())!=='')
+					$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+				else
+				{
+					$text=$this->getText();
+					if($this->getEncode())
+						$text=THttpUtility::htmlEncode($text);
+					$cell->setText($text);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		else
+			parent::initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
+	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
+	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
+	 */
+	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
+		$data=$item->getData();
+		$formatString=$this->getDataFormatString();
+		if(($field=$this->getDataField())!=='')
+			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$this->getDataFieldValue($data,$field));
+		else
+			$value=$this->formatDataValue($formatString,$data);
+		if($sender instanceof TTableCell)
+		{
+			if($this->getEncode())
+				$value=THttpUtility::htmlEncode($value);
+			$sender->setText($value);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMarkdown.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMarkdown.php
index 3aa1c9be..726a1ebe 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMarkdown.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMarkdown.php
@@ -1,75 +1,75 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TMarkdown class file
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TMarkdown class file
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TTextHighlighter and MarkdownParser classes
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTextHighlighter');
-Prado::using('System.3rdParty.Markdown.MarkdownParser');
-
-/**
- * TMarkdown class
- *
- * TMarkdown is a control that produces HTML from code with markdown syntax.
- *
- * Markdown is a text-to-HTML conversion tool for web writers. Markdown allows
- * you to write using an easy-to-read, easy-to-write plain text format, then
- * convert it to structurally valid XHTML (or HTML).
- * Further documentation regarding Markdown can be found at
- * http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/
- *
- * To use TMarkdown, simply enclose the content to be rendered within
- * the body of TMarkdown in a template.
- *
- * See http://www.pradosoft.com/demos/quickstart/?page=Markdown for
- * details on the Markdown syntax usage.
- *
- * TMarkdown also performs syntax highlighting for code blocks whose language
- * is recognized by {@link TTextHighlighter}.
- * The language of a code block must be specified in the first line of the block
- * and enclosed within a pair of square brackets (e.g. [php]).
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.1
- */
-class TMarkdown extends TTextHighlighter
-{
-	/**
-	 * Processes a text string.
-	 * This method is required by the parent class.
-	 * @param string text string to be processed
-	 * @return string the processed text result
-	 */
-	public function processText($text)
-	{
-		$renderer = new MarkdownParser;
-		$result = $renderer->parse($text);
-		return preg_replace_callback(
-				'/<pre><code>\[\s*(\w+)\s*\]\n+((.|\n)*?)\s*<\\/code><\\/pre>/im',
-				array($this, 'highlightCode'), $result);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Highlights source code using TTextHighlighter
-	 * @param array matches of code blocks
-	 * @return string highlighted code.
-	 */
-	protected function highlightCode($matches)
-	{
-		$text = html_entity_decode($matches[2],ENT_QUOTES,'UTF-8');
-		$this->setLanguage($matches[1]);
-		return parent::processText($text);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TTextHighlighter and MarkdownParser classes
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTextHighlighter');
+Prado::using('System.3rdParty.Markdown.MarkdownParser');
+
+/**
+ * TMarkdown class
+ *
+ * TMarkdown is a control that produces HTML from code with markdown syntax.
+ *
+ * Markdown is a text-to-HTML conversion tool for web writers. Markdown allows
+ * you to write using an easy-to-read, easy-to-write plain text format, then
+ * convert it to structurally valid XHTML (or HTML).
+ * Further documentation regarding Markdown can be found at
+ * http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/
+ *
+ * To use TMarkdown, simply enclose the content to be rendered within
+ * the body of TMarkdown in a template.
+ *
+ * See http://www.pradosoft.com/demos/quickstart/?page=Markdown for
+ * details on the Markdown syntax usage.
+ *
+ * TMarkdown also performs syntax highlighting for code blocks whose language
+ * is recognized by {@link TTextHighlighter}.
+ * The language of a code block must be specified in the first line of the block
+ * and enclosed within a pair of square brackets (e.g. [php]).
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.1
+ */
+class TMarkdown extends TTextHighlighter
+{
+	/**
+	 * Processes a text string.
+	 * This method is required by the parent class.
+	 * @param string text string to be processed
+	 * @return string the processed text result
+	 */
+	public function processText($text)
+	{
+		$renderer = new MarkdownParser;
+		$result = $renderer->parse($text);
+		return preg_replace_callback(
+				'/<pre><code>\[\s*(\w+)\s*\]\n+((.|\n)*?)\s*<\\/code><\\/pre>/im',
+				array($this, 'highlightCode'), $result);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Highlights source code using TTextHighlighter
+	 * @param array matches of code blocks
+	 * @return string highlighted code.
+	 */
+	protected function highlightCode($matches)
+	{
+		$text = html_entity_decode($matches[2],ENT_QUOTES,'UTF-8');
+		$this->setLanguage($matches[1]);
+		return parent::processText($text);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMultiView.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMultiView.php
index 81d404b2..0c40cd06 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMultiView.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TMultiView.php
@@ -1,378 +1,378 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TMultiView and TView class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TMultiView class
- *
- * TMultiView serves as a container for a group of {@link TView} controls.
- * The view collection can be retrieved by {@link getViews Views}.
- * Each view contains child controls. TMultiView determines which view and its
- * child controls are visible. At any time, at most one view is visible (called
- * active). To make a view active, set {@link setActiveView ActiveView} or
- * {@link setActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex}.
- *
- * TMultiView also responds to specific command events raised from button controls
- * contained in current active view. A command event with name 'NextView'
- * will cause TMultiView to make the next available view active.
- * Other command names recognized by TMultiView include
- * - PreviousView : switch to previous view
- * - SwitchViewID : switch to a view by its ID path
- * - SwitchViewIndex : switch to a view by its index in the {@link getViews Views} collection.
- *
- * TMultiView raises {@link OnActiveViewChanged OnActiveViewChanged} event
- * when its active view is changed during a postback.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TMultiView extends TControl
-{
-	const CMD_NEXTVIEW='NextView';
-	const CMD_PREVIOUSVIEW='PreviousView';
-	const CMD_SWITCHVIEWID='SwitchViewID';
-	const CMD_SWITCHVIEWINDEX='SwitchViewIndex';
-	private $_cachedActiveViewIndex=-1;
-	private $_ignoreBubbleEvents=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by adding only {@link TView}
-	 * controls as children.
-	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
-	 * @see createdOnTemplate
-	 * @throws TConfigurationException if controls other than {@link TView} is being added
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof TView)
-			$this->getControls()->add($object);
-		else if(!is_string($object))
-			throw new TConfigurationException('multiview_view_required');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
-	 * @return TViewCollection control collection
-	 */
-	protected function createControlCollection()
-	{
-		return new TViewCollection($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the current view in the view collection. -1 if no active view. Default is -1.
-	 */
-	public function getActiveViewIndex()
-	{
-		if($this->_cachedActiveViewIndex>-1)
-			return $this->_cachedActiveViewIndex;
-		else
-			return $this->getControlState('ActiveViewIndex',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current view in the view collection. -1 if no active view.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the view index is invalid
-	 */
-	public function setActiveViewIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			$index=-1;
-		$views=$this->getViews();
-		$count=$views->getCount();
-		if($count===0 && $this->getControlStage()<TControl::CS_CHILD_INITIALIZED)
-			$this->_cachedActiveViewIndex=$index;
-		else if($index<$count)
-		{
-			$this->setControlState('ActiveViewIndex',$index,-1);
-			$this->_cachedActiveViewIndex=-1;
-			if($index>=0)
-				$this->activateView($views->itemAt($index),true);
-		}
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('multiview_activeviewindex_invalid',$index);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TView the currently active view, null if no active view
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the current active view index is invalid
-	 */
-	public function getActiveView()
-	{
-		$index=$this->getActiveViewIndex();
-		$views=$this->getViews();
-		if($index>=$views->getCount())
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('multiview_activeviewindex_invalid',$index);
-		if($index<0)
-			return null;
-		$view=$views->itemAt($index);
-		if(!$view->getActive())
-			$this->activateView($view,false);
-		return $view;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TView the view to be activated
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if the view is not in the view collection
-	 */
-	public function setActiveView($view)
-	{
-		if(($index=$this->getViews()->indexOf($view))>=0)
-			$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidOperationException('multiview_view_inexistent');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Activates the specified view.
-	 * If there is any view currently active, it will be deactivated.
-	 * @param TView the view to be activated
-	 * @param boolean whether to trigger OnActiveViewChanged event.
-	 */
-	protected function activateView($view,$triggerViewChangedEvent=true)
-	{
-		if($view->getActive())
-			return;
-		$triggerEvent=$triggerViewChangedEvent && ($this->getControlStage()>=TControl::CS_STATE_LOADED || ($this->getPage() && !$this->getPage()->getIsPostBack()));
-		foreach($this->getViews() as $v)
-		{
-			if($v===$view)
-			{
-				$view->setActive(true);
-				if($triggerEvent)
-				{
-					$view->onActivate(null);
-					$this->onActiveViewChanged(null);
-				}
-			}
-			else if($v->getActive())
-			{
-				$v->setActive(false);
-				if($triggerEvent)
-					$v->onDeactivate(null);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TViewCollection the view collection
-	 */
-	public function getViews()
-	{
-		return $this->getControls();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Makes the multiview ignore all bubbled events.
-	 * This is method is used internally by framework and control
-	 * developers.
-	 */
-	public function ignoreBubbleEvents()
-	{
-		$this->_ignoreBubbleEvents=true;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the active view if any.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onInit($param)
-	{
-		parent::onInit($param);
-		if($this->_cachedActiveViewIndex>=0)
-			$this->setActiveViewIndex($this->_cachedActiveViewIndex);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnActiveViewChanged</b> event.
-	 * The event is raised when the currently active view is changed to a new one
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onActiveViewChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnActiveViewChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Processes the events bubbled from child controls.
-	 * The method handles view-related command events.
-	 * @param TControl sender of the event
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether this event is handled
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if(!$this->_ignoreBubbleEvents && ($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter))
-		{
-			switch($param->getCommandName())
-			{
-				case self::CMD_NEXTVIEW:
-					if(($index=$this->getActiveViewIndex())<$this->getViews()->getCount()-1)
-						$this->setActiveViewIndex($index+1);
-					else
-						$this->setActiveViewIndex(-1);
-					return true;
-				case self::CMD_PREVIOUSVIEW:
-					if(($index=$this->getActiveViewIndex())>=0)
-						$this->setActiveViewIndex($index-1);
-					return true;
-				case self::CMD_SWITCHVIEWID:
-					$view=$this->findControl($viewID=$param->getCommandParameter());
-					if($view!==null && $view->getParent()===$this)
-					{
-						$this->setActiveView($view);
-						return true;
-					}
-					else
-						throw new TInvalidDataValueException('multiview_viewid_invalid', $viewID);
-				case self::CMD_SWITCHVIEWINDEX:
-					$index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param->getCommandParameter());
-					$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
-					return true;
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads state into the wizard.
-	 * This method is invoked by the framework when the control state is being saved.
-	 */
-	public function loadState()
-	{
-		// a dummy call to ensure the view is activated
-		$this->getActiveView();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the currently active view.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if(($view=$this->getActiveView())!==null)
-			$view->renderControl($writer);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TViewCollection class.
- * TViewCollection represents a collection that only takes {@link TView} instances
- * as collection elements.
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TViewCollection extends TControlCollection
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by ensuring only {@link TView}
-	 * controls be added into the collection.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is neither a string nor a TControl.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TView)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('viewcollection_view_required');
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TView class
- *
- * TView is a container for a group of controls. TView must be contained
- * within a {@link TMultiView} control in which only one view can be active
- * at one time.
- *
- * To activate a view, set {@link setActive Active} to true.
- * When a view is activated, it raises {@link onActivate OnActivate} event;
- * and when a view is deactivated, it raises {@link onDeactivate OnDeactivate}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TView extends TControl
-{
-	private $_active=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnActivate</b> event.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onActivate($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnActivate',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnDeactivate</b> event.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onDeactivate($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnDeactivate',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether this view is active. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getActive()
-	{
-		return $this->_active;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether this view is active.
-	 */
-	public function setActive($value)
-	{
-		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-		$this->_active=$value;
-		parent::setVisible($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the parents should also be checked if visible
-	 * @return boolean whether this view is visible.
-	 * The view is visible if it is active and its parent is visible.
-	 */
-	public function getVisible($checkParents=true)
-	{
-		if(($parent=$this->getParent())===null)
-			return $this->getActive();
-		else if($this->getActive())
-			return $parent->getVisible($checkParents);
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException whenever this method is invoked.
-	 */
-	public function setVisible($value)
-	{
-		throw new TInvalidOperationException('view_visible_readonly');
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TMultiView and TView class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TMultiView class
+ *
+ * TMultiView serves as a container for a group of {@link TView} controls.
+ * The view collection can be retrieved by {@link getViews Views}.
+ * Each view contains child controls. TMultiView determines which view and its
+ * child controls are visible. At any time, at most one view is visible (called
+ * active). To make a view active, set {@link setActiveView ActiveView} or
+ * {@link setActiveViewIndex ActiveViewIndex}.
+ *
+ * TMultiView also responds to specific command events raised from button controls
+ * contained in current active view. A command event with name 'NextView'
+ * will cause TMultiView to make the next available view active.
+ * Other command names recognized by TMultiView include
+ * - PreviousView : switch to previous view
+ * - SwitchViewID : switch to a view by its ID path
+ * - SwitchViewIndex : switch to a view by its index in the {@link getViews Views} collection.
+ *
+ * TMultiView raises {@link OnActiveViewChanged OnActiveViewChanged} event
+ * when its active view is changed during a postback.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TMultiView extends TControl
+{
+	const CMD_NEXTVIEW='NextView';
+	const CMD_PREVIOUSVIEW='PreviousView';
+	const CMD_SWITCHVIEWID='SwitchViewID';
+	const CMD_SWITCHVIEWINDEX='SwitchViewIndex';
+	private $_cachedActiveViewIndex=-1;
+	private $_ignoreBubbleEvents=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * Processes an object that is created during parsing template.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by adding only {@link TView}
+	 * controls as children.
+	 * @param string|TComponent text string or component parsed and instantiated in template
+	 * @see createdOnTemplate
+	 * @throws TConfigurationException if controls other than {@link TView} is being added
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof TView)
+			$this->getControls()->add($object);
+		else if(!is_string($object))
+			throw new TConfigurationException('multiview_view_required');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
+	 * @return TViewCollection control collection
+	 */
+	protected function createControlCollection()
+	{
+		return new TViewCollection($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the current view in the view collection. -1 if no active view. Default is -1.
+	 */
+	public function getActiveViewIndex()
+	{
+		if($this->_cachedActiveViewIndex>-1)
+			return $this->_cachedActiveViewIndex;
+		else
+			return $this->getControlState('ActiveViewIndex',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current view in the view collection. -1 if no active view.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the view index is invalid
+	 */
+	public function setActiveViewIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			$index=-1;
+		$views=$this->getViews();
+		$count=$views->getCount();
+		if($count===0 && $this->getControlStage()<TControl::CS_CHILD_INITIALIZED)
+			$this->_cachedActiveViewIndex=$index;
+		else if($index<$count)
+		{
+			$this->setControlState('ActiveViewIndex',$index,-1);
+			$this->_cachedActiveViewIndex=-1;
+			if($index>=0)
+				$this->activateView($views->itemAt($index),true);
+		}
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('multiview_activeviewindex_invalid',$index);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TView the currently active view, null if no active view
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the current active view index is invalid
+	 */
+	public function getActiveView()
+	{
+		$index=$this->getActiveViewIndex();
+		$views=$this->getViews();
+		if($index>=$views->getCount())
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('multiview_activeviewindex_invalid',$index);
+		if($index<0)
+			return null;
+		$view=$views->itemAt($index);
+		if(!$view->getActive())
+			$this->activateView($view,false);
+		return $view;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TView the view to be activated
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if the view is not in the view collection
+	 */
+	public function setActiveView($view)
+	{
+		if(($index=$this->getViews()->indexOf($view))>=0)
+			$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidOperationException('multiview_view_inexistent');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Activates the specified view.
+	 * If there is any view currently active, it will be deactivated.
+	 * @param TView the view to be activated
+	 * @param boolean whether to trigger OnActiveViewChanged event.
+	 */
+	protected function activateView($view,$triggerViewChangedEvent=true)
+	{
+		if($view->getActive())
+			return;
+		$triggerEvent=$triggerViewChangedEvent && ($this->getControlStage()>=TControl::CS_STATE_LOADED || ($this->getPage() && !$this->getPage()->getIsPostBack()));
+		foreach($this->getViews() as $v)
+		{
+			if($v===$view)
+			{
+				$view->setActive(true);
+				if($triggerEvent)
+				{
+					$view->onActivate(null);
+					$this->onActiveViewChanged(null);
+				}
+			}
+			else if($v->getActive())
+			{
+				$v->setActive(false);
+				if($triggerEvent)
+					$v->onDeactivate(null);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TViewCollection the view collection
+	 */
+	public function getViews()
+	{
+		return $this->getControls();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Makes the multiview ignore all bubbled events.
+	 * This is method is used internally by framework and control
+	 * developers.
+	 */
+	public function ignoreBubbleEvents()
+	{
+		$this->_ignoreBubbleEvents=true;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the active view if any.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onInit($param)
+	{
+		parent::onInit($param);
+		if($this->_cachedActiveViewIndex>=0)
+			$this->setActiveViewIndex($this->_cachedActiveViewIndex);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnActiveViewChanged</b> event.
+	 * The event is raised when the currently active view is changed to a new one
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onActiveViewChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnActiveViewChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Processes the events bubbled from child controls.
+	 * The method handles view-related command events.
+	 * @param TControl sender of the event
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether this event is handled
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if(!$this->_ignoreBubbleEvents && ($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter))
+		{
+			switch($param->getCommandName())
+			{
+				case self::CMD_NEXTVIEW:
+					if(($index=$this->getActiveViewIndex())<$this->getViews()->getCount()-1)
+						$this->setActiveViewIndex($index+1);
+					else
+						$this->setActiveViewIndex(-1);
+					return true;
+				case self::CMD_PREVIOUSVIEW:
+					if(($index=$this->getActiveViewIndex())>=0)
+						$this->setActiveViewIndex($index-1);
+					return true;
+				case self::CMD_SWITCHVIEWID:
+					$view=$this->findControl($viewID=$param->getCommandParameter());
+					if($view!==null && $view->getParent()===$this)
+					{
+						$this->setActiveView($view);
+						return true;
+					}
+					else
+						throw new TInvalidDataValueException('multiview_viewid_invalid', $viewID);
+				case self::CMD_SWITCHVIEWINDEX:
+					$index=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param->getCommandParameter());
+					$this->setActiveViewIndex($index);
+					return true;
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads state into the wizard.
+	 * This method is invoked by the framework when the control state is being saved.
+	 */
+	public function loadState()
+	{
+		// a dummy call to ensure the view is activated
+		$this->getActiveView();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the currently active view.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if(($view=$this->getActiveView())!==null)
+			$view->renderControl($writer);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TViewCollection class.
+ * TViewCollection represents a collection that only takes {@link TView} instances
+ * as collection elements.
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TViewCollection extends TControlCollection
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by ensuring only {@link TView}
+	 * controls be added into the collection.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is neither a string nor a TControl.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TView)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('viewcollection_view_required');
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TView class
+ *
+ * TView is a container for a group of controls. TView must be contained
+ * within a {@link TMultiView} control in which only one view can be active
+ * at one time.
+ *
+ * To activate a view, set {@link setActive Active} to true.
+ * When a view is activated, it raises {@link onActivate OnActivate} event;
+ * and when a view is deactivated, it raises {@link onDeactivate OnDeactivate}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TView extends TControl
+{
+	private $_active=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnActivate</b> event.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onActivate($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnActivate',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnDeactivate</b> event.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onDeactivate($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnDeactivate',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether this view is active. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getActive()
+	{
+		return $this->_active;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether this view is active.
+	 */
+	public function setActive($value)
+	{
+		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+		$this->_active=$value;
+		parent::setVisible($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the parents should also be checked if visible
+	 * @return boolean whether this view is visible.
+	 * The view is visible if it is active and its parent is visible.
+	 */
+	public function getVisible($checkParents=true)
+	{
+		if(($parent=$this->getParent())===null)
+			return $this->getActive();
+		else if($this->getActive())
+			return $parent->getVisible($checkParents);
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException whenever this method is invoked.
+	 */
+	public function setVisible($value)
+	{
+		throw new TInvalidOperationException('view_visible_readonly');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TOutputCache.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TOutputCache.php
index 64e4ff42..cc79e76f 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TOutputCache.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TOutputCache.php
@@ -1,621 +1,621 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TOutputCache class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TOutputCache class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TOutputCache class.
- *
- * TOutputCache enables caching a portion of a Web page, also known as
- * partial caching. The content being cached can be either static or
- * dynamic.
- *
- * To use TOutputCache, simply enclose the content to be cached
- * within the TOutputCache component tag on a template, e.g.,
- * <code>
- * <com:TOutputCache>
- *   content to be cached
- * </com:TOutputCache>
- * </code>
- * where content to be cached can be static text and/or component tags.
- *
- * The validity of the cached content is determined based on two factors:
- * the {@link setDuration Duration} and the cache dependency.
- * The former specifies the number of seconds that the data can remain
- * valid in cache (defaults to 60s), while the latter specifies conditions
- * that the cached data depends on. If a dependency changes,
- * (e.g. relevant data in DB are updated), the cached data will be invalidated.
- *
- * There are two ways to specify cache dependency. One may write event handlers
- * to respond to the {@link onCheckDependency OnCheckDependency} event and set
- * the event parameter's {@link TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter::getIsValid IsValid}
- * property to indicate whether the cached data remains valid or not.
- * One can also extend TOutputCache and override its {@link getCacheDependency}
- * function. While the former is easier to use, the latter offers more extensibility.
- *
- * The content fetched from cache may be variated with respect to
- * some parameters. It supports variation with respect to request parameters,
- * which is specified by {@link setVaryByParam VaryByParam} property.
- * If a specified request parameter is different, a different version of
- * cached content is used. This is extremely useful if a page's content
- * may be variated according to some GET parameters.
- * The content being cached may also be variated with user sessions if
- * {@link setVaryBySession VaryBySession} is set true.
- * To variate the cached content by other factors, override {@link calculateCacheKey()} method.
- *
- * Output caches can be nested. An outer cache takes precedence over an
- * inner cache. This means, if the content cached by the inner cache expires
- * or is invalidated, while that by the outer cache not, the outer cached
- * content will be used.
- *
- * Note, TOutputCache is effective only for non-postback page requests
- * and when cache module is enabled.
- *
- * Do not attempt to address child controls of TOutputCache when the cached
- * content is to be used. Use {@link getContentCached ContentCached} property
- * to determine whether the content is cached or not.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1
- */
-class TOutputCache extends TControl implements INamingContainer
-{
-	const CACHE_ID_PREFIX='prado:outputcache';
-	private $_cacheModuleID='';
-	private $_dataCached=false;
-	private $_cacheAvailable=false;
-	private $_cacheChecked=false;
-	private $_cacheKey=null;
-	private $_duration=60;
-	private $_cache=null;
-	private $_contents;
-	private $_state;
-	private $_actions=array();
-	private $_varyByParam='';
-	private $_keyPrefix='';
-	private $_varyBySession=false;
-	private $_cachePostBack=false;
-	private $_cacheTime=0;
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether body contents are allowed for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by checking if cached
-	 * content is available or not. If yes, it returns false, otherwise true.
-	 * @param boolean whether body contents are allowed for this control.
-	 */
-	public function getAllowChildControls()
-	{
-		$this->determineCacheability();
-		return !$this->_dataCached;
-	}
-
-	private function determineCacheability()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_cacheChecked)
-		{
-			$this->_cacheChecked=true;
-			if($this->_duration>0 && ($this->_cachePostBack || !$this->getPage()->getIsPostBack()))
-			{
-				if($this->_cacheModuleID!=='')
-				{
-					$this->_cache=$this->getApplication()->getModule($this->_cacheModuleID);
-					if(!($this->_cache instanceof ICache))
-						throw new TConfigurationException('outputcache_cachemoduleid_invalid',$this->_cacheModuleID);
-				}
-				else
-					$this->_cache=$this->getApplication()->getCache();
-				if($this->_cache!==null)
-				{
-					$this->_cacheAvailable=true;
-					$data=$this->_cache->get($this->getCacheKey());
-					if(is_array($data))
-					{
-						$param=new TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter;
-						$param->setCacheTime(isset($data[3])?$data[3]:0);
-						$this->onCheckDependency($param);
-						$this->_dataCached=$param->getIsValid();
-					}
-					else
-						$this->_dataCached=false;
-					if($this->_dataCached)
-						list($this->_contents,$this->_state,$this->_actions,$this->_cacheTime)=$data;
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs the Init step for the control and all its child controls.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by setting up
-	 * the stack of the output cache in the page.
-	 * Only framework developers should use this method.
-	 * @param TControl the naming container control
-	 */
-	protected function initRecursive($namingContainer=null)
-	{
-		if($this->_cacheAvailable && !$this->_dataCached)
-		{
-			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
-			$stack->push($this);
-			parent::initRecursive($namingContainer);
-			$stack->pop();
-		}
-		else
-			parent::initRecursive($namingContainer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs the Load step for the control and all its child controls.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by setting up
-	 * the stack of the output cache in the page. If the data is restored
-	 * from cache, it also recovers the actions associated with the cached data.
-	 * Only framework developers should use this method.
-	 * @param TControl the naming container control
-	 */
-	protected function loadRecursive()
-	{
-		if($this->_cacheAvailable && !$this->_dataCached)
-		{
-			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
-			$stack->push($this);
-			parent::loadRecursive();
-			$stack->pop();
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if($this->_dataCached)
-				$this->performActions();
-			parent::loadRecursive();
-		}
-	}
-
-	private function performActions()
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$cs=$page->getClientScript();
-		foreach($this->_actions as $action)
-		{
-			if($action[0]==='Page.ClientScript')
-				call_user_func_array(array($cs,$action[1]),$action[2]);
-			else if($action[0]==='Page')
-				call_user_func_array(array($page,$action[1]),$action[2]);
-			else
-				call_user_func_array(array($this->getSubProperty($action[0]),$action[1]),$action[2]);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs the PreRender step for the control and all its child controls.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by setting up
-	 * the stack of the output cache in the page.
-	 * Only framework developers should use this method.
-	 * @param TControl the naming container control
-	 */
-	protected function preRenderRecursive()
-	{
-		if($this->_cacheAvailable && !$this->_dataCached)
-		{
-			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
-			$stack->push($this);
-			parent::preRenderRecursive();
-			$stack->pop();
-		}
-		else
-			parent::preRenderRecursive();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads state (viewstate and controlstate) into a control and its children.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by loading
-	 * cached state if available.
-	 * This method should only be used by framework developers.
-	 * @param array the collection of the state
-	 * @param boolean whether the viewstate should be loaded
-	 */
-	protected function loadStateRecursive(&$state,$needViewState=true)
-	{
-		$st=unserialize($state);
-		parent::loadStateRecursive($st,$needViewState);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves all control state (viewstate and controlstate) as a collection.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by saving state
-	 * into cache if needed.
-	 * This method should only be used by framework developers.
-	 * @param boolean whether the viewstate should be saved
-	 * @return array the collection of the control state (including its children's state).
-	 */
-	protected function &saveStateRecursive($needViewState=true)
-	{
-		if($this->_dataCached)
-			return $this->_state;
-		else
-		{
-			$st=parent::saveStateRecursive($needViewState);
-			// serialization is needed to avoid undefined classes when loading state
-			$this->_state=serialize($st);
-			return $this->_state;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers an action associated with the content being cached.
-	 * The registered action will be replayed if the content stored
-	 * in the cache is served to end-users.
-	 * @param string context of the action method. This is a property-path
-	 * referring to the context object (e.g. Page, Page.ClientScript)
-	 * @param string method name of the context object
-	 * @param array list of parameters to be passed to the action method
-	 */
-	public function registerAction($context,$funcName,$funcParams)
-	{
-		$this->_actions[]=array($context,$funcName,$funcParams);
-	}
-
-	public function getCacheKey()
-	{
-		if($this->_cacheKey===null)
-			$this->_cacheKey=$this->calculateCacheKey();
-		return $this->_cacheKey;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Calculates the cache key.
-	 * The key is calculated based on the unique ID of this control
-	 * and the request parameters specified via {@link setVaryByParam VaryByParam}.
-	 * If {@link getVaryBySession VaryBySession} is true, the session ID
-	 * will also participate in the key calculation.
-	 * This method may be overriden to support other variations in
-	 * the calculated cache key.
-	 * @return string cache key
-	 */
-	protected function calculateCacheKey()
-	{
-		$key=$this->getBaseCacheKey();
-		if($this->_varyBySession)
-			$key.=$this->getSession()->getSessionID();
-		if($this->_varyByParam!=='')
-		{
-			$params=array();
-			$request=$this->getRequest();
-			foreach(explode(',',$this->_varyByParam) as $name)
-			{
-				$name=trim($name);
-				$params[$name]=$request->itemAt($name);
-			}
-			$key.=serialize($params);
-		}
-		$param=new TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter;
-		$this->onCalculateKey($param);
-		$key.=$param->getCacheKey();
-		return $key;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string basic cache key without variations
-	 */
-	protected function getBaseCacheKey()
-	{
-		return self::CACHE_ID_PREFIX.$this->_keyPrefix.$this->getPage()->getPagePath().$this->getUniqueID();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the ID of the cache module. Defaults to '', meaning the primary cache module is used.
-	 */
-	public function getCacheModuleID()
-	{
-		return $this->_cacheModuleID;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the ID of the cache module. If empty, the primary cache module will be used.
-	 */
-	public function setCacheModuleID($value)
-	{
-		$this->_cacheModuleID=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the prefix of the cache key.
-	 * This method is used internally by {@link TTemplate}.
-	 * @param string key prefix
-	 */
-	public function setCacheKeyPrefix($value)
-	{
-		$this->_keyPrefix=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the timestamp of the cached content. This is only valid if the content is being cached.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getCacheTime()
-	{
-		return $this->_cacheTime;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the dependency of the data to be cached.
-	 * The default implementation simply returns null, meaning no specific dependency.
-	 * This method may be overriden to associate the data to be cached
-	 * with additional dependencies.
-	 * @return ICacheDependency
-	 */
-	protected function getCacheDependency()
-	{
-		return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether content enclosed is cached or not
-	 */
-	public function getContentCached()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataCached;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer number of seconds that the data can remain in cache. Defaults to 60 seconds.
-	 * Note, if cache dependency changes or cache space is limited,
-	 * the data may be purged out of cache earlier.
-	 */
-	public function getDuration()
-	{
-		return $this->_duration;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer number of seconds that the data can remain in cache. If 0, it means data is not cached.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is smaller than 0.
-	 */
-	public function setDuration($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('outputcache_duration_invalid',get_class($this));
-		$this->_duration=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string a semicolon-separated list of strings used to vary the output cache. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getVaryByParam()
-	{
-		return $this->_varyByParam;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the names of the request parameters that should be used in calculating the cache key.
-	 * The names should be concatenated by semicolons.
-	 * By setting this value, the output cache will use different cached data
-	 * for each different set of request parameter values.
-	 * @return string a semicolon-separated list of strings used to vary the output cache.
-	 */
-	public function setVaryByParam($value)
-	{
-		$this->_varyByParam=trim($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the content being cached should be differentiated according to user sessions. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getVaryBySession()
-	{
-		return $this->_varyBySession;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the content being cached should be differentiated according to user sessions.
-	 */
-	public function setVaryBySession($value)
-	{
-		$this->_varyBySession=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether cached output will be used on postback requests. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getCachingPostBack()
-	{
-		return $this->_cachePostBack;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a value indicating whether cached output will be used on postback requests.
-	 * By default, this is disabled. Be very cautious when enabling it.
-	 * If the cached content including interactive user controls such as
-	 * TTextBox, TDropDownList, your page may fail to render on postbacks.
-	 * @param boolean whether cached output will be used on postback requests.
-	 */
-	public function setCachingPostBack($value)
-	{
-		$this->_cachePostBack=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This event is raised when the output cache is checking cache dependency.
-	 * An event handler may be written to check customized dependency conditions.
-	 * The checking result should be saved by setting {@link TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter::setIsValid IsValid}
-	 * property of the event parameter (which defaults to true).
-	 * @param TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onCheckDependency($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCheckDependency',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This event is raised when the output cache is calculating cache key.
-	 * By varying cache keys, one can obtain different versions of cached content.
-	 * An event handler may be written to add variety of the key calculation.
-	 * The value set in {@link TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter::setCacheKey CacheKey} of
-	 * this event parameter will be appended to the default key calculation scheme.
-	 * @param TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onCalculateKey($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCalculateKey',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the output cache control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by capturing the output
-	 * from its child controls and saving it into cache, if output cache is needed.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_dataCached)
-			$writer->write($this->_contents);
-		else if($this->_cacheAvailable)
-		{
-			$textwriter = new TTextWriter();
-			$multiwriter = new TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti(array($writer->getWriter(),$textwriter));
-			$htmlWriter = Prado::createComponent($this->GetResponse()->getHtmlWriterType(), $multiwriter);
-			
-			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
-			$stack->push($this);
-			parent::render($htmlWriter);
-			$stack->pop();
-
-			$content=$textwriter->flush();
-			$data=array($content,$this->_state,$this->_actions,time());
-			$this->_cache->set($this->getCacheKey(),$data,$this->getDuration(),$this->getCacheDependency());
-		}
-		else
-			parent::render($writer);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter class
- *
- * TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * <b>OnCheckDependency</b> event of {@link TOutputCache} control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	private $_isValid=true;
-	private $_cacheTime=0;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the dependency remains valid. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getIsValid()
-	{
-		return $this->_isValid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the dependency remains valid
-	 */
-	public function setIsValid($value)
-	{
-		$this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the timestamp of the cached result. You may use this to help determine any dependency is changed.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getCacheTime()
-	{
-		return $this->_cacheTime;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the timestamp of the cached result. This is used internally.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setCacheTime($value)
-	{
-		$this->_cacheTime=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter class
- *
- * TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * <b>OnCalculateKey</b> event of {@link TOutputCache} control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string cache key to be appended to the default calculation scheme.
-	 */
-	private $_cacheKey='';
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string cache key to be appended to the default calculation scheme.
-	 */
-	public function getCacheKey()
-	{
-		return $this->_cacheKey;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string cache key to be appended to the default calculation scheme
-	 */
-	public function setCacheKey($value)
-	{
-		$this->_cacheKey=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti class
- *
- * TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti is an internal class used by
- * TOutputCache to write simultaneously to multiple writers.
- *
- * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.2
- */
-class TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti extends TTextWriter
-{
-	protected $_writers;
-
-	public function __construct(Array $writers)
-	{
-		//parent::__construct();
-		$this->_writers = $writers;
-	}
-	
-	public function write($s)
-	{
-		foreach($this->_writers as $writer)
-			$writer->write($s);
-	}
-
-	public function flush()
-	{
-		foreach($this->_writers as $writer)
-			$s = $writer->flush();
-		return $s;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TOutputCache class.
+ *
+ * TOutputCache enables caching a portion of a Web page, also known as
+ * partial caching. The content being cached can be either static or
+ * dynamic.
+ *
+ * To use TOutputCache, simply enclose the content to be cached
+ * within the TOutputCache component tag on a template, e.g.,
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TOutputCache>
+ *   content to be cached
+ * </com:TOutputCache>
+ * </code>
+ * where content to be cached can be static text and/or component tags.
+ *
+ * The validity of the cached content is determined based on two factors:
+ * the {@link setDuration Duration} and the cache dependency.
+ * The former specifies the number of seconds that the data can remain
+ * valid in cache (defaults to 60s), while the latter specifies conditions
+ * that the cached data depends on. If a dependency changes,
+ * (e.g. relevant data in DB are updated), the cached data will be invalidated.
+ *
+ * There are two ways to specify cache dependency. One may write event handlers
+ * to respond to the {@link onCheckDependency OnCheckDependency} event and set
+ * the event parameter's {@link TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter::getIsValid IsValid}
+ * property to indicate whether the cached data remains valid or not.
+ * One can also extend TOutputCache and override its {@link getCacheDependency}
+ * function. While the former is easier to use, the latter offers more extensibility.
+ *
+ * The content fetched from cache may be variated with respect to
+ * some parameters. It supports variation with respect to request parameters,
+ * which is specified by {@link setVaryByParam VaryByParam} property.
+ * If a specified request parameter is different, a different version of
+ * cached content is used. This is extremely useful if a page's content
+ * may be variated according to some GET parameters.
+ * The content being cached may also be variated with user sessions if
+ * {@link setVaryBySession VaryBySession} is set true.
+ * To variate the cached content by other factors, override {@link calculateCacheKey()} method.
+ *
+ * Output caches can be nested. An outer cache takes precedence over an
+ * inner cache. This means, if the content cached by the inner cache expires
+ * or is invalidated, while that by the outer cache not, the outer cached
+ * content will be used.
+ *
+ * Note, TOutputCache is effective only for non-postback page requests
+ * and when cache module is enabled.
+ *
+ * Do not attempt to address child controls of TOutputCache when the cached
+ * content is to be used. Use {@link getContentCached ContentCached} property
+ * to determine whether the content is cached or not.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1
+ */
+class TOutputCache extends TControl implements INamingContainer
+{
+	const CACHE_ID_PREFIX='prado:outputcache';
+	private $_cacheModuleID='';
+	private $_dataCached=false;
+	private $_cacheAvailable=false;
+	private $_cacheChecked=false;
+	private $_cacheKey=null;
+	private $_duration=60;
+	private $_cache=null;
+	private $_contents;
+	private $_state;
+	private $_actions=array();
+	private $_varyByParam='';
+	private $_keyPrefix='';
+	private $_varyBySession=false;
+	private $_cachePostBack=false;
+	private $_cacheTime=0;
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether body contents are allowed for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by checking if cached
+	 * content is available or not. If yes, it returns false, otherwise true.
+	 * @param boolean whether body contents are allowed for this control.
+	 */
+	public function getAllowChildControls()
+	{
+		$this->determineCacheability();
+		return !$this->_dataCached;
+	}
+
+	private function determineCacheability()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_cacheChecked)
+		{
+			$this->_cacheChecked=true;
+			if($this->_duration>0 && ($this->_cachePostBack || !$this->getPage()->getIsPostBack()))
+			{
+				if($this->_cacheModuleID!=='')
+				{
+					$this->_cache=$this->getApplication()->getModule($this->_cacheModuleID);
+					if(!($this->_cache instanceof ICache))
+						throw new TConfigurationException('outputcache_cachemoduleid_invalid',$this->_cacheModuleID);
+				}
+				else
+					$this->_cache=$this->getApplication()->getCache();
+				if($this->_cache!==null)
+				{
+					$this->_cacheAvailable=true;
+					$data=$this->_cache->get($this->getCacheKey());
+					if(is_array($data))
+					{
+						$param=new TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter;
+						$param->setCacheTime(isset($data[3])?$data[3]:0);
+						$this->onCheckDependency($param);
+						$this->_dataCached=$param->getIsValid();
+					}
+					else
+						$this->_dataCached=false;
+					if($this->_dataCached)
+						list($this->_contents,$this->_state,$this->_actions,$this->_cacheTime)=$data;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs the Init step for the control and all its child controls.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by setting up
+	 * the stack of the output cache in the page.
+	 * Only framework developers should use this method.
+	 * @param TControl the naming container control
+	 */
+	protected function initRecursive($namingContainer=null)
+	{
+		if($this->_cacheAvailable && !$this->_dataCached)
+		{
+			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
+			$stack->push($this);
+			parent::initRecursive($namingContainer);
+			$stack->pop();
+		}
+		else
+			parent::initRecursive($namingContainer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs the Load step for the control and all its child controls.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by setting up
+	 * the stack of the output cache in the page. If the data is restored
+	 * from cache, it also recovers the actions associated with the cached data.
+	 * Only framework developers should use this method.
+	 * @param TControl the naming container control
+	 */
+	protected function loadRecursive()
+	{
+		if($this->_cacheAvailable && !$this->_dataCached)
+		{
+			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
+			$stack->push($this);
+			parent::loadRecursive();
+			$stack->pop();
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if($this->_dataCached)
+				$this->performActions();
+			parent::loadRecursive();
+		}
+	}
+
+	private function performActions()
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$cs=$page->getClientScript();
+		foreach($this->_actions as $action)
+		{
+			if($action[0]==='Page.ClientScript')
+				call_user_func_array(array($cs,$action[1]),$action[2]);
+			else if($action[0]==='Page')
+				call_user_func_array(array($page,$action[1]),$action[2]);
+			else
+				call_user_func_array(array($this->getSubProperty($action[0]),$action[1]),$action[2]);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs the PreRender step for the control and all its child controls.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by setting up
+	 * the stack of the output cache in the page.
+	 * Only framework developers should use this method.
+	 * @param TControl the naming container control
+	 */
+	protected function preRenderRecursive()
+	{
+		if($this->_cacheAvailable && !$this->_dataCached)
+		{
+			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
+			$stack->push($this);
+			parent::preRenderRecursive();
+			$stack->pop();
+		}
+		else
+			parent::preRenderRecursive();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads state (viewstate and controlstate) into a control and its children.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by loading
+	 * cached state if available.
+	 * This method should only be used by framework developers.
+	 * @param array the collection of the state
+	 * @param boolean whether the viewstate should be loaded
+	 */
+	protected function loadStateRecursive(&$state,$needViewState=true)
+	{
+		$st=unserialize($state);
+		parent::loadStateRecursive($st,$needViewState);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves all control state (viewstate and controlstate) as a collection.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by saving state
+	 * into cache if needed.
+	 * This method should only be used by framework developers.
+	 * @param boolean whether the viewstate should be saved
+	 * @return array the collection of the control state (including its children's state).
+	 */
+	protected function &saveStateRecursive($needViewState=true)
+	{
+		if($this->_dataCached)
+			return $this->_state;
+		else
+		{
+			$st=parent::saveStateRecursive($needViewState);
+			// serialization is needed to avoid undefined classes when loading state
+			$this->_state=serialize($st);
+			return $this->_state;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers an action associated with the content being cached.
+	 * The registered action will be replayed if the content stored
+	 * in the cache is served to end-users.
+	 * @param string context of the action method. This is a property-path
+	 * referring to the context object (e.g. Page, Page.ClientScript)
+	 * @param string method name of the context object
+	 * @param array list of parameters to be passed to the action method
+	 */
+	public function registerAction($context,$funcName,$funcParams)
+	{
+		$this->_actions[]=array($context,$funcName,$funcParams);
+	}
+
+	public function getCacheKey()
+	{
+		if($this->_cacheKey===null)
+			$this->_cacheKey=$this->calculateCacheKey();
+		return $this->_cacheKey;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Calculates the cache key.
+	 * The key is calculated based on the unique ID of this control
+	 * and the request parameters specified via {@link setVaryByParam VaryByParam}.
+	 * If {@link getVaryBySession VaryBySession} is true, the session ID
+	 * will also participate in the key calculation.
+	 * This method may be overriden to support other variations in
+	 * the calculated cache key.
+	 * @return string cache key
+	 */
+	protected function calculateCacheKey()
+	{
+		$key=$this->getBaseCacheKey();
+		if($this->_varyBySession)
+			$key.=$this->getSession()->getSessionID();
+		if($this->_varyByParam!=='')
+		{
+			$params=array();
+			$request=$this->getRequest();
+			foreach(explode(',',$this->_varyByParam) as $name)
+			{
+				$name=trim($name);
+				$params[$name]=$request->itemAt($name);
+			}
+			$key.=serialize($params);
+		}
+		$param=new TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter;
+		$this->onCalculateKey($param);
+		$key.=$param->getCacheKey();
+		return $key;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string basic cache key without variations
+	 */
+	protected function getBaseCacheKey()
+	{
+		return self::CACHE_ID_PREFIX.$this->_keyPrefix.$this->getPage()->getPagePath().$this->getUniqueID();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the ID of the cache module. Defaults to '', meaning the primary cache module is used.
+	 */
+	public function getCacheModuleID()
+	{
+		return $this->_cacheModuleID;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the ID of the cache module. If empty, the primary cache module will be used.
+	 */
+	public function setCacheModuleID($value)
+	{
+		$this->_cacheModuleID=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the prefix of the cache key.
+	 * This method is used internally by {@link TTemplate}.
+	 * @param string key prefix
+	 */
+	public function setCacheKeyPrefix($value)
+	{
+		$this->_keyPrefix=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the timestamp of the cached content. This is only valid if the content is being cached.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getCacheTime()
+	{
+		return $this->_cacheTime;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the dependency of the data to be cached.
+	 * The default implementation simply returns null, meaning no specific dependency.
+	 * This method may be overriden to associate the data to be cached
+	 * with additional dependencies.
+	 * @return ICacheDependency
+	 */
+	protected function getCacheDependency()
+	{
+		return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether content enclosed is cached or not
+	 */
+	public function getContentCached()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataCached;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer number of seconds that the data can remain in cache. Defaults to 60 seconds.
+	 * Note, if cache dependency changes or cache space is limited,
+	 * the data may be purged out of cache earlier.
+	 */
+	public function getDuration()
+	{
+		return $this->_duration;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer number of seconds that the data can remain in cache. If 0, it means data is not cached.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is smaller than 0.
+	 */
+	public function setDuration($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('outputcache_duration_invalid',get_class($this));
+		$this->_duration=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string a semicolon-separated list of strings used to vary the output cache. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getVaryByParam()
+	{
+		return $this->_varyByParam;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the names of the request parameters that should be used in calculating the cache key.
+	 * The names should be concatenated by semicolons.
+	 * By setting this value, the output cache will use different cached data
+	 * for each different set of request parameter values.
+	 * @return string a semicolon-separated list of strings used to vary the output cache.
+	 */
+	public function setVaryByParam($value)
+	{
+		$this->_varyByParam=trim($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the content being cached should be differentiated according to user sessions. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getVaryBySession()
+	{
+		return $this->_varyBySession;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the content being cached should be differentiated according to user sessions.
+	 */
+	public function setVaryBySession($value)
+	{
+		$this->_varyBySession=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether cached output will be used on postback requests. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getCachingPostBack()
+	{
+		return $this->_cachePostBack;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a value indicating whether cached output will be used on postback requests.
+	 * By default, this is disabled. Be very cautious when enabling it.
+	 * If the cached content including interactive user controls such as
+	 * TTextBox, TDropDownList, your page may fail to render on postbacks.
+	 * @param boolean whether cached output will be used on postback requests.
+	 */
+	public function setCachingPostBack($value)
+	{
+		$this->_cachePostBack=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This event is raised when the output cache is checking cache dependency.
+	 * An event handler may be written to check customized dependency conditions.
+	 * The checking result should be saved by setting {@link TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter::setIsValid IsValid}
+	 * property of the event parameter (which defaults to true).
+	 * @param TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onCheckDependency($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCheckDependency',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This event is raised when the output cache is calculating cache key.
+	 * By varying cache keys, one can obtain different versions of cached content.
+	 * An event handler may be written to add variety of the key calculation.
+	 * The value set in {@link TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter::setCacheKey CacheKey} of
+	 * this event parameter will be appended to the default key calculation scheme.
+	 * @param TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onCalculateKey($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCalculateKey',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the output cache control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by capturing the output
+	 * from its child controls and saving it into cache, if output cache is needed.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_dataCached)
+			$writer->write($this->_contents);
+		else if($this->_cacheAvailable)
+		{
+			$textwriter = new TTextWriter();
+			$multiwriter = new TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti(array($writer->getWriter(),$textwriter));
+			$htmlWriter = Prado::createComponent($this->GetResponse()->getHtmlWriterType(), $multiwriter);
+			
+			$stack=$this->getPage()->getCachingStack();
+			$stack->push($this);
+			parent::render($htmlWriter);
+			$stack->pop();
+
+			$content=$textwriter->flush();
+			$data=array($content,$this->_state,$this->_actions,time());
+			$this->_cache->set($this->getCacheKey(),$data,$this->getDuration(),$this->getCacheDependency());
+		}
+		else
+			parent::render($writer);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * <b>OnCheckDependency</b> event of {@link TOutputCache} control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TOutputCacheCheckDependencyEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	private $_isValid=true;
+	private $_cacheTime=0;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the dependency remains valid. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getIsValid()
+	{
+		return $this->_isValid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the dependency remains valid
+	 */
+	public function setIsValid($value)
+	{
+		$this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the timestamp of the cached result. You may use this to help determine any dependency is changed.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getCacheTime()
+	{
+		return $this->_cacheTime;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the timestamp of the cached result. This is used internally.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setCacheTime($value)
+	{
+		$this->_cacheTime=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * <b>OnCalculateKey</b> event of {@link TOutputCache} control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TOutputCacheCalculateKeyEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string cache key to be appended to the default calculation scheme.
+	 */
+	private $_cacheKey='';
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string cache key to be appended to the default calculation scheme.
+	 */
+	public function getCacheKey()
+	{
+		return $this->_cacheKey;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string cache key to be appended to the default calculation scheme
+	 */
+	public function setCacheKey($value)
+	{
+		$this->_cacheKey=TPropertyValue::ensureString($value);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti class
+ *
+ * TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti is an internal class used by
+ * TOutputCache to write simultaneously to multiple writers.
+ *
+ * @author Gabor Berczi, DevWorx Hungary <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.2
+ */
+class TOutputCacheTextWriterMulti extends TTextWriter
+{
+	protected $_writers;
+
+	public function __construct(Array $writers)
+	{
+		//parent::__construct();
+		$this->_writers = $writers;
+	}
+	
+	public function write($s)
+	{
+		foreach($this->_writers as $writer)
+			$writer->write($s);
+	}
+
+	public function flush()
+	{
+		foreach($this->_writers as $writer)
+			$s = $writer->flush();
+		return $s;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPager.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPager.php
index 8e4bf2b0..11de5233 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPager.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPager.php
@@ -1,792 +1,792 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TPager class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TPager class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TPager class.
- *
- * TPager creates a pager that provides UI for end-users to interactively
- * specify which page of data to be rendered in a {@link TDataBoundControl}-derived control,
- * such as {@link TDataList}, {@link TRepeater}, {@link TCheckBoxList}, etc.
- * The target data-bound control is specified by {@link setControlToPaginate ControlToPaginate},
- * which must be the ID path of the target control reaching from the pager's
- * naming container. Note, the target control must have its {@link TDataBoundControl::setAllowPaging AllowPaging}
- * set to true.
- *
- * TPager can display three different UIs, specified via {@link setMode Mode}:
- * - NextPrev: a next page and a previous page button are rendered.
- * - Numeric: a list of page index buttons are rendered.
- * - List: a dropdown list of page indices are rendered.
- *
- * When the pager mode is either NextPrev or Numeric, the paging buttons may be displayed
- * in three types by setting {@link setButtonType ButtonType}:
- * - LinkButton: a hyperlink button
- * - PushButton: a normal button
- * - ImageButton: an image button (please set XXXPageImageUrl properties accordingly to specify the button images.)
- *
- * TPager raises an {@link onPageIndexChanged OnPageIndexChanged} event when
- * the end-user interacts with it and specifies a new page (e.g. clicking
- * on a page button that leads to a new page.) The new page index may be obtained
- * from the event parameter's property {@link TPagerPageChangedEventParameter::getNewPageIndex NewPageIndex}.
- * Normally, in the event handler, one can set the {@link TDataBoundControl::getCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex}
- * to this new page index so that the new page of data is rendered.
- *
- * Multiple pagers can be associated with the same data-bound control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.2
- */
-class TPager extends TWebControl implements INamingContainer
-{
-	/**
-	 * Command name that TPager understands.
-	 */
-	const CMD_PAGE='Page';
-	const CMD_PAGE_NEXT='Next';
-	const CMD_PAGE_PREV='Previous';
-	const CMD_PAGE_FIRST='First';
-	const CMD_PAGE_LAST='Last';
-
-	private $_pageCount=0;
-
-	/**
-	 * Restores the pager state.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked when
-	 * the control is loading persistent state.
-	 */
-	public function loadState()
-	{
-		parent::loadState();
-		if($this->getEnableViewState(true))
-		{
-			$this->getControls()->clear();
-			$this->buildPager();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the ID path of the control whose content would be paginated.
-	 */
-	public function getControlToPaginate()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ControlToPaginate','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the ID path of the control whose content would be paginated.
-	 * The ID path is the dot-connected IDs of the controls reaching from
-	 * the pager's naming container to the target control.
-	 * @param string the ID path
-	 */
-	public function setControlToPaginate($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ControlToPaginate',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPagerMode pager mode. Defaults to TPagerMode::NextPrev.
-	 */
-	public function getMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Mode',TPagerMode::NextPrev);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TPagerMode pager mode.
-	 */
-	public function setMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Mode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TPagerMode'),TPagerMode::NextPrev);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPagerButtonType the type of command button for paging. Defaults to TPagerButtonType::LinkButton.
-	 */
-	public function getButtonType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TPagerButtonType::LinkButton);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TPagerButtonType the type of command button for paging.
-	 */
-	public function setButtonType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TPagerButtonType'),TPagerButtonType::LinkButton);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the next page button. Defaults to '>'.
-	 */
-	public function getNextPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('NextPageText','>');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the next page button.
-	 */
-	public function setNextPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('NextPageText',$value,'>');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the previous page button. Defaults to '<'.
-	 */
-	public function getPrevPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PrevPageText','<');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the next page button.
-	 */
-	public function setPrevPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PrevPageText',$value,'<');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the first page button. Defaults to '<<'.
-	 */
-	public function getFirstPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FirstPageText','<<');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the first page button. If empty, the first page button will not be rendered.
-	 */
-	public function setFirstPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FirstPageText',$value,'<<');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text for the last page button. Defaults to '>>'.
-	 */
-	public function getLastPageText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('LastPageText','>>');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text for the last page button. If empty, the last page button will not be rendered.
-	 */
-	public function setLastPageText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('LastPageText',$value,'>>');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the image URL for the first page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getFirstPageImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FirstPageImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the image URL for the first page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setFirstPageImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FirstPageImageUrl',$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the image URL for the last page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getLastPageImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('LastPageImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the image URL for the last page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setLastPageImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('LastPageImageUrl',$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the image URL for the next page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getNextPageImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('NextPageImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the image URL for the next page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setNextPageImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('NextPageImageUrl',$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the image URL for the previous page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getPrevPageImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PrevPageImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the image URL for the previous page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setPrevPageImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PrevPageImageUrl',$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the image URL for the numeric page buttons. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton' and {@link getMode Mode} is 'Numeric'.
-	 * @see setNumericPageImageUrl
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function getNumericPageImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('NumericPageImageUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the image URL for the numeric page buttons.
-	 * This is actually a template for generating a set of URLs corresponding to numeric button 1, 2, 3, .., etc.
-	 * Use {0} as the placeholder for the numbers.
-	 * For example, the image URL http://example.com/images/button{0}.gif
-	 * will be replaced as http://example.com/images/button1.gif, http://example.com/images/button2.gif, etc.
-	 * @param string the image URL for the numeric page buttons. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton' and {@link getMode Mode} is 'Numeric'.
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	public function setNumericPageImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('NumericPageImageUrl',$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed. Defaults to 10.
-	 */
-	public function getPageButtonCount()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PageButtonCount',10);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 1.
-	 */
-	public function setPageButtonCount($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<1)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('pager_pagebuttoncount_invalid');
-		$this->setViewState('PageButtonCount',$value,10);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the current page. Defaults to 0.
-	 */
-	public function getCurrentPageIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CurrentPageIndex',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current page
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
-	 */
-	protected function setCurrentPageIndex($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('pager_currentpageindex_invalid');
-		$this->setViewState('CurrentPageIndex',$value,0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer number of pages of data items available
-	 */
-	public function getPageCount()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PageCount',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer number of pages of data items available
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
-	 */
-	protected function setPageCount($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('pager_pagecount_invalid');
-		$this->setViewState('PageCount',$value,0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the current page is the first page Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getIsFirstPage()
-	{
-		return $this->getCurrentPageIndex()===0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the current page is the last page
-	 */
-	public function getIsLastPage()
-	{
-		return $this->getCurrentPageIndex()===$this->getPageCount()-1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs databinding to populate data items from data source.
-	 * This method is invoked by {@link dataBind()}.
-	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
-	 * @param Traversable the bound data
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-
-		$controlID=$this->getControlToPaginate();
-		if(($targetControl=$this->getNamingContainer()->findControl($controlID))===null || !($targetControl instanceof TDataBoundControl))
-			throw new TConfigurationException('pager_controltopaginate_invalid',$controlID);
-
-		if($targetControl->getAllowPaging())
-		{
-	 		$this->_pageCount=$targetControl->getPageCount();
-			$this->getControls()->clear();
-			$this->setPageCount($targetControl->getPageCount());
-			$this->setCurrentPageIndex($targetControl->getCurrentPageIndex());
-			$this->buildPager();
-		}
-		else
-			$this->_pageCount=0;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the control.
-	 * The method overrides the parent implementation by rendering
-	 * the pager only when there are two or more pages.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_pageCount>1)
-			parent::render($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Builds the pager content based on the pager mode.
-	 * Current implementation includes building 'NextPrev', 'Numeric' and 'DropDownList' pagers.
-	 * Derived classes may override this method to provide additional pagers.
-	 */
-	protected function buildPager()
-	{
-		switch($this->getMode())
-		{
-			case TPagerMode::NextPrev:
-				$this->buildNextPrevPager();
-				break;
-			case TPagerMode::Numeric:
-				$this->buildNumericPager();
-				break;
-			case TPagerMode::DropDownList:
-				$this->buildListPager();
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a pager button.
-	 * Depending on the button type, a TLinkButton or a TButton may be created.
-	 * If it is enabled (clickable), its command name and parameter will also be set.
-	 * Derived classes may override this method to create additional types of buttons, such as TImageButton.
-	 * @param string button type, either LinkButton or PushButton
-	 * @param boolean whether the button should be enabled
-	 * @param string caption of the button.
-	 * @param string CommandName corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button.
-	 * @param string CommandParameter corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button
-	 * @return mixed the button instance
-	 */
-	protected function createPagerButton($buttonType,$enabled,$text,$commandName,$commandParameter)
-	{
-		if($buttonType===TPagerButtonType::LinkButton)
-		{
-			if($enabled)
-				$button=new TLinkButton;
-			else
-			{
-				$button=new TLabel;
-				$button->setText($text);
-				return $button;
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if($buttonType===TPagerButtonType::ImageButton)
-			{
-				$button=new TImageButton;
-				$button->setImageUrl($this->getPageImageUrl($text,$commandName));
-			}
-			else
-				$button=new TButton;
-			if(!$enabled)
-				$button->setEnabled(false);
-		}
-		$button->setText($text);
-		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
-		$button->setCommandParameter($commandParameter);
-		$button->setCausesValidation(false);
-		return $button;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the caption of the image button
-	 * @param string the command name associated with the image button
-	 * @since 3.1.1
-	 */
-	protected function getPageImageUrl($text,$commandName)
-	{
-		switch($commandName)
-		{
-			case self::CMD_PAGE:
-				$url=$this->getNumericPageImageUrl();
-				return str_replace('{0}',$text,$url);
-			case self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT:
-				return $this->getNextPageImageUrl();
-			case self::CMD_PAGE_PREV:
-				return $this->getPrevPageImageUrl();
-			case self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST:
-				return $this->getFirstPageImageUrl();
-			case self::CMD_PAGE_LAST:
-				return $this->getLastPageImageUrl();
-			default:
-				return '';
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Builds a next-prev pager
-	 */
-	protected function buildNextPrevPager()
-	{
-		$buttonType=$this->getButtonType();
-		$controls=$this->getControls();
-		if($this->getIsFirstPage())
-		{
-			if(($text=$this->getFirstPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST,'');
-				$controls->add($label);
-				$controls->add("\n");
-			}
-			$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$this->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_PREV,'');
-			$controls->add($label);
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if(($text=$this->getFirstPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST,'');
-				$controls->add($button);
-				$controls->add("\n");
-			}
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_PREV,'');
-			$controls->add($button);
-		}
-		$controls->add("\n");
-		if($this->getIsLastPage())
-		{
-			$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$this->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT,'');
-			$controls->add($label);
-			if(($text=$this->getLastPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$controls->add("\n");
-				$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST,'');
-				$controls->add($label);
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT,'');
-			$controls->add($button);
-			if(($text=$this->getLastPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$controls->add("\n");
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST,'');
-				$controls->add($button);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Builds a numeric pager
-	 */
-	protected function buildNumericPager()
-	{
-		$buttonType=$this->getButtonType();
-		$controls=$this->getControls();
-		$pageCount=$this->getPageCount();
-		$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
-		$maxButtonCount=$this->getPageButtonCount();
-		$buttonCount=$maxButtonCount>$pageCount?$pageCount:$maxButtonCount;
-		$startPageIndex=1;
-		$endPageIndex=$buttonCount;
-		if($pageIndex>$endPageIndex)
-		{
-			$startPageIndex=((int)(($pageIndex-1)/$maxButtonCount))*$maxButtonCount+1;
-			if(($endPageIndex=$startPageIndex+$maxButtonCount-1)>$pageCount)
-				$endPageIndex=$pageCount;
-			if($endPageIndex-$startPageIndex+1<$maxButtonCount)
-			{
-				if(($startPageIndex=$endPageIndex-$maxButtonCount+1)<1)
-					$startPageIndex=1;
-			}
-		}
-
-		if($startPageIndex>1)
-		{
-			if(($text=$this->getFirstPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST,'');
-				$controls->add($button);
-				$controls->add("\n");
-			}
-			$prevPageIndex=$startPageIndex-1;
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$prevPageIndex");
-			$controls->add($button);
-			$controls->add("\n");
-		}
-
-		for($i=$startPageIndex;$i<=$endPageIndex;++$i)
-		{
-			if($i===$pageIndex)
-			{
-				$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,"$i",self::CMD_PAGE,'');
-				$controls->add($label);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,"$i",self::CMD_PAGE,"$i");
-				$controls->add($button);
-			}
-			if($i<$endPageIndex)
-				$controls->add("\n");
-		}
-
-		if($pageCount>$endPageIndex)
-		{
-			$controls->add("\n");
-			$nextPageIndex=$endPageIndex+1;
-			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$nextPageIndex");
-			$controls->add($button);
-			if(($text=$this->getLastPageText())!=='')
-			{
-				$controls->add("\n");
-				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST,'');
-				$controls->add($button);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Builds a dropdown list pager
-	 */
-	protected function buildListPager()
-	{
-		$list=new TDropDownList;
-		$this->getControls()->add($list);
-		$list->setDataSource(range(1,$this->getPageCount()));
-		$list->dataBind();
-		$list->setSelectedIndex($this->getCurrentPageIndex());
-		$list->setAutoPostBack(true);
-		$list->attachEventHandler('OnSelectedIndexChanged',array($this,'listIndexChanged'));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Event handler to the OnSelectedIndexChanged event of the dropdown list.
-	 * This handler will raise {@link onPageIndexChanged OnPageIndexChanged} event.
-	 * @param TDropDownList the dropdown list control raising the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function listIndexChanged($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$pageIndex=$sender->getSelectedIndex();
-		$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This event is raised when page index is changed due to a page button click.
-	 * @param TPagerPageChangedEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPageIndexChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnPageIndexChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Processes a bubbled event.
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
-	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$command=$param->getCommandName();
-			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE)===0)
-			{
-				$pageIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param->getCommandParameter())-1;
-				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT)===0)
-			{
-				$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
-				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_PREV)===0)
-			{
-				$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()-1;
-				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,0));
-				return true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$this->getPageCount()-1));
-				return true;
-			}
-			return false;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TPagerPageChangedEventParameter class
- *
- * TPagerPageChangedEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TPager::onPageIndexChanged PageIndexChanged} event of {@link TPager} controls.
- *
- * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} property refers to the control
- * that originally raises the OnCommand event, while {@link getNewPageIndex NewPageIndex}
- * returns the new page index carried with the page command.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.2
- */
-class TPagerPageChangedEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var integer new page index
-	 */
-	private $_newIndex;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl original event sender
-	 */
-	private $_source=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 * @param integer new page index
-	 */
-	public function __construct($source,$newPageIndex)
-	{
-		$this->_source=$source;
-		$this->_newIndex=$newPageIndex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_source;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer new page index
-	 */
-	public function getNewPageIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_newIndex;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TPagerMode class.
- * TPagerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible modes that a {@link TPager} control can take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NextPrev: pager buttons are displayed as next and previous pages
- * - Numeric: pager buttons are displayed as numeric page numbers
- * - DropDownList: a dropdown list is used to select pages
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TPagerMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NextPrev='NextPrev';
-	const Numeric='Numeric';
-	const DropDownList='DropDownList';
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TPagerButtonType class.
- * TPagerButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of pager buttons.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - LinkButton: link buttons
- * - PushButton: form submit buttons
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TPagerButtonType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
-	const PushButton='PushButton';
-	const ImageButton='ImageButton';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TPager class.
+ *
+ * TPager creates a pager that provides UI for end-users to interactively
+ * specify which page of data to be rendered in a {@link TDataBoundControl}-derived control,
+ * such as {@link TDataList}, {@link TRepeater}, {@link TCheckBoxList}, etc.
+ * The target data-bound control is specified by {@link setControlToPaginate ControlToPaginate},
+ * which must be the ID path of the target control reaching from the pager's
+ * naming container. Note, the target control must have its {@link TDataBoundControl::setAllowPaging AllowPaging}
+ * set to true.
+ *
+ * TPager can display three different UIs, specified via {@link setMode Mode}:
+ * - NextPrev: a next page and a previous page button are rendered.
+ * - Numeric: a list of page index buttons are rendered.
+ * - List: a dropdown list of page indices are rendered.
+ *
+ * When the pager mode is either NextPrev or Numeric, the paging buttons may be displayed
+ * in three types by setting {@link setButtonType ButtonType}:
+ * - LinkButton: a hyperlink button
+ * - PushButton: a normal button
+ * - ImageButton: an image button (please set XXXPageImageUrl properties accordingly to specify the button images.)
+ *
+ * TPager raises an {@link onPageIndexChanged OnPageIndexChanged} event when
+ * the end-user interacts with it and specifies a new page (e.g. clicking
+ * on a page button that leads to a new page.) The new page index may be obtained
+ * from the event parameter's property {@link TPagerPageChangedEventParameter::getNewPageIndex NewPageIndex}.
+ * Normally, in the event handler, one can set the {@link TDataBoundControl::getCurrentPageIndex CurrentPageIndex}
+ * to this new page index so that the new page of data is rendered.
+ *
+ * Multiple pagers can be associated with the same data-bound control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.2
+ */
+class TPager extends TWebControl implements INamingContainer
+{
+	/**
+	 * Command name that TPager understands.
+	 */
+	const CMD_PAGE='Page';
+	const CMD_PAGE_NEXT='Next';
+	const CMD_PAGE_PREV='Previous';
+	const CMD_PAGE_FIRST='First';
+	const CMD_PAGE_LAST='Last';
+
+	private $_pageCount=0;
+
+	/**
+	 * Restores the pager state.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is invoked when
+	 * the control is loading persistent state.
+	 */
+	public function loadState()
+	{
+		parent::loadState();
+		if($this->getEnableViewState(true))
+		{
+			$this->getControls()->clear();
+			$this->buildPager();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the ID path of the control whose content would be paginated.
+	 */
+	public function getControlToPaginate()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ControlToPaginate','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the ID path of the control whose content would be paginated.
+	 * The ID path is the dot-connected IDs of the controls reaching from
+	 * the pager's naming container to the target control.
+	 * @param string the ID path
+	 */
+	public function setControlToPaginate($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ControlToPaginate',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPagerMode pager mode. Defaults to TPagerMode::NextPrev.
+	 */
+	public function getMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Mode',TPagerMode::NextPrev);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TPagerMode pager mode.
+	 */
+	public function setMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Mode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TPagerMode'),TPagerMode::NextPrev);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPagerButtonType the type of command button for paging. Defaults to TPagerButtonType::LinkButton.
+	 */
+	public function getButtonType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ButtonType',TPagerButtonType::LinkButton);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TPagerButtonType the type of command button for paging.
+	 */
+	public function setButtonType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ButtonType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TPagerButtonType'),TPagerButtonType::LinkButton);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the next page button. Defaults to '>'.
+	 */
+	public function getNextPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('NextPageText','>');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the next page button.
+	 */
+	public function setNextPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('NextPageText',$value,'>');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the previous page button. Defaults to '<'.
+	 */
+	public function getPrevPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PrevPageText','<');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the next page button.
+	 */
+	public function setPrevPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PrevPageText',$value,'<');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the first page button. Defaults to '<<'.
+	 */
+	public function getFirstPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FirstPageText','<<');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the first page button. If empty, the first page button will not be rendered.
+	 */
+	public function setFirstPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FirstPageText',$value,'<<');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text for the last page button. Defaults to '>>'.
+	 */
+	public function getLastPageText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('LastPageText','>>');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text for the last page button. If empty, the last page button will not be rendered.
+	 */
+	public function setLastPageText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('LastPageText',$value,'>>');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the image URL for the first page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getFirstPageImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FirstPageImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the image URL for the first page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setFirstPageImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FirstPageImageUrl',$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the image URL for the last page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getLastPageImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('LastPageImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the image URL for the last page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setLastPageImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('LastPageImageUrl',$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the image URL for the next page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getNextPageImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('NextPageImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the image URL for the next page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setNextPageImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('NextPageImageUrl',$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the image URL for the previous page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getPrevPageImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PrevPageImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the image URL for the previous page button. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setPrevPageImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PrevPageImageUrl',$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the image URL for the numeric page buttons. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton' and {@link getMode Mode} is 'Numeric'.
+	 * @see setNumericPageImageUrl
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function getNumericPageImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('NumericPageImageUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the image URL for the numeric page buttons.
+	 * This is actually a template for generating a set of URLs corresponding to numeric button 1, 2, 3, .., etc.
+	 * Use {0} as the placeholder for the numbers.
+	 * For example, the image URL http://example.com/images/button{0}.gif
+	 * will be replaced as http://example.com/images/button1.gif, http://example.com/images/button2.gif, etc.
+	 * @param string the image URL for the numeric page buttons. This is only used when {@link getButtonType ButtonType} is 'ImageButton' and {@link getMode Mode} is 'Numeric'.
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	public function setNumericPageImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('NumericPageImageUrl',$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed. Defaults to 10.
+	 */
+	public function getPageButtonCount()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PageButtonCount',10);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer maximum number of pager buttons to be displayed
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 1.
+	 */
+	public function setPageButtonCount($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<1)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('pager_pagebuttoncount_invalid');
+		$this->setViewState('PageButtonCount',$value,10);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the current page. Defaults to 0.
+	 */
+	public function getCurrentPageIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CurrentPageIndex',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the current page
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
+	 */
+	protected function setCurrentPageIndex($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('pager_currentpageindex_invalid');
+		$this->setViewState('CurrentPageIndex',$value,0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer number of pages of data items available
+	 */
+	public function getPageCount()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PageCount',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer number of pages of data items available
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than 0
+	 */
+	protected function setPageCount($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('pager_pagecount_invalid');
+		$this->setViewState('PageCount',$value,0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the current page is the first page Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getIsFirstPage()
+	{
+		return $this->getCurrentPageIndex()===0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the current page is the last page
+	 */
+	public function getIsLastPage()
+	{
+		return $this->getCurrentPageIndex()===$this->getPageCount()-1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs databinding to populate data items from data source.
+	 * This method is invoked by {@link dataBind()}.
+	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
+	 * @param Traversable the bound data
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+
+		$controlID=$this->getControlToPaginate();
+		if(($targetControl=$this->getNamingContainer()->findControl($controlID))===null || !($targetControl instanceof TDataBoundControl))
+			throw new TConfigurationException('pager_controltopaginate_invalid',$controlID);
+
+		if($targetControl->getAllowPaging())
+		{
+	 		$this->_pageCount=$targetControl->getPageCount();
+			$this->getControls()->clear();
+			$this->setPageCount($targetControl->getPageCount());
+			$this->setCurrentPageIndex($targetControl->getCurrentPageIndex());
+			$this->buildPager();
+		}
+		else
+			$this->_pageCount=0;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the control.
+	 * The method overrides the parent implementation by rendering
+	 * the pager only when there are two or more pages.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_pageCount>1)
+			parent::render($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Builds the pager content based on the pager mode.
+	 * Current implementation includes building 'NextPrev', 'Numeric' and 'DropDownList' pagers.
+	 * Derived classes may override this method to provide additional pagers.
+	 */
+	protected function buildPager()
+	{
+		switch($this->getMode())
+		{
+			case TPagerMode::NextPrev:
+				$this->buildNextPrevPager();
+				break;
+			case TPagerMode::Numeric:
+				$this->buildNumericPager();
+				break;
+			case TPagerMode::DropDownList:
+				$this->buildListPager();
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a pager button.
+	 * Depending on the button type, a TLinkButton or a TButton may be created.
+	 * If it is enabled (clickable), its command name and parameter will also be set.
+	 * Derived classes may override this method to create additional types of buttons, such as TImageButton.
+	 * @param string button type, either LinkButton or PushButton
+	 * @param boolean whether the button should be enabled
+	 * @param string caption of the button.
+	 * @param string CommandName corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button.
+	 * @param string CommandParameter corresponding to the OnCommand event of the button
+	 * @return mixed the button instance
+	 */
+	protected function createPagerButton($buttonType,$enabled,$text,$commandName,$commandParameter)
+	{
+		if($buttonType===TPagerButtonType::LinkButton)
+		{
+			if($enabled)
+				$button=new TLinkButton;
+			else
+			{
+				$button=new TLabel;
+				$button->setText($text);
+				return $button;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if($buttonType===TPagerButtonType::ImageButton)
+			{
+				$button=new TImageButton;
+				$button->setImageUrl($this->getPageImageUrl($text,$commandName));
+			}
+			else
+				$button=new TButton;
+			if(!$enabled)
+				$button->setEnabled(false);
+		}
+		$button->setText($text);
+		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
+		$button->setCommandParameter($commandParameter);
+		$button->setCausesValidation(false);
+		return $button;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the caption of the image button
+	 * @param string the command name associated with the image button
+	 * @since 3.1.1
+	 */
+	protected function getPageImageUrl($text,$commandName)
+	{
+		switch($commandName)
+		{
+			case self::CMD_PAGE:
+				$url=$this->getNumericPageImageUrl();
+				return str_replace('{0}',$text,$url);
+			case self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT:
+				return $this->getNextPageImageUrl();
+			case self::CMD_PAGE_PREV:
+				return $this->getPrevPageImageUrl();
+			case self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST:
+				return $this->getFirstPageImageUrl();
+			case self::CMD_PAGE_LAST:
+				return $this->getLastPageImageUrl();
+			default:
+				return '';
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Builds a next-prev pager
+	 */
+	protected function buildNextPrevPager()
+	{
+		$buttonType=$this->getButtonType();
+		$controls=$this->getControls();
+		if($this->getIsFirstPage())
+		{
+			if(($text=$this->getFirstPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST,'');
+				$controls->add($label);
+				$controls->add("\n");
+			}
+			$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$this->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_PREV,'');
+			$controls->add($label);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if(($text=$this->getFirstPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST,'');
+				$controls->add($button);
+				$controls->add("\n");
+			}
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_PREV,'');
+			$controls->add($button);
+		}
+		$controls->add("\n");
+		if($this->getIsLastPage())
+		{
+			$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$this->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT,'');
+			$controls->add($label);
+			if(($text=$this->getLastPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$controls->add("\n");
+				$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST,'');
+				$controls->add($label);
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT,'');
+			$controls->add($button);
+			if(($text=$this->getLastPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$controls->add("\n");
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST,'');
+				$controls->add($button);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Builds a numeric pager
+	 */
+	protected function buildNumericPager()
+	{
+		$buttonType=$this->getButtonType();
+		$controls=$this->getControls();
+		$pageCount=$this->getPageCount();
+		$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
+		$maxButtonCount=$this->getPageButtonCount();
+		$buttonCount=$maxButtonCount>$pageCount?$pageCount:$maxButtonCount;
+		$startPageIndex=1;
+		$endPageIndex=$buttonCount;
+		if($pageIndex>$endPageIndex)
+		{
+			$startPageIndex=((int)(($pageIndex-1)/$maxButtonCount))*$maxButtonCount+1;
+			if(($endPageIndex=$startPageIndex+$maxButtonCount-1)>$pageCount)
+				$endPageIndex=$pageCount;
+			if($endPageIndex-$startPageIndex+1<$maxButtonCount)
+			{
+				if(($startPageIndex=$endPageIndex-$maxButtonCount+1)<1)
+					$startPageIndex=1;
+			}
+		}
+
+		if($startPageIndex>1)
+		{
+			if(($text=$this->getFirstPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST,'');
+				$controls->add($button);
+				$controls->add("\n");
+			}
+			$prevPageIndex=$startPageIndex-1;
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getPrevPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$prevPageIndex");
+			$controls->add($button);
+			$controls->add("\n");
+		}
+
+		for($i=$startPageIndex;$i<=$endPageIndex;++$i)
+		{
+			if($i===$pageIndex)
+			{
+				$label=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,false,"$i",self::CMD_PAGE,'');
+				$controls->add($label);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,"$i",self::CMD_PAGE,"$i");
+				$controls->add($button);
+			}
+			if($i<$endPageIndex)
+				$controls->add("\n");
+		}
+
+		if($pageCount>$endPageIndex)
+		{
+			$controls->add("\n");
+			$nextPageIndex=$endPageIndex+1;
+			$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$this->getNextPageText(),self::CMD_PAGE,"$nextPageIndex");
+			$controls->add($button);
+			if(($text=$this->getLastPageText())!=='')
+			{
+				$controls->add("\n");
+				$button=$this->createPagerButton($buttonType,true,$text,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST,'');
+				$controls->add($button);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Builds a dropdown list pager
+	 */
+	protected function buildListPager()
+	{
+		$list=new TDropDownList;
+		$this->getControls()->add($list);
+		$list->setDataSource(range(1,$this->getPageCount()));
+		$list->dataBind();
+		$list->setSelectedIndex($this->getCurrentPageIndex());
+		$list->setAutoPostBack(true);
+		$list->attachEventHandler('OnSelectedIndexChanged',array($this,'listIndexChanged'));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Event handler to the OnSelectedIndexChanged event of the dropdown list.
+	 * This handler will raise {@link onPageIndexChanged OnPageIndexChanged} event.
+	 * @param TDropDownList the dropdown list control raising the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function listIndexChanged($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$pageIndex=$sender->getSelectedIndex();
+		$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This event is raised when page index is changed due to a page button click.
+	 * @param TPagerPageChangedEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPageIndexChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnPageIndexChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Processes a bubbled event.
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
+	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$command=$param->getCommandName();
+			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE)===0)
+			{
+				$pageIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param->getCommandParameter())-1;
+				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_NEXT)===0)
+			{
+				$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()+1;
+				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_PREV)===0)
+			{
+				$pageIndex=$this->getCurrentPageIndex()-1;
+				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$pageIndex));
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_FIRST)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,0));
+				return true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PAGE_LAST)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onPageIndexChanged(new TPagerPageChangedEventParameter($sender,$this->getPageCount()-1));
+				return true;
+			}
+			return false;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TPagerPageChangedEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TPagerPageChangedEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TPager::onPageIndexChanged PageIndexChanged} event of {@link TPager} controls.
+ *
+ * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} property refers to the control
+ * that originally raises the OnCommand event, while {@link getNewPageIndex NewPageIndex}
+ * returns the new page index carried with the page command.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.2
+ */
+class TPagerPageChangedEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var integer new page index
+	 */
+	private $_newIndex;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl original event sender
+	 */
+	private $_source=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 * @param integer new page index
+	 */
+	public function __construct($source,$newPageIndex)
+	{
+		$this->_source=$source;
+		$this->_newIndex=$newPageIndex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_source;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer new page index
+	 */
+	public function getNewPageIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_newIndex;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TPagerMode class.
+ * TPagerMode defines the enumerable type for the possible modes that a {@link TPager} control can take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NextPrev: pager buttons are displayed as next and previous pages
+ * - Numeric: pager buttons are displayed as numeric page numbers
+ * - DropDownList: a dropdown list is used to select pages
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TPagerMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NextPrev='NextPrev';
+	const Numeric='Numeric';
+	const DropDownList='DropDownList';
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TPagerButtonType class.
+ * TPagerButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of pager buttons.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - LinkButton: link buttons
+ * - PushButton: form submit buttons
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TPagerButtonType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const LinkButton='LinkButton';
+	const PushButton='PushButton';
+	const ImageButton='ImageButton';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanel.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanel.php
index 5d651679..d4e05136 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanel.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanel.php
@@ -1,246 +1,246 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TPanel class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TPanelStyle class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TPanelStyle');
-
-/**
- * TPanel class
- *
- * TPanel represents a component that acts as a container for other component.
- * It is especially useful when you want to generate components programmatically
- * or hide/show a group of components.
- *
- * By default, TPanel displays a &lt;div&gt; element on a page.
- * Children of TPanel are displayed as the body content of the element.
- * The property {@link setWrap Wrap} can be used to set whether the body content
- * should wrap or not. {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign} governs how
- * the content is aligned horizontally, and {@link getDirection Direction} indicates
- * the content direction (left to right or right to left). You can set
- * {@link setBackImageUrl BackImageUrl} to give a background image to the panel,
- * and you can ste {@link setGroupingText GroupingText} so that the panel is
- * displayed as a field set with a legend text. Finally, you can specify
- * a default button to be fired when users press 'return' key within the panel
- * by setting the {@link setDefaultButton DefaultButton} property.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TPanel extends TWebControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string ID path to the default button
-	 */
-	private $_defaultButton='';
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the panel
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'div';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object to be used by the control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent impementation by creating a TPanelStyle object.
-	 * @return TPanelStyle the style used by TPanel.
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TPanelStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if default button is not right.
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if(($butt=$this->getDefaultButton())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the content wraps within the panel. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getWrap()
-	{
-		return $this->getStyle()->getWrap();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether the content wraps within the panel.
-	 * @param boolean whether the content wraps within the panel.
-	 */
-	public function setWrap($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setWrap($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel, defaults to 'NotSet'.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel.
-     * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'Justify', 'Left', 'Right', 'Center'
-	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the panel component.
-	 */
-	public function getBackImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getStyle()->getBackImageUrl();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the panel component.
-	 * @param string the URL
-	 */
-	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setBackImageUrl($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string alignment of the content in the panel. Defaults to 'NotSet'.
-	 */
-	public function getDirection()
-	{
-		return $this->getStyle()->getDirection();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string alignment of the content in the panel.
-	 * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'LeftToRight', 'RightToLeft'.
-	 */
-	public function setDirection($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setDirection($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the ID path to the default button. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getDefaultButton()
-	{
-		return $this->_defaultButton;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Specifies the default button for the panel.
-	 * The default button will be fired (clicked) whenever a user enters 'return'
-	 * key within the panel.
-	 * The button must be locatable via the function call {@link TControl::findControl findControl}.
-	 * @param string the ID path to the default button.
-	 */
-	public function setDefaultButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->_defaultButton=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the legend text when the panel is used as a fieldset. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getGroupingText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('GroupingText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the legend text. If this value is not empty, the panel will be rendered as a fieldset.
-	 */
-	public function setGroupingText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('GroupingText',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control, defaults to None.
-	 */
-	public function getScrollBars()
-	{
-		return $this->getStyle()->getScrollBars();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control.
-	 * Valid values include None, Auto, Both, Horizontal and Vertical.
-	 */
-	public function setScrollBars($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setScrollBars($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the openning tag for the control (including attributes)
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
-	{
-		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
-		if(($text=$this->getGroupingText())!=='')
-		{
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('fieldset');
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('legend');
-			$writer->write($text);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the closing tag for the control
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderEndTag($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getGroupingText()!=='')
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		parent::renderEndTag($writer);
-	}
-
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		parent::render($writer);
-
-		if(($butt=$this->getDefaultButton())!=='')
-		{
-			$buttons = $this->findControlsByID($butt);
-			if (count($buttons)>0)
-				$button = reset($buttons);
-			else
-				$button = null;
-			if($button===null)
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('panel_defaultbutton_invalid',$butt);
-			else
-				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TPanel class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TPanelStyle class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TPanelStyle');
+
+/**
+ * TPanel class
+ *
+ * TPanel represents a component that acts as a container for other component.
+ * It is especially useful when you want to generate components programmatically
+ * or hide/show a group of components.
+ *
+ * By default, TPanel displays a &lt;div&gt; element on a page.
+ * Children of TPanel are displayed as the body content of the element.
+ * The property {@link setWrap Wrap} can be used to set whether the body content
+ * should wrap or not. {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign} governs how
+ * the content is aligned horizontally, and {@link getDirection Direction} indicates
+ * the content direction (left to right or right to left). You can set
+ * {@link setBackImageUrl BackImageUrl} to give a background image to the panel,
+ * and you can ste {@link setGroupingText GroupingText} so that the panel is
+ * displayed as a field set with a legend text. Finally, you can specify
+ * a default button to be fired when users press 'return' key within the panel
+ * by setting the {@link setDefaultButton DefaultButton} property.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TPanel extends TWebControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string ID path to the default button
+	 */
+	private $_defaultButton='';
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the panel
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'div';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object to be used by the control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent impementation by creating a TPanelStyle object.
+	 * @return TPanelStyle the style used by TPanel.
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TPanelStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if default button is not right.
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if(($butt=$this->getDefaultButton())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the content wraps within the panel. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getWrap()
+	{
+		return $this->getStyle()->getWrap();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether the content wraps within the panel.
+	 * @param boolean whether the content wraps within the panel.
+	 */
+	public function setWrap($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setWrap($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel, defaults to 'NotSet'.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel.
+     * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'Justify', 'Left', 'Right', 'Center'
+	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the panel component.
+	 */
+	public function getBackImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getStyle()->getBackImageUrl();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the panel component.
+	 * @param string the URL
+	 */
+	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setBackImageUrl($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string alignment of the content in the panel. Defaults to 'NotSet'.
+	 */
+	public function getDirection()
+	{
+		return $this->getStyle()->getDirection();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string alignment of the content in the panel.
+	 * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'LeftToRight', 'RightToLeft'.
+	 */
+	public function setDirection($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setDirection($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the ID path to the default button. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getDefaultButton()
+	{
+		return $this->_defaultButton;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Specifies the default button for the panel.
+	 * The default button will be fired (clicked) whenever a user enters 'return'
+	 * key within the panel.
+	 * The button must be locatable via the function call {@link TControl::findControl findControl}.
+	 * @param string the ID path to the default button.
+	 */
+	public function setDefaultButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->_defaultButton=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the legend text when the panel is used as a fieldset. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getGroupingText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('GroupingText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the legend text. If this value is not empty, the panel will be rendered as a fieldset.
+	 */
+	public function setGroupingText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('GroupingText',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control, defaults to None.
+	 */
+	public function getScrollBars()
+	{
+		return $this->getStyle()->getScrollBars();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control.
+	 * Valid values include None, Auto, Both, Horizontal and Vertical.
+	 */
+	public function setScrollBars($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setScrollBars($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the openning tag for the control (including attributes)
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
+	{
+		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
+		if(($text=$this->getGroupingText())!=='')
+		{
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('fieldset');
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('legend');
+			$writer->write($text);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the closing tag for the control
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderEndTag($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getGroupingText()!=='')
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		parent::renderEndTag($writer);
+	}
+
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		parent::render($writer);
+
+		if(($butt=$this->getDefaultButton())!=='')
+		{
+			$buttons = $this->findControlsByID($butt);
+			if (count($buttons)>0)
+				$button = reset($buttons);
+			else
+				$button = null;
+			if($button===null)
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('panel_defaultbutton_invalid',$butt);
+			else
+				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanelStyle.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanelStyle.php
index 16169749..5e5db6e4 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanelStyle.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPanelStyle.php
@@ -1,278 +1,278 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TPanelStyle class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TPanelStyle class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TStyle class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TStyle');
-
-/**
- * TPanelStyle class.
- * TPanelStyle represents the CSS style specific for panel HTML tag.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TPanelStyle extends TStyle
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string the URL of the background image for the panel component
-	 */
-	private $_backImageUrl=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string alignment of the content in the panel.
-	 */
-	private $_direction=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel
-	 */
-	private $_horizontalAlign=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string visibility and position of scroll bars
-	 */
-	private $_scrollBars=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether the content wraps within the panel
-	 */
-	private $_wrap=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if(($url=trim($this->getBackImageUrl()))!=='')
-			$this->setStyleField('background-image','url('.$url.')');
-
-		switch($this->getScrollBars())
-		{
-			case TScrollBars::Horizontal: $this->setStyleField('overflow-x','scroll'); break;
-			case TScrollBars::Vertical: $this->setStyleField('overflow-y','scroll'); break;
-			case TScrollBars::Both: $this->setStyleField('overflow','scroll'); break;
-			case TScrollBars::Auto: $this->setStyleField('overflow','auto'); break;
-		}
-
-		if(($align=$this->getHorizontalAlign())!==THorizontalAlign::NotSet)
-			$this->setStyleField('text-align',strtolower($align));
-
-		if(!$this->getWrap())
-			$this->setStyleField('white-space','nowrap');
-
-		if(($direction=$this->getDirection())!==TContentDirection::NotSet)
-		{
-			if($direction===TContentDirection::LeftToRight)
-				$this->setStyleField('direction','ltr');
-			else
-				$this->setStyleField('direction','rtl');
-		}
-
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the panel component.
-	 */
-	public function getBackImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->_backImageUrl===null?'':$this->_backImageUrl;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the panel component.
-	 * @param string the URL
-	 */
-	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->_backImageUrl=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TContentDirection alignment of the content in the panel. Defaults to TContentDirection::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getDirection()
-	{
-		return $this->_direction===null?TContentDirection::NotSet:$this->_direction;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TContentDirection alignment of the content in the panel.
-	 */
-	public function setDirection($value)
-	{
-		$this->_direction=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TContentDirection');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the content wraps within the panel. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getWrap()
-	{
-		return $this->_wrap===null?true:$this->_wrap;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether the content wraps within the panel.
-	 * @param boolean whether the content wraps within the panel.
-	 */
-	public function setWrap($value)
-	{
-		$this->_wrap=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel, defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->_horizontalAlign===null?THorizontalAlign::NotSet:$this->_horizontalAlign;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel.
-	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->_horizontalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THorizontalAlign');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TScrollBars the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control, defaults to TScrollBars::None.
-	 */
-	public function getScrollBars()
-	{
-		return $this->_scrollBars===null?TScrollBars::None:$this->_scrollBars;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TScrollBars the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control.
-	 */
-	public function setScrollBars($value)
-	{
-		$this->_scrollBars=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TScrollBars');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
-	 * resetting additional TPanelStyle specific attributes.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		parent::reset();
-		$this->_backImageUrl=null;
-		$this->_direction=null;
-		$this->_horizontalAlign=null;
-		$this->_scrollBars=null;
-		$this->_wrap=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
-	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
-	 * in this style will be overwritten.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function copyFrom($style)
-	{
-		parent::copyFrom($style);
-		if($style instanceof TPanelStyle)
-		{
-			if($style->_backImageUrl!==null)
-				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
-			if($style->_direction!==null)
-				$this->_direction=$style->_direction;
-			if($style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
-			if($style->_scrollBars!==null)
-				$this->_scrollBars=$style->_scrollBars;
-			if($style->_wrap!==null)
-				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges the style with a new one.
-	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
-	 * the new one.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function mergeWith($style)
-	{
-		parent::mergeWith($style);
-		if($style instanceof TPanelStyle)
-		{
-			if($this->_backImageUrl===null && $style->_backImageUrl!==null)
-				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
-			if($this->_direction===null && $style->_direction!==null)
-				$this->_direction=$style->_direction;
-			if($this->_horizontalAlign===null && $style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
-			if($this->_scrollBars===null && $style->_scrollBars!==null)
-				$this->_scrollBars=$style->_scrollBars;
-			if($this->_wrap===null && $style->_wrap!==null)
-				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TContentDirection class.
- * TContentDirection defines the enumerable type for the possible directions that a panel can be at.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NotSet: the direction is not specified
- * - LeftToRight: content in a panel is left to right
- * - RightToLeft: content in a panel is right to left
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TContentDirection extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NotSet='NotSet';
-	const LeftToRight='LeftToRight';
-	const RightToLeft='RightToLeft';
-}
-
-/**
- * TScrollBars class.
- * TScrollBars defines the enumerable type for the possible scroll bar mode
- * that a {@link TPanel} control could use.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - None: no scroll bars.
- * - Auto: scroll bars automatically appeared when needed.
- * - Both: show both horizontal and vertical scroll bars all the time.
- * - Horizontal: horizontal scroll bar only
- * - Vertical: vertical scroll bar only
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TScrollBars extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const None='None';
-	const Auto='Auto';
-	const Both='Both';
-	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
-	const Vertical='Vertical';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TStyle class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TStyle');
+
+/**
+ * TPanelStyle class.
+ * TPanelStyle represents the CSS style specific for panel HTML tag.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TPanelStyle extends TStyle
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string the URL of the background image for the panel component
+	 */
+	private $_backImageUrl=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string alignment of the content in the panel.
+	 */
+	private $_direction=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel
+	 */
+	private $_horizontalAlign=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string visibility and position of scroll bars
+	 */
+	private $_scrollBars=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether the content wraps within the panel
+	 */
+	private $_wrap=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if(($url=trim($this->getBackImageUrl()))!=='')
+			$this->setStyleField('background-image','url('.$url.')');
+
+		switch($this->getScrollBars())
+		{
+			case TScrollBars::Horizontal: $this->setStyleField('overflow-x','scroll'); break;
+			case TScrollBars::Vertical: $this->setStyleField('overflow-y','scroll'); break;
+			case TScrollBars::Both: $this->setStyleField('overflow','scroll'); break;
+			case TScrollBars::Auto: $this->setStyleField('overflow','auto'); break;
+		}
+
+		if(($align=$this->getHorizontalAlign())!==THorizontalAlign::NotSet)
+			$this->setStyleField('text-align',strtolower($align));
+
+		if(!$this->getWrap())
+			$this->setStyleField('white-space','nowrap');
+
+		if(($direction=$this->getDirection())!==TContentDirection::NotSet)
+		{
+			if($direction===TContentDirection::LeftToRight)
+				$this->setStyleField('direction','ltr');
+			else
+				$this->setStyleField('direction','rtl');
+		}
+
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the panel component.
+	 */
+	public function getBackImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->_backImageUrl===null?'':$this->_backImageUrl;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the panel component.
+	 * @param string the URL
+	 */
+	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->_backImageUrl=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TContentDirection alignment of the content in the panel. Defaults to TContentDirection::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getDirection()
+	{
+		return $this->_direction===null?TContentDirection::NotSet:$this->_direction;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TContentDirection alignment of the content in the panel.
+	 */
+	public function setDirection($value)
+	{
+		$this->_direction=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TContentDirection');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the content wraps within the panel. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getWrap()
+	{
+		return $this->_wrap===null?true:$this->_wrap;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether the content wraps within the panel.
+	 * @param boolean whether the content wraps within the panel.
+	 */
+	public function setWrap($value)
+	{
+		$this->_wrap=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel, defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->_horizontalAlign===null?THorizontalAlign::NotSet:$this->_horizontalAlign;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the panel.
+	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->_horizontalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THorizontalAlign');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TScrollBars the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control, defaults to TScrollBars::None.
+	 */
+	public function getScrollBars()
+	{
+		return $this->_scrollBars===null?TScrollBars::None:$this->_scrollBars;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TScrollBars the visibility and position of scroll bars in a panel control.
+	 */
+	public function setScrollBars($value)
+	{
+		$this->_scrollBars=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TScrollBars');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
+	 * resetting additional TPanelStyle specific attributes.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		parent::reset();
+		$this->_backImageUrl=null;
+		$this->_direction=null;
+		$this->_horizontalAlign=null;
+		$this->_scrollBars=null;
+		$this->_wrap=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
+	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
+	 * in this style will be overwritten.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function copyFrom($style)
+	{
+		parent::copyFrom($style);
+		if($style instanceof TPanelStyle)
+		{
+			if($style->_backImageUrl!==null)
+				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
+			if($style->_direction!==null)
+				$this->_direction=$style->_direction;
+			if($style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
+			if($style->_scrollBars!==null)
+				$this->_scrollBars=$style->_scrollBars;
+			if($style->_wrap!==null)
+				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges the style with a new one.
+	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
+	 * the new one.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function mergeWith($style)
+	{
+		parent::mergeWith($style);
+		if($style instanceof TPanelStyle)
+		{
+			if($this->_backImageUrl===null && $style->_backImageUrl!==null)
+				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
+			if($this->_direction===null && $style->_direction!==null)
+				$this->_direction=$style->_direction;
+			if($this->_horizontalAlign===null && $style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
+			if($this->_scrollBars===null && $style->_scrollBars!==null)
+				$this->_scrollBars=$style->_scrollBars;
+			if($this->_wrap===null && $style->_wrap!==null)
+				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TContentDirection class.
+ * TContentDirection defines the enumerable type for the possible directions that a panel can be at.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NotSet: the direction is not specified
+ * - LeftToRight: content in a panel is left to right
+ * - RightToLeft: content in a panel is right to left
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TContentDirection extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NotSet='NotSet';
+	const LeftToRight='LeftToRight';
+	const RightToLeft='RightToLeft';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TScrollBars class.
+ * TScrollBars defines the enumerable type for the possible scroll bar mode
+ * that a {@link TPanel} control could use.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - None: no scroll bars.
+ * - Auto: scroll bars automatically appeared when needed.
+ * - Both: show both horizontal and vertical scroll bars all the time.
+ * - Horizontal: horizontal scroll bar only
+ * - Vertical: vertical scroll bar only
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TScrollBars extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const None='None';
+	const Auto='Auto';
+	const Both='Both';
+	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
+	const Vertical='Vertical';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPlaceHolder.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPlaceHolder.php
index ac67cef7..585e9e99 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPlaceHolder.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TPlaceHolder.php
@@ -1,28 +1,28 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TPlaceHolder class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TPlaceHolder class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TPlaceHolder class
- *
- * TPlaceHolder reserves a place on a template, where static texts or controls
- * may be inserted. You may add or remove texts or child controls of TPlaceHolder
- * by manipulating the {@link TControl::getControls Controls} property.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TPlaceHolder extends TControl
-{
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TPlaceHolder class
+ *
+ * TPlaceHolder reserves a place on a template, where static texts or controls
+ * may be inserted. You may add or remove texts or child controls of TPlaceHolder
+ * by manipulating the {@link TControl::getControls Controls} property.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TPlaceHolder extends TControl
+{
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRadioButton.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRadioButton.php
index b90cfcf5..6a2347f4 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRadioButton.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRadioButton.php
@@ -1,320 +1,320 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TRadioButton class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TRadioButton class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TCheckBox parent class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCheckBox');
-/**
- * Using TRadioButtonList class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRadioButtonList');
-
-/**
- * TRadioButton class
- *
- * TRadioButton displays a radio button on the page.
- * You can specify the caption to display beside the radio buttonby setting
- * the {@link setText Text} property.  The caption can appear either on the right
- * or left of the radio button, which is determined by the {@link setTextAlign TextAlign}
- * property.
- *
- * To determine whether the TRadioButton component is checked, test the {@link getChecked Checked}
- * property. The {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event is raised when
- * the {@link getChecked Checked} state of the TRadioButton component changes
- * between posts to the server. You can provide an event handler for
- * the {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event to  to programmatically
- * control the actions performed when the state of the TRadioButton component changes
- * between posts to the server.
- *
- * TRadioButton uses {@link setGroupName GroupName} to group together a set of radio buttons.
- * Once the {@link setGroupName GroupName} is set, you can use the {@link getRadioButtonsInGroup}
- * method to get an array of TRadioButtons having the same group name.
- *
- * If {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} is set true, changing the radio button state
- * will cause postback action. And if {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation}
- * is true, validation will also be processed, which can be further restricted within
- * a {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}.
- *
- * Note, {@link setText Text} is rendered as is. Make sure it does not contain unwanted characters
- * that may bring security vulnerabilities.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRadioButton extends TCheckBox
-{
-	/**
-	 * @param array list of radio buttons that are on the current page hierarchy
-	 */
-	private static $_activeButtons=array();
-	/**
-	 * @var integer number of radio buttons created
-	 */
-	private static $_buttonCount=0;
-	/**
-	 * @var integer global ID of this radiobutton
-	 */
-	private $_globalID;
-	/**
-	 * @var string previous UniqueID (used to calculate UniqueGroup)
-	 */
-	private $_previousUniqueID=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string the name used to fetch radiobutton post data
-	 */
-	private $_uniqueGroupName=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * Registers the radiobutton in a global radiobutton collection.
-	 * If overridden, the parent implementation must be invoked first.
-	 */
-	public function __construct()
-	{
-		parent::__construct();
-		$this->_globalID = self::$_buttonCount++;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the radio button groupings. If overriding onInit method,
-	 * ensure to call parent implemenation.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onInit($param)
-	{
-		parent::onInit($param);
-		self::$_activeButtons[$this->_globalID]=$this;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Unregisters the radio button groupings. If overriding onInit method,
-	 * ensure to call parent implemenation.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onUnLoad($param)
-	{
-		unset(self::$_activeButtons[$this->_globalID]);
-		parent::onUnLoad($param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		$uniqueGroupName=$this->getUniqueGroupName();
-		$value=isset($values[$uniqueGroupName])?$values[$uniqueGroupName]:null;
-		if($value!==null && $value===$this->getValueAttribute())
-		{
-			if(!$this->getChecked())
-			{
-				$this->setChecked(true);
-				return true;
-			}
-			else
-				return false;
-		}
-		else if($this->getChecked())
-			$this->setChecked(false);
-		return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the name of the group that the radio button belongs to. Defaults to empty.
-	 */
-	public function getGroupName()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('GroupName','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the name of the group that the radio button belongs to.
-	 * The group is unique among the control's naming container.
-	 * @param string the group name
-	 * @see setUniqueGroupName
-	 */
-	public function setGroupName($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('GroupName',$value,'');
-		$this->_uniqueGroupName=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Add the group name as post data loader if group name is set.
-	 */
-	protected function addToPostDataLoader()
-	{
-		parent::addToPostDataLoader();
-		$group = $this->getGroupName();
-		if(!empty($group) || $this->getViewState('UniqueGroupName','') !== '')
-			$this->getPage()->registerPostDataLoader($this->getUniqueGroupName());
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @return string the name used to fetch radiobutton post data
-	 */
-	public function getUniqueGroupName()
-	{
-		if(($groupName=$this->getViewState('UniqueGroupName',''))!=='')
-			return $groupName;
-		else if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!==$this->_previousUniqueID || $this->_uniqueGroupName===null)
-		{
-			$groupName=$this->getGroupName();
-			$this->_previousUniqueID=$uniqueID;
-			if($uniqueID!=='')
-			{
-				if(($pos=strrpos($uniqueID,TControl::ID_SEPARATOR))!==false)
-				{
-					if($groupName!=='')
-						$groupName=substr($uniqueID,0,$pos+1).$groupName;
-					else if($this->getNamingContainer() instanceof TRadioButtonList)
-						$groupName=substr($uniqueID,0,$pos);
-				}
-				if($groupName==='')
-					$groupName=$uniqueID;
-			}
-			$this->_uniqueGroupName=$groupName;
-		}
-		return $this->_uniqueGroupName;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the unique group name that the radio button belongs to.
-	 * A unique group is a radiobutton group unique among the whole page hierarchy,
-	 * while the {@link setGroupName GroupName} specifies a group that is unique
-	 * among the control's naming container only.
-	 * For example, each cell of a {@link TDataGrid} is a naming container.
-	 * If you specify {@link setGroupName GroupName} for a radiobutton in a cell,
-	 * it groups together radiobutton within a cell, but not the other, even though
-	 * they have the same {@link setGroupName GroupName}.
-	 * On the contratry, if {@link setUniqueGroupName UniqueGroupName} is used instead,
-	 * it will group all appropriate radio buttons on the whole page hierarchy.
-	 * Note, when both {@link setUniqueGroupName UniqueGroupName} and
-	 * {@link setGroupName GroupName}, the former takes precedence.
-	 * @param string the group name
-	 * @see setGroupName
-	 */
-	public function setUniqueGroupName($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('UniqueGroupName',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets an array of radiobuttons whose group name is the same as this radiobutton's.
-	 * Note, only those radiobuttons that are on the current page hierarchy may be
-	 * returned in the result.
-	 * @return array list of TRadioButton with the same group
-	 */
-	public function getRadioButtonsInGroup()
-	{
-		$group = $this->getUniqueGroupName();
-		$buttons = array();
-		foreach(self::$_activeButtons as $control)
-		{
-			if($control->getUniqueGroupName() === $group)
-				$buttons[] = $control;
-		}
-		return $buttons;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the value attribute to be rendered
-	 */
-	protected function getValueAttribute()
-	{
-		if(($value=parent::getValueAttribute())==='')
-			return $this->getUniqueID();
-		else
-			return $value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders a radiobutton input element.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param string checkbox id
-	 * @param string onclick js
-	 */
-	protected function renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick)
-	{
-		if($clientID!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('id',$clientID);
-		$writer->addAttribute('type','radio');
-		$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueGroupName());
-		$writer->addAttribute('value',$this->getValueAttribute());
-		if(!empty($onclick))
-			$writer->addAttribute('onclick',$onclick);
-		if($this->getChecked())
-			$writer->addAttribute('checked','checked');
-		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		if($this->getEnabled(true)
-			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
-			&& $this->getAutoPostBack()
-			&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-		{
-			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-		}
-
-		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
-		if(($tabindex=$this->getTabIndex())>0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('tabindex',"$tabindex");
-		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null))
-			$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the client-script code.
-	 */
-	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
-	{
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRadioButton';
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TCheckBox parent class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TCheckBox');
+/**
+ * Using TRadioButtonList class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRadioButtonList');
+
+/**
+ * TRadioButton class
+ *
+ * TRadioButton displays a radio button on the page.
+ * You can specify the caption to display beside the radio buttonby setting
+ * the {@link setText Text} property.  The caption can appear either on the right
+ * or left of the radio button, which is determined by the {@link setTextAlign TextAlign}
+ * property.
+ *
+ * To determine whether the TRadioButton component is checked, test the {@link getChecked Checked}
+ * property. The {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event is raised when
+ * the {@link getChecked Checked} state of the TRadioButton component changes
+ * between posts to the server. You can provide an event handler for
+ * the {@link onCheckedChanged OnCheckedChanged} event to  to programmatically
+ * control the actions performed when the state of the TRadioButton component changes
+ * between posts to the server.
+ *
+ * TRadioButton uses {@link setGroupName GroupName} to group together a set of radio buttons.
+ * Once the {@link setGroupName GroupName} is set, you can use the {@link getRadioButtonsInGroup}
+ * method to get an array of TRadioButtons having the same group name.
+ *
+ * If {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} is set true, changing the radio button state
+ * will cause postback action. And if {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation}
+ * is true, validation will also be processed, which can be further restricted within
+ * a {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}.
+ *
+ * Note, {@link setText Text} is rendered as is. Make sure it does not contain unwanted characters
+ * that may bring security vulnerabilities.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRadioButton extends TCheckBox
+{
+	/**
+	 * @param array list of radio buttons that are on the current page hierarchy
+	 */
+	private static $_activeButtons=array();
+	/**
+	 * @var integer number of radio buttons created
+	 */
+	private static $_buttonCount=0;
+	/**
+	 * @var integer global ID of this radiobutton
+	 */
+	private $_globalID;
+	/**
+	 * @var string previous UniqueID (used to calculate UniqueGroup)
+	 */
+	private $_previousUniqueID=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string the name used to fetch radiobutton post data
+	 */
+	private $_uniqueGroupName=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * Registers the radiobutton in a global radiobutton collection.
+	 * If overridden, the parent implementation must be invoked first.
+	 */
+	public function __construct()
+	{
+		parent::__construct();
+		$this->_globalID = self::$_buttonCount++;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the radio button groupings. If overriding onInit method,
+	 * ensure to call parent implemenation.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onInit($param)
+	{
+		parent::onInit($param);
+		self::$_activeButtons[$this->_globalID]=$this;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Unregisters the radio button groupings. If overriding onInit method,
+	 * ensure to call parent implemenation.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onUnLoad($param)
+	{
+		unset(self::$_activeButtons[$this->_globalID]);
+		parent::onUnLoad($param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the control has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		$uniqueGroupName=$this->getUniqueGroupName();
+		$value=isset($values[$uniqueGroupName])?$values[$uniqueGroupName]:null;
+		if($value!==null && $value===$this->getValueAttribute())
+		{
+			if(!$this->getChecked())
+			{
+				$this->setChecked(true);
+				return true;
+			}
+			else
+				return false;
+		}
+		else if($this->getChecked())
+			$this->setChecked(false);
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the name of the group that the radio button belongs to. Defaults to empty.
+	 */
+	public function getGroupName()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('GroupName','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the name of the group that the radio button belongs to.
+	 * The group is unique among the control's naming container.
+	 * @param string the group name
+	 * @see setUniqueGroupName
+	 */
+	public function setGroupName($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('GroupName',$value,'');
+		$this->_uniqueGroupName=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Add the group name as post data loader if group name is set.
+	 */
+	protected function addToPostDataLoader()
+	{
+		parent::addToPostDataLoader();
+		$group = $this->getGroupName();
+		if(!empty($group) || $this->getViewState('UniqueGroupName','') !== '')
+			$this->getPage()->registerPostDataLoader($this->getUniqueGroupName());
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @return string the name used to fetch radiobutton post data
+	 */
+	public function getUniqueGroupName()
+	{
+		if(($groupName=$this->getViewState('UniqueGroupName',''))!=='')
+			return $groupName;
+		else if(($uniqueID=$this->getUniqueID())!==$this->_previousUniqueID || $this->_uniqueGroupName===null)
+		{
+			$groupName=$this->getGroupName();
+			$this->_previousUniqueID=$uniqueID;
+			if($uniqueID!=='')
+			{
+				if(($pos=strrpos($uniqueID,TControl::ID_SEPARATOR))!==false)
+				{
+					if($groupName!=='')
+						$groupName=substr($uniqueID,0,$pos+1).$groupName;
+					else if($this->getNamingContainer() instanceof TRadioButtonList)
+						$groupName=substr($uniqueID,0,$pos);
+				}
+				if($groupName==='')
+					$groupName=$uniqueID;
+			}
+			$this->_uniqueGroupName=$groupName;
+		}
+		return $this->_uniqueGroupName;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the unique group name that the radio button belongs to.
+	 * A unique group is a radiobutton group unique among the whole page hierarchy,
+	 * while the {@link setGroupName GroupName} specifies a group that is unique
+	 * among the control's naming container only.
+	 * For example, each cell of a {@link TDataGrid} is a naming container.
+	 * If you specify {@link setGroupName GroupName} for a radiobutton in a cell,
+	 * it groups together radiobutton within a cell, but not the other, even though
+	 * they have the same {@link setGroupName GroupName}.
+	 * On the contratry, if {@link setUniqueGroupName UniqueGroupName} is used instead,
+	 * it will group all appropriate radio buttons on the whole page hierarchy.
+	 * Note, when both {@link setUniqueGroupName UniqueGroupName} and
+	 * {@link setGroupName GroupName}, the former takes precedence.
+	 * @param string the group name
+	 * @see setGroupName
+	 */
+	public function setUniqueGroupName($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('UniqueGroupName',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets an array of radiobuttons whose group name is the same as this radiobutton's.
+	 * Note, only those radiobuttons that are on the current page hierarchy may be
+	 * returned in the result.
+	 * @return array list of TRadioButton with the same group
+	 */
+	public function getRadioButtonsInGroup()
+	{
+		$group = $this->getUniqueGroupName();
+		$buttons = array();
+		foreach(self::$_activeButtons as $control)
+		{
+			if($control->getUniqueGroupName() === $group)
+				$buttons[] = $control;
+		}
+		return $buttons;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the value attribute to be rendered
+	 */
+	protected function getValueAttribute()
+	{
+		if(($value=parent::getValueAttribute())==='')
+			return $this->getUniqueID();
+		else
+			return $value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders a radiobutton input element.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param string checkbox id
+	 * @param string onclick js
+	 */
+	protected function renderInputTag($writer,$clientID,$onclick)
+	{
+		if($clientID!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('id',$clientID);
+		$writer->addAttribute('type','radio');
+		$writer->addAttribute('name',$this->getUniqueGroupName());
+		$writer->addAttribute('value',$this->getValueAttribute());
+		if(!empty($onclick))
+			$writer->addAttribute('onclick',$onclick);
+		if($this->getChecked())
+			$writer->addAttribute('checked','checked');
+		if(!$this->getEnabled(true))
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		if($this->getEnabled(true)
+			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
+			&& $this->getAutoPostBack()
+			&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+		{
+			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+		}
+
+		if(($accesskey=$this->getAccessKey())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('accesskey',$accesskey);
+		if(($tabindex=$this->getTabIndex())>0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('tabindex',"$tabindex");
+		if($attributes=$this->getViewState('InputAttributes',null))
+			$writer->addAttributes($attributes);
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('input');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the client-script code.
+	 */
+	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
+	{
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRadioButton';
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRangeValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRangeValidator.php
index d8d2d20d..57538e88 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRangeValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRangeValidator.php
@@ -1,360 +1,360 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TRangeValidator class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TRangeValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TBaseValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-
-/**
- * TRangeValidator class
- *
- * TRangeValidator tests whether an input value is within a specified range.
- *
- * TRangeValidator uses three key properties to perform its validation.
- * The {@link setMinValue MinValue} and {@link setMaxValue MaxValue}
- * properties specify the minimum and maximum values of the valid range.
- * The {@link setDataType DataType} property is used to specify the
- * data type of the value and the minimum and maximum range values.
- * These values are converted to this data type before the validation
- * operation is performed. The following value types are supported:
- * - <b>Integer</b> A 32-bit signed integer data type.
- * - <b>Float</b> A double-precision floating point number data type.
- * - <b>Date</b> A date data type. The date format can be specified by
- *   setting {@link setDateFormat DateFormat} property, which must be recognizable
- *   by {@link TSimpleDateFormatter}. If the property is not set,
- *   the GNU date syntax is assumed.
- * - <b>String</b> A string data type.
- * - <b>StringLength</b> check for string length.
- *
- * If {@link setStrictComparison StrictComparison} is true, then the ranges
- * are compared as strictly less than the max value and/or strictly greater than the min value.
- *
- * The TRangeValidator allows a special DataType "StringLength" that
- * can be used to verify minimum and maximum string length. The
- * {@link setCharset Charset} property can be used to force a particular
- * charset for comparison. Otherwise, the application charset is used and is
- * defaulted as UTF-8.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRangeValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRangeValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the minimum value of the validation range.
-	 */
-	public function getMinValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MinValue','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the minimum value of the validation range.
-	 * @param string the minimum value
-	 */
-	public function setMinValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('MinValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the maximum value of the validation range.
-	 */
-	public function getMaxValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MaxValue','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the maximum value of the validation range.
-	 * @param string the maximum value
-	 */
-	public function setMaxValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('MaxValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean true to perform strict comparison (i.e. strictly less than max and/or strictly greater than min).
-	 */
-	public function setStrictComparison($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('StrictComparison', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean true to perform strict comparison.
-	 */
-	public function getStrictComparison()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('StrictComparison', false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRangeValidationDataType the data type that the values being compared are
-	 * converted to before the comparison is made. Defaults to TRangeValidationDataType::String.
-	 */
-	public function getDataType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataType',TRangeValidationDataType::String);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made.
-	 * @param TRangeValidationDataType the data type
-	 */
-	public function setDataType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TRangeValidationDataType'),TRangeValidationDataType::String);
-	}
-
-	/**
-     * Sets the date format for a date validation
-     * @param string the date format value
-     */
-	public function setDateFormat($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DateFormat', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the date validation date format if any
-	 */
-	public function getDateFormat()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string charset for string length comparison.
-	 */
-	public function setCharset($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Charset', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string charset for string length comparison.
-	 */
-	public function getCharset()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Charset', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input data is within the range.
-	 * The validation always succeeds if the input data is empty.
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	protected function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		$value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget());
-		if($value==='')
-			return true;
-
-		switch($this->getDataType())
-		{
-			case TRangeValidationDataType::Integer:
-				return $this->isValidInteger($value);
-			case TRangeValidationDataType::Float:
-				return $this->isValidFloat($value);
-			case TRangeValidationDataType::Date:
-				return $this->isValidDate($value);
-			case TRangeValidationDataType::StringLength:
-				return $this->isValidStringLength($value);
-			default:
-				return $this->isValidString($value);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	* Determine if the value is within the integer range.
-	* @param string value to validate true
-	* @return boolean true if within integer range.
-	*/
-	protected function isValidInteger($value)
-	{
-		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
-		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TBaseValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TRangeValidator class
+ *
+ * TRangeValidator tests whether an input value is within a specified range.
+ *
+ * TRangeValidator uses three key properties to perform its validation.
+ * The {@link setMinValue MinValue} and {@link setMaxValue MaxValue}
+ * properties specify the minimum and maximum values of the valid range.
+ * The {@link setDataType DataType} property is used to specify the
+ * data type of the value and the minimum and maximum range values.
+ * These values are converted to this data type before the validation
+ * operation is performed. The following value types are supported:
+ * - <b>Integer</b> A 32-bit signed integer data type.
+ * - <b>Float</b> A double-precision floating point number data type.
+ * - <b>Date</b> A date data type. The date format can be specified by
+ *   setting {@link setDateFormat DateFormat} property, which must be recognizable
+ *   by {@link TSimpleDateFormatter}. If the property is not set,
+ *   the GNU date syntax is assumed.
+ * - <b>String</b> A string data type.
+ * - <b>StringLength</b> check for string length.
+ *
+ * If {@link setStrictComparison StrictComparison} is true, then the ranges
+ * are compared as strictly less than the max value and/or strictly greater than the min value.
+ *
+ * The TRangeValidator allows a special DataType "StringLength" that
+ * can be used to verify minimum and maximum string length. The
+ * {@link setCharset Charset} property can be used to force a particular
+ * charset for comparison. Otherwise, the application charset is used and is
+ * defaulted as UTF-8.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRangeValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRangeValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the minimum value of the validation range.
+	 */
+	public function getMinValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MinValue','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the minimum value of the validation range.
+	 * @param string the minimum value
+	 */
+	public function setMinValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('MinValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the maximum value of the validation range.
+	 */
+	public function getMaxValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MaxValue','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the maximum value of the validation range.
+	 * @param string the maximum value
+	 */
+	public function setMaxValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('MaxValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean true to perform strict comparison (i.e. strictly less than max and/or strictly greater than min).
+	 */
+	public function setStrictComparison($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('StrictComparison', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean true to perform strict comparison.
+	 */
+	public function getStrictComparison()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('StrictComparison', false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRangeValidationDataType the data type that the values being compared are
+	 * converted to before the comparison is made. Defaults to TRangeValidationDataType::String.
+	 */
+	public function getDataType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataType',TRangeValidationDataType::String);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the data type that the values being compared are converted to before the comparison is made.
+	 * @param TRangeValidationDataType the data type
+	 */
+	public function setDataType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TRangeValidationDataType'),TRangeValidationDataType::String);
+	}
+
+	/**
+     * Sets the date format for a date validation
+     * @param string the date format value
+     */
+	public function setDateFormat($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DateFormat', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the date validation date format if any
+	 */
+	public function getDateFormat()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DateFormat', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string charset for string length comparison.
+	 */
+	public function setCharset($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Charset', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string charset for string length comparison.
+	 */
+	public function getCharset()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Charset', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input data is within the range.
+	 * The validation always succeeds if the input data is empty.
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	protected function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		$value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget());
+		if($value==='')
+			return true;
+
+		switch($this->getDataType())
+		{
+			case TRangeValidationDataType::Integer:
+				return $this->isValidInteger($value);
+			case TRangeValidationDataType::Float:
+				return $this->isValidFloat($value);
+			case TRangeValidationDataType::Date:
+				return $this->isValidDate($value);
+			case TRangeValidationDataType::StringLength:
+				return $this->isValidStringLength($value);
+			default:
+				return $this->isValidString($value);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	* Determine if the value is within the integer range.
+	* @param string value to validate true
+	* @return boolean true if within integer range.
+	*/
+	protected function isValidInteger($value)
+	{
+		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
+		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
+
 		$valid=preg_match('/^[-+]?[0-9]+$/',trim($value));
-		$value=intval($value);
-		if($minValue!=='')
-			$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value, intval($minValue));
-		if($maxValue!=='')
-			$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,intval($maxValue));
-		return $valid;
-	}
-
-	protected function isLessThan($left,$right)
-	{
-		return $this->getStrictComparison() ? $left < $right : $left <= $right;
-	}
-
-	protected function isGreaterThan($left, $right)
-	{
-		return $this->getStrictComparison() ? $left > $right : $left >= $right;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Determine if the value is within the specified float range.
-	 * @param string value to validate
-	 * @return boolean true if within range.
-	 */
-	protected function isValidFloat($value)
-	{
-		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
-		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
-
-		$valid=preg_match('/^[-+]?([0-9]*\.)?[0-9]+([eE][-+]?[0-9]+)?$/',trim($value));
-		$value=floatval($value);
-		if($minValue!=='')
-			$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value,floatval($minValue));
-		if($maxValue!=='')
-			$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,floatval($maxValue));
-		return $valid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Determine if the date is within the specified range.
-	 * Uses pradoParseDate and strtotime to get the date from string.
-	 * @param string date as string to validate
-	 * @return boolean true if within range.
-	 */
-	protected function isValidDate($value)
-	{
-		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
-		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
-
-		$valid=true;
-
-		$dateFormat = $this->getDateFormat();
-		if($dateFormat!=='')
-		{
-			$formatter=Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter', $dateFormat);
-			$value = $formatter->parse($value, $dateFormat);
-			if($minValue!=='')
-				$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value,$formatter->parse($minValue));
-			if($maxValue!=='')
-				$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,$formatter->parse($maxValue));
-			return $valid;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$value=strtotime($value);
-			if($minValue!=='')
-				$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value,strtotime($minValue));
-			if($maxValue!=='')
-				$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,strtotime($maxValue));
-			return $valid;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Compare the string with a minimum and a maxiumum value.
-	 * Uses strcmp for comparision.
-	 * @param string value to compare with.
-	 * @return boolean true if the string is within range.
-	 */
-	protected function isValidString($value)
-	{
-		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
-		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
-
-		$valid=true;
-		if($minValue!=='')
-			$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan(strcmp($value,$minValue),0);
-		if($maxValue!=='')
-			$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan(strcmp($value,$maxValue),0);
-		return $valid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string string for comparision
-	 * @return boolean true if min and max string length are satisfied.
-	 */
-	protected function isValidStringLength($value)
-	{
-		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
-		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
-
-		$valid=true;
-		$charset = $this->getCharset();
-		if($charset==='')
-		{
-			$app= $this->getApplication()->getGlobalization();
-			$charset = $app ? $app->getCharset() : null;
-			if(!$charset)
-				$charset = 'UTF-8';
-		}
-
-		$length = iconv_strlen($value, $charset);
-		if($minValue!=='')
-			$valid = $valid && $this->isGreaterThan($length,intval($minValue));
-		if($maxValue!=='')
-			$valid = $valid && $this->isLessThan($length,intval($maxValue));
-		return $valid;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options=parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		$options['MinValue']=$this->getMinValue();
-		$options['MaxValue']=$this->getMaxValue();
-		$options['DataType']=$this->getDataType();
-		$options['StrictComparison']=$this->getStrictComparison();
-		if(($dateFormat=$this->getDateFormat())!=='')
-			$options['DateFormat']=$dateFormat;
-		return $options;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TRangeValidationDataType class.
- * TRangeValidationDataType defines the enumerable type for the possible data types that
- * a range validator can validate upon.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Integer
- * - Float
- * - Date
- * - String
- * - StringLength
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TRangeValidationDataType extends TValidationDataType
-{
-	const StringLength='StringLength';
-}
+		$value=intval($value);
+		if($minValue!=='')
+			$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value, intval($minValue));
+		if($maxValue!=='')
+			$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,intval($maxValue));
+		return $valid;
+	}
+
+	protected function isLessThan($left,$right)
+	{
+		return $this->getStrictComparison() ? $left < $right : $left <= $right;
+	}
+
+	protected function isGreaterThan($left, $right)
+	{
+		return $this->getStrictComparison() ? $left > $right : $left >= $right;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Determine if the value is within the specified float range.
+	 * @param string value to validate
+	 * @return boolean true if within range.
+	 */
+	protected function isValidFloat($value)
+	{
+		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
+		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
+
+		$valid=preg_match('/^[-+]?([0-9]*\.)?[0-9]+([eE][-+]?[0-9]+)?$/',trim($value));
+		$value=floatval($value);
+		if($minValue!=='')
+			$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value,floatval($minValue));
+		if($maxValue!=='')
+			$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,floatval($maxValue));
+		return $valid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Determine if the date is within the specified range.
+	 * Uses pradoParseDate and strtotime to get the date from string.
+	 * @param string date as string to validate
+	 * @return boolean true if within range.
+	 */
+	protected function isValidDate($value)
+	{
+		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
+		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
+
+		$valid=true;
+
+		$dateFormat = $this->getDateFormat();
+		if($dateFormat!=='')
+		{
+			$formatter=Prado::createComponent('System.Util.TSimpleDateFormatter', $dateFormat);
+			$value = $formatter->parse($value, $dateFormat);
+			if($minValue!=='')
+				$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value,$formatter->parse($minValue));
+			if($maxValue!=='')
+				$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,$formatter->parse($maxValue));
+			return $valid;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$value=strtotime($value);
+			if($minValue!=='')
+				$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan($value,strtotime($minValue));
+			if($maxValue!=='')
+				$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan($value,strtotime($maxValue));
+			return $valid;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Compare the string with a minimum and a maxiumum value.
+	 * Uses strcmp for comparision.
+	 * @param string value to compare with.
+	 * @return boolean true if the string is within range.
+	 */
+	protected function isValidString($value)
+	{
+		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
+		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
+
+		$valid=true;
+		if($minValue!=='')
+			$valid=$valid && $this->isGreaterThan(strcmp($value,$minValue),0);
+		if($maxValue!=='')
+			$valid=$valid && $this->isLessThan(strcmp($value,$maxValue),0);
+		return $valid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string string for comparision
+	 * @return boolean true if min and max string length are satisfied.
+	 */
+	protected function isValidStringLength($value)
+	{
+		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
+		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
+
+		$valid=true;
+		$charset = $this->getCharset();
+		if($charset==='')
+		{
+			$app= $this->getApplication()->getGlobalization();
+			$charset = $app ? $app->getCharset() : null;
+			if(!$charset)
+				$charset = 'UTF-8';
+		}
+
+		$length = iconv_strlen($value, $charset);
+		if($minValue!=='')
+			$valid = $valid && $this->isGreaterThan($length,intval($minValue));
+		if($maxValue!=='')
+			$valid = $valid && $this->isLessThan($length,intval($maxValue));
+		return $valid;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options=parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		$options['MinValue']=$this->getMinValue();
+		$options['MaxValue']=$this->getMaxValue();
+		$options['DataType']=$this->getDataType();
+		$options['StrictComparison']=$this->getStrictComparison();
+		if(($dateFormat=$this->getDateFormat())!=='')
+			$options['DateFormat']=$dateFormat;
+		return $options;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TRangeValidationDataType class.
+ * TRangeValidationDataType defines the enumerable type for the possible data types that
+ * a range validator can validate upon.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Integer
+ * - Float
+ * - Date
+ * - String
+ * - StringLength
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TRangeValidationDataType extends TValidationDataType
+{
+	const StringLength='StringLength';
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRatingList.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRatingList.php
index dfb11371..cc813755 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRatingList.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRatingList.php
@@ -1,359 +1,359 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TRatingList class file.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TRadioButtonList class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRadioButtonList');
-
-/**
- * TRatingList class.
- *
- * This class is EXPERIMENTAL.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @author Bradley Booms <bradley[dot]booms[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRatingList extends TRadioButtonList
-{
-	/**
-	 * Script path relative to the TClientScriptManager::SCRIPT_PATH
-	 */
-	const SCRIPT_PATH='prado/ratings';
-
-	/**
-	 * @var array list of published rating images.
-	 */
-	private $_ratingImages = array();
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the default repeat direction to horizontal.
-	 */
-	public function __construct()
-	{
-		parent::__construct();
-		$this->setRepeatDirection(TRepeatDirection::Horizontal);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getReadOnly()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
-	 */
-	public function setReadOnly($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Wrapper for {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property.
-	 * @return boolean whether the rating list can be edited. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getAllowInput()
-	{
-		return !$this->getReadOnly();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Wrapper for {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property.
-	 * @param boolean whether the rating list can be edited
-	 */
-	public function setAllowInput($value)
-	{
-		$this->setReadOnly(!TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Wrapper for {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property.
-	 * @param boolean whether the rating list can be edited
-	 */
-	public function setEnabled($value)
-	{
-		$this->setReadOnly(!TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * The repeat layout must be Table.
-	 * @param string repeat layout type
-	 * @throws TInvaliddataValueException when repeat layout is not Table.
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
-	{
-		if($value!==TRepeatLayout::Table)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('ratinglist_table_layout_only');
-		else
-			parent::setRepeatLayout($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return float rating value.
-	 */
-	public function getRating()
-	{
-		$rating = $this->getViewState('Rating', null);
-		if ($rating === null)
-			return $this->getSelectedIndex()+1;
-		else
-			return $rating;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param float rating value, also sets the selected Index
-	 */
-	public function setRating($value)
-	{
-		$value = TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value);
-		$this->setViewState('Rating', $value, null);
-		$index = $this->getRatingIndex($value);
-		parent::setSelectedIndex($index);
-	}
-	
-	public function setSelectedIndex($value)
-	{
-		$this->setRating($value+1);
-		parent::setSelectedIndex($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param float rating value
-	 * @return int rating as integer
-	 */
-	protected function getRatingIndex($rating)
-	{
-		$interval = $this->getHalfRatingInterval();
-		$base = intval($rating)-1;
-		$remainder = $rating-$base-1;
-		return $remainder > $interval[1] ? $base+1 : $base;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param int change the rating selection index
-	 */
-	public function onSelectedIndexChanged($param)
-	{
-		$value = $this->getRating();
-		$value = TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-		$this->setRating($value);
-		parent::onSelectedIndexChanged($param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string control or html element ID for displaying a caption.
-	 */
-	public function getCaptionID()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CaptionID', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string control or html element ID for displaying a caption.
-	 */
-	public function setCaptionID($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CaptionID', $value, '');
-	}
-
-	protected function getCaptionControl()
-	{
-		if(($id=$this->getCaptionID())!=='')
-		{
-			if($control=$this->getParent()->findControl($id))
-				return $control;
-		}
-		throw new TInvalidDataValueException(
-			'ratinglist_invalid_caption_id',$id,$this->getID());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string caption text. Default is "Rate It:".
-	 */
-	public function getCaption()
-	{
-		return $this->getCaptionControl()->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRatingListStyle current rating style
-	 */
- 	public function setCaption($value)
- 	{
-		$this->getCaptionControl()->setText($value);
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string set the rating style, default is "default"
-	 */
-	public function setRatingStyle($value)
- 	{
-	   $this->setViewState('RatingStyle', $value, 'default');
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRatingListStyle current rating style
-	 */
-	public function getRatingStyle()
- 	{
-	   return $this->getViewState('RatingStyle', 'default');
- 	}
- 
- 	/**
-	 * @return string rating style css class name.
- 	 */
-	protected function getRatingStyleCssClass()
- 	{
-		return 'TRatingList_'.$this->getRatingStyle();
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the interval such that those rating values within the interval
-	 * will be considered as a half star rating.
-	 * @param array rating display half value interval, default is array(0.3, 0.7);
-	 */
-	public function setHalfRatingInterval($value)
- 	{
-		$this->setViewState('HalfRating',
-				TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value), array(0.3, 0.7));
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array rating display half value interval, default is array(0.3, 0.7);
-	 */
-	public function getHalfRatingInterval()
- 	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HalfRating', array(0.3, 0.7));
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array list of post back options.
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
- 	{
-		$options = parent::getPostBackOptions();
-		$options['AutoPostBack'] = $this->getAutoPostBack();
-		$options['ReadOnly'] = $this->getReadOnly();
-		$options['Style'] = $this->getRatingStyleCssClass();
-		$options['CaptionID'] = $this->getCaptionControlID();
-		$options['SelectedIndex'] = $this->getSelectedIndex();
-		$options['Rating'] = $this->getRating();
-		$options['HalfRating'] = $this->getHalfRatingInterval();
-		return $options;
- 	}
-
- 	/**
-	 * @return string find the client ID of the caption control.
- 	 */
-	protected function getCaptionControlID()
- 	{
-		if(($id=$this->getCaptionID())!=='')
- 		{
-			if($control=$this->getParent()->findControl($id))
-			{
-				if($control->getVisible(true))
-					return $control->getClientID();
-			}
-			else
-				return $id;
- 		}
-		return '';
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Publish the the rating style css file and rating image files.
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
- 	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		$this->publishStyle($this->getRatingStyle());
-		$this->_ratingImages = $this->publishImages($this->getRatingStyle());
- 		$this->registerClientScript();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string rating style name
-	 * @return string URL of the css style file
-	 */
-	protected function publishStyle($style)
- 	{
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$url = $this->getAssetUrl($style.'.css');
-		if(!$cs->isStyleSheetFileRegistered($url))
-			$cs->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
-		return $url;
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string rating style name
-	 * @param string rating image file extension, default is '.gif'
-	 * @return array URL of publish the rating images
-	 */
-	protected function publishImages($style, $fileExt='.gif')
- 	{
-		$types = array('blank', 'selected', 'half', 'combined');
-		$files = array();
-		foreach($types as $type)
-			$files[$type] = $this->getAssetUrl("{$style}_{$type}{$fileExt}");
-		return $files;
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the relevant JavaScript.
-	 */
-	protected function registerClientScript()
-	{
-		$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPradoScript('ratings');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string asset file in the self::SCRIPT_PATH directory.
-	 * @return string asset file url.
-	 */
-	protected function getAssetUrl($file='')
- 	{
-		$base = $this->getPage()->getClientScript()->getPradoScriptAssetUrl();
-		return $base.'/'.self::SCRIPT_PATH.'/'.$file;
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Add rating style class name to the class attribute
-	 * when {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property is true and when the
-	 * {@link setCssClass CssClass} property is empty.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter renderer
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
- 	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerPostBackControl(
-			$this->getClientClassName(), $this->getPostBackOptions());
-		parent::render($writer);
- 	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRatingList';
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TRatingList class file.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TRadioButtonList class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRadioButtonList');
+
+/**
+ * TRatingList class.
+ *
+ * This class is EXPERIMENTAL.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @author Bradley Booms <bradley[dot]booms[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRatingList extends TRadioButtonList
+{
+	/**
+	 * Script path relative to the TClientScriptManager::SCRIPT_PATH
+	 */
+	const SCRIPT_PATH='prado/ratings';
+
+	/**
+	 * @var array list of published rating images.
+	 */
+	private $_ratingImages = array();
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the default repeat direction to horizontal.
+	 */
+	public function __construct()
+	{
+		parent::__construct();
+		$this->setRepeatDirection(TRepeatDirection::Horizontal);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the items in the column can be edited. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getReadOnly()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the items in the column can be edited
+	 */
+	public function setReadOnly($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Wrapper for {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property.
+	 * @return boolean whether the rating list can be edited. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getAllowInput()
+	{
+		return !$this->getReadOnly();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Wrapper for {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property.
+	 * @param boolean whether the rating list can be edited
+	 */
+	public function setAllowInput($value)
+	{
+		$this->setReadOnly(!TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Wrapper for {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property.
+	 * @param boolean whether the rating list can be edited
+	 */
+	public function setEnabled($value)
+	{
+		$this->setReadOnly(!TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * The repeat layout must be Table.
+	 * @param string repeat layout type
+	 * @throws TInvaliddataValueException when repeat layout is not Table.
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
+	{
+		if($value!==TRepeatLayout::Table)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('ratinglist_table_layout_only');
+		else
+			parent::setRepeatLayout($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return float rating value.
+	 */
+	public function getRating()
+	{
+		$rating = $this->getViewState('Rating', null);
+		if ($rating === null)
+			return $this->getSelectedIndex()+1;
+		else
+			return $rating;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param float rating value, also sets the selected Index
+	 */
+	public function setRating($value)
+	{
+		$value = TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value);
+		$this->setViewState('Rating', $value, null);
+		$index = $this->getRatingIndex($value);
+		parent::setSelectedIndex($index);
+	}
+	
+	public function setSelectedIndex($value)
+	{
+		$this->setRating($value+1);
+		parent::setSelectedIndex($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param float rating value
+	 * @return int rating as integer
+	 */
+	protected function getRatingIndex($rating)
+	{
+		$interval = $this->getHalfRatingInterval();
+		$base = intval($rating)-1;
+		$remainder = $rating-$base-1;
+		return $remainder > $interval[1] ? $base+1 : $base;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param int change the rating selection index
+	 */
+	public function onSelectedIndexChanged($param)
+	{
+		$value = $this->getRating();
+		$value = TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+		$this->setRating($value);
+		parent::onSelectedIndexChanged($param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string control or html element ID for displaying a caption.
+	 */
+	public function getCaptionID()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CaptionID', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string control or html element ID for displaying a caption.
+	 */
+	public function setCaptionID($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CaptionID', $value, '');
+	}
+
+	protected function getCaptionControl()
+	{
+		if(($id=$this->getCaptionID())!=='')
+		{
+			if($control=$this->getParent()->findControl($id))
+				return $control;
+		}
+		throw new TInvalidDataValueException(
+			'ratinglist_invalid_caption_id',$id,$this->getID());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string caption text. Default is "Rate It:".
+	 */
+	public function getCaption()
+	{
+		return $this->getCaptionControl()->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRatingListStyle current rating style
+	 */
+ 	public function setCaption($value)
+ 	{
+		$this->getCaptionControl()->setText($value);
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string set the rating style, default is "default"
+	 */
+	public function setRatingStyle($value)
+ 	{
+	   $this->setViewState('RatingStyle', $value, 'default');
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRatingListStyle current rating style
+	 */
+	public function getRatingStyle()
+ 	{
+	   return $this->getViewState('RatingStyle', 'default');
+ 	}
+ 
+ 	/**
+	 * @return string rating style css class name.
+ 	 */
+	protected function getRatingStyleCssClass()
+ 	{
+		return 'TRatingList_'.$this->getRatingStyle();
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the interval such that those rating values within the interval
+	 * will be considered as a half star rating.
+	 * @param array rating display half value interval, default is array(0.3, 0.7);
+	 */
+	public function setHalfRatingInterval($value)
+ 	{
+		$this->setViewState('HalfRating',
+				TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value), array(0.3, 0.7));
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array rating display half value interval, default is array(0.3, 0.7);
+	 */
+	public function getHalfRatingInterval()
+ 	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HalfRating', array(0.3, 0.7));
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array list of post back options.
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+ 	{
+		$options = parent::getPostBackOptions();
+		$options['AutoPostBack'] = $this->getAutoPostBack();
+		$options['ReadOnly'] = $this->getReadOnly();
+		$options['Style'] = $this->getRatingStyleCssClass();
+		$options['CaptionID'] = $this->getCaptionControlID();
+		$options['SelectedIndex'] = $this->getSelectedIndex();
+		$options['Rating'] = $this->getRating();
+		$options['HalfRating'] = $this->getHalfRatingInterval();
+		return $options;
+ 	}
+
+ 	/**
+	 * @return string find the client ID of the caption control.
+ 	 */
+	protected function getCaptionControlID()
+ 	{
+		if(($id=$this->getCaptionID())!=='')
+ 		{
+			if($control=$this->getParent()->findControl($id))
+			{
+				if($control->getVisible(true))
+					return $control->getClientID();
+			}
+			else
+				return $id;
+ 		}
+		return '';
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Publish the the rating style css file and rating image files.
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+ 	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		$this->publishStyle($this->getRatingStyle());
+		$this->_ratingImages = $this->publishImages($this->getRatingStyle());
+ 		$this->registerClientScript();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string rating style name
+	 * @return string URL of the css style file
+	 */
+	protected function publishStyle($style)
+ 	{
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$url = $this->getAssetUrl($style.'.css');
+		if(!$cs->isStyleSheetFileRegistered($url))
+			$cs->registerStyleSheetFile($url, $url);
+		return $url;
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string rating style name
+	 * @param string rating image file extension, default is '.gif'
+	 * @return array URL of publish the rating images
+	 */
+	protected function publishImages($style, $fileExt='.gif')
+ 	{
+		$types = array('blank', 'selected', 'half', 'combined');
+		$files = array();
+		foreach($types as $type)
+			$files[$type] = $this->getAssetUrl("{$style}_{$type}{$fileExt}");
+		return $files;
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the relevant JavaScript.
+	 */
+	protected function registerClientScript()
+	{
+		$cs=$this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPradoScript('ratings');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string asset file in the self::SCRIPT_PATH directory.
+	 * @return string asset file url.
+	 */
+	protected function getAssetUrl($file='')
+ 	{
+		$base = $this->getPage()->getClientScript()->getPradoScriptAssetUrl();
+		return $base.'/'.self::SCRIPT_PATH.'/'.$file;
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Add rating style class name to the class attribute
+	 * when {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly} property is true and when the
+	 * {@link setCssClass CssClass} property is empty.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter renderer
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+ 	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerPostBackControl(
+			$this->getClientClassName(), $this->getPostBackOptions());
+		parent::render($writer);
+ 	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRatingList';
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptcha.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptcha.php
index b9ba0070..cbdc2e36 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptcha.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptcha.php
@@ -1,233 +1,233 @@
-<?php
-
-/**
- * TReCaptcha class file
- *
- * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @link http://www.devworx.hu/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2011 DevWorx
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-	Prado::using('System.3rdParty.ReCaptcha.recaptchalib');
-
-/**
- * TReCaptcha class.
- *
- * TReCaptcha displays a reCAPTCHA (a token displayed as an image) that can be used
- * to determine if the input is entered by a real user instead of some program. It can
- * also prevent multiple submits of the same form either by accident, or on purpose (ie. spamming).
- *
- * The reCAPTCHA to solve (a string consisting of two separate words) displayed is automatically
- * generated by the reCAPTCHA system at recaptcha.net. However, in order to use the services
- * of the site you will need to register and get a public and a private API key pair, and 
- * supply those to the reCAPTCHA control through setting the {@link setPrivateKey PrivateKey} 
- * and {@link setPublicKey PublicKey} properties. 
- *
- * Currently the reCAPTCHA API supports only one reCAPTCHA field per page, so you MUST make sure that all 
- * your input is protected and validated by a single reCAPTCHA control. Placing more than one reCAPTCHA
- * control on the page will lead to unpredictable results, and the user will most likely unable to solve 
- * any of them successfully.
- *
- * Upon postback, user input can be validated by calling {@link validate()}.
- * The {@link TReCaptchaValidator} control can also be used to do validation, which provides
- * server-side validation. Calling (@link validate()) will invalidate the token supplied, so all consecutive
- * calls to the method - without solving a new captcha - will return false. Therefore if implementing a multi-stage
- * input process, you must make sure that you call validate() only once, either at the end of the input process, or 
- * you store the result till the end of the processing.
- *
- * The following template shows a typical use of TReCaptcha control:
- * <code>
- * <com:TReCaptcha ID="Captcha"
- *                 PublicKey="..."
- *                 PrivateKey="..."
- * />
- * <com:TReCaptchaValidator ControlToValidate="Captcha"
- *                          ErrorMessage="You are challenged!" />
- * </code>
- *
- * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.2
- */
-class TReCaptcha extends TWebControl implements IValidatable
-{
-	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	const ChallengeFieldName = 'recaptcha_challenge_field';
-	const ResponseFieldName = 'recaptcha_response_field';
-
-	public function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'span';
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
-	 * Defaults to true.
-	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
-	 */
-	public function getIsValid()
-	{
-		return $this->_isValid;
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
-	 */
-	public function setIsValid($value)
-	{
-		$this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-	
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->Request[$this->getChallengeFieldName()];
-	}
-
-	public function getPublicKey()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PublicKey');
-	}
-
-	public function setPublicKey($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setViewState('PublicKey', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
-	}
-
-	public function getPrivateKey()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PrivateKey');
-	}
-
-	public function setPrivateKey($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setViewState('PrivateKey', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
-	}
-	
-	public function getThemeName()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ThemeName');
-	}
-
-	public function setThemeName($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setViewState('ThemeName', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
-	}
-
-	public function getCustomTranslations()
-	{
-		return TPropertyValue::ensureArray($this->getViewState('CustomTranslations'));
-	}
-
-	public function setCustomTranslations($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setViewState('CustomTranslations', TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value));
-	}
-
-	public function getLanguage()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Language');
-	}
-
-	public function setLanguage($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setViewState('Language', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
-	}
-
-	protected function getChallengeFieldName()
-	{
-		return /*$this->ClientID.'_'.*/self::ChallengeFieldName;
-	}
-	
-	public function getResponseFieldName()
-	{
-		return /*$this->ClientID.'_'.*/self::ResponseFieldName;
-	}
-	
-	public function getClientSideOptions()
-	{
-		$options = array();
-		if ($theme = $this->getThemeName())
-			$options['theme'] = $theme;
-		if ($lang = $this->getLanguage())
-			$options['lang'] = $lang;
-		if ($trans = $this->getCustomTranslations())
-			$options['custom_translations'] = $trans;
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	public function validate()
-	{
-		if (!
-		      (
-			($challenge = @$_POST[$this->getChallengeFieldName()])
-			and
-			($response = @$_POST[$this->getResponseFieldName()])
-		      )
-                   )
-		   return false;
-
-		$resp = recaptcha_check_answer(
-			$this->getPrivateKey(),
-			$_SERVER["REMOTE_ADDR"],
-			$challenge,
-			$response
-		); 
-		return ($resp->is_valid==1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Checks for API keys
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-
-		if("" == $this->getPublicKey())
-			throw new TConfigurationException('recaptcha_publickey_unknown');
-		if("" == $this->getPrivateKey())
-			throw new TConfigurationException('recaptcha_privatekey_unknown');
-
-		// need to register captcha fields so they will be sent back also in callbacks 
-		$page = $this->getPage();
-		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this->getChallengeFieldName());
-		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this->getResponseFieldName());
-	}
-
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-	}
-
-	public function regenerateToken()
-	{
-		// if we're in a callback, then schedule re-rendering of the control 
-		// if not, don't do anything, because a new challenge will be rendered anyway
-		if ($this->Page->IsCallback)
-			$this->Page->ClientScript->registerEndScript($this->getClientID().'::refresh','Recaptcha.reload();');
-	}
-
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->write(TJavaScript::renderScriptBlock(
-			'var RecaptchaOptions = '.TJavaScript::jsonEncode($this->getClientSideOptions()).';'
-		));
-
-		$html = recaptcha_get_html($this->getPublicKey());
-		/*
-		reCAPTCHA currently does not support multiple validations per page
-		$html = str_replace(
-			array(self::ChallengeFieldName,self::ResponseFieldName),
-			array($this->getChallengeFieldName(),$this->getResponseFieldName()),
-			$html
-		);
-		*/
-		$writer->write($html);
-	}
-
-}
-
+<?php
+
+/**
+ * TReCaptcha class file
+ *
+ * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @link http://www.devworx.hu/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2011 DevWorx
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+	Prado::using('System.3rdParty.ReCaptcha.recaptchalib');
+
+/**
+ * TReCaptcha class.
+ *
+ * TReCaptcha displays a reCAPTCHA (a token displayed as an image) that can be used
+ * to determine if the input is entered by a real user instead of some program. It can
+ * also prevent multiple submits of the same form either by accident, or on purpose (ie. spamming).
+ *
+ * The reCAPTCHA to solve (a string consisting of two separate words) displayed is automatically
+ * generated by the reCAPTCHA system at recaptcha.net. However, in order to use the services
+ * of the site you will need to register and get a public and a private API key pair, and 
+ * supply those to the reCAPTCHA control through setting the {@link setPrivateKey PrivateKey} 
+ * and {@link setPublicKey PublicKey} properties. 
+ *
+ * Currently the reCAPTCHA API supports only one reCAPTCHA field per page, so you MUST make sure that all 
+ * your input is protected and validated by a single reCAPTCHA control. Placing more than one reCAPTCHA
+ * control on the page will lead to unpredictable results, and the user will most likely unable to solve 
+ * any of them successfully.
+ *
+ * Upon postback, user input can be validated by calling {@link validate()}.
+ * The {@link TReCaptchaValidator} control can also be used to do validation, which provides
+ * server-side validation. Calling (@link validate()) will invalidate the token supplied, so all consecutive
+ * calls to the method - without solving a new captcha - will return false. Therefore if implementing a multi-stage
+ * input process, you must make sure that you call validate() only once, either at the end of the input process, or 
+ * you store the result till the end of the processing.
+ *
+ * The following template shows a typical use of TReCaptcha control:
+ * <code>
+ * <com:TReCaptcha ID="Captcha"
+ *                 PublicKey="..."
+ *                 PrivateKey="..."
+ * />
+ * <com:TReCaptchaValidator ControlToValidate="Captcha"
+ *                          ErrorMessage="You are challenged!" />
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.2
+ */
+class TReCaptcha extends TWebControl implements IValidatable
+{
+	private $_isValid=true;
+
+	const ChallengeFieldName = 'recaptcha_challenge_field';
+	const ResponseFieldName = 'recaptcha_response_field';
+
+	public function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'span';
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully. 
+	 * Defaults to true.
+	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
+	 */
+	public function getIsValid()
+	{
+		return $this->_isValid;
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
+	 */
+	public function setIsValid($value)
+	{
+		$this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+	
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->Request[$this->getChallengeFieldName()];
+	}
+
+	public function getPublicKey()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PublicKey');
+	}
+
+	public function setPublicKey($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setViewState('PublicKey', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
+	}
+
+	public function getPrivateKey()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PrivateKey');
+	}
+
+	public function setPrivateKey($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setViewState('PrivateKey', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
+	}
+	
+	public function getThemeName()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ThemeName');
+	}
+
+	public function setThemeName($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setViewState('ThemeName', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
+	}
+
+	public function getCustomTranslations()
+	{
+		return TPropertyValue::ensureArray($this->getViewState('CustomTranslations'));
+	}
+
+	public function setCustomTranslations($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setViewState('CustomTranslations', TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value));
+	}
+
+	public function getLanguage()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Language');
+	}
+
+	public function setLanguage($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setViewState('Language', TPropertyValue::ensureString($value));
+	}
+
+	protected function getChallengeFieldName()
+	{
+		return /*$this->ClientID.'_'.*/self::ChallengeFieldName;
+	}
+	
+	public function getResponseFieldName()
+	{
+		return /*$this->ClientID.'_'.*/self::ResponseFieldName;
+	}
+	
+	public function getClientSideOptions()
+	{
+		$options = array();
+		if ($theme = $this->getThemeName())
+			$options['theme'] = $theme;
+		if ($lang = $this->getLanguage())
+			$options['lang'] = $lang;
+		if ($trans = $this->getCustomTranslations())
+			$options['custom_translations'] = $trans;
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	public function validate()
+	{
+		if (!
+		      (
+			($challenge = @$_POST[$this->getChallengeFieldName()])
+			and
+			($response = @$_POST[$this->getResponseFieldName()])
+		      )
+                   )
+		   return false;
+
+		$resp = recaptcha_check_answer(
+			$this->getPrivateKey(),
+			$_SERVER["REMOTE_ADDR"],
+			$challenge,
+			$response
+		); 
+		return ($resp->is_valid==1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Checks for API keys
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+
+		if("" == $this->getPublicKey())
+			throw new TConfigurationException('recaptcha_publickey_unknown');
+		if("" == $this->getPrivateKey())
+			throw new TConfigurationException('recaptcha_privatekey_unknown');
+
+		// need to register captcha fields so they will be sent back also in callbacks 
+		$page = $this->getPage();
+		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this->getChallengeFieldName());
+		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this->getResponseFieldName());
+	}
+
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+	}
+
+	public function regenerateToken()
+	{
+		// if we're in a callback, then schedule re-rendering of the control 
+		// if not, don't do anything, because a new challenge will be rendered anyway
+		if ($this->Page->IsCallback)
+			$this->Page->ClientScript->registerEndScript($this->getClientID().'::refresh','Recaptcha.reload();');
+	}
+
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->write(TJavaScript::renderScriptBlock(
+			'var RecaptchaOptions = '.TJavaScript::jsonEncode($this->getClientSideOptions()).';'
+		));
+
+		$html = recaptcha_get_html($this->getPublicKey());
+		/*
+		reCAPTCHA currently does not support multiple validations per page
+		$html = str_replace(
+			array(self::ChallengeFieldName,self::ResponseFieldName),
+			array($this->getChallengeFieldName(),$this->getResponseFieldName()),
+			$html
+		);
+		*/
+		$writer->write($html);
+	}
+
+}
+
 ?>
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptchaValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptchaValidator.php
index 7199e401..41abbc5a 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptchaValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TReCaptchaValidator.php
@@ -1,123 +1,123 @@
-<?php
-
-/**
- * TReCaptchaValidator class file
- *
- * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @link http://www.devworx.hu/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2011 DevWorx
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TReCaptcha');
-
-/**
- * TReCaptchaValidator class
- *
- * TReCaptchaValidator validates user input against a reCAPTCHA represented by
- * a {@link TReCaptcha} control. The input control fails validation if its value
- * is not the same as the token displayed in reCAPTCHA. Note, if the user does
- * not enter any thing, it is still considered as failing the validation.
- *
- * To use TReCaptchaValidator, specify the {@link setControlToValidate ControlToValidate}
- * to be the ID path of the {@link TReCaptcha} control.
- *
- * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.2
- */
-class TReCaptchaValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	protected $_isvalid = null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TReCaptchaValidator';
-	}
-
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return true;
-	}
-
-	protected function getCaptchaControl()
-	{
-		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
-		if (!$control)
-			throw new Exception('No target control specified for TReCaptchaValidator');
-		if (!($control instanceof TReCaptcha))
-			throw new Exception('TReCaptchaValidator only works with TReCaptcha controls');
-		return $control;
-	}
-
-	public function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		$options['ResponseFieldName'] = $this->getCaptchaControl()->getResponseFieldName();
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input control has the same value
-	 * as the one displayed in the corresponding RECAPTCHA control.
-	 *
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	protected function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		// check validity only once (if trying to evaulate multiple times, all redundant checks would fail)
-		if (is_null($this->_isvalid))
-		{
-			$control = $this->getCaptchaControl();
-			$this->_isvalid = $control->validate();
-		}
-		return ($this->_isvalid==true);
-	}
-
-	public function onPreRender($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-
-		$cs = $this->Page->getClientScript();
-
-		// communicate validation status to the client side
-		$value = $this->_isvalid===false ? '0' : '1';
-		$cs->registerHiddenField($this->getClientID().'_1',$value);
-
-		// check if we need to request a new captcha too
-		if ($this->Page->IsCallback)
-		{
-		  // force update of validator display
-		  if ($control = $this->getValidationTarget())
-		  {
-		    $cs->registerEndScript(
-				$this->getClientID().'::validate',
-				'$('.TJavaScript::quoteString($this->getClientID().'_1').').value = '.TJavaScript::quoteString($value).';'.
-				'Prado.Validation.validateControl('.TJavaScript::quoteString($control->ClientID).');'
-		    );
-
-		    if ($control->getVisible(true))
-		      if ($this->_isvalid)
-			{
-				// if the challenge has been solved + we're in a callback and we still reach prerender phase,
-				// that means that some other validator failed and the user will be sent back to the page/form with 
-				// the captcha control. in this case we need to force re-rendering of the control, because once 
-				// solved, the old challenge won't validate anymore anyway
-
-				$control->regenerateToken();
-			}
-		  }
-		}
-	}
-
-}
-
+<?php
+
+/**
+ * TReCaptchaValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @link http://www.devworx.hu/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2011 DevWorx
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TReCaptcha');
+
+/**
+ * TReCaptchaValidator class
+ *
+ * TReCaptchaValidator validates user input against a reCAPTCHA represented by
+ * a {@link TReCaptcha} control. The input control fails validation if its value
+ * is not the same as the token displayed in reCAPTCHA. Note, if the user does
+ * not enter any thing, it is still considered as failing the validation.
+ *
+ * To use TReCaptchaValidator, specify the {@link setControlToValidate ControlToValidate}
+ * to be the ID path of the {@link TReCaptcha} control.
+ *
+ * @author Bérczi Gábor <gabor.berczi@devworx.hu>
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.2
+ */
+class TReCaptchaValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	protected $_isvalid = null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TReCaptchaValidator';
+	}
+
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	protected function getCaptchaControl()
+	{
+		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
+		if (!$control)
+			throw new Exception('No target control specified for TReCaptchaValidator');
+		if (!($control instanceof TReCaptcha))
+			throw new Exception('TReCaptchaValidator only works with TReCaptcha controls');
+		return $control;
+	}
+
+	public function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		$options['ResponseFieldName'] = $this->getCaptchaControl()->getResponseFieldName();
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input control has the same value
+	 * as the one displayed in the corresponding RECAPTCHA control.
+	 *
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	protected function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		// check validity only once (if trying to evaulate multiple times, all redundant checks would fail)
+		if (is_null($this->_isvalid))
+		{
+			$control = $this->getCaptchaControl();
+			$this->_isvalid = $control->validate();
+		}
+		return ($this->_isvalid==true);
+	}
+
+	public function onPreRender($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+
+		$cs = $this->Page->getClientScript();
+
+		// communicate validation status to the client side
+		$value = $this->_isvalid===false ? '0' : '1';
+		$cs->registerHiddenField($this->getClientID().'_1',$value);
+
+		// check if we need to request a new captcha too
+		if ($this->Page->IsCallback)
+		{
+		  // force update of validator display
+		  if ($control = $this->getValidationTarget())
+		  {
+		    $cs->registerEndScript(
+				$this->getClientID().'::validate',
+				'$('.TJavaScript::quoteString($this->getClientID().'_1').').value = '.TJavaScript::quoteString($value).';'.
+				'Prado.Validation.validateControl('.TJavaScript::quoteString($control->ClientID).');'
+		    );
+
+		    if ($control->getVisible(true))
+		      if ($this->_isvalid)
+			{
+				// if the challenge has been solved + we're in a callback and we still reach prerender phase,
+				// that means that some other validator failed and the user will be sent back to the page/form with 
+				// the captcha control. in this case we need to force re-rendering of the control, because once 
+				// solved, the old challenge won't validate anymore anyway
+
+				$control->regenerateToken();
+			}
+		  }
+		}
+	}
+
+}
+
 ?>
 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRegularExpressionValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRegularExpressionValidator.php
index a2a5bc64..0e85907a 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRegularExpressionValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRegularExpressionValidator.php
@@ -1,144 +1,144 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TRequiredFieldValidator class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TBaseValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-
-/**
- * TRegularExpressionValidator class
- *
- * TRegularExpressionValidator validates whether the value of an associated
- * input component matches the pattern specified by a regular expression.
- *
- * You can specify the regular expression by setting the {@link setRegularExpression RegularExpression}
- * property. Some commonly used regular expressions include:
- * <pre>
- * French Phone Number: (0( \d|\d ))?\d\d \d\d(\d \d| \d\d )\d\d
- * French Postal Code: \d{5}
- * German Phone Number: ((\(0\d\d\) |(\(0\d{3}\) )?\d )?\d\d \d\d \d\d|\(0\d{4}\) \d \d\d-\d\d?)
- * German Postal Code: (D-)?\d{5}
- * Email Address: \w+([-+.]\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)*
- * Japanese Phone Number: (0\d{1,4}-|\(0\d{1,4}\) ?)?\d{1,4}-\d{4}
- * Japanese Postal Code: \d{3}(-(\d{4}|\d{2}))?
- * P.R.C. Phone Number: (\(\d{3}\)|\d{3}-)?\d{8}
- * P.R.C. Postal Code: \d{6}
- * P.R.C. Social Security Number: \d{18}|\d{15}
- * U.S. Phone Number: ((\(\d{3}\) ?)|(\d{3}-))?\d{3}-\d{4}
- * U.S. ZIP Code: \d{5}(-\d{4})?
- * U.S. Social Security Number: \d{3}-\d{2}-\d{4}
- * </pre>
- *
- * Note, the validation succeeds if the associated input control contains empty input.
- * Use a {@link TRequiredFieldValidator} to ensure the input is not empty.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRegularExpressionValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRegularExpressionValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the regular expression that determines the pattern used to validate a field.
-	 */
-	public function getRegularExpression()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('RegularExpression','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the regular expression that determines the pattern used to validate a field.
-	 */
-	public function setRegularExpression($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('RegularExpression',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input data matches the regular expression.
-	 * The validation always succeeds if ControlToValidate is not specified
-	 * or the regular expression is empty, or the input data is empty.
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	public function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))==='')
-			return true;
-		if(($expression=addcslashes($this->getRegularExpression(),"/"))!=='')
-		{
-			$mods = $this->getPatternModifiers();
-			return preg_match("/^$expression\$/{$mods}",$value);
-		}
-		else
-			return true;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string pattern modifiers for server side validation,
-	 * see http://www.php.net/manual/en/reference.pcre.pattern.modifiers.php
-	 */
-	public function setPatternModifiers($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PatternModifiers', $value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string pattern modifiers, no modifiers by default.
-	 */
-	public function getPatternModifiers()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PatternModifiers', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string pattern modifiers for clientside.
-	 * (Only 'g','i' and 'm' are available.)
-	 */
-	public function setClientSidePatternModifiers($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ClientSidePatternModifiers', $value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string clientside pattern modifiers, no modifiers by default.
-	 */
-	public function getClientSidePatternModifiers()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ClientSidePatternModifiers', '');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		$options['ValidationExpression']=$this->getRegularExpression();
-		$options['PatternModifiers']=$this->getClientSidePatternModifiers();
-		return $options;
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TRequiredFieldValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TBaseValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TRegularExpressionValidator class
+ *
+ * TRegularExpressionValidator validates whether the value of an associated
+ * input component matches the pattern specified by a regular expression.
+ *
+ * You can specify the regular expression by setting the {@link setRegularExpression RegularExpression}
+ * property. Some commonly used regular expressions include:
+ * <pre>
+ * French Phone Number: (0( \d|\d ))?\d\d \d\d(\d \d| \d\d )\d\d
+ * French Postal Code: \d{5}
+ * German Phone Number: ((\(0\d\d\) |(\(0\d{3}\) )?\d )?\d\d \d\d \d\d|\(0\d{4}\) \d \d\d-\d\d?)
+ * German Postal Code: (D-)?\d{5}
+ * Email Address: \w+([-+.]\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)*
+ * Japanese Phone Number: (0\d{1,4}-|\(0\d{1,4}\) ?)?\d{1,4}-\d{4}
+ * Japanese Postal Code: \d{3}(-(\d{4}|\d{2}))?
+ * P.R.C. Phone Number: (\(\d{3}\)|\d{3}-)?\d{8}
+ * P.R.C. Postal Code: \d{6}
+ * P.R.C. Social Security Number: \d{18}|\d{15}
+ * U.S. Phone Number: ((\(\d{3}\) ?)|(\d{3}-))?\d{3}-\d{4}
+ * U.S. ZIP Code: \d{5}(-\d{4})?
+ * U.S. Social Security Number: \d{3}-\d{2}-\d{4}
+ * </pre>
+ *
+ * Note, the validation succeeds if the associated input control contains empty input.
+ * Use a {@link TRequiredFieldValidator} to ensure the input is not empty.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRegularExpressionValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRegularExpressionValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the regular expression that determines the pattern used to validate a field.
+	 */
+	public function getRegularExpression()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('RegularExpression','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the regular expression that determines the pattern used to validate a field.
+	 */
+	public function setRegularExpression($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('RegularExpression',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input data matches the regular expression.
+	 * The validation always succeeds if ControlToValidate is not specified
+	 * or the regular expression is empty, or the input data is empty.
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	public function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		if(($value=$this->getValidationValue($this->getValidationTarget()))==='')
+			return true;
+		if(($expression=addcslashes($this->getRegularExpression(),"/"))!=='')
+		{
+			$mods = $this->getPatternModifiers();
+			return preg_match("/^$expression\$/{$mods}",$value);
+		}
+		else
+			return true;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string pattern modifiers for server side validation,
+	 * see http://www.php.net/manual/en/reference.pcre.pattern.modifiers.php
+	 */
+	public function setPatternModifiers($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PatternModifiers', $value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string pattern modifiers, no modifiers by default.
+	 */
+	public function getPatternModifiers()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PatternModifiers', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string pattern modifiers for clientside.
+	 * (Only 'g','i' and 'm' are available.)
+	 */
+	public function setClientSidePatternModifiers($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ClientSidePatternModifiers', $value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string clientside pattern modifiers, no modifiers by default.
+	 */
+	public function getClientSidePatternModifiers()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ClientSidePatternModifiers', '');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		$options['ValidationExpression']=$this->getRegularExpression();
+		$options['PatternModifiers']=$this->getClientSidePatternModifiers();
+		return $options;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeatInfo.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeatInfo.php
index d7c6f0b6..2604e645 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeatInfo.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeatInfo.php
@@ -1,560 +1,560 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * IRepeatInfoUser, TRepeatInfo class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * IRepeatInfoUser, TRepeatInfo class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTable');
-
-/**
- * IRepeatInfoUser interface.
- * This interface must be implemented by classes who want to use {@link TRepeatInfo}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-interface IRepeatInfoUser
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the repeat user contains footer
-	 */
-	public function getHasFooter();
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the repeat user contains header
-	 */
-	public function getHasHeader();
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the repeat user contains separators
-	 */
-	public function getHasSeparators();
-	/**
-	 * @return integer number of items to be rendered (excluding header, footer and separators)
-	 */
-	public function getItemCount();
-	/**
-	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the current rendering item.
-	 * @return TStyle CSS style used for rendering items (including header, footer and separators)
-	 */
-	public function generateItemStyle($itemType,$index);
-	/**
-	 * Renders an item.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param TRepeatInfo repeat information
-	 * @param string item type
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item being rendered
-	 */
-	public function renderItem($writer,$repeatInfo,$itemType,$index);
-}
-
-/**
- * TRepeatInfo class.
- * TRepeatInfo represents repeat information for controls like {@link TCheckBoxList}.
- * The layout of the repeated items is specified via {@link setRepeatLayout RepeatLayout},
- * which can be either Table (default), Flow or Raw.
- * A table layout uses HTML table cells to organize the items while
- * a flow layout uses line breaks to organize the items.
- * The number of columns used to display the items is specified via
- * {@link setRepeatColumns RepeatColumns} property, while the {@link setRepeatDirection RepeatDirection}
- * governs the order of the items being rendered.
- *
- * Note, the Raw layout does not contain any formatting tags and thus ignores
- * the column and repeat direction settings.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRepeatInfo extends TComponent
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string caption of the table used to organize the repeated items
-	 */
-	private $_caption='';
-	/**
-	 * @var TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table used to organize the repeated items
-	 */
-	private $_captionAlign=TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet;
-	/**
-	 * @var integer number of columns that the items should be arranged in
-	 */
-	private $_repeatColumns=0;
-	/**
-	 * @var TRepeatDirection direction of the repetition
-	 */
-	private $_repeatDirection=TRepeatDirection::Vertical;
-	/**
-	 * @var TRepeatLayout layout of the repeated items
-	 */
-	private $_repeatLayout=TRepeatLayout::Table;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string caption of the table layout
-	 */
-	public function getCaption()
-	{
-		return $this->_caption;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string caption of the table layout
-	 */
-	public function setCaption($value)
-	{
-		$this->_caption=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getCaptionAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->_captionAlign;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout.
-	 */
-	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->_captionAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableCaptionAlign');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of columns that the repeated items should be displayed in. Defaults to 0, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatColumns()
-	{
-		return $this->_repeatColumns;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the number of columns that the repeated items should be displayed in.
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatColumns($value)
-	{
-		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('repeatinfo_repeatcolumns_invalid');
-		$this->_repeatColumns=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the repeated items, defaults to TRepeatDirection::Vertical
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatDirection()
-	{
-		return $this->_repeatDirection;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the repeated items
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatDirection($value)
-	{
-		$this->_repeatDirection=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TRepeatDirection');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRepeatLayout how the repeated items should be displayed, using table or using line breaks. Defaults to TRepeatLayout::Table.
-	 */
-	public function getRepeatLayout()
-	{
-		return $this->_repeatLayout;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TRepeatLayout how the repeated items should be displayed, using table or using line breaks.
-	 */
-	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
-	{
-		$this->_repeatLayout=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TRepeatLayout');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the repeated items.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
-	 */
-	public function renderRepeater($writer, IRepeatInfoUser $user)
-	{
-		if($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Table)
-		{
-			$control=new TTable;
-			if($this->_caption!=='')
-			{
-				$control->setCaption($this->_caption);
-				$control->setCaptionAlign($this->_captionAlign);
-			}
-		}
-		else if($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Raw)
-		{
-			$this->renderRawContents($writer,$user);
-			return;
-		}
-		else
-			$control=new TWebControl;
-		$control->setID($user->getClientID());
-		$control->copyBaseAttributes($user);
-		if($user->getHasStyle())
-			$control->getStyle()->copyFrom($user->getStyle());
-		$control->renderBeginTag($writer);
-		$writer->writeLine();
-
-		if($this->_repeatDirection===TRepeatDirection::Vertical)
-			$this->renderVerticalContents($writer,$user);
-		else
-			$this->renderHorizontalContents($writer,$user);
-
-		$control->renderEndTag($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders contents in raw format.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
-	 */
-	protected function renderRawContents($writer,$user)
-	{
-		if($user->getHasHeader())
-			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Header',-1);
-
-		// render items
-		$hasSeparators=$user->getHasSeparators();
-		$itemCount=$user->getItemCount();
-		for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
-		{
-			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$i);
-			if($hasSeparators && $i!=$itemCount-1)
-				$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$i);
-		}
-		if($user->getHasFooter())
-			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Footer',-1);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders contents in horizontal repeat direction.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
-	 */
-	protected function renderHorizontalContents($writer,$user)
-	{
-		$tableLayout=($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Table);
-		$hasSeparators=$user->getHasSeparators();
-		$itemCount=$user->getItemCount();
-		$columns=$this->_repeatColumns===0?$itemCount:$this->_repeatColumns;
-		$totalColumns=$hasSeparators?$columns+$columns:$columns;
-		$needBreak=$columns<$itemCount;
-
-		if($user->getHasHeader())
-			$this->renderHeader($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,$needBreak);
-
-		// render items
-		if($tableLayout)
-		{
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
-			$column=0;
-			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
-			{
-				if($column==0)
-					$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
-				if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Item',$i))!==null)
-					$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-				$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
-				$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$i);
-				$writer->renderEndTag();
-				$writer->writeLine();
-				if($hasSeparators && $i!=$itemCount-1)
-				{
-					if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Separator',$i))!==null)
-						$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-					$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
-					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$i);
-					$writer->renderEndTag();
-					$writer->writeLine();
-				}
-				$column++;
-				if($i==$itemCount-1)
-				{
-					$restColumns=$columns-$column;
-					if($hasSeparators)
-						$restColumns=$restColumns?$restColumns+$restColumns+1:1;
-					for($j=0;$j<$restColumns;++$j)
-						$writer->write("<td></td>\n");
-				}
-				if($column==$columns || $i==$itemCount-1)
-				{
-					$writer->renderEndTag();
-					$writer->writeLine();
-					$column=0;
-				}
-			}
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$column=0;
-			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
-			{
-				$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$i);
-				if($hasSeparators && $i!=$itemCount-1)
-					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$i);
-				$column++;
-				if($column==$columns || $i==$itemCount-1)
-				{
-					if($needBreak)
-						$writer->writeBreak();
-					$column=0;
-				}
-				$writer->writeLine();
-			}
-		}
-
-		if($user->getHasFooter())
-			$this->renderFooter($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,$needBreak);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders contents in veritcal repeat direction.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
-	 */
-	protected function renderVerticalContents($writer,$user)
-	{
-		$tableLayout=($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Table);
-		$hasSeparators=$user->getHasSeparators();
-		$itemCount=$user->getItemCount();
-		if($this->_repeatColumns<=1)
-		{
-			$rows=$itemCount;
-			$columns=1;
-			$lastColumns=1;
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$columns=$this->_repeatColumns;
-			$rows=(int)(($itemCount+$columns-1)/$columns);
-			if($rows==0 && $itemCount>0)
-				$rows=1;
-			if(($lastColumns=$itemCount%$columns)==0)
-				$lastColumns=$columns;
-		}
-		$totalColumns=$hasSeparators?$columns+$columns:$columns;
-
-		if($user->getHasHeader())
-			$this->renderHeader($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,false);
-
-		if($tableLayout)
-		{
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
-			$renderedItems=0;
-			for($row=0;$row<$rows;++$row)
-			{
-				$index=$row;
-				$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
-				for($col=0;$col<$columns;++$col)
-				{
-					if($renderedItems>=$itemCount)
-						break;
-					if($col>0)
-					{
-						$index+=$rows;
-						if($col-1>=$lastColumns)
-							$index--;
-					}
-					if($index>=$itemCount)
-						continue;
-					$renderedItems++;
-					if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Item',$index))!==null)
-						$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-					$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
-					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$index);
-					$writer->renderEndTag();
-					$writer->writeLine();
-					if(!$hasSeparators)
-						continue;
-					if($renderedItems<$itemCount-1)
-					{
-						if($columns==1)
-						{
-							$writer->renderEndTag();
-							$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
-						}
-						if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Separator',$index))!==null)
-							$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-						$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
-						$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$index);
-						$writer->renderEndTag();
-						$writer->writeLine();
-					}
-					else if($columns>1)
-						$writer->write("<td></td>\n");
-				}
-				if($row==$rows-1)
-				{
-					$restColumns=$columns-$lastColumns;
-					if($hasSeparators)
-						$restColumns+=$restColumns;
-					for($col=0;$col<$restColumns;++$col)
-						$writer->write("<td></td>\n");
-				}
-				$writer->renderEndTag();
-				$writer->writeLine();
-			}
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$renderedItems=0;
-			for($row=0;$row<$rows;++$row)
-			{
-				$index=$row;
-				for($col=0;$col<$columns;++$col)
-				{
-					if($renderedItems>=$itemCount)
-						break;
-					if($col>0)
-					{
-						$index+=$rows;
-						if($col-1>=$lastColumns)
-							$index--;
-					}
-					if($index>=$itemCount)
-						continue;
-					$renderedItems++;
-					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$index);
-					$writer->writeLine();
-					if(!$hasSeparators)
-						continue;
-					if($renderedItems<$itemCount-1)
-					{
-						if($columns==1)
-							$writer->writeBreak();
-						$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$index);
-					}
-					$writer->writeLine();
-				}
-				if($row<$rows-1 || $user->getHasFooter())
-					$writer->writeBreak();
-			}
-		}
-
-		if($user->getHasFooter())
-			$this->renderFooter($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,false);
-
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders header.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
-	 * @param boolean whether to render using table layout
-	 * @param integer number of columns to be rendered
-	 * @param boolean if a line break is needed at the end
-	 */
-	protected function renderHeader($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$columns,$needBreak)
-	{
-		if($tableLayout)
-		{
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('thead');
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
-			if($columns>1)
-				$writer->addAttribute('colspan',"$columns");
-			$writer->addAttribute('scope','col');
-			if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Header',-1))!==null)
-				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('th');
-			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Header',-1);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Header',-1);
-			if($needBreak)
-				$writer->writeBreak();
-		}
-		$writer->writeLine();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders footer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
-	 * @param boolean whether to render using table layout
-	 * @param integer number of columns to be rendered
-	 */
-	protected function renderFooter($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$columns)
-	{
-		if($tableLayout)
-		{
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
-			if($columns>1)
-				$writer->addAttribute('colspan',"$columns");
-			if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Footer',-1))!==null)
-				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
-			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Footer',-1);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		else
-			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Footer',-1);
-		$writer->writeLine();
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TRepeatDirection class.
- * TRepeatDirection defines the enumerable type for the possible directions
- * that repeated contents can repeat along
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Vertical
- * - Horizontal
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TRepeatDirection extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Vertical='Vertical';
-	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
-}
-
-/**
- * TRepeatLayout class.
- * TRepeatLayout defines the enumerable type for the possible layouts
- * that repeated contents can take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Table: the repeated contents are organized using an HTML table
- * - Flow: the repeated contents are organized using HTML spans and breaks
- * - Raw: the repeated contents are stacked together without any additional decorations
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TRepeatLayout extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Table='Table';
-	const Flow='Flow';
-	const Raw='Raw';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTable');
+
+/**
+ * IRepeatInfoUser interface.
+ * This interface must be implemented by classes who want to use {@link TRepeatInfo}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+interface IRepeatInfoUser
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the repeat user contains footer
+	 */
+	public function getHasFooter();
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the repeat user contains header
+	 */
+	public function getHasHeader();
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the repeat user contains separators
+	 */
+	public function getHasSeparators();
+	/**
+	 * @return integer number of items to be rendered (excluding header, footer and separators)
+	 */
+	public function getItemCount();
+	/**
+	 * @param string item type (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,SelectedItem,EditItem,Separator,Pager)
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the current rendering item.
+	 * @return TStyle CSS style used for rendering items (including header, footer and separators)
+	 */
+	public function generateItemStyle($itemType,$index);
+	/**
+	 * Renders an item.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param TRepeatInfo repeat information
+	 * @param string item type
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item being rendered
+	 */
+	public function renderItem($writer,$repeatInfo,$itemType,$index);
+}
+
+/**
+ * TRepeatInfo class.
+ * TRepeatInfo represents repeat information for controls like {@link TCheckBoxList}.
+ * The layout of the repeated items is specified via {@link setRepeatLayout RepeatLayout},
+ * which can be either Table (default), Flow or Raw.
+ * A table layout uses HTML table cells to organize the items while
+ * a flow layout uses line breaks to organize the items.
+ * The number of columns used to display the items is specified via
+ * {@link setRepeatColumns RepeatColumns} property, while the {@link setRepeatDirection RepeatDirection}
+ * governs the order of the items being rendered.
+ *
+ * Note, the Raw layout does not contain any formatting tags and thus ignores
+ * the column and repeat direction settings.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRepeatInfo extends TComponent
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string caption of the table used to organize the repeated items
+	 */
+	private $_caption='';
+	/**
+	 * @var TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table used to organize the repeated items
+	 */
+	private $_captionAlign=TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet;
+	/**
+	 * @var integer number of columns that the items should be arranged in
+	 */
+	private $_repeatColumns=0;
+	/**
+	 * @var TRepeatDirection direction of the repetition
+	 */
+	private $_repeatDirection=TRepeatDirection::Vertical;
+	/**
+	 * @var TRepeatLayout layout of the repeated items
+	 */
+	private $_repeatLayout=TRepeatLayout::Table;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string caption of the table layout
+	 */
+	public function getCaption()
+	{
+		return $this->_caption;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string caption of the table layout
+	 */
+	public function setCaption($value)
+	{
+		$this->_caption=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getCaptionAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->_captionAlign;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign alignment of the caption of the table layout.
+	 */
+	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->_captionAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableCaptionAlign');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of columns that the repeated items should be displayed in. Defaults to 0, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatColumns()
+	{
+		return $this->_repeatColumns;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the number of columns that the repeated items should be displayed in.
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatColumns($value)
+	{
+		if(($value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<0)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('repeatinfo_repeatcolumns_invalid');
+		$this->_repeatColumns=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the repeated items, defaults to TRepeatDirection::Vertical
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatDirection()
+	{
+		return $this->_repeatDirection;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TRepeatDirection the direction of traversing the repeated items
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatDirection($value)
+	{
+		$this->_repeatDirection=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TRepeatDirection');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRepeatLayout how the repeated items should be displayed, using table or using line breaks. Defaults to TRepeatLayout::Table.
+	 */
+	public function getRepeatLayout()
+	{
+		return $this->_repeatLayout;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TRepeatLayout how the repeated items should be displayed, using table or using line breaks.
+	 */
+	public function setRepeatLayout($value)
+	{
+		$this->_repeatLayout=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TRepeatLayout');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the repeated items.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
+	 */
+	public function renderRepeater($writer, IRepeatInfoUser $user)
+	{
+		if($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Table)
+		{
+			$control=new TTable;
+			if($this->_caption!=='')
+			{
+				$control->setCaption($this->_caption);
+				$control->setCaptionAlign($this->_captionAlign);
+			}
+		}
+		else if($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Raw)
+		{
+			$this->renderRawContents($writer,$user);
+			return;
+		}
+		else
+			$control=new TWebControl;
+		$control->setID($user->getClientID());
+		$control->copyBaseAttributes($user);
+		if($user->getHasStyle())
+			$control->getStyle()->copyFrom($user->getStyle());
+		$control->renderBeginTag($writer);
+		$writer->writeLine();
+
+		if($this->_repeatDirection===TRepeatDirection::Vertical)
+			$this->renderVerticalContents($writer,$user);
+		else
+			$this->renderHorizontalContents($writer,$user);
+
+		$control->renderEndTag($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders contents in raw format.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
+	 */
+	protected function renderRawContents($writer,$user)
+	{
+		if($user->getHasHeader())
+			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Header',-1);
+
+		// render items
+		$hasSeparators=$user->getHasSeparators();
+		$itemCount=$user->getItemCount();
+		for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
+		{
+			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$i);
+			if($hasSeparators && $i!=$itemCount-1)
+				$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$i);
+		}
+		if($user->getHasFooter())
+			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Footer',-1);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders contents in horizontal repeat direction.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
+	 */
+	protected function renderHorizontalContents($writer,$user)
+	{
+		$tableLayout=($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Table);
+		$hasSeparators=$user->getHasSeparators();
+		$itemCount=$user->getItemCount();
+		$columns=$this->_repeatColumns===0?$itemCount:$this->_repeatColumns;
+		$totalColumns=$hasSeparators?$columns+$columns:$columns;
+		$needBreak=$columns<$itemCount;
+
+		if($user->getHasHeader())
+			$this->renderHeader($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,$needBreak);
+
+		// render items
+		if($tableLayout)
+		{
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
+			$column=0;
+			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
+			{
+				if($column==0)
+					$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
+				if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Item',$i))!==null)
+					$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+				$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
+				$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$i);
+				$writer->renderEndTag();
+				$writer->writeLine();
+				if($hasSeparators && $i!=$itemCount-1)
+				{
+					if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Separator',$i))!==null)
+						$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+					$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
+					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$i);
+					$writer->renderEndTag();
+					$writer->writeLine();
+				}
+				$column++;
+				if($i==$itemCount-1)
+				{
+					$restColumns=$columns-$column;
+					if($hasSeparators)
+						$restColumns=$restColumns?$restColumns+$restColumns+1:1;
+					for($j=0;$j<$restColumns;++$j)
+						$writer->write("<td></td>\n");
+				}
+				if($column==$columns || $i==$itemCount-1)
+				{
+					$writer->renderEndTag();
+					$writer->writeLine();
+					$column=0;
+				}
+			}
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$column=0;
+			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
+			{
+				$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$i);
+				if($hasSeparators && $i!=$itemCount-1)
+					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$i);
+				$column++;
+				if($column==$columns || $i==$itemCount-1)
+				{
+					if($needBreak)
+						$writer->writeBreak();
+					$column=0;
+				}
+				$writer->writeLine();
+			}
+		}
+
+		if($user->getHasFooter())
+			$this->renderFooter($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,$needBreak);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders contents in veritcal repeat direction.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
+	 */
+	protected function renderVerticalContents($writer,$user)
+	{
+		$tableLayout=($this->_repeatLayout===TRepeatLayout::Table);
+		$hasSeparators=$user->getHasSeparators();
+		$itemCount=$user->getItemCount();
+		if($this->_repeatColumns<=1)
+		{
+			$rows=$itemCount;
+			$columns=1;
+			$lastColumns=1;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$columns=$this->_repeatColumns;
+			$rows=(int)(($itemCount+$columns-1)/$columns);
+			if($rows==0 && $itemCount>0)
+				$rows=1;
+			if(($lastColumns=$itemCount%$columns)==0)
+				$lastColumns=$columns;
+		}
+		$totalColumns=$hasSeparators?$columns+$columns:$columns;
+
+		if($user->getHasHeader())
+			$this->renderHeader($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,false);
+
+		if($tableLayout)
+		{
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
+			$renderedItems=0;
+			for($row=0;$row<$rows;++$row)
+			{
+				$index=$row;
+				$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
+				for($col=0;$col<$columns;++$col)
+				{
+					if($renderedItems>=$itemCount)
+						break;
+					if($col>0)
+					{
+						$index+=$rows;
+						if($col-1>=$lastColumns)
+							$index--;
+					}
+					if($index>=$itemCount)
+						continue;
+					$renderedItems++;
+					if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Item',$index))!==null)
+						$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+					$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
+					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$index);
+					$writer->renderEndTag();
+					$writer->writeLine();
+					if(!$hasSeparators)
+						continue;
+					if($renderedItems<$itemCount-1)
+					{
+						if($columns==1)
+						{
+							$writer->renderEndTag();
+							$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
+						}
+						if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Separator',$index))!==null)
+							$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+						$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
+						$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$index);
+						$writer->renderEndTag();
+						$writer->writeLine();
+					}
+					else if($columns>1)
+						$writer->write("<td></td>\n");
+				}
+				if($row==$rows-1)
+				{
+					$restColumns=$columns-$lastColumns;
+					if($hasSeparators)
+						$restColumns+=$restColumns;
+					for($col=0;$col<$restColumns;++$col)
+						$writer->write("<td></td>\n");
+				}
+				$writer->renderEndTag();
+				$writer->writeLine();
+			}
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$renderedItems=0;
+			for($row=0;$row<$rows;++$row)
+			{
+				$index=$row;
+				for($col=0;$col<$columns;++$col)
+				{
+					if($renderedItems>=$itemCount)
+						break;
+					if($col>0)
+					{
+						$index+=$rows;
+						if($col-1>=$lastColumns)
+							$index--;
+					}
+					if($index>=$itemCount)
+						continue;
+					$renderedItems++;
+					$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Item',$index);
+					$writer->writeLine();
+					if(!$hasSeparators)
+						continue;
+					if($renderedItems<$itemCount-1)
+					{
+						if($columns==1)
+							$writer->writeBreak();
+						$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Separator',$index);
+					}
+					$writer->writeLine();
+				}
+				if($row<$rows-1 || $user->getHasFooter())
+					$writer->writeBreak();
+			}
+		}
+
+		if($user->getHasFooter())
+			$this->renderFooter($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$totalColumns,false);
+
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders header.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
+	 * @param boolean whether to render using table layout
+	 * @param integer number of columns to be rendered
+	 * @param boolean if a line break is needed at the end
+	 */
+	protected function renderHeader($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$columns,$needBreak)
+	{
+		if($tableLayout)
+		{
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('thead');
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
+			if($columns>1)
+				$writer->addAttribute('colspan',"$columns");
+			$writer->addAttribute('scope','col');
+			if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Header',-1))!==null)
+				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('th');
+			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Header',-1);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Header',-1);
+			if($needBreak)
+				$writer->writeBreak();
+		}
+		$writer->writeLine();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders footer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 * @param IRepeatInfoUser repeat information user
+	 * @param boolean whether to render using table layout
+	 * @param integer number of columns to be rendered
+	 */
+	protected function renderFooter($writer,$user,$tableLayout,$columns)
+	{
+		if($tableLayout)
+		{
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('tr');
+			if($columns>1)
+				$writer->addAttribute('colspan',"$columns");
+			if(($style=$user->generateItemStyle('Footer',-1))!==null)
+				$style->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('td');
+			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Footer',-1);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		else
+			$user->renderItem($writer,$this,'Footer',-1);
+		$writer->writeLine();
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TRepeatDirection class.
+ * TRepeatDirection defines the enumerable type for the possible directions
+ * that repeated contents can repeat along
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Vertical
+ * - Horizontal
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TRepeatDirection extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Vertical='Vertical';
+	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TRepeatLayout class.
+ * TRepeatLayout defines the enumerable type for the possible layouts
+ * that repeated contents can take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Table: the repeated contents are organized using an HTML table
+ * - Flow: the repeated contents are organized using HTML spans and breaks
+ * - Raw: the repeated contents are stacked together without any additional decorations
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TRepeatLayout extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Table='Table';
+	const Flow='Flow';
+	const Raw='Raw';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeater.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeater.php
index 6a59cbab..944b3a17 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeater.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeater.php
@@ -1,1025 +1,1025 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TRepeater class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TRepeater class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TDataBoundControl and TDataFieldAccessor cass
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
-Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
-
-/**
- * TRepeater class.
- *
- * TRepeater displays its content repeatedly based on the data fetched from
- * {@link setDataSource DataSource}.
- * The repeated contents in TRepeater are called items, which are controls and
- * can be accessed through {@link getItems Items}. When {@link dataBind()} is invoked,
- * TRepeater creates an item for each row of data and binds the data row to the item.
- * Optionally, a repeater can have a header, a footer and/or separators between items.
- *
- * The layout of the repeated contents are specified by inline templates.
- * Repeater items, header, footer, etc. are being instantiated with the corresponding
- * templates when data is being bound to the repeater.
- *
- * Since v3.1.0, the layout can also be specified by renderers. A renderer is a control class
- * that can be instantiated as repeater items, header, etc. A renderer can thus be viewed
- * as an external template (in fact, it can also be non-templated controls).
- *
- * A renderer can be any control class.
- * - If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b>
- * property will be set as the data row during databinding. Many PRADO controls
- * implement this interface, such as {@link TLabel}, {@link TTextBox}, etc.
- * - If the class implements {@link IItemDataRenderer}, the <b>ItemIndex</b> property will be set
- * as the zero-based index of the item in the repeater item collection, and
- * the <b>ItemType</b> property as the item's type (such as TListItemType::Item).
- * {@link TRepeaterItemRenderer} may be used as the convenient base class which
- * already implements {@link IDataItemRenderer}.
- *
- * The following properties are used to specify different types of template and renderer
- * for a repeater:
- * - {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate}, {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}:
- * for each repeated row of data
- * - {@link setAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}, {@link setAlternatingItemRenderer AlternatingItemRenderer}:
- * for each alternating row of data. If not set, {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate} or {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
- * will be used instead.
- * - {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}, {@link setHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer}:
- * for the repeater header.
- * - {@link setFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}, {@link setFooterRenderer FooterRenderer}:
- * for the repeater footer.
- * - {@link setSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}, {@link setSeparatorRenderer SeparatorRenderer}:
- * for content to be displayed between items.
- * - {@link setEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}, {@link setEmptyRenderer EmptyRenderer}:
- * used when data bound to the repeater is empty.
- *
- * If a content type is defined with both a template and a renderer, the latter takes precedence.
- *
- * When {@link dataBind()} is being called, TRepeater undergoes the following lifecycles for each row of data:
- * - create item based on templates or renderers
- * - set the row of data to the item
- * - raise {@link onItemCreated OnItemCreated}:
- * - add the item as a child control
- * - call dataBind() of the item
- * - raise {@link onItemDataBound OnItemDataBound}:
- *
- * TRepeater raises an {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} whenever a button control
- * within some repeater item raises a <b>OnCommand</b> event. Therefore,
- * you can handle all sorts of <b>OnCommand</b> event in a central place by
- * writing an event handler for {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand}.
- *
- * When a page containing a repeater is post back, the repeater will restore automatically
- * all its contents, including items, header, footer and separators.
- * However, the data row associated with each item will not be recovered and become null.
- * To access the data, use one of the following ways:
- * - Use {@link getDataKeys DataKeys} to obtain the data key associated with
- * the specified repeater item and use the key to fetch the corresponding data
- * from some persistent storage such as DB.
- * - Save the whole dataset in viewstate, which will restore the dataset automatically upon postback.
- * Be aware though, if the size of your dataset is big, your page size will become big. Some
- * complex data may also have serializing problem if saved in viewstate.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRepeater extends TDataBoundControl implements INamingContainer
-{
-	/**
-	 * Repeater item types
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.0.4. Use TListItemType constants instead.
-	 */
-	const IT_HEADER='Header';
-	const IT_FOOTER='Footer';
-	const IT_ITEM='Item';
-	const IT_SEPARATOR='Separator';
-	const IT_ALTERNATINGITEM='AlternatingItem';
-
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate template for repeater items
-	 */
-	private $_itemTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate template for each alternating item
-	 */
-	private $_alternatingItemTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate template for header
-	 */
-	private $_headerTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate template for footer
-	 */
-	private $_footerTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate template used for repeater when no data is bound
-	 */
-	private $_emptyTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate template for separator
-	 */
-	private $_separatorTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TRepeaterItemCollection list of repeater items
-	 */
-	private $_items=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl header item
-	 */
-	private $_header=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl footer item
-	 */
-	private $_footer=null;
-
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for repeater items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the item renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater items.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getItemTemplate ItemTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setItemTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for alternative repeater items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getAlternatingItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the alternative item renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as alternative repeater items.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setAlternatingItemTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setAlternatingItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for repeater item separators. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getSeparatorRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('SeparatorRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the repeater item separator renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater item separators.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setSeparatorTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setSeparatorRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('SeparatorRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for repeater header item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HeaderRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the repeater header renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater header item.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setHeaderTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HeaderRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for repeater footer item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getFooterRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FooterRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the repeater footer renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater footer item.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setFooterTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setFooterRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FooterRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for empty repeater item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getEmptyRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EmptyRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the repeater empty renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * The empty renderer is created as the child of the repeater
-	 * if data bound to the repeater is empty.
-	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @see setEmptyTemplate
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setEmptyRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EmptyRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template for repeater items
-	 */
-	public function getItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template for repeater items
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_itemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','ItemTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the alternative template string for the item
-	 */
-	public function getAlternatingItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_alternatingItemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the alternative item template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setAlternatingItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_alternatingItemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','AlternatingItemTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the header template
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_headerTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the header template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','HeaderTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the footer template
-	 */
-	public function getFooterTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_footerTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the footer template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setFooterTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_footerTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','FooterTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the repeater
-	 */
-	public function getEmptyTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_emptyTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the repeater
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setEmptyTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_emptyTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','EmptyTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the separator template
-	 */
-	public function getSeparatorTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_separatorTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the separator template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setSeparatorTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_separatorTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','SeparatorTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the header item
-	 */
-	public function getHeader()
-	{
-		return $this->_header;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the footer item
-	 */
-	public function getFooter()
-	{
-		return $this->_footer;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TRepeaterItemCollection list of repeater item controls
-	 */
-	public function getItems()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_items)
-			$this->_items=new TRepeaterItemCollection;
-		return $this->_items;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
-	 */
-	public function getDataKeyField()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DataKeyField','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
-	 */
-	public function setDataKeyField($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DataKeyField',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TList the keys used in the data listing control.
-	 */
-	public function getDataKeys()
-	{
-		if(($dataKeys=$this->getViewState('DataKeys',null))===null)
-		{
-			$dataKeys=new TList;
-			$this->setViewState('DataKeys',$dataKeys,null);
-		}
-		return $dataKeys;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a repeater item.
-	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new repeater item.
-	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
-	 */
-	private function createItemInternal($itemIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
-		{
-			$param=new TRepeaterItemEventParameter($item);
-			$this->onItemCreated($param);
-			$this->getControls()->add($item);
-			return $item;
-		}
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a repeater item and performs databinding.
-	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new repeater item.
-	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
-	 */
-	private function createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem)
-	{
-		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
-		{
-			$param=new TRepeaterItemEventParameter($item);
-			if($item instanceof IDataRenderer)
-				$item->setData($dataItem);
-			$this->onItemCreated($param);
-			$this->getControls()->add($item);
-			$item->dataBind();
-			$this->onItemDataBound($param);
-			return $item;
-		}
-		else
-			return null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a repeater item instance based on the item type and index.
-	 * @param integer zero-based item index
-	 * @param TListItemType item type
-	 * @return TControl created repeater item
-	 */
-	protected function createItem($itemIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		$template=null;
-		$classPath=null;
-		switch($itemType)
-		{
-			case TListItemType::Item :
-				$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem :
-				if(($classPath=$this->getAlternatingItemRenderer())==='' && ($template=$this->_alternatingItemTemplate)===null)
-				{
-					$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
-					$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
-				}
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::Header :
-				$classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_headerTemplate;
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::Footer :
-				$classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_footerTemplate;
-				break;
-			case TListItemType::Separator :
-				$classPath=$this->getSeparatorRenderer();
-				$template=$this->_separatorTemplate;
-				break;
-			default:
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('repeater_itemtype_unknown',$itemType);
-		}
-		if($classPath!=='')
-		{
-			$item=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-			if($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-			{
-				$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
-				$item->setItemType($itemType);
-			}
-		}
-		else if($template!==null)
-		{
-			$item=new TRepeaterItem;
-			$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
-			$item->setItemType($itemType);
-			$template->instantiateIn($item);
-		}
-		else
-			$item=null;
-
-		return $item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates empty repeater content.
-	 */
-	protected function createEmptyContent()
-	{
-		if(($classPath=$this->getEmptyRenderer())!=='')
-			$this->getControls()->add(Prado::createComponent($classPath));
-		else if($this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
-			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the repeater.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by rendering the body
-	 * content as the whole presentation of the repeater. Outer tag is not rendered.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_items && $this->_items->getCount() || $this->_emptyTemplate!==null || $this->getEmptyRenderer()!=='')
-			$this->renderContents($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves item count in viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
-	 */
-	public function saveState()
-	{
-		parent::saveState();
-		if($this->_items)
-			$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$this->_items->getCount(),0);
-		else
-			$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads item count information from viewstate.
-	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
-	 */
-	public function loadState()
-	{
-		parent::loadState();
-		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
-			$this->restoreItemsFromViewState();
-		$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Clears up all items in the repeater.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		$this->getControls()->clear();
-		$this->getItems()->clear();
-		$this->_header=null;
-		$this->_footer=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates repeater items based on viewstate information.
-	 */
-	protected function restoreItemsFromViewState()
-	{
-		$this->reset();
-		if(($itemCount=$this->getViewState('ItemCount',0))>0)
-		{
-			$items=$this->getItems();
-			$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
-			$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header);
-			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
-			{
-				if($hasSeparator && $i>0)
-					$this->createItemInternal($i-1,TListItemType::Separator);
-				$itemType=$i%2==0?TListItemType::Item : TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
-				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($i,$itemType,false,null));
-			}
-			$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer);
-		}
-		else
-			$this->createEmptyContent();
-		$this->clearChildState();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Performs databinding to populate repeater items from data source.
-	 * This method is invoked by dataBind().
-	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
-	 * @param Traversable the data
-	 */
-	protected function performDataBinding($data)
-	{
-		$this->reset();
-
-		$keys=$this->getDataKeys();
-		$keys->clear();
-		$keyField=$this->getDataKeyField();
-
-		$items=$this->getItems();
-		$itemIndex=0;
-		$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
-		foreach($data as $key=>$dataItem)
-		{
-			if($keyField!=='')
-				$keys->add($this->getDataFieldValue($dataItem,$keyField));
-			else
-				$keys->add($key);
-			if($itemIndex===0)
-				$this->_header=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header,null);
-			if($hasSeparator && $itemIndex>0)
-				$this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex-1,TListItemType::Separator,null);
-			$itemType=$itemIndex%2==0?TListItemType::Item : TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
-			$items->add($this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem));
-			$itemIndex++;
-		}
-		if($itemIndex>0)
-			$this->_footer=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer,null);
-		else
-		{
-			$this->createEmptyContent();
-			$this->dataBindChildren();
-		}
-		$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$itemIndex,0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation to handle
-	 * {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event which is bubbled from
-	 * repeater items and their child controls.
-	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TRepeaterCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->onItemCommand($param);
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemCreated</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked after a repeater item is created and instantiated with
-	 * template, but before added to the page hierarchy.
-	 * The repeater item control responsible for the event
-	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
-	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
-	 * @param TRepeaterItemEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemCreated($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCreated',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemDataBound</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked right after an item is data bound.
-	 * The repeater item control responsible for the event
-	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
-	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
-	 * @param TRepeaterItemEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemDataBound($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemDataBound',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnItemCommand</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked after a button control in
-	 * a template raises <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 * The repeater control responsible for the event
-	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
-	 * The event parameter also contains the information about
-	 * the initial sender of the <b>OnCommand</b> event, command name
-	 * and command parameter.
-	 * You may override this method to provide customized event handling.
-	 * Be sure to call parent's implementation so that
-	 * event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
-	 * @param TRepeaterCommandEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onItemCommand($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCommand',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value of the data at the specified field.
-	 * If data is an array, TMap or TList, the value will be returned at the index
-	 * of the specified field. If the data is a component with a property named
-	 * as the field name, the property value will be returned.
-	 * Otherwise, an exception will be raised.
-	 * @param mixed data item
-	 * @param mixed field name
-	 * @return mixed data value at the specified field
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the data is invalid
-	 */
-	protected function getDataFieldValue($data,$field)
-	{
-		return TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TRepeaterItemEventParameter class
- *
- * TRepeaterItemEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TRepeater::onItemCreated ItemCreated} event of {@link TRepeater} controls.
- * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the repeater item related with the event.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRepeaterItemEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * The repeater item control responsible for the event.
-	 * @var TControl
-	 */
-	private $_item=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TControl repeater item related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function __construct($item)
-	{
-		$this->_item=$item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl repeater item related with the corresponding event
-	 */
-	public function getItem()
-	{
-		return $this->_item;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TRepeaterCommandEventParameter class
- *
- * TRepeaterCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
- * {@link TRepeater::onItemCommand ItemCommand} event of {@link TRepeater} controls.
- *
- * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the repeater item related with the event.
- * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} refers to the control that originally
- * raises the Command event.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRepeaterCommandEventParameter extends TCommandEventParameter
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl the repeater item control responsible for the event.
-	 */
-	private $_item=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	private $_source=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TControl repeater item responsible for the event
-	 * @param TControl original event sender
-	 * @param TCommandEventParameter original event parameter
-	 */
-	public function __construct($item,$source,TCommandEventParameter $param)
-	{
-		$this->_item=$item;
-		$this->_source=$source;
-		parent::__construct($param->getCommandName(),$param->getCommandParameter());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the repeater item control responsible for the event.
-	 */
-	public function getItem()
-	{
-		return $this->_item;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
-	 */
-	public function getCommandSource()
-	{
-		return $this->_source;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TRepeaterItem class
- *
- * A TRepeaterItem control represents an item in the {@link TRepeater} control,
- * such as heading section, footer section, or a data item.
- * The index and data value of the item can be accessed via {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}>
- * and {@link getDataItem DataItem} properties, respectively. The type of the item
- * is given by {@link getItemType ItemType} property.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRepeaterItem extends TControl implements INamingContainer, IItemDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * index of the data item in the Items collection of repeater
-	 */
-	private $_itemIndex;
-	/**
-	 * type of the TRepeaterItem
-	 * @var TListItemType
-	 */
-	private $_itemType;
-	/**
-	 * data associated with this item
-	 * @var mixed
-	 */
-	private $_data;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TListItemType item type
-	 */
-	public function getItemType()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemType;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TListItemType item type.
-	 */
-	public function setItemType($value)
-	{
-		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating the zero-based index of the item in the corresponding data control's item collection.
-	 * If the item is not in the collection (e.g. it is a header item), it returns -1.
-	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item.
-	 */
-	public function getItemIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemIndex;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
-	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
-	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
-	 */
-	public function setItemIndex($value)
-	{
-		$this->_itemIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->_data;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->_data=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
-	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since v3.1.0. Use {@link getData} instead.
-	 */
-	public function getDataItem()
-	{
-		return $this->getData();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
-	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.1.0. Use {@link setData} instead.
-	 */
-	public function setDataItem($value)
-	{
-		return $this->setData($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
-	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TRepeaterCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TRepeaterItemCollection class.
- *
- * TRepeaterItemCollection represents a collection of repeater items.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRepeaterItemCollection extends TList
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only objects that are descendant of {@link TControl}.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param TControl new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a control.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TControl)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeateritemcollection_item_invalid');
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TDataBoundControl and TDataFieldAccessor cass
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataBoundControl');
+Prado::using('System.Util.TDataFieldAccessor');
+
+/**
+ * TRepeater class.
+ *
+ * TRepeater displays its content repeatedly based on the data fetched from
+ * {@link setDataSource DataSource}.
+ * The repeated contents in TRepeater are called items, which are controls and
+ * can be accessed through {@link getItems Items}. When {@link dataBind()} is invoked,
+ * TRepeater creates an item for each row of data and binds the data row to the item.
+ * Optionally, a repeater can have a header, a footer and/or separators between items.
+ *
+ * The layout of the repeated contents are specified by inline templates.
+ * Repeater items, header, footer, etc. are being instantiated with the corresponding
+ * templates when data is being bound to the repeater.
+ *
+ * Since v3.1.0, the layout can also be specified by renderers. A renderer is a control class
+ * that can be instantiated as repeater items, header, etc. A renderer can thus be viewed
+ * as an external template (in fact, it can also be non-templated controls).
+ *
+ * A renderer can be any control class.
+ * - If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b>
+ * property will be set as the data row during databinding. Many PRADO controls
+ * implement this interface, such as {@link TLabel}, {@link TTextBox}, etc.
+ * - If the class implements {@link IItemDataRenderer}, the <b>ItemIndex</b> property will be set
+ * as the zero-based index of the item in the repeater item collection, and
+ * the <b>ItemType</b> property as the item's type (such as TListItemType::Item).
+ * {@link TRepeaterItemRenderer} may be used as the convenient base class which
+ * already implements {@link IDataItemRenderer}.
+ *
+ * The following properties are used to specify different types of template and renderer
+ * for a repeater:
+ * - {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate}, {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}:
+ * for each repeated row of data
+ * - {@link setAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}, {@link setAlternatingItemRenderer AlternatingItemRenderer}:
+ * for each alternating row of data. If not set, {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate} or {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
+ * will be used instead.
+ * - {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}, {@link setHeaderRenderer HeaderRenderer}:
+ * for the repeater header.
+ * - {@link setFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}, {@link setFooterRenderer FooterRenderer}:
+ * for the repeater footer.
+ * - {@link setSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}, {@link setSeparatorRenderer SeparatorRenderer}:
+ * for content to be displayed between items.
+ * - {@link setEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}, {@link setEmptyRenderer EmptyRenderer}:
+ * used when data bound to the repeater is empty.
+ *
+ * If a content type is defined with both a template and a renderer, the latter takes precedence.
+ *
+ * When {@link dataBind()} is being called, TRepeater undergoes the following lifecycles for each row of data:
+ * - create item based on templates or renderers
+ * - set the row of data to the item
+ * - raise {@link onItemCreated OnItemCreated}:
+ * - add the item as a child control
+ * - call dataBind() of the item
+ * - raise {@link onItemDataBound OnItemDataBound}:
+ *
+ * TRepeater raises an {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} whenever a button control
+ * within some repeater item raises a <b>OnCommand</b> event. Therefore,
+ * you can handle all sorts of <b>OnCommand</b> event in a central place by
+ * writing an event handler for {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand}.
+ *
+ * When a page containing a repeater is post back, the repeater will restore automatically
+ * all its contents, including items, header, footer and separators.
+ * However, the data row associated with each item will not be recovered and become null.
+ * To access the data, use one of the following ways:
+ * - Use {@link getDataKeys DataKeys} to obtain the data key associated with
+ * the specified repeater item and use the key to fetch the corresponding data
+ * from some persistent storage such as DB.
+ * - Save the whole dataset in viewstate, which will restore the dataset automatically upon postback.
+ * Be aware though, if the size of your dataset is big, your page size will become big. Some
+ * complex data may also have serializing problem if saved in viewstate.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRepeater extends TDataBoundControl implements INamingContainer
+{
+	/**
+	 * Repeater item types
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.0.4. Use TListItemType constants instead.
+	 */
+	const IT_HEADER='Header';
+	const IT_FOOTER='Footer';
+	const IT_ITEM='Item';
+	const IT_SEPARATOR='Separator';
+	const IT_ALTERNATINGITEM='AlternatingItem';
+
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate template for repeater items
+	 */
+	private $_itemTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate template for each alternating item
+	 */
+	private $_alternatingItemTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate template for header
+	 */
+	private $_headerTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate template for footer
+	 */
+	private $_footerTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate template used for repeater when no data is bound
+	 */
+	private $_emptyTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate template for separator
+	 */
+	private $_separatorTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TRepeaterItemCollection list of repeater items
+	 */
+	private $_items=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl header item
+	 */
+	private $_header=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl footer item
+	 */
+	private $_footer=null;
+
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for repeater items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the item renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater items.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getItemTemplate ItemTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setItemTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for alternative repeater items. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getAlternatingItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the alternative item renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as alternative repeater items.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getAlternatingItemTemplate AlternatingItemTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setAlternatingItemTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setAlternatingItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AlternatingItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for repeater item separators. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getSeparatorRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('SeparatorRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the repeater item separator renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater item separators.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getSeparatorTemplate SeparatorTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setSeparatorTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setSeparatorRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('SeparatorRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for repeater header item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HeaderRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the repeater header renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater header item.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setHeaderTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HeaderRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for repeater footer item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getFooterRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FooterRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the repeater footer renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as repeater footer item.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getFooterTemplate FooterTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setFooterTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setFooterRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FooterRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for empty repeater item. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getEmptyRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EmptyRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the repeater empty renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * The empty renderer is created as the child of the repeater
+	 * if data bound to the repeater is empty.
+	 * This property takes precedence over {@link getEmptyTemplate EmptyTemplate}.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @see setEmptyTemplate
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setEmptyRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EmptyRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template for repeater items
+	 */
+	public function getItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template for repeater items
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_itemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','ItemTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the alternative template string for the item
+	 */
+	public function getAlternatingItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_alternatingItemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the alternative item template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setAlternatingItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_alternatingItemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','AlternatingItemTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the header template
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_headerTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the header template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','HeaderTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the footer template
+	 */
+	public function getFooterTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_footerTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the footer template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setFooterTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_footerTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','FooterTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the repeater
+	 */
+	public function getEmptyTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_emptyTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template applied when no data is bound to the repeater
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setEmptyTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_emptyTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','EmptyTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the separator template
+	 */
+	public function getSeparatorTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_separatorTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the separator template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setSeparatorTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_separatorTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeater_template_required','SeparatorTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the header item
+	 */
+	public function getHeader()
+	{
+		return $this->_header;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the footer item
+	 */
+	public function getFooter()
+	{
+		return $this->_footer;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TRepeaterItemCollection list of repeater item controls
+	 */
+	public function getItems()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_items)
+			$this->_items=new TRepeaterItemCollection;
+		return $this->_items;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
+	 */
+	public function getDataKeyField()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DataKeyField','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the field of the data source that provides the keys of the list items.
+	 */
+	public function setDataKeyField($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DataKeyField',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TList the keys used in the data listing control.
+	 */
+	public function getDataKeys()
+	{
+		if(($dataKeys=$this->getViewState('DataKeys',null))===null)
+		{
+			$dataKeys=new TList;
+			$this->setViewState('DataKeys',$dataKeys,null);
+		}
+		return $dataKeys;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a repeater item.
+	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new repeater item.
+	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
+	 */
+	private function createItemInternal($itemIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
+		{
+			$param=new TRepeaterItemEventParameter($item);
+			$this->onItemCreated($param);
+			$this->getControls()->add($item);
+			return $item;
+		}
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a repeater item and performs databinding.
+	 * This method invokes {@link createItem} to create a new repeater item.
+	 * @param integer zero-based item index.
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @return TControl the created item, null if item is not created
+	 */
+	private function createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem)
+	{
+		if(($item=$this->createItem($itemIndex,$itemType))!==null)
+		{
+			$param=new TRepeaterItemEventParameter($item);
+			if($item instanceof IDataRenderer)
+				$item->setData($dataItem);
+			$this->onItemCreated($param);
+			$this->getControls()->add($item);
+			$item->dataBind();
+			$this->onItemDataBound($param);
+			return $item;
+		}
+		else
+			return null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a repeater item instance based on the item type and index.
+	 * @param integer zero-based item index
+	 * @param TListItemType item type
+	 * @return TControl created repeater item
+	 */
+	protected function createItem($itemIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		$template=null;
+		$classPath=null;
+		switch($itemType)
+		{
+			case TListItemType::Item :
+				$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::AlternatingItem :
+				if(($classPath=$this->getAlternatingItemRenderer())==='' && ($template=$this->_alternatingItemTemplate)===null)
+				{
+					$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
+					$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
+				}
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::Header :
+				$classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_headerTemplate;
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::Footer :
+				$classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_footerTemplate;
+				break;
+			case TListItemType::Separator :
+				$classPath=$this->getSeparatorRenderer();
+				$template=$this->_separatorTemplate;
+				break;
+			default:
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('repeater_itemtype_unknown',$itemType);
+		}
+		if($classPath!=='')
+		{
+			$item=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+			if($item instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+			{
+				$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
+				$item->setItemType($itemType);
+			}
+		}
+		else if($template!==null)
+		{
+			$item=new TRepeaterItem;
+			$item->setItemIndex($itemIndex);
+			$item->setItemType($itemType);
+			$template->instantiateIn($item);
+		}
+		else
+			$item=null;
+
+		return $item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates empty repeater content.
+	 */
+	protected function createEmptyContent()
+	{
+		if(($classPath=$this->getEmptyRenderer())!=='')
+			$this->getControls()->add(Prado::createComponent($classPath));
+		else if($this->_emptyTemplate!==null)
+			$this->_emptyTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the repeater.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by rendering the body
+	 * content as the whole presentation of the repeater. Outer tag is not rendered.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_items && $this->_items->getCount() || $this->_emptyTemplate!==null || $this->getEmptyRenderer()!=='')
+			$this->renderContents($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves item count in viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right before control state is to be saved.
+	 */
+	public function saveState()
+	{
+		parent::saveState();
+		if($this->_items)
+			$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$this->_items->getCount(),0);
+		else
+			$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads item count information from viewstate.
+	 * This method is invoked right after control state is loaded.
+	 */
+	public function loadState()
+	{
+		parent::loadState();
+		if(!$this->getIsDataBound())
+			$this->restoreItemsFromViewState();
+		$this->clearViewState('ItemCount');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Clears up all items in the repeater.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		$this->getControls()->clear();
+		$this->getItems()->clear();
+		$this->_header=null;
+		$this->_footer=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates repeater items based on viewstate information.
+	 */
+	protected function restoreItemsFromViewState()
+	{
+		$this->reset();
+		if(($itemCount=$this->getViewState('ItemCount',0))>0)
+		{
+			$items=$this->getItems();
+			$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
+			$this->_header=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header);
+			for($i=0;$i<$itemCount;++$i)
+			{
+				if($hasSeparator && $i>0)
+					$this->createItemInternal($i-1,TListItemType::Separator);
+				$itemType=$i%2==0?TListItemType::Item : TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
+				$items->add($this->createItemInternal($i,$itemType,false,null));
+			}
+			$this->_footer=$this->createItemInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer);
+		}
+		else
+			$this->createEmptyContent();
+		$this->clearChildState();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Performs databinding to populate repeater items from data source.
+	 * This method is invoked by dataBind().
+	 * You may override this function to provide your own way of data population.
+	 * @param Traversable the data
+	 */
+	protected function performDataBinding($data)
+	{
+		$this->reset();
+
+		$keys=$this->getDataKeys();
+		$keys->clear();
+		$keyField=$this->getDataKeyField();
+
+		$items=$this->getItems();
+		$itemIndex=0;
+		$hasSeparator=$this->_separatorTemplate!==null || $this->getSeparatorRenderer()!=='';
+		foreach($data as $key=>$dataItem)
+		{
+			if($keyField!=='')
+				$keys->add($this->getDataFieldValue($dataItem,$keyField));
+			else
+				$keys->add($key);
+			if($itemIndex===0)
+				$this->_header=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Header,null);
+			if($hasSeparator && $itemIndex>0)
+				$this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex-1,TListItemType::Separator,null);
+			$itemType=$itemIndex%2==0?TListItemType::Item : TListItemType::AlternatingItem;
+			$items->add($this->createItemWithDataInternal($itemIndex,$itemType,$dataItem));
+			$itemIndex++;
+		}
+		if($itemIndex>0)
+			$this->_footer=$this->createItemWithDataInternal(-1,TListItemType::Footer,null);
+		else
+		{
+			$this->createEmptyContent();
+			$this->dataBindChildren();
+		}
+		$this->setViewState('ItemCount',$itemIndex,0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation to handle
+	 * {@link onItemCommand OnItemCommand} event which is bubbled from
+	 * repeater items and their child controls.
+	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TRepeaterCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->onItemCommand($param);
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemCreated</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked after a repeater item is created and instantiated with
+	 * template, but before added to the page hierarchy.
+	 * The repeater item control responsible for the event
+	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
+	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
+	 * @param TRepeaterItemEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemCreated($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCreated',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemDataBound</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked right after an item is data bound.
+	 * The repeater item control responsible for the event
+	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call parent's implementation
+	 * so that event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
+	 * @param TRepeaterItemEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemDataBound($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemDataBound',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnItemCommand</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked after a button control in
+	 * a template raises <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 * The repeater control responsible for the event
+	 * can be determined from the event parameter.
+	 * The event parameter also contains the information about
+	 * the initial sender of the <b>OnCommand</b> event, command name
+	 * and command parameter.
+	 * You may override this method to provide customized event handling.
+	 * Be sure to call parent's implementation so that
+	 * event handlers have chance to respond to the event.
+	 * @param TRepeaterCommandEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onItemCommand($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnItemCommand',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value of the data at the specified field.
+	 * If data is an array, TMap or TList, the value will be returned at the index
+	 * of the specified field. If the data is a component with a property named
+	 * as the field name, the property value will be returned.
+	 * Otherwise, an exception will be raised.
+	 * @param mixed data item
+	 * @param mixed field name
+	 * @return mixed data value at the specified field
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the data is invalid
+	 */
+	protected function getDataFieldValue($data,$field)
+	{
+		return TDataFieldAccessor::getDataFieldValue($data,$field);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TRepeaterItemEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TRepeaterItemEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TRepeater::onItemCreated ItemCreated} event of {@link TRepeater} controls.
+ * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the repeater item related with the event.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRepeaterItemEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * The repeater item control responsible for the event.
+	 * @var TControl
+	 */
+	private $_item=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TControl repeater item related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function __construct($item)
+	{
+		$this->_item=$item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl repeater item related with the corresponding event
+	 */
+	public function getItem()
+	{
+		return $this->_item;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TRepeaterCommandEventParameter class
+ *
+ * TRepeaterCommandEventParameter encapsulates the parameter data for
+ * {@link TRepeater::onItemCommand ItemCommand} event of {@link TRepeater} controls.
+ *
+ * The {@link getItem Item} property indicates the repeater item related with the event.
+ * The {@link getCommandSource CommandSource} refers to the control that originally
+ * raises the Command event.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRepeaterCommandEventParameter extends TCommandEventParameter
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl the repeater item control responsible for the event.
+	 */
+	private $_item=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	private $_source=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TControl repeater item responsible for the event
+	 * @param TControl original event sender
+	 * @param TCommandEventParameter original event parameter
+	 */
+	public function __construct($item,$source,TCommandEventParameter $param)
+	{
+		$this->_item=$item;
+		$this->_source=$source;
+		parent::__construct($param->getCommandName(),$param->getCommandParameter());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the repeater item control responsible for the event.
+	 */
+	public function getItem()
+	{
+		return $this->_item;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TControl the control originally raises the <b>OnCommand</b> event.
+	 */
+	public function getCommandSource()
+	{
+		return $this->_source;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TRepeaterItem class
+ *
+ * A TRepeaterItem control represents an item in the {@link TRepeater} control,
+ * such as heading section, footer section, or a data item.
+ * The index and data value of the item can be accessed via {@link getItemIndex ItemIndex}>
+ * and {@link getDataItem DataItem} properties, respectively. The type of the item
+ * is given by {@link getItemType ItemType} property.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRepeaterItem extends TControl implements INamingContainer, IItemDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * index of the data item in the Items collection of repeater
+	 */
+	private $_itemIndex;
+	/**
+	 * type of the TRepeaterItem
+	 * @var TListItemType
+	 */
+	private $_itemType;
+	/**
+	 * data associated with this item
+	 * @var mixed
+	 */
+	private $_data;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TListItemType item type
+	 */
+	public function getItemType()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemType;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TListItemType item type.
+	 */
+	public function setItemType($value)
+	{
+		$this->_itemType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TListItemType');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating the zero-based index of the item in the corresponding data control's item collection.
+	 * If the item is not in the collection (e.g. it is a header item), it returns -1.
+	 * @return integer zero-based index of the item.
+	 */
+	public function getItemIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemIndex;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the zero-based index for the item.
+	 * If the item is not in the item collection (e.g. it is a header item), -1 should be used.
+	 * @param integer zero-based index of the item.
+	 */
+	public function setItemIndex($value)
+	{
+		$this->_itemIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->_data;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->_data=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
+	 * @return mixed data associated with the item
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since v3.1.0. Use {@link getData} instead.
+	 */
+	public function getDataItem()
+	{
+		return $this->getData();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This property is deprecated since v3.1.0.
+	 * @param mixed data to be associated with the item
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.1.0. Use {@link setData} instead.
+	 */
+	public function setDataItem($value)
+	{
+		return $this->setData($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
+	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TRepeaterCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TRepeaterItemCollection class.
+ *
+ * TRepeaterItemCollection represents a collection of repeater items.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRepeaterItemCollection extends TList
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by inserting only objects that are descendant of {@link TControl}.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param TControl new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a control.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TControl)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('repeateritemcollection_item_invalid');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeaterItemRenderer.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeaterItemRenderer.php
index 85991b38..fe5171ad 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeaterItemRenderer.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRepeaterItemRenderer.php
@@ -1,50 +1,50 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TRepeaterItemRenderer class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TRepeaterItemRenderer class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRepeater');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TItemDataRenderer');
-
-/**
- * TRepeaterItemRenderer class
- *
- * TRepeaterItemRenderer can be used as a convenient base class to
- * define an item renderer class specific for {@link TRepeater}.
- *
- * TRepeaterItemRenderer extends {@link TItemDataRenderer} and implements
- * the bubbling scheme for the OnCommand event of repeater items.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.0
- */
-class TRepeaterItemRenderer extends TItemDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
-	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
-	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TRepeaterCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
-			return true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TRepeater');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TItemDataRenderer');
+
+/**
+ * TRepeaterItemRenderer class
+ *
+ * TRepeaterItemRenderer can be used as a convenient base class to
+ * define an item renderer class specific for {@link TRepeater}.
+ *
+ * TRepeaterItemRenderer extends {@link TItemDataRenderer} and implements
+ * the bubbling scheme for the OnCommand event of repeater items.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.0
+ */
+class TRepeaterItemRenderer extends TItemDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides parent's implementation by wrapping event parameter
+	 * for <b>OnCommand</b> event with item information.
+	 * @param TControl the sender of the event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @return boolean whether the event bubbling should stop here.
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$this->raiseBubbleEvent($this,new TRepeaterCommandEventParameter($this,$sender,$param));
+			return true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRequiredFieldValidator.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRequiredFieldValidator.php
index 97555b82..89b142bf 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRequiredFieldValidator.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TRequiredFieldValidator.php
@@ -1,138 +1,138 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TRequiredFieldValidator class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TRequiredFieldValidator class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Using TBaseValidator class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
-
-/**
- * TRequiredFieldValidator class
- *
- * TRequiredFieldValidator makes the associated input control a required field.
- * The input control fails validation if its value does not change from
- * the {@link setInitialValue InitialValue} property upon losing focus.
- *
- * Validation will also succeed if input is of TListControl type and the number
- * of selected values different from the initial value is greater than zero.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TRequiredFieldValidator extends TBaseValidator
-{
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRequiredFieldValidator';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the initial value of the associated input control. Defaults to empty string.
-	 * If the associated input control does not change from this initial value
-	 * upon postback, the validation fails.
-	 */
-	public function getInitialValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('InitialValue','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the initial value of the associated input control.
-	 * If the associated input control does not change from this initial value
-	 * upon postback, the validation fails.
-	 */
-	public function setInitialValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('InitialValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
-	 * The validation succeeds if the input component changes its data
-	 * from the {@link getInitialValue InitialValue} or the input control is not given.
-	 *
-	 * Validation will also succeed if input is of TListControl type and the
-	 * number of selected values different from the initial value is greater
-	 * than zero.
-	 *
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
-	 */
-	protected function evaluateIsValid()
-	{
-		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
-		if($control instanceof TListControl)
-			return $this->validateListControl($control);
-		else if($control instanceof TRadioButton && strlen($control->getGroupName()) > 0)
-			return $this->validateRadioButtonGroup($control);
-		else
-			return $this->validateStandardControl($control);
-	}
-	
-	private function validateListControl($control)
-	{
-		$initial = trim($this->getInitialValue());
-		$count = 0;
-		foreach($control->getItems() as $item)
-		{
-			if($item->getSelected() && $item->getValue() != $initial)
-				$count++;
-		}
-		return $count > 0;
-	}
-	
-	private function validateRadioButtonGroup($control)
-	{
-		$initial = trim($this->getInitialValue());
-		foreach($control->getRadioButtonsInGroup() as $radio)
-		{
-			if($radio->getChecked())
-			{
-				if(strlen($value = $radio->getValue()) > 0)
-					return $value !== $initial;
-				else
-					return true;
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-	
-	private function validateStandardControl($control)
-	{
-		$initial = trim($this->getInitialValue());
-		$value=$this->getValidationValue($control);
-		return (is_bool($value) && $value) || trim($value)!==$initial;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
-	 * @return array javascript validator options.
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
-		$options['InitialValue']=$this->getInitialValue();
-		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
-		if($control instanceof TListControl)
-			$options['TotalItems'] = $control->getItemCount();
-		if($control instanceof TRadioButton && strlen($control->getGroupName()) > 0)
-			$options['GroupName'] = $control->getGroupName();
-		return $options;
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Using TBaseValidator class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TBaseValidator');
+
+/**
+ * TRequiredFieldValidator class
+ *
+ * TRequiredFieldValidator makes the associated input control a required field.
+ * The input control fails validation if its value does not change from
+ * the {@link setInitialValue InitialValue} property upon losing focus.
+ *
+ * Validation will also succeed if input is of TListControl type and the number
+ * of selected values different from the initial value is greater than zero.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TRequiredFieldValidator extends TBaseValidator
+{
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing validation for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TRequiredFieldValidator';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the initial value of the associated input control. Defaults to empty string.
+	 * If the associated input control does not change from this initial value
+	 * upon postback, the validation fails.
+	 */
+	public function getInitialValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('InitialValue','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the initial value of the associated input control.
+	 * If the associated input control does not change from this initial value
+	 * upon postback, the validation fails.
+	 */
+	public function setInitialValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('InitialValue',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * This method overrides the parent's implementation.
+	 * The validation succeeds if the input component changes its data
+	 * from the {@link getInitialValue InitialValue} or the input control is not given.
+	 *
+	 * Validation will also succeed if input is of TListControl type and the
+	 * number of selected values different from the initial value is greater
+	 * than zero.
+	 *
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation succeeds
+	 */
+	protected function evaluateIsValid()
+	{
+		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
+		if($control instanceof TListControl)
+			return $this->validateListControl($control);
+		else if($control instanceof TRadioButton && strlen($control->getGroupName()) > 0)
+			return $this->validateRadioButtonGroup($control);
+		else
+			return $this->validateStandardControl($control);
+	}
+	
+	private function validateListControl($control)
+	{
+		$initial = trim($this->getInitialValue());
+		$count = 0;
+		foreach($control->getItems() as $item)
+		{
+			if($item->getSelected() && $item->getValue() != $initial)
+				$count++;
+		}
+		return $count > 0;
+	}
+	
+	private function validateRadioButtonGroup($control)
+	{
+		$initial = trim($this->getInitialValue());
+		foreach($control->getRadioButtonsInGroup() as $radio)
+		{
+			if($radio->getChecked())
+			{
+				if(strlen($value = $radio->getValue()) > 0)
+					return $value !== $initial;
+				else
+					return true;
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+	
+	private function validateStandardControl($control)
+	{
+		$initial = trim($this->getInitialValue());
+		$value=$this->getValidationValue($control);
+		return (is_bool($value) && $value) || trim($value)!==$initial;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns an array of javascript validator options.
+	 * @return array javascript validator options.
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options = parent::getClientScriptOptions();
+		$options['InitialValue']=$this->getInitialValue();
+		$control = $this->getValidationTarget();
+		if($control instanceof TListControl)
+			$options['TotalItems'] = $control->getItemCount();
+		if($control instanceof TRadioButton && strlen($control->getGroupName()) > 0)
+			$options['GroupName'] = $control->getGroupName();
+		return $options;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSafeHtml.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSafeHtml.php
index e88277d4..1cd0a597 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSafeHtml.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSafeHtml.php
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TSafeHtml class file
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TSafeHtml class
- *
- * TSafeHtml is a control that strips down all potentially dangerous
- * HTML content. It is mainly a wrapper of {@link http://pear.php.net/package/SafeHTML SafeHTML}
- * project. According to the SafeHTML project, it tries to safeguard
- * the following situations when the string is to be displayed to end-users,
- * - Opening tag without its closing tag
- * - closing tag without its opening tag
- * - any of these tags: base, basefont, head, html, body, applet, object,
- *   iframe, frame, frameset, script, layer, ilayer, embed, bgsound, link,
- *   meta, style, title, blink, xml, etc.
- * - any of these attributes: on*, data*, dynsrc
- * - javascript:/vbscript:/about: etc. protocols
- * - expression/behavior etc. in styles
- * - any other active content.
- *
- * To use TSafeHtml, simply enclose the content to be secured within
- * the body of TSafeHtml in a template.
- *
- * If the content is encoded in UTF-7, you'll need to enable the  {@link setRepackUTF7 RepackUTF7} property
- * to ensure the contents gets parsed correctly.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TSafeHtml extends TControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * Sets whether to parse the contents as UTF-7. This property enables a routine
-	 * that repacks the content as UTF-7 before parsing it. Defaults to false.
-	 * @param boolean whether to parse the contents as UTF-7
-	 */
-	public function setRepackUTF7($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('RepackUTF7',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to parse the contents as UTF-7. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getRepackUTF7()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('RepackUTF7',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body content.
-	 * This method overrides parent implementation by removing
-	 * malicious javascript code from the body content
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$htmlWriter = Prado::createComponent($this->GetResponse()->getHtmlWriterType(), new TTextWriter());
-		parent::render($htmlWriter);
-		$writer->write($this->parseSafeHtml($htmlWriter->flush()));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Use SafeHTML to remove malicous javascript from the HTML content.
-	 * @param string HTML content
-	 * @return string safer HTML content
-	 */
-	protected function parseSafeHtml($text)
-	{
-		$renderer = Prado::createComponent('System.3rdParty.SafeHtml.TSafeHtmlParser');
-		return $renderer->parse($text, $this->getRepackUTF7());
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TSafeHtml class file
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TSafeHtml class
+ *
+ * TSafeHtml is a control that strips down all potentially dangerous
+ * HTML content. It is mainly a wrapper of {@link http://pear.php.net/package/SafeHTML SafeHTML}
+ * project. According to the SafeHTML project, it tries to safeguard
+ * the following situations when the string is to be displayed to end-users,
+ * - Opening tag without its closing tag
+ * - closing tag without its opening tag
+ * - any of these tags: base, basefont, head, html, body, applet, object,
+ *   iframe, frame, frameset, script, layer, ilayer, embed, bgsound, link,
+ *   meta, style, title, blink, xml, etc.
+ * - any of these attributes: on*, data*, dynsrc
+ * - javascript:/vbscript:/about: etc. protocols
+ * - expression/behavior etc. in styles
+ * - any other active content.
+ *
+ * To use TSafeHtml, simply enclose the content to be secured within
+ * the body of TSafeHtml in a template.
+ *
+ * If the content is encoded in UTF-7, you'll need to enable the  {@link setRepackUTF7 RepackUTF7} property
+ * to ensure the contents gets parsed correctly.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TSafeHtml extends TControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * Sets whether to parse the contents as UTF-7. This property enables a routine
+	 * that repacks the content as UTF-7 before parsing it. Defaults to false.
+	 * @param boolean whether to parse the contents as UTF-7
+	 */
+	public function setRepackUTF7($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('RepackUTF7',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to parse the contents as UTF-7. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getRepackUTF7()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('RepackUTF7',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body content.
+	 * This method overrides parent implementation by removing
+	 * malicious javascript code from the body content
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$htmlWriter = Prado::createComponent($this->GetResponse()->getHtmlWriterType(), new TTextWriter());
+		parent::render($htmlWriter);
+		$writer->write($this->parseSafeHtml($htmlWriter->flush()));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Use SafeHTML to remove malicous javascript from the HTML content.
+	 * @param string HTML content
+	 * @return string safer HTML content
+	 */
+	protected function parseSafeHtml($text)
+	{
+		$renderer = Prado::createComponent('System.3rdParty.SafeHtml.TSafeHtmlParser');
+		return $renderer->parse($text, $this->getRepackUTF7());
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSlider.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSlider.php
index ce080f5f..06df52b6 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSlider.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TSlider.php
@@ -1,574 +1,574 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TSlider class file.
- *
- * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-
-/**
- * TSlider class
- *
- * TSlider displays a slider for numeric input purpose. A slider consists of a 'track',
- * which define the range of possible value, and a 'handle' which can slide on the track, to select
- * a value in the range. The track can be either Horizontal or Vertical, depending of the {@link SetDirection Direction}
- * property. By default, it's horizontal.
- *
- * The range boundaries are defined by {@link SetMinValue MinValue} and {@link SetMaxValue MaxValue} properties.
- * The default range is from 0 to 100.
- * The {@link SetStepSize StepSize} property can be used to define the <b>step</b> between 2 values inside the range.
- * Notice that this step will be recomputed if there is more than 200 values between the range boundaries.
- * You can also provide the allowed values by setting the {@link SetValues Values} array.
- *
- * A 'Progress Indicator' can be displayed within the track with the {@link SetProgressIndicator ProgressIndicator} property.
- * 
- * The TSlider control can be easily customized using CssClasses. You can provide your own css file, using the
- * {@link SetCssUrl CssUrl} property.
- * The css class for TSlider can be set by the {@link setCssClass CssClass} property. Default value is "Slider HorizontalSlider" 
- * for an horizontal slider, and "Slider VerticalSlider" for a vertical one.
- *
- * If {@link SetAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} property is true, postback is sent as soon as the value changed.
- *
- * TSlider raises the {@link onValueChanged} event when the value of the slider has changed during postback.
- *
- * You can also attach ClientSide javascript events handler to the slider :
- * - ClientSide.onSlide is called when the handle is slided on the track. You can get the current value in the <b>value</b>
- * javascript variable. You can use this event to update on client side a label with the current value
- * - ClientSide.onChange is called when the slider value has changed (at the end of a move).
- *
- * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-class TSlider extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IDataRenderer
-{
-	const MAX_STEPS=200;
-	/**
-	 * @var TSliderHandle handle component
-	 */
-	private $_handle;
-	/*
-	 * @var boolean Wether the data has changed during postback
-	 */
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
-	/**
-	 * @var TSliderClientScript Clients side javascripts
-	 */
-	private $_clientScript=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TSliderDirection Direction of slider (Horizontal or Vertical). Defaults to Horizontal.
-	 */
-	public function getDirection()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Direction', TSliderDirection::Horizontal);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TSliderDirection Direction of slider (Horizontal or Vertical)
-	 */
-	public function setDirection($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Direction', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TSliderDirection'),TSliderDirection::Horizontal);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions. Defaults to '' (a default CSS file will be applied in this case.)
-	 */
-	public function getCssUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CssUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions.
-	 */
-	public function setCssUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CssUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return float Maximum value for the slider. Defaults to 100.0.
-	 */
-	public function getMaxValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MaxValue',100.0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param float Maximum value for slider
-	 */
-	public function setMaxValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('MaxValue', TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value),100.0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return float Minimum value for slider. Defaults to 0.0.
-	 */
-	public function getMinValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MinValue',0.0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param float Minimum value for slider
-	 */
-	public function setMinValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('MinValue', TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value),0.0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return float Step size. Defaults to 1.0.
-	 */
-	public function getStepSize()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('StepSize', 1.0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the step size used to determine the places where the slider handle can stop at.
-	 * An evenly distributed stop marks will be generated according to
-	 * {@link getMinValue MinValue}, {@link getMaxValue MaxValue} and StepSize.
-	 * To use uneven stop marks, set {@link setValues Values}.
-	 * @param float Step size.
-	 */
-	public function setStepSize($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('StepSize', $value, 1.0);
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean wether to display a progress indicator or not. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getProgressIndicator ()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ProgressIndicator', true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean wether to display a progress indicator or not. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function setProgressIndicator ($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ProgressIndicator', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value), true);
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @return float current value of slider
-	 */
-	public function getValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Value',0.0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param float current value of slider
-	 */
-	public function setValue($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Value', TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value),0.0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value of the TSlider control.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getValue()}.
-	 * @return string the value of the TSlider control.
-	 * @see getValue
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getValue();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value of the TSlider control.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setValue()}.
-	 * @param string the value of the TSlider control.
-	 * @see setValue
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setValue($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array list of allowed values the slider can take. Defaults to an empty array.
-	 */
-	public function getValues()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Values', array());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the possible values that the slider can take.
-	 * If this is set, {@link setStepSize StepSize} will be ignored. The latter
-	 * generates a set of evenly distributed candidate values.
-	 * @param array list of allowed values the slider can take
-	 */
-	public function setValues($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Values', TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value), array());
-	}
-	
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether an automatic postback to the server
-	 * will occur whenever the user modifies the slider value. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoPostBack()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating if postback automatically.
-	 * An automatic postback to the server will occur whenever the user
-	 * modifies the slider value.
-	 * @param boolean the value indicating if postback automatically
-	 */
-	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TSlider';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
-	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getValue Value} property
-	 * is changed on postback.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		$this->onValueChanged(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnValueChanged</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when the {@link getValue Value}
-	 * property changes on postback.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation to ensure
-	 * the invocation of the attached event handlers.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onValueChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnValueChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		$value=(float)$values[$this->getClientID().'_1'];
-		if($this->getValue()!==$value)
-		{
-			$this->setValue($value);
-			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the TSliderClientScript to set the TSlider event handlers.
-	 *
-	 * The slider on the client-side supports the following events.
-	 * # <tt>OnSliderMove</tt> -- raised when the slider is moved.
-	 * # <tt>OnSliderChanged</tt> -- raised when the slider value is changed
-	 *
-	 * You can attach custom javascript code to each of these events
-	 *
-	 * @return TSliderClientScript javascript validator event options.
-	 */
-	public function getClientSide()
-	{
-		if($this->_clientScript===null)
-			$this->_clientScript = $this->createClientScript();
-		return $this->_clientScript;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TSliderClientScript javascript event options.
-	 */
-	protected function createClientScript()
-	{
-		return new TSliderClientScript;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the HTML tag name for slider. Defaults to div.
-	 */
-	public function getTagName ()
-	{
-		return "div";
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Add the specified css classes to the track
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		if ($this->getCssClass()==='')
-		{
-			$class=($this->getDirection()==TSliderDirection::Horizontal)?'HorizontalSlider':'VerticalSlider';
-			$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Slider '.$class);
-		}
-		
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Render the body content
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		// Render the 'Track'
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Track');
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_track');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
-		// Render the 'Progress Indicator'
-		if ($this->getProgressIndicator())
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Progress');
-			$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_progress');
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		// Render the 'Ruler'
-		/*
-		 * Removing for now
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'RuleContainer');
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID()."_rule");
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
-		for ($i=0;$i<=100;$i+=10)
-		{
-			$writer->addAttribute('class', 'RuleMark');
-			$attr=($this->getDirection()===TSliderDirection::Horizontal)?"left":"top";
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute($attr, $i.'%');
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-		*/
-		
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-		
-		// Render the 'Handle'
-		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Handle');
-		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_handle');
-		$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
-		$writer->renderEndTag();
-	}
-	/**
-	 * Registers CSS and JS.
-	 * This method is invoked right before the control rendering, if the control is visible.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreRender ($param)
-	{
-		parent::onPreRender($param);
-		$this->registerStyleSheet();
-		$this->registerSliderClientScript();
-
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the CSS relevant to the TSlider.
-	 * It will register the CSS file specified by {@link getCssUrl CssUrl}.
-	 * If that is not set, it will use the default CSS.
-	 */
-	protected function registerStyleSheet()
-	{
-		if(($url=$this->getCssUrl())==='')
-		{
-			$manager=$this->getApplication()->getAssetManager();
-			// publish the assets
-			$url=$manager->publishFilePath(dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'TSlider');
-			$url.='/TSlider.css';
-		}
-		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerStyleSheetFile($url,$url);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Registers the javascript code to initialize the slider.
-	 */
-	protected function registerSliderClientScript()
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$cs = $page->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPradoScript("slider");
-		$id=$this->getClientID();
-		$cs->registerHiddenField($id.'_1',$this->getValue());
-		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this);
-		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getSliderOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Get javascript sliderr options.
-	 * @return array slider client-side options
-	 */
-	protected function getSliderOptions()
-	{
-		// PostBack Options :
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		$options['AutoPostBack'] = $this->getAutoPostBack();
-
-		// Slider Control options
-		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
-		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
-		$options['axis'] = strtolower($this->getDirection());
-		$options['maximum'] = $maxValue;
-		$options['minimum'] = $minValue;
-		$options['range'] = TJavascript::quoteJsLiteral('$R('.$minValue.",".$maxValue.")");
-		$options['sliderValue'] = $this->getValue();
-		$options['disabled'] = !$this->getEnabled();
-		$values=$this->getValues();
-		if (!empty($values))
-		{
-			// Values are provided. Check if min/max are present in them
-			if (!in_array($minValue, $values)) $values[]=$minValue;
-			if (!in_array($maxValue, $values)) $values[]=$maxValue;
-			// Remove all values outsize the range [min..max]
-			foreach ($values as $idx=>$value)
-			{
-				if ($value < $minValue) unset ($values[$idx]);
-				if ($value > $maxValue) unset ($values[$idx]);
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			// Values are not provided, generate automatically using stepsize
-			$step=$this->getStepSize();
-			// We want at most self::MAX_STEPS values, so, change the step if necessary
-			if (($maxValue-$minValue)/$step > self::MAX_STEPS)
-			{
-				$step=($maxValue-$minValue)/self::MAX_STEPS;
-			}
-			$values=array();
-			for ($i=$minValue;$i<=$maxValue;$i+=$step)
-				$values[]=$i;
-			// Add max if it's not in the array because of step
-			if (!in_array($maxValue, $values)) $values[]=$maxValue;
-		}
-		$options['values'] = $values;
-		if($this->_clientScript!==null)
-			$options = array_merge($options,$this->_clientScript->getOptions()->toArray());
-		return $options;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TSliderClientScript class.
- *
- * Client-side slider events {@link setOnChange OnChange} and {@line setOnMove OnMove}
- * can be modified through the {@link TSlider:: getClientSide ClientSide}
- * property of a slider.
- *
- * The current value of the slider can be get in the 'value' js variable
- *
- * The <tt>OnMove</tt> event is raised when the slider moves
- * The <tt>OnChange</tt> event is raised when the slider value is changed (or at the end of a move)
- *
- * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-class TSliderClientScript extends TClientSideOptions
-{
-	/**
-	 * Javascript code to execute when the slider value is changed.
-	 * @param string javascript code
-	 */
-	public function setOnChange($javascript)
-	{
-		$code=TJavascript::quoteJsLiteral("function (value) { {$javascript} }");
-		$this->setFunction('onChange', $code);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string javascript code to execute when the slider value is changed.
-	 */
-	public function getOnChange()
-	{
-		return $this->getOption('onChange');
-	}
-
-	/* Javascript code to execute when the slider moves.
-	 * @param string javascript code
-	 */
-	public function setOnSlide($javascript)
-	{
-		$code=TJavascript::quoteJsLiteral("function (value) { {$javascript} }");
-		$this->setFunction('onSlide', $code);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string javascript code to execute when the slider moves.
-	 */
-	public function getOnSlide()
-	{
-		return $this->getOption('onSlide');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TSliderDirection class.
- *
- * TSliderDirection defines the enumerable type for the possible direction that can be used in a {@link TSlider}
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined :
- * - Horizontal : Horizontal slider
- * - Vertical : Vertical slider
- *
- * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1.1
- */
-class TSliderDirection extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
-	const Vertical='Vertical';
-}
-
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TSlider class file.
+ *
+ * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TSlider class
+ *
+ * TSlider displays a slider for numeric input purpose. A slider consists of a 'track',
+ * which define the range of possible value, and a 'handle' which can slide on the track, to select
+ * a value in the range. The track can be either Horizontal or Vertical, depending of the {@link SetDirection Direction}
+ * property. By default, it's horizontal.
+ *
+ * The range boundaries are defined by {@link SetMinValue MinValue} and {@link SetMaxValue MaxValue} properties.
+ * The default range is from 0 to 100.
+ * The {@link SetStepSize StepSize} property can be used to define the <b>step</b> between 2 values inside the range.
+ * Notice that this step will be recomputed if there is more than 200 values between the range boundaries.
+ * You can also provide the allowed values by setting the {@link SetValues Values} array.
+ *
+ * A 'Progress Indicator' can be displayed within the track with the {@link SetProgressIndicator ProgressIndicator} property.
+ * 
+ * The TSlider control can be easily customized using CssClasses. You can provide your own css file, using the
+ * {@link SetCssUrl CssUrl} property.
+ * The css class for TSlider can be set by the {@link setCssClass CssClass} property. Default value is "Slider HorizontalSlider" 
+ * for an horizontal slider, and "Slider VerticalSlider" for a vertical one.
+ *
+ * If {@link SetAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} property is true, postback is sent as soon as the value changed.
+ *
+ * TSlider raises the {@link onValueChanged} event when the value of the slider has changed during postback.
+ *
+ * You can also attach ClientSide javascript events handler to the slider :
+ * - ClientSide.onSlide is called when the handle is slided on the track. You can get the current value in the <b>value</b>
+ * javascript variable. You can use this event to update on client side a label with the current value
+ * - ClientSide.onChange is called when the slider value has changed (at the end of a move).
+ *
+ * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+class TSlider extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IDataRenderer
+{
+	const MAX_STEPS=200;
+	/**
+	 * @var TSliderHandle handle component
+	 */
+	private $_handle;
+	/*
+	 * @var boolean Wether the data has changed during postback
+	 */
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
+	/**
+	 * @var TSliderClientScript Clients side javascripts
+	 */
+	private $_clientScript=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TSliderDirection Direction of slider (Horizontal or Vertical). Defaults to Horizontal.
+	 */
+	public function getDirection()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Direction', TSliderDirection::Horizontal);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TSliderDirection Direction of slider (Horizontal or Vertical)
+	 */
+	public function setDirection($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Direction', TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TSliderDirection'),TSliderDirection::Horizontal);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions. Defaults to '' (a default CSS file will be applied in this case.)
+	 */
+	public function getCssUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CssUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string URL for the CSS file including all relevant CSS class definitions.
+	 */
+	public function setCssUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CssUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return float Maximum value for the slider. Defaults to 100.0.
+	 */
+	public function getMaxValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MaxValue',100.0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param float Maximum value for slider
+	 */
+	public function setMaxValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('MaxValue', TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value),100.0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return float Minimum value for slider. Defaults to 0.0.
+	 */
+	public function getMinValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MinValue',0.0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param float Minimum value for slider
+	 */
+	public function setMinValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('MinValue', TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value),0.0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return float Step size. Defaults to 1.0.
+	 */
+	public function getStepSize()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('StepSize', 1.0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the step size used to determine the places where the slider handle can stop at.
+	 * An evenly distributed stop marks will be generated according to
+	 * {@link getMinValue MinValue}, {@link getMaxValue MaxValue} and StepSize.
+	 * To use uneven stop marks, set {@link setValues Values}.
+	 * @param float Step size.
+	 */
+	public function setStepSize($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('StepSize', $value, 1.0);
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean wether to display a progress indicator or not. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getProgressIndicator ()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ProgressIndicator', true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean wether to display a progress indicator or not. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function setProgressIndicator ($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ProgressIndicator', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value), true);
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @return float current value of slider
+	 */
+	public function getValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Value',0.0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param float current value of slider
+	 */
+	public function setValue($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Value', TPropertyValue::ensureFloat($value),0.0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value of the TSlider control.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getValue()}.
+	 * @return string the value of the TSlider control.
+	 * @see getValue
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getValue();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value of the TSlider control.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setValue()}.
+	 * @param string the value of the TSlider control.
+	 * @see setValue
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setValue($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array list of allowed values the slider can take. Defaults to an empty array.
+	 */
+	public function getValues()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Values', array());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the possible values that the slider can take.
+	 * If this is set, {@link setStepSize StepSize} will be ignored. The latter
+	 * generates a set of evenly distributed candidate values.
+	 * @param array list of allowed values the slider can take
+	 */
+	public function setValues($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Values', TPropertyValue::ensureArray($value), array());
+	}
+	
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether an automatic postback to the server
+	 * will occur whenever the user modifies the slider value. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoPostBack()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating if postback automatically.
+	 * An automatic postback to the server will occur whenever the user
+	 * modifies the slider value.
+	 * @param boolean the value indicating if postback automatically
+	 */
+	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TSlider';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
+	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getValue Value} property
+	 * is changed on postback.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		$this->onValueChanged(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnValueChanged</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when the {@link getValue Value}
+	 * property changes on postback.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation to ensure
+	 * the invocation of the attached event handlers.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onValueChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnValueChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		$value=(float)$values[$this->getClientID().'_1'];
+		if($this->getValue()!==$value)
+		{
+			$this->setValue($value);
+			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the TSliderClientScript to set the TSlider event handlers.
+	 *
+	 * The slider on the client-side supports the following events.
+	 * # <tt>OnSliderMove</tt> -- raised when the slider is moved.
+	 * # <tt>OnSliderChanged</tt> -- raised when the slider value is changed
+	 *
+	 * You can attach custom javascript code to each of these events
+	 *
+	 * @return TSliderClientScript javascript validator event options.
+	 */
+	public function getClientSide()
+	{
+		if($this->_clientScript===null)
+			$this->_clientScript = $this->createClientScript();
+		return $this->_clientScript;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TSliderClientScript javascript event options.
+	 */
+	protected function createClientScript()
+	{
+		return new TSliderClientScript;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the HTML tag name for slider. Defaults to div.
+	 */
+	public function getTagName ()
+	{
+		return "div";
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Add the specified css classes to the track
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		if ($this->getCssClass()==='')
+		{
+			$class=($this->getDirection()==TSliderDirection::Horizontal)?'HorizontalSlider':'VerticalSlider';
+			$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Slider '.$class);
+		}
+		
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Render the body content
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		// Render the 'Track'
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Track');
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_track');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
+		// Render the 'Progress Indicator'
+		if ($this->getProgressIndicator())
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Progress');
+			$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_progress');
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		// Render the 'Ruler'
+		/*
+		 * Removing for now
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'RuleContainer');
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID()."_rule");
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
+		for ($i=0;$i<=100;$i+=10)
+		{
+			$writer->addAttribute('class', 'RuleMark');
+			$attr=($this->getDirection()===TSliderDirection::Horizontal)?"left":"top";
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute($attr, $i.'%');
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+		*/
+		
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+		
+		// Render the 'Handle'
+		$writer->addAttribute('class', 'Handle');
+		$writer->addAttribute('id', $this->getClientID().'_handle');
+		$writer->renderBeginTag('div');
+		$writer->renderEndTag();
+	}
+	/**
+	 * Registers CSS and JS.
+	 * This method is invoked right before the control rendering, if the control is visible.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreRender ($param)
+	{
+		parent::onPreRender($param);
+		$this->registerStyleSheet();
+		$this->registerSliderClientScript();
+
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the CSS relevant to the TSlider.
+	 * It will register the CSS file specified by {@link getCssUrl CssUrl}.
+	 * If that is not set, it will use the default CSS.
+	 */
+	protected function registerStyleSheet()
+	{
+		if(($url=$this->getCssUrl())==='')
+		{
+			$manager=$this->getApplication()->getAssetManager();
+			// publish the assets
+			$url=$manager->publishFilePath(dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'assets'.DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'TSlider');
+			$url.='/TSlider.css';
+		}
+		$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerStyleSheetFile($url,$url);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Registers the javascript code to initialize the slider.
+	 */
+	protected function registerSliderClientScript()
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$cs = $page->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPradoScript("slider");
+		$id=$this->getClientID();
+		$cs->registerHiddenField($id.'_1',$this->getValue());
+		$page->registerRequiresPostData($this);
+		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getSliderOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Get javascript sliderr options.
+	 * @return array slider client-side options
+	 */
+	protected function getSliderOptions()
+	{
+		// PostBack Options :
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		$options['AutoPostBack'] = $this->getAutoPostBack();
+
+		// Slider Control options
+		$minValue=$this->getMinValue();
+		$maxValue=$this->getMaxValue();
+		$options['axis'] = strtolower($this->getDirection());
+		$options['maximum'] = $maxValue;
+		$options['minimum'] = $minValue;
+		$options['range'] = TJavascript::quoteJsLiteral('$R('.$minValue.",".$maxValue.")");
+		$options['sliderValue'] = $this->getValue();
+		$options['disabled'] = !$this->getEnabled();
+		$values=$this->getValues();
+		if (!empty($values))
+		{
+			// Values are provided. Check if min/max are present in them
+			if (!in_array($minValue, $values)) $values[]=$minValue;
+			if (!in_array($maxValue, $values)) $values[]=$maxValue;
+			// Remove all values outsize the range [min..max]
+			foreach ($values as $idx=>$value)
+			{
+				if ($value < $minValue) unset ($values[$idx]);
+				if ($value > $maxValue) unset ($values[$idx]);
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			// Values are not provided, generate automatically using stepsize
+			$step=$this->getStepSize();
+			// We want at most self::MAX_STEPS values, so, change the step if necessary
+			if (($maxValue-$minValue)/$step > self::MAX_STEPS)
+			{
+				$step=($maxValue-$minValue)/self::MAX_STEPS;
+			}
+			$values=array();
+			for ($i=$minValue;$i<=$maxValue;$i+=$step)
+				$values[]=$i;
+			// Add max if it's not in the array because of step
+			if (!in_array($maxValue, $values)) $values[]=$maxValue;
+		}
+		$options['values'] = $values;
+		if($this->_clientScript!==null)
+			$options = array_merge($options,$this->_clientScript->getOptions()->toArray());
+		return $options;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TSliderClientScript class.
+ *
+ * Client-side slider events {@link setOnChange OnChange} and {@line setOnMove OnMove}
+ * can be modified through the {@link TSlider:: getClientSide ClientSide}
+ * property of a slider.
+ *
+ * The current value of the slider can be get in the 'value' js variable
+ *
+ * The <tt>OnMove</tt> event is raised when the slider moves
+ * The <tt>OnChange</tt> event is raised when the slider value is changed (or at the end of a move)
+ *
+ * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+class TSliderClientScript extends TClientSideOptions
+{
+	/**
+	 * Javascript code to execute when the slider value is changed.
+	 * @param string javascript code
+	 */
+	public function setOnChange($javascript)
+	{
+		$code=TJavascript::quoteJsLiteral("function (value) { {$javascript} }");
+		$this->setFunction('onChange', $code);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string javascript code to execute when the slider value is changed.
+	 */
+	public function getOnChange()
+	{
+		return $this->getOption('onChange');
+	}
+
+	/* Javascript code to execute when the slider moves.
+	 * @param string javascript code
+	 */
+	public function setOnSlide($javascript)
+	{
+		$code=TJavascript::quoteJsLiteral("function (value) { {$javascript} }");
+		$this->setFunction('onSlide', $code);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string javascript code to execute when the slider moves.
+	 */
+	public function getOnSlide()
+	{
+		return $this->getOption('onSlide');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TSliderDirection class.
+ *
+ * TSliderDirection defines the enumerable type for the possible direction that can be used in a {@link TSlider}
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined :
+ * - Horizontal : Horizontal slider
+ * - Vertical : Vertical slider
+ *
+ * @author Christophe Boulain <Christophe.Boulain@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1.1
+ */
+class TSliderDirection extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
+	const Vertical='Vertical';
+}
+
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStatements.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStatements.php
index c3f43278..dd7631e2 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStatements.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStatements.php
@@ -1,63 +1,63 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TStatements class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TStatements class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TStatements class
- *
- * TStatements executes one or several PHP statements and renders the display
- * generated during the execution. The execution happens during the rendering stage.
- * The PHP statements being executed can be set via the property
- * {@link setStatements Statements}. The context of the statemenets executed
- * is the TStatements object itself.
- *
- * Note, since TStatements allows execution of arbitrary PHP statements,
- * make sure {@link setStatements Statements} does not come directly from user input.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TStatements extends TControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var string PHP statements
-	 */
-	private $_s='';
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the statements to be executed
-	 */
-	public function getStatements()
-	{
-		return $this->_s;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the PHP statements to be executed
-	 */
-	public function setStatements($value)
-	{
-		$this->_s=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the evaluation result of the statements.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_s!=='')
-			$writer->write($this->evaluateStatements($this->_s));
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TStatements class
+ *
+ * TStatements executes one or several PHP statements and renders the display
+ * generated during the execution. The execution happens during the rendering stage.
+ * The PHP statements being executed can be set via the property
+ * {@link setStatements Statements}. The context of the statemenets executed
+ * is the TStatements object itself.
+ *
+ * Note, since TStatements allows execution of arbitrary PHP statements,
+ * make sure {@link setStatements Statements} does not come directly from user input.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TStatements extends TControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var string PHP statements
+	 */
+	private $_s='';
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the statements to be executed
+	 */
+	public function getStatements()
+	{
+		return $this->_s;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the PHP statements to be executed
+	 */
+	public function setStatements($value)
+	{
+		$this->_s=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the evaluation result of the statements.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_s!=='')
+			$writer->write($this->evaluateStatements($this->_s));
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStyle.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStyle.php
index 58be223a..93f7d45d 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStyle.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TStyle.php
@@ -1,893 +1,893 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TStyle class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TFont definition
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TFont');
-
-/**
- * TStyle class
- *
- * TStyle encapsulates the CSS style applied to a control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TStyle extends TComponent
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var array storage of CSS fields
-	 */
-	private $_fields=array();
-	/**
-	 * @var TFont font object
-	 */
-	private $_font=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string CSS class name
-	 */
-	private $_class=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string CSS style string (those not represented by specific fields of TStyle)
-	 */
-	private $_customStyle=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string display style
-	 */
-	private $_displayStyle='Fixed';
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TStyle style to copy from
-	 */
-	public function __construct($style=null)
-	{
-		if($style!==null)
-			$this->copyFrom($style);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Need to clone the font object.
-	 */
-	public function __clone()
-	{
-		if($this->_font!==null)
-			$this->_font = clone($this->_font);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the background color of the control
-	 */
-	public function getBackColor()
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields['background-color'])?$this->_fields['background-color']:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the background color of the control
-	 */
-	public function setBackColor($value)
-	{
-		if(trim($value)==='')
-			unset($this->_fields['background-color']);
-		else
-			$this->_fields['background-color']=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the border color of the control
-	 */
-	public function getBorderColor()
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields['border-color'])?$this->_fields['border-color']:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the border color of the control
-	 */
-	public function setBorderColor($value)
-	{
-		if(trim($value)==='')
-			unset($this->_fields['border-color']);
-		else
-			$this->_fields['border-color']=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the border style of the control
-	 */
-	public function getBorderStyle()
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields['border-style'])?$this->_fields['border-style']:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the border style of the control.
-	 * @param string the border style of the control
-	 */
-	public function setBorderStyle($value)
-	{
-		if(trim($value)==='')
-			unset($this->_fields['border-style']);
-		else
-			$this->_fields['border-style']=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the border width of the control
-	 */
-	public function getBorderWidth()
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields['border-width'])?$this->_fields['border-width']:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the border width of the control
-	 */
-	public function setBorderWidth($value)
-	{
-		if(trim($value)==='')
-			unset($this->_fields['border-width']);
-		else
-			$this->_fields['border-width']=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the CSS class of the control
-	 */
-	public function getCssClass()
-	{
-		return $this->_class===null?'':$this->_class;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean true if CSS is set or empty.
-	 */
-	public function hasCssClass()
-	{
-		return ($this->_class!==null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the name of the CSS class of the control
-	 */
-	public function setCssClass($value)
-	{
-		$this->_class=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TFont the font of the control
-	 */
-	public function getFont()
-	{
-		if($this->_font===null)
-			$this->_font=new TFont;
-		return $this->_font;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean true if font is set.
-	 */
-	public function hasFont()
-	{
-		return $this->_font !== null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TDisplayStyle control display style, default is TDisplayStyle::Fixed
-	 */
-	public function setDisplayStyle($value)
-	{
-		$this->_displayStyle = TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDisplayStyle');
-		switch($this->_displayStyle)
-		{
-			case TDisplayStyle::None:
-				$this->_fields['display'] = 'none';
-				break;
-			case TDisplayStyle::Dynamic:
-				$this->_fields['display'] = ''; //remove the display property
-				break;
-			case TDisplayStyle::Fixed:
-				$this->_fields['visibility'] = 'visible';
-				break;
-			case TDisplayStyle::Hidden:
-				$this->_fields['visibility'] = 'hidden';
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TDisplayStyle display style
-	 */
-	public function getDisplayStyle()
-	{
-		return $this->_displayStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the foreground color of the control
-	 */
-	public function getForeColor()
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields['color'])?$this->_fields['color']:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the foreground color of the control
-	 */
-	public function setForeColor($value)
-	{
-		if(trim($value)==='')
-			unset($this->_fields['color']);
-		else
-			$this->_fields['color']=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the height of the control
-	 */
-	public function getHeight()
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields['height'])?$this->_fields['height']:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the height of the control
-	 */
-	public function setHeight($value)
-	{
-		if(trim($value)==='')
-			unset($this->_fields['height']);
-		else
-			$this->_fields['height']=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the custom style of the control
-	 */
-	public function getCustomStyle()
-	{
-		return $this->_customStyle===null?'':$this->_customStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets custom style fields from a string.
-	 * Custom style fields will be overwritten by style fields explicitly defined.
-	 * @param string the custom style of the control
-	 */
-	public function setCustomStyle($value)
-	{
-		$this->_customStyle=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string a single style field value set via {@link setStyleField}. Defaults to empty string.
-	 */
-	public function getStyleField($name)
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields[$name])?$this->_fields[$name]:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets a single style field value.
-	 * Style fields set by this method will overwrite those set by {@link setCustomStyle}.
-	 * @param string style field name
-	 * @param string style field value
-	 */
-	public function setStyleField($name,$value)
-	{
-		$this->_fields[$name]=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Clears a single style field value;
-	 * @param string style field name
-	 */
-	public function clearStyleField($name)
-	{
-		unset($this->_fields[$name]);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether a style field has been defined by {@link setStyleField}
-	 */
-	public function hasStyleField($name)
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields[$name]);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the width of the control
-	 */
-	public function getWidth()
-	{
-		return isset($this->_fields['width'])?$this->_fields['width']:'';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the width of the control
-	 */
-	public function setWidth($value)
-	{
-		$this->_fields['width']=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Resets the style to the original empty state.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		$this->_fields=array();
-		$this->_font=null;
-		$this->_class=null;
-		$this->_customStyle=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
-	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
-	 * in this style will be overwritten.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function copyFrom($style)
-	{
-		if($style instanceof TStyle)
-		{
-			$this->_fields=array_merge($this->_fields,$style->_fields);
-			if($style->_class!==null)
-				$this->_class=$style->_class;
-			if($style->_customStyle!==null)
-				$this->_customStyle=$style->_customStyle;
-			if($style->_font!==null)
-				$this->getFont()->copyFrom($style->_font);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges the style with a new one.
-	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
-	 * the new one.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function mergeWith($style)
-	{
-		if($style instanceof TStyle)
-		{
-			$this->_fields=array_merge($style->_fields,$this->_fields);
-			if($this->_class===null)
-				$this->_class=$style->_class;
-			if($this->_customStyle===null)
-				$this->_customStyle=$style->_customStyle;
-			if($style->_font!==null)
-				$this->getFont()->mergeWith($style->_font);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->_customStyle!==null)
-		{
-			foreach(explode(';',$this->_customStyle) as $style)
-			{
-				$arr=explode(':',$style,2);
-				if(isset($arr[1]) && trim($arr[0])!=='')
-					$writer->addStyleAttribute(trim($arr[0]),trim($arr[1]));
-			}
-		}
-		$writer->addStyleAttributes($this->_fields);
-		if($this->_font!==null)
-			$this->_font->addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if($this->_class!==null)
-			$writer->addAttribute('class',$this->_class);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return array list of style fields.
-	 */
-	public function getStyleFields()
-	{
-		return $this->_fields;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TDisplayStyle defines the enumerable type for the possible styles
- * that a web control can display.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - None: the control is not displayed and not included in the layout.
- * - Dynamic: the control is displayed and included in the layout, the layout flow is dependent on the control (equivalent to display:'' in css).
- * - Fixed: Similar to Dynamic with CSS "visibility" set "shown".
- * - Hidden: the control is not displayed and is included in the layout.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.1
- */
-class TDisplayStyle extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const None='None';
-	const Dynamic='Dynamic';
-	const Fixed='Fixed';
-	const Hidden='Hidden';
-}
-
-/**
- * TTableStyle class.
- * TTableStyle represents the CSS style specific for HTML table.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTableStyle extends TStyle
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TVerticalAlign the URL of the background image for the table
-	 */
-	private $_backImageUrl=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var THorizontalAlign horizontal alignment of the contents within the table
-	 */
-	private $_horizontalAlign=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var integer cellpadding of the table
-	 */
-	private $_cellPadding=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var integer cellspacing of the table
-	 */
-	private $_cellSpacing=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TTableGridLines grid line setting of the table
-	 */
-	private $_gridLines=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether the table border should be collapsed
-	 */
-	private $_borderCollapse=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
-	 * resetting additional TTableStyle specific attributes.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		$this->_backImageUrl=null;
-		$this->_horizontalAlign=null;
-		$this->_cellPadding=null;
-		$this->_cellSpacing=null;
-		$this->_gridLines=null;
-		$this->_borderCollapse=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
-	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
-	 * in this style will be overwritten.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function copyFrom($style)
-	{
-		parent::copyFrom($style);
-		if($style instanceof TTableStyle)
-		{
-			if($style->_backImageUrl!==null)
-				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
-			if($style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
-			if($style->_cellPadding!==null)
-				$this->_cellPadding=$style->_cellPadding;
-			if($style->_cellSpacing!==null)
-				$this->_cellSpacing=$style->_cellSpacing;
-			if($style->_gridLines!==null)
-				$this->_gridLines=$style->_gridLines;
-			if($style->_borderCollapse!==null)
-				$this->_borderCollapse=$style->_borderCollapse;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges the style with a new one.
-	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
-	 * the new one.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function mergeWith($style)
-	{
-		parent::mergeWith($style);
-		if($style instanceof TTableStyle)
-		{
-			if($this->_backImageUrl===null && $style->_backImageUrl!==null)
-				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
-			if($this->_horizontalAlign===null && $style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
-			if($this->_cellPadding===null && $style->_cellPadding!==null)
-				$this->_cellPadding=$style->_cellPadding;
-			if($this->_cellSpacing===null && $style->_cellSpacing!==null)
-				$this->_cellSpacing=$style->_cellSpacing;
-			if($this->_gridLines===null && $style->_gridLines!==null)
-				$this->_gridLines=$style->_gridLines;
-			if($this->_borderCollapse===null && $style->_borderCollapse!==null)
-				$this->_borderCollapse=$style->_borderCollapse;
-		}
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if(($url=trim($this->getBackImageUrl()))!=='')
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('background-image','url('.$url.')');
-
-		if(($horizontalAlign=$this->getHorizontalAlign())!==THorizontalAlign::NotSet)
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('text-align',strtolower($horizontalAlign));
-
-		if(($cellPadding=$this->getCellPadding())>=0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('cellpadding',"$cellPadding");
-
-		if(($cellSpacing=$this->getCellSpacing())>=0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('cellspacing',"$cellSpacing");
-
-		if($this->getBorderCollapse())
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('border-collapse','collapse');
-
-		switch($this->getGridLines())
-		{
-			case TTableGridLines::Horizontal : $writer->addAttribute('rules','rows'); break;
-			case TTableGridLines::Vertical : $writer->addAttribute('rules','cols'); break;
-			case TTableGridLines::Both : $writer->addAttribute('rules','all'); break;
-		}
-
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the table
-	 */
-	public function getBackImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->_backImageUrl===null?'':$this->_backImageUrl;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the table
-	 * @param string the URL
-	 */
-	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->_backImageUrl=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table, defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->_horizontalAlign===null?THorizontalAlign::NotSet:$this->_horizontalAlign;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table.
-	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->_horizontalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THorizontalAlign');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer cellpadding of the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellPadding()
-	{
-		return $this->_cellPadding===null?-1:$this->_cellPadding;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer cellpadding of the table. A value equal to -1 clears up the setting.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than -1.
-	 */
-	public function setCellPadding($value)
-	{
-		if(($this->_cellPadding=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<-1)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tablestyle_cellpadding_invalid');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer cellspacing of the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellSpacing()
-	{
-		return $this->_cellSpacing===null?-1:$this->_cellSpacing;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer cellspacing of the table. A value equal to -1 clears up the setting.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than -1.
-	 */
-	public function setCellSpacing($value)
-	{
-		if(($this->_cellSpacing=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<-1)
-			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tablestyle_cellspacing_invalid');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table. Defaults to TTableGridLines::None.
-	 */
-	public function getGridLines()
-	{
-		return $this->_gridLines===null?TTableGridLines::None:$this->_gridLines;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the grid line style of the table.
-	 * @param TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table
-	 */
-	public function setGridLines($value)
-	{
-		$this->_gridLines=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableGridLines');
-	}
-
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the table borders should be collapsed. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getBorderCollapse()
-	{
-		return $this->_borderCollapse===null?false:$this->_borderCollapse;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the table borders should be collapsed.
-	 */
-	public function setBorderCollapse($value)
-	{
-		$this->_borderCollapse=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TTableItemStyle class.
- * TTableItemStyle represents the CSS style specific for HTML table item.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTableItemStyle extends TStyle
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var THorizontalAlign horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item
-	 */
-	private $_horizontalAlign=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TVerticalAlign vertical alignment of the contents within the table item
-	 */
-	private $_verticalAlign=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether the content wraps within the table item
-	 */
-	private $_wrap=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
-	 * resetting additional TTableItemStyle specific attributes.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		parent::reset();
-		$this->_verticalAlign=null;
-		$this->_horizontalAlign=null;
-		$this->_wrap=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
-	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
-	 * in this style will be overwritten.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function copyFrom($style)
-	{
-		parent::copyFrom($style);
-		if($style instanceof TTableItemStyle)
-		{
-			if($this->_verticalAlign===null && $style->_verticalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_verticalAlign=$style->_verticalAlign;
-			if($this->_horizontalAlign===null && $style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
-			if($this->_wrap===null && $style->_wrap!==null)
-				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges the style with a new one.
-	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
-	 * the new one.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function mergeWith($style)
-	{
-		parent::mergeWith($style);
-		if($style instanceof TTableItemStyle)
-		{
-			if($style->_verticalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_verticalAlign=$style->_verticalAlign;
-			if($style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
-				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
-			if($style->_wrap!==null)
-				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		if(!$this->getWrap())
-			$writer->addStyleAttribute('white-space','nowrap');
-
-		if(($horizontalAlign=$this->getHorizontalAlign())!==THorizontalAlign::NotSet)
-			$writer->addAttribute('align',strtolower($horizontalAlign));
-
-		if(($verticalAlign=$this->getVerticalAlign())!==TVerticalAlign::NotSet)
-			$writer->addAttribute('valign',strtolower($verticalAlign));
-
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->_horizontalAlign===null?THorizontalAlign::NotSet:$this->_horizontalAlign;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item.
-	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->_horizontalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THorizontalAlign');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TVerticalAlign the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to TVerticalAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getVerticalAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->_verticalAlign===null?TVerticalAlign::NotSet:$this->_verticalAlign;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item.
-	 * @param TVerticalAlign the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setVerticalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->_verticalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TVerticalAlign');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the content wraps within the table item. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getWrap()
-	{
-		return $this->_wrap===null?true:$this->_wrap;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether the content wraps within the table item.
-	 * @param boolean whether the content wraps within the panel.
-	 */
-	public function setWrap($value)
-	{
-		$this->_wrap=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * THorizontalAlign class.
- * THorizontalAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible horizontal alignments in a CSS style.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NotSet: the alignment is not specified.
- * - Left: left aligned
- * - Right: right aligned
- * - Center: center aligned
- * - Justify: the begin and end are justified
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class THorizontalAlign extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NotSet='NotSet';
-	const Left='Left';
-	const Right='Right';
-	const Center='Center';
-	const Justify='Justify';
-}
-
-/**
- * TVerticalAlign class.
- * TVerticalAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible vertical alignments in a CSS style.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NotSet: the alignment is not specified.
- * - Top: top aligned
- * - Bottom: bottom aligned
- * - Middle: middle aligned
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TVerticalAlign extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NotSet='NotSet';
-	const Top='Top';
-	const Bottom='Bottom';
-	const Middle='Middle';
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TTableGridLines class.
- * TTableGridLines defines the enumerable type for the possible grid line types of an HTML table.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - None: no grid lines
- * - Horizontal: horizontal grid lines only
- * - Vertical: vertical grid lines only
- * - Both: both horizontal and vertical grid lines are shown
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TTableGridLines extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const None='None';
-	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
-	const Vertical='Vertical';
-	const Both='Both';
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TStyle class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TFont definition
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TFont');
+
+/**
+ * TStyle class
+ *
+ * TStyle encapsulates the CSS style applied to a control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TStyle extends TComponent
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var array storage of CSS fields
+	 */
+	private $_fields=array();
+	/**
+	 * @var TFont font object
+	 */
+	private $_font=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string CSS class name
+	 */
+	private $_class=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string CSS style string (those not represented by specific fields of TStyle)
+	 */
+	private $_customStyle=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string display style
+	 */
+	private $_displayStyle='Fixed';
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TStyle style to copy from
+	 */
+	public function __construct($style=null)
+	{
+		if($style!==null)
+			$this->copyFrom($style);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Need to clone the font object.
+	 */
+	public function __clone()
+	{
+		if($this->_font!==null)
+			$this->_font = clone($this->_font);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the background color of the control
+	 */
+	public function getBackColor()
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields['background-color'])?$this->_fields['background-color']:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the background color of the control
+	 */
+	public function setBackColor($value)
+	{
+		if(trim($value)==='')
+			unset($this->_fields['background-color']);
+		else
+			$this->_fields['background-color']=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the border color of the control
+	 */
+	public function getBorderColor()
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields['border-color'])?$this->_fields['border-color']:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the border color of the control
+	 */
+	public function setBorderColor($value)
+	{
+		if(trim($value)==='')
+			unset($this->_fields['border-color']);
+		else
+			$this->_fields['border-color']=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the border style of the control
+	 */
+	public function getBorderStyle()
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields['border-style'])?$this->_fields['border-style']:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the border style of the control.
+	 * @param string the border style of the control
+	 */
+	public function setBorderStyle($value)
+	{
+		if(trim($value)==='')
+			unset($this->_fields['border-style']);
+		else
+			$this->_fields['border-style']=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the border width of the control
+	 */
+	public function getBorderWidth()
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields['border-width'])?$this->_fields['border-width']:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the border width of the control
+	 */
+	public function setBorderWidth($value)
+	{
+		if(trim($value)==='')
+			unset($this->_fields['border-width']);
+		else
+			$this->_fields['border-width']=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the CSS class of the control
+	 */
+	public function getCssClass()
+	{
+		return $this->_class===null?'':$this->_class;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean true if CSS is set or empty.
+	 */
+	public function hasCssClass()
+	{
+		return ($this->_class!==null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the name of the CSS class of the control
+	 */
+	public function setCssClass($value)
+	{
+		$this->_class=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TFont the font of the control
+	 */
+	public function getFont()
+	{
+		if($this->_font===null)
+			$this->_font=new TFont;
+		return $this->_font;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean true if font is set.
+	 */
+	public function hasFont()
+	{
+		return $this->_font !== null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TDisplayStyle control display style, default is TDisplayStyle::Fixed
+	 */
+	public function setDisplayStyle($value)
+	{
+		$this->_displayStyle = TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value, 'TDisplayStyle');
+		switch($this->_displayStyle)
+		{
+			case TDisplayStyle::None:
+				$this->_fields['display'] = 'none';
+				break;
+			case TDisplayStyle::Dynamic:
+				$this->_fields['display'] = ''; //remove the display property
+				break;
+			case TDisplayStyle::Fixed:
+				$this->_fields['visibility'] = 'visible';
+				break;
+			case TDisplayStyle::Hidden:
+				$this->_fields['visibility'] = 'hidden';
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TDisplayStyle display style
+	 */
+	public function getDisplayStyle()
+	{
+		return $this->_displayStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the foreground color of the control
+	 */
+	public function getForeColor()
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields['color'])?$this->_fields['color']:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the foreground color of the control
+	 */
+	public function setForeColor($value)
+	{
+		if(trim($value)==='')
+			unset($this->_fields['color']);
+		else
+			$this->_fields['color']=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the height of the control
+	 */
+	public function getHeight()
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields['height'])?$this->_fields['height']:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the height of the control
+	 */
+	public function setHeight($value)
+	{
+		if(trim($value)==='')
+			unset($this->_fields['height']);
+		else
+			$this->_fields['height']=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the custom style of the control
+	 */
+	public function getCustomStyle()
+	{
+		return $this->_customStyle===null?'':$this->_customStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets custom style fields from a string.
+	 * Custom style fields will be overwritten by style fields explicitly defined.
+	 * @param string the custom style of the control
+	 */
+	public function setCustomStyle($value)
+	{
+		$this->_customStyle=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string a single style field value set via {@link setStyleField}. Defaults to empty string.
+	 */
+	public function getStyleField($name)
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields[$name])?$this->_fields[$name]:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets a single style field value.
+	 * Style fields set by this method will overwrite those set by {@link setCustomStyle}.
+	 * @param string style field name
+	 * @param string style field value
+	 */
+	public function setStyleField($name,$value)
+	{
+		$this->_fields[$name]=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Clears a single style field value;
+	 * @param string style field name
+	 */
+	public function clearStyleField($name)
+	{
+		unset($this->_fields[$name]);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether a style field has been defined by {@link setStyleField}
+	 */
+	public function hasStyleField($name)
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields[$name]);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the width of the control
+	 */
+	public function getWidth()
+	{
+		return isset($this->_fields['width'])?$this->_fields['width']:'';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the width of the control
+	 */
+	public function setWidth($value)
+	{
+		$this->_fields['width']=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Resets the style to the original empty state.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		$this->_fields=array();
+		$this->_font=null;
+		$this->_class=null;
+		$this->_customStyle=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
+	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
+	 * in this style will be overwritten.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function copyFrom($style)
+	{
+		if($style instanceof TStyle)
+		{
+			$this->_fields=array_merge($this->_fields,$style->_fields);
+			if($style->_class!==null)
+				$this->_class=$style->_class;
+			if($style->_customStyle!==null)
+				$this->_customStyle=$style->_customStyle;
+			if($style->_font!==null)
+				$this->getFont()->copyFrom($style->_font);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges the style with a new one.
+	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
+	 * the new one.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function mergeWith($style)
+	{
+		if($style instanceof TStyle)
+		{
+			$this->_fields=array_merge($style->_fields,$this->_fields);
+			if($this->_class===null)
+				$this->_class=$style->_class;
+			if($this->_customStyle===null)
+				$this->_customStyle=$style->_customStyle;
+			if($style->_font!==null)
+				$this->getFont()->mergeWith($style->_font);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->_customStyle!==null)
+		{
+			foreach(explode(';',$this->_customStyle) as $style)
+			{
+				$arr=explode(':',$style,2);
+				if(isset($arr[1]) && trim($arr[0])!=='')
+					$writer->addStyleAttribute(trim($arr[0]),trim($arr[1]));
+			}
+		}
+		$writer->addStyleAttributes($this->_fields);
+		if($this->_font!==null)
+			$this->_font->addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if($this->_class!==null)
+			$writer->addAttribute('class',$this->_class);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return array list of style fields.
+	 */
+	public function getStyleFields()
+	{
+		return $this->_fields;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TDisplayStyle defines the enumerable type for the possible styles
+ * that a web control can display.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - None: the control is not displayed and not included in the layout.
+ * - Dynamic: the control is displayed and included in the layout, the layout flow is dependent on the control (equivalent to display:'' in css).
+ * - Fixed: Similar to Dynamic with CSS "visibility" set "shown".
+ * - Hidden: the control is not displayed and is included in the layout.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.1
+ */
+class TDisplayStyle extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const None='None';
+	const Dynamic='Dynamic';
+	const Fixed='Fixed';
+	const Hidden='Hidden';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TTableStyle class.
+ * TTableStyle represents the CSS style specific for HTML table.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTableStyle extends TStyle
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TVerticalAlign the URL of the background image for the table
+	 */
+	private $_backImageUrl=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var THorizontalAlign horizontal alignment of the contents within the table
+	 */
+	private $_horizontalAlign=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var integer cellpadding of the table
+	 */
+	private $_cellPadding=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var integer cellspacing of the table
+	 */
+	private $_cellSpacing=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TTableGridLines grid line setting of the table
+	 */
+	private $_gridLines=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether the table border should be collapsed
+	 */
+	private $_borderCollapse=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
+	 * resetting additional TTableStyle specific attributes.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		$this->_backImageUrl=null;
+		$this->_horizontalAlign=null;
+		$this->_cellPadding=null;
+		$this->_cellSpacing=null;
+		$this->_gridLines=null;
+		$this->_borderCollapse=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
+	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
+	 * in this style will be overwritten.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function copyFrom($style)
+	{
+		parent::copyFrom($style);
+		if($style instanceof TTableStyle)
+		{
+			if($style->_backImageUrl!==null)
+				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
+			if($style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
+			if($style->_cellPadding!==null)
+				$this->_cellPadding=$style->_cellPadding;
+			if($style->_cellSpacing!==null)
+				$this->_cellSpacing=$style->_cellSpacing;
+			if($style->_gridLines!==null)
+				$this->_gridLines=$style->_gridLines;
+			if($style->_borderCollapse!==null)
+				$this->_borderCollapse=$style->_borderCollapse;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges the style with a new one.
+	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
+	 * the new one.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function mergeWith($style)
+	{
+		parent::mergeWith($style);
+		if($style instanceof TTableStyle)
+		{
+			if($this->_backImageUrl===null && $style->_backImageUrl!==null)
+				$this->_backImageUrl=$style->_backImageUrl;
+			if($this->_horizontalAlign===null && $style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
+			if($this->_cellPadding===null && $style->_cellPadding!==null)
+				$this->_cellPadding=$style->_cellPadding;
+			if($this->_cellSpacing===null && $style->_cellSpacing!==null)
+				$this->_cellSpacing=$style->_cellSpacing;
+			if($this->_gridLines===null && $style->_gridLines!==null)
+				$this->_gridLines=$style->_gridLines;
+			if($this->_borderCollapse===null && $style->_borderCollapse!==null)
+				$this->_borderCollapse=$style->_borderCollapse;
+		}
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if(($url=trim($this->getBackImageUrl()))!=='')
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('background-image','url('.$url.')');
+
+		if(($horizontalAlign=$this->getHorizontalAlign())!==THorizontalAlign::NotSet)
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('text-align',strtolower($horizontalAlign));
+
+		if(($cellPadding=$this->getCellPadding())>=0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('cellpadding',"$cellPadding");
+
+		if(($cellSpacing=$this->getCellSpacing())>=0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('cellspacing',"$cellSpacing");
+
+		if($this->getBorderCollapse())
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('border-collapse','collapse');
+
+		switch($this->getGridLines())
+		{
+			case TTableGridLines::Horizontal : $writer->addAttribute('rules','rows'); break;
+			case TTableGridLines::Vertical : $writer->addAttribute('rules','cols'); break;
+			case TTableGridLines::Both : $writer->addAttribute('rules','all'); break;
+		}
+
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the table
+	 */
+	public function getBackImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->_backImageUrl===null?'':$this->_backImageUrl;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the table
+	 * @param string the URL
+	 */
+	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->_backImageUrl=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table, defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->_horizontalAlign===null?THorizontalAlign::NotSet:$this->_horizontalAlign;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table.
+	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->_horizontalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THorizontalAlign');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer cellpadding of the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellPadding()
+	{
+		return $this->_cellPadding===null?-1:$this->_cellPadding;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer cellpadding of the table. A value equal to -1 clears up the setting.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than -1.
+	 */
+	public function setCellPadding($value)
+	{
+		if(($this->_cellPadding=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<-1)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tablestyle_cellpadding_invalid');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer cellspacing of the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellSpacing()
+	{
+		return $this->_cellSpacing===null?-1:$this->_cellSpacing;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer cellspacing of the table. A value equal to -1 clears up the setting.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the value is less than -1.
+	 */
+	public function setCellSpacing($value)
+	{
+		if(($this->_cellSpacing=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value))<-1)
+			throw new TInvalidDataValueException('tablestyle_cellspacing_invalid');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table. Defaults to TTableGridLines::None.
+	 */
+	public function getGridLines()
+	{
+		return $this->_gridLines===null?TTableGridLines::None:$this->_gridLines;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the grid line style of the table.
+	 * @param TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table
+	 */
+	public function setGridLines($value)
+	{
+		$this->_gridLines=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableGridLines');
+	}
+
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the table borders should be collapsed. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getBorderCollapse()
+	{
+		return $this->_borderCollapse===null?false:$this->_borderCollapse;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the table borders should be collapsed.
+	 */
+	public function setBorderCollapse($value)
+	{
+		$this->_borderCollapse=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TTableItemStyle class.
+ * TTableItemStyle represents the CSS style specific for HTML table item.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTableItemStyle extends TStyle
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var THorizontalAlign horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item
+	 */
+	private $_horizontalAlign=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TVerticalAlign vertical alignment of the contents within the table item
+	 */
+	private $_verticalAlign=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether the content wraps within the table item
+	 */
+	private $_wrap=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
+	 * resetting additional TTableItemStyle specific attributes.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		parent::reset();
+		$this->_verticalAlign=null;
+		$this->_horizontalAlign=null;
+		$this->_wrap=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
+	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
+	 * in this style will be overwritten.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function copyFrom($style)
+	{
+		parent::copyFrom($style);
+		if($style instanceof TTableItemStyle)
+		{
+			if($this->_verticalAlign===null && $style->_verticalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_verticalAlign=$style->_verticalAlign;
+			if($this->_horizontalAlign===null && $style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
+			if($this->_wrap===null && $style->_wrap!==null)
+				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges the style with a new one.
+	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
+	 * the new one.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function mergeWith($style)
+	{
+		parent::mergeWith($style);
+		if($style instanceof TTableItemStyle)
+		{
+			if($style->_verticalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_verticalAlign=$style->_verticalAlign;
+			if($style->_horizontalAlign!==null)
+				$this->_horizontalAlign=$style->_horizontalAlign;
+			if($style->_wrap!==null)
+				$this->_wrap=$style->_wrap;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes related to CSS styles to renderer.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		if(!$this->getWrap())
+			$writer->addStyleAttribute('white-space','nowrap');
+
+		if(($horizontalAlign=$this->getHorizontalAlign())!==THorizontalAlign::NotSet)
+			$writer->addAttribute('align',strtolower($horizontalAlign));
+
+		if(($verticalAlign=$this->getVerticalAlign())!==TVerticalAlign::NotSet)
+			$writer->addAttribute('valign',strtolower($verticalAlign));
+
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->_horizontalAlign===null?THorizontalAlign::NotSet:$this->_horizontalAlign;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item.
+	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->_horizontalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'THorizontalAlign');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TVerticalAlign the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to TVerticalAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getVerticalAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->_verticalAlign===null?TVerticalAlign::NotSet:$this->_verticalAlign;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item.
+	 * @param TVerticalAlign the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setVerticalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->_verticalAlign=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TVerticalAlign');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the content wraps within the table item. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getWrap()
+	{
+		return $this->_wrap===null?true:$this->_wrap;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether the content wraps within the table item.
+	 * @param boolean whether the content wraps within the panel.
+	 */
+	public function setWrap($value)
+	{
+		$this->_wrap=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * THorizontalAlign class.
+ * THorizontalAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible horizontal alignments in a CSS style.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NotSet: the alignment is not specified.
+ * - Left: left aligned
+ * - Right: right aligned
+ * - Center: center aligned
+ * - Justify: the begin and end are justified
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class THorizontalAlign extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NotSet='NotSet';
+	const Left='Left';
+	const Right='Right';
+	const Center='Center';
+	const Justify='Justify';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TVerticalAlign class.
+ * TVerticalAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible vertical alignments in a CSS style.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NotSet: the alignment is not specified.
+ * - Top: top aligned
+ * - Bottom: bottom aligned
+ * - Middle: middle aligned
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TVerticalAlign extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NotSet='NotSet';
+	const Top='Top';
+	const Bottom='Bottom';
+	const Middle='Middle';
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TTableGridLines class.
+ * TTableGridLines defines the enumerable type for the possible grid line types of an HTML table.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - None: no grid lines
+ * - Horizontal: horizontal grid lines only
+ * - Vertical: vertical grid lines only
+ * - Both: both horizontal and vertical grid lines are shown
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TTableGridLines extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const None='None';
+	const Horizontal='Horizontal';
+	const Vertical='Vertical';
+	const Both='Both';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTable.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTable.php
index a333bf09..b7a774ae 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTable.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTable.php
@@ -1,410 +1,410 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTable and TTableRowCollection class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTable and TTableRowCollection class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TTableRow class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableRow');
-
-/**
- * TTable class
- *
- * TTable displays an HTML table on a Web page.
- *
- * A table may have {@link setCaption Caption}, whose alignment is specified
- * via {@link setCaptionAlign CaptionAlign}. The table cellpadding and cellspacing
- * are specified via {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing}
- * properties, respectively. The {@link setGridLines GridLines} specifies how
- * the table should display its borders. The horizontal alignment of the table
- * content can be specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign},
- * and {@link setBackImageUrl BackImageUrl} can assign a background image to the table.
- *
- * A TTable maintains a list of {@link TTableRow} controls in its
- * {@link getRows Rows} property. Each {@link TTableRow} represents
- * an HTML table row.
- *
- * To populate the table {@link getRows Rows}, you may either use control template
- * or dynamically create {@link TTableRow} in code.
- * In template, do as follows to create the table rows and cells,
- * <code>
- *   <com:TTable>
- *     <com:TTableRow>
- *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
- *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
- *     </com:TTableRow>
- *     <com:TTableRow>
- *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
- *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
- *     </com:TTableRow>
- *   </com:TTable>
- * </code>
- * The above can also be accomplished in code as follows,
- * <code>
- *   $table=new TTable;
- *   $row=new TTableRow;
- *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
- *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
- *   $table->Rows->add($row);
- *   $row=new TTableRow;
- *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
- *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
- *   $table->Rows->add($row);
- * </code>
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTable extends TWebControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name for the table
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'table';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
-	 * This method adds only {@link TTableRow} objects into the {@link getRows Rows} collection.
-	 * All other objects are ignored.
-	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof TTableRow)
-			$this->getRows()->add($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object for the control.
-	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by the table.
-	 * @return TTableStyle control style to be used
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		$border=0;
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-		{
-			if($this->getGridLines()!==TTableGridLines::None)
-			{
-				if(($border=$this->getBorderWidth())==='')
-					$border=1;
-				else
-					$border=(int)$border;
-			}
-		}
-		$writer->addAttribute('border',"$border");
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
-	 * @return TTableRowCollection control collection
-	 * @see getControls
-	 */
-	protected function createControlCollection()
-	{
-		return new TTableRowCollection($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableRowCollection list of {@link TTableRow} controls
-	 */
-	public function getRows()
-	{
-		return $this->getControls();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string table caption
-	 */
-	public function getCaption()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Caption','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string table caption
-	 */
-	public function setCaption($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Caption',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign table caption alignment. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getCaptionAlign()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CaptionAlign',TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTableCaptionAlign table caption alignment.
-	 */
-	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CaptionAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableCaptionAlign'),TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the cellspacing for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellSpacing()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getCellSpacing();
-		else
-			return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the cellspacing for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function setCellSpacing($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setCellSpacing($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the cellpadding for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getCellPadding()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getCellPadding();
-		else
-			return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the cellpadding for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function setCellPadding($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setCellPadding($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content. Defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
-		else
-			return THorizontalAlign::NotSet;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content.
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table. Defaults to TTableGridLines::None.
-	 */
-	public function getGridLines()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getGridLines();
-		else
-			return TTableGridLines::None;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table
-	 */
-	public function setGridLines($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setGridLines($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the table
-	 */
-	public function getBackImageUrl()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getBackImageUrl();
-		else
-			return '';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the table
-	 * @param string the URL
-	 */
-	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setBackImageUrl($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the openning tag for the table control which will render table caption if present.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
-	{
-		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
-		if(($caption=$this->getCaption())!=='')
-		{
-			if(($align=$this->getCaptionAlign())!==TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet)
-				$writer->addAttribute('align',strtolower($align));
-			$writer->renderBeginTag('caption');
-			$writer->write($caption);
-			$writer->renderEndTag();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body contents of the table.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getHasControls())
-		{
-			$renderTableSection=false;
-			foreach($this->getControls() as $row)
-			{
-				if($row->getTableSection()!==TTableRowSection::Body)
-				{
-					$renderTableSection=true;
-					break;
-				}
-			}
-			if($renderTableSection)
-			{
-				$currentSection=TTableRowSection::Header;
-				$writer->writeLine();
-				foreach($this->getControls() as $index=>$row)
-				{
-					if(($section=$row->getTableSection())===$currentSection)
-					{
-						if($index===0 && $currentSection===TTableRowSection::Header)
-							$writer->renderBeginTag('thead');
-					}
-					else
-					{
-						if($currentSection===TTableRowSection::Header)
-						{
-							if($index>0)
-								$writer->renderEndTag();
-							if($section===TTableRowSection::Body)
-								$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
-							else
-								$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
-							$currentSection=$section;
-						}
-						else if($currentSection===TTableRowSection::Body)
-						{
-							$writer->renderEndTag();
-							if($section===TTableRowSection::Footer)
-								$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
-							else
-								throw new TConfigurationException('table_tablesection_outoforder');
-							$currentSection=$section;
-						}
-						else // Footer
-							throw new TConfigurationException('table_tablesection_outoforder');
-					}
-					$row->renderControl($writer);
-					$writer->writeLine();
-				}
-				$writer->renderEndTag();
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$writer->writeLine();
-				foreach($this->getControls() as $row)
-				{
-					$row->renderControl($writer);
-					$writer->writeLine();
-				}
-			}
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TTableRowCollection class.
- *
- * TTableRowCollection is used to maintain a list of rows belong to a table.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTableRowCollection extends TControlCollection
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing additional
-	 * operations for each newly added table row.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TTableRow object.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TTableRow)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('tablerowcollection_tablerow_required');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TTableCaptionAlign class.
- * TTableCaptionAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible alignments
- * that a table caption can take.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NotSet: alignment not specified
- * - Top: top aligned
- * - Bottom: bottom aligned
- * - Left: left aligned
- * - Right: right aligned
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TTableCaptionAlign extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NotSet='NotSet';
-	const Top='Top';
-	const Bottom='Bottom';
-	const Left='Left';
-	const Right='Right';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TTableRow class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableRow');
+
+/**
+ * TTable class
+ *
+ * TTable displays an HTML table on a Web page.
+ *
+ * A table may have {@link setCaption Caption}, whose alignment is specified
+ * via {@link setCaptionAlign CaptionAlign}. The table cellpadding and cellspacing
+ * are specified via {@link setCellPadding CellPadding} and {@link setCellSpacing CellSpacing}
+ * properties, respectively. The {@link setGridLines GridLines} specifies how
+ * the table should display its borders. The horizontal alignment of the table
+ * content can be specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign},
+ * and {@link setBackImageUrl BackImageUrl} can assign a background image to the table.
+ *
+ * A TTable maintains a list of {@link TTableRow} controls in its
+ * {@link getRows Rows} property. Each {@link TTableRow} represents
+ * an HTML table row.
+ *
+ * To populate the table {@link getRows Rows}, you may either use control template
+ * or dynamically create {@link TTableRow} in code.
+ * In template, do as follows to create the table rows and cells,
+ * <code>
+ *   <com:TTable>
+ *     <com:TTableRow>
+ *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
+ *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
+ *     </com:TTableRow>
+ *     <com:TTableRow>
+ *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
+ *       <com:TTableCell Text="content" />
+ *     </com:TTableRow>
+ *   </com:TTable>
+ * </code>
+ * The above can also be accomplished in code as follows,
+ * <code>
+ *   $table=new TTable;
+ *   $row=new TTableRow;
+ *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
+ *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
+ *   $table->Rows->add($row);
+ *   $row=new TTableRow;
+ *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
+ *   $cell=new TTableCell; $cell->Text="content"; $row->Cells->add($cell);
+ *   $table->Rows->add($row);
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTable extends TWebControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name for the table
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'table';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
+	 * This method adds only {@link TTableRow} objects into the {@link getRows Rows} collection.
+	 * All other objects are ignored.
+	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof TTableRow)
+			$this->getRows()->add($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object for the control.
+	 * This method creates a {@link TTableStyle} to be used by the table.
+	 * @return TTableStyle control style to be used
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		$border=0;
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+		{
+			if($this->getGridLines()!==TTableGridLines::None)
+			{
+				if(($border=$this->getBorderWidth())==='')
+					$border=1;
+				else
+					$border=(int)$border;
+			}
+		}
+		$writer->addAttribute('border',"$border");
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
+	 * @return TTableRowCollection control collection
+	 * @see getControls
+	 */
+	protected function createControlCollection()
+	{
+		return new TTableRowCollection($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableRowCollection list of {@link TTableRow} controls
+	 */
+	public function getRows()
+	{
+		return $this->getControls();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string table caption
+	 */
+	public function getCaption()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Caption','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string table caption
+	 */
+	public function setCaption($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Caption',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableCaptionAlign table caption alignment. Defaults to TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getCaptionAlign()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CaptionAlign',TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTableCaptionAlign table caption alignment.
+	 */
+	public function setCaptionAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CaptionAlign',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableCaptionAlign'),TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the cellspacing for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellSpacing()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getCellSpacing();
+		else
+			return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the cellspacing for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function setCellSpacing($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setCellSpacing($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the cellpadding for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getCellPadding()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getCellPadding();
+		else
+			return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the cellpadding for the table. Defaults to -1, meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function setCellPadding($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setCellPadding($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content. Defaults to THorizontalAlign::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
+		else
+			return THorizontalAlign::NotSet;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param THorizontalAlign the horizontal alignment of the table content.
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table. Defaults to TTableGridLines::None.
+	 */
+	public function getGridLines()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getGridLines();
+		else
+			return TTableGridLines::None;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTableGridLines the grid line setting of the table
+	 */
+	public function setGridLines($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setGridLines($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL of the background image for the table
+	 */
+	public function getBackImageUrl()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getBackImageUrl();
+		else
+			return '';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the URL of the background image for the table
+	 * @param string the URL
+	 */
+	public function setBackImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setBackImageUrl($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the openning tag for the table control which will render table caption if present.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
+	{
+		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
+		if(($caption=$this->getCaption())!=='')
+		{
+			if(($align=$this->getCaptionAlign())!==TTableCaptionAlign::NotSet)
+				$writer->addAttribute('align',strtolower($align));
+			$writer->renderBeginTag('caption');
+			$writer->write($caption);
+			$writer->renderEndTag();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body contents of the table.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getHasControls())
+		{
+			$renderTableSection=false;
+			foreach($this->getControls() as $row)
+			{
+				if($row->getTableSection()!==TTableRowSection::Body)
+				{
+					$renderTableSection=true;
+					break;
+				}
+			}
+			if($renderTableSection)
+			{
+				$currentSection=TTableRowSection::Header;
+				$writer->writeLine();
+				foreach($this->getControls() as $index=>$row)
+				{
+					if(($section=$row->getTableSection())===$currentSection)
+					{
+						if($index===0 && $currentSection===TTableRowSection::Header)
+							$writer->renderBeginTag('thead');
+					}
+					else
+					{
+						if($currentSection===TTableRowSection::Header)
+						{
+							if($index>0)
+								$writer->renderEndTag();
+							if($section===TTableRowSection::Body)
+								$writer->renderBeginTag('tbody');
+							else
+								$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
+							$currentSection=$section;
+						}
+						else if($currentSection===TTableRowSection::Body)
+						{
+							$writer->renderEndTag();
+							if($section===TTableRowSection::Footer)
+								$writer->renderBeginTag('tfoot');
+							else
+								throw new TConfigurationException('table_tablesection_outoforder');
+							$currentSection=$section;
+						}
+						else // Footer
+							throw new TConfigurationException('table_tablesection_outoforder');
+					}
+					$row->renderControl($writer);
+					$writer->writeLine();
+				}
+				$writer->renderEndTag();
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$writer->writeLine();
+				foreach($this->getControls() as $row)
+				{
+					$row->renderControl($writer);
+					$writer->writeLine();
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TTableRowCollection class.
+ *
+ * TTableRowCollection is used to maintain a list of rows belong to a table.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTableRowCollection extends TControlCollection
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing additional
+	 * operations for each newly added table row.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TTableRow object.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TTableRow)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('tablerowcollection_tablerow_required');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TTableCaptionAlign class.
+ * TTableCaptionAlign defines the enumerable type for the possible alignments
+ * that a table caption can take.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NotSet: alignment not specified
+ * - Top: top aligned
+ * - Bottom: bottom aligned
+ * - Left: left aligned
+ * - Right: right aligned
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TTableCaptionAlign extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NotSet='NotSet';
+	const Top='Top';
+	const Bottom='Bottom';
+	const Left='Left';
+	const Right='Right';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableCell.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableCell.php
index 6b43990b..70ff573f 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableCell.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableCell.php
@@ -1,222 +1,222 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTableCell class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTableCell class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TTableCell class.
- *
- * TTableCell displays a table cell on a Web page. Content of the table cell
- * is specified by the {@link setText Text} property. If {@link setText Text}
- * is empty, the body contents enclosed by the table cell component tag are rendered.
- * Note, {@link setText Text} is not HTML-encoded when displayed. So make sure
- * it does not contain dangerous characters.
- *
- * The horizontal and vertical alignments of the contents in the cell
- * are specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign} and
- * {@link setVerticalAlign VerticalAlign} properties, respectively.
- *
- * The colspan and rowspan of the cell are specified via {@link setColumnSpan ColumnSpan}
- * and {@link setRowSpan RowSpan} properties. And the {@link setWrap Wrap} property
- * indicates whether the contents in the cell should be wrapped.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTableCell extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name for the table cell
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'td';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object for the control.
-	 * This method creates a {@link TTableItemStyle} to be used by the table cell.
-	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableItemStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
-		else
-			return 'NotSet';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item.
-     * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'Justify', 'Left', 'Right', 'Center'
-	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
-	 */
-	public function getVerticalAlign()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getVerticalAlign();
-		else
-			return 'NotSet';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item.
-     * Valid values include 'NotSet','Top','Bottom','Middle'
-	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setVerticalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setVerticalAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the columnspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
-	 */
-	public function getColumnSpan()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ColumnSpan', 0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the columnspan for the table cell.
-	 * @param integer the columnspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
-	 */
-	public function setColumnSpan($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ColumnSpan', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), 0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the rowspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
-	 */
-	public function getRowSpan()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('RowSpan', 0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the rowspan for the table cell.
-	 * @param integer the rowspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
-	 */
-	public function setRowSpan($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('RowSpan', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), 0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the text content wraps within a table cell. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getWrap()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getWrap();
-		else
-			return true;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether the text content wraps within a table cell.
-	 * @param boolean whether the text content wraps within a table cell.
-	 */
-	public function setWrap($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setWrap($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text content of the table cell.
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text content of the table cell.
-	 * If the text content is empty, body content (child controls) of the cell will be rendered.
-	 * @param string the text content
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the text content of the table cell.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
-	 * @return string the text content of the table cell.
-	 * @see getText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text content of the table cell.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
-	 * @param string the text content of the table cell.
-	 * @see setText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if(($colspan=$this->getColumnSpan())>0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('colspan',"$colspan");
-		if(($rowspan=$this->getRowSpan())>0)
-			$writer->addAttribute('rowspan',"$rowspan");
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body contents of the table cell.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-			$writer->write($text);
-		else if($this->getHasControls())
-			parent::renderContents($writer);
-		else
-			$writer->write('&nbsp;');
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TTableCell class.
+ *
+ * TTableCell displays a table cell on a Web page. Content of the table cell
+ * is specified by the {@link setText Text} property. If {@link setText Text}
+ * is empty, the body contents enclosed by the table cell component tag are rendered.
+ * Note, {@link setText Text} is not HTML-encoded when displayed. So make sure
+ * it does not contain dangerous characters.
+ *
+ * The horizontal and vertical alignments of the contents in the cell
+ * are specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign} and
+ * {@link setVerticalAlign VerticalAlign} properties, respectively.
+ *
+ * The colspan and rowspan of the cell are specified via {@link setColumnSpan ColumnSpan}
+ * and {@link setRowSpan RowSpan} properties. And the {@link setWrap Wrap} property
+ * indicates whether the contents in the cell should be wrapped.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTableCell extends TWebControl implements IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name for the table cell
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'td';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object for the control.
+	 * This method creates a {@link TTableItemStyle} to be used by the table cell.
+	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableItemStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
+		else
+			return 'NotSet';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item.
+     * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'Justify', 'Left', 'Right', 'Center'
+	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
+	 */
+	public function getVerticalAlign()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getVerticalAlign();
+		else
+			return 'NotSet';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item.
+     * Valid values include 'NotSet','Top','Bottom','Middle'
+	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setVerticalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setVerticalAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the columnspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
+	 */
+	public function getColumnSpan()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ColumnSpan', 0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the columnspan for the table cell.
+	 * @param integer the columnspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
+	 */
+	public function setColumnSpan($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ColumnSpan', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), 0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the rowspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
+	 */
+	public function getRowSpan()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('RowSpan', 0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the rowspan for the table cell.
+	 * @param integer the rowspan for the table cell, 0 if not set.
+	 */
+	public function setRowSpan($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('RowSpan', TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value), 0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the text content wraps within a table cell. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getWrap()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getWrap();
+		else
+			return true;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether the text content wraps within a table cell.
+	 * @param boolean whether the text content wraps within a table cell.
+	 */
+	public function setWrap($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setWrap($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text content of the table cell.
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text content of the table cell.
+	 * If the text content is empty, body content (child controls) of the cell will be rendered.
+	 * @param string the text content
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the text content of the table cell.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
+	 * @return string the text content of the table cell.
+	 * @see getText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text content of the table cell.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
+	 * @param string the text content of the table cell.
+	 * @see setText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if(($colspan=$this->getColumnSpan())>0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('colspan',"$colspan");
+		if(($rowspan=$this->getRowSpan())>0)
+			$writer->addAttribute('rowspan',"$rowspan");
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body contents of the table cell.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose.
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+			$writer->write($text);
+		else if($this->getHasControls())
+			parent::renderContents($writer);
+		else
+			$writer->write('&nbsp;');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableFooterRow.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableFooterRow.php
index 84bc29f1..1387c385 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableFooterRow.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableFooterRow.php
@@ -1,47 +1,47 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTableFooterRow class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTableFooterRow class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TTableRow class.
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableRow');
-
-/**
- * TTableFooterRow class.
- *
- * TTableFooterRow displays a table footer row.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.1
- */
-class TTableFooterRow extends TTableRow
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string location of a row in a table. Always returns 'Footer'.
-	 */
-	public function getTableSection()
-	{
-		return 'Footer';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string location of a row in a table.
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setTableSection($value)
-	{
-		throw new TInvalidOperationException('tablefooterrow_tablesection_readonly');
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TTableRow class.
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableRow');
+
+/**
+ * TTableFooterRow class.
+ *
+ * TTableFooterRow displays a table footer row.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.1
+ */
+class TTableFooterRow extends TTableRow
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string location of a row in a table. Always returns 'Footer'.
+	 */
+	public function getTableSection()
+	{
+		return 'Footer';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string location of a row in a table.
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setTableSection($value)
+	{
+		throw new TInvalidOperationException('tablefooterrow_tablesection_readonly');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderCell.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderCell.php
index bbf3e58a..72eae44e 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderCell.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderCell.php
@@ -1,124 +1,124 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTableHeaderCell class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTableHeaderCell class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TTableCell class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableCell');
-
-
-/**
- * TTableHeaderCell class.
- *
- * TTableHeaderCell displays a table header cell on a Web page.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTableHeaderCell extends TTableCell
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name for the table header cell
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'th';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-		if(($scope=$this->getScope())!==TTableHeaderScope::NotSet)
-			$writer->addAttribute('scope',$scope===TTableHeaderScope::Row?'row':'col');
-		if(($text=$this->getAbbreviatedText())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('abbr',$text);
-		if(($text=$this->getCategoryText())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('axis',$text);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableHeaderScope the scope of the cells that the header cell applies to. Defaults to TTableHeaderScope::NotSet.
-	 */
-	public function getScope()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Scope',TTableHeaderScope::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTableHeaderScope the scope of the cells that the header cell applies to.
-	 */
-	public function setScope($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Scope',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableHeaderScope'),TTableHeaderScope::NotSet);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string  the abbr attribute of the HTML th element
-	 */
-	public function getAbbreviatedText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AbbreviatedText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string  the abbr attribute of the HTML th element
-	 */
-	public function setAbbreviatedText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AbbreviatedText',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the axis attribute of the HTML th element
-	 */
-	public function getCategoryText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CategoryText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the axis attribute of the HTML th element
-	 */
-	public function setCategoryText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CategoryText',$value,'');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TTableHeaderScope class.
- * TTableHeaderScope defines the enumerable type for the possible table scopes that a table header is associated with.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - NotSet: the scope is not specified
- * - Row: the scope is row-wise
- * - Column: the scope is column-wise
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TTableHeaderScope extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const NotSet='NotSet';
-	const Row='Row';
-	const Column='Column';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TTableCell class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableCell');
+
+
+/**
+ * TTableHeaderCell class.
+ *
+ * TTableHeaderCell displays a table header cell on a Web page.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTableHeaderCell extends TTableCell
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name for the table header cell
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'th';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attributes to renderer.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the renderer
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+		if(($scope=$this->getScope())!==TTableHeaderScope::NotSet)
+			$writer->addAttribute('scope',$scope===TTableHeaderScope::Row?'row':'col');
+		if(($text=$this->getAbbreviatedText())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('abbr',$text);
+		if(($text=$this->getCategoryText())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('axis',$text);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableHeaderScope the scope of the cells that the header cell applies to. Defaults to TTableHeaderScope::NotSet.
+	 */
+	public function getScope()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Scope',TTableHeaderScope::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTableHeaderScope the scope of the cells that the header cell applies to.
+	 */
+	public function setScope($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Scope',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableHeaderScope'),TTableHeaderScope::NotSet);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string  the abbr attribute of the HTML th element
+	 */
+	public function getAbbreviatedText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AbbreviatedText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string  the abbr attribute of the HTML th element
+	 */
+	public function setAbbreviatedText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AbbreviatedText',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the axis attribute of the HTML th element
+	 */
+	public function getCategoryText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CategoryText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the axis attribute of the HTML th element
+	 */
+	public function setCategoryText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CategoryText',$value,'');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TTableHeaderScope class.
+ * TTableHeaderScope defines the enumerable type for the possible table scopes that a table header is associated with.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - NotSet: the scope is not specified
+ * - Row: the scope is row-wise
+ * - Column: the scope is column-wise
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TTableHeaderScope extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const NotSet='NotSet';
+	const Row='Row';
+	const Column='Column';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderRow.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderRow.php
index 448902dc..2c05b94d 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderRow.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableHeaderRow.php
@@ -1,47 +1,47 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTableHeaderRow class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTableHeaderRow class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TTableRow class.
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableRow');
-
-/**
- * TTableHeaderRow class.
- *
- * TTableHeaderRow displays a table header row.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.1
- */
-class TTableHeaderRow extends TTableRow
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string location of a row in a table. Always returns 'Header'.
-	 */
-	public function getTableSection()
-	{
-		return 'Header';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string location of a row in a table.
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if this method is invoked
-	 */
-	public function setTableSection($value)
-	{
-		throw new TInvalidOperationException('tableheaderrow_tablesection_readonly');
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TTableRow class.
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableRow');
+
+/**
+ * TTableHeaderRow class.
+ *
+ * TTableHeaderRow displays a table header row.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.1
+ */
+class TTableHeaderRow extends TTableRow
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string location of a row in a table. Always returns 'Header'.
+	 */
+	public function getTableSection()
+	{
+		return 'Header';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string location of a row in a table.
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if this method is invoked
+	 */
+	public function setTableSection($value)
+	{
+		throw new TInvalidOperationException('tableheaderrow_tablesection_readonly');
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableRow.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableRow.php
index e50099bf..3cfc82d0 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableRow.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTableRow.php
@@ -1,208 +1,208 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTableRow and TTableCellCollection class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTableRow and TTableCellCollection class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TTableCell class
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableCell');
-
-/**
- * TTableRow class.
- *
- * TTableRow displays a table row. The table cells in the row can be accessed
- * via {@link getCells Cells}. The horizontal and vertical alignments of the row
- * are specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign} and
- * {@link setVerticalAlign VerticalAlign} properties, respectively.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTableRow extends TWebControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name for the table
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'tr';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
-	 * This method adds only {@link TTableCell} objects into the {@link getCells Cells} collection.
-	 * All other objects are ignored.
-	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof TTableCell)
-			$this->getCells()->add($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a style object for the control.
-	 * This method creates a {@link TTableItemStyle} to be used by the table row.
-	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
-	 */
-	protected function createStyle()
-	{
-		return new TTableItemStyle;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
-	 * @return TTableCellCollection control collection
-	 * @see getControls
-	 */
-	protected function createControlCollection()
-	{
-		return new TTableCellCollection($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableCellCollection list of {@link TTableCell} controls
-	 */
-	public function getCells()
-	{
-		return $this->getControls();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
-	 */
-	public function getHorizontalAlign()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
-		else
-			return 'NotSet';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item.
-     * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'Justify', 'Left', 'Right', 'Center'
-	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
-	 */
-	public function getVerticalAlign()
-	{
-		if($this->getHasStyle())
-			return $this->getStyle()->getVerticalAlign();
-		else
-			return 'NotSet';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item.
-     * Valid values include 'NotSet','Top','Bottom','Middle'
-	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
-	 */
-	public function setVerticalAlign($value)
-	{
-		$this->getStyle()->setVerticalAlign($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTableRowSection location of a row in a table. Defaults to TTableRowSection::Body.
-	 */
-	public function getTableSection()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TableSection',TTableRowSection::Body);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTableRowSection location of a row in a table.
-	 */
-	public function setTableSection($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('TableSection',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableRowSection'),TTableRowSection::Body);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body contents of the table row
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getHasControls())
-		{
-			$writer->writeLine();
-			foreach($this->getControls() as $cell)
-			{
-				$cell->renderControl($writer);
-				$writer->writeLine();
-			}
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TTableCellCollection class.
- *
- * TTableCellCollection is used to maintain a list of cells belong to a table row.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTableCellCollection extends TControlCollection
-{
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing additional
-	 * operations for each newly added table cell.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TTableCell object.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TTableCell)
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('tablecellcollection_tablecell_required');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TTableRowSection class.
- * TTableRowSection defines the enumerable type for the possible table sections
- * that a {@link TTableRow} can be within.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Header: in table header
- * - Body: in table body
- * - Footer: in table footer
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TTableRowSection extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Header='Header';
-	const Body='Body';
-	const Footer='Footer';
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TTableCell class
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TTableCell');
+
+/**
+ * TTableRow class.
+ *
+ * TTableRow displays a table row. The table cells in the row can be accessed
+ * via {@link getCells Cells}. The horizontal and vertical alignments of the row
+ * are specified via {@link setHorizontalAlign HorizontalAlign} and
+ * {@link setVerticalAlign VerticalAlign} properties, respectively.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTableRow extends TWebControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name for the table
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'tr';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds object parsed from template to the control.
+	 * This method adds only {@link TTableCell} objects into the {@link getCells Cells} collection.
+	 * All other objects are ignored.
+	 * @param mixed object parsed from template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof TTableCell)
+			$this->getCells()->add($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a style object for the control.
+	 * This method creates a {@link TTableItemStyle} to be used by the table row.
+	 * @return TStyle control style to be used
+	 */
+	protected function createStyle()
+	{
+		return new TTableItemStyle;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a control collection object that is to be used to hold child controls
+	 * @return TTableCellCollection control collection
+	 * @see getControls
+	 */
+	protected function createControlCollection()
+	{
+		return new TTableCellCollection($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableCellCollection list of {@link TTableCell} controls
+	 */
+	public function getCells()
+	{
+		return $this->getControls();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
+	 */
+	public function getHorizontalAlign()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getHorizontalAlign();
+		else
+			return 'NotSet';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the horizontal alignment of the contents within the table item.
+     * Valid values include 'NotSet', 'Justify', 'Left', 'Right', 'Center'
+	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setHorizontalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setHorizontalAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item, defaults to 'NotSet'.
+	 */
+	public function getVerticalAlign()
+	{
+		if($this->getHasStyle())
+			return $this->getStyle()->getVerticalAlign();
+		else
+			return 'NotSet';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the vertical alignment of the contents within the table item.
+     * Valid values include 'NotSet','Top','Bottom','Middle'
+	 * @param string the horizontal alignment
+	 */
+	public function setVerticalAlign($value)
+	{
+		$this->getStyle()->setVerticalAlign($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTableRowSection location of a row in a table. Defaults to TTableRowSection::Body.
+	 */
+	public function getTableSection()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TableSection',TTableRowSection::Body);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTableRowSection location of a row in a table.
+	 */
+	public function setTableSection($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('TableSection',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTableRowSection'),TTableRowSection::Body);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body contents of the table row
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getHasControls())
+		{
+			$writer->writeLine();
+			foreach($this->getControls() as $cell)
+			{
+				$cell->renderControl($writer);
+				$writer->writeLine();
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TTableCellCollection class.
+ *
+ * TTableCellCollection is used to maintain a list of cells belong to a table row.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTableCellCollection extends TControlCollection
+{
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This overrides the parent implementation by performing additional
+	 * operations for each newly added table cell.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item to be inserted is not a TTableCell object.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TTableCell)
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('tablecellcollection_tablecell_required');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TTableRowSection class.
+ * TTableRowSection defines the enumerable type for the possible table sections
+ * that a {@link TTableRow} can be within.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Header: in table header
+ * - Body: in table body
+ * - Footer: in table footer
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TTableRowSection extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Header='Header';
+	const Body='Body';
+	const Footer='Footer';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTemplateColumn.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTemplateColumn.php
index f2bf02d7..34c9bbaf 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTemplateColumn.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTemplateColumn.php
@@ -1,256 +1,256 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTemplateColumn class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTemplateColumn class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TDataGridColumn class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
-
-/**
- * TTemplateColumn class
- *
- * TTemplateColumn customizes the layout of controls in the column with templates.
- * In particular, you can specify {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate},
- * {@link setEditItemTemplate EditItemTemplate}, {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}
- * and {@link setFooterTemplate FooterTemplate} to customize specific
- * type of cells in the column.
- *
- * Since v3.1.0, TTemplateColumn has introduced two new properties {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
- * and {@link setEditItemRenderer EditItemRenderer} which can be used to specify
- * the layout of the datagrid cells in browsing and editing mode.
- * A renderer refers to a control class that is to be instantiated as a control.
- * For more details, see {@link TRepeater} and {@link TDataList}.
- *
- * When a renderer and a template are both defined for a type of item, the former
- * takes precedence.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTemplateColumn extends TDataGridColumn
-{
-	/**
-	 * Various item templates
-	 * @var string
-	 */
-	private $_itemTemplate=null;
-	private $_editItemTemplate=null;
-	private $_headerTemplate=null;
-	private $_footerTemplate=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the item cell renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cells of the column.
-	 *
-	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
-	 * will be set as the row of the data associated with the datagrid item that this cell resides in.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the class name for the edit item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemRenderer()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EditItemRenderer','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the edit item cell renderer class.
-	 *
-	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cell that is in edit mode.
-	 *
-	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
-	 * will be set as the row of the data associated with the datagrid item that this cell resides in.
-	 *
-	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setEditItemRenderer($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EditItemRenderer',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the edit item template
-	 */
-	public function getEditItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_editItemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the edit item template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setEditItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_editItemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','EditItemTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the item template
-	 */
-	public function getItemTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_itemTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the item template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setItemTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_itemTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','ItemTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the header template
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_headerTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the header template.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','HeaderTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the footer template
-	 */
-	public function getFooterTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_footerTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the footer template
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
-	 */
-	public function setFooterTemplate($value)
-	{
-		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
-			$this->_footerTemplate=$value;
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','FooterTemplate');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * It initializes the cell based on different templates
-	 * (ItemTemplate, EditItemTemplate, HeaderTemplate, FooterTemplate).
-	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
-	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
-	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
-	 */
-	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
-	{
-		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
-		{
-			if($itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
-			{
-				if(($classPath=$this->getEditItemRenderer())==='' && ($template=$this->_editItemTemplate)===null)
-				{
-					$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
-					$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
-				}
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
-				$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
-			}
-			if($classPath!=='')
-			{
-				$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
-				$cell->getControls()->add($control);
-				if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
-				{
-					$control->setItemIndex($cell->getParent()->getItemIndex());
-					$control->setItemType($itemType);
-				}
-				if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
-					$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
-			}
-			else if($template!==null)
-				$template->instantiateIn($cell);
-			else if($itemType!==TListItemType::EditItem)
-				$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
-		}
-		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
-		{
-			if(($classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer())!=='')
-				$this->initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex);
-			else if($this->_headerTemplate!==null)
-				$this->_headerTemplate->instantiateIn($cell);
-			else
-				$this->initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex);
-		}
-		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
-		{
-			if(($classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer())!=='')
-				$this->initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex);
-			else if($this->_footerTemplate!==null)
-				$this->_footerTemplate->instantiateIn($cell);
-			else
-				$this->initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
-	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
-	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
-	 */
-	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
-		$sender->setData($item->getData());
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TDataGridColumn class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataGridColumn');
+
+/**
+ * TTemplateColumn class
+ *
+ * TTemplateColumn customizes the layout of controls in the column with templates.
+ * In particular, you can specify {@link setItemTemplate ItemTemplate},
+ * {@link setEditItemTemplate EditItemTemplate}, {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}
+ * and {@link setFooterTemplate FooterTemplate} to customize specific
+ * type of cells in the column.
+ *
+ * Since v3.1.0, TTemplateColumn has introduced two new properties {@link setItemRenderer ItemRenderer}
+ * and {@link setEditItemRenderer EditItemRenderer} which can be used to specify
+ * the layout of the datagrid cells in browsing and editing mode.
+ * A renderer refers to a control class that is to be instantiated as a control.
+ * For more details, see {@link TRepeater} and {@link TDataList}.
+ *
+ * When a renderer and a template are both defined for a type of item, the former
+ * takes precedence.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTemplateColumn extends TDataGridColumn
+{
+	/**
+	 * Various item templates
+	 * @var string
+	 */
+	private $_itemTemplate=null;
+	private $_editItemTemplate=null;
+	private $_headerTemplate=null;
+	private $_footerTemplate=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the item cell renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cells of the column.
+	 *
+	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
+	 * will be set as the row of the data associated with the datagrid item that this cell resides in.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the class name for the edit item cell renderer. Defaults to empty, meaning not set.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemRenderer()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EditItemRenderer','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the edit item cell renderer class.
+	 *
+	 * If not empty, the class will be used to instantiate as a child control in the item cell that is in edit mode.
+	 *
+	 * If the class implements {@link IDataRenderer}, the <b>Data</b> property
+	 * will be set as the row of the data associated with the datagrid item that this cell resides in.
+	 *
+	 * @param string the renderer class name in namespace format.
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setEditItemRenderer($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EditItemRenderer',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the edit item template
+	 */
+	public function getEditItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_editItemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the edit item template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setEditItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_editItemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','EditItemTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the item template
+	 */
+	public function getItemTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_itemTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the item template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setItemTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_itemTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','ItemTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the header template
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_headerTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the header template.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','HeaderTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the footer template
+	 */
+	public function getFooterTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_footerTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the footer template
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the input is not an {@link ITemplate} or not null.
+	 */
+	public function setFooterTemplate($value)
+	{
+		if($value instanceof ITemplate || $value===null)
+			$this->_footerTemplate=$value;
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('templatecolumn_template_required','FooterTemplate');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Initializes the specified cell to its initial values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * It initializes the cell based on different templates
+	 * (ItemTemplate, EditItemTemplate, HeaderTemplate, FooterTemplate).
+	 * @param TTableCell the cell to be initialized.
+	 * @param integer the index to the Columns property that the cell resides in.
+	 * @param string the type of cell (Header,Footer,Item,AlternatingItem,EditItem,SelectedItem)
+	 */
+	public function initializeCell($cell,$columnIndex,$itemType)
+	{
+		if($itemType===TListItemType::Item || $itemType===TListItemType::AlternatingItem || $itemType===TListItemType::SelectedItem || $itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
+		{
+			if($itemType===TListItemType::EditItem)
+			{
+				if(($classPath=$this->getEditItemRenderer())==='' && ($template=$this->_editItemTemplate)===null)
+				{
+					$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
+					$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$template=$this->_itemTemplate;
+				$classPath=$this->getItemRenderer();
+			}
+			if($classPath!=='')
+			{
+				$control=Prado::createComponent($classPath);
+				$cell->getControls()->add($control);
+				if($control instanceof IItemDataRenderer)
+				{
+					$control->setItemIndex($cell->getParent()->getItemIndex());
+					$control->setItemType($itemType);
+				}
+				if($control instanceof IDataRenderer)
+					$control->attachEventHandler('OnDataBinding',array($this,'dataBindColumn'));
+			}
+			else if($template!==null)
+				$template->instantiateIn($cell);
+			else if($itemType!==TListItemType::EditItem)
+				$cell->setText('&nbsp;');
+		}
+		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Header)
+		{
+			if(($classPath=$this->getHeaderRenderer())!=='')
+				$this->initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex);
+			else if($this->_headerTemplate!==null)
+				$this->_headerTemplate->instantiateIn($cell);
+			else
+				$this->initializeHeaderCell($cell,$columnIndex);
+		}
+		else if($itemType===TListItemType::Footer)
+		{
+			if(($classPath=$this->getFooterRenderer())!=='')
+				$this->initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex);
+			else if($this->_footerTemplate!==null)
+				$this->_footerTemplate->instantiateIn($cell);
+			else
+				$this->initializeFooterCell($cell,$columnIndex);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Databinds a cell in the column.
+	 * This method is invoked when datagrid performs databinding.
+	 * It populates the content of the cell with the relevant data from data source.
+	 */
+	public function dataBindColumn($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$sender->getNamingContainer();
+		$sender->setData($item->getData());
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextBox.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextBox.php
index 7a9f0445..5cd1149a 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextBox.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextBox.php
@@ -1,652 +1,652 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTextBox class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TTextBox class
- *
- * TTextBox displays a text box on the Web page for user input.
- * The text displayed in the TTextBox control is determined by the
- * {@link setText Text} property. You can create a <b>SingleLine</b>,
- * a <b>MultiLine</b>, or a <b>Password</b> text box by setting
- * the {@link setTextMode TextMode} property. If the TTextBox control
- * is a multiline text box, the number of rows it displays is determined
- * by the {@link setRows Rows} property, and the {@link setWrap Wrap} property
- * can be used to determine whether to wrap the text in the component.
- *
- * To specify the display width of the text box, in characters, set
- * the {@link setColumns Columns} property. To prevent the text displayed
- * in the component from being modified, set the {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly}
- * property to true. If you want to limit the user input to a specified number
- * of characters, set the {@link setMaxLength MaxLength} property.
- * To use AutoComplete feature, set the {@link setAutoCompleteType AutoCompleteType} property.
- *
- * If {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} is set true, updating the text box
- * and then changing the focus out of it will cause postback action.
- * And if {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, validation will
- * also be processed, which can be further restricted within
- * a {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}.
- *
- * WARNING: Be careful if you want to display the text collected via TTextBox.
- * Malicious cross-site script may be injected in. You may use {@link getSafeText SafeText}
- * to prevent this problem.
- *
- * NOTE: If you set {@link setWrap Wrap} to false or use {@link setAutoCompleteType AutoCompleteType},
- * the generated HTML output for the textbox will not be XHTML-compatible.
- * Currently, no alternatives are available.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTextBox extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable, IDataRenderer
-{
-	/**
-	 * Default number of rows (for MultiLine text box)
-	 */
-	const DEFAULT_ROWS=4;
-	/**
-	 * Default number of columns (for MultiLine text box)
-	 */
-	const DEFAULT_COLUMNS=20;
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed safe text parser
-	 */
-	private static $_safeTextParser=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var string safe textbox content with javascript stripped off
-	 */
-	private $_safeText;
-	private $_dataChanged=false;
-	private $_isValid=true;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name of the textbox
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return ($this->getTextMode()==='MultiLine')?'textarea':'input';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional textbox specific attributes.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$page=$this->getPage();
-		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
-		if(($uid=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
-			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uid);
-		if(($textMode=$this->getTextMode())===TTextBoxMode::MultiLine)
-		{
-			if(($rows=$this->getRows())<=0)
-				$rows=self::DEFAULT_ROWS;
-			if(($cols=$this->getColumns())<=0)
-				$cols=self::DEFAULT_COLUMNS;
-			$writer->addAttribute('rows',"$rows");
-			$writer->addAttribute('cols',"$cols");
-			if(!$this->getWrap())
-				$writer->addAttribute('wrap','off');
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			if($textMode===TTextBoxMode::SingleLine)
-			{
-				$writer->addAttribute('type','text');
-				if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-					$writer->addAttribute('value',$text);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				if($this->getPersistPassword() && ($text=$this->getText())!=='')
-					$writer->addAttribute('value',$text);
-				$writer->addAttribute('type','password');
-			}
-
-			if(($act=$this->getAutoCompleteType())!=='None')
-			{
-				if($act==='Disabled')
-					$writer->addAttribute('autocomplete','off');
-				else if($act==='Search')
-					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','search');
-				else if($act==='HomeCountryRegion')
-					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','HomeCountry');
-				else if($act==='BusinessCountryRegion')
-					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','BusinessCountry');
-				else
-				{
-					if(strpos($act,'Business')===0)
-						$act='Business'.'.'.substr($act,8);
-					else if(strpos($act,'Home')===0)
-						$act='Home'.'.'.substr($act,4);
-					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','vCard.'.$act);
-				}
-			}
-
-			if(($cols=$this->getColumns())>0)
-				$writer->addAttribute('size',"$cols");
-			if(($maxLength=$this->getMaxLength())>0)
-				$writer->addAttribute('maxlength',"$maxLength");
-		}
-		if($this->getReadOnly())
-			$writer->addAttribute('readonly','readonly');
-		$isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
-		if(!$isEnabled && $this->getEnabled())  // in this case parent will not render 'disabled'
-			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
-		if($isEnabled
-			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
-			&& ( $this->getAutoPostBack() || $textMode===TTextBoxMode::SingleLine)
-			&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
-		{
-			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
-		}
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the javascript for textbox.
-	 */
-	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @return string the javascript class name
-	 */
-	protected function getClientClassName()
-	{
-		return 'Prado.WebUI.TTextBox';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the post back options for this textbox.
-	 * @return array
-	 */
-	protected function getPostBackOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
-		$options['AutoPostBack'] = $this->getAutoPostBack();
-		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['TextMode'] = $this->getTextMode();
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Loads user input data.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
-	 * @param array the input data collection
-	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
-	 */
-	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
-	{
-		$value=$values[$key];
-		if($this->getAutoTrim())
-			$value=trim($value);
-		if(!$this->getReadOnly() && $this->getText()!==$value)
-		{
-			$this->setText($value);
-			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
-		}
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
-	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
-	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
-	 */
-	public function getDataChanged()
-	{
-		return $this->_dataChanged;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the value to be validated.
-	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
-	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
-	 */
-	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully.
-	 * Defaults to true.
-	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
-	 */
-	public function getIsValid()
-	{
-	    return $this->_isValid;
-	}
-	/**
-	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
-	 */
-	public function setIsValid($value)
-	{
-	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnTextChanged</b> event.
-	 * This method is invoked when the value of the {@link getText Text}
-	 * property changes on postback.
-	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation to ensure
-	 * the invocation of the attached event handlers.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
-	 */
-	public function onTextChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnTextChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises postdata changed event.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
-	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getText Text} property
-	 * is changed on postback.
-	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
-	 */
-	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
-	{
-		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
-			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$this->onTextChanged(null);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body content of the textbox when it is in MultiLine text mode.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if($this->getTextMode()==='MultiLine')
-			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($this->getText()));
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders an additional line-break after the opening tag when it
-	 * is in MultiLine text mode.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose^M
-	 */
-	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
-	{
-		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
-		if($this->getTextMode()==='MultiLine')
-			$writer->write("\n");
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTextBoxAutoCompleteType the AutoComplete type of the textbox
-	 */
-	public function getAutoCompleteType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoCompleteType',TTextBoxAutoCompleteType::None);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TTextBoxAutoCompleteType the AutoComplete type of the textbox, default value is TTextBoxAutoCompleteType::None.
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the input parameter is not a valid AutoComplete type
-	 */
-	public function setAutoCompleteType($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoCompleteType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextBoxAutoCompleteType'),TTextBoxAutoCompleteType::None);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether an automatic postback to the server
-     * will occur whenever the user modifies the text in the TTextBox control and
-     * then tabs out of the component. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoPostBack()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating if postback automatically.
-	 * An automatic postback to the server will occur whenever the user
-	 * modifies the text in the TTextBox control and then tabs out of the component.
-	 * @param boolean the value indicating if postback automatically
-	 */
-	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether the input text should be trimmed spaces. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoTrim()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoTrim',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating if the input text should be trimmed spaces
-	 * @param boolean the value indicating if the input text should be trimmed spaces
-	 */
-	public function setAutoTrim($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoTrim',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this text box will cause input validation, default is true.
-	 */
-	public function getCausesValidation()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this text box will cause input validation.
-	 */
-	public function setCausesValidation($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the display width of the text box in characters, default is 0 meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getColumns()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Columns',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the display width of the text box in characters.
-	 * @param integer the display width, set it 0 to clear the setting
-	 */
-	public function setColumns($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Columns',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the maximum number of characters allowed in the text box, default is 0 meaning not set.
-	 */
-	public function getMaxLength()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('MaxLength',0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the maximum number of characters allowed in the text box.
-	 * @param integer the maximum length,  set it 0 to clear the setting
-	 */
-	public function setMaxLength($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('MaxLength',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the textbox is read only, default is false.
-	 */
-	public function getReadOnly()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the textbox is read only
-	 */
-	public function setReadOnly($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the number of rows displayed in a multiline text box, default is 4
-	 */
-	public function getRows()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Rows',self::DEFAULT_ROWS);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the number of rows displayed in a multiline text box.
-	 * @param integer the number of rows
-	 */
-	public function setRows($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Rows',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),self::DEFAULT_ROWS);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether password should be displayed in the textbox during postback. Defaults to false. This property only applies when TextMode='Password'.
-	 */
-	public function getPersistPassword()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('PersistPassword',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether password should be displayed in the textbox during postback. This property only applies when TextMode='Password'.
-	 */
-	public function setPersistPassword($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('PersistPassword',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the text content of the TTextBox control.
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text content of the TTextBox control.
-	 * @param string the text content
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
-		$this->_safeText = null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the text content of the TTextBox control.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
-	 * @return string the text content of the TTextBox control.
-	 * @see getText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function getData()
-	{
-		return $this->getText();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the text content of the TTextBox control.
-	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
-	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
-	 * @param string the text content of the TTextBox control.
-	 * @see setText
-	 * @since 3.1.0
-	 */
-	public function setData($value)
-	{
-		$this->setText($value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string safe text content with javascript stripped off
-	 */
-	public function getSafeText()
-	{
-		if($this->_safeText===null)
-			$this->_safeText=$this->getSafeTextParser()->parse($this->getText());
-		return $this->_safeText;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed safe text parser
-	 */
-	protected function getSafeTextParser()
-	{
-		if(!self::$_safeTextParser)
-			self::$_safeTextParser=Prado::createComponent('System.3rdParty.SafeHtml.TSafeHtmlParser');
-		return self::$_safeTextParser;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TTextBoxMode the behavior mode of the TTextBox component. Defaults to TTextBoxMode::SingleLine.
-	 */
-	public function getTextMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('TextMode',TTextBoxMode::SingleLine);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the behavior mode of the TTextBox component.
-	 * @param TTextBoxMode the text mode
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the input value is not a valid text mode.
-	 */
-	public function setTextMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('TextMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextBoxMode'),TTextBoxMode::SingleLine);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group of validators which the text box causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group of validators which the text box causes validation upon postback
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the text content wraps within a multiline text box. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getWrap()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Wrap',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the value indicating whether the text content wraps within a multiline text box.
-	 * @param boolean whether the text content wraps within a multiline text box.
-	 */
-	public function setWrap($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Wrap',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TTextBoxMode class.
- * TTextBoxMode defines the enumerable type for the possible mode
- * that a {@link TTextBox} control could be at.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - SingleLine: the textbox will be a regular single line input
- * - MultiLine: the textbox will be a textarea allowing multiple line input
- * - Password: the textbox will hide user input like a password input box
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TTextBoxMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const SingleLine='SingleLine';
-	const MultiLine='MultiLine';
-	const Password='Password';
-}
-
-/**
- * TTextBoxAutoCompleteType class.
- * TTextBoxAutoCompleteType defines the possible AutoComplete type that is supported
- * by a {@link TTextBox} control.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TTextBoxAutoCompleteType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const BusinessCity='BusinessCity';
-	const BusinessCountryRegion='BusinessCountryRegion';
-	const BusinessFax='BusinessFax';
-	const BusinessPhone='BusinessPhone';
-	const BusinessState='BusinessState';
-	const BusinessStreetAddress='BusinessStreetAddress';
-	const BusinessUrl='BusinessUrl';
-	const BusinessZipCode='BusinessZipCode';
-	const Cellular='Cellular';
-	const Company='Company';
-	const Department='Department';
-	const Disabled='Disabled';
-	const DisplayName='DisplayName';
-	const Email='Email';
-	const FirstName='FirstName';
-	const Gender='Gender';
-	const HomeCity='HomeCity';
-	const HomeCountryRegion='HomeCountryRegion';
-	const HomeFax='HomeFax';
-	const Homepage='Homepage';
-	const HomePhone='HomePhone';
-	const HomeState='HomeState';
-	const HomeStreetAddress='HomeStreetAddress';
-	const HomeZipCode='HomeZipCode';
-	const JobTitle='JobTitle';
-	const LastName='LastName';
-	const MiddleName='MiddleName';
-	const None='None';
-	const Notes='Notes';
-	const Office='Office';
-	const Pager='Pager';
-	const Search='Search';
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTextBox class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TTextBox class
+ *
+ * TTextBox displays a text box on the Web page for user input.
+ * The text displayed in the TTextBox control is determined by the
+ * {@link setText Text} property. You can create a <b>SingleLine</b>,
+ * a <b>MultiLine</b>, or a <b>Password</b> text box by setting
+ * the {@link setTextMode TextMode} property. If the TTextBox control
+ * is a multiline text box, the number of rows it displays is determined
+ * by the {@link setRows Rows} property, and the {@link setWrap Wrap} property
+ * can be used to determine whether to wrap the text in the component.
+ *
+ * To specify the display width of the text box, in characters, set
+ * the {@link setColumns Columns} property. To prevent the text displayed
+ * in the component from being modified, set the {@link setReadOnly ReadOnly}
+ * property to true. If you want to limit the user input to a specified number
+ * of characters, set the {@link setMaxLength MaxLength} property.
+ * To use AutoComplete feature, set the {@link setAutoCompleteType AutoCompleteType} property.
+ *
+ * If {@link setAutoPostBack AutoPostBack} is set true, updating the text box
+ * and then changing the focus out of it will cause postback action.
+ * And if {@link setCausesValidation CausesValidation} is true, validation will
+ * also be processed, which can be further restricted within
+ * a {@link setValidationGroup ValidationGroup}.
+ *
+ * WARNING: Be careful if you want to display the text collected via TTextBox.
+ * Malicious cross-site script may be injected in. You may use {@link getSafeText SafeText}
+ * to prevent this problem.
+ *
+ * NOTE: If you set {@link setWrap Wrap} to false or use {@link setAutoCompleteType AutoCompleteType},
+ * the generated HTML output for the textbox will not be XHTML-compatible.
+ * Currently, no alternatives are available.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTextBox extends TWebControl implements IPostBackDataHandler, IValidatable, IDataRenderer
+{
+	/**
+	 * Default number of rows (for MultiLine text box)
+	 */
+	const DEFAULT_ROWS=4;
+	/**
+	 * Default number of columns (for MultiLine text box)
+	 */
+	const DEFAULT_COLUMNS=20;
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed safe text parser
+	 */
+	private static $_safeTextParser=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var string safe textbox content with javascript stripped off
+	 */
+	private $_safeText;
+	private $_dataChanged=false;
+	private $_isValid=true;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name of the textbox
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return ($this->getTextMode()==='MultiLine')?'textarea':'input';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to render javascript.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds attribute name-value pairs to renderer.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation with additional textbox specific attributes.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$page=$this->getPage();
+		$page->ensureRenderInForm($this);
+		if(($uid=$this->getUniqueID())!=='')
+			$writer->addAttribute('name',$uid);
+		if(($textMode=$this->getTextMode())===TTextBoxMode::MultiLine)
+		{
+			if(($rows=$this->getRows())<=0)
+				$rows=self::DEFAULT_ROWS;
+			if(($cols=$this->getColumns())<=0)
+				$cols=self::DEFAULT_COLUMNS;
+			$writer->addAttribute('rows',"$rows");
+			$writer->addAttribute('cols',"$cols");
+			if(!$this->getWrap())
+				$writer->addAttribute('wrap','off');
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if($textMode===TTextBoxMode::SingleLine)
+			{
+				$writer->addAttribute('type','text');
+				if(($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+					$writer->addAttribute('value',$text);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				if($this->getPersistPassword() && ($text=$this->getText())!=='')
+					$writer->addAttribute('value',$text);
+				$writer->addAttribute('type','password');
+			}
+
+			if(($act=$this->getAutoCompleteType())!=='None')
+			{
+				if($act==='Disabled')
+					$writer->addAttribute('autocomplete','off');
+				else if($act==='Search')
+					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','search');
+				else if($act==='HomeCountryRegion')
+					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','HomeCountry');
+				else if($act==='BusinessCountryRegion')
+					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','BusinessCountry');
+				else
+				{
+					if(strpos($act,'Business')===0)
+						$act='Business'.'.'.substr($act,8);
+					else if(strpos($act,'Home')===0)
+						$act='Home'.'.'.substr($act,4);
+					$writer->addAttribute('vcard_name','vCard.'.$act);
+				}
+			}
+
+			if(($cols=$this->getColumns())>0)
+				$writer->addAttribute('size',"$cols");
+			if(($maxLength=$this->getMaxLength())>0)
+				$writer->addAttribute('maxlength',"$maxLength");
+		}
+		if($this->getReadOnly())
+			$writer->addAttribute('readonly','readonly');
+		$isEnabled=$this->getEnabled(true);
+		if(!$isEnabled && $this->getEnabled())  // in this case parent will not render 'disabled'
+			$writer->addAttribute('disabled','disabled');
+		if($isEnabled
+			&& $this->getEnableClientScript()
+			&& ( $this->getAutoPostBack() || $textMode===TTextBoxMode::SingleLine)
+			&& $page->getClientSupportsJavaScript())
+		{
+			$this->renderClientControlScript($writer);
+		}
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the javascript for textbox.
+	 */
+	protected function renderClientControlScript($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPostBackControl($this->getClientClassName(),$this->getPostBackOptions());
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the name of the javascript class responsible for performing postback for this control.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @return string the javascript class name
+	 */
+	protected function getClientClassName()
+	{
+		return 'Prado.WebUI.TTextBox';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the post back options for this textbox.
+	 * @return array
+	 */
+	protected function getPostBackOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['EventTarget'] = $this->getUniqueID();
+		$options['AutoPostBack'] = $this->getAutoPostBack();
+		$options['CausesValidation'] = $this->getCausesValidation();
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] = $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['TextMode'] = $this->getTextMode();
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Loads user input data.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 * @param string the key that can be used to retrieve data from the input data collection
+	 * @param array the input data collection
+	 * @return boolean whether the data of the component has been changed
+	 */
+	public function loadPostData($key,$values)
+	{
+		$value=$values[$key];
+		if($this->getAutoTrim())
+			$value=trim($value);
+		if(!$this->getReadOnly() && $this->getText()!==$value)
+		{
+			$this->setText($value);
+			return $this->_dataChanged=true;
+		}
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns a value indicating whether postback has caused the control data change.
+	 * This method is required by the IPostBackDataHandler interface.
+	 * @return boolean whether postback has caused the control data change. False if the page is not in postback mode.
+	 */
+	public function getDataChanged()
+	{
+		return $this->_dataChanged;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the value to be validated.
+	 * This methid is required by IValidatable interface.
+	 * @return mixed the value of the property to be validated.
+	 */
+	public function getValidationPropertyValue()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns true if this control validated successfully.
+	 * Defaults to true.
+	 * @return bool wether this control validated successfully.
+	 */
+	public function getIsValid()
+	{
+	    return $this->_isValid;
+	}
+	/**
+	 * @param bool wether this control is valid.
+	 */
+	public function setIsValid($value)
+	{
+	    $this->_isValid=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnTextChanged</b> event.
+	 * This method is invoked when the value of the {@link getText Text}
+	 * property changes on postback.
+	 * If you override this method, be sure to call the parent implementation to ensure
+	 * the invocation of the attached event handlers.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter to be passed to the event handlers
+	 */
+	public function onTextChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnTextChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises postdata changed event.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IPostBackDataHandler} interface.
+	 * It is invoked by the framework when {@link getText Text} property
+	 * is changed on postback.
+	 * This method is primarly used by framework developers.
+	 */
+	public function raisePostDataChangedEvent()
+	{
+		if($this->getAutoPostBack() && $this->getCausesValidation())
+			$this->getPage()->validate($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$this->onTextChanged(null);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body content of the textbox when it is in MultiLine text mode.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer for rendering
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if($this->getTextMode()==='MultiLine')
+			$writer->write(THttpUtility::htmlEncode($this->getText()));
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders an additional line-break after the opening tag when it
+	 * is in MultiLine text mode.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose^M
+	 */
+	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
+	{
+		parent::renderBeginTag($writer);
+		if($this->getTextMode()==='MultiLine')
+			$writer->write("\n");
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTextBoxAutoCompleteType the AutoComplete type of the textbox
+	 */
+	public function getAutoCompleteType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoCompleteType',TTextBoxAutoCompleteType::None);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TTextBoxAutoCompleteType the AutoComplete type of the textbox, default value is TTextBoxAutoCompleteType::None.
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the input parameter is not a valid AutoComplete type
+	 */
+	public function setAutoCompleteType($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoCompleteType',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextBoxAutoCompleteType'),TTextBoxAutoCompleteType::None);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether an automatic postback to the server
+     * will occur whenever the user modifies the text in the TTextBox control and
+     * then tabs out of the component. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoPostBack()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoPostBack',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating if postback automatically.
+	 * An automatic postback to the server will occur whenever the user
+	 * modifies the text in the TTextBox control and then tabs out of the component.
+	 * @param boolean the value indicating if postback automatically
+	 */
+	public function setAutoPostBack($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoPostBack',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean a value indicating whether the input text should be trimmed spaces. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoTrim()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoTrim',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating if the input text should be trimmed spaces
+	 * @param boolean the value indicating if the input text should be trimmed spaces
+	 */
+	public function setAutoTrim($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoTrim',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether postback event trigger by this text box will cause input validation, default is true.
+	 */
+	public function getCausesValidation()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CausesValidation',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether postback event trigger by this text box will cause input validation.
+	 */
+	public function setCausesValidation($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CausesValidation',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the display width of the text box in characters, default is 0 meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getColumns()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Columns',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the display width of the text box in characters.
+	 * @param integer the display width, set it 0 to clear the setting
+	 */
+	public function setColumns($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Columns',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the maximum number of characters allowed in the text box, default is 0 meaning not set.
+	 */
+	public function getMaxLength()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('MaxLength',0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the maximum number of characters allowed in the text box.
+	 * @param integer the maximum length,  set it 0 to clear the setting
+	 */
+	public function setMaxLength($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('MaxLength',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the textbox is read only, default is false.
+	 */
+	public function getReadOnly()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ReadOnly',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the textbox is read only
+	 */
+	public function setReadOnly($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ReadOnly',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the number of rows displayed in a multiline text box, default is 4
+	 */
+	public function getRows()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Rows',self::DEFAULT_ROWS);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the number of rows displayed in a multiline text box.
+	 * @param integer the number of rows
+	 */
+	public function setRows($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Rows',TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value),self::DEFAULT_ROWS);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether password should be displayed in the textbox during postback. Defaults to false. This property only applies when TextMode='Password'.
+	 */
+	public function getPersistPassword()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('PersistPassword',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether password should be displayed in the textbox during postback. This property only applies when TextMode='Password'.
+	 */
+	public function setPersistPassword($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('PersistPassword',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the text content of the TTextBox control.
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text content of the TTextBox control.
+	 * @param string the text content
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value,'');
+		$this->_safeText = null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the text content of the TTextBox control.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link getText()}.
+	 * @return string the text content of the TTextBox control.
+	 * @see getText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function getData()
+	{
+		return $this->getText();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the text content of the TTextBox control.
+	 * This method is required by {@link IDataRenderer}.
+	 * It is the same as {@link setText()}.
+	 * @param string the text content of the TTextBox control.
+	 * @see setText
+	 * @since 3.1.0
+	 */
+	public function setData($value)
+	{
+		$this->setText($value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string safe text content with javascript stripped off
+	 */
+	public function getSafeText()
+	{
+		if($this->_safeText===null)
+			$this->_safeText=$this->getSafeTextParser()->parse($this->getText());
+		return $this->_safeText;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed safe text parser
+	 */
+	protected function getSafeTextParser()
+	{
+		if(!self::$_safeTextParser)
+			self::$_safeTextParser=Prado::createComponent('System.3rdParty.SafeHtml.TSafeHtmlParser');
+		return self::$_safeTextParser;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TTextBoxMode the behavior mode of the TTextBox component. Defaults to TTextBoxMode::SingleLine.
+	 */
+	public function getTextMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('TextMode',TTextBoxMode::SingleLine);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the behavior mode of the TTextBox component.
+	 * @param TTextBoxMode the text mode
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the input value is not a valid text mode.
+	 */
+	public function setTextMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('TextMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TTextBoxMode'),TTextBoxMode::SingleLine);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group of validators which the text box causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group of validators which the text box causes validation upon postback
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the text content wraps within a multiline text box. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getWrap()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Wrap',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the value indicating whether the text content wraps within a multiline text box.
+	 * @param boolean whether the text content wraps within a multiline text box.
+	 */
+	public function setWrap($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Wrap',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TTextBoxMode class.
+ * TTextBoxMode defines the enumerable type for the possible mode
+ * that a {@link TTextBox} control could be at.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - SingleLine: the textbox will be a regular single line input
+ * - MultiLine: the textbox will be a textarea allowing multiple line input
+ * - Password: the textbox will hide user input like a password input box
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TTextBoxMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const SingleLine='SingleLine';
+	const MultiLine='MultiLine';
+	const Password='Password';
+}
+
+/**
+ * TTextBoxAutoCompleteType class.
+ * TTextBoxAutoCompleteType defines the possible AutoComplete type that is supported
+ * by a {@link TTextBox} control.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TTextBoxAutoCompleteType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const BusinessCity='BusinessCity';
+	const BusinessCountryRegion='BusinessCountryRegion';
+	const BusinessFax='BusinessFax';
+	const BusinessPhone='BusinessPhone';
+	const BusinessState='BusinessState';
+	const BusinessStreetAddress='BusinessStreetAddress';
+	const BusinessUrl='BusinessUrl';
+	const BusinessZipCode='BusinessZipCode';
+	const Cellular='Cellular';
+	const Company='Company';
+	const Department='Department';
+	const Disabled='Disabled';
+	const DisplayName='DisplayName';
+	const Email='Email';
+	const FirstName='FirstName';
+	const Gender='Gender';
+	const HomeCity='HomeCity';
+	const HomeCountryRegion='HomeCountryRegion';
+	const HomeFax='HomeFax';
+	const Homepage='Homepage';
+	const HomePhone='HomePhone';
+	const HomeState='HomeState';
+	const HomeStreetAddress='HomeStreetAddress';
+	const HomeZipCode='HomeZipCode';
+	const JobTitle='JobTitle';
+	const LastName='LastName';
+	const MiddleName='MiddleName';
+	const None='None';
+	const Notes='Notes';
+	const Office='Office';
+	const Pager='Pager';
+	const Search='Search';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextProcessor.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextProcessor.php
index 6d95a482..60d047fe 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextProcessor.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TTextProcessor.php
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TTextProcessor class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TTextProcessor class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TTextProcessor class.
- *
- * TTextProcessor is the base class for classes that process or transform
- * text content into different forms. The text content to be processed
- * is specified by {@link setText Text} property. If it is not set, the body
- * content enclosed within the processor control will be processed and rendered.
- * The body content includes static text strings and the rendering result
- * of child controls.
- *
- * Note, all child classes must implement {@link processText} method.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI
- * @since 3.0.1
- */
-abstract class TTextProcessor extends TWebControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * Processes a text string.
-	 * This method must be implemented by child classes.
-	 * @param string text string to be processed
-	 * @return string the processed text result
-	 */
-	abstract public function processText($text);
-
-	/**
-	 * HTML-decodes static text.
-	 * This method overrides parent implementation.
-	 * @param mixed object to be added as body content
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if(is_string($object))
-			$object=html_entity_decode($object,ENT_QUOTES,'UTF-8');
-		parent::addParsedObject($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string text to be processed
-	 */
-	public function getText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string text to be processed
-	 */
-	public function setText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Text',$value);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders body content.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by replacing
-	 * the body content with the processed text content.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		if(($text=$this->getText())==='' && $this->getHasControls())
-		{
-			$htmlWriter = Prado::createComponent($this->GetResponse()->getHtmlWriterType(), new TTextWriter());
-			parent::renderContents($htmlWriter);
-			$text=$htmlWriter->flush();
-		}
-		if($text!=='')
-			$writer->write($this->processText($text));
-	}
-
-}
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TTextProcessor class.
+ *
+ * TTextProcessor is the base class for classes that process or transform
+ * text content into different forms. The text content to be processed
+ * is specified by {@link setText Text} property. If it is not set, the body
+ * content enclosed within the processor control will be processed and rendered.
+ * The body content includes static text strings and the rendering result
+ * of child controls.
+ *
+ * Note, all child classes must implement {@link processText} method.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI
+ * @since 3.0.1
+ */
+abstract class TTextProcessor extends TWebControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * Processes a text string.
+	 * This method must be implemented by child classes.
+	 * @param string text string to be processed
+	 * @return string the processed text result
+	 */
+	abstract public function processText($text);
+
+	/**
+	 * HTML-decodes static text.
+	 * This method overrides parent implementation.
+	 * @param mixed object to be added as body content
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if(is_string($object))
+			$object=html_entity_decode($object,ENT_QUOTES,'UTF-8');
+		parent::addParsedObject($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string text to be processed
+	 */
+	public function getText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Text','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string text to be processed
+	 */
+	public function setText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Text',$value);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders body content.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by replacing
+	 * the body content with the processed text content.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		if(($text=$this->getText())==='' && $this->getHasControls())
+		{
+			$htmlWriter = Prado::createComponent($this->GetResponse()->getHtmlWriterType(), new TTextWriter());
+			parent::renderContents($htmlWriter);
+			$text=$htmlWriter->flush();
+		}
+		if($text!=='')
+			$writer->write($this->processText($text));
+	}
+
+}
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TValidationSummary.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TValidationSummary.php
index 6c258927..c915d163 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TValidationSummary.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TValidationSummary.php
@@ -1,536 +1,536 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TValidationSummary class file
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TValidationSummary class
- *
- * TValidationSummary displays a summary of validation errors inline on a Web page,
- * in a message box, or both. By default, a validation summary will collect
- * {@link TBaseValidator::getErrorMessage ErrorMessage} of all failed validators
- * on the page. If {@link getValidationGroup ValidationGroup} is not
- * empty, only those validators who belong to the group will show their error messages
- * in the summary.
- *
- * The summary can be displayed as a list, as a bulleted list, or as a single
- * paragraph based on the {@link setDisplayMode DisplayMode} property.
- * The messages shown can be prefixed with {@link setHeaderText HeaderText}.
- *
- * The summary can be displayed on the Web page and in a message box by setting
- * the {@link setShowSummary ShowSummary} and {@link setShowMessageBox ShowMessageBox}
- * properties, respectively. Note, the latter is only effective when
- * {@link setEnableClientScript EnableClientScript} is true.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TValidationSummary extends TWebControl
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions validation client side options.
-	 */
-	private $_clientSide;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * This method sets the foreground color to red.
-	 */
-	public function __construct()
-	{
-		parent::__construct();
-		$this->setForeColor('red');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle the style of displaying the error messages. Defaults to TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Fixed.
-	 */
-	public function getDisplay()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Display',TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Fixed);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle the style of displaying the error messages
-	 */
-	public function setDisplay($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Display',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle'),TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Fixed);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the header text displayed at the top of the summary
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HeaderText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the header text to be displayed at the top of the summary
-	 * @param string the header text
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HeaderText',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TValidationSummaryDisplayMode the mode of displaying error messages. Defaults to TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList.
-	 */
-	public function getDisplayMode()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('DisplayMode',TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TValidationSummaryDisplayMode the mode of displaying error messages
-	 */
-	public function setDisplayMode($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('DisplayMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationSummaryDisplayMode'),TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the TValidationSummary component updates itself using client-side script. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getEnableClientScript()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the TValidationSummary component updates itself using client-side script.
-	 */
-	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation summary is displayed in a message box. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getShowMessageBox()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowMessageBox',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the validation summary is displayed in a message box.
-	 */
-	public function setShowMessageBox($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowMessageBox',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation summary is displayed inline. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getShowSummary()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowSummary',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the validation summary is displayed inline.
-	 */
-	public function setShowSummary($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowSummary',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether scroll summary into viewport or not. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getScrollToSummary()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ScrollToSummary',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether scroll summary into viewport or not.
-	 */
-	public function setScrollToSummary($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ScrollToSummary',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether the validation summary should be anchored. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getShowAnchor()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowAnchor',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether the validation summary should be anchored.
-	 */
-	public function setShowAnchor($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowAnchor',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Gets the auto-update for this summary.
-	 * @return boolean automatic client-side summary updates. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getAutoUpdate()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AutoUpdate', true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the summary to auto-update on the client-side
-	 * @param boolean true for automatic summary updates.
-	 */
-	public function setAutoUpdate($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AutoUpdate', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value), true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the group which this validator belongs to
-	 */
-	public function getValidationGroup()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the group which this validator belongs to
-	 */
-	public function setValidationGroup($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
-	}
-
-	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
-	{
-		$display=$this->getDisplay();
-		$visible=$this->getEnabled(true) && count($this->getErrorMessages()) > 0;
-		if(!$visible)
-		{
-			if($display===TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::None || $display===TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Dynamic)
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('display','none');
-			else
-				$writer->addStyleAttribute('visibility','hidden');
-		}
-		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
-		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Render the javascript for validation summary.
-	 * @param array list of options for validation summary.
-	 */
-	protected function renderJsSummary()
-	{
-		if(!$this->getEnabled(true) || !$this->getEnableClientScript())
-			return;
-		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
-		$cs->registerPradoScript('validator');
-
-		//need to register the validation manager is validation summary is alone.
-		$formID=$this->getPage()->getForm()->getClientID();
-		$scriptKey = "TBaseValidator:$formID";
-		if($this->getEnableClientScript() && !$cs->isEndScriptRegistered($scriptKey))
-		{
-			$manager['FormID'] = $formID;
-			$options = TJavaScript::encode($manager);
-			$cs->registerPradoScript('validator');
-			$cs->registerEndScript($scriptKey, "new Prado.ValidationManager({$options});");
-		}
-
-
-		$options=TJavaScript::encode($this->getClientScriptOptions());
-		$script = "new Prado.WebUI.TValidationSummary({$options});";
-		$cs->registerEndScript($this->getClientID(), $script);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Get a list of options for the client-side javascript validation summary.
-	 * @return array list of options for the summary
-	 */
-	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
-	{
-		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
-		$options['FormID'] = $this->getPage()->getForm()->getClientID();
-		if($this->getShowMessageBox())
-			$options['ShowMessageBox']=true;
-		if(!$this->getShowSummary())
-			$options['ShowSummary']=false;
-
-		$options['ScrollToSummary']=$this->getScrollToSummary();
-		$options['HeaderText']=$this->getHeaderText();
-		$options['DisplayMode']=$this->getDisplayMode();
-
-		$options['Refresh'] = $this->getAutoUpdate();
-		$options['ValidationGroup'] =  $this->getValidationGroup();
-		$options['Display'] = $this->getDisplay();
-
-		if($this->_clientSide!==null)
-			$options = array_merge($options,$this->_clientSide->getOptions()->toArray());
-
-		return $options;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions client-side validation summary
-	 * event options.
-	 */
-	public function getClientSide()
-	{
-		if($this->_clientSide===null)
-			$this->_clientSide = $this->createClientScript();
-		return $this->_clientSide;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions javascript validation summary
-	 * event options.
-	 */
-	protected function createClientScript()
-	{
-		return new TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions;
-	}
-	/**
-	 * Get the list of validation error messages.
-	 * @return array list of validator error messages.
-	 */
-	protected function getErrorMessages()
-	{
-		$validators=$this->getPage()->getValidators($this->getValidationGroup());
-		$messages = array();
-		foreach($validators as $validator)
-		{
-			if(!$validator->getIsValid() && ($msg=$validator->getErrorMessage())!=='')
-				//$messages[] = $validator->getAnchoredMessage($msg);
-				$messages[] = $msg;
-		}
-		return $messages;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Overrides parent implementation by rendering TValidationSummary-specific presentation.
-	 * @return string the rendering result
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		$this->renderJsSummary();
-		if($this->getShowSummary())
-		{
-//		    $this->setStyle('display:block');
-			switch($this->getDisplayMode())
-			{
-				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::SimpleList:
-					$this->renderList($writer);
-					break;
-				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::SingleParagraph:
-					$this->renderSingleParagraph($writer);
-					break;
-				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList:
-					$this->renderBulletList($writer);
-					break;
-				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::HeaderOnly:
-					$this->renderHeaderOnly($writer);
-					break;
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Render the validation summary as a simple list.
-	 * @param array list of messages
-	 * @param string the header text
-	 * @return string summary list
-	 */
-	protected function renderList($writer)
-	{
-		$header=$this->getHeaderText();
-		$messages=$this->getErrorMessages();
-		$content = '';
-		if(strlen($header))
-			$content.= $header."<br/>\n";
-		foreach($messages as $message)
-			$content.="$message<br/>\n";
-		$writer->write($content);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Render the validation summary as a paragraph.
-	 * @param array list of messages
-	 * @param string the header text
-	 * @return string summary paragraph
-	 */
-	protected function renderSingleParagraph($writer)
-	{
-		$header=$this->getHeaderText();
-		$messages=$this->getErrorMessages();
-		$content = $header;
-		foreach($messages as $message)
-			$content.= ' '.$message;
-		$writer->write($content);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Render the validation summary as a bullet list.
-	 * @param array list of messages
-	 * @param string the header text
-	 * @return string summary bullet list
-	 */
-	protected function renderBulletList($writer)
-	{
-		$header=$this->getHeaderText();
-		$messages=$this->getErrorMessages();
-		$content = $header;
-		if(count($messages)>0)
-		{
-			$content .= "<ul>\n";
-			foreach($messages as $message)
-				$content.= '<li>'.$message."</li>\n";
-			$content .= "</ul>\n";
-		}
-		$writer->write($content);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Render the validation summary header text only.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	protected function renderHeaderOnly($writer)
-	{
-		$writer->write($this->getHeaderText());
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions class.
- *
- * Client-side validation summary events such as {@link setOnHideSummary
- * OnHideSummary} and {@link setOnShowSummary OnShowSummary} can be modified
- * through the {@link TBaseValidator:: getClientSide ClientSide} property of a
- * validation summary.
- *
- * The <tt>OnHideSummary</tt> event is raise when the validation summary
- * requests to hide the messages.
- *
- * The <tt>OnShowSummary</tt> event is raised when the validation summary
- * requests to show the messages.
- *
- * See the quickstart documentation for further details.
- *
- * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions extends TClientSideOptions
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return string javascript code for client-side OnHideSummary event.
-	 */
-	public function getOnHideSummary()
-	{
-		return $this->getOption('OnHideSummary');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Client-side OnHideSummary validation summary event is raise when all the
-	 * validators are valid. This will override the default client-side
-	 * validation summary behaviour.
-	 * @param string javascript code for client-side OnHideSummary event.
-	 */
-	public function setOnHideSummary($javascript)
-	{
-		$this->setFunction('OnHideSummary', $javascript);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Client-side OnShowSummary event is raise when one or more validators are
-	 * not valid. This will override the default client-side validation summary
-	 * behaviour.
-	 * @param string javascript code for client-side OnShowSummary event.
-	 */
-	public function setOnShowSummary($javascript)
-	{
-		$this->setFunction('OnShowSummary', $javascript);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string javascript code for client-side OnShowSummary event.
-	 */
-	public function getOnShowSummary()
-	{
-		return $this->getOption('OnShowSummary');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Ensure the string is a valid javascript function. The code block
-	 * is enclosed with "function(summary, validators){ }" block.
-	 * @param string javascript code.
-	 * @return string javascript function code.
-	 */
-	protected function ensureFunction($javascript)
-	{
-		return "function(summary, validators){ {$javascript} }";
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TValidationSummaryDisplayMode class.
- * TValidationSummaryDisplayMode defines the enumerable type for the possible modes
- * that a {@link TValidationSummary} can organize and display the collected error messages.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - SimpleList: the error messages are displayed as a list without any decorations.
- * - SingleParagraph: the error messages are concatenated together into a paragraph.
- * - BulletList: the error messages are displayed as a bulleted list.
- * - HeaderOnly: only the HeaderText will be display.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TValidationSummaryDisplayMode extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const SimpleList='SimpleList';
-	const SingleParagraph='SingleParagraph';
-	const BulletList='BulletList';
-	const HeaderOnly='HeaderOnly';
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TValidationSummaryDisplay class.
- * TValidationSummaryDisplay defines the enumerable type for the possible styles
- * that a {@link TValidationSummary} can display the collected error messages.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - None: the error messages are not displayed
- * - Dynamic: the error messages are dynamically added to display as the corresponding validators fail
- * - Fixed: Similar to Dynamic except that the error messages physically occupy the page layout (even though they may not be visible)
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const None='None';
-	const Dynamic='Dynamic';
-	const Fixed='Fixed';
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * TValidationSummary class file
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TValidationSummary class
+ *
+ * TValidationSummary displays a summary of validation errors inline on a Web page,
+ * in a message box, or both. By default, a validation summary will collect
+ * {@link TBaseValidator::getErrorMessage ErrorMessage} of all failed validators
+ * on the page. If {@link getValidationGroup ValidationGroup} is not
+ * empty, only those validators who belong to the group will show their error messages
+ * in the summary.
+ *
+ * The summary can be displayed as a list, as a bulleted list, or as a single
+ * paragraph based on the {@link setDisplayMode DisplayMode} property.
+ * The messages shown can be prefixed with {@link setHeaderText HeaderText}.
+ *
+ * The summary can be displayed on the Web page and in a message box by setting
+ * the {@link setShowSummary ShowSummary} and {@link setShowMessageBox ShowMessageBox}
+ * properties, respectively. Note, the latter is only effective when
+ * {@link setEnableClientScript EnableClientScript} is true.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TValidationSummary extends TWebControl
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions validation client side options.
+	 */
+	private $_clientSide;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * This method sets the foreground color to red.
+	 */
+	public function __construct()
+	{
+		parent::__construct();
+		$this->setForeColor('red');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle the style of displaying the error messages. Defaults to TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Fixed.
+	 */
+	public function getDisplay()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Display',TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Fixed);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle the style of displaying the error messages
+	 */
+	public function setDisplay($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Display',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle'),TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Fixed);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the header text displayed at the top of the summary
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HeaderText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the header text to be displayed at the top of the summary
+	 * @param string the header text
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HeaderText',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TValidationSummaryDisplayMode the mode of displaying error messages. Defaults to TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList.
+	 */
+	public function getDisplayMode()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('DisplayMode',TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TValidationSummaryDisplayMode the mode of displaying error messages
+	 */
+	public function setDisplayMode($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('DisplayMode',TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TValidationSummaryDisplayMode'),TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the TValidationSummary component updates itself using client-side script. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getEnableClientScript()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('EnableClientScript',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the TValidationSummary component updates itself using client-side script.
+	 */
+	public function setEnableClientScript($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('EnableClientScript',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation summary is displayed in a message box. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getShowMessageBox()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowMessageBox',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the validation summary is displayed in a message box.
+	 */
+	public function setShowMessageBox($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowMessageBox',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation summary is displayed inline. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getShowSummary()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowSummary',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the validation summary is displayed inline.
+	 */
+	public function setShowSummary($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowSummary',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether scroll summary into viewport or not. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getScrollToSummary()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ScrollToSummary',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether scroll summary into viewport or not.
+	 */
+	public function setScrollToSummary($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ScrollToSummary',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether the validation summary should be anchored. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getShowAnchor()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowAnchor',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether the validation summary should be anchored.
+	 */
+	public function setShowAnchor($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowAnchor',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Gets the auto-update for this summary.
+	 * @return boolean automatic client-side summary updates. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getAutoUpdate()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AutoUpdate', true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the summary to auto-update on the client-side
+	 * @param boolean true for automatic summary updates.
+	 */
+	public function setAutoUpdate($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AutoUpdate', TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value), true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the group which this validator belongs to
+	 */
+	public function getValidationGroup()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ValidationGroup','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the group which this validator belongs to
+	 */
+	public function setValidationGroup($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ValidationGroup',$value,'');
+	}
+
+	protected function addAttributesToRender($writer)
+	{
+		$display=$this->getDisplay();
+		$visible=$this->getEnabled(true) && count($this->getErrorMessages()) > 0;
+		if(!$visible)
+		{
+			if($display===TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::None || $display===TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle::Dynamic)
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('display','none');
+			else
+				$writer->addStyleAttribute('visibility','hidden');
+		}
+		$writer->addAttribute('id',$this->getClientID());
+		parent::addAttributesToRender($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Render the javascript for validation summary.
+	 * @param array list of options for validation summary.
+	 */
+	protected function renderJsSummary()
+	{
+		if(!$this->getEnabled(true) || !$this->getEnableClientScript())
+			return;
+		$cs = $this->getPage()->getClientScript();
+		$cs->registerPradoScript('validator');
+
+		//need to register the validation manager is validation summary is alone.
+		$formID=$this->getPage()->getForm()->getClientID();
+		$scriptKey = "TBaseValidator:$formID";
+		if($this->getEnableClientScript() && !$cs->isEndScriptRegistered($scriptKey))
+		{
+			$manager['FormID'] = $formID;
+			$options = TJavaScript::encode($manager);
+			$cs->registerPradoScript('validator');
+			$cs->registerEndScript($scriptKey, "new Prado.ValidationManager({$options});");
+		}
+
+
+		$options=TJavaScript::encode($this->getClientScriptOptions());
+		$script = "new Prado.WebUI.TValidationSummary({$options});";
+		$cs->registerEndScript($this->getClientID(), $script);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Get a list of options for the client-side javascript validation summary.
+	 * @return array list of options for the summary
+	 */
+	protected function getClientScriptOptions()
+	{
+		$options['ID'] = $this->getClientID();
+		$options['FormID'] = $this->getPage()->getForm()->getClientID();
+		if($this->getShowMessageBox())
+			$options['ShowMessageBox']=true;
+		if(!$this->getShowSummary())
+			$options['ShowSummary']=false;
+
+		$options['ScrollToSummary']=$this->getScrollToSummary();
+		$options['HeaderText']=$this->getHeaderText();
+		$options['DisplayMode']=$this->getDisplayMode();
+
+		$options['Refresh'] = $this->getAutoUpdate();
+		$options['ValidationGroup'] =  $this->getValidationGroup();
+		$options['Display'] = $this->getDisplay();
+
+		if($this->_clientSide!==null)
+			$options = array_merge($options,$this->_clientSide->getOptions()->toArray());
+
+		return $options;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions client-side validation summary
+	 * event options.
+	 */
+	public function getClientSide()
+	{
+		if($this->_clientSide===null)
+			$this->_clientSide = $this->createClientScript();
+		return $this->_clientSide;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions javascript validation summary
+	 * event options.
+	 */
+	protected function createClientScript()
+	{
+		return new TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions;
+	}
+	/**
+	 * Get the list of validation error messages.
+	 * @return array list of validator error messages.
+	 */
+	protected function getErrorMessages()
+	{
+		$validators=$this->getPage()->getValidators($this->getValidationGroup());
+		$messages = array();
+		foreach($validators as $validator)
+		{
+			if(!$validator->getIsValid() && ($msg=$validator->getErrorMessage())!=='')
+				//$messages[] = $validator->getAnchoredMessage($msg);
+				$messages[] = $msg;
+		}
+		return $messages;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Overrides parent implementation by rendering TValidationSummary-specific presentation.
+	 * @return string the rendering result
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		$this->renderJsSummary();
+		if($this->getShowSummary())
+		{
+//		    $this->setStyle('display:block');
+			switch($this->getDisplayMode())
+			{
+				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::SimpleList:
+					$this->renderList($writer);
+					break;
+				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::SingleParagraph:
+					$this->renderSingleParagraph($writer);
+					break;
+				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::BulletList:
+					$this->renderBulletList($writer);
+					break;
+				case TValidationSummaryDisplayMode::HeaderOnly:
+					$this->renderHeaderOnly($writer);
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Render the validation summary as a simple list.
+	 * @param array list of messages
+	 * @param string the header text
+	 * @return string summary list
+	 */
+	protected function renderList($writer)
+	{
+		$header=$this->getHeaderText();
+		$messages=$this->getErrorMessages();
+		$content = '';
+		if(strlen($header))
+			$content.= $header."<br/>\n";
+		foreach($messages as $message)
+			$content.="$message<br/>\n";
+		$writer->write($content);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Render the validation summary as a paragraph.
+	 * @param array list of messages
+	 * @param string the header text
+	 * @return string summary paragraph
+	 */
+	protected function renderSingleParagraph($writer)
+	{
+		$header=$this->getHeaderText();
+		$messages=$this->getErrorMessages();
+		$content = $header;
+		foreach($messages as $message)
+			$content.= ' '.$message;
+		$writer->write($content);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Render the validation summary as a bullet list.
+	 * @param array list of messages
+	 * @param string the header text
+	 * @return string summary bullet list
+	 */
+	protected function renderBulletList($writer)
+	{
+		$header=$this->getHeaderText();
+		$messages=$this->getErrorMessages();
+		$content = $header;
+		if(count($messages)>0)
+		{
+			$content .= "<ul>\n";
+			foreach($messages as $message)
+				$content.= '<li>'.$message."</li>\n";
+			$content .= "</ul>\n";
+		}
+		$writer->write($content);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Render the validation summary header text only.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter the writer used for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	protected function renderHeaderOnly($writer)
+	{
+		$writer->write($this->getHeaderText());
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions class.
+ *
+ * Client-side validation summary events such as {@link setOnHideSummary
+ * OnHideSummary} and {@link setOnShowSummary OnShowSummary} can be modified
+ * through the {@link TBaseValidator:: getClientSide ClientSide} property of a
+ * validation summary.
+ *
+ * The <tt>OnHideSummary</tt> event is raise when the validation summary
+ * requests to hide the messages.
+ *
+ * The <tt>OnShowSummary</tt> event is raised when the validation summary
+ * requests to show the messages.
+ *
+ * See the quickstart documentation for further details.
+ *
+ * @author Wei Zhuo <weizhuo[at]gmail[dot]com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TClientSideValidationSummaryOptions extends TClientSideOptions
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return string javascript code for client-side OnHideSummary event.
+	 */
+	public function getOnHideSummary()
+	{
+		return $this->getOption('OnHideSummary');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Client-side OnHideSummary validation summary event is raise when all the
+	 * validators are valid. This will override the default client-side
+	 * validation summary behaviour.
+	 * @param string javascript code for client-side OnHideSummary event.
+	 */
+	public function setOnHideSummary($javascript)
+	{
+		$this->setFunction('OnHideSummary', $javascript);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Client-side OnShowSummary event is raise when one or more validators are
+	 * not valid. This will override the default client-side validation summary
+	 * behaviour.
+	 * @param string javascript code for client-side OnShowSummary event.
+	 */
+	public function setOnShowSummary($javascript)
+	{
+		$this->setFunction('OnShowSummary', $javascript);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string javascript code for client-side OnShowSummary event.
+	 */
+	public function getOnShowSummary()
+	{
+		return $this->getOption('OnShowSummary');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Ensure the string is a valid javascript function. The code block
+	 * is enclosed with "function(summary, validators){ }" block.
+	 * @param string javascript code.
+	 * @return string javascript function code.
+	 */
+	protected function ensureFunction($javascript)
+	{
+		return "function(summary, validators){ {$javascript} }";
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TValidationSummaryDisplayMode class.
+ * TValidationSummaryDisplayMode defines the enumerable type for the possible modes
+ * that a {@link TValidationSummary} can organize and display the collected error messages.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - SimpleList: the error messages are displayed as a list without any decorations.
+ * - SingleParagraph: the error messages are concatenated together into a paragraph.
+ * - BulletList: the error messages are displayed as a bulleted list.
+ * - HeaderOnly: only the HeaderText will be display.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TValidationSummaryDisplayMode extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const SimpleList='SimpleList';
+	const SingleParagraph='SingleParagraph';
+	const BulletList='BulletList';
+	const HeaderOnly='HeaderOnly';
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TValidationSummaryDisplay class.
+ * TValidationSummaryDisplay defines the enumerable type for the possible styles
+ * that a {@link TValidationSummary} can display the collected error messages.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - None: the error messages are not displayed
+ * - Dynamic: the error messages are dynamically added to display as the corresponding validators fail
+ * - Fixed: Similar to Dynamic except that the error messages physically occupy the page layout (even though they may not be visible)
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TValidationSummaryDisplayStyle extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const None='None';
+	const Dynamic='Dynamic';
+	const Fixed='Fixed';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWebControlAdapter.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWebControlAdapter.php
index 68fecf1c..ad1e1642 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWebControlAdapter.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWebControlAdapter.php
@@ -1,71 +1,71 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TWebControlAdapter class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TWebControlAdapter class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * TWebControlAdapter class
- *
- * TWebControlAdapter is the base class for adapters that customize
- * rendering for the Web control to which the adapter is attached.
- * It may be used to modify the default markup or behavior for specific
- * browsers.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWebControlAdapter extends TControlAdapter
-{
-	/**
-	 * Renders the control to which the adapter is attached.
-	 * It calls {@link renderBeginTag}, {@link renderContents} and
-	 * {@link renderEndTag} in order.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
-		$this->renderContents($writer);
-		$this->renderEndTag($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the openning tag for the attached control.
-	 * Default implementation calls the attached control's corresponding method.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
-	{
-		$this->getControl()->renderBeginTag($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the body contents within the attached control tag.
-	 * Default implementation calls the attached control's corresponding method.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderContents($writer)
-	{
-		$this->getControl()->renderContents($writer);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the closing tag for the attached control.
-	 * Default implementation calls the attached control's corresponding method.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
-	 */
-	public function renderEndTag($writer)
-	{
-		$this->getControl()->renderEndTag($writer);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * TWebControlAdapter class
+ *
+ * TWebControlAdapter is the base class for adapters that customize
+ * rendering for the Web control to which the adapter is attached.
+ * It may be used to modify the default markup or behavior for specific
+ * browsers.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWebControlAdapter extends TControlAdapter
+{
+	/**
+	 * Renders the control to which the adapter is attached.
+	 * It calls {@link renderBeginTag}, {@link renderContents} and
+	 * {@link renderEndTag} in order.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
+		$this->renderContents($writer);
+		$this->renderEndTag($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the openning tag for the attached control.
+	 * Default implementation calls the attached control's corresponding method.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderBeginTag($writer)
+	{
+		$this->getControl()->renderBeginTag($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the body contents within the attached control tag.
+	 * Default implementation calls the attached control's corresponding method.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderContents($writer)
+	{
+		$this->getControl()->renderContents($writer);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the closing tag for the attached control.
+	 * Default implementation calls the attached control's corresponding method.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter writer for the rendering purpose
+	 */
+	public function renderEndTag($writer)
+	{
+		$this->getControl()->renderEndTag($writer);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizard.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizard.php
index 25d3a41b..b497d719 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizard.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizard.php
@@ -1,1402 +1,1402 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TWizard and the relevant class definitions.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TWizard and the relevant class definitions.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TMultiView');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TPanel');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TButton');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataList');
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TWizardNavigationButtonStyle');
-
-/**
- * Class TWizard.
- *
- * TWizard splits a large form and presents the user with a series of smaller
- * forms to complete. TWizard is analogous to the installation wizard commonly
- * used to install software in Windows.
- *
- * The smaller forms are called wizard steps ({@link TWizardStep}, which can be accessed via
- * {@link getWizardSteps WizardSteps}. In template, wizard steps can be added
- * into a wizard using the following syntax,
- * <code>
- *   <com:TWizard>
- *      <com:TWizardStep Title="step 1">
- *          content in step 1, may contain other controls
- *      </com:TWizardStep>
- *      <com:TWizardStep Title="step 2">
- *          content in step 2, may contain other controls
- *      </com:TWizardStep>
- *   </com:TWizard>
- * </code>
- *
- * Each wizard step can be one of the following types:
- * - Start : the first step in the wizard.
- * - Step : the internal steps in the wizard.
- * - Finish : the last step that allows user interaction.
- * - Complete : the step that shows a summary to user (no interaction is allowed).
- * - Auto : the step type is determined by wizard automatically.
- * At any time, only one step is visible to end-users, which can be obtained
- * by {@link getActiveStep ActiveStep}. Its index in the step collection is given by
- * {@link getActiveStepIndex ActiveStepIndex}.
- *
- * Wizard content can be customized in many ways.
- *
- * The layout of a wizard consists of four parts: header, step content, navigation
- * and side bar. Their content are affected by the following properties, respectively,
- * - header: {@link setHeaderText HeaderText} and {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}.
- *   If both are present, the latter takes precedence.
- * - step: {@link getWizardSteps WizardSteps}.
- * - navigation: {@link setStartNavigationTemplate StartNavigationTemplate},
- *   {@link setStepNavigationTemplate StepNavigationTemplate},
- *   {@link setFinishNavigationTemplate FinishNavigationTemplate}.
- *   Default templates will be used if above templates are not set.
- * - side bar: {@link setSideBarTemplate SideBarTemplate}.
- *   A default template will be used if this template is not set.
- *   Its visibility is toggled by {@link setShowSideBar ShowSideBar}.
- *
- * The style of these wizard layout components can be customized via the following style properties,
- * - header: {@link getHeaderStyle HeaderStyle}.
- * - step: {@link getStepStyle StepStyle}.
- * - navigation: {@link getNavigationStyle NavigationStyle},
- *   {@link getStartNextButtonStyle StartNextButtonStyle},
- *   {@link getStepNextButtonStyle StepNextButtonStyle},
- *   {@link getStepPreviousButtonStyle StepPreviousButtonStyle},
- *   {@link getFinishPreviousButtonStyle FinishPreviousButtonStyle},
- *   {@link getFinishCompleteButtonStyle FinishCompleteButtonStyle},
- *   {@link getCancelButtonStyle CancelButtonStyle}.
- * - side bar: {@link getSideBarStyle SideBarStyle} and {@link getSideBarButtonStyle SideBarButtonStyle}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizard extends TWebControl implements INamingContainer
-{
-	/**
-	 * Wizard step types.
-	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.0.4 (use TWizardStepType constants instead)
-	 */
-	const ST_AUTO='Auto';
-	const ST_START='Start';
-	const ST_STEP='Step';
-	const ST_FINISH='Finish';
-	const ST_COMPLETE='Complete';
-	/**
-	 * Navigation commands.
-	 */
-	const CMD_PREVIOUS='PreviousStep';
-	const CMD_NEXT='NextStep';
-	const CMD_CANCEL='Cancel';
-	const CMD_COMPLETE='Complete';
-	const CMD_MOVETO='MoveTo';
-	/**
-	 * Side bar button ID
-	 */
-	const ID_SIDEBAR_BUTTON='SideBarButton';
-	/**
-	 * Side bar data list
-	 */
-	const ID_SIDEBAR_LIST='SideBarList';
-
-	/**
-	 * @var TMultiView multiview that contains the wizard steps
-	 */
-	private $_multiView=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed navigation template for the start step.
-	 */
-	private $_startNavigationTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed navigation template for internal steps.
-	 */
-	private $_stepNavigationTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed navigation template for the finish step.
-	 */
-	private $_finishNavigationTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed template for wizard header.
-	 */
-	private $_headerTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var mixed template for the side bar.
-	 */
-	private $_sideBarTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TWizardStepCollection
-	 */
-	private $_wizardSteps=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TPanel container of the wizard header
-	 */
-	private $_header;
-	/**
-	 * @var TPanel container of the wizard step content
-	 */
-	private $_stepContent;
-	/**
-	 * @var TPanel container of the wizard side bar
-	 */
-	private $_sideBar;
-	/**
-	 * @var TPanel navigation panel
-	 */
-	private $_navigation;
-	/**
-	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer container of the start navigation
-	 */
-	private $_startNavigation;
-	/**
-	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer container of the step navigation
-	 */
-	private $_stepNavigation;
-	/**
-	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer container of the finish navigation
-	 */
-	private $_finishNavigation;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether ActiveStepIndex was already set
-	 */
-	private $_activeStepIndexSet=false;
-	/**
-	 * @var TDataList side bar data list.
-	 */
-	private $_sideBarDataList;
-	/**
-	 * @var boolean whether navigation should be cancelled (a status set in OnSideBarButtonClick)
-	 */
-	private $_cancelNavigation=false;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string tag name for the wizard
-	 */
-	protected function getTagName()
-	{
-		return 'div';
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds {@link TWizardStep} objects into step collection.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is
-	 * invoked when template is being instantiated.
-	 * @param mixed object instantiated in template
-	 */
-	public function addParsedObject($object)
-	{
-		if($object instanceof TWizardStep)
-			$this->getWizardSteps()->add($object);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardStep the currently active wizard step
-	 */
-	public function getActiveStep()
-	{
-		return $this->getMultiView()->getActiveView();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TWizardStep step to be activated
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if the step is not in the wizard step collection
-	 */
-	public function setActiveStep($step)
-	{
-		if(($index=$this->getWizardSteps()->indexOf($step))<0)
-			throw new TInvalidOperationException('wizard_step_invalid');
-		$this->setActiveStepIndex($index);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the active wizard step
-	 */
-	public function getActiveStepIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->getMultiView()->getActiveViewIndex();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the wizard step to be activated
-	 */
-	public function setActiveStepIndex($value)
-	{
-		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
-		$multiView=$this->getMultiView();
-		if($multiView->getActiveViewIndex()!==$value)
-		{
-			$multiView->setActiveViewIndex($value);
-			$this->_activeStepIndexSet=true;
-			if($this->_sideBarDataList!==null && $this->getSideBarTemplate()!==null)
-			{
-				$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
-				$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardStepCollection collection of wizard steps
-	 */
-	public function getWizardSteps()
-	{
-		if($this->_wizardSteps===null)
-			$this->_wizardSteps=new TWizardStepCollection($this);
-		return $this->_wizardSteps;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to display a cancel button in each wizard step. Defaults to false.
-	 */
-	public function getShowCancelButton()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowCancelButton',false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to display a cancel button in each wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function setShowCancelButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowCancelButton',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to display a side bar that contains links to wizard steps. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getShowSideBar()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('ShowSideBar',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to display a side bar that contains links to wizard steps.
-	 */
-	public function setShowSideBar($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('ShowSideBar',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate navigation template for the start step. Defaults to null.
-	 */
-	public function getStartNavigationTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_startNavigationTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate navigation template for the start step.
-	 */
-	public function setStartNavigationTemplate($value)
-	{
-		$this->_startNavigationTemplate=$value;
-		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate navigation template for internal steps. Defaults to null.
-	 */
-	public function getStepNavigationTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_stepNavigationTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate navigation template for internal steps.
-	 */
-	public function setStepNavigationTemplate($value)
-	{
-		$this->_stepNavigationTemplate=$value;
-		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate navigation template for the finish step. Defaults to null.
-	 */
-	public function getFinishNavigationTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_finishNavigationTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate navigation template for the finish step.
-	 */
-	public function setFinishNavigationTemplate($value)
-	{
-		$this->_finishNavigationTemplate=$value;
-		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate template for wizard header. Defaults to null.
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_headerTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate template for wizard header.
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
-	{
-		$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
-		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate template for the side bar. Defaults to null.
-	 */
-	public function getSideBarTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_sideBarTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate template for the side bar.
-	 */
-	public function setSideBarTemplate($value)
-	{
-		$this->_sideBarTemplate=$value;
-		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string header text. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderText()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('HeaderText','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string header text.
-	 */
-	public function setHeaderText($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('HeaderText',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the cancel button in the
-	 * wizard is clicked. Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getCancelDestinationUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('CancelDestinationUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the cancel button in the
-	 * wizard is clicked.
-	 */
-	public function setCancelDestinationUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('CancelDestinationUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the wizard finishes.
-	 * Defaults to ''.
-	 */
-	public function getFinishDestinationUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('FinishDestinationUrl','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the wizard finishes.
-	 */
-	public function setFinishDestinationUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('FinishDestinationUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style for the buttons displayed in the side bar.
-	 */
-	public function getSideBarButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('SideBarButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStyle the style common for all navigation buttons.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigationButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('NavigationButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('NavigationButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the next button in the start wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function getStartNextButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StartNextButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
-			$style->setButtonText('Next');
-			$this->setViewState('StartNextButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the next button in each internal wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function getStepNextButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepNextButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
-			$style->setButtonText('Next');
-			$this->setViewState('StepNextButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the previous button in the start wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function getStepPreviousButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepPreviousButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
-			$style->setButtonText('Previous');
-			$this->setViewState('StepPreviousButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the complete button in the finish wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function getFinishCompleteButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FinishCompleteButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
-			$style->setButtonText('Complete');
-			$this->setViewState('FinishCompleteButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the previous button in the start wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function getFinishPreviousButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FinishPreviousButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
-			$style->setButtonText('Previous');
-			$this->setViewState('FinishPreviousButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the cancel button
-	 */
-	public function getCancelButtonStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('CancelButtonStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
-			$style->setButtonText('Cancel');
-			$this->setViewState('CancelButtonStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for the side bar.
-	 */
-	public function getSideBarStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TPanelStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('SideBarStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for the header.
-	 */
-	public function getHeaderStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TPanelStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for each internal wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function getStepStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TPanelStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('StepStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for the navigation panel.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigationStyle()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('NavigationStyle',null))===null)
-		{
-			$style=new TPanelStyle;
-			$this->setViewState('NavigationStyle',$style,null);
-		}
-		return $style;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether to use default layout to arrange side bar and the rest wizard components. Defaults to true.
-	 */
-	public function getUseDefaultLayout()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('UseDefaultLayout',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether to use default layout to arrange side bar and the rest wizard components.
-	 * If true, an HTML table will be used which places the side bar in the left cell
-	 * while the rest components in the right cell.
-	 */
-	public function setUseDefaultLayout($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('UseDefaultLayout',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPanel container of the wizard header
-	 */
-	public function getHeader()
-	{
-		return $this->_header;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPanel container of the wizard step content
-	 */
-	public function getStepContent()
-	{
-		return $this->_stepContent;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TPanel container of the wizard side bar
-	 */
-	public function getSideBar()
-	{
-		return $this->_sideBar;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer container of the start navigation
-	 */
-	public function getStartNavigation()
-	{
-		return $this->_startNavigation;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer container of the step navigation
-	 */
-	public function getStepNavigation()
-	{
-		return $this->_stepNavigation;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer container of the finish navigation
-	 */
-	public function getFinishNavigation()
-	{
-		return $this->_finishNavigation;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnActiveStepChanged</b> event.
-	 * This event is raised when the current visible step is changed in the
-	 * wizard.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onActiveStepChanged($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnActiveStepChanged',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnCancelButtonClick</b> event.
-	 * This event is raised when a cancel navigation button is clicked in the
-	 * current active step.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onCancelButtonClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCancelButtonClick',$this,$param);
-		if(($url=$this->getCancelDestinationUrl())!=='')
-			$this->getResponse()->redirect($url);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnCompleteButtonClick</b> event.
-	 * This event is raised when a finish navigation button is clicked in the
-	 * current active step.
-	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onCompleteButtonClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnCompleteButtonClick',$this,$param);
-		if(($url=$this->getFinishDestinationUrl())!=='')
-			$this->getResponse()->redirect($url);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnNextButtonClick</b> event.
-	 * This event is raised when a next navigation button is clicked in the
-	 * current active step.
-	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onNextButtonClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnNextButtonClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnPreviousButtonClick</b> event.
-	 * This event is raised when a previous navigation button is clicked in the
-	 * current active step.
-	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onPreviousButtonClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnPreviousButtonClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Raises <b>OnSideBarButtonClick</b> event.
-	 * This event is raised when a link button in the side bar is clicked.
-	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onSideBarButtonClick($param)
-	{
-		$this->raiseEvent('OnSideBarButtonClick',$this,$param);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Returns the multiview that holds the wizard steps.
-	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
-	 * @return TMultiView the multiview holding wizard steps
-	 */
-	public function getMultiView()
-	{
-		if($this->_multiView===null)
-		{
-			$this->_multiView=new TMultiView;
-			$this->_multiView->setID('WizardMultiView');
-			$this->_multiView->attachEventHandler('OnActiveViewChanged',array($this,'onActiveStepChanged'));
-			$this->_multiView->ignoreBubbleEvents();
-		}
-		return $this->_multiView;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Adds a wizard step to the multiview.
-	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
-	 * It is invoked when a step is added into the step collection of the wizard.
-	 * @param TWizardStep wizard step to be added into multiview.
-	 */
-	public function addedWizardStep($step)
-	{
-		if(($wizard=$step->getWizard())!==null)
-			$wizard->getWizardSteps()->remove($step);
-		$step->setWizard($this);
-		$this->wizardStepsChanged();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Removes a wizard step from the multiview.
-	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
-	 * It is invoked when a step is removed from the step collection of the wizard.
-	 * @param TWizardStep wizard step to be removed from multiview.
-	 */
-	public function removedWizardStep($step)
-	{
-		$step->setWizard(null);
-		$this->wizardStepsChanged();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates the child controls of the wizard.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onInit($param)
-	{
-		parent::onInit($param);
-		$this->ensureChildControls();
-		if($this->getActiveStepIndex()<0 && $this->getWizardSteps()->getCount()>0)
-			$this->setActiveStepIndex(0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Saves the current active step index into history.
-	 * This method is invoked by the framework when the control state is being saved.
-	 */
-	public function saveState()
-	{
-		$index=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
-		$history=$this->getHistory();
-		if(!$history->getCount() || $history->peek()!==$index)
-			$history->push($index);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Indicates the wizard needs to recreate all child controls.
-	 */
-	protected function requiresControlsRecreation()
-	{
-		if($this->getChildControlsCreated())
-			$this->setChildControlsCreated(false);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Renders the wizard.
-	 * @param THtmlWriter
-	 */
-	public function render($writer)
-	{
-		$this->ensureChildControls();
-		if($this->getHasControls())
-		{
-			if($this->getUseDefaultLayout())
-			{
-				$this->applyControlProperties();
-				$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
-				$writer->write("\n<table border=\"0\" cellpadding=\"0\" cellspacing=\"0\" height=\"100%\" width=\"100%\">\n<tr><td width=\"1\" valign=\"top\">\n");
-				$this->_sideBar->renderControl($writer);
-				$writer->write("\n</td><td valign=\"top\">\n");
-				$this->_header->renderControl($writer);
-				$this->_stepContent->renderControl($writer);
-				$this->_navigation->renderControl($writer);
-				$writer->write("\n</td></tr></table>\n");
-				$this->renderEndTag($writer);
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$this->applyControlProperties();
-				$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
-				$this->_sideBar->renderControl($writer);
-				$this->_header->renderControl($writer);
-				$this->_stepContent->renderControl($writer);
-				$this->_navigation->renderControl($writer);
-				$this->renderEndTag($writer);
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Applies various properties to the components of wizard
-	 */
-	protected function applyControlProperties()
-	{
-		$this->applyHeaderProperties();
-		$this->applySideBarProperties();
-		$this->applyStepContentProperties();
-		$this->applyNavigationProperties();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Applies properties to the wizard header
-	 */
-	protected function applyHeaderProperties()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))!==null)
-			$this->_header->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
-		if($this->getHeaderTemplate()===null)
-		{
-			$this->_header->getControls()->clear();
-			$this->_header->getControls()->add($this->getHeaderText());
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Applies properties to the wizard sidebar
-	 */
-	protected function applySideBarProperties()
-	{
-		$this->_sideBar->setVisible($this->getShowSideBar());
-		if($this->_sideBarDataList!==null && $this->getShowSideBar())
-		{
-			$this->_sideBarDataList->setDataSource($this->getWizardSteps());
-			$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
-			$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
-			if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarButtonStyle',null))!==null)
-			{
-				foreach($this->_sideBarDataList->getItems() as $item)
-				{
-					if(($button=$item->findControl('SideBarButton'))!==null)
-						$button->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
-				}
-			}
-		}
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarStyle',null))!==null)
-			$this->_sideBar->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Applies properties to the wizard step content
-	 */
-	protected function applyStepContentProperties()
-	{
-		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepStyle',null))!==null)
-			$this->_stepContent->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Apply properties to various navigation panels.
-	 */
-	protected function applyNavigationProperties()
-	{
-		$wizardSteps=$this->getWizardSteps();
-		$activeStep=$this->getActiveStep();
-		$activeStepIndex=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
-
-		if(!$this->_navigation)
-			return;
-		else if($activeStepIndex<0 || $activeStepIndex>=$wizardSteps->getCount())
-		{
-			$this->_navigation->setVisible(false);
-			return;
-		}
-
-		// set visibility of different types of navigation panel
-		$showStandard=true;
-		foreach($wizardSteps as $step)
-		{
-			if(($step instanceof TTemplatedWizardStep) && ($container=$step->getNavigationContainer())!==null)
-			{
-				if($activeStep===$step)
-				{
-					$container->setVisible(true);
-					$showStandard=false;
-				}
-				else
-					$container->setVisible(false);
-			}
-		}
-		$activeStepType=$this->getStepType($activeStep);
-		if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Complete)
-		{
-			$this->_sideBar->setVisible(false);
-			$this->_header->setVisible(false);
-		}
-		$this->_startNavigation->setVisible($showStandard && $activeStepType===self::ST_START);
-		$this->_stepNavigation->setVisible($showStandard && $activeStepType===self::ST_STEP);
-		$this->_finishNavigation->setVisible($showStandard && $activeStepType===self::ST_FINISH);
-
-		if(($navigationStyle=$this->getViewState('NavigationStyle',null))!==null)
-			$this->_navigation->getStyle()->mergeWith($navigationStyle);
-
-		$displayCancelButton=$this->getShowCancelButton();
-		$cancelButtonStyle=$this->getCancelButtonStyle();
-		$buttonStyle=$this->getViewState('NavigationButtonStyle',null);
-		if($buttonStyle!==null)
-			$cancelButtonStyle->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
-
-		// apply styles to start navigation buttons
-		if(($cancelButton=$this->_startNavigation->getCancelButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$cancelButton->setVisible($displayCancelButton);
-			$cancelButtonStyle->apply($cancelButton);
-		}
-		if(($button=$this->_startNavigation->getNextButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$button->setVisible(true);
-			$style=$this->getStartNextButtonStyle();
-			if($buttonStyle!==null)
-				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
-			$style->apply($button);
-			if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Start)
-				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
-		}
-
-		// apply styles to finish navigation buttons
-		if(($cancelButton=$this->_finishNavigation->getCancelButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$cancelButton->setVisible($displayCancelButton);
-			$cancelButtonStyle->apply($cancelButton);
-		}
-		if(($button=$this->_finishNavigation->getPreviousButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$button->setVisible($this->allowNavigationToPreviousStep());
-			$style=$this->getFinishPreviousButtonStyle();
-			if($buttonStyle!==null)
-				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
-			$style->apply($button);
-		}
-		if(($button=$this->_finishNavigation->getCompleteButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$button->setVisible(true);
-			$style=$this->getFinishCompleteButtonStyle();
-			if($buttonStyle!==null)
-				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
-			$style->apply($button);
-			if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Finish)
-				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
-		}
-
-		// apply styles to step navigation buttons
-		if(($cancelButton=$this->_stepNavigation->getCancelButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$cancelButton->setVisible($displayCancelButton);
-			$cancelButtonStyle->apply($cancelButton);
-		}
-		if(($button=$this->_stepNavigation->getPreviousButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$button->setVisible($this->allowNavigationToPreviousStep());
-			$style=$this->getStepPreviousButtonStyle();
-			if($buttonStyle!==null)
-				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
-			$style->apply($button);
-		}
-		if(($button=$this->_stepNavigation->getNextButton())!==null)
-		{
-			$button->setVisible(true);
-			$style=$this->getStepNextButtonStyle();
-			if($buttonStyle!==null)
-				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
-			$style->apply($button);
-			if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Step)
-				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TStack history containing step indexes that were navigated before
-	 */
-	protected function getHistory()
-	{
-		if(($history=$this->getControlState('History',null))===null)
-		{
-			$history=new TStack;
-			$this->setControlState('History',$history);
-		}
-		return $history;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Determines the type of the specified wizard step.
-	 * @param TWizardStep
-	 * @return TWizardStepType type of the step
-	 */
-	protected function getStepType($wizardStep)
-	{
-		if(($type=$wizardStep->getStepType())===TWizardStepType::Auto)
-		{
-			$steps=$this->getWizardSteps();
-			if(($index=$steps->indexOf($wizardStep))>=0)
-			{
-				$stepCount=$steps->getCount();
-				if($stepCount===1 || ($index<$stepCount-1 && $steps->itemAt($index+1)->getStepType()===TWizardStepType::Complete))
-					return TWizardStepType::Finish;
-				else if($index===0)
-					return TWizardStepType::Start;
-				else if($index===$stepCount-1)
-					return TWizardStepType::Finish;
-				else
-					return TWizardStepType::Step;
-			}
-			else
-				return $type;
-		}
-		else
-			return $type;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Clears up everything within the wizard.
-	 */
-	protected function reset()
-	{
-		$this->getControls()->clear();
-		$this->_header=null;
-		$this->_stepContent=null;
-		$this->_sideBar=null;
-		$this->_sideBarDataList=null;
-		$this->_navigation=null;
-		$this->_startNavigation=null;
-		$this->_stepNavigation=null;
-		$this->_finishNavigation=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates child controls within the wizard
-	 */
-	public function createChildControls()
-	{
-		$this->reset();
-		$this->createSideBar();
-		$this->createHeader();
-		$this->createStepContent();
-		$this->createNavigation();
-//		$this->clearChildState();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates the wizard header.
-	 */
-	protected function createHeader()
-	{
-		$this->_header=new TPanel;
-		if(($template=$this->getHeaderTemplate())!==null)
-			$template->instantiateIn($this->_header);
-		else
-			$this->_header->getControls()->add($this->getHeaderText());
-		$this->getControls()->add($this->_header);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates the wizard side bar
-	 */
-	protected function createSideBar()
-	{
-		if($this->getShowSideBar())
-		{
-			if(($template=$this->getSideBarTemplate())===null)
-				$template=new TWizardSideBarTemplate;
-			$this->_sideBar=new TPanel;
-			$template->instantiateIn($this->_sideBar);
-			$this->getControls()->add($this->_sideBar);
-
-			if(($this->_sideBarDataList=$this->_sideBar->findControl(self::ID_SIDEBAR_LIST))!==null)
-			{
-				$this->_sideBarDataList->attachEventHandler('OnItemCommand',array($this,'dataListItemCommand'));
-				$this->_sideBarDataList->attachEventHandler('OnItemDataBound',array($this,'dataListItemDataBound'));
-				$this->_sideBarDataList->setDataSource($this->getWizardSteps());
-				$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
-				$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
-			}
-		}
-		else
-		{
-			$this->_sideBar=new TPanel;
-			$this->getControls()->add($this->_sideBar);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Event handler for sidebar datalist's OnItemCommand event.
-	 * This method is used internally by wizard. It mainly
-	 * sets the active step index according to the button clicked in the sidebar.
-	 * @param mixed sender of the event
-	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter
-	 */
-	public function dataListItemCommand($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$param->getItem();
-		if($param->getCommandName()===self::CMD_MOVETO)
-		{
-			$stepIndex=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
-			$newStepIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param->getCommandParameter());
-			$navParam=new TWizardNavigationEventParameter($stepIndex);
-			$navParam->setNextStepIndex($newStepIndex);
-
-			// if the button clicked causes validation which fails,
-			// by default we will cancel navigation to the new step
-			$button=$param->getCommandSource();
-			if(($button instanceof IButtonControl) && $button->getCausesValidation() && ($page=$this->getPage())!==null && !$page->getIsValid())
-				$navParam->setCancelNavigation(true);
-
-			$this->_activeStepIndexSet=false;
-			$this->onSideBarButtonClick($navParam);
-			$this->_cancelNavigation=$navParam->getCancelNavigation();
-			if(!$this->_cancelNavigation)
-			{
-				if(!$this->_activeStepIndexSet && $this->allowNavigationToStep($newStepIndex))
-					$this->setActiveStepIndex($newStepIndex);
-			}
-			else
-				$this->setActiveStepIndex($stepIndex);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Event handler for sidebar datalist's OnItemDataBound event.
-	 * This method is used internally by wizard. It mainly configures
-	 * the buttons in the sidebar datalist.
-	 * @param mixed sender of the event
-	 * @param TDataListItemEventParameter
-	 */
-	public function dataListItemDataBound($sender,$param)
-	{
-		$item=$param->getItem();
-		$itemType=$item->getItemType();
-		if($itemType==='Item' || $itemType==='AlternatingItem' || $itemType==='SelectedItem' || $itemType==='EditItem')
-		{
-			if(($button=$item->findControl(self::ID_SIDEBAR_BUTTON))!==null)
-			{
-				$step=$item->getData();
-				if(($this->getStepType($step)===TWizardStepType::Complete))
-					$button->setEnabled(false);
-				if(($title=$step->getTitle())!=='')
-					$button->setText($title);
-				else
-					$button->setText($step->getID(false));
-				$index=$this->getWizardSteps()->indexOf($step);
-				$button->setCommandName(self::CMD_MOVETO);
-				$button->setCommandParameter("$index");
-			}
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates wizard step content.
-	 */
-	protected function createStepContent()
-	{
-		foreach($this->getWizardSteps() as $step)
-		{
-			if($step instanceof TTemplatedWizardStep)
-				$step->ensureChildControls();
-		}
-		$multiView=$this->getMultiView();
-		$this->_stepContent=new TPanel;
-		$this->_stepContent->getControls()->add($multiView);
-		$this->getControls()->add($this->_stepContent);
-		if($multiView->getViews()->getCount())
-			$multiView->setActiveViewIndex(0);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates navigation panel.
-	 */
-	protected function createNavigation()
-	{
-		$this->_navigation=new TPanel;
-		$this->getControls()->add($this->_navigation);
-		$controls=$this->_navigation->getControls();
-		foreach($this->getWizardSteps() as $step)
-		{
-			if($step instanceof TTemplatedWizardStep)
-			{
-				$step->instantiateNavigationTemplate();
-				if(($panel=$step->getNavigationContainer())!==null)
-					$controls->add($panel);
-			}
-		}
-		$this->_startNavigation=$this->createStartNavigation();
-		$controls->add($this->_startNavigation);
-		$this->_stepNavigation=$this->createStepNavigation();
-		$controls->add($this->_stepNavigation);
-		$this->_finishNavigation=$this->createFinishNavigation();
-		$controls->add($this->_finishNavigation);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates start navigation panel.
-	 */
-	protected function createStartNavigation()
-	{
-		if(($template=$this->getStartNavigationTemplate())===null)
-			$template=new TWizardStartNavigationTemplate($this);
-		$navigation=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
-		$template->instantiateIn($navigation);
-		return $navigation;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates step navigation panel.
-	 */
-	protected function createStepNavigation()
-	{
-		if(($template=$this->getStepNavigationTemplate())===null)
-			$template=new TWizardStepNavigationTemplate($this);
-		$navigation=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
-		$template->instantiateIn($navigation);
-		return $navigation;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates finish navigation panel.
-	 */
-	protected function createFinishNavigation()
-	{
-		if(($template=$this->getFinishNavigationTemplate())===null)
-			$template=new TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate($this);
-		$navigation=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
-		$template->instantiateIn($navigation);
-		return $navigation;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Updates the sidebar datalist if any.
-	 * This method is invoked when any wizard step is changed.
-	 */
-	public function wizardStepsChanged()
-	{
-		if($this->_sideBarDataList!==null)
-		{
-			$this->_sideBarDataList->setDataSource($this->getWizardSteps());
-			$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
-			$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Determines the index of the previous step based on history.
-	 * @param boolean whether the first item in the history stack should be popped
-	 * up after calling this method.
-	 */
-	protected function getPreviousStepIndex($popStack)
-	{
-		$history=$this->getHistory();
-		if($history->getCount()>=0)
-		{
-			$activeStepIndex=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
-			$previousStepIndex=-1;
-			if($popStack)
-			{
-				$previousStepIndex=$history->pop();
-				if($activeStepIndex===$previousStepIndex && $history->getCount()>0)
-					$previousStepIndex=$history->pop();
-			}
-			else
-			{
-				$previousStepIndex=$history->peek();
-				if($activeStepIndex===$previousStepIndex && $history->getCount()>1)
-				{
-					$saveIndex=$history->pop();
-					$previousStepIndex=$history->peek();
-					$history->push($saveIndex);
-				}
-			}
-			return $activeStepIndex===$previousStepIndex ? -1 : $previousStepIndex;
-		}
-		else
-			return -1;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether navigation to the previous step is allowed
-	 */
-	protected function allowNavigationToPreviousStep()
-	{
-		if(($index=$this->getPreviousStepIndex(false))!==-1)
-			return $this->getWizardSteps()->itemAt($index)->getAllowReturn();
-		else
-			return false;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer index of the step
-	 * @return boolean whether navigation to the specified step is allowed
-	 */
-	protected function allowNavigationToStep($index)
-	{
-		if($this->getHistory()->contains($index))
-			return $this->getWizardSteps()->itemAt($index)->getAllowReturn();
-		else
-			return true;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Handles bubbled events.
-	 * This method mainly translate certain command events into
-	 * wizard-specific events.
-	 * @param mixed sender of the original command event
-	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if a navigation command is associated with an invalid parameter
-	 */
-	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
-	{
-		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
-		{
-			$command=$param->getCommandName();
-			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_CANCEL)===0)
-			{
-				$this->onCancelButtonClick($param);
-				return true;
-			}
-
-			$type=$this->getStepType($this->getActiveStep());
-			$index=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
-			$navParam=new TWizardNavigationEventParameter($index);
-			if(($sender instanceof IButtonControl) && $sender->getCausesValidation() && ($page=$this->getPage())!==null && !$page->getIsValid())
-				$navParam->setCancelNavigation(true);
-
-			$handled=false;
-			$movePrev=false;
-			$this->_activeStepIndexSet=false;
-
-			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_NEXT)===0)
-			{
-				if($type!==self::ST_START && $type!==self::ST_STEP)
-					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_command_invalid',self::CMD_NEXT);
-				if($index<$this->getWizardSteps()->getCount()-1)
-					$navParam->setNextStepIndex($index+1);
-				$this->onNextButtonClick($navParam);
-				$handled=true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PREVIOUS)===0)
-			{
-				if($type!==self::ST_FINISH && $type!==self::ST_STEP)
-					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_command_invalid',self::CMD_PREVIOUS);
-				$movePrev=true;
-				if(($prevIndex=$this->getPreviousStepIndex(false))>=0)
-					$navParam->setNextStepIndex($prevIndex);
-				$this->onPreviousButtonClick($navParam);
-				$handled=true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_COMPLETE)===0)
-			{
-				if($type!==self::ST_FINISH)
-					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_command_invalid',self::CMD_COMPLETE);
-				if($index<$this->getWizardSteps()->getCount()-1)
-					$navParam->setNextStepIndex($index+1);
-				$this->onCompleteButtonClick($navParam);
-				$handled=true;
-			}
-			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_MOVETO)===0)
-			{
-				if($this->_cancelNavigation)  // may be set in onSideBarButtonClick
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TMultiView');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TPanel');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TButton');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TLinkButton');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TImageButton');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TDataList');
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TWizardNavigationButtonStyle');
+
+/**
+ * Class TWizard.
+ *
+ * TWizard splits a large form and presents the user with a series of smaller
+ * forms to complete. TWizard is analogous to the installation wizard commonly
+ * used to install software in Windows.
+ *
+ * The smaller forms are called wizard steps ({@link TWizardStep}, which can be accessed via
+ * {@link getWizardSteps WizardSteps}. In template, wizard steps can be added
+ * into a wizard using the following syntax,
+ * <code>
+ *   <com:TWizard>
+ *      <com:TWizardStep Title="step 1">
+ *          content in step 1, may contain other controls
+ *      </com:TWizardStep>
+ *      <com:TWizardStep Title="step 2">
+ *          content in step 2, may contain other controls
+ *      </com:TWizardStep>
+ *   </com:TWizard>
+ * </code>
+ *
+ * Each wizard step can be one of the following types:
+ * - Start : the first step in the wizard.
+ * - Step : the internal steps in the wizard.
+ * - Finish : the last step that allows user interaction.
+ * - Complete : the step that shows a summary to user (no interaction is allowed).
+ * - Auto : the step type is determined by wizard automatically.
+ * At any time, only one step is visible to end-users, which can be obtained
+ * by {@link getActiveStep ActiveStep}. Its index in the step collection is given by
+ * {@link getActiveStepIndex ActiveStepIndex}.
+ *
+ * Wizard content can be customized in many ways.
+ *
+ * The layout of a wizard consists of four parts: header, step content, navigation
+ * and side bar. Their content are affected by the following properties, respectively,
+ * - header: {@link setHeaderText HeaderText} and {@link setHeaderTemplate HeaderTemplate}.
+ *   If both are present, the latter takes precedence.
+ * - step: {@link getWizardSteps WizardSteps}.
+ * - navigation: {@link setStartNavigationTemplate StartNavigationTemplate},
+ *   {@link setStepNavigationTemplate StepNavigationTemplate},
+ *   {@link setFinishNavigationTemplate FinishNavigationTemplate}.
+ *   Default templates will be used if above templates are not set.
+ * - side bar: {@link setSideBarTemplate SideBarTemplate}.
+ *   A default template will be used if this template is not set.
+ *   Its visibility is toggled by {@link setShowSideBar ShowSideBar}.
+ *
+ * The style of these wizard layout components can be customized via the following style properties,
+ * - header: {@link getHeaderStyle HeaderStyle}.
+ * - step: {@link getStepStyle StepStyle}.
+ * - navigation: {@link getNavigationStyle NavigationStyle},
+ *   {@link getStartNextButtonStyle StartNextButtonStyle},
+ *   {@link getStepNextButtonStyle StepNextButtonStyle},
+ *   {@link getStepPreviousButtonStyle StepPreviousButtonStyle},
+ *   {@link getFinishPreviousButtonStyle FinishPreviousButtonStyle},
+ *   {@link getFinishCompleteButtonStyle FinishCompleteButtonStyle},
+ *   {@link getCancelButtonStyle CancelButtonStyle}.
+ * - side bar: {@link getSideBarStyle SideBarStyle} and {@link getSideBarButtonStyle SideBarButtonStyle}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizard extends TWebControl implements INamingContainer
+{
+	/**
+	 * Wizard step types.
+	 * @deprecated deprecated since version 3.0.4 (use TWizardStepType constants instead)
+	 */
+	const ST_AUTO='Auto';
+	const ST_START='Start';
+	const ST_STEP='Step';
+	const ST_FINISH='Finish';
+	const ST_COMPLETE='Complete';
+	/**
+	 * Navigation commands.
+	 */
+	const CMD_PREVIOUS='PreviousStep';
+	const CMD_NEXT='NextStep';
+	const CMD_CANCEL='Cancel';
+	const CMD_COMPLETE='Complete';
+	const CMD_MOVETO='MoveTo';
+	/**
+	 * Side bar button ID
+	 */
+	const ID_SIDEBAR_BUTTON='SideBarButton';
+	/**
+	 * Side bar data list
+	 */
+	const ID_SIDEBAR_LIST='SideBarList';
+
+	/**
+	 * @var TMultiView multiview that contains the wizard steps
+	 */
+	private $_multiView=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed navigation template for the start step.
+	 */
+	private $_startNavigationTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed navigation template for internal steps.
+	 */
+	private $_stepNavigationTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed navigation template for the finish step.
+	 */
+	private $_finishNavigationTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed template for wizard header.
+	 */
+	private $_headerTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var mixed template for the side bar.
+	 */
+	private $_sideBarTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TWizardStepCollection
+	 */
+	private $_wizardSteps=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TPanel container of the wizard header
+	 */
+	private $_header;
+	/**
+	 * @var TPanel container of the wizard step content
+	 */
+	private $_stepContent;
+	/**
+	 * @var TPanel container of the wizard side bar
+	 */
+	private $_sideBar;
+	/**
+	 * @var TPanel navigation panel
+	 */
+	private $_navigation;
+	/**
+	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer container of the start navigation
+	 */
+	private $_startNavigation;
+	/**
+	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer container of the step navigation
+	 */
+	private $_stepNavigation;
+	/**
+	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer container of the finish navigation
+	 */
+	private $_finishNavigation;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether ActiveStepIndex was already set
+	 */
+	private $_activeStepIndexSet=false;
+	/**
+	 * @var TDataList side bar data list.
+	 */
+	private $_sideBarDataList;
+	/**
+	 * @var boolean whether navigation should be cancelled (a status set in OnSideBarButtonClick)
+	 */
+	private $_cancelNavigation=false;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string tag name for the wizard
+	 */
+	protected function getTagName()
+	{
+		return 'div';
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds {@link TWizardStep} objects into step collection.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation and is
+	 * invoked when template is being instantiated.
+	 * @param mixed object instantiated in template
+	 */
+	public function addParsedObject($object)
+	{
+		if($object instanceof TWizardStep)
+			$this->getWizardSteps()->add($object);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardStep the currently active wizard step
+	 */
+	public function getActiveStep()
+	{
+		return $this->getMultiView()->getActiveView();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TWizardStep step to be activated
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException if the step is not in the wizard step collection
+	 */
+	public function setActiveStep($step)
+	{
+		if(($index=$this->getWizardSteps()->indexOf($step))<0)
+			throw new TInvalidOperationException('wizard_step_invalid');
+		$this->setActiveStepIndex($index);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the active wizard step
+	 */
+	public function getActiveStepIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->getMultiView()->getActiveViewIndex();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the wizard step to be activated
+	 */
+	public function setActiveStepIndex($value)
+	{
+		$value=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($value);
+		$multiView=$this->getMultiView();
+		if($multiView->getActiveViewIndex()!==$value)
+		{
+			$multiView->setActiveViewIndex($value);
+			$this->_activeStepIndexSet=true;
+			if($this->_sideBarDataList!==null && $this->getSideBarTemplate()!==null)
+			{
+				$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
+				$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardStepCollection collection of wizard steps
+	 */
+	public function getWizardSteps()
+	{
+		if($this->_wizardSteps===null)
+			$this->_wizardSteps=new TWizardStepCollection($this);
+		return $this->_wizardSteps;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to display a cancel button in each wizard step. Defaults to false.
+	 */
+	public function getShowCancelButton()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowCancelButton',false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to display a cancel button in each wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function setShowCancelButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowCancelButton',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to display a side bar that contains links to wizard steps. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getShowSideBar()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('ShowSideBar',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to display a side bar that contains links to wizard steps.
+	 */
+	public function setShowSideBar($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('ShowSideBar',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate navigation template for the start step. Defaults to null.
+	 */
+	public function getStartNavigationTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_startNavigationTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate navigation template for the start step.
+	 */
+	public function setStartNavigationTemplate($value)
+	{
+		$this->_startNavigationTemplate=$value;
+		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate navigation template for internal steps. Defaults to null.
+	 */
+	public function getStepNavigationTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_stepNavigationTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate navigation template for internal steps.
+	 */
+	public function setStepNavigationTemplate($value)
+	{
+		$this->_stepNavigationTemplate=$value;
+		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate navigation template for the finish step. Defaults to null.
+	 */
+	public function getFinishNavigationTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_finishNavigationTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate navigation template for the finish step.
+	 */
+	public function setFinishNavigationTemplate($value)
+	{
+		$this->_finishNavigationTemplate=$value;
+		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate template for wizard header. Defaults to null.
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_headerTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate template for wizard header.
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderTemplate($value)
+	{
+		$this->_headerTemplate=$value;
+		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate template for the side bar. Defaults to null.
+	 */
+	public function getSideBarTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_sideBarTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate template for the side bar.
+	 */
+	public function setSideBarTemplate($value)
+	{
+		$this->_sideBarTemplate=$value;
+		$this->requiresControlsRecreation();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string header text. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderText()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('HeaderText','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string header text.
+	 */
+	public function setHeaderText($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('HeaderText',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the cancel button in the
+	 * wizard is clicked. Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getCancelDestinationUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('CancelDestinationUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the cancel button in the
+	 * wizard is clicked.
+	 */
+	public function setCancelDestinationUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('CancelDestinationUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the wizard finishes.
+	 * Defaults to ''.
+	 */
+	public function getFinishDestinationUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('FinishDestinationUrl','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the URL that the browser will be redirected to if the wizard finishes.
+	 */
+	public function setFinishDestinationUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('FinishDestinationUrl',TPropertyValue::ensureString($value),'');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style for the buttons displayed in the side bar.
+	 */
+	public function getSideBarButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('SideBarButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStyle the style common for all navigation buttons.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigationButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('NavigationButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('NavigationButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the next button in the start wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function getStartNextButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StartNextButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
+			$style->setButtonText('Next');
+			$this->setViewState('StartNextButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the next button in each internal wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function getStepNextButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepNextButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
+			$style->setButtonText('Next');
+			$this->setViewState('StepNextButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the previous button in the start wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function getStepPreviousButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepPreviousButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
+			$style->setButtonText('Previous');
+			$this->setViewState('StepPreviousButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the complete button in the finish wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function getFinishCompleteButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FinishCompleteButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
+			$style->setButtonText('Complete');
+			$this->setViewState('FinishCompleteButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the previous button in the start wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function getFinishPreviousButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('FinishPreviousButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
+			$style->setButtonText('Previous');
+			$this->setViewState('FinishPreviousButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonStyle the style for the cancel button
+	 */
+	public function getCancelButtonStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('CancelButtonStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TWizardNavigationButtonStyle;
+			$style->setButtonText('Cancel');
+			$this->setViewState('CancelButtonStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for the side bar.
+	 */
+	public function getSideBarStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TPanelStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('SideBarStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for the header.
+	 */
+	public function getHeaderStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TPanelStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('HeaderStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for each internal wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function getStepStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TPanelStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('StepStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPanelStyle the style for the navigation panel.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigationStyle()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('NavigationStyle',null))===null)
+		{
+			$style=new TPanelStyle;
+			$this->setViewState('NavigationStyle',$style,null);
+		}
+		return $style;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether to use default layout to arrange side bar and the rest wizard components. Defaults to true.
+	 */
+	public function getUseDefaultLayout()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('UseDefaultLayout',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether to use default layout to arrange side bar and the rest wizard components.
+	 * If true, an HTML table will be used which places the side bar in the left cell
+	 * while the rest components in the right cell.
+	 */
+	public function setUseDefaultLayout($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('UseDefaultLayout',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPanel container of the wizard header
+	 */
+	public function getHeader()
+	{
+		return $this->_header;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPanel container of the wizard step content
+	 */
+	public function getStepContent()
+	{
+		return $this->_stepContent;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TPanel container of the wizard side bar
+	 */
+	public function getSideBar()
+	{
+		return $this->_sideBar;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer container of the start navigation
+	 */
+	public function getStartNavigation()
+	{
+		return $this->_startNavigation;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer container of the step navigation
+	 */
+	public function getStepNavigation()
+	{
+		return $this->_stepNavigation;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer container of the finish navigation
+	 */
+	public function getFinishNavigation()
+	{
+		return $this->_finishNavigation;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnActiveStepChanged</b> event.
+	 * This event is raised when the current visible step is changed in the
+	 * wizard.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onActiveStepChanged($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnActiveStepChanged',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnCancelButtonClick</b> event.
+	 * This event is raised when a cancel navigation button is clicked in the
+	 * current active step.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onCancelButtonClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCancelButtonClick',$this,$param);
+		if(($url=$this->getCancelDestinationUrl())!=='')
+			$this->getResponse()->redirect($url);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnCompleteButtonClick</b> event.
+	 * This event is raised when a finish navigation button is clicked in the
+	 * current active step.
+	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onCompleteButtonClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnCompleteButtonClick',$this,$param);
+		if(($url=$this->getFinishDestinationUrl())!=='')
+			$this->getResponse()->redirect($url);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnNextButtonClick</b> event.
+	 * This event is raised when a next navigation button is clicked in the
+	 * current active step.
+	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onNextButtonClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnNextButtonClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnPreviousButtonClick</b> event.
+	 * This event is raised when a previous navigation button is clicked in the
+	 * current active step.
+	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onPreviousButtonClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnPreviousButtonClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Raises <b>OnSideBarButtonClick</b> event.
+	 * This event is raised when a link button in the side bar is clicked.
+	 * @param TWizardNavigationEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onSideBarButtonClick($param)
+	{
+		$this->raiseEvent('OnSideBarButtonClick',$this,$param);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Returns the multiview that holds the wizard steps.
+	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
+	 * @return TMultiView the multiview holding wizard steps
+	 */
+	public function getMultiView()
+	{
+		if($this->_multiView===null)
+		{
+			$this->_multiView=new TMultiView;
+			$this->_multiView->setID('WizardMultiView');
+			$this->_multiView->attachEventHandler('OnActiveViewChanged',array($this,'onActiveStepChanged'));
+			$this->_multiView->ignoreBubbleEvents();
+		}
+		return $this->_multiView;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Adds a wizard step to the multiview.
+	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
+	 * It is invoked when a step is added into the step collection of the wizard.
+	 * @param TWizardStep wizard step to be added into multiview.
+	 */
+	public function addedWizardStep($step)
+	{
+		if(($wizard=$step->getWizard())!==null)
+			$wizard->getWizardSteps()->remove($step);
+		$step->setWizard($this);
+		$this->wizardStepsChanged();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Removes a wizard step from the multiview.
+	 * This method should only be used by control developers.
+	 * It is invoked when a step is removed from the step collection of the wizard.
+	 * @param TWizardStep wizard step to be removed from multiview.
+	 */
+	public function removedWizardStep($step)
+	{
+		$step->setWizard(null);
+		$this->wizardStepsChanged();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates the child controls of the wizard.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation.
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onInit($param)
+	{
+		parent::onInit($param);
+		$this->ensureChildControls();
+		if($this->getActiveStepIndex()<0 && $this->getWizardSteps()->getCount()>0)
+			$this->setActiveStepIndex(0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Saves the current active step index into history.
+	 * This method is invoked by the framework when the control state is being saved.
+	 */
+	public function saveState()
+	{
+		$index=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
+		$history=$this->getHistory();
+		if(!$history->getCount() || $history->peek()!==$index)
+			$history->push($index);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Indicates the wizard needs to recreate all child controls.
+	 */
+	protected function requiresControlsRecreation()
+	{
+		if($this->getChildControlsCreated())
+			$this->setChildControlsCreated(false);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Renders the wizard.
+	 * @param THtmlWriter
+	 */
+	public function render($writer)
+	{
+		$this->ensureChildControls();
+		if($this->getHasControls())
+		{
+			if($this->getUseDefaultLayout())
+			{
+				$this->applyControlProperties();
+				$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
+				$writer->write("\n<table border=\"0\" cellpadding=\"0\" cellspacing=\"0\" height=\"100%\" width=\"100%\">\n<tr><td width=\"1\" valign=\"top\">\n");
+				$this->_sideBar->renderControl($writer);
+				$writer->write("\n</td><td valign=\"top\">\n");
+				$this->_header->renderControl($writer);
+				$this->_stepContent->renderControl($writer);
+				$this->_navigation->renderControl($writer);
+				$writer->write("\n</td></tr></table>\n");
+				$this->renderEndTag($writer);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$this->applyControlProperties();
+				$this->renderBeginTag($writer);
+				$this->_sideBar->renderControl($writer);
+				$this->_header->renderControl($writer);
+				$this->_stepContent->renderControl($writer);
+				$this->_navigation->renderControl($writer);
+				$this->renderEndTag($writer);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Applies various properties to the components of wizard
+	 */
+	protected function applyControlProperties()
+	{
+		$this->applyHeaderProperties();
+		$this->applySideBarProperties();
+		$this->applyStepContentProperties();
+		$this->applyNavigationProperties();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Applies properties to the wizard header
+	 */
+	protected function applyHeaderProperties()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('HeaderStyle',null))!==null)
+			$this->_header->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
+		if($this->getHeaderTemplate()===null)
+		{
+			$this->_header->getControls()->clear();
+			$this->_header->getControls()->add($this->getHeaderText());
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Applies properties to the wizard sidebar
+	 */
+	protected function applySideBarProperties()
+	{
+		$this->_sideBar->setVisible($this->getShowSideBar());
+		if($this->_sideBarDataList!==null && $this->getShowSideBar())
+		{
+			$this->_sideBarDataList->setDataSource($this->getWizardSteps());
+			$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
+			$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
+			if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarButtonStyle',null))!==null)
+			{
+				foreach($this->_sideBarDataList->getItems() as $item)
+				{
+					if(($button=$item->findControl('SideBarButton'))!==null)
+						$button->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('SideBarStyle',null))!==null)
+			$this->_sideBar->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Applies properties to the wizard step content
+	 */
+	protected function applyStepContentProperties()
+	{
+		if(($style=$this->getViewState('StepStyle',null))!==null)
+			$this->_stepContent->getStyle()->mergeWith($style);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Apply properties to various navigation panels.
+	 */
+	protected function applyNavigationProperties()
+	{
+		$wizardSteps=$this->getWizardSteps();
+		$activeStep=$this->getActiveStep();
+		$activeStepIndex=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
+
+		if(!$this->_navigation)
+			return;
+		else if($activeStepIndex<0 || $activeStepIndex>=$wizardSteps->getCount())
+		{
+			$this->_navigation->setVisible(false);
+			return;
+		}
+
+		// set visibility of different types of navigation panel
+		$showStandard=true;
+		foreach($wizardSteps as $step)
+		{
+			if(($step instanceof TTemplatedWizardStep) && ($container=$step->getNavigationContainer())!==null)
+			{
+				if($activeStep===$step)
+				{
+					$container->setVisible(true);
+					$showStandard=false;
+				}
+				else
+					$container->setVisible(false);
+			}
+		}
+		$activeStepType=$this->getStepType($activeStep);
+		if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Complete)
+		{
+			$this->_sideBar->setVisible(false);
+			$this->_header->setVisible(false);
+		}
+		$this->_startNavigation->setVisible($showStandard && $activeStepType===self::ST_START);
+		$this->_stepNavigation->setVisible($showStandard && $activeStepType===self::ST_STEP);
+		$this->_finishNavigation->setVisible($showStandard && $activeStepType===self::ST_FINISH);
+
+		if(($navigationStyle=$this->getViewState('NavigationStyle',null))!==null)
+			$this->_navigation->getStyle()->mergeWith($navigationStyle);
+
+		$displayCancelButton=$this->getShowCancelButton();
+		$cancelButtonStyle=$this->getCancelButtonStyle();
+		$buttonStyle=$this->getViewState('NavigationButtonStyle',null);
+		if($buttonStyle!==null)
+			$cancelButtonStyle->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
+
+		// apply styles to start navigation buttons
+		if(($cancelButton=$this->_startNavigation->getCancelButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$cancelButton->setVisible($displayCancelButton);
+			$cancelButtonStyle->apply($cancelButton);
+		}
+		if(($button=$this->_startNavigation->getNextButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$button->setVisible(true);
+			$style=$this->getStartNextButtonStyle();
+			if($buttonStyle!==null)
+				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
+			$style->apply($button);
+			if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Start)
+				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
+		}
+
+		// apply styles to finish navigation buttons
+		if(($cancelButton=$this->_finishNavigation->getCancelButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$cancelButton->setVisible($displayCancelButton);
+			$cancelButtonStyle->apply($cancelButton);
+		}
+		if(($button=$this->_finishNavigation->getPreviousButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$button->setVisible($this->allowNavigationToPreviousStep());
+			$style=$this->getFinishPreviousButtonStyle();
+			if($buttonStyle!==null)
+				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
+			$style->apply($button);
+		}
+		if(($button=$this->_finishNavigation->getCompleteButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$button->setVisible(true);
+			$style=$this->getFinishCompleteButtonStyle();
+			if($buttonStyle!==null)
+				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
+			$style->apply($button);
+			if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Finish)
+				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
+		}
+
+		// apply styles to step navigation buttons
+		if(($cancelButton=$this->_stepNavigation->getCancelButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$cancelButton->setVisible($displayCancelButton);
+			$cancelButtonStyle->apply($cancelButton);
+		}
+		if(($button=$this->_stepNavigation->getPreviousButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$button->setVisible($this->allowNavigationToPreviousStep());
+			$style=$this->getStepPreviousButtonStyle();
+			if($buttonStyle!==null)
+				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
+			$style->apply($button);
+		}
+		if(($button=$this->_stepNavigation->getNextButton())!==null)
+		{
+			$button->setVisible(true);
+			$style=$this->getStepNextButtonStyle();
+			if($buttonStyle!==null)
+				$style->mergeWith($buttonStyle);
+			$style->apply($button);
+			if($activeStepType===TWizardStepType::Step)
+				$this->getPage()->getClientScript()->registerDefaultButton($this, $button);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TStack history containing step indexes that were navigated before
+	 */
+	protected function getHistory()
+	{
+		if(($history=$this->getControlState('History',null))===null)
+		{
+			$history=new TStack;
+			$this->setControlState('History',$history);
+		}
+		return $history;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Determines the type of the specified wizard step.
+	 * @param TWizardStep
+	 * @return TWizardStepType type of the step
+	 */
+	protected function getStepType($wizardStep)
+	{
+		if(($type=$wizardStep->getStepType())===TWizardStepType::Auto)
+		{
+			$steps=$this->getWizardSteps();
+			if(($index=$steps->indexOf($wizardStep))>=0)
+			{
+				$stepCount=$steps->getCount();
+				if($stepCount===1 || ($index<$stepCount-1 && $steps->itemAt($index+1)->getStepType()===TWizardStepType::Complete))
+					return TWizardStepType::Finish;
+				else if($index===0)
+					return TWizardStepType::Start;
+				else if($index===$stepCount-1)
+					return TWizardStepType::Finish;
+				else
+					return TWizardStepType::Step;
+			}
+			else
+				return $type;
+		}
+		else
+			return $type;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Clears up everything within the wizard.
+	 */
+	protected function reset()
+	{
+		$this->getControls()->clear();
+		$this->_header=null;
+		$this->_stepContent=null;
+		$this->_sideBar=null;
+		$this->_sideBarDataList=null;
+		$this->_navigation=null;
+		$this->_startNavigation=null;
+		$this->_stepNavigation=null;
+		$this->_finishNavigation=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates child controls within the wizard
+	 */
+	public function createChildControls()
+	{
+		$this->reset();
+		$this->createSideBar();
+		$this->createHeader();
+		$this->createStepContent();
+		$this->createNavigation();
+//		$this->clearChildState();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates the wizard header.
+	 */
+	protected function createHeader()
+	{
+		$this->_header=new TPanel;
+		if(($template=$this->getHeaderTemplate())!==null)
+			$template->instantiateIn($this->_header);
+		else
+			$this->_header->getControls()->add($this->getHeaderText());
+		$this->getControls()->add($this->_header);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates the wizard side bar
+	 */
+	protected function createSideBar()
+	{
+		if($this->getShowSideBar())
+		{
+			if(($template=$this->getSideBarTemplate())===null)
+				$template=new TWizardSideBarTemplate;
+			$this->_sideBar=new TPanel;
+			$template->instantiateIn($this->_sideBar);
+			$this->getControls()->add($this->_sideBar);
+
+			if(($this->_sideBarDataList=$this->_sideBar->findControl(self::ID_SIDEBAR_LIST))!==null)
+			{
+				$this->_sideBarDataList->attachEventHandler('OnItemCommand',array($this,'dataListItemCommand'));
+				$this->_sideBarDataList->attachEventHandler('OnItemDataBound',array($this,'dataListItemDataBound'));
+				$this->_sideBarDataList->setDataSource($this->getWizardSteps());
+				$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
+				$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			$this->_sideBar=new TPanel;
+			$this->getControls()->add($this->_sideBar);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Event handler for sidebar datalist's OnItemCommand event.
+	 * This method is used internally by wizard. It mainly
+	 * sets the active step index according to the button clicked in the sidebar.
+	 * @param mixed sender of the event
+	 * @param TDataListCommandEventParameter
+	 */
+	public function dataListItemCommand($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$param->getItem();
+		if($param->getCommandName()===self::CMD_MOVETO)
+		{
+			$stepIndex=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
+			$newStepIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($param->getCommandParameter());
+			$navParam=new TWizardNavigationEventParameter($stepIndex);
+			$navParam->setNextStepIndex($newStepIndex);
+
+			// if the button clicked causes validation which fails,
+			// by default we will cancel navigation to the new step
+			$button=$param->getCommandSource();
+			if(($button instanceof IButtonControl) && $button->getCausesValidation() && ($page=$this->getPage())!==null && !$page->getIsValid())
+				$navParam->setCancelNavigation(true);
+
+			$this->_activeStepIndexSet=false;
+			$this->onSideBarButtonClick($navParam);
+			$this->_cancelNavigation=$navParam->getCancelNavigation();
+			if(!$this->_cancelNavigation)
+			{
+				if(!$this->_activeStepIndexSet && $this->allowNavigationToStep($newStepIndex))
+					$this->setActiveStepIndex($newStepIndex);
+			}
+			else
+				$this->setActiveStepIndex($stepIndex);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Event handler for sidebar datalist's OnItemDataBound event.
+	 * This method is used internally by wizard. It mainly configures
+	 * the buttons in the sidebar datalist.
+	 * @param mixed sender of the event
+	 * @param TDataListItemEventParameter
+	 */
+	public function dataListItemDataBound($sender,$param)
+	{
+		$item=$param->getItem();
+		$itemType=$item->getItemType();
+		if($itemType==='Item' || $itemType==='AlternatingItem' || $itemType==='SelectedItem' || $itemType==='EditItem')
+		{
+			if(($button=$item->findControl(self::ID_SIDEBAR_BUTTON))!==null)
+			{
+				$step=$item->getData();
+				if(($this->getStepType($step)===TWizardStepType::Complete))
+					$button->setEnabled(false);
+				if(($title=$step->getTitle())!=='')
+					$button->setText($title);
+				else
+					$button->setText($step->getID(false));
+				$index=$this->getWizardSteps()->indexOf($step);
+				$button->setCommandName(self::CMD_MOVETO);
+				$button->setCommandParameter("$index");
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates wizard step content.
+	 */
+	protected function createStepContent()
+	{
+		foreach($this->getWizardSteps() as $step)
+		{
+			if($step instanceof TTemplatedWizardStep)
+				$step->ensureChildControls();
+		}
+		$multiView=$this->getMultiView();
+		$this->_stepContent=new TPanel;
+		$this->_stepContent->getControls()->add($multiView);
+		$this->getControls()->add($this->_stepContent);
+		if($multiView->getViews()->getCount())
+			$multiView->setActiveViewIndex(0);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates navigation panel.
+	 */
+	protected function createNavigation()
+	{
+		$this->_navigation=new TPanel;
+		$this->getControls()->add($this->_navigation);
+		$controls=$this->_navigation->getControls();
+		foreach($this->getWizardSteps() as $step)
+		{
+			if($step instanceof TTemplatedWizardStep)
+			{
+				$step->instantiateNavigationTemplate();
+				if(($panel=$step->getNavigationContainer())!==null)
+					$controls->add($panel);
+			}
+		}
+		$this->_startNavigation=$this->createStartNavigation();
+		$controls->add($this->_startNavigation);
+		$this->_stepNavigation=$this->createStepNavigation();
+		$controls->add($this->_stepNavigation);
+		$this->_finishNavigation=$this->createFinishNavigation();
+		$controls->add($this->_finishNavigation);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates start navigation panel.
+	 */
+	protected function createStartNavigation()
+	{
+		if(($template=$this->getStartNavigationTemplate())===null)
+			$template=new TWizardStartNavigationTemplate($this);
+		$navigation=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
+		$template->instantiateIn($navigation);
+		return $navigation;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates step navigation panel.
+	 */
+	protected function createStepNavigation()
+	{
+		if(($template=$this->getStepNavigationTemplate())===null)
+			$template=new TWizardStepNavigationTemplate($this);
+		$navigation=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
+		$template->instantiateIn($navigation);
+		return $navigation;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates finish navigation panel.
+	 */
+	protected function createFinishNavigation()
+	{
+		if(($template=$this->getFinishNavigationTemplate())===null)
+			$template=new TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate($this);
+		$navigation=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
+		$template->instantiateIn($navigation);
+		return $navigation;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Updates the sidebar datalist if any.
+	 * This method is invoked when any wizard step is changed.
+	 */
+	public function wizardStepsChanged()
+	{
+		if($this->_sideBarDataList!==null)
+		{
+			$this->_sideBarDataList->setDataSource($this->getWizardSteps());
+			$this->_sideBarDataList->setSelectedItemIndex($this->getActiveStepIndex());
+			$this->_sideBarDataList->dataBind();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Determines the index of the previous step based on history.
+	 * @param boolean whether the first item in the history stack should be popped
+	 * up after calling this method.
+	 */
+	protected function getPreviousStepIndex($popStack)
+	{
+		$history=$this->getHistory();
+		if($history->getCount()>=0)
+		{
+			$activeStepIndex=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
+			$previousStepIndex=-1;
+			if($popStack)
+			{
+				$previousStepIndex=$history->pop();
+				if($activeStepIndex===$previousStepIndex && $history->getCount()>0)
+					$previousStepIndex=$history->pop();
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				$previousStepIndex=$history->peek();
+				if($activeStepIndex===$previousStepIndex && $history->getCount()>1)
+				{
+					$saveIndex=$history->pop();
+					$previousStepIndex=$history->peek();
+					$history->push($saveIndex);
+				}
+			}
+			return $activeStepIndex===$previousStepIndex ? -1 : $previousStepIndex;
+		}
+		else
+			return -1;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether navigation to the previous step is allowed
+	 */
+	protected function allowNavigationToPreviousStep()
+	{
+		if(($index=$this->getPreviousStepIndex(false))!==-1)
+			return $this->getWizardSteps()->itemAt($index)->getAllowReturn();
+		else
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer index of the step
+	 * @return boolean whether navigation to the specified step is allowed
+	 */
+	protected function allowNavigationToStep($index)
+	{
+		if($this->getHistory()->contains($index))
+			return $this->getWizardSteps()->itemAt($index)->getAllowReturn();
+		else
+			return true;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Handles bubbled events.
+	 * This method mainly translate certain command events into
+	 * wizard-specific events.
+	 * @param mixed sender of the original command event
+	 * @param TEventParameter event parameter
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if a navigation command is associated with an invalid parameter
+	 */
+	public function bubbleEvent($sender,$param)
+	{
+		if($param instanceof TCommandEventParameter)
+		{
+			$command=$param->getCommandName();
+			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_CANCEL)===0)
+			{
+				$this->onCancelButtonClick($param);
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			$type=$this->getStepType($this->getActiveStep());
+			$index=$this->getActiveStepIndex();
+			$navParam=new TWizardNavigationEventParameter($index);
+			if(($sender instanceof IButtonControl) && $sender->getCausesValidation() && ($page=$this->getPage())!==null && !$page->getIsValid())
+				$navParam->setCancelNavigation(true);
+
+			$handled=false;
+			$movePrev=false;
+			$this->_activeStepIndexSet=false;
+
+			if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_NEXT)===0)
+			{
+				if($type!==self::ST_START && $type!==self::ST_STEP)
+					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_command_invalid',self::CMD_NEXT);
+				if($index<$this->getWizardSteps()->getCount()-1)
+					$navParam->setNextStepIndex($index+1);
+				$this->onNextButtonClick($navParam);
+				$handled=true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_PREVIOUS)===0)
+			{
+				if($type!==self::ST_FINISH && $type!==self::ST_STEP)
+					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_command_invalid',self::CMD_PREVIOUS);
+				$movePrev=true;
+				if(($prevIndex=$this->getPreviousStepIndex(false))>=0)
+					$navParam->setNextStepIndex($prevIndex);
+				$this->onPreviousButtonClick($navParam);
+				$handled=true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_COMPLETE)===0)
+			{
+				if($type!==self::ST_FINISH)
+					throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_command_invalid',self::CMD_COMPLETE);
+				if($index<$this->getWizardSteps()->getCount()-1)
+					$navParam->setNextStepIndex($index+1);
+				$this->onCompleteButtonClick($navParam);
+				$handled=true;
+			}
+			else if(strcasecmp($command,self::CMD_MOVETO)===0)
+			{
+				if($this->_cancelNavigation)  // may be set in onSideBarButtonClick
 					$navParam->setCancelNavigation(true);
 				$requestedStep=$param->getCommandParameter();
 				if (!is_numeric($requestedStep))
@@ -1412,750 +1412,750 @@ class TWizard extends TWebControl implements INamingContainer
 						throw new TConfigurationException('wizard_step_invalid');
 				}
 				else
-					$requestedIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($requestedStep);
-				$navParam->setNextStepIndex($requestedIndex);
-				$handled=true;
-			}
-
-			if($handled)
-			{
-				if(!$navParam->getCancelNavigation())
-				{
-					$nextStepIndex=$navParam->getNextStepIndex();
-					if(!$this->_activeStepIndexSet && $this->allowNavigationToStep($nextStepIndex))
-					{
-						if($movePrev)
-							$this->getPreviousStepIndex(true);  // pop out the previous move from history
-						$this->setActiveStepIndex($nextStepIndex);
-					}
-				}
-				else
-					$this->setActiveStepIndex($index);
-				return true;
-			}
-		}
-		return false;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TWizardStep class.
- *
- * TWizardStep represents a wizard step. The wizard owning the step
- * can be obtained by {@link getWizard Wizard}.
- * To specify the type of the step, set {@link setStepType StepType};
- * For step title, set {@link setTitle Title}. If a step can be re-visited,
- * set {@link setAllowReturn AllowReturn} to true.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardStep extends TView
-{
-	private $_wizard;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizard the wizard owning this step
-	 */
-	public function getWizard()
-	{
-		return $this->_wizard;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the wizard owning this step.
-	 * This method is used internally by {@link TWizard}.
-	 * @param TWizard the wizard owning this step
-	 */
-	public function setWizard($wizard)
-	{
-		$this->_wizard=$wizard;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string the title for this step.
-	 */
-	public function getTitle()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('Title','');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the title for this step.
-	 */
-	public function setTitle($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('Title',$value,'');
-		if($this->_wizard)
-			$this->_wizard->wizardStepsChanged();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether this step can be re-visited. Default to true.
-	 */
-	public function getAllowReturn()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('AllowReturn',true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether this step can be re-visited.
-	 */
-	public function setAllowReturn($value)
-	{
-		$this->setViewState('AllowReturn',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardStepType the wizard step type. Defaults to TWizardStepType::Auto.
-	 */
-	public function getStepType()
-	{
-		return $this->getViewState('StepType',TWizardStepType::Auto);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TWizardStepType the wizard step type.
-	 */
-	public function setStepType($type)
-	{
-		$type=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($type,'TWizardStepType');
-		if($type!==$this->getStepType())
-		{
-			$this->setViewState('StepType',$type,TWizardStepType::Auto);
-			if($this->_wizard)
-				$this->_wizard->wizardStepsChanged();
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TCompleteWizardStep class.
- *
- * TCompleteWizardStep represents a wizard step of type TWizardStepType::Complete.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TCompleteWizardStep extends TWizardStep
-{
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardStepType the wizard step type. Always TWizardStepType::Complete.
-	 */
-	public function getStepType()
-	{
-		return TWizardStepType::Complete;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string the wizard step type.
-	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException whenever this method is invoked.
-	 */
-	public function setStepType($value)
-	{
-		throw new TInvalidOperationException('completewizardstep_steptype_readonly');
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TTemplatedWizardStep class.
- *
- * TTemplatedWizardStep represents a wizard step whose content and navigation
- * can be customized using templates. To customize the step content, specify
- * {@link setContentTemplate ContentTemplate}. To customize navigation specific
- * to the step, specify {@link setNavigationTemplate NavigationTemplate}. Note,
- * if the navigation template is not specified, default navigation will be used.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TTemplatedWizardStep extends TWizardStep implements INamingContainer
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate the template for displaying the navigation UI of a wizard step.
-	 */
-	private $_navigationTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var ITemplate the template for displaying the content within the wizard step.
-	 */
-	private $_contentTemplate=null;
-	/**
-	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer
-	 */
-	private $_navigationContainer=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates child controls.
-	 * This method mainly instantiates the content template, if any.
-	 */
-	public function createChildControls()
-	{
-		$this->getControls()->clear();
-		if($this->_contentTemplate)
-			$this->_contentTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Ensures child controls are created.
-	 * @param mixed event parameter
-	 */
-	public function onInit($param)
-	{
-		parent::onInit($param);
-		$this->ensureChildControls();
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template for the content of the wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function getContentTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_contentTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template for the content of the wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function setContentTemplate($value)
-	{
-		$this->_contentTemplate=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return ITemplate the template for displaying the navigation UI of a wizard step. Defaults to null.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigationTemplate()
-	{
-		return $this->_navigationTemplate;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param ITemplate the template for displaying the navigation UI of a wizard step.
-	 */
-	public function setNavigationTemplate($value)
-	{
-		$this->_navigationTemplate=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer the control containing the navigation.
-	 * It could be null if no navigation template is specified.
-	 */
-	public function getNavigationContainer()
-	{
-		return $this->_navigationContainer;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Instantiates the navigation template if any
-	 */
-	public function instantiateNavigationTemplate()
-	{
-		if(!$this->_navigationContainer && $this->_navigationTemplate)
-		{
-			$this->_navigationContainer=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
-			$this->_navigationTemplate->instantiateIn($this->_navigationContainer);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TWizardStepCollection class.
- *
- * TWizardStepCollection represents the collection of wizard steps owned
- * by a {@link TWizard}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardStepCollection extends TList
-{
-	/**
-	 * @var TWizard
-	 */
-	private $_wizard;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TWizard wizard that owns this collection
-	 */
-	public function __construct(TWizard $wizard)
-	{
-		$this->_wizard=$wizard;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by checking if
-	 * the item being added is a {@link TWizardStep}.
-	 * @param integer the speicified position.
-	 * @param mixed new item
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item being added is not TWizardStep.
-	 */
-	public function insertAt($index,$item)
-	{
-		if($item instanceof TWizardStep)
-		{
-			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
-			$this->_wizard->getMultiView()->getViews()->insertAt($index,$item);
-			$this->_wizard->addedWizardStep($item);
-		}
-		else
-			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('wizardstepcollection_wizardstep_required');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Removes an item at the specified position.
-	 * @param integer the index of the item to be removed.
-	 * @return mixed the removed item.
-	 */
-	public function removeAt($index)
-	{
-		$step=parent::removeAt($index);
-		$this->_wizard->getMultiView()->getViews()->remove($step);
-		$this->_wizard->removedWizardStep($step);
-		return $step;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TWizardNavigationContainer class.
- *
- * TWizardNavigationContainer represents a control containing
- * a wizard navigation. The navigation may contain a few buttons, including
- * {@link getPreviousButton PreviousButton}, {@link getNextButton NextButton},
- * {@link getCancelButton CancelButton}, {@link getCompleteButton CompleteButton}.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardNavigationContainer extends TControl implements INamingContainer
-{
-	private $_previousButton=null;
-	private $_nextButton=null;
-	private $_cancelButton=null;
-	private $_completeButton=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed the previous button
-	 */
-	public function getPreviousButton()
-	{
-		return $this->_previousButton;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed the previous button
-	 */
-	public function setPreviousButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->_previousButton=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed the next button
-	 */
-	public function getNextButton()
-	{
-		return $this->_nextButton;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed the next button
-	 */
-	public function setNextButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->_nextButton=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed the cancel button
-	 */
-	public function getCancelButton()
-	{
-		return $this->_cancelButton;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed the cancel button
-	 */
-	public function setCancelButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->_cancelButton=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return mixed the complete button
-	 */
-	public function getCompleteButton()
-	{
-		return $this->_completeButton;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param mixed the complete button
-	 */
-	public function setCompleteButton($value)
-	{
-		$this->_completeButton=$value;
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TWizardNavigationEventParameter class.
- *
- * TWizardNavigationEventParameter represents the parameter for
- * {@link TWizard}'s navigation events.
- *
- * The index of the currently active step can be obtained from
- * {@link getCurrentStepIndex CurrentStepIndex}, while the index
- * of the candidate new step is in {@link getNextStepIndex NextStepIndex}.
- * By modifying {@link setNextStepIndex NextStepIndex}, the new step
- * can be changed to another one. If there is anything wrong with
- * the navigation and it is not wanted, set {@link setCancelNavigation CancelNavigation}
- * to true.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardNavigationEventParameter extends TEventParameter
-{
-	private $_cancel=false;
-	private $_currentStep;
-	private $_nextStep;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param integer current step index
-	 */
-	public function __construct($currentStep)
-	{
-		$this->_currentStep=$currentStep;
-		$this->_nextStep=$currentStep;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the currently active step.
-	 */
-	public function getCurrentStepIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_currentStep;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the next step. Default to {@link getCurrentStepIndex CurrentStepIndex}.
-	 */
-	public function getNextStepIndex()
-	{
-		return $this->_nextStep;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the next step.
-	 */
-	public function setNextStepIndex($index)
-	{
-		$this->_nextStep=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($index);
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return boolean whether navigation to the next step should be canceled. Default to false.
-	 */
-	public function getCancelNavigation()
-	{
-		return $this->_cancel;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param boolean whether navigation to the next step should be canceled.
-	 */
-	public function setCancelNavigation($value)
-	{
-		$this->_cancel=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TWizardSideBarTemplate class.
- * TWizardSideBarTemplate is the default template for wizard sidebar.
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardSideBarTemplate extends TComponent implements ITemplate
-{
-	/**
-	 * Instantiates the template.
-	 * It creates a {@link TDataList} control.
-	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
-	 */
-	public function instantiateIn($parent)
-	{
-		$dataList=new TDataList;
-		$dataList->setID(TWizard::ID_SIDEBAR_LIST);
-		$dataList->getSelectedItemStyle()->getFont()->setBold(true);
-		$dataList->setItemTemplate(new TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate);
-		$parent->getControls()->add($dataList);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate class.
- * TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate is the default template for each item in the sidebar datalist.
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate extends TComponent implements ITemplate
-{
-	/**
-	 * Instantiates the template.
-	 * It creates a {@link TLinkButton}.
-	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
-	 */
-	public function instantiateIn($parent)
-	{
-		$button=new TLinkButton;
-		$button->setID(TWizard::ID_SIDEBAR_BUTTON);
-		$parent->getControls()->add($button);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TWizardNavigationTemplate class.
- * TWizardNavigationTemplate is the base class for various navigation templates.
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardNavigationTemplate extends TComponent implements ITemplate
-{
-	private $_wizard;
-
-	/**
-	 * Constructor.
-	 * @param TWizard the wizard owning this template
-	 */
-	public function __construct($wizard)
-	{
-		$this->_wizard=$wizard;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizard the wizard owning this template
-	 */
-	public function getWizard()
-	{
-		return $this->_wizard;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Instantiates the template.
-	 * Derived classes should override this method.
-	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
-	 */
-	public function instantiateIn($parent)
-	{
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Creates a navigation button.
-	 * It creates a {@link TButton}, {@link TLinkButton}, or {@link TImageButton},
-	 * depending on the given parameters.
-	 * @param TWizardNavigationButtonStyle button style
-	 * @param boolean whether the button should cause validation
-	 * @param string command name for the button's OnCommand event
-	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the button type is not recognized
-	 */
-	protected function createNavigationButton($buttonStyle,$causesValidation,$commandName)
-	{
-		switch($buttonStyle->getButtonType())
-		{
-			case TWizardNavigationButtonType::Button:
-				$button=new TButton;
-				break;
-			case TWizardNavigationButtonType::Link:
-				$button=new TLinkButton;
-				break;
-			case TWizardNavigationButtonType::Image:
-				$button=new TImageButton;
-				$button->setImageUrl($buttonStyle->getImageUrl());
-				break;
-			default:
-				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_buttontype_unknown',$buttonStyle->getButtonType());
-		}
-		$button->setText($buttonStyle->getButtonText());
-		$button->setCausesValidation($causesValidation);
-		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
-		return $button;
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TWizardStartNavigationTemplate class.
- * TWizardStartNavigationTemplate is the template used as default wizard start navigation panel.
- * It consists of two buttons, Next and Cancel.
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardStartNavigationTemplate extends TWizardNavigationTemplate
-{
-	/**
-	 * Instantiates the template.
-	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
-	 */
-	public function instantiateIn($parent)
-	{
-		$nextButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getStartNextButtonStyle(),true,TWizard::CMD_NEXT);
-		$cancelButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getCancelButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_CANCEL);
-
-		$controls=$parent->getControls();
-		$controls->add($nextButton);
-		$controls->add("\n");
-		$controls->add($cancelButton);
-
-		$parent->setNextButton($nextButton);
-		$parent->setCancelButton($cancelButton);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate class.
- * TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate is the template used as default wizard finish navigation panel.
- * It consists of three buttons, Previous, Complete and Cancel.
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate extends TWizardNavigationTemplate
-{
-	/**
-	 * Instantiates the template.
-	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
-	 */
-	public function instantiateIn($parent)
-	{
-		$previousButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getFinishPreviousButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_PREVIOUS);
-		$completeButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getFinishCompleteButtonStyle(),true,TWizard::CMD_COMPLETE);
-		$cancelButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getCancelButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_CANCEL);
-
-		$controls=$parent->getControls();
-		$controls->add($previousButton);
-		$controls->add("\n");
-		$controls->add($completeButton);
-		$controls->add("\n");
-		$controls->add($cancelButton);
-
-		$parent->setPreviousButton($previousButton);
-		$parent->setCompleteButton($completeButton);
-		$parent->setCancelButton($cancelButton);
-	}
-}
-
-/**
- * TWizardStepNavigationTemplate class.
- * TWizardStepNavigationTemplate is the template used as default wizard step navigation panel.
- * It consists of three buttons, Previous, Next and Cancel.
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardStepNavigationTemplate extends TWizardNavigationTemplate
-{
-	/**
-	 * Instantiates the template.
-	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
-	 */
-	public function instantiateIn($parent)
-	{
-		$previousButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getStepPreviousButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_PREVIOUS);
-		$nextButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getStepNextButtonStyle(),true,TWizard::CMD_NEXT);
-		$cancelButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getCancelButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_CANCEL);
-
-		$controls=$parent->getControls();
-		$controls->add($previousButton);
-		$controls->add("\n");
-		$controls->add($nextButton);
-		$controls->add("\n");
-		$controls->add($cancelButton);
-
-		$parent->setPreviousButton($previousButton);
-		$parent->setNextButton($nextButton);
-		$parent->setCancelButton($cancelButton);
-	}
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TWizardNavigationButtonType class.
- * TWizardNavigationButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of buttons
- * that can be used in the navigation part of a {@link TWizard}.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Button: a regular click button
- * - Image: an image button
- * - Link: a hyperlink button
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TWizardNavigationButtonType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Button='Button';
-	const Image='Image';
-	const Link='Link';
-}
-
-
-/**
- * TWizardStepType class.
- * TWizardStepType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of {@link TWizard wizard} steps.
- *
- * The following enumerable values are defined:
- * - Auto: the type is automatically determined based on the location of the wizard step in the whole step collection.
- * - Complete: the step is the last summary step.
- * - Start: the step is the first step
- * - Step: the step is between the begin and the end steps.
- * - Finish: the last step before the Complete step.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0.4
- */
-class TWizardStepType extends TEnumerable
-{
-	const Auto='Auto';
-	const Complete='Complete';
-	const Start='Start';
-	const Step='Step';
-	const Finish='Finish';
-}
-
+					$requestedIndex=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($requestedStep);
+				$navParam->setNextStepIndex($requestedIndex);
+				$handled=true;
+			}
+
+			if($handled)
+			{
+				if(!$navParam->getCancelNavigation())
+				{
+					$nextStepIndex=$navParam->getNextStepIndex();
+					if(!$this->_activeStepIndexSet && $this->allowNavigationToStep($nextStepIndex))
+					{
+						if($movePrev)
+							$this->getPreviousStepIndex(true);  // pop out the previous move from history
+						$this->setActiveStepIndex($nextStepIndex);
+					}
+				}
+				else
+					$this->setActiveStepIndex($index);
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+		return false;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TWizardStep class.
+ *
+ * TWizardStep represents a wizard step. The wizard owning the step
+ * can be obtained by {@link getWizard Wizard}.
+ * To specify the type of the step, set {@link setStepType StepType};
+ * For step title, set {@link setTitle Title}. If a step can be re-visited,
+ * set {@link setAllowReturn AllowReturn} to true.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardStep extends TView
+{
+	private $_wizard;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizard the wizard owning this step
+	 */
+	public function getWizard()
+	{
+		return $this->_wizard;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the wizard owning this step.
+	 * This method is used internally by {@link TWizard}.
+	 * @param TWizard the wizard owning this step
+	 */
+	public function setWizard($wizard)
+	{
+		$this->_wizard=$wizard;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string the title for this step.
+	 */
+	public function getTitle()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('Title','');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the title for this step.
+	 */
+	public function setTitle($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('Title',$value,'');
+		if($this->_wizard)
+			$this->_wizard->wizardStepsChanged();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether this step can be re-visited. Default to true.
+	 */
+	public function getAllowReturn()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('AllowReturn',true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether this step can be re-visited.
+	 */
+	public function setAllowReturn($value)
+	{
+		$this->setViewState('AllowReturn',TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value),true);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardStepType the wizard step type. Defaults to TWizardStepType::Auto.
+	 */
+	public function getStepType()
+	{
+		return $this->getViewState('StepType',TWizardStepType::Auto);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TWizardStepType the wizard step type.
+	 */
+	public function setStepType($type)
+	{
+		$type=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($type,'TWizardStepType');
+		if($type!==$this->getStepType())
+		{
+			$this->setViewState('StepType',$type,TWizardStepType::Auto);
+			if($this->_wizard)
+				$this->_wizard->wizardStepsChanged();
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TCompleteWizardStep class.
+ *
+ * TCompleteWizardStep represents a wizard step of type TWizardStepType::Complete.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TCompleteWizardStep extends TWizardStep
+{
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardStepType the wizard step type. Always TWizardStepType::Complete.
+	 */
+	public function getStepType()
+	{
+		return TWizardStepType::Complete;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string the wizard step type.
+	 * @throws TInvalidOperationException whenever this method is invoked.
+	 */
+	public function setStepType($value)
+	{
+		throw new TInvalidOperationException('completewizardstep_steptype_readonly');
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TTemplatedWizardStep class.
+ *
+ * TTemplatedWizardStep represents a wizard step whose content and navigation
+ * can be customized using templates. To customize the step content, specify
+ * {@link setContentTemplate ContentTemplate}. To customize navigation specific
+ * to the step, specify {@link setNavigationTemplate NavigationTemplate}. Note,
+ * if the navigation template is not specified, default navigation will be used.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TTemplatedWizardStep extends TWizardStep implements INamingContainer
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate the template for displaying the navigation UI of a wizard step.
+	 */
+	private $_navigationTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var ITemplate the template for displaying the content within the wizard step.
+	 */
+	private $_contentTemplate=null;
+	/**
+	 * @var TWizardNavigationContainer
+	 */
+	private $_navigationContainer=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates child controls.
+	 * This method mainly instantiates the content template, if any.
+	 */
+	public function createChildControls()
+	{
+		$this->getControls()->clear();
+		if($this->_contentTemplate)
+			$this->_contentTemplate->instantiateIn($this);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Ensures child controls are created.
+	 * @param mixed event parameter
+	 */
+	public function onInit($param)
+	{
+		parent::onInit($param);
+		$this->ensureChildControls();
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template for the content of the wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function getContentTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_contentTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template for the content of the wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function setContentTemplate($value)
+	{
+		$this->_contentTemplate=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return ITemplate the template for displaying the navigation UI of a wizard step. Defaults to null.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigationTemplate()
+	{
+		return $this->_navigationTemplate;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param ITemplate the template for displaying the navigation UI of a wizard step.
+	 */
+	public function setNavigationTemplate($value)
+	{
+		$this->_navigationTemplate=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationContainer the control containing the navigation.
+	 * It could be null if no navigation template is specified.
+	 */
+	public function getNavigationContainer()
+	{
+		return $this->_navigationContainer;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Instantiates the navigation template if any
+	 */
+	public function instantiateNavigationTemplate()
+	{
+		if(!$this->_navigationContainer && $this->_navigationTemplate)
+		{
+			$this->_navigationContainer=new TWizardNavigationContainer;
+			$this->_navigationTemplate->instantiateIn($this->_navigationContainer);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TWizardStepCollection class.
+ *
+ * TWizardStepCollection represents the collection of wizard steps owned
+ * by a {@link TWizard}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardStepCollection extends TList
+{
+	/**
+	 * @var TWizard
+	 */
+	private $_wizard;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TWizard wizard that owns this collection
+	 */
+	public function __construct(TWizard $wizard)
+	{
+		$this->_wizard=$wizard;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Inserts an item at the specified position.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by checking if
+	 * the item being added is a {@link TWizardStep}.
+	 * @param integer the speicified position.
+	 * @param mixed new item
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataTypeException if the item being added is not TWizardStep.
+	 */
+	public function insertAt($index,$item)
+	{
+		if($item instanceof TWizardStep)
+		{
+			parent::insertAt($index,$item);
+			$this->_wizard->getMultiView()->getViews()->insertAt($index,$item);
+			$this->_wizard->addedWizardStep($item);
+		}
+		else
+			throw new TInvalidDataTypeException('wizardstepcollection_wizardstep_required');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Removes an item at the specified position.
+	 * @param integer the index of the item to be removed.
+	 * @return mixed the removed item.
+	 */
+	public function removeAt($index)
+	{
+		$step=parent::removeAt($index);
+		$this->_wizard->getMultiView()->getViews()->remove($step);
+		$this->_wizard->removedWizardStep($step);
+		return $step;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TWizardNavigationContainer class.
+ *
+ * TWizardNavigationContainer represents a control containing
+ * a wizard navigation. The navigation may contain a few buttons, including
+ * {@link getPreviousButton PreviousButton}, {@link getNextButton NextButton},
+ * {@link getCancelButton CancelButton}, {@link getCompleteButton CompleteButton}.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardNavigationContainer extends TControl implements INamingContainer
+{
+	private $_previousButton=null;
+	private $_nextButton=null;
+	private $_cancelButton=null;
+	private $_completeButton=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed the previous button
+	 */
+	public function getPreviousButton()
+	{
+		return $this->_previousButton;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed the previous button
+	 */
+	public function setPreviousButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->_previousButton=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed the next button
+	 */
+	public function getNextButton()
+	{
+		return $this->_nextButton;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed the next button
+	 */
+	public function setNextButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->_nextButton=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed the cancel button
+	 */
+	public function getCancelButton()
+	{
+		return $this->_cancelButton;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed the cancel button
+	 */
+	public function setCancelButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->_cancelButton=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return mixed the complete button
+	 */
+	public function getCompleteButton()
+	{
+		return $this->_completeButton;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param mixed the complete button
+	 */
+	public function setCompleteButton($value)
+	{
+		$this->_completeButton=$value;
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TWizardNavigationEventParameter class.
+ *
+ * TWizardNavigationEventParameter represents the parameter for
+ * {@link TWizard}'s navigation events.
+ *
+ * The index of the currently active step can be obtained from
+ * {@link getCurrentStepIndex CurrentStepIndex}, while the index
+ * of the candidate new step is in {@link getNextStepIndex NextStepIndex}.
+ * By modifying {@link setNextStepIndex NextStepIndex}, the new step
+ * can be changed to another one. If there is anything wrong with
+ * the navigation and it is not wanted, set {@link setCancelNavigation CancelNavigation}
+ * to true.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardNavigationEventParameter extends TEventParameter
+{
+	private $_cancel=false;
+	private $_currentStep;
+	private $_nextStep;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param integer current step index
+	 */
+	public function __construct($currentStep)
+	{
+		$this->_currentStep=$currentStep;
+		$this->_nextStep=$currentStep;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the currently active step.
+	 */
+	public function getCurrentStepIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_currentStep;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return integer the zero-based index of the next step. Default to {@link getCurrentStepIndex CurrentStepIndex}.
+	 */
+	public function getNextStepIndex()
+	{
+		return $this->_nextStep;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param integer the zero-based index of the next step.
+	 */
+	public function setNextStepIndex($index)
+	{
+		$this->_nextStep=TPropertyValue::ensureInteger($index);
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return boolean whether navigation to the next step should be canceled. Default to false.
+	 */
+	public function getCancelNavigation()
+	{
+		return $this->_cancel;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param boolean whether navigation to the next step should be canceled.
+	 */
+	public function setCancelNavigation($value)
+	{
+		$this->_cancel=TPropertyValue::ensureBoolean($value);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TWizardSideBarTemplate class.
+ * TWizardSideBarTemplate is the default template for wizard sidebar.
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardSideBarTemplate extends TComponent implements ITemplate
+{
+	/**
+	 * Instantiates the template.
+	 * It creates a {@link TDataList} control.
+	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
+	 */
+	public function instantiateIn($parent)
+	{
+		$dataList=new TDataList;
+		$dataList->setID(TWizard::ID_SIDEBAR_LIST);
+		$dataList->getSelectedItemStyle()->getFont()->setBold(true);
+		$dataList->setItemTemplate(new TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate);
+		$parent->getControls()->add($dataList);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate class.
+ * TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate is the default template for each item in the sidebar datalist.
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardSideBarListItemTemplate extends TComponent implements ITemplate
+{
+	/**
+	 * Instantiates the template.
+	 * It creates a {@link TLinkButton}.
+	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
+	 */
+	public function instantiateIn($parent)
+	{
+		$button=new TLinkButton;
+		$button->setID(TWizard::ID_SIDEBAR_BUTTON);
+		$parent->getControls()->add($button);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TWizardNavigationTemplate class.
+ * TWizardNavigationTemplate is the base class for various navigation templates.
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardNavigationTemplate extends TComponent implements ITemplate
+{
+	private $_wizard;
+
+	/**
+	 * Constructor.
+	 * @param TWizard the wizard owning this template
+	 */
+	public function __construct($wizard)
+	{
+		$this->_wizard=$wizard;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizard the wizard owning this template
+	 */
+	public function getWizard()
+	{
+		return $this->_wizard;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Instantiates the template.
+	 * Derived classes should override this method.
+	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
+	 */
+	public function instantiateIn($parent)
+	{
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Creates a navigation button.
+	 * It creates a {@link TButton}, {@link TLinkButton}, or {@link TImageButton},
+	 * depending on the given parameters.
+	 * @param TWizardNavigationButtonStyle button style
+	 * @param boolean whether the button should cause validation
+	 * @param string command name for the button's OnCommand event
+	 * @throws TInvalidDataValueException if the button type is not recognized
+	 */
+	protected function createNavigationButton($buttonStyle,$causesValidation,$commandName)
+	{
+		switch($buttonStyle->getButtonType())
+		{
+			case TWizardNavigationButtonType::Button:
+				$button=new TButton;
+				break;
+			case TWizardNavigationButtonType::Link:
+				$button=new TLinkButton;
+				break;
+			case TWizardNavigationButtonType::Image:
+				$button=new TImageButton;
+				$button->setImageUrl($buttonStyle->getImageUrl());
+				break;
+			default:
+				throw new TInvalidDataValueException('wizard_buttontype_unknown',$buttonStyle->getButtonType());
+		}
+		$button->setText($buttonStyle->getButtonText());
+		$button->setCausesValidation($causesValidation);
+		$button->setCommandName($commandName);
+		return $button;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TWizardStartNavigationTemplate class.
+ * TWizardStartNavigationTemplate is the template used as default wizard start navigation panel.
+ * It consists of two buttons, Next and Cancel.
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardStartNavigationTemplate extends TWizardNavigationTemplate
+{
+	/**
+	 * Instantiates the template.
+	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
+	 */
+	public function instantiateIn($parent)
+	{
+		$nextButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getStartNextButtonStyle(),true,TWizard::CMD_NEXT);
+		$cancelButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getCancelButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_CANCEL);
+
+		$controls=$parent->getControls();
+		$controls->add($nextButton);
+		$controls->add("\n");
+		$controls->add($cancelButton);
+
+		$parent->setNextButton($nextButton);
+		$parent->setCancelButton($cancelButton);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate class.
+ * TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate is the template used as default wizard finish navigation panel.
+ * It consists of three buttons, Previous, Complete and Cancel.
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardFinishNavigationTemplate extends TWizardNavigationTemplate
+{
+	/**
+	 * Instantiates the template.
+	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
+	 */
+	public function instantiateIn($parent)
+	{
+		$previousButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getFinishPreviousButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_PREVIOUS);
+		$completeButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getFinishCompleteButtonStyle(),true,TWizard::CMD_COMPLETE);
+		$cancelButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getCancelButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_CANCEL);
+
+		$controls=$parent->getControls();
+		$controls->add($previousButton);
+		$controls->add("\n");
+		$controls->add($completeButton);
+		$controls->add("\n");
+		$controls->add($cancelButton);
+
+		$parent->setPreviousButton($previousButton);
+		$parent->setCompleteButton($completeButton);
+		$parent->setCancelButton($cancelButton);
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * TWizardStepNavigationTemplate class.
+ * TWizardStepNavigationTemplate is the template used as default wizard step navigation panel.
+ * It consists of three buttons, Previous, Next and Cancel.
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardStepNavigationTemplate extends TWizardNavigationTemplate
+{
+	/**
+	 * Instantiates the template.
+	 * @param TControl parent to hold the content within the template
+	 */
+	public function instantiateIn($parent)
+	{
+		$previousButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getStepPreviousButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_PREVIOUS);
+		$nextButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getStepNextButtonStyle(),true,TWizard::CMD_NEXT);
+		$cancelButton=$this->createNavigationButton($this->getWizard()->getCancelButtonStyle(),false,TWizard::CMD_CANCEL);
+
+		$controls=$parent->getControls();
+		$controls->add($previousButton);
+		$controls->add("\n");
+		$controls->add($nextButton);
+		$controls->add("\n");
+		$controls->add($cancelButton);
+
+		$parent->setPreviousButton($previousButton);
+		$parent->setNextButton($nextButton);
+		$parent->setCancelButton($cancelButton);
+	}
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TWizardNavigationButtonType class.
+ * TWizardNavigationButtonType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of buttons
+ * that can be used in the navigation part of a {@link TWizard}.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Button: a regular click button
+ * - Image: an image button
+ * - Link: a hyperlink button
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TWizardNavigationButtonType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Button='Button';
+	const Image='Image';
+	const Link='Link';
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * TWizardStepType class.
+ * TWizardStepType defines the enumerable type for the possible types of {@link TWizard wizard} steps.
+ *
+ * The following enumerable values are defined:
+ * - Auto: the type is automatically determined based on the location of the wizard step in the whole step collection.
+ * - Complete: the step is the last summary step.
+ * - Start: the step is the first step
+ * - Step: the step is between the begin and the end steps.
+ * - Finish: the last step before the Complete step.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0.4
+ */
+class TWizardStepType extends TEnumerable
+{
+	const Auto='Auto';
+	const Complete='Complete';
+	const Start='Start';
+	const Step='Step';
+	const Finish='Finish';
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizardNavigationButtonStyle.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizardNavigationButtonStyle.php
index 0e05c556..c3b4b603 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizardNavigationButtonStyle.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/TWizardNavigationButtonStyle.php
@@ -1,155 +1,155 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * TWizardNavigationButtonStyle class file.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+<?php
+/**
+ * TWizardNavigationButtonStyle class file.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
  * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id $
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- */
-
-/**
- * Includes TStyle class file
- */
-Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TStyle');
-
-/**
- * TWizardNavigationButtonStyle class.
- * TWizardNavigationButtonStyle defines the style applied to a wizard navigation button.
- * The button type can be specified via {@link setButtonType ButtonType}, which
- * can be 'Button', 'Image' or 'Link'.
- * If the button is an image button, {@link setImageUrl ImageUrl} will be
- * used to load the image for the button.
- * Otherwise, {@link setButtonText ButtonText} will be displayed as the button caption.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
- * @since 3.0
- */
-class TWizardNavigationButtonStyle extends TStyle
-{
-	private $_imageUrl=null;
-	private $_buttonText=null;
-	private $_buttonType=null;
-
-	/**
-	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
-	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
-	 * resetting additional TWizardNavigationButtonStyle specific attributes.
-	 */
-	public function reset()
-	{
-		parent::reset();
-		$this->_imageUrl=null;
-		$this->_buttonText=null;
-		$this->_buttonType=null;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
-	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
-	 * in this style will be overwritten.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function copyFrom($style)
-	{
-		parent::copyFrom($style);
-		if($style instanceof TWizardNavigationButtonStyle)
-		{
-			if($this->_imageUrl===null && $style->_imageUrl!==null)
-				$this->_imageUrl=$style->_imageUrl;
-			if($this->_buttonText===null && $style->_buttonText!==null)
-				$this->_buttonText=$style->_buttonText;
-			if($this->_buttonType===null && $style->_buttonType!==null)
-				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Merges the style with a new one.
-	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
-	 * the new one.
-	 * @param TStyle the new style
-	 */
-	public function mergeWith($style)
-	{
-		parent::mergeWith($style);
-		if($style instanceof TWizardNavigationButtonStyle)
-		{
-			if($style->_imageUrl!==null)
-				$this->_imageUrl=$style->_imageUrl;
-			if($style->_buttonText!==null)
-				$this->_buttonText=$style->_buttonText;
-			if($style->_buttonType!==null)
-				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string image URL for the image button
-	 */
-	public function getImageUrl()
-	{
-		return $this->_imageUrl===null?'':$this->_imageUrl;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string image URL for the image button
-	 */
-	public function setImageUrl($value)
-	{
-		$this->_imageUrl=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return string button caption
-	 */
-	public function getButtonText()
-	{
-		return $this->_buttonText===null?'':$this->_buttonText;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param string button caption
-	 */
-	public function setButtonText($value)
-	{
-		$this->_buttonText=$value;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonType button type. Default to TWizardNavigationButtonType::Button.
-	 */
-	public function getButtonType()
-	{
-		return $this->_buttonType===null? TWizardNavigationButtonType::Button :$this->_buttonType;
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * @param TWizardNavigationButtonType button type.
-	 */
-	public function setButtonType($value)
-	{
-		$this->_buttonType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TWizardNavigationButtonType');
-	}
-
-	/**
-	 * Applies this style to the specified button
-	 * @param mixed button to be applied with this style
-	 */
-	public function apply($button)
-	{
-		if($button instanceof TImageButton)
-		{
-			if($button->getImageUrl()==='')
-				$button->setImageUrl($this->getImageUrl());
-		}
-		if($button->getText()==='')
-			$button->setText($this->getButtonText());
-		$button->getStyle()->mergeWith($this);
-	}
-}
-
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id $
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Includes TStyle class file
+ */
+Prado::using('System.Web.UI.WebControls.TStyle');
+
+/**
+ * TWizardNavigationButtonStyle class.
+ * TWizardNavigationButtonStyle defines the style applied to a wizard navigation button.
+ * The button type can be specified via {@link setButtonType ButtonType}, which
+ * can be 'Button', 'Image' or 'Link'.
+ * If the button is an image button, {@link setImageUrl ImageUrl} will be
+ * used to load the image for the button.
+ * Otherwise, {@link setButtonText ButtonText} will be displayed as the button caption.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls
+ * @since 3.0
+ */
+class TWizardNavigationButtonStyle extends TStyle
+{
+	private $_imageUrl=null;
+	private $_buttonText=null;
+	private $_buttonType=null;
+
+	/**
+	 * Sets the style attributes to default values.
+	 * This method overrides the parent implementation by
+	 * resetting additional TWizardNavigationButtonStyle specific attributes.
+	 */
+	public function reset()
+	{
+		parent::reset();
+		$this->_imageUrl=null;
+		$this->_buttonText=null;
+		$this->_buttonType=null;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Copies the fields in a new style to this style.
+	 * If a style field is set in the new style, the corresponding field
+	 * in this style will be overwritten.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function copyFrom($style)
+	{
+		parent::copyFrom($style);
+		if($style instanceof TWizardNavigationButtonStyle)
+		{
+			if($this->_imageUrl===null && $style->_imageUrl!==null)
+				$this->_imageUrl=$style->_imageUrl;
+			if($this->_buttonText===null && $style->_buttonText!==null)
+				$this->_buttonText=$style->_buttonText;
+			if($this->_buttonType===null && $style->_buttonType!==null)
+				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Merges the style with a new one.
+	 * If a style field is not set in this style, it will be overwritten by
+	 * the new one.
+	 * @param TStyle the new style
+	 */
+	public function mergeWith($style)
+	{
+		parent::mergeWith($style);
+		if($style instanceof TWizardNavigationButtonStyle)
+		{
+			if($style->_imageUrl!==null)
+				$this->_imageUrl=$style->_imageUrl;
+			if($style->_buttonText!==null)
+				$this->_buttonText=$style->_buttonText;
+			if($style->_buttonType!==null)
+				$this->_buttonType=$style->_buttonType;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string image URL for the image button
+	 */
+	public function getImageUrl()
+	{
+		return $this->_imageUrl===null?'':$this->_imageUrl;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string image URL for the image button
+	 */
+	public function setImageUrl($value)
+	{
+		$this->_imageUrl=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return string button caption
+	 */
+	public function getButtonText()
+	{
+		return $this->_buttonText===null?'':$this->_buttonText;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param string button caption
+	 */
+	public function setButtonText($value)
+	{
+		$this->_buttonText=$value;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @return TWizardNavigationButtonType button type. Default to TWizardNavigationButtonType::Button.
+	 */
+	public function getButtonType()
+	{
+		return $this->_buttonType===null? TWizardNavigationButtonType::Button :$this->_buttonType;
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * @param TWizardNavigationButtonType button type.
+	 */
+	public function setButtonType($value)
+	{
+		$this->_buttonType=TPropertyValue::ensureEnum($value,'TWizardNavigationButtonType');
+	}
+
+	/**
+	 * Applies this style to the specified button
+	 * @param mixed button to be applied with this style
+	 */
+	public function apply($button)
+	{
+		if($button instanceof TImageButton)
+		{
+			if($button->getImageUrl()==='')
+				$button->setImageUrl($this->getImageUrl());
+		}
+		if($button->getText()==='')
+			$button->setText($this->getButtonText());
+		$button->getStyle()->mergeWith($this);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/assets/captcha.php b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/assets/captcha.php
index b26df895..08a857b5 100644
--- a/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/assets/captcha.php
+++ b/framework/Web/UI/WebControls/assets/captcha.php
@@ -1,224 +1,224 @@
-<?php
-/**
- * CAPTCHA generator script.
- *
- * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
- * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
- * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
- * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
- * @version $Id$
- * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls.assets
- */
-
-define('THEME_OPAQUE_BACKGROUND',0x0001);
-define('THEME_NOISY_BACKGROUND',0x0002);
-define('THEME_HAS_GRID',0x0004);
-define('THEME_HAS_SCRIBBLE',0x0008);
-define('THEME_MORPH_BACKGROUND',0x0010);
-define('THEME_SHADOWED_TEXT',0x0020);
-
-require_once(dirname(__FILE__).'/captcha_key.php');
-
-$token='error';
-$theme=0;
-
-if(isset($_GET['options']))
-{
-	$str=base64_decode($_GET['options']);
-	if(strlen($str)>32)
-	{
-		$hash=substr($str,0,32);
-		$str=substr($str,32);
-		if(md5($privateKey.$str)===$hash)
-		{
-			$options=unserialize($str);
-			$publicKey=$options['publicKey'];
-			$tokenLength=$options['tokenLength'];
-			$caseSensitive=$options['caseSensitive'];
-			$alphabet=$options['alphabet'];
-			$fontSize=$options['fontSize'];
-			$theme=$options['theme'];
-			if(($randomSeed=$options['randomSeed'])>0)
-				srand($randomSeed);
-			else
-				srand((int)(microtime()*1000000));
-			$token=generateToken($publicKey,$privateKey,$alphabet,$tokenLength,$caseSensitive);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-displayToken($token,$fontSize,$theme);
-
-function generateToken($publicKey,$privateKey,$alphabet,$tokenLength,$caseSensitive)
-{
-	$token=substr(hash2string(md5($publicKey.$privateKey),$alphabet).hash2string(md5($privateKey.$publicKey),$alphabet),0,$tokenLength);
-	return $caseSensitive?$token:strtoupper($token);
-}
-
-function hash2string($hex,$alphabet)
-{
-	if(strlen($alphabet)<2)
-		$alphabet='234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT';
-	$hexLength=strlen($hex);
-	$base=strlen($alphabet);
-	$result='';
-	for($i=0;$i<$hexLength;$i+=6)
-	{
-		$number=hexdec(substr($hex,$i,6));
-		while($number)
-		{
-			$result.=$alphabet[$number%$base];
-			$number=floor($number/$base);
-		}
-	}
-	return $result;
-}
-
-function displayToken($token,$fontSize,$theme)
-{
-	if(($fontSize=(int)$fontSize)<22)
-		$fontSize=22;
-	if($fontSize>100)
-		$fontSize=100;
-	$length=strlen($token);
-	$padding=10;
-	$fontWidth=$fontSize;
-	$fontHeight=floor($fontWidth*1.5);
-	$width=$fontWidth*$length+$padding*2;
-	$height=$fontHeight;
-	$image=imagecreatetruecolor($width,$height);
-
-	addBackground
-	(
-		$image, $width, $height,
-		$theme&THEME_OPAQUE_BACKGROUND,
-		$theme&THEME_NOISY_BACKGROUND,
-		$theme&THEME_HAS_GRID,
-		$theme&THEME_HAS_SCRIBBLE,
-		$theme&THEME_MORPH_BACKGROUND
-	);
-
-	$font=dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'verase.ttf';
-
-	if(function_exists('imagefilter'))
-    	imagefilter($image,IMG_FILTER_GAUSSIAN_BLUR);
-
-	$hasShadow=($theme&THEME_SHADOWED_TEXT);
-    for($i=0;$i<$length;$i++)
-	{
-        $color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(150,220),rand(150,220),rand(150,220));
-        $size=rand($fontWidth-10,$fontWidth);
-        $angle=rand(-30,30);
-        $x=$padding+$i*$fontWidth;
-        $y=rand($fontHeight-15,$fontHeight-10);
-        imagettftext($image,$size,$angle,$x,$y,$color,$font,$token[$i]);
-        if($hasShadow)
-        	imagettftext($image,$size,$angle,$x+2,$y+2,$color,$font,$token[$i]);
-        imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
-    }
-	
-	header('Content-Type: image/png');
-	imagepng($image);
-	imagedestroy($image);
-}
-
-function addBackground($image,$width,$height,$opaque,$noisy,$hasGrid,$hasScribble,$morph)
-{
-	$background=imagecreatetruecolor($width*2,$height*2);
-	$white=imagecolorallocate($background,255,255,255);
-	imagefill($background,0,0,$white);
-
-	if($opaque)
-		imagefill($background,0,0,imagecolorallocate($background,100,100,100));
-
-	if($noisy)
-		addNoise($background,$width*2,$height*2);
-
-	if($hasGrid)
-		addGrid($background,$width*2,$height*2);
-
-	if($hasScribble)
-		addScribble($background,$width*2,$height*2);
-
-	if($morph)
-		morphImage($background,$width*2,$height*2);
-
-	imagecopy($image,$background,0,0,30,30,$width,$height);
-
-	if(!$opaque)
-		imagecolortransparent($image,$white);
-}
-
-function addNoise($image,$width,$height)
-{
-	for($x=0;$x<$width;++$x)
-	{
-		for($y=0;$y<$height;++$y)
-		{
-			if(rand(0,100)<25)
-			{
-				$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(150,220),rand(150,220),rand(150,220));
-				imagesetpixel($image,$x,$y,$color);
-	            imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
-	        }
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-function addGrid($image,$width,$height)
-{
-	for($i=0;$i<$width;$i+=rand(15,25))
-	{
-		imagesetthickness($image,rand(2,6));
-		$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(100,180),rand(100,180),rand(100,180));
-		imageline($image,$i+rand(-10,20),0,$i+rand(-10,20),$height,$color);
-		imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
-	}
-	for($i=0;$i<$height;$i+=rand(15,25))
-	{
-		imagesetthickness($image,rand(2,6));
-		$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(100,180),rand(100,180),rand(100,180));
-		imageline($image,0,$i+rand(-10,20),$width,$i+rand(-10,20),$color);
-		imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
-	}
-}
-
-function addScribble($image,$width,$height)
-{
-	for($i=0;$i<8;$i++)
-	{
-		$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(100,180),rand(100,180),rand(100,180));
-		$points=array();
-		for($j=1;$j<rand(5,10);$j++)
-		{
-			$points[]=rand(2*(20*($i+1)),2*(50*($i+1)));
-			$points[]=rand(30,$height+30);
-		}
-		imagesetthickness($image,rand(2,6));
-		imagepolygon($image,$points,intval(sizeof($points)/2),$color);
-		imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
-	}
-}
-
-function morphImage($image,$width,$height)
-{
-	$tempImage=imagecreatetruecolor($width,$height);
-	$chunk=rand(1,5);
-	for($x=$y=0;$x<$width;$x+=$chunk)
-	{
-		$chunk=rand(1,5);
-		$y+=rand(-1,1);
-		if($y>=$height)	$y=$height-5;
-		if($y<0) $y=5;
-		imagecopy($tempImage,$image,$x,0,$x,$y,$chunk,$height);
-	}
-	for($x=$y=0;$y<$height;$y+=$chunk)
-	{
-		$chunk=rand(1,5);
-		$x+=rand(-1,1);
-		if($x>=$width)	$x=$width-5;
-		if($x<0) $x=5;
-		imagecopy($image,$tempImage,$x,$y,0,$y,$width,$chunk);
-	}
-}
-
+<?php
+/**
+ * CAPTCHA generator script.
+ *
+ * @author Qiang Xue <qiang.xue@gmail.com>
+ * @link http://www.pradosoft.com/
+ * @copyright Copyright &copy; 2005-2012 PradoSoft
+ * @license http://www.pradosoft.com/license/
+ * @version $Id$
+ * @package System.Web.UI.WebControls.assets
+ */
+
+define('THEME_OPAQUE_BACKGROUND',0x0001);
+define('THEME_NOISY_BACKGROUND',0x0002);
+define('THEME_HAS_GRID',0x0004);
+define('THEME_HAS_SCRIBBLE',0x0008);
+define('THEME_MORPH_BACKGROUND',0x0010);
+define('THEME_SHADOWED_TEXT',0x0020);
+
+require_once(dirname(__FILE__).'/captcha_key.php');
+
+$token='error';
+$theme=0;
+
+if(isset($_GET['options']))
+{
+	$str=base64_decode($_GET['options']);
+	if(strlen($str)>32)
+	{
+		$hash=substr($str,0,32);
+		$str=substr($str,32);
+		if(md5($privateKey.$str)===$hash)
+		{
+			$options=unserialize($str);
+			$publicKey=$options['publicKey'];
+			$tokenLength=$options['tokenLength'];
+			$caseSensitive=$options['caseSensitive'];
+			$alphabet=$options['alphabet'];
+			$fontSize=$options['fontSize'];
+			$theme=$options['theme'];
+			if(($randomSeed=$options['randomSeed'])>0)
+				srand($randomSeed);
+			else
+				srand((int)(microtime()*1000000));
+			$token=generateToken($publicKey,$privateKey,$alphabet,$tokenLength,$caseSensitive);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+displayToken($token,$fontSize,$theme);
+
+function generateToken($publicKey,$privateKey,$alphabet,$tokenLength,$caseSensitive)
+{
+	$token=substr(hash2string(md5($publicKey.$privateKey),$alphabet).hash2string(md5($privateKey.$publicKey),$alphabet),0,$tokenLength);
+	return $caseSensitive?$token:strtoupper($token);
+}
+
+function hash2string($hex,$alphabet)
+{
+	if(strlen($alphabet)<2)
+		$alphabet='234578adefhijmnrtABDEFGHJLMNRT';
+	$hexLength=strlen($hex);
+	$base=strlen($alphabet);
+	$result='';
+	for($i=0;$i<$hexLength;$i+=6)
+	{
+		$number=hexdec(substr($hex,$i,6));
+		while($number)
+		{
+			$result.=$alphabet[$number%$base];
+			$number=floor($number/$base);
+		}
+	}
+	return $result;
+}
+
+function displayToken($token,$fontSize,$theme)
+{
+	if(($fontSize=(int)$fontSize)<22)
+		$fontSize=22;
+	if($fontSize>100)
+		$fontSize=100;
+	$length=strlen($token);
+	$padding=10;
+	$fontWidth=$fontSize;
+	$fontHeight=floor($fontWidth*1.5);
+	$width=$fontWidth*$length+$padding*2;
+	$height=$fontHeight;
+	$image=imagecreatetruecolor($width,$height);
+
+	addBackground
+	(
+		$image, $width, $height,
+		$theme&THEME_OPAQUE_BACKGROUND,
+		$theme&THEME_NOISY_BACKGROUND,
+		$theme&THEME_HAS_GRID,
+		$theme&THEME_HAS_SCRIBBLE,
+		$theme&THEME_MORPH_BACKGROUND
+	);
+
+	$font=dirname(__FILE__).DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR.'verase.ttf';
+
+	if(function_exists('imagefilter'))
+    	imagefilter($image,IMG_FILTER_GAUSSIAN_BLUR);
+
+	$hasShadow=($theme&THEME_SHADOWED_TEXT);
+    for($i=0;$i<$length;$i++)
+	{
+        $color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(150,220),rand(150,220),rand(150,220));
+        $size=rand($fontWidth-10,$fontWidth);
+        $angle=rand(-30,30);
+        $x=$padding+$i*$fontWidth;
+        $y=rand($fontHeight-15,$fontHeight-10);
+        imagettftext($image,$size,$angle,$x,$y,$color,$font,$token[$i]);
+        if($hasShadow)
+        	imagettftext($image,$size,$angle,$x+2,$y+2,$color,$font,$token[$i]);
+        imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
+    }
+	
+	header('Content-Type: image/png');
+	imagepng($image);
+	imagedestroy($image);
+}
+
+function addBackground($image,$width,$height,$opaque,$noisy,$hasGrid,$hasScribble,$morph)
+{
+	$background=imagecreatetruecolor($width*2,$height*2);
+	$white=imagecolorallocate($background,255,255,255);
+	imagefill($background,0,0,$white);
+
+	if($opaque)
+		imagefill($background,0,0,imagecolorallocate($background,100,100,100));
+
+	if($noisy)
+		addNoise($background,$width*2,$height*2);
+
+	if($hasGrid)
+		addGrid($background,$width*2,$height*2);
+
+	if($hasScribble)
+		addScribble($background,$width*2,$height*2);
+
+	if($morph)
+		morphImage($background,$width*2,$height*2);
+
+	imagecopy($image,$background,0,0,30,30,$width,$height);
+
+	if(!$opaque)
+		imagecolortransparent($image,$white);
+}
+
+function addNoise($image,$width,$height)
+{
+	for($x=0;$x<$width;++$x)
+	{
+		for($y=0;$y<$height;++$y)
+		{
+			if(rand(0,100)<25)
+			{
+				$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(150,220),rand(150,220),rand(150,220));
+				imagesetpixel($image,$x,$y,$color);
+	            imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
+	        }
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+function addGrid($image,$width,$height)
+{
+	for($i=0;$i<$width;$i+=rand(15,25))
+	{
+		imagesetthickness($image,rand(2,6));
+		$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(100,180),rand(100,180),rand(100,180));
+		imageline($image,$i+rand(-10,20),0,$i+rand(-10,20),$height,$color);
+		imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
+	}
+	for($i=0;$i<$height;$i+=rand(15,25))
+	{
+		imagesetthickness($image,rand(2,6));
+		$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(100,180),rand(100,180),rand(100,180));
+		imageline($image,0,$i+rand(-10,20),$width,$i+rand(-10,20),$color);
+		imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
+	}
+}
+
+function addScribble($image,$width,$height)
+{
+	for($i=0;$i<8;$i++)
+	{
+		$color=imagecolorallocate($image,rand(100,180),rand(100,180),rand(100,180));
+		$points=array();
+		for($j=1;$j<rand(5,10);$j++)
+		{
+			$points[]=rand(2*(20*($i+1)),2*(50*($i+1)));
+			$points[]=rand(30,$height+30);
+		}
+		imagesetthickness($image,rand(2,6));
+		imagepolygon($image,$points,intval(sizeof($points)/2),$color);
+		imagecolordeallocate($image,$color);
+	}
+}
+
+function morphImage($image,$width,$height)
+{
+	$tempImage=imagecreatetruecolor($width,$height);
+	$chunk=rand(1,5);
+	for($x=$y=0;$x<$width;$x+=$chunk)
+	{
+		$chunk=rand(1,5);
+		$y+=rand(-1,1);
+		if($y>=$height)	$y=$height-5;
+		if($y<0) $y=5;
+		imagecopy($tempImage,$image,$x,0,$x,$y,$chunk,$height);
+	}
+	for($x=$y=0;$y<$height;$y+=$chunk)
+	{
+		$chunk=rand(1,5);
+		$x+=rand(-1,1);
+		if($x>=$width)	$x=$width-5;
+		if($x<0) $x=5;
+		imagecopy($image,$tempImage,$x,$y,0,$y,$width,$chunk);
+	}
+}
+
author	ctrlaltca <>	2012-07-12 11:21:01 +0000
committer	ctrlaltca <>	2012-07-12 11:21:01 +0000
commit	903ae8a581fac1e6917fc3e31d2ad8fb91df80c3 (patch)
tree	e08bf04f0823650a231227ac3499121270172a23 /framework/Web/UI/WebControls
parent	3e4e6e66aeb3f8fea4e1eb4237498ef9d2358f63 (diff)